■ 



PC 2109 
.L7 
1834 
Copy 1 





^a&WPill 



w S^ \^n ^ ^/j ^fl 



-«WMU 



ym 



PlMAMffiUl 



BMMM 



'ratg ^ $*n$xtM. 



UNITED STATES^OF AMERICA7 



1 > 



*mg&uv&A 



WWWWC/( 






jMisa^tteg 



^W^^^^g^ 



•C^v 



V^MW 



MoMmm^ 



'raifcarc^ 






TW« 



AyWi 






- v- ^ . ,, WaV W W 



'^C^ 



ywu 



MMP 



Mywy 



,^u 






■. w :yMMyi 



Jl 



THE FOLLOWING WORKS, 
BY A. BOL3IAR, 

May be had from any of the principal Booksellers in the 
United States, 

1st. A Collection of One Hundred Fables, with 
two Keys, one for the literal and free translation, and 
the other for the pronunciation of the French text. 

2d. Les Aventures de Telemaque, with a key for 
the literal and free translation of the first eight books, 
and intended as a sequel to the Fables. 

3d. A Collection of Colloquial Phrases, on 
every topic necessary to maintain conversation ; ar- 
ranged under different heads ; with numerous remarks 
on the peculiar pronunciation and use of various words. 
The whole so disposed as considerably to facilitate the 
acquisition of a correct pronunciation of the French. 

4th. A Complete Treatise on the Genders of 
French Nouns ; in a small pamphlet of 14 pages. 
This little work, which is the most complete of the 
kind, is the fruit of great labour, and will prove of im- 
mense service to every learner. 

5th. All the French Verbs, both Regular and Ir- 
regular, in a small volume. 

The verbs etre to be, avoir to have, parler to speak, finir to finish, recevotr 
to receive, vendre to sell, se lever to rise, se Men porter to be well, s'en aller to 
go away, are there all conjugated through — affirmatively — negatively — inter- 
rogatively — and negatively and interrogatively — an arrangement which will 
greatly facilitate the scholar in his learning the French verbs, and which will 
save the master the trouble of explaining over and over again what may be 
much more easily learned from, books, thus leaving him more time to give his 
pupil, during the lesson, that instruction which cannot be found in books, but 
which must be learned from a master. 

6th. The Institute of Morality, for the instruc- 
tion of youth, with numerous Scriptural references, by 
questions and answers. Translated by Eli K. Price 
and A. Bolmar. 

1 



A KEY to the exercises of this Grammar will short- 
ly be published. 

That Key will be so arranged as to suit equally well 
this present edition of Levizac's, or the edition sold 
previous to the publishing of this one. 






A 

THEORETICAL AND PRACTICAL 

GRAMMAR 

OF THE 

FRENCH LANGUAGE; 



THE PRESENT USAGE IS DISPLAYED AGREEABLY TO THE DECISIONS OP 
THE FRENCH ACADExMY. BY M. DE LEVIZAC. 

WITH 

NUMEROUS CORRECTIONS AND IMPROVEMENTS, 

AND WITH THE ADDITION OF 

A COMPLETE TREATISE 

ON TUK 

GENDERS OF FRENCH NOUNS, 

AS ALSO WITH THE ADDITION OF 

ALL THE FRENCH VERBS, 

BOTH REGULAR AND IRREGULAR, CONJUGATED AFFIRMATIVELY— NEGATIVELT 
— INTERE.OGAT1VELY — AND NEGATIVELY AND INTERROGATIVELY. 



BY A. BOLMAR, 



PRINCIPAL OF THE WEST CHESTER ACADEMY, AND AUTHOR OF SEVERAL WORKS TO 
FACILITATE THE ACQUIREMENT OF THE FRENCH LANGUAGE. 




E. L. CAREY & A. HART. 

SOLD BY GRIGG & ELLIOTT, HOGAN & THOMPSON, DESILVER & THOMAS, AND 

J. laval, Philadelphia. — c. de behr, berard & mondon, and r. lockwood, 
New York. — allen & ticknor, and hilliard, gray & co., Boston. — carey, 
hart & co., Baltimore. — p. Thompson, Washington. — r. j. smith, Richmond. 
— c. hall, and e. p. nash, Norfolk, Va. — w. h. berrett, Charleston. — w. 
mckean, d. c. hotckkiss & co., and g. brusle, New Orleans. — A. FLASH, 
Cincinnati, 






X~*\ 



Entered according to the act of the Congress of the United States, 
A. D. 1834, by Anthony Bolmar, in the office of the Clerk of the 
Eastern District of Pennsylvania. 



// 



V V 





A 












C* 


* 


M 



CONTENTS. 



PAGE 

Names of the French Letters 1 

Observation on the French Letters 1 

Sounds of the French Letters 2 

Table of the Simple Sounds of Vowels 7 

Table of Dipthongs 8 

Observation on the Pronunciation of a in mare and e in mere 10 

Pronunciation and Accentuation 11 

Introduction to the Exercises 12 

Elision or Apostrophe, &c 14 

Words alike in both Languages 16 

English Words which become French by changing their Termina- 
tion 17 



PART I. 

OF WORDS CONSIDERED IN THEIR NATURE AND IN- 
FLECTIONS. 

CHAPTER I. 

Of the Substantive or Noun ' 18 

Of Genders 19 

List of Nouns ending with eur for the masculine, and eure for the 

feminine 32 

List of Nouns ending with ear for the masculine, and rice for the 

feminine . . 36 

List of Nouns ending with eur for the masculine, and which form 

their feminine variously 38 

Of Numbers 39 

Formation of the plural of French Substantives or Nouns 39 

Formation of the plural of Compound Nouns 41 

CHAPTER II. 

Of the Definite Article 41 

Elision of the Article 42 

Contraction of the Article 43 

Cases in which Contraction does not take place 43 

General Rule of the Article 44 

Of the Article in a Partitive Sense 45 

CHAPTER III. 

Of the Adjective 46 

Of the Formation of the Feminine of French Adjectives 46 

Of the Formation of the plural of the French Adjectives 51 

Of the Degrees of Signification of French Adjectives 54 

iii 



IV CONTENTS. 

Page 

Of the Positive * 54 

Of the Comparative of Superiority 54 

Of the Comparative of Inferiority 54 

Of the Comparative of Equality 55 

Observations on JVLeilleur, JVLoindre, and Pire 55 

Of the Superlative 56 

Of the Superlative Absolute 56 

Of the Superlative Relative 56 

Agreement of the Adjective with the Substantive 57 

When the Adjective relates to two Substantives Singular of the same 

Gender 57 

When the Adjective relates to two Substantives Singular of differ- 
ent Genders 58 

Nouns and Adjectives of Number 58 

Observations on several Numerical Adjectives 60 

CHAPTER IV. 

Of the Pronouns 61 

Of the Personal Pronouns 61 

Pronouns of the 1 st Person 61 

Pronouns of the 2d Person 62 

Pronouns of the 3d Person 63 

Reflected and Reciprocal Pronouns 64 

Of the Relative Pronoun en 65 

Of the Relative Pronoun t 66 

Of Possessive Pronouns 66 

Pronominal Adjectives relating to one Person expressed 67 

Pronominal Adjectives relating to many Persons expressed 67 

Pronominal Adjectives relating to one Person understood 68 

Pronominal Adjectives relating to many Persons understood 68 

Of the Relative Pronouns 69 

Of Pronouns Absolute h 69 

Of Demonstrative Pronouns 70 

Of Indefinite Pronouns 71 

Of Indefinite Pronouns of the 1st Class 71 

Of Indefinite Pronouns of the 2d Class 72 

Of Indefinite Pronouns of the 3d Class 73 

Of Indefinite Pronouns of the 4th Class 73 

CHAPTER V. 

Of the Verbs 74 

(Xj* See at the end of the Verbs for a Table of the Contents of the 
part containing the Verbs, 

Exercises on Avoir to have Affirmatively 74 

Exercises on Avoir to have Negatively 77 

Exercises on Avoir to have Interrogatively 79 

Exercises on Avoir to have Interrogatively and Negatively 79 

Exercises on Eire to be 80 

Exercises on the 1st Conjugation in er 83 

Exercises on the 2d Conjugation in ir 87 

Exercises on the 3d Conjugation in om 89 

Exercises on the 4th Conjugation in re 91 



CONTENTS. T 

PAQS 

Of the Pronominal Verbs 94 

Of the Passive Verbs 97 

Of the Neuter Verbs 98 

Of the Impersonal or Unipersonal Verbs 98 

Of the Verb falloir 99 

Of the Verb y avoir 99 

Exercises on the Irregular Verbs of the 1st Conjugation 100 

Exercises on the Irregular Verbs of the 2d Conjugation 100 

Exercises of the Irregular Verbs of the 3d Conjugation 103 

Exercises on the Irregular Verbs of the 4th Conjugation 105 

CHAPTER VI. 

Of the Prepositions 1 10 

Of the Prepositions denoting Place 110 

Of the Prepositions denoting Order Ill 

Of the Prepositions denoting Union Ill 

. Of the Prepositions denoting Opposition 112 

Of the Prepositions denoting Derivation 112 

Of the Prepositions denoting the End 112 

Of the Preposition denoting the Cause and Means 113 

Of the Preposition a 113 

Of the Preposition de 1 14 

Of the Preposition en 1 14 

CHAPTER VII. 

Of the Adverbs 115 

CHAPTER VIII. 

Of the Conjunctions 119 

CHAPTER IX. 

Of Interjections ••••••... 122 



PART II. 

SYNTAX, 

OR WORDS CONSIDERED IN THEIR CONSTRUCTION. 

CHAPTER I. 

Of the Substantive 123 

Of Compound Nouns 123 

CHAPTER II. 

Of the Article 124 

A Comparative Table on the use of the Article 125 

On Measure and Weight. 127 



VI CONTENTS. 

CHAPTER III. 

TlGE 

Of the Adjectives 128 

Difference of Construction between the English and French Lan- 
guages 129 

Kegimen of the Adjectives » 130 

Promiscuous Exercises 130 

CHAPTER IV. 

Of the Pronouns 131 

Of the Personal Pronouns 131 

Of the Place of Personal Pronouns 131 

Of Personal Pronouns used as Subject 131 

Of Personal Pronouns used as Regimen 133 

Of the Relative Pronouns 135 

Of Pronouns Absolute 138 

Of Demonstrative Pronouns 140 

Of Indefinite Pronouns 141 

Of Indefinite Pronouns 1 st Class 141 

Of Indefinite Pronouns 2d Ciass 144 

Of Indefinite Pronouns 3d Class 145 

Of Indefinite Pronouns 4th Class 149 

A General Exercise on the Pronouns 151 

CHAPTER V. 

Of the Verb 153 

Agreement of the Verb with the Subject 1 53 

O the Regimen of Verbs 1 54 

Of the Nature and Use of Moods and Tenses 157 

Of the Indicative 157 

Of the Conditional 160 

Of the Imperative 160 

Of the Subjunctive 161 

Of the Infinitive 162 

Of the Participle 1 62 

Of the Participle present 162 

Of the Participle past 163 

Agreement of the Participle past with its Subject 163 

Agreement of the Participle past with its Regimen 165 

CHAPTER VI. 

Of the Adverbs 168 

Situation of the Adverbs , 168 

CHAPTER VII. 

Of the Conjunction « 170 

Of the Conjunction que 170 

Government of Conjunctions 171 

Conjunctions that are followed by an Infinitive 171 

Conjunctions that are followed by the Indicative 172 

Conjunctions that are followed by the Subjunctive 173 

Promiscuous Exercises on the nine Parts of Speech 173 



CONTENTS. Vll 

PART III. 

PAGE 

Idioms, or Words considered in their particular Rules . . . 177 

CHAPTER I. 

Of the Substantive 177 

CHAPTER II. 

Of the Article 1 79 

Cases in which the Article is to be used 1 79 

Cases in which the Article is not used 183 

CHAPTER III. 

Of the Adjectives 187 

Of the Adjective with the Article 187 

The Place of the Adjectives 189 

Regimen of the Adjectives 191 

Adjectives of Number 192 

CHAPTER IV. 

Of the Pronouns 1 94 

Of the Personal Pronouns 194 

Office of Personal Pronouns 194 

On the Pronoun soi 198 

Cases in which the Pronouns elle, elles, eux, lui, leur, may- 
apply to thinge 199 

Difficulty respecting the Pronoun le explained 201 

Repetition of the Personal Pronouns 203 

Relation of the Pronouns of the 3d person to a Noun as expressed 

before 205 

Possessive Pronouns 206 

Explanation of some difficulties attendant on the Use of the Pos- 
sessive Pronouns 206 

Relative Pronouns 210 

Of q_ui % 210 

Of qjte 212 

Of leqjtel and DONT 213 

Of Q.U01 214 

Of ou 214 

Absolute Pronouns 215 

Demonstrative Pronouns 216 

CHAPTER V. 

Pronouns Indefinite J 220 

Of on J 220 

Of qjciconqjje 220 

Of chacun 220 

Of personne , 221 

Of l'un et l' autre , 222 



Vlll CONTENTS. 

PAGE 

Of nt lVn si l' autre 222 

Of tout and rien 222 

Of auELQjjE — q,ue and qjjel q.ue 223 

CHAPTER VI. 

Of the Verb 225 

Agreement of the Verb with the Subject 225 

Of the Collective Partitive 226 

Place of the Subject with regard to the Verb 227 

Government of the Verbs 230 

On the use Proper or Accidental of Moods and Tenses 232 

Of the Indicative 232 

Of the Conditional 238 

Remark on the use of the Conditional and Future 239 

Of the Subjunctive 240 

Relations between the Tenses of the Indicative 242 

Relations between the Tenses of the Subjunctive and the Indicative 244 

Further Observations upon the Conditional and Subjunctive 247 

Relations between the Tenses of the different Moods 248 

Relations of the Indicative 248 

Relations to the Conditional and of the Conditional 249 

Relations of the Present and Future Absolute, &c 249 

Principal Relations with the Subjunctive 250 

Of the Infinitive 251 

CHAPTER VII. 

Of Prepositions 253 

Of the Use of the Article with Prepositions 254 

Repetition of the Prepositions 255 

Of the Government of Prepositions 256 

CHAPTER VIII. 

Of the Adverbs 257 

Of the Negative ne 257 

Of the Place of the Negatives 257 

Of the Use of pas and point 257 

When may both pas and point be omitted 258 

When ought both pas and point to be omitted 259 

Of plus and davantage* 262 

CHAPTER IX. 

Of Grammatical Construction 263 

Of Inversion 267 

Of the Ellipsis 268 

Of the Pleonasm 268 

Of the Sy|epsis 269 

CHAPTER X. 

Of Grammatical Discordances 269 

Of Amphibologies 270 

Of Gallicisms .....,,., , 271 



CONTENTS. IX 

PAGE 

Free Exercises 275 

Phrases 283 

Examples of Phrases on the principal Difficulties of the French 

Language 283 

On the Collective Partitive 283 

On some Verbs which cannot be conjugated with Avoir to have. . . 283 

On Words of Quantity 283 

On the Personal Pronouns 284 

On soi, lui, soi-meme, and lui-meme 284 

On the Relative Pronouns 284 

On the Demonstrative Pronouns 285 

On the verb Avoir to have employed Impersonally 286 

Promiscuous Phrases 287 

Phrases in, which the Article is used 288 

Phrases in which the Article is omitted 289 

Phrases on the Pronoun le 290 

Phrases on the Participle Past 291 

Phrases on the Relations of Moods and Tenses 991 

Phrases on the Negative ne 292 

Phrases on some Delicacies of the French Language 294 



EXPLANATION 

Of the Abbreviations and Signs used in this Grammar. 



h. when the letter h at the beginning of a word is followed by a (.) 
period, it shows that h is mute in that word, 

m. after or in the place of a French word, shows the word to be mas- 
culine, 

f. after or in the place of a French word, shows the word to befemi- 
nine. 

pi. under an English word or after a French one, shows that that French 
word is to be put in the plural, though the corresponding English 
word is in the singular. 

art. put before a French word indicates that the definite article must be 
put before that word., though there is no article before the correspond- 
ing English word. 

* an asterisk (*) under an English word, means that that word is not 
to be expressed in French. 

When under an English word there is neither a French word or an *, 
it means that the French of that word has already been given in some 
previous exercise, or is to be Frenchified according to the directions given 
page 16th and 17th. 

The Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, &c. placed before French words, show the or- 
der in which they must be placed in writing down the French exercises. 
If the Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, &c. are placed before English words, they show 
the order in which the corresponding French words must be placed in 
writing down the French exercises. 

When several English words are put between a parenthesis (), they 
are all expressed by the French word or words placed under them. 

The letters a. b. c. d., &c. placed under an English verb, shows the 
tense in which the French corresponding verb must be put. 



GRAMMAR 



OF THE 



FRENCH LANGUAGE. 



1. French Grammar is the art that teaches how to speak 
and write the French Language with propriety. 

2. The French alphabet consists of twenty-five letters : 

3. Of the Names of French Letters. 

a, b, c, d, e, f, gt, h, i, jt, k, 1, m, n, o, p, qt, 

ah, bay, say, day, a, eff,*zhay, ash, e*zhee, kali, el, em, en, o, pay, Jcu, 
r, s, t, ut ; v, x, y, z. 
air, ess, tay, u, vay, eeks, ee-greck, zed. 

f 4. The names of letters thus marked, f cannot be given with precision, 
and must be learned from a teacher. 

5. Letters are either vowels or consonants. 

6. A vowel is a letter that forms a perfect sound when 
uttered by itself. 

7. There are in French six vowels : a, e, i, o, u, y. 

8. The letter y is by some considered as a consonant, but as it lias 
the sound of i and often of two i J s, it is preferable to call it a vowel. 

9. A consonant is a letter that forms but an imperfect sound 
when uttered by itself. 

10. There are 19 consonants, b, c, d, f, g, h, j, k, 1, m, n, 
p, q, r, s, t, v, x, z. 

11. The letter w which is named in French double vay, does not be- 
long- to the French alphabet, it is never met with in French books, except 
in foreign words. 

12. Of the Sounds of the French Letters. 

The sound of a letter, or of a combination of letters, must not 
be confounded with the name of the letter or letters ; for instance 
in English, the letter a, which is named ay, has several sounds, 
as heard in fate, far, fat, fall, what; the name of d, in English, 
is dee, and its sound, that heard at the beginning and at the 
end of the word dead when pronounced. The letters sh, are 

* Zh in the name of g and j are pronounced like 2, glazier. 

a 1 



2 THE SOUNDS 

named, in English, ess, and aitch, and their sound, when to- 
gether, is that heard in she, pronounced sh-e. The same 
might be said of other letters, and combinations of letters. 

13. Of the Sounds of the French Simple Vowels. 
a, sounds like-a in at, fat, mat, rat, marry, flat. 

a, sounds like-a in arm, barn, far, dart, part, mark, 
e sounds like-u in tub, bum, gust, lurk, rust, dusk, 
e, sounds like-a in ale, bale, cave, dale, fate, game, 
e, sounds like-a in mare, fare, or ai in air, pair, fair.* 
e, sounds like-e in there, where. f 
i, sounds like-i in idiom, dip, kit, big. tin, pin. 
i, sounds like-eein eel, bee, deer, keel, reed, peer, 
o, sounds like-o in opera, not, crop, frog, prop, trot. 
6, sounds like-o in over, more, no, bone, rope, note, 
ut, sounds neither like u as heard in tube, nor u as heard in 
bull. 

14. It has nearly the sound of w in the word twenty, in which this letter 
is not pronounced so full as in other words. In order to pronounce u, let 
the pupil pronounce the English letter e ; then, without changing the posi- 
tion of his organs, let him close his lips a little more than for the e, and 
articulate the sound of the French u. 

lit, has the same sound as the above, only a little longer. 
y, sounds like i, in idiom, dip, bit, big. 
y, sometimes sounds like two i's. 

y, sometimes has the sound of y in yard, year, and may then 
be considered as a consonant. 

15. Of the Sounds of the French Compound Vowels. 

eu, sounds like u in muff, cuff, puff. 

eut, has the same sound as the above, only much longer. 

eur, that is eu followed by r sounds exactly like ur in blur, fur. 

ou, sounds like oo in too, or u in bull, foil, pull. 

oil, sounds like oo in fool, moon, cool, mood. 

16. Of the Sounds of the French Nasal Vowels. 

ant, sounds nearly like an in rang, sang, sprang, hang. 
int, sounds nearly like en in strength, strengthen, length, 
ont, sounds nearly like on in wrong, long. 
unt, sounds nearly like un in clung, hung, rung, sung. 

17. Of the Compound Sounds t of ox, oi. 

oit, sounds nearly like o in opera and a in at, put together; 
as boiter, to limp — pronounce boa te. 

* See page 10. f When there and where are pronounced with great emphasis. 



OF THE FRENCH LANGUAGE. 6 

oit, sounds nearly like o in opera and a in arm, put together; 
as bo*te, a box — pronounce boat, or like wa in loater. 

f 18. All these sounds, and particularly those marked t, will be better 
learned from a master than from any direction ; however, an intelligent 
person may, from the above directions, learn enough of the pronunciation to 
make himself perfectly understood. 

19. Of the Sounds of the French Consonants. 

b, sounds like b in oad, ru6, bed, mob. 

c, before a consonant sounds like k in key, kite. 
c, before a, o, or u, sounds, like k in key, kite. 
c, before e, i, sounds like s in sat, seat. 

9, that is c with a cedilla before a, o, or u, sounds like s in 
sat, seat. 

c, sounds like g in second and its compounds. 
ch, sounds like sh in s/md, das/i. 

ch, sometimes sounds like k in kick. 

d, sounds like d in dead, den, bad, rod, did. 

d, sometimes takes the sound of t at the end of words, when 
followed by a word beginning with a vowel, to which 
it must be joined, if the meaning of the sentence re- 
quires it. 

f, sounds like / in /it, /an, i/, cal/, /or. 

f, sometimes takes the sound of v, at the end of words, when 

followed by a word beginning with a vowel, to which 
it must be joined, if the meaning of the sentence re- 
quires it. 

g, before a consonant sounds like g in g&g. 
g, before a, o, or ?/, sounds like g in g&g. 

g, sometimes takes the sound of k in kick, when followed by 
a word beginning with a vowel, to which it must be 
joined, u, after g is very seldom pronounced, 
g, before e or i, sounds like j. (See that sound.) 
gn, sounds like ni in u/?ion, pi/iion, miwion, o?2ion. 

20. Pay great attention to the pronunciation of this combination of let- 
ters, for it is difficult ; and hence it is not uncommon, even in France, to hear 
magnifique, fyc. pronounced as if spelt ma-ni-jique. The same sound in the 
Italian language is represented by the same letters gn, and in the Spanish 
by n. There are a few words in the French language, in which gn are 
sounded as g and n, as in magnttique, pronounced mag-ne-tique. 

h, there are two kinds of h, one silent, the other aspirated. 

31. But in either case it has no sound; (such is also the case with the 
Italian and Spanish language.) By aspiration is not meant, in French, as 
in English, a forcible breathing, as heard in high, horse, house, &c. The 
best proof of this, is the difficulty which every Frenchman lias to pronounce 
the English aspirated A, even after a number of years' practice. Beside* 



4 THE SOUNDS 

my own observation, as a native of France, I can here mention L'Abbe 
d'Olivet, whose opinion and writings are for us, what Walker's are for an 
Englishman. He says, in speaking of the aspiration of the Greek and 
German languages, the French language, which always aims at softness 
and euphony, attributes no other effect to the aspiration of the h, than that 
of communicating to the vowel, following the said aspirated h, the pro- 
perty of a consonant ; that is, to prevent the elision of the final vowel of the 
preceding word. For instance, le hero's, in which the h is called aspirated, 
is pronounced le-e-ro, and not le-ro, as would be the case with Vheritier. in 
which the h is called mute, and which is pronounced U-ri-tie, and not 
le-e-ri-tie. The aspirated h, prevents, also, the final consonant of the 
word that precedes it, from being connected with the vowel which follows 
it ; for instance plus haut, in which h is called aspirated, is pronounced 
plu 6 and not plu zd ; while plus honorable, in which h is mute, is 
pronounced plu-zo-no-rable and not plu-o-no-rable. Again, des auteurs 
some authors — is pronounced de-zd-teur, and des hauteurs some heights — is 
pronounced de-o-leur; the only difference in the pronunciation of the above 
two expressions, merely consists in joining the s of des to auteurs 
authors — whereas it must not be done to hauteurs heights. From my ac- 
quaintance with the English pronunciation, I am confident that if Boyer, 
Chambaud, &c, from whom all others have copied this error, without taking 
the trouble of ascertaining the fact, had been well acquainted with the nature 
of the English aspirated h, they would never have assimilated thd 
French to it. 

j, sounds like s in pleasure, or like z in glazier, azure. 

22. The sound of which letter is represented by Walker by zh, 
k, sounds like k in kick, keel, weafc. feid, cloaA:. 

1, sounds like Z in Zad, coaZ, Zot, pupiZ,Zump, souZ. 
il or illt, sounds like Hi in WiZZiam, biZZiard, collier. 

23. With regard to the pronunciation of the Z or 11, mouilltes, it is 
proper to mention that they are differently pronounced by different persons ; 
thus the words soleil, fille, travail, tailleur, &c. instead of being pronounc- 
ed as directed above, are pronounced as if written thus : so-le-ye, Ji-ye, 
tra-va-ye, ta-yeur, giving to the y the sound it has in the word year. 

24. This last pronunciation being the easier of the two, has been adopted 
by so many people in France, that it is no longer considered as a fault, 
except by grammarians. However I recommend the former, not only on 
account of its correctness, but also on account of its being a sound very 
common to the Spanish, the Italian, and the Portuguese languages; in 
which languages this sound does not admit of any variation. It is repre- 
sented in the Spanish by 11. in the Italian by gli, and in the Portuguese 
hylh, 

25. When in a word Z or ZZ preceded by i, are liquides, or mouilltes, 
I have, in the figured pronunciation of the verbs, and of the fables, repre- 
sented this sound by ill, standing by itself; and this with a view of forcing 
the attention of the pupil. It will be seen also, that in those words in which 
the i that precedes the Z, or II, is pronounced ; I have repeated it, as in 
file, fi-ill, billet, bi-ill-e, in which the i is distinctly heard, before the 
utterance of the 11, mouilltes; which is not the case in travail, tra-va-ill; 
tailleur, ta-ill-eur; soleil, so-le-ill ; sommeiller, so-mt-ill-L 

m, sounds like m in man, men, stem, minim, slim, 



OF THE FRENCH LANGUAGE. 9 

am, em, im, om, urn, ym, are pronounced like 
an, en, in, on, un, in, which see. 

n, sounds at the beginning of syllables like n in nap, nip, note. 

n, preceded by the vowels a, i, o, u, form the four nasal sounds, 
an, in, on, un, mentioned under article 16th, which see. 

n, at the end of a word, although preceded by a vowel, some- 
times has the sound of n in pan, pen, pin, ton, sun. 
26. When it is to be pronounced so, it is indicated by a capital n, 

which refers to the word amev, in the key to the figured pronunciation 

of the verbs of this Grammar, and in that of the Fables. 

n, final — When a word ends with an n, and is followed by a 
word beginning with a vowel or an h mute to which it 
must be joined, the n final is doubled ; that is, another n is 
added in the pronunciation ; and that added n is joined to, 
and pronounced with the next word, for instance : 

ancien ami, bien /zeureux, are pronounced as if spelt, 
ancien nami, bien neureu. 

27. However it is a pretty general custom with regard to 
the four following words : bon, mon, ton, son, not to double the 
final n, but to pronounce the final n of each of these words, 
with the following words, beginning with a vowel, or an h 
mute, for instance : 

bon ami, mon ami, ton ami, son ami, must be pronounced as 
bo nami, mo nami, to nami, so nami. [if spelt, 

28. I must also here observe, that un when followed by a word begin- 
ning with a vowel, or a silent h, is pronounced in two ways. Thus for 
instance, the rnasculine nouns, un esclave, un exemple, un ami, will be 
pronounced by some, u-nesclave, u-nexemple, u-nami, as they would pro- 
nounce the feminin nouns, une esclave, une exemple, une amie ; by others, 
un esclave, un exemple, unami, will be pronounced as if written, unnesclave, 
un ncxemple, un nami, and une esclave, une exemple, une amie, u-nesclave, 
u-nexemple, u-namie. 

29. By the latter way of pronouncing un, the speaker, besides pre- 
serving the proper nasal sound of un, does away with the ambiguity about 
the gender, to which the former way of pronouncing gives rise. I have 
adopted the latter in the figured pronunciation ; not because it is the moat 
used, but because it is considered the most correct way of the two, 

p, sounds like/), in pap, pet, step, pip, pop, 
q, sounds like k, in kiek, kid, keel, &oran. 

30. U after q is very seldom pronounced. 

r. sounds like r in roar, rat, rap, red, rid, rod, rub. 

31. The French r, must always have the jarring sound. The jarring 
sound of the initial or rough r, is formed, says Walker, by jarring, or vibra- 
ting the tip of the tongue against the roof of the mouth, near the fore teeth 

A3 



b THE SOUNDS 

s, sounds like s in sassafras, atlas, seldom, silk, sole. 

s, between two vowels, or at the end of a word, followed by 

a word beginning with a vowel, or an h mute, to which 

it must be joined, has generally the sound of z, as heard 

in zeal, zone, or s in rose, 
sh, sounds like sh in shdA, das/i, shed, fresh, ship, fish, shop, 

elas/i, shun, blus/i. 
t, sounds like t in t&rt, tell, je£, ton, snot. 
t, in the middle of a word, has sometimes the sound of s, as 

in sat, seat, for instance, in patience, caution, &c. 
th, sounds like t in Zap, fop. 
t, at the end of a word, is generally joined and sounded with 

the next word, beginning with a vowel or h mute. 
v, sounds like v in rat, vent, vi\, motive, vulgar. 

'k 1 ( excellence-e/r-se-lans. 



x, has five sounds < 



k-s as in the | axiome a/c-si-om. # 

g-z y French <[ exemple — eg*-zan-p!e 

I s words soixante — -soi-sant. 

( z J l^sixieme si-^i-em. 

32. * In the words in which x is pronounced like k-s; s must not be 
pronounced like sh, as it is in the English word axiom, pronounced 
ak-shum, but like s in sister. 

z, sounds like z in £eal, ^est, zone, and s in rose. 
w, is generally pronounced like v in very. 
w, is in a few words pronounced as it is in the English, in 
work, word. 



33. I should have mentioned that new names have been 
given to the letters of the French alphabet, which, though far 
preferable to the old ones, are as yet not generally taught. 

a, b, c, d, e, f, g, h, i, j, k, 1, m, n, o, 
a, be*,ke, de, a, /et, ge, he, ei,je, ke, le, me, ne, o, 



p, q, r, s, t, u, v, x, y, z. 
pe, he, re, se, te, u, ve, kse, e grec, ze. 



* The e after each consonant has the sound of u in two, and is pronounced but 
feebly. 
t g here has the sound it has in gag, gig, &c 
\ j sounds like z in glazier. 



OF THE FRENCH LANGUAGE. 



34. Table of the Simple sounds 
one view the different combinations, 
sounds are represented in different w 



of Vowels ; showing at 
by which these simple 
ords.* 



sounds 


examples 


sounds like 


represented by 


examples 


a 


ami 


a, in at 


£ea 


femme 


■woman 








il gagea 


he betted 


a. 


ane 


a, in arm 


C a 


bas 


stocking 


e 


te 


u, in tub 


dea 
ai 


rougeatre 
nous faisons 


reddish 
ive do 








f ai . 


aigu 


sharp 


e 


ecrit 


a, in ale 


J eai 


geai^ 


fay 








] ee 


annee 


year 








U 


a^sophage 


oesophagus 








fai 


aide 


aid 


*t 


meref 


a, in maref 


J aie 


baie 


bay 








Sei 


baleine 


-whale 








Leai 


monnaie 


money 


H 


etret 


e, in there}: 


ai 


aine 


eldest 




idole 


i, in idiom 


i 


imiter 


to imitate 


i 


gite 


ee, in eel 


ie 


folie 


filly 








C au 
ceo 


aurore 


aurora 





opera 


o, in opera 


flageolet 


flagelet 








Cau 


auteur 


author 


6 


oter 


o, in over 


"S eau 


marteau 


hammer 








Ceo 


geole 


goal 








Ceu 


gageure 


wager 


u 


mur 


none 


") eue 


eue 


had 








Cue 


laitue 


lettuce 


u 


mur 


none 


U 


flute 


flute 


eu 


jeune 


u, in muff 


aeu 


ceuf 


egg 








5aeu 
Ceue 


nceud 


knot 


eu 


jeune 


none 


queue 


tail 


ou 


tout 


oo, in too 


ou 


tout 


all 


ou 


voiite 


oo, in fool 


Saoii 
coue 


aout 


august 








roue 


•wheel 








Tarn 


ample 


ample 








I aon 


paon 


peacock 
afflicting 


an 


an ere 


an, in sang 


^ ean 


affiigeant 








1 em 


membre 


member 








Len 


entendre 


to hear 








faim 


essaim 


swarm 








j ain 


crainte 


fear 


in 


ingrat 


en, in length 


J ein 
] im 


peinture 
impoli 


picture 
impolite 








Lyn 


symbole 


symbol 








syntaxe 


syntax 


on 


onde 


on, in long 


Caon 


taon 


ox-fy 








< eon 


pigeon 


pigeon 








Com 


ombre 


shade 


un§ 


un§ 


un§,insung 


Ceun 
C.um i 


a jeun 
parfum 


fasting 
perfume 



* See page 10. | See page 10. J See note page 2. § See page 5, Art. 28. 



THE SOUNDS 



Table of Diphthongs. 

35. A diphthong is a coalition of two sounds, which are 
distinctly heard by a simple emission of the voice. The 
diphthongs of the French language will all be found in the 
following table, opposite to the simple sounds of which they 
are composed. 

36. In the figured pronunciation of the Fables, and of the Verbs, the 
two sounds forming a diphthong have been separated, -with a view of 
causing the pupil to pronounce distinctly the two sounds. The master 
must not allow the pupil to pause between the two vowels, but pronounce 
them as closely as possible. 



diphthongs 


simple sounds 


I 


examples. 


ia 


i-a 


nacre 


hackney coach 


ia 


i-a 


galimatias 


nonsense 


iai") 




je defiai 


I challenged 


ieC 


i-e 


amitie 


friendship 


ie5 




riez 


laugh 


iai^ 




je purifiais 


I purified 


ie v 


i-e 


biere 


beer 


ie j 




ciel 


heaven 


io 


i-o 


violon 


violin 


iau 


i-6 


miauler 


to mexv 


iu 


i-ii 


reliure 


binding 


ieu 


i-eu 


relieur 


book binder 


ieu ? 


A 


mieux 


better 


ieue 5 


i-eu 


lieue 


league 


iou 


i-ou 


chiourme 


the crew of a galley 


ian } 




viande 


meat 


ien$ 


i-an 


audience 


audience 


ien 


i-in 


chretien 


christian 


ion 


i-on 


passion 


passion 


oi » 


o-a 


boite 


maturity of wine 


Oi ~) 




boite 


box 


oie 3 


o-a 


foie 


liver 


oe > 
eoi3 


o-e 


moelle 
nageoke 


marrow 
Jin 


oi 


ou-e 


voisin 


neighbour 


oin 


ou-in 


besom 


want 


oua 


ou-a 


rouage 


wheel-work 


oua 


ou-a 


nous nouames 


we tied 


oucu 


ou-eu 


boueur 


dust man 


oue ""\ 


V 


denouer 


to untie 


oue 1 


OU-6 


dcjouc 


baffled 


ouce f 


trouee 


opening 


ouai J 




je jouai 


I played 


oi ^ 




oiseau 


bird 


oue C 


ou-e 


fouetter 


to whip 


ouai 3 




je louais 


Ipraised 


oui ) 

ouie 5 




cambouis 


coom 


ou-i 


l'ou'i'e 


the hearing 


oueu 


ou-eu 


noueux 


knotty 


ouan ") 




louange 


praise [France 


ouen 5 


ou-an 


Rouen 


Rouen, city of 



OF THE FRENCH LANGUAGE. 



diphthongs 


simple sounds 


1 


examples. 




ouin 


ou-in 


babouin 


baboon 




ouon 


ou-on 


nous jouons 


toe play 




ua 


ou-a 


lingual 


lingual 




ua 


u-a 


nuage 


cloud 




ua 


u-a 


nous tuaraes 


tve killed 




lieu 


u-eu 


lueur 


glimmering 




uai "^ 




je remuai 


I moved 




ue I 
ue { 


u-e 


eternuer 
denue 


to sneeze 
stript 




ueej 




nuee 


cloud 




ue 1 


v 


menuet 


minuet 




uai S 


u-e 


il suait 


lie perspired 




ui 


u-i 


buisson 


bush 




uie 


u-i 


pluie 


rain 




uo 


u-6 


impetuosite 


impetuosity 




ueu 


u-eu 


majestueux 


majestic 




uan? 




nuance 


shade 




uen5 


u-an 


influence . 


influence 




uin 


u-in 


juin 


June 




uon 


u-on 


nous tuons 


-we kill 





37. A single view of the two tables, here given, -will show ofwhatadvaw 
tag e figured pronunciation will be to him, who is desirous of acquiring 
an accurate pronunciation, whether he has a master or not. If he has a 
master he will be able to revise his reading lesson, and by this means 
make great progress ; if he is deprived of the assistance of a master, he 
will be able to obtain a tolerable pronunciation, which would have been 
impossible for him, without this help. 



38. The following table treats of some terminations which 
differ very materially in pronunciation from the English. 
English learners, in these terminations, are always inclined to 
sound e before I or r as they do in their own language ; for 
instance, they will pronounce acre, akur. 





bul 




^ 


bur 


£ 


3 




s 


© 






J* 




3 


CO 

© 


kul 


*v3 


Q *» 




J3 








•X to 




<* 




fcur 




so 


dur 


CO 


to sS 

60 


fill 


a 


1 8 


fur 


3 

to 




gul 


-< 




gur 
pul 




,8 s* 


pur 


o 


<5J 

s 


tur 





ta-ble 
sa-bre 



mira-cle 



a-cre 

pou-dre 

buf-fle 

cof-fre 

an-gle 

mai-gre 

am-ple 

pro-pre 

an-tre 



g fcso "* 



§ -5 to 5 

3 ^3 ^ ^ 

^ ^ -3 ^ 

^ f 1 1 



<5j SJ 



+* Or 

© ©* 

2 * 



I *3 



bl-aze 
br-ace 



kl-ick 



cr-ane 

dr-ain 

fl-ame 

fr-ame 

gl-are 

gr-ave 

pl-ane 

pr-aise 

tr-ain 



10 NOTES. 

* In comparing this table of simple sounds of vowels with Levizac's, it 
will be seen that though he gives but seventeen sounds I give twenty. 

Since Levizac gives the short and long sounds of o and of eu, I do not 
see why he omitted the long sound of i, of «, and of ou. 



j- Soon after the publication of my book of Fables, at the beginning of 
which I have drawn an approximative comparison between the French 
and the English sounds, I saw in a number of the Yankee, then (1829) 
published in Portland or in Boston, an article which reproved me for 
having dared to compare the sound of e in mere with the sound of a in 
mare, or which amounts to the same thing, for having dared to make a 
difference between the sound of a in mare, fare, &c. and the sound of a 
in ale, fate, &c. 

At the time I made that difference I looked for no authority, but I 
trusted to my ear, which seldom deceives me with regard to the least 
shades in the sounds of languages. Since the publication of the above 
mentioned article in the Yankee, I have made some researches, the result 
of which has proved to me, that if I was wrong, many eminent English 
and American orthoepists were so too. 

For the information of the writer of said article in the Yankee I shall 
quote the authors who are in favour of the difference I made, and still 
make between, the above two sounds. 

See J. A. Cummings' Pronouncing Spelling Book, third edition, Bos- 
ton, 1822 ; preface, page ix. 

See John Franklin Jones' Analytical Spelling Book, second edition, 
New York, 1824, page 14, line 10th; page 19, the word rare ; page 60, 
the word beware; page 61, column 4th, the word affair, and following. 

See E. Hazen's Speller and Defmer, New York, 1830 ; page 7, the 
word fare ; page 1 89, the words pair, pare, and pear. 

See William Pelham's System of Notation, Boston, 1808, pagexxiii. 
the words mare, tare, and care. 

See Webster's 4to. Dictionary, Vol. I. Directions for the pronuncia- 
tion of words, page 2, 17th line from the bottom. 

See Webster's 8vo, Dictionary, page iv., 21st line from the bottom. 
There will be seen not only the opinion of Mr. Webster himself, but that 
of Mr. J. E. Worcester of Cambridge, and of Professor Goodrich of 
Yale College, who, we are told by Webster's preface, have had much to 
do with the editing of his 8vo. dictionary. 

In the passage referred to, it will also be seen that Perry, the English 
orthoepist, has made the same difference in his Dictionary, which is, and 
has been, since its publication, the best authority quoted by well informed 
people in England. 

See J. E. Worcester's 12mo. Dictionary, New York, 1830, page iii. 
Key to the sounds of the marked letters, and also, page xi., 14th line from 
the bottom. 

See Henry Butter's Etymological Spelling Book, London, 1831, a 
book much esteemed in England. 

See William Russell's Lessons in Enunciation, Boston, 1830, page 
12, 1 1th line from the top. 

Mr. William Russell is the editor of the Journal of Education (first 
series), and taught elocution for many years in Cambridge and Boston. 



PUNCTUATION AND ACCENTUATION. 11 

Punctuation and Accentuation. 

39. Besides the marks of punctuation, which are the same 
both in French and in English — comma , virgule — semicolon, 
; point-virgule — colon : deux points — period . un point — 
note of interrogation ? point d 'interrogation — note of admira- 
tion, or exclamation ! point d* admiration ou d 'exclamation 
— the parenthesis () laparenthese — the dash — le trait de se- 
paration — a quotation " " guillemets ; there are other marks 
called accents. 

40. The acute accent ' accent aigu — is placed over e in 
certain words, and gives it the sound c ailed ferm e ; as heard 
in pre/ere, regenere, <^c. 

41. The grave accent N accent grave — is placed over a, e, 
u, in certain words ; and gives to the e the sound called 
ouvert ; as heard in mere, proces, #*c. 

42. The grave accent, put over a, u, has no influence on 
their sound : it is used principally to distinguish one part of 
speech from another ; for instance, to distinguish a to, from 
a has — la there, from la the — oil where, from ou or, &c. 

43. The circumflex accent ' v accent circonflexe — is placed 
over a, e, i, o, u, in certain words, to give these vowels a 
long sound ; as in age, tete, epitre, cote, biiche, fyc, which 
were formerly written aage, teste, epistre, coste, busche, c^c. 

44. The cedilla p cedille — is a kind of comma placed un- 
der c, to give it the sound of s, before a, o, u, as in facade, 
fagon, repu, fyc. ; in which words c would be hard, and pro- 
nounced like k in kick, were it not for the cedilla. 

45. The diaeresis •• trema or dierese — are two dots placed 
over the vowels e, i, u, to indicate that these vowels are not 
to form a diphthong with the preceding vowel, but are to be 
pronounced separately ; as in poete, naivete, saul, fyc. 

46. The hyphen - tiret or trait d 1 union— is used to con- 
nect — 1st, compound words ; as belles-lettres, arc-e?i-ciel, fyc. 
2dly, the personal pronouns ; je, tu, il, elle, nous, vous, Us, 
elles, to the verb, when used interrogatively : as parley e, 
parles-tu, 8?c. 3dly, the conjunctive pronouns ; moi, toi, ltd, 
4*c. to the verb, when put after it; as parles-moi, dites-lui 
4thly, and also, to show at the end of a line, that a word has 
been divided, part of which begins the following line. 

47. The apostrophe ' apostrophe — is used to show the 
suppression or elision of a vowel before another vowel, or 
before an h mute ; as—Peglise, instead of la eglise — Phomme, 
instead of le homme, fyc. 



12 INTRODUCTION. 

INTRODUCTION TO THE EXERCISES. 






48. The learner is to render the English definite article 
Cle before a noun masculine "\ 
I la before a noun feminine ! in the sin- 
gle by *l V before a noun masculine or feminine f gular. 

I beginning with a vowel or h mute J 

\Jes before nouns of either gender in the plural. 

49. The learner is to render the English indefinite article 
" un before a noun masculine singular. 
I une before a noun feminine singular. 

EXAMPLES. 

Le livre the book les plantes the plants 

la rue the street un homme a man 

fame* the soul une femme a -woman 

ffiistoire the history un heros a hero. 

EXERCISES. 

The wood, the forest, the houses, the men, the court, 

? hois, m. firet f f. maisons, h.ommes, cour, f. 

the foot, the arms, the room, the garden, the windows, 

pied, m. bras, chambre, f. jardin, m. fenttres, 

a history, a novel, a foreigner, a walk, a day, 

histoire, f. roman, m. itranger, m. promenade, f. jour, m, 

a night, the sun, the moon, the stars, a body, 

nuit, f. soleil, m. hme,f. etoiles, corps, m # 
a card, a crown, 
carte, f. e'cw, m. 

50. The learner will render the English prepositions 

of and from by de, ~) and when followed by the article the he will render 
to and at by a 5 tnem tnus ; 

f 7 , r r ~) singular beginning with 

_ # , aw before a noun masculine f & ' ? 

of the by 7 , i c e • ■ /> & cons o?ia?it or n aspi- 

uj uic uj | ^ ^ before a noun femmme C * i 
or < 3 rated. 

from the by 1 de V before any noun beginning with a vowel or A mute. 
\^/es before any noun in the plural. 

, u fan before a noun masculine ~? sin S u!ar beginning with 

to the by I a ^ before a noun feminine ^ a«>™™(orAa f i. 

or -^ 3 rated. 

at the by I «/' before any noun beginning with a vowel or A mute 
\jaux before any noun in the plural. 

51. When the above prepositions of, from, to, and at, are followed by 

a or an, he will render them thus : 

^ d' ? m before a noun masculine. 
of a ox from a by £ ^ /W before a noun feminine# 

, ~) a un before a noun masculine. 
to a or at a by ^ ^ before ft noun feminine# 

* Levizac in his own grammar writes dme contrary to the best authorities. See 
Grammaire des Grammaires, 7th ed. page 1073. 



TO THE EXERCISES. 



13 



EXAMPLES. 



of the park a l'esprit 

of the river aux carrosses 

of the mind ( d'unjour 

of the coaches d'une nuit 
to the park 
to tlie river 

EXERCISES. 
The palace of the king, of the queen, of tne man, 

palais,m. roi, reine, h.omme, 

king, to the queen, to the man, to the men, 



Du pare 
de la riviere 
tie l'esprit 
des carrosses 
au pare 
a la riviere 



a un jour 
a une nuit 



to the mind 
to the coaches 
of a day 
of a night 
to a day 
to a night 



to the 



from 



a balcony, from a window, 

balcon, m. fenttre, f. 

of the gardens, of the evening, 

jar dins, soir, m. 

to the master, to a lady, of the soul, 

maitre, dame, ame, 

of the houses, of a carpet. 

maisons, tapis, m. 
55. The learner will render 

(a) 

singular, m, 
of or from my by de mon 

of or from thy by de ton 

of or from his^) 

of or from her V by de son 

of or from itsj 
of or from our by 
of or from your by 
of or from their by 



of a prince, 
prince, 
to the courtiers, 
courtisans, 
of the horse, 
cheval, 



f. 



to a princess, 
princesse, 
of a table, 

table, f. 
to a cat, 
chat, m. 



to or at my 
to or at thy 
io or at his") 
to or at her V 
to or at its j 
to or at our 
to or at your 
to or at their 



by 

by 

by 



de notre 

de votre 

de leur 

a mon 

a ton 



a son 



00 

sing, f 
de ma 
de ta 

de sa 

de notre 
de votre 
de leur 
a ma 
a ta 

a sa 



(c) 
plur. m., and J. 
de mes 
de tes 

deses 

de nos 
de vos 
de leurs 
a mes 
a tes 



by a notre a notre a nos 

by a votre a votre a vos 

by a leur a leur a leurs. 

(a) MJon, ton, son, are put before nouns singular m. and before nouns 
sing. f. when the sing. f. nouns begin with a vowel or an h mute. 

(b) JSIa, ta, sa, are put before nouns singular f. beginning with a con- 
sonant or an h aspirated. 

(c) JMes, tes, ses, are put before any nouns plural m. or f. 
53. The learner will render 

"ce before a noun singular 
m. beginning with a con- 
sonant or an h aspirated. 
of this, of that, from this, from that by de] cet before a noun singular 
to this, to that, at this, at that, by a \ m. beginning with a vow- 

el or h mute, 
j cette before any noun sin- 
^ gular f. 
B 



14 



INTRODUCTION 



of these, of those, from these, from those, by de ces ~) before any noun 



to these, to those, at these, at those, by a ces 

EXAMPLES. 

of my father a leur travail 



de mon pere 
a ta mere 
de son frere 
de notre ville 
a votre maison 



to thy mother 
of his brother 
of our toivn 
to your house 



de cette terrace 
de ce lieu 
de cet homme 
de ces arbres 



5 in the plural. 



to their work 
from this terrace 
of that place 
of this man 
of these trees 



EXERCISES. 
Of my clothes, of thy handkerchief, of his pocket, of your 

habits, mouchoir, m. poche, f. 

of our treasure, to their house, of this steeple of 
maison, f. clocher, m. 

of these models, of my sister, to 

modeles, sceur, 

of this mountain, to my friend, of these 
montagne, f. ami, m. 



letters, 

lettres, tresor, m 

that hero, 
heros, 

your relations, the top 

parens, sommet m. 



of this tower, 
tour, f. 



pleasures, of our duties, 
plaisirs, devoirs, 

to my neighbours. 
voisins. 



to their connexions, 
liaisons, 



of his acquaintances, 
connahsances, 



ELISION. 

54. The Apostrophe ' marks, we have said, (page 11, art. 
47.) the suppression of a vowel before another vowel or an h 
mute. 

55. This suppression is called Elision, The only vowels 
that suffer elision before another vowel or h mute are a, e, i. 

56. The vowel i is only suppressed in the word si when 
it comes before either of the two following words il, he or it 
— Us, they, thus : sHl, if he or if it, instead of si il, if he or 
if it — sHls, if they, instead of si Us, if they. 

57. The vowels a, e, are suppressed in the following words : 
when these words are placed before other words beginning 
with a vowel or h mute. 

58. Throughout this book, whenever a word begins with an h mute, 
the h will be an italic h if the French word is in Roman ; if in italics, 
then a . will be put after the h — thus, h.omme. 



si 


if 


See article 56, above. 


le 


the 


before a vowel, or h mute, 


le* 


him 


a it tt 


le* 


it 


I* u tt 


la 


the 


tt a tt 



TO THE EXERCISES. 



15 



la* 


her 1 


la* 


it 


je* 


I 


me 


me 


tc 


thee 


se 


himself 


sc 


herself 


se 


itsel 


se 


themselves 


ce 


this 


ce 


that 


ce* 


it 


de 


of 


ne 


not 


que 


that 


que 


which 


que 


whom 


parceque 


because 


quoique v 


although 


puisque 


since 


jusque 


till 


vu que 


since 


des que 


as soon as 


quelque 


some 


entre 


between 



before a vowel or h mute, 



r 
r 
j' 

nv 
t' 



" " s 

" " s' 

« " c » 

« " c' 

a « c » 

<c « tf 

« " n' 

<• « qu' 

« " qu' 

« « qu' 

" tt parcequ' 

" * quoiqu' 

" " puisqu' 

" " jusqu* 

« « vu qu' 

" " des qu' 

" " quelqu' 

« " entre 

59. The e in entre, before eux, elles and autre, may or may not be 
suppressed ; it is indifferent whether we write, entre eux, or entr'eux — 
entre elles, or entr' elles — entre autres, or entr'autres, 

60. * When the words (all pronouns) thus marked * in the above list, are put 
after the verb of which they are the nominative— or by which they are governed 
in the objective case — they do not suffer elision, although the word that comes 
after them begins with a vowel or an h mute — thus, apportcz-le ici, est-ce a lui, 8^c. 

EXERCISES. 

The soul, the heroine, the mind, he loves him, she loves her 
ame,i. heroine, f. esprit, m. il 2 aime He, elle 2 aime l la, 

I love this man, you do not understand me, he esteems thee, 

je aime h.omme, vous * nc 3 pas 2 cntendez hne, il 2 estime He, 

he goes away, it was the golden age, do not go there, if 

se enva, ce ttait 2 d'or { age, * l ne 3 pas 2 allez Ha, si 

he comes, if they please, what has he said 1 till night, 

vient, Us veulent, que a-t- il dit ? jusque au soir, m. 

though he says, since he knows, when he saw, between them, 
quoique dise, puisque sait, lorsque vit, entire eux, 

somebody is come. 
quelque un est venu. 

61. In the following French negative modes of speech, which answer 
to the accompanying English translation, the caret A points out the place 
which the French verb must occupy, whenever it is not in the infinitive 
mood. 



16 



INTRODUCTION 



Not 



~) ne^pas 



ne point 



never ne jamais 
nothing' ne^rien 

nobody ne*personne 



not a jot ne * goutte 
» ne*nulle 



>as«< 



no -where 



part 



" je ne suis pas, &c. I am not, &c. 
nous xi'avons 

point, 

il nejoue jamais, he never plays 
vous ne dites ~) 7 . 

rien, < you say nothm £' 

je ne vols per- 

sonne, 

?* 

je ne r^s goutte, V / 

je ne vais nulle 
part, 



we Aave not. 



£ / see nobody, 

do not see, 
see not in 
least. 

I go no where. 



or 

the 



62. But in compound tenses, it is the auxiliary verb that parts the ne- 
gative ne from the pas, or point, &c. that accompanies it, as nous rfavons 
point parle, -we have not spoken ; on vHaurait jamais cru, one could never 
have believed. 

63. The addition of pas, or point, to the negative particle ne, must not 
be considered as a second negation ; but only as a complimental part of 
it. For in such cases, pas, point, goutte, are mere restrictive terms, 
nearly resembling the English word, jot, bit, tittle, sometimes added to 
not, with this difference, that pas and point in French have nothing trivial 
in them. 

I do not say, I have not said, I have never seen, I never (tell a 
* dis, ai dit, vu, 

falsehood), I do nothing, I have done nothing, is he not arrived 1 
mens, fais fait est-il arrive ? 

does he not come 1 I see nothing, has he never seen 1 he never loses 
* 2 il 1 vient ? vols a-t- . vu P perd 

his time, that (is worth) nothing, I met nobody. 
temps, m. cela vaut rencontrai 

N. B. The above exercise and direction, article 61, are out of place. 
Livizac ought to have remembered that the scholar knotvs as yet nothing 
about simple and compound tenses. 

64. There are many words which are alike in both languages, and 
others which differ only in their termination. 

65. The expressions, which are perfectly alike, are particularly those 
that have the following terminations : 



*al 

-ble 

-ace 



ice 



C animal, cardinal, fatal, general, local, moral, natal, origi- 

(_ nal, principal, &c. 

C capable, fable, &c. bible, eligible, &c. noble, double, 

(_ soluble, insoluble, &c. 

^ face, grimace, grace, place, preface, race, surface, trace, 

I &c. 

C chance, complaisance, extravagance, ignorance, lance. 

C temperance, &c. 

C abstinence, conference, continence, diligence, eloquence, 

C patience, &c. 

C artifice, auspices, edifice, justice, injustice, office, orifice, 

C precipice, solstice, &c, 



TO THE EXERCISES. 



17 



C miracle, oracle, obstacle, receptacle, tabernacle, specta- 
(_ cle, &c. 

C ambuscade, cavalcade, brigade, esplanade serenade, re- 
(_ trograde, &c. 

age, adage, bandage, cage, cordage, image, page, plumage, 
rage, &c. 

college, privilege, sacrilege, siege, sortilege, &c. 
C vestige, doge, barge, charge, orange, forge, rouge, refuge, 
C deluge, &c. 

C globule, ridicule, animalcule, corpuscule, formule, module, 
C. mule, pustule, valvule, &c. 

5 bile, debile, agile, docile, ductile, facile, fragile, nubile, 
c. reptile, versatile, &c. 

§ carabine, fascine, doctrine, heroine, machine, marine, fa- 
C mine, mine, rapine, &c. 

5^ action, fraction, legion, nation, opinion, passion, question, 
C religion, &c. 

5" arrogant, constant, elegant, elephant, petulant, piquant, 
c poignant, vigilant, &c. 

5 absent, accident, compliment, argument, content, element^ 
£ frequent, serpent, &c. 

66. Many other English words require only the change of termination, 
in the following manner : 



-acle 

-ade 

-age 
-ege 
-ge 

-ule 

-ile 

-ine 

-ion 

-ant 

-ent 



-gy into -gie as energy 

-avy -aire — military 

-ory -oire — glory 

•cy -ce — clemency 

~ty -te — beauty 

•ous -eux — dangerous 

-our -eur — favour 

or -eur . — error 

-ine -in — clandestine 

-ive -if — expressive 

-ry -rie — f ur h' 

-dy -die — perfidy 

C-eux") 



energie 

militaire 

gloire 

clemence 

beaute 

dangereux 

faveur 

erreur 

clandestin 

expressif 

furie 

pei fl die 

'-euse 



N. B. Adjectives in<-if 
C-in 



>make their feminine in 






ive 
ine 



EXERCISE. 
The beauty of the fable, the horror of vice,the utility of science, 
f. f. h.orreur, in. art. m. f. art. f. 

the atrocity of this action, the violence of his passions the simplicity of 

f. f. f. passions f. 

that machine, an 2 audacious Conspirator, the absurdity of that opinion, 

f. f. f. 

the military evolutions, an industrious 'nation, an important 'victory, 

2 militaires ^evolutions, f importante f. 

an ^alimentary pension, a 2 dangerous 'animal, a 2 figurative 'expression, 

f, m. f. 

a famous general, his Constant 'generosity, he is incapable of attention, 
constante f. est f. 

b2 



J 



18 INTRODUCTION TO THE EXERCISES. 

his imprudence is visible, his fidelity is indubitable, she is very at- 

f. f. elle tres- 

tentive, your clemency is admirable, the destruction of his fortune was 
f. f. f. f. fut 

the consequence of his temerity, she is very scrupulous, his condition 

f. f. tres- f. f. 

is horrible, his parents are very miserable, this history is incontestable, 

parens sont miserables, f. 

your facility is prodigious, his perfidy is odious, it was a horrible 2 famine, 

f. perfidie, f. ceetait f. 

the sublimity of his sentiments is still preferable to the energy of his 

f. sentimens encore energie, f. 

expressions, it was a 2 decisive 'action, the carnage was terrible, that 
expressions, f. f. m.fut 

obstacle is invincible, this instrument is not harmonious, the prosperity 

m. m, f. 

of the wicked is not durable, your 2 insidious 'presents are not acceptable, 
medians, presens sont acceptablts, 

is memory is truly extraordinary, that is his principal 'occupation, a 
f. vraiment ce est principale 

2 central 'position, his extravagance is visible, these arguments are 
centrale f. f. argumens 

insoluble, 
insolubles 

PAKT I. 

OF WORDS CONSIDERED IN THEIR NATURE AND INFLECTIONS. 



67. There are, in French, nine sorts of words, or parts of speech, namely : 

1. Substantive, or Noun, 4. Pronoun, 7. Preposition, 

2. Article, 5. Verb, 8. Conjunction, 

3. Adjective, 6. Adverb, 9. Interjection. 

CHAPTER I. 

OF THE SUBSTANTIVE, OR NOUN. 

68. The substantive is a word, which serves to name a person, or thing, 
as Pierre, Peter ; livre, book, &c. 

69. There are two sorts of substantives, the substantive proper, or 
proper name, and the substantive common, also called appellative. 

70. The proper name is that which is applied to a particular person, or 
thing, as Cesar, Csesar ; la Tamise, the Thames. 

71. The substantive common is that which belongs to a whole class of 
objects. The word komme, man, is a substantive common, as it is appli- 
cable to any individual. 

72. Of these nouns, some are collective, and others abstract, 

73. Collective nouns express either a whole mass, as une armte, an 
army ; uneforet, a forest : or a partial assemblage, as une quantite cle, &c, a 
quantity of ; la plnpart, most part, &c. 

74. Abstract nouns are the names of qualities abstracted from their 
subjects, as surface, rondeur, science, sagesse ; surface, roundness, know- 
ledge, wisdom, &c. 

75. In substantives, are to be considered Gender and Number, 



19 



OF GENDERS. 



76. Gender is the distinction of sex, or the difference be- 
tween male and female. 

77. There are in the French Language but two Genders : 
trie Masculine, which belongs to men and animals of the male 
kind ; as, John, lion, fyc. The Feminine, which belongs to 
women or animals of the female kind; as, Lucy, lionness, fyc* 

78. This distinction has, through imitation, been extended 
in the French to all those substantives (inanimate objects) that 
are neither male nov female; and which, in English, are of the 
neuter gender. Thus in French — un livre a book, is mascu- 
line — une table a table, is feminine, §c. 

79. The gender of French nouns, which in English are 
neuter, is commonly ascertained by their terminations. 

A great number of writers have endeavoured to give rules; 
but none have had the patience to go carefully over the 
" Dictionnaire de l'Academie," to make themselves sure 
that the rules they were giving embraced a greater number 
of words, than the list of exceptions to those rules. 

They all found it less irksome, after having given the ex- 
ceptions they could remember, to have recourse to this 
phrase — " You must except such and such words; and others 
that usage will teach" By this method it is evident that the 
scholar cannot know whether the nouns, whose gender he 
wants to ascertain, come under the rules given, or is one of 
those words that usage is to teach him: in this predicament he 
must have recourse to a dictionary; and if there is none with- 
in his reach, he must expose himself to make a blunder in the 
gender of some noun, which will sometimes change entirely 
the meaning of his phrase, and sometimes excite laughter. 

The following few pages contain A Treatise on the Gen- 
ders of French Nouns, as short as the subject would admit. 
The rules are precise, and the list of exceptions complete ; so 
that any person, after having learned the rules and exceptions, 
can, without the help of any dictionary, which he cannot 
always carry about him, ascertain at once the gender of any 
noun contained in the Dictionnaire de l'Academie, and in 
the supplement to that work. 



20 



A. Bolmar s Complete Treatise 



MASCULINE, 

FROM THEIR SIGNIFICATION. 

1. Dieu God — horame man — all animals of the male kind — 

lion lion, &,c. — and all those objects to which we fancifully 
attribute masculine qualities ; as — ange angel — satire satyr 
— soleil sun, &c. 

2. The names of Trees ; as— chene oak — peuplier poplar, &c. 

Exception. 
yeuse holm. 

3. The names of Shrubs; as — rosier rose-bush, &,c. 

Exceptions. 
aubepine hawthorn, ronce briar, 

bourdaine black alder, vigne vine. 
epine thorn, 

4. The names of the Seasons of the year; printems spring — 

ete summer, &c. 

automne autumn, is of both genders. 

5. The names of the Days of the week ; dimanche Sunday — 

lundi monday, &,c. 

6. The names of Metals and Minerals ; as — fer iron — 

mercure mercury, &c. 

7. The names of Colours ; as — noir black — -blanc white., &c. 

8. The letters of the Alphabet ; as — un a — un b, &c. 

9. Adjectives, numeral adjectives, pronouns, verbs, adverbs, 

prepositions, conjunctions, and interjections, used sub- 
stantively ; as — le bon good — le manger the eating — un 
quart one fourth — un dixieme one tenth, &>c, 
Exceptions. 

une moitie a half, and all Nos. ending with aine as 

douzaine, quinzaine, &c. 
une antique antique, 1 are fern, statue statue or 

une courbe a curve, [dicular, 
une perpendiculaire a perpen- 
une tangente a tangent, 



medaille medal in the 
1st, and ligne line in the 
three last being underst. 



21 



on the Genders of French Nouns. 



FEMININE, 

FROM THEIR SIGNIFICATION. 

1 . Deesse goddess — femme woman — all animals of the female 

kind; lionne lioness — and all those objects to which we 
fancifully atinbute feminine qualities ; as — lune moon, &c. 

2. The names of Virtues ; as — modestie modesty, dec. 

Exceptions. 
courage courage, merite merit. 

3. The names of Vices ; as — jalousie jealousy, &c. 

4. The names of Holy-days ; as — Toussaint all-saint's day — 

Paque the passover, dec. 

Exceptions. 

Paque or Paques easier, is masculine. 

Noel christmas, is masculine. 

JN. B. When the diminutive mi half, is prefixed to a noun, the noun is then 
fern, as la mi-car erne. All other diminutives follow the gender of the nouns 
from which they are derived ; thus une globule a small globe, is masc. 

5. The names of the Four Parts of the world ; as — Europe 

Europe — Amerique America, &c. 



FEMININE, 

FROM THEIR TERMINATION. 

Nouns with the following terminations are feminine. 
te] as — sante health — bonte goodness, &c 
Exceptions. 



aparte aside, 
arrete decree, 
benedicite grace 
at meal. 



comite committee, 
comte county, 
cote side, 



pate pie, 

precipite precipitate, 

traite treaty or treatise. 



2. tie] as — amitie friendship — moitie half, &c. 

3. ion] as — nation nation — religion religion, &c. 

Exceptions. 



bastion bastion, 
bestion beak-head, 
brimborion bauble, 



camion minikin pin, 
galion galleon, 
lampion small lamp, 



pion pawn, 
scion twig, 
talion retaliation. 



22 bolmar's complete treatise 

MASCULINE. 

10. Nouns compounded of a verb and a noun are also mascu- 

line ; as — cure-dent tooth-pick — casse-noisette nut-cracker 
— tourne-broche a jack, &c. Although dent, noisette, 
broche, are feminine. 

Exception. 
garde-robe wardrobe. 

11. The names of the Cardinal Points, and of the winds ; 

as — le sud the south — le nord the north, &c. 
Exceptions. 
bise north-east wind, I tramontane tramontane, 
brise light wind, | mousson monsoon, 

12. The names of Empires, Kingdoms, and Countries ; as — 

Bresil Brasil — Portugal Portugal, &c. 
Exceptions. 

Those names of Empires, Kingdoms, and Countries, that 
end with e mute, are feminine; as — Russie Russia — 
France France, &/C. 

However, Bengale Bengal — Mexique Mexico — Pe- 
loponese Peloponnesus — Le Caire Cairo — are masculine, 
although ending with e mute. 

13. The names of Mountains ; as — Caucase Caucasus — 

Parnasse Parnassus — Vesuve Vesuvius, &c. 
Exceptions. 
Alpes, Cordilliere, Pyrenees, Vosges. 

14. The names of Towns, Boroughs, and Villages ; some 

are masculine, some feminine ; and as no good rule can 
be given it is better both for a Frenchman and a 
foreigner, to avoid mistake, to use after them, the words 
ville, bourg, village — and say, for instance — Paris est une 
belle ville Paris is a fine town, &,c. instead of Paris est 
beau Paris is fine. 

15. The names of Rivers, follow their termination, if they 

end with any other letter except e mute, they are mas- 
culine ; as — le Rhin the Rhine — le Nil the Nile, &lc. 
Those ending in e mute, are feminine ; as — la Seine 
the Seine — la Tamise the Thames, &,c. 

Exceptions. 
le Rhone, le Tibre, le Danube, le Cocyte, are masculine, 
though they end with e mute 



ON THE GENDERS OF FRENCH NOUNS, 



23 



FEMININE. 

4. son] as — chanson song — maison house, &lc. 



Exceptions 
blason heraldry, 
diapason diapason, 



oison gosling 



poison poison, 
tison firebrand. 



N. B. All nouns ending with sson or on, except those 
ending with the above terminations (ion and son) are 
masculine, according to the rule 1st, in the masculine 
column ; all nouns ending with a consonant are masculine. 
For the exceptions, see the table annexed to that article 

5. eur] as — fureur fury — douceur mildness, &c. 

Exceptions. 

exterieur the outside, 
honneur honour, 
interieur the inside, 
labeur labour. 
malheur misfortune. 

Except also all nouns ending with eur, which can only be 
applied to man ; as — docteur doctor, &,c. And also 
those nouns ending with eur, which have a feminine, 
as — masculine, acteur actor — feminine, actrice actress — 
masculine, parleur talker — feminine, parleuse talker — 
masc. pecheur sinner — fern, pecheresse sinner, &lc. 

6. All nouns ending with e mute, are feminine, provided 

they be neither comprised under the rules of Masculine 
nouns, nor in the following list of those Masculine 
nouns ending with e mute, which cannot be brought 
under any particular rule. 



bonheur happiness, 
chceur chorus, 
cceur heart, 
deshonneur dishonour, 
equateur equator, 



List of Nouns which cannot be brought under any particu- 
lar rule, and which are Masculine, though ending with e 
mute. 



Abaqne 


Abacus. 


aide 


assistant. 


acousmate 


acousma. 


aide 


support, is fern. 


acrostiche 


acrostic. 


aigle 


eagle (bird) or a 


acte 


act. 




great genius. 


adminicule 


adminicle. 


aigle 


eagle (a standard,) is 


adverbe 


adverb. 




[fern. 



24 



bolmar's complete treatise 



16. 



MASCULINE, 

The names of some Animals, Birds, Fish, Shell-fish, 
Reptiles, and Insects, in which the male is not dis- 
tinguished from the female, and that do not end with 
e mute; as — ours bear — vautour vulture — saumon sal- 
mon — homard lobster— ver worm, &c. 



Exceptions 
fourmi ant, 
perdrix partridge, 



souns mouse, 
chauve-souris bat. 



Those names of animals, birds, fish, shell-fish, reptiles, 
and insects, in which the male is not distinguished from 
the female, and that end with e mute, are feminine ; 
as — panthere panther — colombe dove — truite trout — 
huitre oyster — vipere viper — mouche fly, &c. 

Exceptions. 



aigle eagle, 
bievre beaver, 
buffle buffalo, 
capricorne Capricorn, 
crabe crab, 



cygne swan, 
dromadaire dromedary, 
lievre hare, 
merle black-bird, 
rouge-gorge redbreast. 



MASCULINE 

FROM THEIR TERMINATION 

1. Nouns ending with a consonant ; as — fusil gun, &c. 
Exceptions. 



amours amours, flame. 
amours loves, plural 

of amour is masc. 
boisson beverage, 
chair flesh, 
chaux lime, 
clef key, [felting, 
contrefacon counter- 
cour yard, 
croix cross, 
cuiller spoon, 
cuisson baking, 
delices delights, 
del ice delight, in the 

singular is masc. 
dent tooth, 



dot dower, 
facon making, 
faim hunger, 
faux sithe, 
fin end, 

fin main point, is 
fois time. [mas. 
foret forest, 
gent nation, race, 
gens people m. & f. 
hart halter, 
lecon lesson, 
main hand, 
moeurs manners, 
mcr sea, 
moisson harvest, 



mort death, 

nef nave, 

noix walnut, 

nuit night, 

paix peace, 

part share, 

plupart most part, 

poix pitch, 

premices first fruits, 

rancon ransom, 

soif thirst, 

tour tower, 

tour trick, is mas. 

toux cough, 

vis screw. 

voix voice. 





ON THE GENDERS < 


)F FRENCH N 


OUNS. & 


List of Masculine nouns, ending with e mute. 


alveole 


alveolus. 


caustique 


caustic. 




C combination of 


cenotaphe 


cenotaph- 


ambe 


| < two numbers at 


cerne 


circle. 




( the lottery. 


chambranle 


jamb. 


amiante 


amiantus. 


chose (quelque) something. 


amulette 


amulet. 


chose 


thing, is fern. 


animalcule 


animalcule. 


cimeterre 


cimeter. 


antidote 


antidote. 


cimetiere 


church-yard. 


antipode 


antipodes. 


cippe 


cippus. 


aphelie 


aphelion. 


cirque 


circus. 


apogee 


apogee. 


cistophore 


cistophorus. 


apographe 


autograph. 


cloaque 


sink. 


apologue 


apologue. 


coche 


barge. 


aromate 


aromatic. 


coche 


notch, is fem. 


asterisque 


asterisk. 


code 


code 


astragale 


astragal. 


codicille 


codicil. 


athenee 


athaneum. 


codille 


codil. 


augure 


augur. 


colisee 


colisoeum. 


automate 


automaton. 


colloque 


colloquy. 


axe 


axis, {baptism. 


collyre 


collyrium. 


baptistere 


certificate of 


collosse 


colossus. 


basalte 


basal tes. 


colure 


colure. 


becarre 


c-sharp. 


commerce 


trade. 


bejaune 


ninny. 


compte 


account. 


beurre 


butter. 


conciliabule 


conventicle. 


branle 


jogging. 


conclave 


conclave. 


caducee 


caduceum. [ing. 


cone 


cone. 


caique 


counter-draw- 


conte 


tale. 


calville 


calville. 


controle 


register. 


camee 


cornea. 


convenlicule 


private meeting 


campestre 


campestre. 


corpuscule 


corpuscle. 


camphre 


camphire. 


corymbe 


corymbus. 


cantique 


canticle. 


coryphee 


coryphceus. 


capitole 


capitol. [teer. 


cothurne 


buskin. 


capre 


a sort of a priva- 


coude 


elbow. 


cdpre 


caper (a pickle) 


courage 


courage. 


capuce 


capuche [is fern. 


crane 


skull. 


carrosse 


coach. 


cratere 


crater. 


caractere 


character. 


crepe 


crape. 


casque 


helmet. 


crepe 


a kind of pan 


catafalque 


catafalco. 




cake, is fem. 


catalogue 


catalogue. 


crepuscule 


twilight. 


catarrhe 


catarrh. 

C 


cromorne 


krumhorn. 



26 



B0L3IAR S COMPLETE TREATISE 



MASCULINE. 

From the Masculine nouns, that end with a consonant — 
except, also, nouns ending with 

ion ^ which are feminine, with very few exceptions ; 
son > see these terminations among the feminine 
eur ) terminations. 
Nouns ending with the following letters, are Masculine 

2. a] as — opera opera — sofa sofa, dec. 

3. e] as — cafe coffee- — de thimble, dec. 

Exceptions. 

Nouns ending with 

te } • • 

, . . > are feminine ; see feminine terminations, 
tie $ ' 

4. i] as — parti party — pli fold, dec. 

Exceptions. 

loi law, I merci thank, is masc. 

merci mercy, | paroi partition. 

5. o] as — piano piano — numero number, dec. 

Exceptions. 
albugo albugo, | virago virago. 

6. u] as — chapeau hat — -couteau knife, dec. 

Exceptions. 

vertu virtue, 



apres-midi after- 
foi faith, [noon. 



eau water, 
glu bird-lime, 

ge] as — usage usage- 



peau skin, 
tribu tribe, 

—cirage blacking. 
Exceptions. 



alonge eking-piece, 
apophyge apophyge, 
auge trough, 
bauge retreat of a 
cage cage, [wild boar, 
enallage enallage, 
epitoge Roman coat, 
eponge sponge, 
fange mire, 
frange fringe, 
forge forge, 
gorge throat, 
gouge gouge, 



grange barn, 
horloge clock, 
hypallage hypallage, 
image image, 
jauge gage, 
litige litigation, 
loge hut, box. 
longe loin, [sire, 
malerage violent de- 
meninge meninges, 
a la nage swimming, 
neige snow, 
orange orange, 



orge barley, 
page page of a book, 
parasange parasang, 
phalange phalanx, 
plage flat shore, 
purge cleansing, 
rage rage, 
rechange re-ex - 
serge serge, [change, 
tige stalk, 
toge Roman gown, 
vendange vintage, 
vidange clearing. 



ON THE GENDER OF FIIENCH NOUNS. 



27 



List of Masculine nouns, ending with e mute. 



cube 

culte 

decalogue 

decompte 

dedale 

deli re 

demerite 

derriere 

diacode 

dialecte 

dialogue 

diese 

diocese 

disque 

distique 

dithyrambe 

dividende 

divorce 

domaine 

doute 

ellebore 

elysee 

emetique 

empire 

empiree 

entr'acte 

epilogue 

episode 

equinoxe 

erysipele 

escompte 

espace 

euphorbe 

exergue 

exode 

exorde 

faite 

faune 

feurre 

filigrane 

fleuve 

fluide 

foie 



cube, 
worship, 
decalogue, 
discount, 
labyrinth, 
delirium, 
demerit, 
back part. 
dyacodium. 
dialect, 
dialogue, 
sharp, 
diocese, 
disk. 
distich 
dithyrambus. 
dividend, 
divorce, 
domain, 
doubt. 
hellebore. 
elysium. 
emetic, 
empire. 
empyreum. 
interlude. 
epilogue. 
episode, 
equinox, 
erysipelas, 
discount 
space. 

euphorbium. 
exergue, 
exodus. 
exordium, 
top, summit 
faun. 

kind of a straw, 
filigrane. 
river, 
fluid, 
liver. 



genie 

genre 

gite 

glaive 

globe 

globule 

golfe 

grade 

greffe 

groupe 

guide 

guide is fern. 

gymnase 

gynecee 

gypse 

hale 

hemisphere 

hemistiche 

here 

hieroglyphe 

horoscope 

hymenee 

hymne 

iambe 

incendie 

indicule 

insecte 

interligne 

intermede 

intervalle 

jable 

jade 

jaspe 

jeune 

labyrinthe 

laque 

laticlave 

leurre 

levitique 

lexique 

libelle 

limbe 

lithophyte 



gender. 

abode. 

sword. 

globe. 

globule. 

gulf- 
degree. 
?*olls, graft, 
group. -t 
guide, tutor, 
rein. 

gymnasium. 
gymnceceum. 
gypsum, 
sun-burning. 
hemisphere, 
hemistich, 
poor wretch, 
hieroglyphic , 
horoscope. 
hymen, 
hymn. 
iambus. 
conflagration. 
index. 
insect, 
interline* 
interlude, 
interval. 
crome. 
jade, 
jasper. 
fasting, 
labyrinth. 
lacco. 
laticlavium 
lure. 

leviticus. 
lexicon. 
libel. 
limb, 
lithopyton. 



28 



BOLMAR S COMPLETE TREATISE 



MASCULINE, 

8. me] as — crime crime — baume balm, &c. 



alarme alarm, 
ame soul, [ness, 
amertume bitter- 
arme arm, 
brume thick fog, 
cime top, 
coutume custom, 
creme cream, 
dime tithe, 
drachme drachm, 
ecumotfroth, 
enclume anvil, 
enigme enigma, 
epigramme epi- 
gram, 
esc rime fencing, 
estame worsted, 



Exceptions. 

estime esteem, 
ferme farm, 
flamme flame, 
forme form, 
frime pretence, 
gamme gamut, 
gomme gum, 
gourme the stran- 
gles. 
lame blade, 
larme tear, 
legitime share, 
lime file, 
maxime maxim, 
palme victory, 
palme a hand's 
breadth, is m. 



pantomime panto* 
mime, 

paume tennis, palm 
of the hand, 

plate-forme plat- 
form, 

plume feather, 
quill, and pen. 

pomme apple, 

prime prime, 

rame oar, ream, 

reforme reform, 

rime rhyme, 

somme sum, 

somme nap, is m 

trame woof, plot y 

victime victim. 



9. ice] as — orifice opening — sacrifice sacrifice, &c. 

ExClSJrTIUlMS. 



immondice rubbish, 
injustice injustice 
justice justice, 
lice list, 
malice malice, 
matrice mould, 



milice militia, 
notice notice, 
office pantry, 
office office, is m. 
police police, 
varice varix, 



avarice avarice, 
cicatrice scar, 
delices delights, is 

fern, but delice 

delight, is masc 
epice spice, 

10. ile or yle] as — asile asylum — style style, &c. 

Exceptions. 

argile clay, huile oil, vigile vigil, 

bile bile, ile isle, voile sail, 

file file, tuile tile, voile veil, is m. 

11. aire] as — dictionnaire dictionary — vocabulaire vocabulary 

— inventaire inventory, &c 
Exceptions. 

affaire business, grammaire grammar, 

aire area, haire haircloth, 

chaire pulpit, paire pair. 
circulaire circular, 



ON THE GENDERS OF FRENCH NOUNS. 



29 



List of Masculine nouns, ending with e mute. 



lobe 


lobe 


omoplate 


shoulder-blade. 


lobule 


lobulus. 


opuscule 


opuscule. 


logogriphe 


riddle. 


orbe 


orb. 


luxe 


luxury. 


organe 


organ. 


lycee 


lyceum. 


orgue 


organ. 


malaise 


trouble. 


orgues, is fern. 


organs* 


manche 


handle. 


ovale 


oval. 


manche, is fern, sleeve. 


pacte 


bargain, [thers. 


manipule 


maniple. 


panache 


bunch of fea- 


manque 


want. 


pancrace 


pancratium. 


masque 


mash. 


panegyrique 


panegyric. 


mausolee 


mausoleum. 


pantographe 


pantograph. 


mecompte 


mis-reckoning. 


paradoxe 


paradox. 


menisque 


meniscus. 


paragraphe 


paragraph. 


mercure 


mercury. 


parafe 


flourish to a sig- 


merite 


merit. 




nature. 


mesaise 


trouble. 


parallele 


parallel. 


Messie 


Messiah. 


parapluie 


umbrella. 


meteore 


meteor. 


parere 


advice. 


microscope 


microscope. 


parjure 


perjury. 


ministere 


minister y. 


parterre 


flower - garden. 


mode 


mood. 




or pit {theatre.) 


mode, is fern. 


fashion. 


participe 


participle. 


modele 


model. 


patrimoine 


patrimony. 


module 


module. 


pecule 


peculium. 


mole 


pier. 


pedicule 


pedicle. 


monde 


world. 


peigne 


comb. 


monocorde 


monochord. 


pendule 


pendulum. 


monologue 


soliloquy. 


pendule, is fem.clock. 


monopode 


monopodium. 


pene 


bolt. 


monopole 


monopoly. 


pentacorde 


pentachord. 


monastere 


monastery. 


pentateuque 


pentateuch. 


monticule 


small hill. 


perigee 


perigeum. 


moule 


mould. 


perinee 


perinseum. 


multiplicande 


multiplicand. 


periode 


pitch, summit. 


murmure 


murmur. 


periode, is fern. period. 


musee 


musceum." 


peritoine 


peritoneum. 


mystere 


mystery. 


personne 


nobody. 


navire 


ship. 


personne, is f. person. 


negoce 


traffic. 


petale 


petal. 


nimbe 


nimbus. 


|phare 


light-house. 


obelisque 


obelisk. 


iphenomene 


phenomenon 


olympe 


olympus. 


phosphore 


phosphorus. 



c2 



V 



30 



BOLMAR S COMPLETE TREATISE 



MASCULINE. 

12. oire] as — auditoire auditory — memoire account, &e 
Exceptions. 



armoire press, [tub, 
baignoire bathing- 
decrottoire shoe 
foire fair, [brush, 



nageoire fin, 
passoire strainer t 
poire pear, 
victoire victory. 



ecritoire ink-stand, 
gloire glory, 
histoire history, 
memoire memory, 

13. cide] as — homicide homicide- — acide acid, &,c. 

14. ste] as — buste bust — poste post, (military station,) &c. 

Exceptions. 
liste list, 
peste pest, 



15. 



16. 



amethyste amethyst, 
batiste cambric, 



ble 
cle 
He 



piste track, 

poste post , (for let- 

veste vest, [ters,) 

C sable sand — couple a couple (as man and 
as < wife)— siecle century — exemple example, 
( — ongle nail, &,c 

Exceptions. 
debacle breaking 
of ice, 
etable stable, 
exemple copy, 



fable fable, 
regie rule, 
table table. 



aigle eagle (stand- 
bible bible, [ard,) 
boucle buckle, 
couple couple, two, 

' capre a sort of a privateer — foudre large 
vat — livre book-—- pour pre purple (stuff) 
— monstre monster— cadre frame, &c. 

Exceptions. 
epitre epistle 
escadre squadron of 
fibre fibre, [ships 
fenetre window, 



ere 
dre 
fre 



gre 
pre 
tre 
vre 



acre acre, 
algebre algebra, 
ancre anchor, 
anti-chambre anti- 
chamber, 
balafre scar, 
calandre calender 
capre caper (pickle) 
cliambre chamber, 
cendre ashes, 
chartre charter, 
dartre tetter, 
encre ink, 



fie vre fever, 
foudre thunder bolt, 
gaufre wafer, 
guetre gaiter, 
lettre letter, 
levre lip, 
livre pound, [vre, 



manoeuvre manozu- vitre pane of glass 



mitre mitre, 
montre watch, 
nacre nakre, 
ceuvre works of an 
offre offer, [author, 
ombre shade, 
outre leather bottle, 
poudre powder, 
pourpre purple (co- 
poutre beam, [lor,) 
rencontre meeting, 



ON THE GENDERS OP FRENCH NOUNS. 



31 



List of Masculine nouns, ending with e mute. 



planisphere 


planisphere. 


remise, is fern, coach-house. 


plebiscite 


plebiscitum. 


repere 


mark. 


poele or poile 


stove, pall. 


reproche 


reproach. 


poele, is fern. 


frying-pan. 


reve 


dream. 


pole 


pole. 


reverbere 


street-lamp. 


polygone 


polygon. 


risque 


risk. 


polype 


polypus. 


role 


part. 


polypode 


polypodium. 


sacerdoce 


priesthood. 


ponche 


punch. 


scandale 


scandal. 


pore 


pore. 


scrupule 


scruple. 


pore he 


porch. 


sexe 


sex. 


porphyre 


porphyry. 


signe 


sign. 


portique 


portico. 


silence 


silence. 


pouce 


thumb, inch. 


simulacre 


simulacre. 


preambule 


preamble. 


site 


site. 


precepte 


precept. 


socque 


sock. [count. 


preche 


protestant ser- 


solde 


balance of ac~ 


prelude 


pr elude, [mon. 


solde, is fern. 


soldier's pay. 


presbitere 


presbytery. 


soliloque 


soliloquy. 


pretexte 


pretext. 


somme 


nap. 


principe 


principle. 


somme 


sum, is fern. 


prologue 


prologue, [ing. 


sourire 


smile, 


prone 


sermon, scold- 


spherdide. 


spheroid. 


protocole 


protocol. 


specifique 


specific. 


prove rbe 


proverb. 


spondee 


spondee. 


pylore 


pylorus, [gure. 


squelette 


skeleton. 


quadrilatere 


quadrilateral fi- 


stade 


stade. 


quadrille 


quadrille. 


store 


blind. 


quaterne 


combination of 


subside 


subsidy. 




four numbers 


symbole 


symbol. 




at the lottery. 


synode 


synod. 


quinconce 


quincunx. 


tarse 


tarsus. 


quine 


combination of 


telegraphe 


telegraph. 




five numbers 


telescope 


telescope. 




at the lottery. 


tenare 


tsenarus. 


quinquenove 


quinquenove. 


teorbe or tuorbe theorbo. 


quinquerce 


quinquertium. 


terne 


combination of 


rcgne 


reign. 




three numbers 


regule 


regulus. 




at the lottery. 


relache 


relaxation. 


texte 


text. 


relache, is fern 


. harbour. 


thyrse 


thyrsus. 


remede 


remedy. 


tintamarre 


thundering noise. 


remise 


hired coach. 


tithymale 


tithymal 



, 



i 
I' 



32 bolmar's complete treatise, 

List of Masculine nouns, ending with e mute. 



tonnerre 


thunder. 


ulcere 


ulcer. 


topique 


topic. 


vase 


vase. 


toxique 


toxicum. 


vase, is fern. 


mud. 


traite 


treaty, treatise. 


vaudeville 


ballad. 


trapeze 


trapazium. 


vehicule 


vehicle. 


tribute 


calthrop. 


verbe 


verb. 


triomphe 


triumph. 


vermicelle 


vermicelli. 


trochee 


trochee. 


verre 


glass. 


trochisque 


trochisch. 


vestibule 


lobby. 


trone 


throne. 


viatique 


viaticum. 


trope 


trope. 


vide 


emptiness. 


trophee 


trophy. 


vignoble 


small vineyard 


tropique 


tropic. 


violoncelle 


violoncello. 


tube 


tube. 


vise ere 


intestines. 


tubercule 


tubercle. 


vote 


vote. 


tumulte 


tumult. 


zele 


zeal. 


tuorbe 


theorbo. 


zodiaque 


zodiac. 


type 


type. 







80. Among the French nouns ending with eur, there are some that are 
used both for the masculine and the feminine. We say, in speaking of a 
gentleman, il est Vauteur de ce livre, he is the author of this book ; and 
of a lady, elle est Vauteur de ce livre, she is the authoress of this book. 
Some change the termination eur into euse for the feminine ; thus we say 
of a gentleman, un dans eur, a dancer; and of a lady, tine danseuse, a 
dancer. Some change the termination eur into vice thus, we say of a 
gentleman, un lecteur, a reader; and of a lady, une lectrice, a reader. 
Some others are very irregular in the formation of the feminine. 

81. Some of the nouns ending with eur are also used as adjectives; 
they will be found among the adjectives, page 49, and will be pointed 
out in the three following lists, by an asterisk * placed before them. 

82. All substantives ending with eur, not found in the three following 
lists, have no feminine, or their feminine is like the masculine. 

83. List of nouns ending with eur for the masculine, and euse for the 
feminine. 



Masculine. 


Feminine. 


English. 


.Accapareur 


accapareuse 


monopoliser. 


.acheteur 


acheteuse 


buyer. 


afTronteur 


afFronteuse 


impostor. 


.arracheur 


arracheuse 


pidler. 


avaleur 


avaleuse 


one that swallows 


.baigneur 


baigneuse 


bather. 


balayeur 


balayeuse 


sweeper. 



ON THE GENDERS OF FRENCH NOUNS. 



33 



Masculine. 


Feminine. 


English. 


baragouineur 


baragouineuse 


jabberer. 


barguineur 


barguineuse 


haggler. 


bateleur 


bateleuse 


juggler. 


bayeur [er 


bayeuse 


gaper. 


.blancbisseur, bleach- 


blanchisseuse 


-washerwoman. 


-boudeur 


boudeuse 


one -who pouts. 


bousilleur 


bousilleuse 


bungler. 


.brasseur 


brasseuse 


brewer. 


bredouilleur 


bredouilleuse 


stammerer. 


brocardeur 


brocardeuse 


scoffer. 


brocbeur 


brocheuse 


stitcher. 


.brodeur 


brodeuse 


embroiderer. 


brunisseur 


brunisseuse 


burnisher. 


.buveur 


buveuse 


drinker. 


-cajoleur 


cajoleuse 


cajoler. 


caqueteur 


caqueteuse 


prattler. 


cardeur 


cardeuse 


carder. 


* .causeur 


causeuse 


talker. 


.chanteur 


5 chanteuse 
Z cantatrice 


singer. 


si?iger 


a theatrical singer. 


.chasseur 


5 chasseuse 
(. chasseresse 


huntress. [huntress 


hunter 


used in poetry. 


chercheur 


chercheuse 


seeker. 


chicaneur 


chicaneuse 


chicaner. 


chuchoteur 


chuchoteuse 


whisperer. 


clabaudeur 


clabaudeuse 


elamorer. 


.coiffeur 


coiffeuse 


hair dresser. 


.complimenteur 


complimenteuse 


complimenter. 


.confiseur 


confiseuse 


confectioner. 


.connaisseur 


connaisseuse 


connoisseur 


conteur 


conteuse 


teller. 


.coucheur 


coucheuse 


bed-fellow. 


.coupeur 


coupeuse 


cutter. 


.coureur 


coureuse 


runner. 


.cracheur 


cracheuse 


spitter. 


craqueur 


craqueuse 


Jibber. 


criailleur 


criailleuse 


squaller. 


crieur 


crieuse 


baiuler. 


.danseur 


danseuse 


dancer. 


.debiteur 


debiteuse 


spreader of news* 


.debiteur 


debitrice 


debtor. 


de coupeur 


decoupeuse 


carver. 


demandeur 


demandeuse 


begger. 


demandeur 


demandresse 


prosecutor. 


devideur 


devideuse 


winder. 


.devineur 


devineuse 


guesser. 


devineur, diviner 


devineresse 


divineress. 


discoureur 


discoureuse 


tattler 


.diseur 


diseuse 


teller. 


.donneur 


donneuse 


giver. 


doreur 


doreuse 


gilder. 


.dormeur 


dormeuse 


sleeper. 


ecornifleur 


ecornifleuse 


spunger. 



T 



34 



\ 


GENDERS 




Masculine. 


Feminine. 


English. 


.ecouteur 


ecouteuse 


listener. 


emboiseur 


emboiseuse 


coaxer. 


empailleur 


empailleuse 


C one that makes straw 
£ bottoms for chairs. 


empeseur 


empeseuse 


st arc her. 


empoisonneur 


empoisonneuse 


poisoner. 


.emprunteur 


emprunteuse 


borrower. 


enjoleur 


enjoleuse 


wheedler. [or prints. 


enlumineur 


enlumineuse 


one who colors maps 


ensorceleur 


ensorceleuse 


bewitcher. 


.entrepreneur 


entrepreneuse 


undertaker. 


eplucheur 


eplucheuse 


picker 


escroqueur 


escroqueuse 


sharper. 


.faiseur 


faiseuse 


maker. 


faneur 


faneuse 


haymaker. 


fendeur 


fendeuse 


cleaver. 


.fileur 


fileuse 


spinner. 


finasseur 


finasseuse 


a sly person. 


tlagorneur 


flagomeuse 


sycophant. 


*.flatteur 


flatteuse 


flatterer. 


fliiteur 


fliiteuse 


whistler. 


frappeur 


frappeuse 


striker. 


fraudeur 


fraudeuse 


cheat. 


gageur 


gageuse 


better. 


.gagneur 


gagneuse 


gainer. 


gardeur 


gardeuse 


keeper. 


gasjpilleur 


gaspilleuse 


squanderer. 


gausseur 


gausseuse 


flouter. 


.glaneur 


glaneuse 


gleaner. 


glisseur 


glisseuse 


slider. 


gloseur 


gloseuse 


censurer. 


goailleur 


goailleuse 


jeerer. 


grapilleur 


grapilleuse 


grape gleaner. 


.grasseyeur 


grasseyeuse 


lisper. 


.grondeur 


grondeuse 


scolder. 


hableur 


hableuse 


boaster. 


jargonneur 


jargonneuse 


gibberer. 


.jaseur 


jaseuse 


prater. 


jeuneur 


jeiineuse 


faster. 


.joueur 


joueuse 


gamester. 


jugeur 


jugeuse 


judger. 


louangeur 


louangeuse 


praiser. 
Cpraiser, or a person 


loueur 


loueuse 


*\ who lets out any 
C thing. 


laveur 


laveuse 


washer. 


leveur 


leveuse 


5 one who takes up 
C printed sheets. 


ligueur 


ligueuse 


leaguer. 


liseur 


liseuse 


a lover of reading. 


macheur 


macheuse 


chewer. 


.mangeur 


mange use 


eater. 


.marcheirr 


marcheuse 


walker. 



OF FRENCH NOUNS. 



35 



Masculine 


Feminine. 


English. 


marieur 


marieuse 


matchmaker. 


*.menteur 


menteuse 


liar. 


.moissonneur 


moissonneuse 


reaper. 


*.moqueur 


moqueuse 


mocker. 


.nageur 


nageuse 


swimmer. 


ouvreur 


ouvreuse 


box-keeper. 


.parfumeur 


parfumeuse 


perfumer 


.parleur 


parleuse 


talker. 


piailleur 


piailleuse 


squaller. 


.plaideur 


plaideuse 


narrator. 


.pleureur 


pleureuse 


•weeper. 


plieur 


plieuse 


folder. 


polisseur 


polisseuse 


polisher. 


.porteur 


porteuse 


porter. 


pourvoyeur 


pourvoyeuse 


purveyor. 


.preneur 


preneuse 


taker 


.preteur 


preteuse 


lender. 


.prometteur 


prometteuse 


promiser. 


.proneur 


proneuse 


praiser. 


*.querelleur 


querelleuse 


quarreller. 


.questionneur 


questionneuse 


questioner, 
rone that goes about to 


queteur 


que te use 


^ obtain money for 
? charitable purposes, 
rone that makes tire- 


rabacheur 


rabacheuse 


} some repetitions in 
/ discourse. 


raccomodeur 


raccomodeuse 


mender. 


raconteur 


raconteuse 


relater. 


.radoteur 


radoteuse 


dotard. 


*.railleur 


railleuse 


jeerer. 


.raisonneur 


raisonneuse 


reasoner. 


rangonneur 


ran^onneuse 


exacter. 


.rapporteur 


rapporteuse 


reporter. 


ravaudeur 


ravaudeuse 


patcher. 


receleur 


receleuse 


concealer. 


.receveur 


receveuse 


receiver 
rone -who puts nenv 


rempailleur 


rempailleuse 


3 straw bottoms to 
? chairs. 


remueur 


remueuse 


mover. 


.repasseur, grinder 


repasseuse 


one tvho irons linen. 


.revendeur 


revendeuse 


huckster 


*.reveur 


reveuse 


dreamer 


.ricaneur 


ricaneuse 


giggler. 


.rieur 


rieuse 


laugher. 


rioteur 


rioteuse 


smiler. 


rogneur 


rogneuse 


clipper. 


.ronfleur 


ronfleuse 


snorer. 


rotisseur 


rotisseuse 


one that roasts meat. 


roupilleur 


roupilleuse 


dozing person. 


sarcleur 


sarcleuse 


iveeder. 


.sauteur 


sauteuse 


leaper. 



36 



5 


GENDERS 




Masculine 


Feminine. 


English. 


.siffleur 


siffleuse 


ivhistler. 


souffleteur 


souffleteuse 


c one tvho slaps the 
£ cheeks of another. 


souffleur 


souffleuse 


prompter. 


suborneur 


suborneuse 


suborner. 


tateur 


tateuse 


feeler. 


tatonneur 


tatonneuse 


fumbler. 
Cone -who takes the 


tilleur 


tilleuse 


2 filaments from the 
£ hemp or fax plant. 


.tisonneur 


tisonneuse 


c one -who likes to poke 
£ the fire 


tousseur 


tousseuse 


cougher. 


.trembleur 


trembleuse 


coward. 


tricoteur \ 


tricoteuse 


knitter. 


*.trompeur 


trompeuse 


deceiver. 


troqueur 


troqueuse 


swapper. 


veilleur 


veilleuse 


night -watcher. 
r one -whose profes- 


.vendeur 


vendeuse 


^ sion is to sell any 


- 




( thing. 


.vendeur 


venderesse 


one ivho sells. 


.vendangeur 


vendangeuse 


vintager. 


verbiageur 


verbiageuse 


a prolix talker. 


ve tilleur 


vetilleuse. 


punctilious person. 


vielleur 


vielleuse 


C player of the hurdy 
\ gurdy. 


.voleur 


voleuse 


thief. 


.voyageur 


voyageuse 


traveller. 


84. List of nouns ending with eur for the masculine and rice for the 

mininp 


iiwuiic 

Masculine. 


Feminine. 


English. 


Accelerates 


acceleratrice 


accelerator. 


.accompagnateur 


ac c ompagnatrice 


accompanist. 


.accusateur, accuser 


accusatrice 


accuseress. 


.acteur, actor 


actrice 


actress. 


administrates, a dmi- 


administratrice 


administratrix. 


.admirateur [nistrator 


admiratrice 


admirer. 


*.adorateur 


adoratrice 


adorer. 


.adulateur, adulator 


adulatrice 


adulatress. 


.ambassadeur, ambas- 


ambassadrice 


ainbassadress. 


approbateur [sador 


approbatrice 


approver. 


.bienfaiteur, benefac- 


bienfaitrice 


benefactress. 


xalomniateur [tor 


calomniatrice 


calumniator. 


.collaborates 


collaboratrice 


felloiv-labourer. 


.conciliateur [tor 


conciliatrice 


conciliator. 


.conducteur, conduc- 


conductrice 


conductress. 


.conservateur 


conservatrice 


conservator. 


.consolateur 


consolatrice 


consoler. 


. contemplateur 


contemplatrice 


contemplator. 


.co-ope rateur 


co-ope>atrice 


co-operator. 


•correcteur 


correctrice 


corrector. 






OF FRENCH NOUNS. 



37 



Masculine, 
.corrupteur 
*.createur, creator, 
.curateur 
.debiteur 
.debiteur 
.delateur 
.denonciateur 
*.desapprobateur 
.dessmzteur, draught- 
detenteur [man 

*.devastateur 
dilapidateur 
.directeur, director 
.dispensateur 
.dissiraulateur 
.dissipateur 
.distribute ur 
divulgateur 
dominateur 
.donateur 

emulateur, emulator 
.exagerateur 
.executeur, executor 
.expositeur 
fa uteur,y*a ui or 
.fondateur 
.generateur 
.imitate ur 
*improbateur 

improvisateur 

inoculateur 

insidiateur 

.inspecteur 

•instigateur 

.instituteur ^instructor 

.interpretateur 

interrupteur 

introducteur 

.inventeur 

investigateur 

.lecteur 

.legislateur, legislator 

.liberateur 

.litterateur 

.mediateur, mediator 

moderateur 

*.observateur 

.operateur 

.perse cuteur 

perturbateur 

presentateur 

.profanateur 



Feminine, 
corruptrice 
creatrice 
curatrice 
debitrice 
debiteuse 
delatrice 
denonciatrice 
desapprobatrice 
dessinatrice 
detentrice 
devastatrice 
dilapidatrice 
directrice 
dispensatrice 
dissimulatrice 
dissipatrice 
distributrice 
divulgatrice 
dominatrice 
donatrice 
emulatrice 
exageratrice 
executrice 
expositrice 
fautrice 
fondatrice 
generatrice 
imitatrice 
improbatrice 

improvisatrice 

inoculatrice 
insidiatvice 
inspec trice 
instigatrice 
institutrice 
interpretatrice 
interruptrice 
introductrice 
inventrice 
investigatrice 
lectrice 
legislatrice 
liberatrice 
litteratrice 
mediatrice 
moderatrice 
observatrice 
operatrice 
perse cutrice 
perturbatrice 
presentatrice 
profanatrice 
D 



English. 

corruptor. 

creatress, 

curator, 

debtor, 

spreader of news, 

delator, 

denunciator, 

blamer, 

a lady toho draws. 

detainer, 

destroyer, 

spendthrift, 

directress, 

dispensator, 

dissembler, 

waster. 

distributer, 

divulger. 

dominator, 

donor. 

emulatress. 

amplifier, 

executrix, 

expositor, 

fautress, 

founder. 

generator, 

imitator, 

one who improbates, 
C one who speaks ex- 
ir tempore. 

ino dilator, 

insidiator. 

inspector, 

instigator. 

instructress. 

interpreter. 

interrupter, 

introducer, 

inventor, 

indagator. 

reader, 

legislatress, 

liberator, 

a literary character, 

mediatress, 

moderator, 

observer. 

operator, 

persecutor, 

perturbator, 

patron, 

profaner. 



I 



38 



GENDERS OF FRENCH NOUNS. 



Masculine. 
* .Ipxotectemjjrotector 
.reconciliateur 
.reformateur 
.seducteur 

.spectateur, spectator 
subornateur 
.tentateur, tempter 
.testateur 
.tuteur 
.violateur 
.usurpateur 
.zelateur 



Feminine, 
protectrice 
reconciliatrice 
reformatrice 
seductrice 
spectatrice 
subornatrice 
tentatrice 
testatrice 
tutrice 
violatrice 
usurpatrice 
zelatrice 



85. List of nouns ending with eur for the 
their feminine variously. 
Masculine. 



•Avant-coureur 
bailleur 
chanteur 
chanteur 

.chasseur, hunter 

defendeur 
demandeur 
dernandeur 
derineur 
.devineur 
dissertateur ~) 
disserteur 3 
.empereur, emperor 
*. en chanteur, 

enchanter 
.gouverneur, gover- 
.pecheur [nor 

procureur 
procureur, solicitor 
.serviteur 
.vendeur 
.vendeur 
* .vengeur, avenger 



Feminine, 
avant-couriere 
bailleresse 
cantatrice 
chanteuse 

c chasseresse 

"£ chasseuse 
defendresse 
demandresse 
demandeuse 
devineresse 
devineuse 

disserteuse 

imperatrice 
enchanteresse 

gouvernante 

pecheresse 

procuratrice 

procureuse 

servante 

venderesse 

vendeuse 

vengeresse 



English. 
protectress, 
reconciler, 
reformer, 
seducer, 
spectatress, 
briber, 
temptress, 
testator, 
guardian, 
infringer, 
usurper, 
zealot. 

masculine, and which form 

English. 
forerunner, 
lessor. 

opera singer, 
singer. 

huntress, (in poetry.') 
huntress, 
defendant, 
prosecutor, 
beggar, 
divineress. 
guesser. 

dissertator. 

empress, 
enchantress. 

governess. 

sinner. [proxy. 

one -who acts by 

the solicitor's wife. 

servant. 

seller. [is to sell. 

one -whose profession 

avengeress. 



86. I have said much on the nouns ending with eur because the sub- 
ject could not be treated in a shorter way to be of any use. No grammar 
that I know gives any information on this subject. Wanostrocht does 
not speak of it. What Levizac says about it, page 87, of his own gram- 
mar, is no direction for the learner. Many nouns in the above three lists 
are seldom used. It would be well if the learner committed to memory 
those before which a . is placed as the most used. 



NUMBERS. 39 



OF NUMBERS. 

87. By Number is understood that property which nouns have of de- 
noting either one or several persons or things. 

88. There are two numbers, the singular and the plural. 

89. The singular number expresses but one person or one thing — as, 
a man, a table, &c. 

90. The plural number expresses more than one person or thing — as, 
men, tables, &c. 

Of the Formation of the Plural of French Substantives. 

Direction. 

91. Whenever you want to form the plural of any French noun — 1st, 
See whether that noun does not come under the following exceptions 
(which may be ascertained by its termination in the singular) : if it does 
not come under any of the exceptions, then it comes under the general 
rule. 

General Rule. 

92. The plural of French nouns, is generally formed, as in English, by 
the addition of an s to the singular, as : 

porte door, portes doors, 

rue street, rues streets. 

Exceptions. 

93. 1st, All nouns ending in the singular, with s, x, or z, remain the 
same for the plural, as: 

fils son, fils so?is, 

voix voice, voix voices, 

nez nose, nez noses. 

94. 2d, All nouns ending in the singular with an, en, or ceu, take x to 
form the plural, as: 

bateau boat, bateaux boats, 

feu fire, feux fires, 

voeu vow, voeux vows. 

95. 3d, Of nouns ending in the singular, with ou, 6 of them take x to 
form the plural ; the rest follow the general rule, that is, they take ; 

bijou jewel, 

caillou pebble, 

chou cabbage, 

genou knee, 

hibou owl, 

joujou plaything, joujoux playthings. 

96. 4th, Of nouns ending in the singular with al, 20 of them change 
that termination al into aux, to form the plural. The rest follow the ge- 
neral rule, that is, they simply take 5 to form the plural. 

amiral admiral, amiraux admirals. 

arsenal arsenal, arsenaux arsenals. 

canal canal, canaux canals. 



bijoux 

cailloux 

choux 


jewels, 

pebbles, 

cabbages. 


genoux 


knees, 


hiboux 


owls, 



40 





NUMBERS. 




capital 


principal, 


capitaux 


principals. 


cheval 


horse, 


chevaux 


horses. 


cristal 


crystal, 


cristaux 


crystals. 


fanal 


light-House, 


fanaux 


light-houses. 


general 


general, 


generaux 


generals. 


hopital 


hospital, 


hopitaux 


hospitals. 


madrigal 


madrigal, 


madrigaux 


madrigals. 


raal 


evil, 


niaux 


evils. 


marechal 


farrier, marshal, 


marechaux 


farriers. 


metal 


metal, 


metaux 


metals. 


mineral 


mineral, 


mineraux 


minerals. 


quintal 


quintal, 


quintaux 


quintals. 


rival 


rival, 


rivaux 


rivals. 


signal 


signal, 


signaux 


signals. 


total 


total, 


totaux 


totals. 


tribunal 


tribunal, 


tribunaux 


tribunals. 


vassal 


vassal, 


vassaux 


vassals. 



97. 5th, Of nouns ending in the singular with ail, 8 of them change 
that termination ail into aux, to form the plural. The rest follow the 
general rule, that is, they take s for the plural. 



bail 


lease, 


baux 


leases. 


corail 


coral, 


coraux 


corals. 


email 


enamel, 


emaux 


enamels. 


soupirail 


vent, 


soupiraux 


vents. 


sous-bail 


under-lease, 


sous-baux 


under-leases. 


travail 


work 


travaux 


ivorks. 


vantail 


C a leaf of a 
(_ folding door, 


vantaux 


C leaves of a 
(_ folding door. 



98. 6th, Nouns of more than one syllable ending in the singular with 
ant and ent, according to the most general practice, drop the t and take 
s to form the plural, as : 

enfant child, enfans children. 

moment moment, momens moments. 

99. 7th, Monosyllables retain the t and take s to form the plural, as : 

gant glove. gants gloves. 

dent tooth, dents teeth. 

100. 8th, The only monosyllable that drops the t and takes 5 is gent, 
nation, which makes gens, people. 

101. 9th, The six following nouns are quite irregular in the formation 
of their plural. 

ail garlick, 

be tail cattle, 

aicul grandfather, 

ciel heaven, 

ceil eye, 

bercail sheepfold, has no plural. 

miel honey, has no plural. 

102. 10th, A'i.eul, ml, ciel, make also a'ieids, dels, ails, as: ses aieuls, 
meaning a person's two grandfathers ; des cjels-de-lit, testers of beds ; 
des ceils de bceuf, ovals. 



aulx 


garlicks. 


bestiaux 


cattle. 


aieux 


ancestors. 


cieux 


heavens. 


yeux 


eyes. 



NUMBERS. 41 



Of the formation of the plural of Compound Nouns. 

103. N. B. As several parts of speech are here introduced which have 
not yet been explained, no exercise on them will be given in this place. 
I give these rules now to be referred to hereafter. 

104. When a noun is compounded of a substantive and an adjective 
both take the mark of the plural, as : 

un gentilhomme, a nobleman , des gentilshommes, noblemen ; 
une basse-cour, a poultry-yard ; des basscs-cours, poultry yards. 

105. We say for the sake of pronunciation without giving to the ad 
jective the mark of the plural : 

graiuTmere grandmother, grand 'meres grandmothers. 

grand messe high mass, grand messes high masses. 

106. When a noun is compounded with a verb or with an adverb and 
a substantive, the substantive alone takes the mark of the plural, as : 

un tournebroche a jack, des toumebvoches jacks. 

un avant-coureur a fore-runner, des avant-coureurs fore-runners. 

107. When a noun is compounded of two substantives united by a 
preposition, the first alone takes the mark of the plural, as : 

unmaitre-tThdtel, a steward. des maitres-dC hotel, stewards. 

108. Coq-a-l'une, and tete-a-tete do not take the mark of the plural ; 
We say un coq-a-1'ane, des coq-a-1'ane, un tete-a-tete, des tete-a-tete. 

109. Words compounded with a verb and an adverb, or with a prepo- 
sition, do not take the mark of the plural, as : 

nn passe-partout, a master key. des passe-partout, master keys. 

110. The following nouns, compounded with sleur, dame, demoiselle, 
and with the possessive pronoun mon and ma, take 5 for the plural, and 
change mon and ma into mes : 

JVIonsieur, Sir or Gentleman, .Messieurs, Sirs or Gentlemen, 

Jlfadame, Madam, JMesdames, Ladies, 

Mademoiselle, Miss, JYfesdemoiselles, Misses. 

111. N. B. In the following exercises the French noun, when put under 
the English, will be put in the singular : the learner will have to form 
the plural according to the foregoing rules and exceptions whenever the 
English noun is in the plural : 

EXERCISE. 

the niceties of the languages, 

dtlicatesse langue, 

the woods of those countries, 
bois P a ys-, 

the pictures of those painters, 
tableau peintre, 

the melody of their voices, the gods of 
melodie f. voix, dieu 

the pagans, the jewels of my sisters, the cabbages of our gardens, 
paten, bijou, sceur, chou jar din, 

these charming places, the horses of my stables, the fans of these 

-charmans x lieu, cheval ecurie, iventail 

ladies, the (front gates) of those churches, the actions of my 
dame, portail iglise, 

d2 



The flowers 


of the gardens, 


flew 
the palaces 
palais 
the walnuts 


of 
of 


jardin, 
the kings, 

rot, 
their orchard? 


noix verger, 
the feathers of these birds, th 


plume 




oiseau, 



42 OF THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. 

ancestors, the evils of this life, the victories of those generals, 

aieul, mal vie, 

the works of those architects, the corals of those seas, the 

travail architecte, corail mer, 

(learned men) of those times, the presents of my parents, the 

savant temps-la, 

teeth of your combs, the playthings of our children, the heads of 
dent peigne, joujou enfant, ttte 

these nails. 
clou. 



CHAPTER II. 

OF THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. 



1 12. The definite article is a small word prefixed to substantives to 
determine the extent of their signification. 

C le before a sing, mascu. *\ 
The French defi- ) substantive. f the plural is les for both 

nite article is J la before a sing, femin. f" genders. 

C substantive. j 

EXAMPLES. 
q. ^ le jour the day 1 , (les jours the days. 

& * Z la nuit the night S 'ties nuits the nights. 
EXERCISE. 
The sun, the moon, and the stars, are the glory of nature. 
soleil,m. lime, f. Hoile, f. sont f. art. f. 

The king, the queen, and the princes are well pleased. The 

roi, reine, trcs-satisfaits. 

rose, the violet, the tulip, the narcissus, the hyacinth, 

f. violetie, f. tulipe, f. narcisse, m. jacinthe, f, 

the gilliflower. the jasmine, the lily, the honeysuckle, the 

giroflte,i. jasmin, in. lis, m, chtvre-feiiille, m. 

ranunculus, are the delight of the sight. Poetry, 

renoncule f. delices f. pi. vue f. art. poLsie, f. art. 

painting, and music are (sister arts). The day and the 

peinture, f. art. mnsique f. sceurs. jour m. 

night are equally necessary. f 

nuit f. egalement necessaires. 

113. The article is subject to elision and contraction. (Seepage 14.) 

114. Elision of the article is the omitting of the e in le, or the a in ia, 
when these articles precede a noun beginning with a vowel or h mute. 

EXAMPLES. 
l'argant C . , f C"fe argent the money, 

l'histoire \ msleaa 0I \ la histoire the history. 

115. But in this case the place of the letter thus omitted is supplied by 
an apostrophe. 

The soul of man without cultivation is like a diamond 
ame f. art. homme m. sans culture est comme diamant m. 



OF THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. 43 

(in the rough). The history of Spain is sometimes very interesting. 
brut. histoire f. Espagne est quelquefois trts-inttressante. 

(Look at) the amaranth and the anemone; what beauty! 
Considerez amaranths f. f. quelle 

Self-love and pride are always the offspring of a weak 

art. amour-propre art. orgueil sont toujours partage m. ' 2 faible 
mind. Honesty, innocence, honour, and the love of 

1 esprit m. art. Hotinetete, art. art. honneur amour art. 

virtue are (very much esteemed). Summer, autumn, and 
vert u f. tris-estimes art. ite art. automne, art. 

winter are very changeable. France is separated from Italy by the 
hiver variables, art. st parte de art. Italie par 

Alps, and from Spain by the Pyrenees. 
Alpes, art. Pyrenees. 

116. Contraction in grammar is the reducing of two syllables into one, 
and takes place when the preposition a or de precedes the article ; in 
which case, instead of putting de le before a masculine singular, beginning 
with a consonant or h aspirated, du must be employed ; instead of a le, an 
must be used ; and before the plural substantives of both genders, de les 
is changed into des, and a les into aux. 

("Du roi is instead of de le roi of the king 

I du hcros de le heros of the hero 

I au roi a le roi to the king 

rp, J au hcros a le heros to the hero 

"^ des rois • de les rois of the kings 

des rcines de les reines of the queens 

aux rois a les rois to the kings 

jiux rcines a les reines to the queens 

EXERCISE. 

The top of the mountains and the bottom of the vallies are 

somraet m. montagne fond m. vallee 

equally agreeable. Silk is soft to the touch. The 

•ables, art. Soie £ douce toucher m. 

happiness of a Reeling 'man is to relieve the wants of the poor. 

bonheur m. sensible de subvenir a besoin p-auvre m. s. 

A man given to pleasure was never a great man. He obeyed the 

•£ art. plaisir m. fiti grand II obtit a 

orders of the king. The warbling of birds, the murmuring of 
ordres gazouiUementm. art. oiseau, murmur em. art. 

streams, the enamel of meadows, the coolness of woods, the 

ruisseau, email m. art. prairie, fraicheur f. art. bois, 

fragrance of flowers and the sweet smell of plants contribute 
parfumm. art. fleur douce odeur f. art. plante contribuent 

greatly to the pleasures of the mind and to the health of the body. 
beaut esprit sante f. corps m. 

117. De and a are never contracted with la before a sing. fern, sub- 
stantive beginning w 7 ith a consonant or an h aspirated. 

EXAMPLES. 

De la reine of the queen a la reine to the queen. 

118. Nor are de and a contracted with le or la before any substantive 
singular beginning with a vowel or h mute, but then the article suffers 
elision. 



44 OF THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. 

EXAMPLES. 

De r esprit of the mind de Vhomme of the man 

A V esprit to the mind a Vhomme to the man 

De Vame of the soul a Vame to the soul 

De Vhistoire of the history a Vhistoire to the history 

119. Contraction likewise does not take place when the adjective tout, 
all, every, intervenes between de or a and the article. 

EXAMPLES. 
De tout le monde, of every body A tons les homines, to all men 
De tons les hommes, of all men De toutes les vertus, of alLrfirtues 

A tout le monde, to every body A toutes les maisons, to aja houses 

EXERCISE. 
The hope of success strengthened the cause of virtue 
esptrance f. art. reussite f, foriijia f. art. vertu f. 

and weakened the audaciousness of rebellion. Fire of 

affaiblit audace f. art. f. art. Feu m. art. 

imagination, strength of mind, and firmness of soul, 

f. art. force f. art. esprit, art. fermete f. art. ame, 

are* gifts of nature, We saw with horror that man (given up) 

des don art. f. Nous vimes avec livre 

to avarice and voluptuousness. Good cultivation is that 

art. a art. volupte f. art. Bonne culture f. ce 

which contributes most to the fertility of the soil. More or less 

qui contribue le plus terre f. Plus ou moins 

pain is the lot of (every body.) The history of man under 

de peine partage m. tout le monde m. art. dans 

all the circumstances of life is the study of the wise. 
toutes circonstance f. art. vie f. etude sage m. sing. 

Playfulness (does not become) all ages nor all 

art. Enjouement m. ne sied ni a art. m. ni a art. 

characters. 
caractcre ra. 

120. General Rtjle. In French, the article always agrees in gender 
and number with the substantive to which it relates. 

EXAMPLES. 
Le livre que je cherche, The book which I am looking for. 

Ijafemme que je vois, The woman whom I see. 

Les homines qui itudient, The men that study. 

EXERCISE. 
The father, mother, brothers, sisters, uncles, aunts, 
ptre art. mere art. frere art. sceur art. oncle art. tante 
and several other relations were present. What we 

plusieurs autres parens ctaient presens, Ce que nous 
value is health, frugality, liberty, vigour of 

estimons c'est art. sante f. art. f. art, f. art. vigueur f. art. 

mind and body ; it is the love of virtue, reverence 

de art. corps m. ce amour m. art. f. art. crainte f. 

for the gods, fidelity to all mankind, moderation in 

de dieu m. art. f. envers art. monde m art. f. dans 

prosperity, fortitude in adversity, courage, good 

art. f. art. force f. art. f. art. m. art. bonnes 

morals, and the abhorrence of flattery. 
mceur horreur f. art. f. 



OF THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. 



45 



121. General Rule. The article and the prepositions a and de, 
whether contracted or not, are invariably to be repeated before every 
substantive. 

EXAMPLES. 
Uesprit, Ies graces, et la beautt nous Wit, grace, and beauty, captivate 



captivent. 
Je vis hier le roi, la reine, et les 

princes. 
\* ignorance est la mere de Verreur, 

de V admiration, et des preventions 

de toute espece. 



I saw yesterday the king, queen, 

and princes. 
Ignorance is the mother of error, 

admiration, and prejudices of 

every kind. 

EXERCISE. 

Innocence of manners, sincerity, obedience, , and 

art. f. art. mceur art. f. art. obiissance f. art. 

abhorrence of vice, * inhabit this happy region. The plants 

horreur art. m. habit ent heureuse f. plante 

of the gardens, the animals of the forests, the minerals of the earth, 

jar din, m. f°ret t f. terre f. 

the meteors of the sky, must all concur to store the mind 

meteore del, m. doivent tons concourir a enrichir 

with an inexhaustible 'variety. Neither suffering punishment 
par ine puis able f. * 

nor kindness (make any) 

* art. carresse f. pi. ne font nidle 
The lily is the emblem of 

lis m. symbole m. art. 

innocence, and purity. 

f. de art. purete f. 

122. Du, de la, de l\ des, answering to the English indefinite adjective 
pronoun some or any, expressed or understood, have by way of ellipsis 
passed into habitual use. The same directions must be attended to as are 
given page 12, art. 50. 

EXAMPLES. 

I eat bread. 

He takes some trouble. 

We eat some hash. 

She conceives a hatred. 

You have some friendship. 

You go into an ill humour. 

We gather apples. 

They sell oranges. 

EXERCISE. 

and butter. Offer him 
beurre m. Ojfrez-lui 



art. peine, f. art. chdtiment m. 
impression on those minds. 
sur ame, 

virginity, candour, 

f. de art. f. de art. 



Je mange du pain. 
II prend de la peine. 
JVous mangeons du hachis. 
Elle concoit de la haine, 
Vous avez de Vamitit. 
Vgus prenez de Vhumeur, 
Nous cueillons des pommes. 



some bread 

pain m. 



some meat. 
viande f. 



Give me 
Donnez-moi 

Take some salt. (There is) mustard. We have some girkins. 
Prenez set m. Voila moutarde f. JYous avons comichon. 

(Shall I offer you) some chicken 1 (Shall I help you to) some fruit l 
Vous offrirai-je poulet m. Vous servirai-je m. 

I (will take) (with pleasure) some broth. Bring me some bread. 

Je prendvai volontiers boiullon m. Apportez-moi 

(Pour me out) some beer. Drink some wine. Take some tea. 
Versez-moi Mere f. Buvez vin m. Prenez the m. 



46 OF THE ADJECTIVE. 

(Put in) some sugar and milk. I hear some noise. (There 

JVIettez-y sucre m. lait m. fentends bruit m. II 

falls) some hail. She has some pride. Have you any ink 

tombe grele f. s. Elle a orgueil. JLvez-vous eucre f. 

and pens? Put some oil and vinegar to the salad. Eat 

plumes? JSIettez huile vinaigre m. sur saladei. JSIange 
some lobster. He has received gold and silver. 

homard m. II a requ or m. argent m. 



CHAPTER III. 
OF THE ADJECTIVE. 



123. The adjective is not, like the substantive or noun, the name of 
any person or thing, physical, metaphysical, or abstract, but it is a word 
which, when added to a substantive or noun, expresses the particular 

. quality or defect of that substantive or noun, as 

bon pere, good father. bonne mere, good mother. 

mauvais peres, bad fathers. mauvaises meres, bad mothers. 

bon ange, good angel. mauvais ange, bad angel. 

beau livre, fine book. mauvais livres, bad books. 

124. In the above sentences, goo d and bad are the adjectives which 
express the qualities and defects of the substantives or nouns father, 
fathers, mother, mothers, angel, angels, book, books. 

125. In English the adjective is invariable ; that is, the English adjec- 
tive is the same before a noun, whether that noun be masculine or femi- 
nine, singular, or plural, as 

un homme savant, a learned man. 

une femme savante. a learned woman. 

homines s avails, learned men. 

femmes savantes, learned women. 

126. In French, the adjective must agree with the noun which it quali- 
fies, in gender and number ; that is, the adjective must be masculine 
singular, if the noun be mas. sing. ; feminine singular, if the noun be fern, 
sing. ; masculine plural, if the noun be mas. pi. ; feminine plural, if the 
noun be fern. pi. The adjective learned, which is the same in the above 
four English sentences, has in French four different terminations. 

Of the formation of the Feminine of French Adjectives. 

127. N. B. Whenever you want to form the feminine of any adjective, 
first see whether that adjective is to be found amongst the lists of excep- 
tions to the different rules : if not to be found there, find out from its 
masculine termination under what rule it comes. 

128. For the formation of the plural of French adjectives, see page 51, 
art. 150. 






OF THE ADJECTIVE. 47 

129. French adjectives that end in the masculine singular with an e 
mute* remain the same for the feminine singular. 

Masculine. Feminine. English, 

aimable aimable amiable. 

aveugle aveugle blind, 

130. *The name of mute is given to the French e without an accent ; it is not 
pronounced at all at the end of French words of more than one syllable, but causes 
the consonant that precedes it to be pronounced very forcibly: it is of the same 
nature as the English e at the end of love, mate, tare, &c. 

131. French adjectives that do not end in the masculine singular with 
e mute, take e mute to form the feminine singular, if not found under the 
following rules or exceptions : 

Masculine. Feminine. English, 

prudent prudente prudent. 

sense sensee sensible. 

poii polie polite. 

tortu tortue crooked. 

instruit instruite informed. 

132. Adjectives ending in er in the mas. sing., besides taking an e 
mute to form their fem. sing., require a grave accent to be put over the e 
that precedes the r in the masculine, as 



Masculine. 


Feminine. 


Englis 


leger 


legere 


light. 


cher 


chere 


dear. 



133. French adjectives that end in the mas. sing, with the following 
terminations, 

el, eil, ien, on, et, 
form their feminine by doubling the last consonant and taking e mute. 
Masculine. Feminine. English. 

cruel cruelle cruel. 

pareil pareille like. 

ancien ancienne ancient. 

bon bonne good. 

net nette clean. 

134. The following adjectives, although ending with et, form their 
feminine by taking an e, and placing a grave accent on the e that pre- 
cedes the t in the masculine : 



Masculine. 


Feminine. 


English 


concret 


concrete 


concrete. 


discret 


discrete 


discrete. 


indiscret 


indiscrete 


indiscreet. 


inquiet 


inquiete 


uneasy. 


complet 


complete 


complete. 


incomplet 


incomplete 


incomplete. 


replet 


replete 


replete, 


suret 


surete 


sourish. 



135. The thirteen following French adjectives, though not ending in 
the masculine singular with el, eil, ien, on, or et, form their singular by 
doubling the last consonant and taking an e mute : 

Masculine. Feminine. 4ft English, 

basse ^^ loiv, 

ihoarse, or 
fbroken. 



lo 

h, 

b: 



48 



OF THE ADJECTIVE. 



Masculine. 


Feminine. 


English. 


gras 


grasse 


fat. 


las 


lasse 


tired. 


expres 


expresse 


express. 


profes 


professe 


professed. 


epais 


epaisse 


thick. 


metis 


metisse 


mongrel. 


gros 


grosse 


big, large. 


sot 


sotte 


foolish, or silly* 


vieillot 


vieillotte 


oldish. 


nul 


nulle 


null, or none. 


gentil 


gentille 


genteel. 



136. The French adjectives that end in the masculine singular with an 
/, change this letter f into v, and take e mute to form the feminine 
singular, as 

Masculine. Feminine. English, 

bref breve short. 

actif active active. 

naif naive ingenuous. 

neuf neuve new. 

137. French adjectives that end in the masculine singular with an x, 
change this letter x into s, and take an e mute to form the feminine 
singular : 

Masculine. Feminine. English. 

honteux honteuse shameful. 

vertueux vertueuse virtuous. 

jaloux jalouse jealous. 

138. EXCEPTIONS. 

Masculine, Feminine. English, 

prefix pre fixe prefixed. 

faux fausse false. 

roux rousse reddish. 

doux douce siveet. 

aigre-doux aigre-douce tart. 

139. The five following French adjectives have two masculines singu- 
lar, and they form their feminine singular by doubling the I in the mas- 
culine singular before a vowel and taking an e mute : 

Masculine, before a Masculine, before a 
vowel or h aspirated. vowel or h mute. 

beau bel 

fou fol 

nouveau nouvel 

mou mol 

vieux vieil 

140. The nineteen following French adjectives are entirely irregular 
in the formation of their feminine singular : 

Masculine, Feminine. English, 

blanc blanche white. 

franc franche frank. 

frais flfc fraiche fresh. 

sec f seche dry. 

grec % m grecque Greek. 

public w publique public. 



Feminine. 


English. 


belle 


fine. [zy. 


folle 


mad or era- 


nouvelie 


new. 


molle 


soft. 


vieille 


old. 



OF THE ADJECTIVE. 



49 



Masculine. Feminine. 


English. 


caduc caduque 


decrepit. 


turc turque 


Turkish. 


long longue 


long. 


benin benigne. 


benign. 


malin maligne 


malignant. 


tiers tierce 


third. 


tors torse or torte 


twisted. 


coi coite 


still. 


favori favorite 


favorite. 


jumeau jumelle 


twiii. 


traitre traitresse 


traitor. 


141. French adjectives ending with eur, and which are also used as 


substantives, form their feminine singular as follows : 


The eight following change the mas. termination eur into euse for the f. : 


Masculine. Feminine. 


English. 


causeur causeuse 


prattler. 


flatteur flatteuse 


flattering. 


menteur menteuse 


lying.- 


moqueur moqueuse 


mocker. 


querelleur querelleuse 


quarrelsome. 


railleur railleuse 


jeering. 


reveur reveuse 


thoughtful. 


trompeur trompeuse. 


deceitful. 


142. The seven following change the masculine 


termination eur into 


rice for the feminine : 




Masculine. Feminine. 


English. 


adorateur adoratrice 


adoring. 


createur creatrice 


creating. 


desapprobateur desapprobatrice 


blamer. 


de vastateur de vastatrice 


destructive. 


improbateur improbatrice 


disapproving. 


observateur observatrice 


observing. 


protecteur protectrice. 


protecting. 


143. The two following change the masculine 


termination eur into 


eresse for the feminine : 




Masculine. Feminine. 


English. 


enchanteur enchanteresse 


charming. 


vengeur vengeresse 


revengeful. 


144. The eleven following adjectives, ending s 


ilso with eur, simply 


take e mute to form their feminine : 




Masculine. Feminine. 


English. 


anterienr anterieure 


anterior. 


citerieur citerieure 


citerior. 


exterieur exterieure 


exterior. 


inferieur inferieure 


inferior. 


interieur interieure 


interior. 


majeur majeure 


of age. 


meilleur meilleure 


better. 


mineur mineure 


minor. 


posterieur posterieure 


posterior. 


superieur superieure 


superior. 


ulterieur ulterieure 


ulterior. 


E 





50 OF THE ADJECTIVE 

145. The eleven above adjectives, ending with eur, are not used as 
substantives, as those of the three preceding lists are. 

146. The above twenty-eight adjectives are the only adjectives ending 
in eur in the French. 

147. Some adjectives have no feminine, as dispos, active ; fat, foppish ; 
paillet, pale, Sec. Others have no masculine, as blette, mellow, &c. 

148. For the formation of the plural in French adjectives, see page 51. 

149. N. B. In the following exercises, when the French adjective is 
put under the English, it is put in the masculine : the learner will have 
to form the feminine, when required, by the foregoing given directions : 

. EXERCISE. 
She is decent. This house is well situated. This pear is 
Elle Cet maison f. bien situc. poire 

too ripe. She is tall and well formed. This story is very enter- 
tvop mur. grand bien fait. histoiref. tres-amu- 

taining. This person is very unsteady. This mountain is steep. 
sant. personne f. bien leger. montagne escarpe. 

This road is not very safe. The door is not open. This 
route f. sur. porte f. ouvert. 

room is dark. This street is too narrow. It is an ancient cus- 
chambre f. obscur. rue f. etroit. Ce cou- 

torn. She has carnation lips. His memory will be immortal. 
tume f. a art. ^vermeil ] levre. Sa immortel. 

His manners are natural. The engagement was warm. (That is) an 

maniere naif action f. fit vif voila 

original thought. This cloth is the best of all. They are 

' z neuf x penste f. etoffe f. meilleur toutes. Ce des 

delusive promises. He seduces by his fawning manners. The 
Hrompeur x promesse. seduit par 2 fatteur l manieres f. 

delightful valley of Tempe is in Thessaly. 

de'Ucieux vallee f. Tempe dans art. Thessalie f. 

EXERCISE. 
The grass is very thick. That soup is very good, but too fat. It 
herbe f. soupe f. mais trop 

is a foolish undertaking. (There is no) truth in all that. This 

sot entreprise f. II n'y a nirt verite f. dans tout cela. 
water is not clean. It is a 2 very silly J history. It is in the newest 
eau f. net. Ce foil f. a nouveau 

fashion. It is a fine statue. The law is express upon that point. 
mode f. beau f. lot f. sur m. 

He lives in a state of luxurious idleness. This wax is not very white. 
II vit dans * * mou oisivete f. cire f. 

She is as fresh as a rose. The paint on that wainscot is not dry. 

* comme f. peinture f. de lambris m. 

His answer is a mere evasion. The thing is public. That plant 

re'ponse f. franc de'faite f. chose f. herbe f. 

possesses a pernicious property. She (is of ) a benevolent character. 

a 2 malin l qualite- a ^binin ] humeur f. 

The avenging thunderbolt smote that (impious wretch). He extended 

? vengeur foudre tfrappa impie m. Hendit 

to us a protecting hand. This woman is jealous and deceitful. His 

* hious 2 protecteur hnaini. femmef. jaloux faux. 






■■■ 



OF THE ADJECTIVE. 51 

temper is mild. This color is too red. These old clothes 

humeur f. doux. couleur f. trop roux. hardes f. 

are good for nothing. 
a ne rien. 

Formation of the Plural of French Adjectives. 

150. General Rule. The plural of adjectives and participles is gene- 
rally formed like the plural of nouns by adding an s to the singular : 

Mas. sing. Mas. plu. Fern. sing. Fem. plu. English, 

grand, ** grands, grande, grandes, great. 

poli, polis, polie, polies, polite. 

aime, aimes, aimee, aimees, loved. 

151. The above rule admits of no exceptions with respect to the forma- 
tion of the plural feminine from the sing. fem. of adjectives ; but in form- 
ing the masculine plural from the mas. sing, there are several exceptions, 
which must be attended to. 

152. N. B. To form the plural feminine of any adjective, it is necessary 
first to find its feminine singular, from which the feminine plural is formed 
by the addition of an 5 : 

153. First exception — Adjectives ending with s or x in the mas. sing, 
do not change their termination for the plural masculine : 

Mas. sing. Mas. plu. English, 

gras, gras, fat. 

heureux, heureux, happy. 

154. Second exception — Adjectives of more than one syllable (polysyl- 
lables), ending with ant and ent, according to the most general practice, 
change t into s to form the plural masculine : 

Mas. sing. Mas. plu. English, 

reconnaissant, reconnaissans, grateful. 

diligent, diligens, diligent. 

155. Third exception — However, adjectives of one syllable (monosyl- 
lables) retain the t final and take an s to form the plural masculine : 

lent, lents, ' slow. 

156. Fourth exception — The adjective tout makes tout mas. sing. ; 
toute, fem. sing. ; tous, mas. plu. ; toutes, fem. plif. all. 

157. Fifth exception — Adjectives ending with au in the sing. mas. take 
x to form the plu. mas. ; as 

Mas. sing. Mas. plu. English, 

beau, beaux, fine. 

nouveau, nouveaux, new. 

158. Sixth exception — Some adjectives, ending with al in the masculine 
singular, change that termination al into aux, to form the plu. mas. : 

159. List of adjectives ending with al, which form their plural mascu- 
line in changing that termination al into aux : 

Masculine singular. Masculine plural. English, 

.annal annaux annual. 

austral austraux austral. 

.automnal automnaux autumnal. 

banal banaux common. 

.baptismal baptismaux baptismal. 

biennal biennaux biennial. 



52 



OF THE ADJECTIVE. 



lasculine singular. 


Masculine plural. 


English. 


.brutal 


brutaux 


brutal. 


bursal 


bursaux 


pecuniary. 


.capital 


capitaux 


capital, [brain. 


cerebral 


cerebraux 


belonging to the 


ceremonial 


ceremoniaux 


ceremonial. 


claustral 


claustraux 


claustral. 


collateral 


collate rau 


collateral. 


.collegial 


collegiaux 


collegiate. 


.colossal 


C colossais 
(_ colossaux 


colossal. 


commensal ' 


commensaux 


commensal. 


conjugal 


conjugaux 


conjugal. 


costal 


costaux 


costal. 


crural 


cruraux 


crural. 


decemviral 


decemviraux 


decemviral. 


decennal 


decennaux 


decennial. 


.decimal 


decimaux 


decimal. 


.de loyal 


deloyaux 


disloyal. 


diagonal 


diagonaux 


diagonal. 


doctrinal 


doctrinaux 


doctrinal. 


domanial 


domaniaux 


belonging to a de~ 


dorsal 


dorsaux 


dorsal, [mesne. 


dotal 


dotaux 


dotal. 


.egal 


egaux 


equal. 


.electoral 


e lector aux 


electoral. 


.episcopal 


episcopaux 


episcopal. 


.equilateral 


equilateraux 


equilateral. 


.equinoxial 


equinoxiaux 


equinoxial. 


fcal 


feaux 


trusty. 


feodal 


feodaux 


feudal. 


fiscal 


fiscaux 


fiscal. 


.fondamental 


fondamentaux 


fundamental. 


.general 


generaux 


general. 


.grammatical 


gramma! icaux 


grammatical. 


.horizontal 


horizontaux 


horizontal. 


ideal 


ideaux 


ideal. 


.illegal 


illegaux 


illegal. 


.immoral 


immoraux 


immoral. 


.impartial 


impartiaux 


impartial. 


.imperial 


imperiaux 


imperial. 


inegal 


inegaux 


unequal. 


infernal 


infernaux 


infernal. 


.lateral 


lateraux 


lateral. 


•legal 


legaux 


legal. 


.liberal 


liberaux 


liberal. 


.litteral 


litteraux 


literal. 


.local 


locaux 


local. 


.loyal 


loyaux 


loyal. ' 


machinal 


machinaux 


machinal. 


.martial 


martiaux 


martial. 


.medicinal 


medicinaux 


medicinal. 


.meridional 


meridionaux; 


miridionaL 


.moral 


moraux 


moral* 



OF THE ADJECTIVE. 



53 



.natal 


C natals 
C. nataux 


natal. 


.national 


nation aux 


national. 


.numeral 


numeraux 


numeral. 


.nuptial 


nuptiaux 


nuptial. 


.occidental 


occidentaux 


occidental. 


.ordinal 


ordinaux 


ordinal. 


.oriental 


orientaux 


oriental. 


.original 


origin aux 


original. 


paradoxal 


paradoxaux 


paradoxical. 


patrimonial 


patrimoniaux 


patrimonial. 


•partial 


partiaux 


partial. 


patriarcal 


patriarcaux 


patriarchal. 


.pectoral 


pectoraux 


pectoral. 


presidial 


presidiaux 


presidial. 


prevota! 


prevotaux 


provost aL 


primordial 


primordiaux 


primordial. 


.principal 


principaux 


principal. 


.proverbial 


proverbiaux 


proverbial. 


.provincial 


provinciaux 


provincial. 


.pyramidal 


pyramidaux 


pyramidal. 


quatriennal 


quatriennaux 


quadrennial. 


.radical 


radicaux 


radical. 


.royal 


royaux 


royal. 


.rural 


ruraux 


rural. 


seigneurial 


seigneuriaux 


seigneurial. 


.septentrional 


septentrionaux 


northly. 


sepulcral 


s£pulcraux 


sepulchral. 


.social 


sociaux 


social. 


spiral 


spiraux 


spiral. 


synodal 


synodaux 


synodal. 


transversal 


transversaux 


transversal. 


triomphal 


triomphaux 


triumphal. 


trivial 


triviaux 


trivial. 


venal 


venaux 


venal. 


verbal 


verbaux 


verbal. 


vertical 


verticaux 


vertical. 


vital 


vitaux 


vital. 



160. All adjectives ending with al not found in the above list have no 
plural or are only used in the plural feminine. The learner will do well 
to commit to memory those most commonly used in conversation, and 
which are marked with a . before them. 

EXERCISE. 
They are envious and jealous. Those fowls are big and fat, 

lis poulet m. 

Owls are frightful birds. (There are) some beautiful jewels. 
art. hibou m. des Viideux ] oiseaum. Voila de beau bijou m, 

The two new operas have succeeded. Men are only 

deux nouveau m. ont reussi. art. 2 sont ] ne 4 que 

equal in the infirmities of nature. The 2 general Officers arc assem- 
3 e gal par art. f. officiers assem- 

bled. This fruit is excellent. His proficiency is slow, but solid, 
bit. m. pi. sont Ses progres m. pi. sont solide* 

e2 



54 OF THE ADJECTIVE. 

All his friends have been very glad to see him. Those ladies are 

ami m- out ttt bien aise de 2 voir He. dame 

tired with walking. You have powerful enemies, but their efforts 
las de marcher. Vous avez de ennemi m. mats leurs 

(will be) vain and useless. The four 2 cardinal 'points are the 
seront inutile. quatre point m. 

east, west, south, and north. 

orient m. art. Occident m, art. midi m. art. nor d m. 

Of the Degrees of Signification of the Adjective. 

161. Grammarians commonly reckon three degrees of comparison : the 
positive, the comparative, and the superlative. 

162. The positive is the adjective expressing the quality of an object, 
without any increase or diminution, as beau, fine; bon, good. 

EXERCISE. 

A child gentle, amiable, and docile, is beloved (by every body.) 

enfant m. doux, aimable, aime de tout le monde. 

An 2 ingenuous 'candour, an amiable simplicity, and a lively artlessness, 

inginu f. f. 2 piquant ] naivete f. 

are the charms of youth. The sight of an agreeable landscape 

charme m. art. jeunesse f. vue f. agreable pay sage m. 

is a 2 varied 3 and 4 rapid 'source of 2 delightful 'sensations. 
varit rapide f. dtlicieux f. 

163. The comparative is so called because it draws a comparison be- 
tween two or many objects. When two things are compared, the one is 
either superior, inferior, or equal to the other ; hence, three sorts of com- 
parison — that of superiority, inferiority, and equality. 

164. The adverbs plus, moins, and aussi, which mark these three kinds 
of comparison, are to be repeated before every adjective, when several are 
joined to the same substantive, and are followed by the conjunction que, 
rendered in English by than or as. 

165. The comparative of superiority is formed in French by putting 
plus, more, before the adjective, and que, than, after it. 

EXAMPLE. 
La rose est plus belle que la vio- The rose is more beautiful than 

lette, the violet. 

166. Observe that in English the comparative of superiority may be 
expressed by putting more before the adjective— as more -wise ; or in 
adding to the adjective the termination er — as -wiser. When the compa- 
rative is expressed in English in the last manner, it must be rendered in 
French as if it stood more wise. 

EXERCISE. 
The republic of Athens was more illustrious than that of Lacede- 
rtpublique f. Athenes a ete illustre celle Lactdi' 

mon. Homer was perhaps a greater genius than Virgil ; but Virgil 
mone.Homtre etait peut-ctre grand genie m. Virgile ; mais 
had a 2 more ? delicate ^and 5 more 6 refined 'taste 7 than Homer 
rvait fin delicat gout m. H.omere. 

Milton appears (to me) more sublime than all the other epic poets. 
2 par ait hne autre ^e pique x potte. 

167. The comparative of inferiority is formed by prefixing moins, less, 
to the adjective, and adding que, than, after it. 



r 



OF THE ADJECTIVE. 55 

EXAMPLE. 

La violette est moms belle que la The violet is less beautiful than 

rose, the rose. 

EXERCISE. 

Shipwreck and death are less fatal than the pleasures 
art. naufrage m. art. mort f. funeste m. 

which attack virtue. The violet is less brilliant to the eye than 

qui attaquent art. f. f. brillant m. pi. 

the lily, a true emblem of modesty and of pride. 

Us, m. * ^veritable l embleme m. art. f. de art. orgueilm. 

Autumn is less varied than spring, but it is richer, 

art. automne f. varie art. printemps m. elle riche. 

168. The comparative of equality is formed by placing aussi, as, before 
the adjective, and que as, after it. 

EXAMPLE. 

La tulipe est aussi belle que la The tulip is as beautiful as the 

rose, rose. 

EXERCISE. 

f Pope's images are as perfect as his style is harmonious. Deli 

Pope f. parfait son m. art. deli- 

cacy of taste is a gift of nature, as scarce as true 
catesse f. art. gout m. don m. art. f. rare art. vrai 

genius. The love (of our neighbour) is as necessary in society 
q-enie m. amour du prochain dans art. 

for the happiness of life, as in Christianity for eternal 

pour bonheur m. art. vie f art. Christianisme m. art. ^eternel 

salvation. It is as easy (to do) good as to do evil. 
1 saint m. aise defaire du bien du mal. 

^Pope's images translate The images of Pope. 

169. The three following adjectives — meilleur, better, pire, worse, moin- 
dre, less — are comparatives in themselves : 

170. N. B. As most beginners are apt to confound these comparative 
adjectives with the comparative adverbs, mteux, pis, and moins, because 
they are generally rendered by the same English words better, worse, and 
less, it may be advisable to subjoin here these comparative adverbs with 
their positives, that the difference of meaning may serve as a distinction : 

C Jifeilleur, better, is the comparative of bon, good, and is used 
^ j instead of plus bon, which is never said. 

*g" J Pire signifies plus mauvais, worse, or more wicked, and is used 
~- * instead of plus mauvais. 

JS'loindre means plus petit, less, or smaller, and is used instead 
c of plus petit. 

JVLieux, better, is the comparative of bien, well, and is used 
instead of plus bien, more well, which is said in neither language. 
Pis is the comparative of mal, badly, and is used for plus mal, 
|, ] worse, which is likewise employed. 

I Moins is the comparative of peu, little, and is used for plus peu, 
which is never used. 



56 OF THE ADJECTIVE. 

EXAMPLES. 
Ce fruit-la est bon, mais celui-ci est That fruit is good, but this is 

meilleur, better. 

Sa condition est mauvaise, mais His condition is bad, but it has 

elle a ete pire, been -worse. 

Ma depense est petite, mais la vo- JMy expense is small, but yours is 

tre est moindre, smaller. 

II se conduit bien, mais elle se He behaves -well, but she behaves 

conduit encore mieux, still better. 

II se portait mal, mais il est pis He -was unwell, but he is worse 

que jamais, than ever. 

Je parle peu, vous parlez encore / speak little ; you speak still 

moins, less. 

EXERCISE. 

His reasoning is not better than yours. Your style is 

Son raisonnement m. le voire. Voire m. 

(a great deal) better than that of his brother. The thickness of this 
de beaucoup celui son epaisseur f. 

wall is less than that of the 2 next 'wall. This column is less than 
mur m. celle voisin colonne f. 

the other in height and thickness. The remedy is worse than 

autre en hauteur f. en grosseur f. remede m. 

the disease. Your horse is worse than mine. 

mal m. cheval m. le mien. 

171. The adjective is in the superlative degree when it expresses the 
quality in a very high, or in its highest state ; hence there are two sorts 
of superlatives, the absolute and the relative. 

172. The superlative absolute is formed by putting tres, fort, bien, 
very, before the adjective ; it is called absolute, because it does not express 
any relation to other objects. 

EXAMPLE. 
Londres est une tres-belle ville, London is a very fine city. 

173. Remark. The adverbs extremement, extremely, iiifiniment, infi- 
nitely, are likewise marks of the superlative absolute. 

EXAMPLE. 
Cet homme est extremement savant, That man is extremely learned. 
Dieu est iiifiniment heureux, God is supremely happy. 

EXERCISE. 
That landscape is very diversified, very extensive, and infinitely 
paysage m, varie etendu 

agreeable (on every side). The Alps are very high and very steep. 
agreable de tout cote m. Alpes f. haut escarpe* 

The style of Fenelon is very rich and very harmonious, but it is some- 
in. Fe'ne'lon il quelque- 

times prolix ; that of Bossuet is extremely sublime, but it is sometimes 
fois prolixe ; celui tleve, 

harsh and unpolished. 

dur rude. 

174. The superlative relative is formed by prefixing the article le to 
the comparatives meilleur, moindre, pire, and to the adverbs plus and 
moins ; it is called relative, because it expresses a relation to other objects, 



OF THE ADJECTIVE. 57 

EXAMPLES. 

Londres est la plus belle des villes. London is the finest of cities. 
Je prefere une maison de campagne I prefer a country-house to the 
au plus beau palais, finest palace. 

175. Plus and moins with the article are repeated before every adjective. 

EXERCISE. 

The most beautiful comparison (that there is) perhaps in any 
comparaison f. que il y ait peut-etre dans aucun 
language is that which Pope has drawn from the Alps, in his Essay 
langue f. celle que tire f. de dans son Essai 

on Criticism. The most able men are not always the most 

sur art. Critique f. habile gens • toujours 

virtuous. The most ancient and most general of all kinds of 

vertueux. f. f. art. espece f. 

idolatry was the worship rendered to the sun. The least excusable 

etait culte m. rendu soleil m. 

of all errors is that which is wilful. 

ait. f. celle qui volontaire. 

Agreement of the Adjective with the Substantive. 

176. Rule I. The adjective always agrees in gender and number with 
the substantive to which it relates. 

EXAMPLES. 
Le bon pere, The good father. 

La bonne mere, The good mother. 

De beaux jar dins, Fine gardens, 

De belles promenades, Fine walks. 

177. Bon is masculine singular, because pere is mas. and in the sing.; 
bonne is feminine singular, because mere is fem. and in the sing.; beaux 
is in the masculine plural, because jar dins is mas. and pi., &c. 

EXERCISE. 
These hills are covered with trees loaded with fruit already 
coteau m. couvert de arbre m. charge de m. pi. deja 
ripe. A pure stream rolls its limpid water through the 
mur. clair ruisseau m. roule son 2 limpide ] eau a 

midst of meadows enamelled with flowers. (Every thing) interests 
milieu m. de prairie f. emaille de fleur. Tout interesse 

the heart in this abode, which is full of charms. Fly, incon- 
cceur m. sejour m. * * plein attrait m. Fuyez, Hncon- 

siderate youth, fly from the enchanting allurements of a vain 
sidere l jeunesse f. * 2 enchanteur l attrait 2 vain 

world: its perfidious sweets are a 2 slow 'poison, which (would 
x monde ra. ses 2 perfide ] douceur f. lent m. qui de- 

destroy) in your soul the noble enthusiasm of goodness and 
truirait dans ame enthousiasme m. art. bien m. 

the precious seeds of 2 sublime Wirtues. 
germe m. art. vertu, 

178. Rule II. When the adjective relates to two substantives singular 
of the same gender, it must be put in the plural, and agree with them in 
gender. 



58 



OF THE ADJECTIVE. 



EXAMPLE. 
Le roi et le berger sont egaux The king and the shepherd arc 
apres la mort, equal after death. 

EXERCISE. 

Uprightness and piety are much esteemed even by the 

art. droiture f. art. piete f. tres estime meme de 

wicked. A man in the most elevated and a man in the 

mechant pi. Le dans $ le A plus 5 eleve ] le 2 etat le 2 le 

most obscure situation are equally precious in the eyes of God. 
A plus b obscur He 2 etat m. egalement a m. Dieu. 

Pilpay and Confucius are very celebrated among the nations of Asia. 

ctltbre parmi peuple m. art. 

179. Rule III. When the two substantives to which the adjective 
relates are of different genders, the adjective is to be put in the masculine 
plural. 

EXAMPLE. 
Monptre et ma mere sont contens, My father and mother are contented. 
EXERCISE. 
His probity and disinterestedness are known (every where), 

f. son de sinter essement m. connu par-tout. 

The love of life and the fear of death are natural to 
amour m. art. vie f. crainle art. mort f. naturel 

man. Ignorance and self-love are equally presump- 

ari, art. f. art. amour-propre m. presomp- 

tuous. My sister and brother were very attentive to the instruc- 

tueux, f. mon ont ete 

tions of their masters. 
maitre m. 



NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES OF NUMBER. 

180. Numbers are divided into five classes, viz. cardinal, ordinal, 
collective, distributive, and proportional. 



CARDINAL 
NUMBER. 


ORDINAL NUMBER. 


NUMERICAL COLLECTIVE 
NOUNS. 


1 


un, une 


premier 


first 


unite 


unit 


2 


deux 


C deuxieme, "£ 
(_ second 5 


2d 


couple, paire 


couple 


3 


trois 


troisieme 


3d 


trio 


trio 


4 


quatre 


qu&trieme 


4th 


deux couples 


tivo couple 


5 
6 


cinq 
six 


c'mquieme 
sixie?ne 


5th 
6th 


C demi- 
£ douzaine 


half a dozen 


7 

8 


sept 
huit 


septieme 
huitieme 


7th 

8th 


huitaine 


eight 


9 


neu/ 


neuvieme 


9th 


neuvainc 


(nine days of 
£ prayer 
half a score 


10 


dix 


dixicme 


1 0th 


dizaine 


11 


onze 


onzieme 


11th 






12 


douze 


douzieme 


12th 


douzaine 


dozen 



OF THE ADJECTIVE. 



59 



CARDINAL 
NUMBER. 



ORDINAL NUMBER. 



NUMERICAL COLLECTIVE 
NOUNS. 



1000 mille 



treize 

quatorze 

quinze 

seize 

dix-sept 

dix-huit 

dix-neu/ 

vingt 

vingt-et-un 

vingt- deux 

trente 
C trente-et- 
i. un, &c. 
quarante 
C quarante- 
C et-un 
cinquante 
C cinquante 
C et-un 
soixante 
C soixante- 
£ et-un 
C soixante- 
£ et-dix 
C soixante- 
£onze 
C soixante- 
£douze,&c 
C quatre- 
Z vingts. 
Cquatre- 
-n vingt-un, 
C&c. 

C quatre- 
£ vingt-dix 

Tquatre- 
< vingt- 
£onze 
cent 

C cent-un, 
deux cents 



C vingt-et- ~} 
(_ xmieme $ 
C vingt deux- ~> 
\ieme, &c 5 



ixeizieme 
quatomewze 
quinzieme 
seizieme 
dix-sepU'eme 
dix-huiu'erae 
dix-neuvieme 
vingU'erae 
vingt-et- 
un i erne 
vingt deux- 
ieme, &c 
trentieme 
trente- 
xmieme 
quaranU'eme 
C quarante- *) 
C xmieme 3 
cinquanU'eme 
C cinquante- ~) 
(_ xmieme 3 
soixanU'eme 
C soixante- ") 
C. unieme 3 
C soixante- ^ 
C dixi&ne 3 
5 soixante- 7 
C onzieme 5 
5" soixante- ? 
C douzieme 3 
S quatre- ~) 
t vingticme 3 
C quatre- ~) 
"\ vingt- > 

Cum'eme 3 
C quatre- ^ 
S vingt- > 

Cdixzemi 3 
C quatre- ^ 
^ vingt- > 

C onzieme 3 
cenU'eme 

C cent-unz- 1 
\eme, &c. 3 

£ deux-cent- 
(_ ieme 

millieme 



13th 
14th 
15th 
16th 
17th 
18th 
19th 
20th 

21st 

22d 
30th 
31st 
40th 
41st 
50th 
51st 
60th 
61st 

70th 

71st 

72d 

80th 

81st 

90th 

91st 
100th 
101st 

200th 

1000th 



qumzaine 



vmgtame 



trentaine 



quarantaine 



, cmquan- 
1 taine 



soixantame 



\ fortnight, 
I fifteen 



a score &a half 

two score 

C tivo score 
\ and a half 

three score 



quatre- 
vingtaine 



centame 



1 cen taine 



{/« 



five score 



one hundred 



2 centaines i-wo hundred 



1 millier 



one thousand 



* Levizac had soixante- dix ; in his dictionary, at the word, soixante, he gives 
soixante - dix ; and in the same dictionary, at the word seventy, he arives soixante-et- 
diz. It should be soixante- et-dix. See Grammaire des Grammaires, 7th ed page 333. 



60 



OF THE ADJECTIVE. 



CARDINAL 
NUMBER. 



ORDINAL NUMBER. 



NUMERICAL COLLEC- 
TIVE NOUNS. 



2000 

10,000 
1,000,000 



C deux mille 

dix mille 

C mille-fois 
\ mille 



C deux-mill- ~) 
\ihne, &c. 5 
dix-millieme 



; milliomeme 



2000th 
10,000th 

millionth 



2 milliers 
1 myriade 

1 million 



2 thousand 
1 myriad 

1 million 



__ 



181. The formation of the ordinal number from the cardinal does not 
require any explanation, except that -unieme is only found in compound 
numbers, where premier and second are inadmissible. 

182. When mentioning the days of the month, the French make use 
of the cardinal instead of the ordinal number, and say le onze d'avril, 
not le onzieme, &c. le vingt-cinq du mois pro chain, and not le vingt' 
cinquieme, &c. except, however, that instead of Vun du mois, they say le 
premier, the first day of, &c, and sometimes le second, though not so 
well, for le deux ; but this mode proceeds no farther. 

183. Although onze eleven, and onzieme eleventh, begin by a vowel, 
when the article is put before them it does not suffer elision ; for we say 
le onze, le onzieme, and not Vonze, V onzieme ; we say also sur les onze 
heures, and not sur le zonze heures. 

184. Remark that in French we use the conjunction et, and, although 
not used in English, in the following numbers : — vingt-et-un, vingt-et- 
une, twenty-one ; trent-et-un, trente-et-une, thirty-one ; quarante-et-un, 
quarante-et-une, forty-one; cinquante-et-un, cinquante-et-une, fifty-one; 
soixante-et-un, soixante-et-une, sixty-one ; soixante-et-dix, seventy. The 
above are the only ones used with et and ; for though we say vingt-et-un, 
&c, we cannot say vingt-et-deux, &c. ; some say and write soixante-et- 
onze, soixante-et-douze ; but it is not right. 

185. The following mode of counting in English, one-and-twenty, six- 
and-thirty, &c, is not used in French. 

186. When in quatre-vingts, vingt is immediately followed by a noun, 
either expressed or understood, it takes an 5 as the mark of the plural. 
We say, for instance, quatre-vingts chevaux, eighty horses ; how many 
books have you 1 fen ai quatre-vingts, I have eighty, &c. ; but if in 
quatre-vingts, vingt is followed immediately by any other number, it 
does not take s, and we say quatre-vingt-trois chevaux, eighty-three 
horses ; how many books have you 1 fen ai quatre-vingt-quatre, I have 
eighty-four, &c. 

187. "When in deux cents, trois cents, &c, cent is immediately fol- 
lowed by a noun, either expressed or understood, it takes an s as the mark 
of the plural : we say, for instance, trois cents livres, three hundred books ; 
how many pens have you 1 fen ai quatre cents, I have four hundred, &c. ; 
but if in deux cents, trois cents, &c, cent is immediately followed by an- 
other number, it does not take s, and we say trois cent six livres, three 
hundred and six books ; how many pens have you ] fen ai cinq cent huit, 
I have five hundred and eight, &c. 

188. Mille, thousand, takes no 5 as mark of the plural : we say deux 
mille, two thousand, &c. ; but mille, mile, takes an s for the plural ; as il 
y a deux milles de B. a P., it is two miles from B. to P. 




OF THE PRONOUN. 61 

189. JYHl, instead of mille, is used for the date of the year: thus we 
write mil huit cent trente, one thousand eight hundred and thirty. 

190. Observe that a, one, put in English before hundred and before 
thousand, are not expressed in French ; and that and put in English after 
hundred and after thousand, when followed by another number, is not 
expressed in French : thus we say, for instance, cent cinquante tables, 
one hundred and fifty tables ; mille soixante tables, one thousand and 
sixty tables, &c. 

191. Tn some parts of France, instead of soixante-et-dix, soixante-onze, 
&c, they say sept ante, septante-un, septante-deux, &c. 

192. Instead of quatre-vingts, quatre-vingt-un, quatre-vingt-deux, 
&c, the}'" say octanle, octante-un, octante-deux, &c. 

193. Instead of quatre-vingt-dix, quatre-vingt-onze, quatre-vingt- 
douze, &c, they say nonante, nonante-un, nonante-deux, &c. 

194. There are many other numerical expressions used in poetry, music, 
games, &c, as distique, tercet, quatrain, sixain, huitain, &c. ; solo, duo, 
trio, quatuor, quinque, quinte, octave, &c. ; beset, sonnez, &c. 

195. Un millier is very often employed for one thousand -weight ; 
quintal is never used except in the sense of one hundred weight. 

196. The distributive numbers are those which express the different 
parts of a whole; as la moitie, the half; le quart, the quarter; un 
cinquieme, a fifth, &c. 

197. The proportional denote the progressive increase of things ; as 
le double, the double ; le triple, treble ; le centuple, a hundred-fold, &c. 



CHAPTER IV. 
OF THE PRONOUN. 



198. A pronoun is a word substituted in the place of a noun. 

199. There are several kinds of pronouns, as the personal, possessive, 
relative, absolute, demonstrative, and indefinite. 

Of the Personal Pronouns. 

200. Personal pronouns are used for the names of persons or things. 

201. There are three persons : the first, who speaks ; the second, who 
is spoken to ; and the third is the person or thing spoken of. 

202. Pronouns of the First Person. 

Singular. 



Subject, je 






/ 


je loue Dieu 


I praise God. 


^ C me 


for 


a. moi 


to me 


il me donne 


he gives me. 


Mme 


for 


moi 


me 


il me blesse 


he hurts me. 


^ j moi 


for 


a moi 


to me 


donnez-moi 


give me. 


' moi 


for 


moi 


me 


aidez-moi 


help me. 



62 OF THE PRONOUN. 

Plural. 
Subj. nous we nous louons Dieu we praise God. 

~ , . C nous for a nous to us il nous donne he gives us. 

J' \ nous for nous us il nous blesse he hurts us. 

203. They are both masculine and feminine ; that is, of the same gender 
as the person or persons they represent. 

204. In general, je and me are put before the verb, moi after it, and 
nous before, but sometimes likewise after it. 

EXERCISE. 
I cast my eyes upon the objects which surrounded me, and 

portai vue f. sing, sur objet qui environnaient me, 

saw with pleasure that all was calm and tranquil. Do s you 'not 4 
je vis avec que etait calme tranquille. * 

2 see in all the features of my father that he is satisfied with me 1 
voyez dans trait m. que il content de moi ? 

We have told the truth. What were they saying of us 1 If we desire 
avons dit verite f. Que * 2 on l disait Si desirous 

to be happy, we 2 must toot 3 deviate from the path of virtue. 

de e*tre devons nous ecarter de sentier m. art. f. 

205. Pronouns of the Second Person. 

Singular. 

tu crains Dieu thou fearest God. 

il te parle he speaks to thee. 

il te voit he sees thee. [ble. 

donne-toi la peine give thyself the trou- 
habille-toi dress thyself. 




ye or you vous louez Dieu you praise God. 

] vous for a vous to you il vous parle he speaks to you. 
[ vous for vous you il vous respecte he respects you. 

206. In general tu and te are put before the verb, toi after, and vous 
before, but sometimes after it. 

207. Remark. Politeness has led to the use of the plural vous, instead 
of the singular tu : as vous etes bien bon, you are very good, for tu es 
Men bon, thou art very good. (See page 6, art. 55.) 

EXERCISE. 
Thou art greater than I ; and from thee I have 2 (at once) 'learnt 
es moi ; toi ai en mtme temps appris 

humility and wisdom. I (was telling) thee that dancing is 
art. f. art. sagesse f. disais te que art. da^ef. 

to the body what taste is to the mind. You %ave ? show|| J us 

m. ce que art. m. esprit. avez mdi\tre de 

great talents ; when 2 (will you show) tos great virtues'? How s amiable 

m. quand montrerez-vous de f. Que 

•you 2 are! How 3 good ! you 2 are (to have thought) of us! (It was said) 

etes ! de vous etre occupe On disait 

of you the other day, that (you intended to) spend a winter in 

autre jour m. vous vous proposiez de passer m. a 



OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUN. 



63 



London, (in order to) see (everything) G curious J which 2 that s city 
Londves pour voir ce tout ce que cette ville 

^presents. 
offre de. 



208. Pronouns of the Third Person. 

Singular. 
il m. he 



0-, ! 



elle/. 
il 



she 

it 



il perd son 

temps 
elle travaille 

toujours 
il pleuvra 



lui m. for a lui to him 



lui /. for a elle to her 






lui m. for le 



u 



le m. 
la/ 
elle/ 

le m. 



for 
for 



for 



lui 
elle 

elle 
cela 



him 

Jam 

her 

her 



I? 

Cp£ 



he loses his 

time. 

she is always 

at -work, 
it will rain. 

tell him that 

I will speak to 

him. 

tell her that 

you -will give 

her. 

I know but 
him capable. 

1 despise him. 
I respect her 
ne connait ? he knows but 
quelle 5 her. 



S dites-/?« que je < 
y lui parlerai I 

rdites-lui que 
< vous ltd donne- 
Crez 

ne connais"^ 

que lui de ca- J 

pable 

je le meprise 

je la respecte 
Cil n< 
£ quV, 

Cje ne le savais? Ididnotknow 
C pas 5 it. 



Plural 
tS [ ils m. 
djj [ellesf. — 



— — they 



— they 



ils ehantent 
elles rient 



~> they sing. 
3 (gentlemen) 
"> they laugh. 
3 (ladies) 



leur i 



for 



a eux to them 



'payez leur ce < 

. que vous leur< 

devez I 



leur /. for a elles to them 






les ; 



for 



them 



v 



'pay them what 

w you owe to 

__ them (to men). 

- v , j C 'tell them that I 

d\tes-leur, que . , ^ 7 

i , ■ j J wish to speak 
ie desire leur< , ., L , 

oarler I t0 them ( t0 

- paner (jadies). 

vous les trou- C you will find 

verez I them (men). 

•i , i • C he admires 

il les admire < ., >, ,. N 
(_ them (ladies). 

^ je ne vois C / see but them 

£ qu'euoc £ (gentlemen). 

^ il ne connait C Ae knows but 

\ qu' elles (_ them (ladies). 

209. All the personal pronouns je, tu, il, elle, nous, vous, ils, elles, 
when subjects, are put after the verb in interrogations, as 



les f. for elles them 



elles f. 



— — them 



— them 



64 



OF THE REFLECTED AND RECIPROCAL PRONOUNS. 





Singular. 






12 O e 
.8 J tu 

* Lelle 


/ 

thou 
he 
she 
Plural. 


dois-Je payer 1 
&s-tu dit \ 
chante-t-z7 bien 1 
travaille-t-e/fe P 


must 1 pay P 
hast thou said? 
does he sing well ? 
does she -work P 


^ fnous 
.*> 1 vous 
|*1 ils m. 
3 Relies/. 


-we 
you 
they 
they 


iron s-n ous P 
viendrez-i; ous P 
chantenWZs P 
travaillent-e/Zes P 


shall we ^o .? 
W/Z you come P 
do they sing* P 
do they -work P 



210. //, fe, ^7s, e«x, are always masculine: elle, la, elles, feminine; 
and les, leur, of both genders, as well as lui, when meaning to him or to 
her : in other cases, ltd exclusively belongs to the masculine. 

211. All personal pronouns,, when subjects, are placed before their 
verbs, except in interrogative sentences, and most of them likewise, when 
objects precede them, except in the imperative affirmative. But the objec- 
tive eux, elles, lui, for le, and moi, toi, soi, with one exception of this last, 
in soi-disant, styling himself, are invariably placed after the verbs by 
which they are governed. 

EXERCISE. 

He loved them because they were mild, attentive, and grateful. 

amait m. parce que doux reconnaissant 

He 2 (was saying) *(to them) do 3 you ! not 4 2 know that the property 

disait savez que propre m. 



of 



merit 



is to excite 



envy 



She often exhorted me to 
art. merite m. de exciter art. envie f. 2 souve?it ^exhortait 

the study which is the most useful, that of the 2 human ] heart. They 

itude f. * * utile, celle m. 

make us love virtue, more by their examples than by their words. 
font aimer art. f. par exemple m. parole f. 

What (has been said) of them 1 Did they speak of them 1 Do 



l Que ' 6 on 2 a-t 4 dit 
4 you 'not 5 s see 2 her * 

voyez 



m. * 2 on ^ par I ait 

With what pleasure she plays ! 
quel joue ! 



n 



212. Reflected and Reciprocal Pronouns of the Third Person 
Singular. examples. 

^with a prepo8i-$ chacun tire ^ 



> J 
© I soi 



3 



\ tion c 

C governed by the C l , ego'ismefaitqu , - 



I 



verb 



C on ne voit que soi 



for 
for 
for 
for 



C a soi, a lui- C 
(_ mtme (_ 



soi, a, lui- 
mtme 
a elle me- 

me 
soi or hu- 
mane 
soi or elle 
mtme 



il se donne des 

louanges 
elle se fait illu- 
sion. 



\ il se perd 
\ elle se flatte 



C every one draws 
(_ to himself. 
C egotism makes a 
< person see none 
Q_but himself. 
C he gives himself 



C she 



imposes on 
herself. 



he ruins himself, 

she flatters her- 
self 



OF THE RELATIVE PRONOUN EN. 



65 






Plural, 
se for a eux-memes 



se for a elles-memes< 



se for Vun a V autre < 



se for eux-memes 



\ ils s'attribuent 
) gloire de, &c< 



for 

for 
for 



EXAMPLES. 

, ") they attribute to 

C themselves the 

J glory of &c. 

„ . ") they prescribe to 

\ elles se prescrivent / .1? 1 

I n 1 j s > themselves as a 

) pour regie de, &c. C 7 ^ * 

'ils s'entredonnent,"^ 

. ou se font des ca- > £/ze?/ ex change gifts. 

deaux J 

1 ils se sont desho- ~) they have disgraced 

I nores 3 themselves. 

" n . a .., ~) they have flattered 

; elles se sont flattees ^ « themse y Ives- 



elles-memes 

Vun V autre ils s'entr'aident they helpone another. 

les wis les au~ C les rats, dit-on, s'en- "> rats, it is said, eat 
tres c tre-devorent S each other. 



213. Rexark. Se is placed before a verb, and soi after a preposition, 
and sometimes after a verb. 

EXERCISE. 
In a thousand instances we do not watch sufficiently over ourselves. 

* mille occasion f. on * veille assez sur soi. 

The glory of the world (passes away) in an instant. He gives himself 

monde m. s'evanouit en m. 2 donne ] se 

(a great deal) of trouble. She tires herself. People should (very seldom) 
beaucoup peine f. lasse se. On doit rarement 

speak of themselves. Virtue is amiable in itself. We must take 
purler soi. art. f. de soi. On doit prendre 

upon ourselves the care of our own affairs. 
sur soi soin m. ses propre affaire f. 



214. 



Of the Relative Pronoun en. 



^ 

* 



de lui of him 

d'elle of her 

d'eux of them 

d'elles of them 

de ceJa of it 

d'ici hence 

de la thence 



'cet homme vous' 
[ plait, vous en par- J 

lez souvent 
"je ne crois pas cette" 
! femme sincere, je ' 

m'e?i mefie 
"ces fruits paraissent" 
, bons, j'en mange- j 
^ rais volontiers 
"voila de belles oran-" 
, ges, voulez-vous j 
_ m'en donner 1 j 

) on ne m'a pas trompe ( 

> j'e?i suis sur < 

> il arriva ici, comme ( 

> j?en partais ( 

> vous allez a Paris, et ( 
I monsieur en vient ( 

F^ 



1 that man pleases 
you, you speak of 

I him often. 

I I do not believe that 

•woman sincere, 1 
I distrust her. 
these fruits look 

- good,J 'should like 
1 to eat some of them. 

these are beautiful 
oranges, tvill you 
give me some. 

I have not been im* 

- posed upon, I am 
sure of it. 

he arrived here as 
I xv as setting off 
from hence. 
you are going to Pa- 
ris, this gentleman 
comes from thence. 



66 



OF THE RELATIVE PRONOUN Y. 



215. 



a lui 
a die 



Of the Relative Pronoun, or Adverb \ 

to him 



to her 



S< 



a eux to them 



a elles to them 



a cela to it 



1CI 



la 



here 



there 



C c'est un honnete ^ he is an honest man 1 
(_ homme, fiez-vous-i/ 3 trust him. 
C cette raison est so- ? that reason is good, 
(. lide, je m'z/ rends 3 / yield to it. 
Tees argumens sonO these arguments are 
< pressans, je n'z/ vois £» cogent, I see no 
C point de replique J reply to them, 
f accable de vos civili-l lo ^^hyour ci- 
\ tesjenesaiscom- V T J * d ° not 
ment^repondre ! f^/T '? ^ 
J knoivledge them. 

' j'ai eprouve cette "1 / experienced that 
, perte quand $y j 

pensais le moins 
"nous partions de" 

Londres, quand J 

vous y veniez 
" c'est un endroit char-" 
J mant, je compte j 

m'z/ fixer 



1 



loss, -when I least 
) thought of it. 
) ive set off from Lon- 
> don, when you 
) came hither. • 
) It is a fine place, I 

intend to settle 
) there. 



» 



216. Remark. Y and en are always put before the verb, except with 
the imperative affirmative. 

EXERCISE. 

They speak (a great deal) of it. You like French authors, you 

On parle beaucoup aimez art. -francais l auteur, 

are 2 always 'speaking of them. That is a 2 delicate 'affair ; the success 

* parlez Ce dtlicat f. succes m. 

of it is doubtful. See them ; I consent to it, but (do not trust 

douteux. Voyez consens ne vous y fiez 

them). That is a fine appointment : he had s long 2 aspired 

pas. Ce charge f. * depuis long-temps aspirait 

'to it. He has done it ; but he will get nothing by it. 



a fait 



5 gagnera 



l ne 4 nen y. 



OF POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 

217. These pronouns (now called pronominal possessive adjectives), 
denote the possession of things. When we say mon habit, my coat ; votre 
maison, your house ; son jardin, his or her garden ; it is the same as 
saying V habit qui est a ?noi, the coat which belongs to me ; la maison qui 
est a vous, the house which belongs to you ; le jardin qui est a lui, or a 
elle, the garden which belongs to him or to her. 

218. Of these pronominal adjectives, some always agree with a noun 
expressed, and the others with a noun understood ; hence there are txvo 
sorts of possessive pronouns. 

219. Of those that always agree with a noun expressed, some relate to 
one person and others to several* 




OF POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 67 

220. Pronominal Adjectives relating to One Person. 
person. Singular. Plural. 

rist mon, w. ma,/. mes, m.f. my. 

for the < 2d ton, m. ta,y*. tes, m.f. thy. 

£3d son, m. sa,y*. ses, m.f. his, her, its. 

221. Pronominal Adjectives relating to Many Persons. 

Singular. Plural. 

notre, m. f. nos, m. f. our. 

of the ^ 2d votre, m.f. vos, m.f your. 

leur, m.f. ]e\irs,?n.f. their. 

222. N. B. These possessive pronouns in French always agree in gen- 
der and number with the object possessed, and not with the possessor as 
in English, for which reason they must be repeated before every noun. 

EXAMPLES. 

Mon ptre, ma mere, et mes freres My father, mother, and brothers 
sont a la campagne avec vos amis et are in the country, with your 
leurs enfans, friends and their children. 

Mon cousin est alle consoler sa My cousin is gone to visit and con- 
sceur, qui a perdu son f Is, sole his sister, who has lost her son. 

223. JVLon, ton, son, are also used before a noun feminine when begin- 
ning with a vowel or h mute ; thus, mon ame, my soul ; ton humeur, thy 
humour ; son amitik, his friendship ; must be said instead of ma ame, ta 
humeur, sa amitie. 

EXERCISE. 
My principles, my love of retirement, my taste for 

principe m. gout m. pour art. retraite f. amour m. 

(every thing) that (is connected) with learning, and my detestation 
tout ce qui tient a art. instruction, haine 

of all spirit of party, (every thing) has induced me to prefer a life 
pour esprit parti, tout porte preferer la vie f. 

passed in the closet, to the 2 active 'life of the world. Do not think, 
de * cabinet, f. monde m. * pense, 

my daughter, that thy candour, thy ingenuousness, thy taste, so delicate 
que f. ingenuite f. m. si delicat 

and so refined, and even thy graces, can (shelter) thee from 

Jin, mime m. puissent meitre a Vabri de 

censure. His wit, his talents, his honesty, and even his 
art. f. esprit m. m. h.onnetete f. meme 

(good nature), make him beloved (by every body). Our constancy and 
bonhomie f. font aimer de tout le monde. f. 

our efforts will (at last) surmount all obstacles. I see nothing 
m. * 2 enjin l surmonteront art. m. vois ne rien 

that can (be censured) in your conduct. Their taste for the 
que on puisse reprendre dans conduiie f. pour 

fantastical, the monstrous, and the marvellous, gives to all their 
bizarre m. monstrueux m. merveilleux, m. donne 

compositions, although very fine in themselves, an air of deformity, 
f. quoique beau en elles-memes, m. difformitef. 

which shocks at first sight. 
qui choque a art. coup-d'ceilm. 



68 OF POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 

224. Of the pronouns, which always agree with nouns understood, 
some relate to one person and others to several persons. 

225. Those which relate only to one person are : 
person, m. Sing. f. Sing. m. Plur. f. Plur. 

1st Le mien, la mienne, les miens, les miennes, mine 
2d Le tien, la tienne, les tiens, les tiennes, thine 

3d Le sien, la sienne, les siens, les siennes, his, hermits. 

226. Those which relate to several persons are : 
person. m. Sing. f. Sing. PL of both gen. 

1st Le notre la notre les notres ours. 

2d Le votre la votre les votres yours. 

3d Le leur la ieur les leurs theirs. 

227. N. B. The real use of these pronouns is to spare the repetition 
of the nouns which have been expressed a little before. 

EXAMPLE. 
Avez-vous toujour 8 votre cheval ? Have you still your horse 1 I 
je rJai plus le mien. have disposed of mine. 

EXERCISE. 

Is it your temper or hers that hinders you from living well together 1 

ce humeur f. qui empeche de vivre ensemble ? 

If it be yours, it 2 is ? easy for 'you (to remedy) it (by mastering 

ce est il aise * de porter remede y en le prenant 

your temper ;) if it be hers, redouble (your) complaisance, atten- 

sur vous-mcme ; ce redoublez de de 

tion, and good behaviour ; it is very seldom that this method 

de pro cede m. pi. il trts-rare ce moyen 

(proves unsuccessful). If my friends had served me with the same 

ne reussisse pas. Si avaient servi meme 

zeal as yours, it is very certain that I (should have) succeeded : but 

zele m. que il tres-sur aurais reussi : 

yours have been all fire, and mine all ice. All the pictures which 

out ete de de glace. tableau m. que 

we expected from Rome are arrived : (there are some) that are a little 

attendions arrives : il y en a qui tin pen 

damaged ; but yours, his, and mine are in good condition. We know 
endommages ; en etat m. savons 

perfectly well what are your amusements in town, and I assure 
parfaitement * quels a art. ville f. assure 

you we are very far from ? envying 'you 2 them ; but if you 

que sommes hien eloigne envier 

knew ours in the country, (it is most likely) 

saviez quels sont a campagnci. il y a toute apparence que 

you (would not 1-3 long) in giving them the preference. You have 
ne tarderiez pas a donner leur f. avez 

opened your heart to me with that noble frankness which 2 so 3 well 
ouvert franchise f. qui si 

'becomes an honest man : this confidence 2 well 'deserves mine. 
tied a honntte confiance f. merite 

228. Remark. "When through politeness vous is used for tu, then votre, 
vos must take the place of ton, ta, tes, and le votre, la votre, les votres, 
must be used for le tien, la tienne, les tiens, les tiennes. 




OF THE RELATIVE AND ABSOXUTE PRONOUNS. 



69 



EXAMPLES. 

Que vous rcssemblez peu a vos How little you resemble your an- 

ancetres ! cestors ! 

Quand vous aurez entendu nos When you have heard our rea- 

raisons, nous ecouterons lesvotres. sons, we shall listen to yours. 



the man 
V homme is then the 



Qui 



Que 



Dont 

or 
de qui 



' who 

which 

' whom 

which 
of which 



whose 



I 

Lequel 
Laquelle . 

Auxquels 
Auxquelles 



of whom 



OF THE RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 
229. Relative pronouns are those which relate to a preceding noun, or 
pronoun, called the antecedent. In the phrase Vhomme qui joue, 
who plays, qui relates to the substantive homme ; 
antecedent to the pronoun relative qui. 

.~ . .- C God, who sees every 

Dieu qui voit tout < ■ th" 

7 , . C the horses which are 

les chevaux qui convent < 

^ (_ running. 

r homme que vous cher- C the man -whom you 
chcz (_ seek. 

C les lois que nous obser- C the laws which we ob- 
(. vons (_ serve. 

C tinsulte dont vous C the insult of which you 
\ vous plaignez \ complain. 

C la nature dont nous C nature whose secrets 
£ ignorons les secrets (_ are unknown to us. 
C les gens de qui vous C the people of whom 
(_ parlez \ you speak. 

'it is a condition, with- 
out which he will do 
veut rien faire 
ceux auxquels il s'est 
adresse, ont refuse 
de le dtfendre 
ce sont des choses a 
quoi vous ne pensez 
pas 
la cause, pourquoi 
on Va arrete, est 
^ C_ connue 

Qui, que, and dont, are of both genders and both numbers. 
Lequel is a compound of quel, and the article le, la, les, with which 
it coalesces in the following manner : 

m. Singular, f. m. Plural, f. 

lequel laquelle lesquels lesquelles 

duquel de laquelle desquels desquelles 

auquel a laquelle auxquels auxquelles 

232. This pronoun always agrees in gender and number with its ante- 
cedent. Quoi, which sometimes supplies its place, is alway^^verned by 
a preposition. ^P 



wnich 



to whom * 



~c 7 est une condition ( 
sans laquelle il ne < 



Quoi 



230. 
231. 



which 



why 



nothing, 
'those to whom he ap- 
. plied, refused to pro- 
tect him. 
" these are things 
which you do 
think. 
" the reason why 
> was arrested, 
known. 



of 

not 

he 
is 



which 
of which 
to which 



OF PRONOUNS ABSOLUTE. 
233. Pronouns absolute are those which have no relation to an ante- 
cedent. They are the five following : 



70 



OF THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 



Qui 



Que 



Quoi 



Quel. 



whom 



je vous dirai qui Va C I will tell you who has 

fait (_ done it. 

vous pouvez consult er C you may consult -whom 
qui vous voudrez \ you please. 

\ qui consulterez-vous P < ,^z 

C ^ c suit i 

<\ .j .. , j C he does not know on 

-s il ne sait que resoudre < 1 ^ , -, , 

C c wAaf to determine. 

que ferez-vous ? -what will you do ] 

en quoi puis-je vous C in -what can I serve 

servir ? \ you 1 

e7 y a la je ne sais C there is in it I do not 

quoi cfobscur (_ know -what obscurity. 

quelle instability dans C what instability in hu- 

les chose s humaines ! (_ man affairs ! 

he does not know 



what 



Lequel <( 

i 
i 



which 
which 



what resolution to 
take. 

which do you prefer 
of those pictures 1 

I know well which I 
would choose. 



) il ne sait quel parti 
f prendre 

C lequel aimez-vous le 
< mieux de ces ta- 
C_ bleaux ? 
C je sais Men lequel je 
\ choisirais 

234. Qui applies only to persons. Que and quoi to things. 

235. Quel, mas. sing., quelle, fern, sing., quels, m. pi., quelles, f. pi., 
always precede a substantive, the gender and number of which they take. 

236. Lequel, m. s., laquelle, f. s., les quels, m. pi., les quelles, f. pi. — 
which ; duquel, m. s., de laquelle, f. s„ desquels, m. pi., desquelles, f. pi. 
— of which ; auquel, m. s., a laquelle, f. s., aux quels, m. pi., aux quelles, 
f. pi. — to which ; are used to mark a distinction between several nouns or 
objects. 



OF DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 
237. Demonstrative pronouns are those which point, as it were, to the 
objects spoken of. They are, 



Singular. 


mas. 


fern. 


ce, cet* 


cette 


celui 


celle 


celui-ci 


celle-ci 


celui-la 


celle-la 


ceci 




cela 





mas. 
ces 
ceux 
ceux-ci 
ceux-la 



Plural. 

fern. 



ces 

celles 

celles-ci 

celles-la 



these or those 
these or those 
these 
those 



f > these have no plural. 



this or that 
this or that 
this 
that 
this 
that 
Tce before a consonant 
J cj^^ before an h aspirated 
] <flB before a vowel 
I^cet before an h mute 

cette before any feminine noun 
f*when without a noun,"^ Cqui est-ce q . "J who is it'? 

238. ces intimates a person or £>as < ce que je vous >what I tell you 
£ thing spoken of, j £ dis est vrai 3 * s true * 



/• 



ce livre 
ce htros 
cet enfant 
cet h.omme 
cette fern me 



this book 
that hero 
this child 
that man 
that woman 




OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 



71 



EXERCISE. 
Nothing is so opposite to that true eloquence, 2 the office 
7 ne ] rien oppose veritable f. % fonction f. 

1 (of which) is to ennoble (everything), as the use of those refined 

de 2 ennoblir hout que emploi m. 2 jin 

thoughts and hunting after those light, airy, (unsolid) 

l pensee f. art. recherche f. de 2 ttger 2 delie 4 sa?is consistance 

ideas, which, like a leaf of 2 beaten • metal, 2 (acquire) 
Hdee f. comme feuille f. battu m. prennent de 

s brightness 'only 4 by losing part of their solidity. This man 
art. eclat m. ne que en perdant * * art. f. 

has nothing in common with that hero. This long restrained 

en commini hero. ^long-temps 3 co?itenu 

hatred (broke out), and was the unhappy source of those dreadful 
l haine f. iclata fut malheureux f. terrible 

events. It is a great pleasure to me. It was a great 

ivtnement m. plaisir m. pour fut 

pain to us. 

dtplaisir m. pour 



OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 

239. Indefinite pronouns are those which are of a vague and indeter- 
minate nature. They are of four sorts : 



240. 



FIRST CLASS. 
Those that are never joined to a substantive. 



they 



you 



[ on aime a se flatter 

j on n'est pas toujours 

[ maitre de soi 

"on n'est pas toujours i 

maitresse dialler ou* • 

l'on veut i 



\ one is apt to flatter one's 

!: self. 

" a man is not always mas- 

' ter of his own temper. 

"it is not always in the 
power of a -woman to 
go where she wishes. 



ii C r .. v 7 . C somebody knocks at the 

somebody < on frappe a la porte < J _, 

people 



on pense et * l'on dit C people think and say 
tout haut \ openly. 

C on raconte diver sement C they relate that story dif- 
C cette histoive \ ferently. 

5 on acquiert V experience C -we acquire experience at 
\ a ses depens \ our own expense, 

on trouve partout des C you will find troublesome 
importuns (_ people everywhere. 



in- 
stead 
of 

and 

♦In- 
stead 
of 



it is better for euphony 
to part these words 
with an V 



' les habitudes qu'on contracte. 
) ce apres quoi on court. 
| quoiqu'on croie. 
[ un homme a qui on reproche. 



et Z'on 
ou Z'on 
si Z'on 



when the next word 
does not begin with 
an Z, as is seen by 
the examples. 



f les habitudes que Von contracte. 
) ce apres quoi Von court. 
) quoi que Von croie. 
' un homme a qui l'on reproche. 



72 



OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 



they 



Quelqu'un 



I beg to observe, that 
/ had no intention to, 
&c. 

when / tell you that 1 
depend upon you. 

"si * Yon vous blame Cif they blame you and 
, et si * on le loue^ oiias praise him, they are 
tort C_ wrong. 



"on previent qrfon n'ai 
point eu Vintention de, * 
&c. | 

" Quand on vous dit ( 
que * l'on compte sur < 
vous ( 



Quiconque 



Chacun 



Autrui 



Per sonne 



Mien 




quelqu'un m?a dit, somebody told me. 



C quiconque connait les homines, apprend 

< « s'en defter, whoever knows man- 

£ kind, learns to distrust them. 

C chacun Jen plaint, every one complains 

\ of him. 

frfenviez pas le bien d' autrui, do not 

covet the property of others. 
J ne faites pas a autrui ce que vous ne 
] voudriez, pas qu'on vous fit, do not 
do to others what you wouid not have 
\_ done to you. 

C la Jierte ne convient a personne, pride 
£ becomes nobody. 

£rien ne lui plait, nothing pleases him. 
y a-t-il rien qui puisse lui plaire P is 
there any thing that can please him 1 
EXERCISE. 
If you (behave yourself) (in that manner), what will people 



each 
every one 

[ other people 

! others 

C nobody 

£ no one 

C nothing 

< not any thing 

£ any thing 



que 



say 
2 on x dira-t 



of 



youl 



vous conduisez ainsi 

It (is thought) that this news is true. They write me word 
On croit nouvelle f. e'crit * 

from Ispahan that thou hast left Persia, and art 

Ispahan as quitte art. Perse f. que tit es 

now at Paris. One (cannot) read Telemachus without becoming 
actuellement a ne pent lire Ttltmaque sans devenir 

better : we there find (every where) a mild philosophy, 2 nobIe 
meilleur : on y trmive partout doux f. des 

3 and ^elevated Sentiments : we there find in every line the efFu- 
ileve y voit a chaque ligne epan- 

sions of a noble soul, and we admire precepts calculated to 

chement m. beau f. des pr6cepte propre 

effect the happiness of the world. 
faire bonheur m. monde m. 

SECOND CLASS. 
241. • Those which are always joined to a substantive. 

C Csi cela itait vrai, quelqu' historien en 

Quelque -s some < aurait parlt, if that were true, some 

C. C. historian would have mentioned it. 

~, C i Ca chaque jour suffit sa peine, the trouble 

Chaque £ eacn > ever ? £ of each day is sufficient of itself. 



OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 



73 



_ . C whoever 

Quelconque ^whatever 



Certain, m. s. 
Certaine, f. s. 
Certains, m. pi. 
Certaines, f. pi. 

Un, m. line, f. 



certain 



r 

i 

< 

i — 

i 



' il n'y a raison quelconque qui puisse 
ty oBHger, no reason whatever can 
oblige him to it. 

' r 

J certain Uomme, a certain man. 
\ certaines nouvelles, some news. 

C fai vu un homme, I saw a man ; 
(_ prenez unc orange, take an orange. 



THIRD CLASS. 

242. Those which are sometimes joined to a 

times not. 



substantive and some- 



JVul, m. s. 
jYulle, f. s. 
JVuls, m. pi. 
JVulles, f. pi. 

Pas un, m. s. 
Pas une, f. s. 

Aucun, m. s. 
Aucune, f. s. 
Aucuns, m. pi. 
Aucunes, f. pi. 

Autre, m. f. s. 
Autres, m. f. pi. 



Meme, m. f. s. 
MSmes, in. f pi. 

Tel, m. s. 
Te/te, f. s. 
Tels, m. pi. 
7Wtes, f. pi. 

Plusieurs, inde- 
clinable 



Tow£, m. s. 
Toute, f. s. 
TWs, m. pi. 
Toutes, f. pi. 



> no, not one 



several 



fnulle raison ne peut le convaincre, no 
J reason can convince him. 

| mil d'eux ne Va rencontre, not one 

L of them has met him. 

Cil n?y a pas une erreur clans cet ou- 
< vrage, there is no error in that work. 

£ pas un ne le dit, not one says so. 

fje ne connais aucun de vos juges, I 
J know none of your judges. 

j il rCa fait aucune difficulte, he has 

L made no difficulty. 

fservez-vous dhme autre expression, 
J make use of another expression. 

j je vous prenais pour un autre, I took 

l_ you for another. 

fc'est le meme homme que je vis hier, 
J he is the same man I saw yesterday. . 

] cet homme n'est plus le meme, that 

L man is no longer the same. 

("il tint a peu prcs un tel discours, 
J he delivered nearly such a discourse. 
^ je ne vis jamais rien de tel, I never 

L saw any thing like it. 

("il est arrive plusieurs vaisseaux, se- 
veral vessels are arrived. 
^ il ne faut pas que plusieurs pdtissent 
pour un seul, many must not suffer 

L for one. 

("tous les etres crees, all created be- 
J ings. 

j tout disparait devant Dieu, every 

L thing vanishes before God. 



243. 
Qui que 



FOURTH CLASS. 

Of those which are followed by que. 

C C qui que tu sois, whoever thou mayest 

•s whoever *2 be. 

C. C_qui que ce soit, whoever it may be. 

G 



74 OF THE VERBS. 

C Cquoi que ce soit, whatever it may be, 

Quoi que < whatever < quoi que vous disiez, whatever you 

C C. may say. 

C ("quel que soit cet homme, whoever 

Quel aue J whoever ! that man may .be. 

^ ) whatever j quel que soitvotre courage* whatever 

L L your courage may be. 

rp i C u QC <* cette 'etoffe est telle que vous lavoulez, 

jl ec oue -s sucn as ■< , . .~. . , . , « 

t t this stun is such as you wish tor. 

f Cquelque raison que vous donniez, 

q j J whatever J whatever reason you may give. 

■* ] however j quelque puissant que vous soyez, 

\^ t. however powerful you may be. 

Tout-que % however \ tout savant V? U est > ^ owever leamed 

1 (_ c he may be. 



CHAPTER V. 
OF THE VERBS. 



244. Here, instead of adopting Levizac's plan about the arrangement 
of the different kinds of verbs — that is, instead of scattering them in 
different parts of the Grammar — I have placed them all at the end of it. 

The arrangement and division or classification of the verbs adopted by 
Levizac I know, by long experience, is far from being advantageous to 
scholars ; and if I have adopted a different arrangement, &c, it is because 
I have been convinced in the course of my teaching that the verbs in 
Levizac's own Grammar are not laid down at sufficient length to make 
plain to scholars the difference and the relation of the French and English 
verbs. 

N. B. At the beginning of each exercise on the verbs, I have indicated 
the page of the particular verb on which each exercise is given ; and in 
order to facilitate the finding out of the verbs, the part that contains every 
thing about them is of a different color from that of the rest of the Grammar. 

A thorough knowledge of the French verbs is one-third of the acquisi- 
tion of the French language, and should of course be better explained and 
better learned than is generally done. 

Note.— The verb avoir, to have, must of course be thoroughly learned before the 
following exercises are written. 

EXERCISES ON AVOIR, TO HAVE— VERBS, PAGE 10. 

245. In the following exercises, the substantive being taken in a parti- 
tive sense, it will be necessary to use the article according to the direction 
given, page 45, art. 122. 

INDICATIVE. 
Present. — I have books. Thou hast friends. He has honesty. 
livre. ami, h.onnetete f. 

She has sweetness. We have credit. You have riches They have 

douceur f. m. richesse pi. m. 

virtues. They have modesty. 
vertu. f. f. 






EXERCISES ON THE VERB AVOIR, TO HAVE. 75 

Preterit Indefinite. — I have had pleasure. Thou hast had gold. 

plaisir m. or m. 

He has had patience. She has had beauty. We have had honours. 

f, f. honneur. 

You have had friendship. They have had sentiments. They have had 

amiiiz f. m. f. 

sensibility. 
f. 
Imperfect. — I had ambition. Thou hadst wealth. He had sincerity, 
f. bien m. f. 

She had graces. We had oranges. You had pears. They had apples. 

poire. m. pomme 

They had lemons. 
f. citron. 

Pluperfect. — I had had apricots. Thou hadst had nectarines. He 
abricot. brugnon. 

had had walnuts. She had had hazel-nuts. We had had chestnuts. You 

noix. noisette. chdtaigne. 

had had figs. They had had medlars. They had had filberts. 
figue. m. nefie. f. aveline. 

Preterit definite. — I had plums. Thou hadst cherries. He had 
prune. cerise. 

strawberries. She had pineapples. We had almonds. You had cur- 
fraise. ananas. amande. gro- 

rants. They had raspberries. They had grapes. 
seiUe. m. framboise. f. raisin. 

246. In the following exercises, the addition of an adjective, after the 
substantive, will make no change in the remark on the preceding exercise. 

Preterit anterior. — I had had 2 very ? black 'ink. Thou hadst had 

fort noir encre f. 
2 honest proceedings. She had had -uncommon graces. We had had 
honnete procede. rare 

2 very 3 ripe 'grapes. You had had ^exquisite Melons. They had had 
miir exquis m. 

"ready 'money. 
comptant argent m. 

Future absolute. — I shall have -studious 'pupils. Thou wilt have 

applique eleve m. 
2 horrid ! pains, He will have 2 ricliculous 'ideas. We shall have 
horrible pejne f. ridicule idee f. 

^useless 'cares. You will have 2 true ? and 4 real 'pleasures. They will 
inutile soiji m. reel m. 

have 2 poignant 'griefs. 

cuisant chagrin m. 

247. But if the adjective precedes the substantive, then de before an 
adjective beginning with a consonant or an h aspirated, and d? before an 
adjective beginning with a vowel or an h mute, only is to be used. 

Future anterior. — I shall have had good paper. Thou wilt have 

papier m. 
had excellent fruit. She will have had charming flowers. We shall have 
m. pL charmant fieurs £ 



76 EXERCISES ON THE VERB AVOIR, TO HAVE. 

had good pens. You will have had large buildings. They will 

plume f. grand bailment m. 

have had fine clothes. 
superbe habit m. 
Present of the conditional. — I should have fine engravings. Thou 

gravure f. 
shouldst have pretty playthings. He should have immense treasures. 
joli joujou m. trksor m. 

We should have beautiful pictures. You would have pretty houses. 

tableau m. f. 

They should have long conversations. 
f. 

248. After words expressing quantity, such as beaucoup, a great deal, 
great many ; peu, little, few ; plus, more ; moins, less ; trop, too much, 
too many, &c, de and d? are used as directed art. 247. 

249. After Men, much, many, du, de la, de V, des, are used as directed 
page 45, art. 122. 

Conditional past. — I should have had a great deal of trouble. Thou 

peine f. 
wouldst have had more pleasure. He would have had (a vast deal) of 

injiniment 
knowledge. We should have had more opportunities of succeeding. 

connaissancef.\\. occasion f. riussir. 

You would 2 certainly ] have s had many advantages over him. 
certainement beaucoup anantage sur ltd. 

They would have had many enemies. 
Men ennemi. 

250. Observe that when the verb is followed by several substantives, the 
proper article and preposition must be repeated before each. 

Imperative. — Have complaisance, attention, and politeness. Let him 
f. egardm. pi. politesse f. 

have modesty, and 2 more 3 correct Hdeas. Let her have more decency, 
f. juste decence. 

Let us have courage and firmness. Have gravy soup, nice 
m. fermete f. un 2 gras x soupe f. bon 

(roast beef), and a pudding. Let them have ale, rum, and punch. 
rosbifm. ponding m. m. aile f. rum m. ponchem. 

Let them have manners and conduct, 
f. mceurs f. conduite f. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

251. The subjunctive, in French, is always preceded by the exjunction 
que, that, which is often suppressed in English. 

Present. — That I may have many friends. That thou i 
beaucoup 
good reasons to give him. That he may have 2 elevated 'sientin 

donner luu eleve . " ;m. " 

That we may have courage and magnanimity. That you may have 

bravoure f. f. 

2 delightful ] landscapes, and beautiful (sea-pieces). That they may 
delicieux paysage m. marine f. pi. 

have more condescension and 2 more prepossessing * manners. 
condescendance prevenant manitre f. 




EXERCISES ON THE VERB AVOIR, TO HAVE. 77 

Preterit. — That I may have had wine, beer, and cider. That 

vin m. biere f. cidre m. 

thou may'st have had a good horse, and a fine dog. That he may have 

cheval chien. 

had 2 enlightened fudges. That we may have had snow, rain, and 

eclaire juge. _ neige f. pluie f. 

wind. That you may have had a great (dining-room), a beautiful 
vent m. salle a manger f. superbe 

(drawing-room), a pretty (dressing-room), and a charming 

salon m. joli cabinet de toilette m. charmant 

(bed-room). That they may have had vast possessions, fine 

chambre a concher f. vaste f. 

meadows, and 2 delightful 'groves. 
prairie f. delicieux bois m. 

Imperfect. — That I might have a sword, musket, and pistols. 

epee f. fusil, m. pistolet m. 

That thou might'st have a knife, a spoon, and a fork. That 

couteau m. cuillere f. fourchette f. 

we might have a penknife, pencils, and good copies. That he might 

canifm. pinceau m. mo dele m. 

have a coach, a good house, and furniture, simple but elegant. 

carrosse m. f. meuble m. pi. mais 

That you might have health and great respect. That they might 

sante f. un consideration f. 
have 2 fruitful ] lands. 
fertile terre f. 

Pluperfect. — That I might have had friendship. That thou might'st 

amitie f. 
have had gloves, boots, and horses. That he might have had 2 zealous 

gant m. botte f. chevalm. zele 

? and 4 faithful 'servants. That we might have had fine clothes, 2 precious 

jidtle domestique m. 
'jewels, and 2 magnificent 'furniture. That you might have had 2 warm 
bijou m. magnijique m. pi. chaud 

'friends. That they might have had greatness of soul and pity. 

grandeur f. pitie f. 

Sentences on the same Verb, with a Negative. 

252. In the following sentences, the preposition de or d' is put before 
the substantive, according as it begins with a consonant, an h aspirated, 
a vowel, or an h mute (see art. 247) ; ne is put between the personal 
pronoun and the verb, and pas or point after the verb in the simple tenses, 
and between the verb and the participle in the compound tenses ; as, 

Je n'ai pas de livres, I have no books. 

Tu n'avais pas de bien, Thou hadst no wealth. 

Elle n'eut pas d'honnetete, She had no honesty. 

Nous n'avons pas eu d' amitie, We have had no friendship. 

Vous n'aviez pas eudepuissans amis, You had not had powerful friends. 
lis n'auront pas d'ennemis redou- They will not have formidable ene~ 
tables, mies. 

o2 



78 EXERCISES ON THE VERB AVOIR, TO HAVE. 

EXERCISE— See Verbs, page 13. 

INDICATIVE. 

Present. — I have no 2 precious ^nedals. We have no 2 useless 

medaille f. inutile 

things. Preterit indefinite. — I have had no constancy. We have 
chose f. f. 

had no generosity. Imperfect. — Thou hadst not a beautiful park. 

f. pare m. 

Yom had no good cucumbers. Pluperfect. — He had had no fine 

concombre m. 
houses. They had had no money. Preterit definite. — He had not 

argent m. 
a skilful gardener. They had no carpets. Preterit anterior. — 

habile jardinier m. tapis m. 

Thou hadst had no complaisance. You had had no great talents. 

f. m. 

Future absolute.— I shall have no great business. We shall have 

affaire f. pi. 
no Uncommon prints. Future anterior. — Thou shalt have had 

rare estampe f. 
no consolation. You shall not have had 2 quiet ] days. 
f. tranquille m. 

CONDITIONAL. 

Present. — He should not have bad pictures. They should 

mauvais tableau m. 
have no leisure. Past. — I should have had no griefs. We should 

loisir m. chagrin m. 

have had no troubles. 
peine f. 

IMPERATIVE. 

Have no impatience. Let him not have 2 absurd Hdeas. Let us not 
sing. absurde f. 

have 2 dangerous Connexions. Have no such whims. Let them not 

liaison f. caprice m 

have 3 so 4 whimsical ! a 2 project. 
bizarre projet m. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Present. — That I may have no protectors. That we may have nc 

m. 
success. Preterit. — That he may have had no perseverance. That 
succes m. '• 

they may have had no valour. Imperfect. — That thou might'st have 

bravoure f. 
no principles of taste. That you might not have a just 

principe m. gout m. juste 

reward. Pluperfect. — That I might have had no good advice. 
recompense f. avis m. pi. 

That we might have had no news. 

nouvelle f. pi. 



EXERCISES ON THE VERB AVOIR, TO HAVE. 79 

• The Verb Avoir, interrogatively. 

253. In interrogations, the personal pronoun, accompanied by a hyphen 
(-), is placed after the verb in the simple tenses, and between the verb 
and the participle in the compound tenses ; and when the third person 
singular of the verb ends with a vowel, for euphony a t is put between it 
and the pronoun, preceded and followed by a hyphen; thus, (-). 

254. Mind what has been said page 45, art. 122. 

Ai-je des livres 1 Have I books ? 

Avais-tu du bien ? Hadst thou -wealth ? 

Eut-elle de l'honnetete 1 Had she honesty ? 

Avons-nous eu de bons conseils 1 Have we had good advice ? 

Aviez-vous eu de la prudence 1 Had you had prudence ? 

Aura-t-il de l'argent 1 Will he have money ? 

Aura-t-elle eu des protecteurs 1 Will she have had protectors ? 

EXERCISE.— See Verbs, page 16. 
INDICATIVE. 
Present. — Kast thou needles'? Have you 2 coloured ^aps? 
aiguille f. enlumine carte f. 

Preterit indefinite — Have I had pens 1 Have we had Convenient 

plume f. commode 

'houses 1 Imperfect. — Had she silk 1 Had they large buildings 1 

soie f. , grand bdtiment m. 

Pluperfect. — Had she had pins 1 Had they had 2 extensive 'fields 1 
epingle f. spacieux champ m. 

Preterit definite. — Had he good shoes? Had they (looking-glasses)'? 

Soulier m. f. miroir m. 

Preterit anterio r . — Hadst thou had lace 1 Had you had 2 odoriferous 

dentellef. odoriferant 

shrubs 1 Future absolute. — Shall I have gold, silver, and pla- 
arbuste m. m. argent m. pla- 

tina 1 Shall we have (good luck) 1 Future anterior. — Will she 
tine m. bonheur m. 

have had joy 1 Will they have had company "? 
joie P compagnie f. 

CONDITIONAL. 
Present. — Shouldst thou have happy moments ? Should you have 

heurcux m. 
good wine and 2 nice 'cordials 1 Past. — Should he have had 

vin m. Jin liqueur f. 

uncommon fruits 1 Should they have had rich clothes ] 
rare m. 

The Verb Avoir, interrogatively and negatively. 

255. In interrogative and negative sentences, observe the different rules 
(art. 245, 246, 247, 248, 249), and always place ne at the beginning of 
sentences, and pas or point after the personal >ronoun, whether in the 
simple or compound tenses. 

N'ai-je pas des livres 1 Have I no books ? 

N'avais-tu pas des amis 1 Hadst thou no friends P 



80 EXERCISES ON THE VERB ETRE, TO BE. 

N'a-t-elle pas beaucoup d'esprit ? Has she not a great deal of wit ? 

N'avons-nous pas eu de bons pro- Have -we not acted fairly ? 
cedes ? 

N'aviez-vous pas eu de nouvelles Had you not had new gowns ? 
robes ? 

N'aura-t-il pas des ressources ? Will he have no resources ? 

N'auront-elles pas eu des consola- Will they have had no consola- 
tions ? tions ? 

EXERCISE.— See Verbs, page 18. 

INDICATIVE. 

Present. — Hast thou no diamonds ? Have you no 2 indulgent 'parents ? 

diamant m. m. 

Preterit indefinite. — Hast thou not had contempt and even hatred 

mepris m. mtme haine f. 
for that man ? Have you not had better examples ? Imperfect. — 
pour meilleur exemple m. 

Had he not a 2 rigid 'censor 1 Had they not inattentive 'children ? 
sivere censeur m. enfant m. 

Pluperfect. — Had I not had other views ? Had we not had amethysts, 
autre vue ? f. amethyste f. 

rubies, and topazes ? Preterit definite. — Had I no great wrongs ? 
rubis m. topaze f. tort m. 

Had we not 2 perfidious 'friends ? Preterit anterior. — Had he not 

perjide 
used 2 far-fetehed 'expressions? Had they not excellent models? 
eu tres-recherche f. mo dele m. 

Future absolute. — Wilt thou not lead a 2 more ^regular 'life ? Will 

avoir regie conduiteL ? 

you not have 2 fashionable 'gowns ? Future anterior. — Shall I have 

a la mode robe f. 
had no sweetmeats ? Shall we not have had a good preacher ? 

confiture f. ? predicateur m. 

CONDITIONAL 
Present. — Should she not have 2 clear 3 and 4 just 'ideas ? Would 

clair 
they not have 2 more 3 extensive 'knowledge? Past. — Should she 

etendu connaissances f. pi. 
have had no patience ? Should they have had no rectitude ? 

f. droiture f, ? 



Note.— The verb etre, to be, must of course be thoroughly learned before the fol 
lowing exercises are written. 

EXERCISES ON ETRE, TO BE.- See Verbs, page 24. 
INDICATIVE. 
Present. — I am very glad to see you. Art thou not pleased with 
aise de voir satisfait de 

that book ? Is she really amiable ? We are happy. Are you 

veritablement heureux. 

not too condescending ? * A re your friends still in London? 
complaisant ? encore a Londres ? 

* About such sentences, see Verbs, page 8, art. 63. 




EXERCISES ON THE VERB ETRE, TO BE. 81 

Preterit indefinite. — Have I not been constant ? Hast thou always 

been steady ] She has been faithful. Have we been firm and courage- 

pose ? jidtle. ferine 

ous ? You have been charitable. Have those men always been good 

and benevolent 1 
bienfaisant ? 

Imperfect. — I was too busy to see you. Wast not thou 
o c cup e pour recevoir 
troublesome 1 Was this girl idle 1 Were we not too untractable 1 You 
importun ? jille paresseux ? indocile ? 

were not 2 quiet 'enough. They were vain, frivolous, and coquettish. 
tranquille assez. f. frivole coquette* 

Pluperfect. — I had hitherto been very indifferent. Hadst thou not 
jusqu'alors insouciant, 

been too imprudent 1 Had his wife been sufficiently modest and 

epouse assez assez''* 

reserved 1 We had not yet been sufficiently attentive. Had you 
reserve ? encore applique* 

been envious and jealous ] They had not been grateful. 

jaloux ? reconnaissant, 

Preterit definite. — Perhaps I was not sufficiently prudent. 

Peut-ttre que assez 

Wast thou 2 discreet ] enough on that occasion] Was not that princess 
discret en f. princesse 

too proud 1 We were very unhappy. Were you not too hasty ? 
fier ? prompt? 

They were not much satisfied. 
fort satijfait. 

Future absolute. — To-morrow I shall be (at home) till 

Demain chez-moi jusqu'a 

(twelve o'clock.) Wilt thou always be restless, brutal, and sour 1 

midi inquiet, bourru* chagrin P 

Will your father be (at home) this evening 1 Shall we not be 

* Monsieur chez-lui soir m. 

more diligent 1 Will you 3 always 2 then T be capricious, obstinate, and 

done quinteux, opiniatre^ 

particular 1 Will not your scholars be troublesome ! 
pointilleux ? icolier incommode ? 

Future anterior. — Shall I not have been too severe 1 Thou wilt 

have been too distrustful. Will not his sister have been whimsical and 

defiant. sceur fantasque 

capricious] Shall we not have been 2 eager ] enough 1 ? Will you not 

empresse 
have been inconsiderate 1 Will not the judges have been just 1 
indiscret ? juge 

* 255. It is customary, through respect, in speaking of a person's relations, to 
prefix to the name Mr., Mrs., or Miss : thus we say, Monsieur votre p ere ; Monsieur 
votrefrere ; Madame votre mere ; Mademoiselle votre saur, &c. 



82 EXERCISES ON THE VERB ETRE, TO BE. 

/Conditional present. — I would not be so rash. Would'st thou 
t emir aire. 
be as consistent in thy behaviour as in thy language 1 Would not 

consequent dans conduite f. propos m. pi. 

his son be ready in time 1 Should we be always incorrigible 1 You would 

Jils pret a 
not be disinterested 'enough. Would not those ladies be always virtuous ] 
desintevesse dame vertueux ? 

Past.— (Had it not been for) your instructions, I should have been 

Sans conseilm. 

proud and haughty. Would'st thou not have been malicious and 
dedaigneux hautain. malin 

sarcastic ] Would that man have been so destitute of common sense 1 
vicaneur ? tellement depourvu bon sens P 

Certainly we should not have been so ridiculous. Would you not have been 

si ridicule. 

more kind and indulgent 1 They would not have been so ungenteel 

- doux plus complaisant ? malhonnete. 

Imperative. — Be liberal. Do not be so lavish. Let us be equi- 

sing. sing. pro digue. 

table, humane, and prudent. Let us not be covetous. Be economical 

humain avide. pi. econome 

and temperate. Do not be thoughtless. 
sobre. pi. leger. 

257. As the third person singular and plural of the imperative mood 
belong rather to the subjunctive, they are there exemplified. 

*258. Before the subjunctive can form a complete sense, it must be 
preceded by another verb. For the sake of brevity, therefore, complete 
sentences will only be given on the present tense. This remark applies 
alike to the four conjugations. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 
Present. — Is it possible I can be so credulous 1 They wish 
\que credule On desire 

thou may'st be more modest. Is it possible she can be so obstinate 1 

modeste. entete ? 

They wish us to be more assiduous. It is not expected you should be 

assidu. On * s 'attend 

timid. It is feared they may be guilty. 
timide. On * craint ne coupable. 

Preterit. — That I should have been so hasty and impatient. That 

emporte si 
thou should'st have been so (puffed up) with pride. That she should have 

bouffi de 
been so fickle. That we should have been so (headstrong). That you should 

volage. tetu. 

have been so avaricious. That they should have been so unreasonable. 
avare. deraisonnable. 

259. Observe, the verb etre serves as an auxiliary to conjugate the 
passive verbs through all their tenses, the compound tenses of the pron- 
ominal verbs, and those of about fifty neuter verbs. See Verbs,/). 162. 

| See page 76, art. 251. 




EXERCISES ON THE REGULAR VERBS IN ER. 83 

Luperfect. — That I should not be humane and generous. That thou 

humaln 
might'st be more careful. That she might not be so arrogant. That 

soigneux. 
we might be victorious. That you might not be so stern. That they 

severe* 
might not be so cruel. 

Pluperfect. — That I might have been more studious. That thou 

might'st have been more circumspect. That she might have been more 

circonspect. 

attentive to her duty. That we might have been less addicted to 

devoir m. pi. livre a 

pleasure. That you might have been more assiduous and more 

art. m. pi. assidu plus 

grateful. That they might have been less daring. 

reconnaissant, hardi. 



First Conjugation in er. 
See Verbs, page 34 and following, and 48 and following. 

Note.— The verb parler, to speak, must of course be thoroughly learned before 
the following exercises are written. 

260. Observe, that in the following exercises the French verbs, which 
are found under the English verbs, are in the infinitive present ; it is for 
the student to put them in the tenses required by the meaning of the 
English sentences. 

261. Adverbs, with few exceptions^must be placed after the verb in 
simple tenses, and between the auxiliary and the participle in compound 
tenses, when this adverb is only a single word. 

EXERCISES ON THE FIRST CONJUGATION IN ER. 
Indicative present. — I willingly give that plaything to your sister. 
volontiers donner joujou m. 
Do I prefer pleasure to my duty 1 Dost thou not irritate thy 

preferer art. m. devoir m. irriter 

enemies 1 He does not propose 2 salutary ] advice to his friends. We 
ennemi ? proposer un avis m. 

sincerely love peace and tranquillity. We do not neglect 
sinccrement art. paix f. art. f. ne negliger 

(any thing) to 2 please ! you. Do you not admire the beauty of that 

rien pour plairc admirer f. 

landscape 1 Do not your parents comfort the afflicted ] They 

paysage m. consoler qfflige m. pi. 

(make use of) all means to succeed. 

employer art. moyen m. pi. pour reussir. / 

Preterit indefinite. — I have (given up) my 2 favourite 'horse to my 

ceder favori cheval 

cousin. Hast thou not exchanged watches with my sister ] Has the 
changer de montre 



84 EXERCISES ON THE REGULAR VERBS IN ER. 

tutor given fine engravings to his pupil 1 We have spoken 

precepteur gravure f. pupille m. 

(a long while) of your adventure. Have you not insisted (too much) 

long-temps aventure f. insiste trop 

upon that point 1 Have your aunts prepared their 2 ball Presses 1 
sur m. tante preparer de bal habit m. 

Imperfect. — I unceasingly thought of my misfortunes. Didst thou 

sans cesse penser a malheur m. 

dread his presence and firmness ? He exhibited in his person all 
redoubter f. sa fermeti ? retracer en f. 

the virtues of his ancestors. Did not that woman accuse her friend of 
f. ancetre, accuser amief. 

levity 1 We did not protect that bad man. You despised a 
legerete f. proteger merchant mepriser 

2 vain Erudition. Did the Romans disdain s so 4 weak 'an 2 enemy'? 

f. Romain dedaigner faible m. 

The bees were there sucking the cups of the flowers. 
abeille y sucer calice m. Jieur. 

Pluperfect. — I had drained an 2 unwholesome 'marsh. Had'st 
dessecher mat sain marais m. 

thou not married a man rich, but unluckily without education ? 

ipouser malheur eusement sans f. 

Had his father rejected these Advantageous 'offers'? We had not 
rejeter avantageux offre f. 

long listened to the singing of the birds. Had you already 
long-temps ecouter * chant m. oiseau m. deja 

studied geography and history 1 Had not his friends procured 
etudier art. f. art. h.istoire f. procurer 

him a troop of cavalry ] 

lid compagnie f. cavalerie ? . 

Preterit definite. — Did I not gladly give peaches and flowers 

avec plaisir pec he f. Jieur f. 

to my neighbours 1 Thou forgottest an 2 essential 'circumstance. Did 

voisin m. oublier essentiel circonstance f. 

not your cousin relate that charming history with (a great deal) of 

raconter charmant avec beaucoup 

grace 1 He lightly judged of my intentions. Did we not shew 

legtrement juger montrer 

courage, constancy, and firmness 1 Did you visit the grotto and the 

m. f. f. visiter grotte f. 

grove 1 They did not generously forgive their enemies. / 

bois m. genereusement pardonner a 

Preterit anterior. — I had soon wasted my money and exhausted 

bientot manger argent m. ipuiser 

my resources. Hadst thou (very soon) reinforced thy party 1 Had not 

ressource f. vtte renforcer parti m. 

Alexander soon surmounted all obstacles 1 We had not 2 soon 'enough 
Alexandre surmonter tous art. m. tot assez 

shut the shutters, and (let down) the curtains. Had you not quickly 
fermcr volet baisser rideau. promptement 

dined 1 In (the twinkling) of an eye, they had dispersed the mob. 
diner ? Dans un clin * ceil, disperser populace f. 



EXERCISES ON THE REGULAR VERBS IN ER. 85 

252. There is a fourth preterit, called preterit anterior indefinite, which is used 
instead of the preterit anterior, when speaking of a time not entirely elapsed; as 
fai eu acheve mon ouvragc ce matin, cettc semaine, &c, and not feus acheve: as it is 
found in every conjugation, I shall insert it here : fai eu pari 6 , tu as eu parle, il a 
eu parle, nous avons eu parle, vous avez eu parle, Us ont eu parle, they had spoken. 

Future absolute. — I shall relieve the poor. Wilt thou faith- 

soulager pauvre m. pi. Jidcle- 

fully keep that secret? Will he consult 2 enlightened fudges'! He 

ment garder m. consulter eclair e juge ? 

will support you with all his credit. We shall not prefer pleasure 

appuyer de m. preftrer art. m. 

to glory, and riches to honor. 'By 3 such 2 a 4 conduct, 

art. f. art. art. tel conduite f. 

will you not afflict your father and mother ? Will they astonish 

affiiger votre etonner 

their hearers'? 
auditeur ra. 
Future anterior. — I shall soon have finished this book. By thy 

achever m. 

submission, wilt thou not have appeased his anger 1 Will the king have 
soumission f. appetiser colere f. 

triumphed over his enemies'! 2 We perhaps shall not have rewarded 
triompher de recompenser 

enough the merit of this 2 good ] man. Will you not have flown to 

mtrite m. de bien voler 

his assistance] Will our servants have brought money? 
secours m. domestique m. apporter argent ? 

Conditional present. — Should I form conjectures without number 1 

former f. nombre ? 

Thou would'st not avoid 2 so 'great 'a 4 danger. Would not his attorney 
eviter procureur 

(clear up) that business ? We would (drive away) the importunate. 
debrouiller affaire f. chasser importun m. pi. 

Would you not discover that 2 atrocious 'plot 1 They would not 

devoiler atroce complot m. 

unravel the clue of that intrigue. 
demtler Jil m. f. 

Past. — I should have liked hunting, fishing, and the coun- 

aimer art. chasse f. art. peche f. cam- 

trj. Would'st thou not have played ] Would he not have bowed 

pagne f. jouer ? saltier 

to the company 1 Would we 3 gladly 'have 2 praised his pride 

compagnie f. avec plaisir louer orgueil m. 

and incivility ! You would have awakened (every body.) Would 

sa malhonnetete f. eveiller tout le monde 

those merchants have paid their debts 1 
marchand payer dette f. 

Imperative. — In all thy actions, consult the light of reason. 
Dans f. consulter lumicre art. 

Never yield to the violence of thy passions. Let us love justice, 
te abandonner f. art. 

peace, and virtue. Let us not cease to work. Sacrifice 
' drt - £ ar *- £ cesser de travailler. Sacrifier 

H * 



86 EXERCISES ON THE REGULAR VERBS IN ER. 

your own interest to the 2 public 'good. Do not omit snch 

* inter it m. pi. bien negliger des 

2 useful ^and interesting 'details. 

si utile si interessant m. 

263. The second person singular of the imperative of this conjugation, 
and likewise of some verbs of the second ending in vrir, frir, lir y take s 
after e before the word y and en : as, portes-en a ton fr ere, carry some to 
thy brother ; offres-en a ta sceur, offer some to thy sister ; cueilles-en 
aussi pour toi, gather some likewise for thyself; apportes-y tes livres, 
bring there thy books. 

Subjunctive present. — That I may not always listen to a 2 severe 

ecouter * 
'censor of my defects. That thou should'st find real friends. 

defaut m. trouver vrai 

That he would adorn his speeches with the graces of a 2 pure 'diction. 

parer discours de f. 

That she would remain in her boudoir. That we should so hastily 

rester m. legerement 

condemn the world. That you may pout incessantly. That 
condamner monde m. bonder sans cesse. 

they may work more willingly. 
travailler plus volontiers. 

Preterit. — That I may have caressed insolence and flattered 

caresser art. f. flatter 

pride. That thou would'st have added nothing to that work, 
art. ajouter ouvrage m. 

That he should have carried despair into the soul of his friend. 

porter art. desespoir m. dans ame 
That we may have blamed 2 so 4 prudent 5 and 6 so 7 wise ! a 2 conduct. 

blamer sage conduit e f. 

That you may have exasperated 3 so 4 petulant 'a Character. That they 

exasperer caractere m. 

may not have (taken advantage) of the circumstances. 
proflter eirconstance. 

Imperfect. — That I should not copy his example. That thou might'st 

imiter exemple m. 

(give up) 2 perfidious 'friends. That he might inhabit a hut 
abandonner perfide habiter chaumitre f. 

instead of a palace. That we should fall at the feet of an 2 ille- 
au lieu palais m. tomber pied m. ille- 

gitimate 'king. That you would respect the laws of your country. 
gitime respecter loi f pays m. 

That they would not speak (at random). 

a tort et a travers. 

Pluperfect. — That I should not have burnt that work. That thou 

bruler m. 

might'st not have contemplated the beauties of the country. That he 

contempler campagne. 

should have perfected his 2 natural 'qualities. That we might not 
perfectionner naturel f. 



EXERCISES ON THE VERBS OF THE SECOND CONJ. IN IR. 87 

have gained the victory. That you had enchanted the public. That 

remporter f. enchanter ra. 

they would have struck their enemies with fear. 
f rapper de crainte. 



Second Conjugation in ir. 
See Verbs, page 52 and following. 

Note. — The verbs finir, to finish, page 54; ouvrir, to open, page 130; sentir, to 
feel, page 130; and tenir, to hold, page 132, must be thoroughly learned before the 
following exercises are written. 

264. Important direction. — Whenever the student has a French verb 
ending with ir to translate, the first thing he must do is to look for it 
among the verbs composing the list given page 162. If the verb looked 
for is not to be found in the above mentioned list, he must conjugate it on 
finir, to finish, page 54 ; and if it be found in the list, he will be directed 
on which verb to conjugate it. 

EXERCISES. 

indicative. 

Present. — I choose this picture. I feel all the unpleasantness 

choisir tableau m. desagrement m. 

of your situation. Whence comest thou 1 Does he thus define 

D'ou venir ainsi definir 

that word 1 Does his mother (go out) so soon 1 Do we not (set off) 

mot m. sortir tot partir 

for the country 1 Do you not pity his sorrows 1 Do you 

campagne f. compdtir a mal m. 

not (tell a lie) 1 They are finishing at this moment. They 

mentir finir dans art. m. 

(act contrary) to your orders. 
contrevenir ordre. 

Imperfect. — I fortified his soul against the dangers of seduction. 

primunir contre art. f. 

I served my friends warmly. Did'st not thou amuse him with 

servir avec chaleur. entretenir de 

fair promises'? He complied (at last) with the wishes of his 

beau promesse f. consentir enfin a desir m. 

family. Did we not frequently warn our friends of the bad 
famille f. frequemment avertir 

state of their affairs 1 Did we sleep then 1 Did you not belie 
etat dormir alors ? dementir 

your character ] Did not the enemies invade an immense Country 1 
caractere m. envahir pays m. 

Did the 2 wild 'beasts often (come out) from the bottom of their 

sauvage bete f. souvent sortir fond m. 

mountains 1 
montagne ? 

Preterit. — I softened my father by my submission. I foresaw 
fiechir soumission f. pressentir 

that 2 terrible Catastrophe. Thou did'st not (come again) as thou 

revenir comme le 



88 EXERCISES ON THE VERBS OF THE SECOND CONJ. IN IR. 

had'st promised. He did not succeed through thoughtlessness. Did 

promis. reussir par etourderie. 

his daughter not (set out again) immediately 1 Did not Alexander sully 
repartir sur le champ ? ternir 

his glory by his pride 1 Did we (go out) of the city before him 1 We 

sortir ville f. avant lui ? 

never betrayed that important 'secret. Did you not agree (to 

trahir m. consentir de vous en 

trust) to me 1 They served their country with courage. Did the 
rapporter moi ? pays 

ancient philosophers enjoy great consideration 1 

philosophe m. jouir de un f. 

Future. — Shall I not obtain this of you 1 What will become 

obtenir cela de Que devenir 

of thee if I forsake thee'! Will he not embellish his (country-seat) 1 

* tu abandonner embellir maison de campagne? 

He will not sleep quietly. Shall we consent to that 2 ridiculous 

tranquillement. 
'bargain 1 With time and patience you will compass your 
marche m. Avec m. f. venir a bout de 

end. We shall not sully the splendor of our life by an 2 unworthy 

dessein m. eclat m. indigne 

'action. Will those men enrich their country by their industry ] 

enrichir pays Industrie ? 

Will not our friends offer us their assistance ] 

offrir secours ? 

Conditional. — I would open the door and the window. I should 

parte f. fenetre f. 

still cherish life. Would'st thou not interpose in that affair 1 Would 

cherir art. intervenir 

my brother (set off again) without taking leave of us ] You would 

repartir sans prendre * A. conge 
not succeed (in injuring him) in the 2 public 'opinion. Could'st 

parvenir a nuire *A lui dans f. 

thou soften that 2 flinty 'heart 1 Could they foresee their misfor- 
attendrir de rocher pressentir mal- 

tunel Would men always (grow old) without growing wiser, 
heur ? art. nieillir sans devenir A.t 

if they reflected on the shortness of life > 
refiecldr sur britvete f. art. 

Imperative. — Shudder with horror and terror. Support thy 
Fremir de h.orreur de effroi m. Soutenir 
character in good and bad fortune. Do not obtain thy 

art. dans art. mauvais f, ne parvenir a 

point but by means Consistent with 'delicacy. Let us 

Jin f. pi. que par des moyens que la avoue * delicatesse. 



t Thp student must have before this time observed that, in the conjugation of the 
verbs letters A, B, C. &c, have been put before the name of each tense, with a 
view to use these letters as references in the exercises. Here, for instance, grow- 
ing i«i in the present participle ; and as the French idiom requires the French verb 
devenir in the present of the infinitive, the letter A is put after devenir as a warning 
to the student. 



EXERCISES ON" THE VERBS OF THE THIRD CONJ. IN OIR. 89 

feed the poor. Let us gain glory by our perseverance. Let 

nourrir m. pi. obtenir art. f. 
us not divulge our secrets (to every body). Never submit to 3 so 

decouvrir a tout le monde. fiechir sous 

4 unjust 'a 2 yoke. Do not maintain s so 4 absurd i a n 2 opinion. Do 

joug m. soutenir absurde 

not (come upon us) again (in that unexpected manner.) 

ne survenir plus ainsi a Vimpr ovist e. 

Subjunctive present. — That I may never blemish my reputation. 

Jletrir ■ f. 

That I may (be beforehand) with 2 such 3 dangerous 'enemies. (I will 

prevenir de si je ne veux 

not have thee) (go out) this morning. That he may not enjoy his 
pas que tu sortir Q. matin m. jouir de 

glory. That he may not obtain his ends. That we may become 
f. parvenir a Jin f. devenir 

just, honest, and virtuous. That you may punish the guilty. That 

honnete vertueux. coupable pi. 

you may return covered with laurels. That they may establish 2 wise 

revenir couvert de laurier m. itablir 

3 and 4 just 'laws. That they may agree about the conditions. 

convenir de 

Imperfect. — That I might stun the whole neighbourhood. That 
etourdir tout voisinage m. 
I might not (bring about) my designs. That thou would'st 

venir a bout de projet m. 
(tell a wilful lie). That he might not bear his disgrace with 

mentir de dessein premedit'e. soutenir f* 

firmness. That we might disobey the laws. That we should 
fermete. desobeir a 

belong to that great king. That you might renounce your errors 
appavienir revenir de 

and prejudices. That they might weaken the force of their 

de vos prejuge. affaiblir f. 

reasons. That they might hold 2 the 3 most 4 absurd 'ideas. 
raisonnement. tenir aux 



Third Conjugation in oir. 

See Veres, page 64 and following. 

EXERCISES ON THE VERBS OF THE THIRD CONJ. IN OIR. 

Indicative present. — I perceive the summit of the Alps covered 
apercevoir sommet Alpes f. 

with 2 perpetual 'snow. What gratitude dost thou not owe 

de eternel neige f. pi. reconnaissance f. devoir 

to her 'who 3 (has discharged) 5 (the duty of a mother) 4 (to thee) 

celle remplir pres de toi 

2 (in thy infancy) ! Does your scholar understand well that rule which 

ecolier concevoir bien regie f. * 
is so simple ? We do not owe a large sum. Do you not perceive the 
devoir gros somme f, 
h2 



90 EXERCISES ON THE VERBS OF THE THIRD CONJ. IN OIR. 

snare] £ Ought 2 firm "and "courageous 'men to yield to 

piege m. Devoir des hommes * cider art. 

circumstances ? 
circonstance ? 

Imperfect. — Did I not receive him kindly 1 Did he see 

le avec amitie ? apercevoir 

the castle from such a distance 1 We did not receive our income. 

chateau si * loin? percevoir revenum.^l. 

Did you not receive great civilities 1 Did those tyrants conceive 
de honnetete f. tyran concevoir 

all the blackness of their crimes 1 
noirceur f. 

Preterit. — I perceived him walking (by moon light). 

le qui se promenait au clair de la lime. 

Did the queen conceive a great esteem for that 2 honest 'man. Did we 

estime f. de hien 

not immediately perceive the snare 1 You did not receive his letters (in 

leitres a 
time). Did the ministers conceive the depth of his plan. 
temps. minisire profondeur f. m. 

Future. — Shall I receive visits to-day 1 He will not discover 
visiie aujourtfhui? 
the spire of his village. We shall conceive 2 well- ? founded 'hopes. 

clocherm. m. . fonde espirancei. 

Will you never conceive 2 so 4 luminous 'a principle 1 Shall men 

art. 
always owe their misfortunes to their faults 1 
malheur faute P 

Conditional. — Should I receive the offers of my enemy ] 4 Should 'a 

offre Devoir 

Hvise 2 man 6 thus 5 (give himself up) to despair 1 Should we con- 

s'abandonner art. desespoir m. 
ceive 2 such -abstract 'ideas'? You would easily perceive ? so %ross 'a 

si abstrait des idees ? grossier 

2 trick. Would not my sisters receive their friend with tenderness \ 
ruse f. tendresse f. 1 

Imperative. — Conceive the horror of his situation. Do not receive 

that mark of confidence with indifference. Let us entertain a 

marque f, confiance concevoir * 

horror of vice. Let us never owe (any thing). Receive 

de le h.orreur pour art. m. rien. 

his advice with respect and gratitude. Receive no more of his letters. 
avis lettre f. 

Subjunctive present. — That I may receive consolations. That he 

should not conceive a thought so well explained. That we may always 

pense'e f. developpe. 

receive false news. That you may not perceive the danger of 

nouvelle f. pi. art 



EXERCISES ON THE VERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJ. IN RE. 91 

books which are contrary to good morals. That they may not 

contre * art. mocurs f. 

collect 2 unjust 'taxes. 
percevoir injusie f. 

Imperfect. — That I might conceive 2 such ! a ^project. That he might 

tel projet m. 
perceive the 2 secret 'designs j-of the enemy's general. That we should not 

cache dessein * 

receive every body with civility. That you could not conceive the 
honnttete. 
depth of this book. That they might not perceive the masts 

profondeur f. mat m. 

of the ship. 

vaisseau m. 



Fourth Conjugation in re. 

See Verbs, page 76 and following. 

Note.— The verbs vendre, to sell, page 78; joindre, to join, page 148; paraitre, to 
appear, page 152 ; plaire, to please, page 153 ; and reduire, to reduce, page 156, must 
be thoroughly learned before the following exercises are written. 

265. Important direction. — Whenever the student has a French verb 
ending with re to translate, the first thing he must do is to look for it 
among the verbs composing the list given page 162. If the verb looked 
for is not to be found in the above mentioned list, he must conjugate it on 
vendre, to sell, page 78 ; and if it is found in the list, he will be directed 
on which verb to conjugate it. 

Indicative present. — I know his 2 fiery s and ^impetuous Hem- 

connaitre bouillant carac- 

per. I w T ait his return with impatience. Does he fear 

tere m. attendre retour craindre art. 

death ! Does not virtue please every body 1 We do not force you 

f. plaire a contraindre 

to adopt this opinion. We suppress for the present several interesting 
de adopter f. taire m. inttressant 

'circumstances. Do you not confound these notions one with 

f. confondre art. art. 

another 1 You seduce your hearers by your 2 modest 'exterior. Do 

seduire auditeur m. m. 

your sons acknowledge their errors 1 Do not those workmen waste their 

reconnattre ouvrier perdre 

time about trifles 1 



Imperfect. — I did not displease by my conduct. I was pitying 
deplaire plaindre 

those sad victims of the revolution. +Did not this dog bite 1 Did 
triste •victime f. f. chien mordre? 



t Translate, of the general of the enemies. \ See verbs, page 8, art. 63. 



92 EXERCISES ON THE VERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJ. IN RE. 

that man (at last) acknowledge his injustice 1 We did not appear 

enjin f. 

convinced. We joined our sighs and tears. Were you painting 
convaincuf. soupir m. noslarmei. peinclre 

an ^historical Subject 1 Did those orators throw the graces of ex- 

cThistoire tableau m. repandre art. 

pression into their speeches 1 They led the people into an error. 
discours ? induive m. en * 

Preterit. — I aimed at an 2 honest 'end. Did his prudence extinguish 

tendre a butm. f. eteindre 

the fire of a disordered imagination 1 Did not your conduct (do away) 

deregle f. conduite f. detruire 

his prejudices'? We led our friend back to his 2 country 'house. 

prevention f. reconduire * de campagne f. 

Did we offer our incense to the pride of a blockhead 1 Did you feign 
vendre encens sot? feindre 

to think as a madman ] Did you conduct your children from truth 
de en * fou ? conduire verite" 

to truth 1 Did ' those s frightful 2 spectres appear again 1 Did 

en effrayant m. apparaitre de nouveau P 

not the children (come down) at the first summons 1 

descendre a ordre m. sing. 

Future. — Shall I hear the music of the new opera 1 I shall 
entendre musique f. 
not conceal from you my mind. Will the general constrain 

taire * facon de penser f. contraindre 

the officers to join their Respective ' corps 1 Will not a thought, true, 

officier rejoindre f. 

grand, and well expressed, please at all times ? We shall (make 

ex prime dans art. m. 

our appearance) on this great theatre 2 next 'month. Shall we 

paraitre snr m. art. prochain mois m. 

describe all the horror of this 2 terrible 'night ] Will you not (new- 
depeindre . nuit f. re- 

model) a work so full of 2 charming 'ideas ] Will you know 
fondre plein reconnaitre 

your things again 1 Will they always reduce our duties to bene- 
effet m. * devoir m. art. bien- 

ficence ] They will assiduously correspond with their friends. 
faisance f. assidument correspondre 

Conditional. — Should I, by these means gain the 2 desired 

moyen m. atteindre a disirz 

'end ] I should Scarry on) the undertaking with success. Would his 
but m. conduire entreprise f. 

mother wait with (so much) patience 1 Could sincerity displease 

tant de art. f. a, 

the man (of sense) 1 Should we sell our liberty? Should we 
sense vendre 

build our house upon that plan 1 Would you oblige young 

construire m. astreindre des 

people to live as you do 1 Would you reduce your child to 

gens pi. vivre comme * 



EXERCISES ON THE VERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJ. IN RE. 93 

despair] They should dread 'the "(public) 2 censure. Would 
art, desespoir m. craindre die public f. 

my protectors introduce an unknown person into the world ? 
iutroduire inconnu m. * 

Imperative. — Depict in thy idyl all the charms of a 2 rural 

Peindre idylle douceur f. champetre 

'life. Expect not happiness from 2 external Objects; it is in 

Attendre art. art. exterieur m. il 

thyself. Know the powers of thy mind before thou writest. Let us 
force f. avant de * ecrire A. 

unite prudence with courage. Let us not descend to 

joindre art. f. a art. m. descendre dans des 

-'useless particulars. Let us not (give offence) by an air of haugh- 

particidarite. d'plaire des m. pi. 

tiuess ] 2 Seem 'neither 3 too cheerful nor too grave. Ye sovereigns, 
Par a It re ne ni gai ni serieux. * souverain 

make the people happy. Do not despise his friendship. Sweet 
rendre dedaigner doitx 

illusions, vain phantoms, vanish ! (Keep to yourself) such truths 

f. fantdme m. disparaitre ! taire certain 

as may offend. 
qui peuvent offenser. 

Subjunctive present. — That I may fear that cloud of enemies. 

nuee f. 
That I should please every body, is impossible. That he may not 
a ce 

reply to 2 such ? absurd 'criticism. That he may lead his pupil 
repondre un si critique f. conduire Sieve 

step by step to a perfect knowledge of the art of speaking and writing. 
pas ii connaissauce de A 

That we may entice by an 2 enchanting 'style. That we may confound 

seduire enchanteur m. 

the arts with the sciences. That you may have 2 the 3 same 4 end 

but m. 
'(in view.) That they may not depend on anybody. That they 
tendre a dependre de personne. 

may not increase our sufferings. 
accroHre peines. 

Imperfect. — That I might not melt into tears. That I would 

fondre en lanne. 
acknowledge the truth. That he might (draw a picture of) 

a rtre pein dre art. 

distressed 'virtue. That she might please by her accomplishments 
malheureux f. elle grace f. 

more than by'lier beauty That we might conduct him to court. 

conduire art. couri. 

That we should affect 2 such s low 'sentiments. That you might 

feindre des si bas m. 

hear their justification. That you might know your real friends. 

entendre vrai 

That they might (wait for) the opinion of 2 sensible l persons. That 

attendre art. sense f. 

they would not appear so scornful and vain. 
dedaigneux f. pi. ni si f. pi. 



94 EXERCISES ON THE PRONOMINAL VERBS. 

Of Pronominal Verbs. 

See Verbs, page 88 and following. 

Note.— In all past participles, except absous, dissous, and resous, which are to be 
seen hereafter, the feminine is formed by adding e mute to the masculine, and the 
plural by adding s to the singular, both masculine and feminine, when it does not 
already end with s. In the following exercises the past participles, if put in 
French under the English, are always put in the masculine singular; it is for the 
student to put them in the number and gender required. 

Indicative present. — I commonly walk (by moonlight). 

d' ordinaire se promener au clair de la lune. 
Dost thou not (deceive thyself) 1 He (is never happy) but (when he 
se tromper ne se plaire que a 

is doing) wrong ! Do we not (nurse ourselves) too much 1 How 
faire A. du mail s'ecouter 

do you do 1 They mean to travel in the spring. 

se porter ? se proposer de voyager a m. 

Preterit indefinite. — I (have been) tolerably well for some 
se porter assez Men depuis 
time. Didst thou not (lose thyself) in the wood 1 (It is said) that he 

s'egarer On dit 

(killed himself) (out of) despair. Have we (flattered ourselves) without 

se tner de se Jlatter 

foundation 1 Ladies, have you walked this morning 1 Did 

Jondement ? JVCesdames, se promener 

those ladies (recognise themselves) in this portrait 1 
dame se reconnaitre a m. 

Imperfect. — I (tormented myself) incessantly about the affairs of 
se tourmenter sans cesse pour 

others. Wast thou not (laying the foundation for) much sorrow by 
autrui. se preparer bien des regrets 

thy foolish conduct 1 He (made himself) more and more unhappy 

se rendre 

(every day). We despaired without reason. Did you not 
de jour en jour. se desesperer 

laugh at us ! They (ruined themselves) wantonly. 
se moquer de se perdre de gaieti de cceur. 

Pluperfect. — I (had trusted myself ) to 2 (very uncertain) 'guides. 
se livrer a des peu sur m. 

Didst thou not confide too inconsiderately in this man 1 Had that 

se confier Ugerement a 

officer rushed rashly into this danger 1 We had con- 

officier se precipiter t emir air ement dans m. se con- 

demned ourselves. Had you not (been engaged) in trifles 1 Had 
damner nous-m ernes. s'occuper de bagatelle f. 

those travellers (gone out) of the right way 1 
voyageurs se detourner droit chemin m. 

Preterit. — I repented but too late of having taken 2 such 'a step. 

tard A. fait tel demarche f. 

Wast thou not well entertained (yesterday evening?) He (suffered 

s'amuser hier au soir ? ne se trouver 



EXERCISES ON THE PRONOMINAL VERBS. 95 

for) his imprudence. We met in the street, but did 

pas bien tie se rencontrer rue 

not speak. Did you say nothing (to each other) 1 Did not 

se parler, dites-vous 

those 2 rash 'children (applaud themselves) for their folly 1 
temeraire s* applaudir de sottise P 

Preterit anterior. — (As soon as) I discovered that they sought 

Des que s'apercevoir on chercher 

to deceive me, I was on my guard. What didst thou, when 
H. tromper se tenir J. garde f. pi. Jis quand 

thou (sawest thyself) thus forsaken 1 When she recollected 
se trouver aifisi abandonneP se souvenir 

all the circumstances, she was quite ashamed. When he had 
de f. J. toute honteux. 

rejoiced sufficiently, we parted. When you (had amused 

se rejouir assez se separer J. s 9 amuser 

yourself) sufficiently at his expense, did you not leave him quiet? 

a depens m.]A. laisserZ. tranquilleP 

When they had walked enough, they (sat down) at the foot of a tree. 
se promener s'assirent a 

Future absolute. — I will yield if they convince me. Wilt thou 

se rendre on convainc 
remember the engagement that thou makest 7 What will not he 
se souvenir de prends P Que 

reproach (himself for) 1 We shall not (forget ourselves) (so far as) 
se reprocher a lui-meme P s'oublier jusque 

to 2 (be wanting) 3 in respect towards 'him. Will you employ the 

manquer A de lui. se servir de 

means I (point out) to you 1 Will not these flowers fade ] 

que indiquer * f. se fietrir P 

Future anterior. — Shall I have betrayed myself? Wilt thou 

se trahir moi-meme P 
not have (degraded thyself) in his eyes 1 He will have (been proud) of 

s'avilir a s'enorgueillir 

this trifling advantage. We shall have (fatigued ourselves) 

faible av ant age m. se fatiguer 

(to no purpose). In the end, you will have (been undeceived.) Will 

inutilement. a Jin f. se desabuser. 

your children have (loved each other) (too much) ? 
s'entr' aimer trop ? 

Conditional present. — Should I (suffer myself) to (be drawn) 

se laisser * entrainer 
into the party of the rebels 1 Wouldst 2 thou be 3 (so easily) 

parti m. de si pen de chose 

'frightened 1 Would not the nation submit to 3 so 4 just 'a 2 law 1 
s'effrayer P f. se soumettre 

We should not rejoice to see the triumph of guilt. Would 

se plaire voir triomphe art. crime m. 
you (dishonour yourselves) by 2 such 'an action 1 Would those 
se des honor er tel 



96 EXERCISES ON THE PRONOMINAL VERBS. 

lords (avail themselves) of their birth and fortune, 

seigneur se prevaloir de naissance f. de leurs richesses, 

(in order to) hurt our feelings 1 

pour faire violence a sentiment ? 

Past. — Should I not (have devoted myself) entirely to the service 

se devouer entierement 
of my country 1 (Had it not been for) thy carelessness, thou wouldst 

pays m. sans insouciance f. 

certainly have (grown rich) . Would this pleasing hope have vanished 
s'enrichir doux espoir m. s'evanouir 

so soon 1 Should we have (degraded ourselves) to 2 such ] a degree 7 

se degrader point m. 

You would have (reduced yourselves) to every kind of want. 

se reduire toute sorte pi. privation f. pi. 

They would have (been drowned) if (they had not had assistance). 
se noyer on ne les avoit secourus. 

Imperative. — O man, remember that thou art mortal. Do not 

se souvenir 
flatter (thyself that thou wilt succeed easily). Let us take an 
te promets un sue ces facile. se rendre 

2 exact Account of our actions. Let us not deceive ourselves. 

compte se seduire nous-memes. 

(Rest yourself) under the shade of this tree. Do not (expose 

Sereposer a ombre s'exposer 

yourself) so rashly. 
* temerairement. 

Subjunctive present. — (I must) rise to-morrow at an ear- 

Jlfaut que se lever de meil~ 

Her hour. I wish that thou mayst be better. (I wish him to) 

leur heure i. souhaiter se porter mieux. Jeveux quHl 

(conduct himself) better. Is it not essential that we should contain 

se conduire essentiel se contenir 

ourselves'? They wish that you should (accustom yourselves) 
* On desire s'habituer 

early to labor. It is time that they should 

de bonne heure art. travail m. 
(have relaxation) from the fatigue of business. 
se delasser f. art. f. pi. 

Preterit. — Can I have (been deceived) so grossly ? 

Se peut-il que se tromper grossierement P 

It is astonishing that thou hast determined to stay. It is not said that 

etonnant se decider r ester. On* dit 

he interfered in this business. It will never (be believed) that we have 

se mtler de On croira 

(conducted ourselves) so ill. It is not suspected that you have 

se comporter mal. On * soupconne 

(disguised yourselves) so ingeniously. It is not feared that they 

se deguiser adroitement. On * craint 

have behaved ill. 
se conduire 
Imperfect. — They required that I should (go to bed) at ten o'clock. 
On exigeait se couches a heure. 



EXERCISES ON THE PASSIVE VERBS. 97 

They wish that thou shouldst walk oftener. Did they not 
On voudrait se promener On 

wish that he should practise fencing 7 ? Was it necessary that 

voulait s'exercer a fair e des amies? 

we should (make use) of this method 1 Did they wish that you should 
se servir moyen m. voulait 

complain without reason 1 Did they not wish them 

se plaindre on desire H. que Us 

(to make more haste) 1 
se hater S. davantage ? 

Pluferfect. — Would they have wished that I had (revenged 

voulu se venger 

myself) ] I could have wished that thou hadst (shewn thyself) 

desirer se montrer 

(more accommodating). I could have wished that this painter had 

moins difficile. voulu peintre 

(been less negligent.) Would you have wished that we should have 
se negliger moins. voulu 

(ruined ourselves) in the 2 public ] opinion, (in order to) satisfy your 

se perdre f. pour satisfaire 

resentment 1 I could have wished perhaps Iha^ou had (applied 

ressentiment? desirer peut-etre s'appliquer 

yourselves) more to your studies. We could have wished that they 

* davantage 

had (extricated themselves) more skilfully from the difficulties 
se tirer adroitement emb arras 

(in which) they (had involved themselves). 
ou s'etaient mis. 



Conjugation of the Passive Verbs. 

266. There is but one mode of conjugating passive verbs : it is by 
adding to the verb etre, through all the moods and tenses, the participle 
past of the verb active, which then must agree in gender and number 
with the subject ; as, 

Je suis aime, or aimee I am loved. 

tu etais estime, or estimee thou ivast esteemed. 

ce roi fut cheri de son peuple that king was beloved by his people. 

elle fut toujours cherie she -was always beloved. 

mon pere fut respecte my father was respected. 

ma mere fut reveree my mother was revered. 

nous serons loues or louees we shall be praised. 

vous en serez blames, or blamees you will be blamed for it. 

ils seroient craints et redoutes they would be feared and dreaded. 

je voudrais que les portes fussenO r . 7 , , 

ouvertes S wlsn t' ie doors were opened. 

tu en avais ete averti, or avertie thou hadst been apprized of it. 

Iorsqu'il eut ete mordu when he had been bitten. 

je soup^onne que la ruse aura ete ~} I suspect the artifice will have been 

decouverte 5 discovered. 

vous auriez ete apergus, or apergues you would have been perceived. 



98 EXERCISES ON THE NEUTER AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS. 

bien qu'elles aient ete reconnues although they -were recognised* 

supposez que les lumieres eussent ~) ^. ., ,. LjL , 77 . . 
. -*w ?i • . >- suppose the h Flits had been put out. 

ete eteintes 3 

267. In the following exercises upon the verbs, the tenses will now 
be promiscuously intermixed : — 

EXERCISE ON THE PASSIVE VERBS. 

That young lady is so mild, so polite, and so kind, that she is 
jeune demoiselle doux, honnete, bon, 

beloved by every body. He performed with (so much) ability, that 

aime de jouer J. taut de intelligence, 

he was universally applauded. He is known by nobody. How many 

J. applaudi. connu de Que de 

countries, unknown to the ancients, have been discovered by 2 modern 

pays, inconnu de convert art. 

Navigators ? 
navigateur m. 

Of the Neuter Verbs. 

See verbs, page 160 and following. 

268. Remark. — The participle of these neuter verbs, which take etre 
for auxiliary, must accordingly agree both in gender and number with 
their subject. 

EXERCISE ON THE NEUTER VERBS. 

They came to see us in the greatest haste. When 

G. * voir avec empressement. Quand est-ce que 

did they arrive ] That estate fell to his lot. He fell 

arriver G. terre f. lui est echu en * partage. tomber G. 

from his horse, but happily received only a slight contusion on the knee. 
* il G. ne que leger f. a genou m. 

Of the Impersonal or Unipersonal Verbs. 
See Verbs, page 123 and following. 

269. Observe that, in impersonal verbs, il has no relation to a substan- 
tive, as may be seen by the impossibility of substituting a noun in its place. 

EXERCISE ON THE UNIPERSONAL VERBS. 
Does it rain this morning'! Did it hail 2 last ] night? It 

pleuvoir matin m. greler J. art. dernier f. 

does not snow. I thought it had thundered. Does it not 

neiger. croyais que tonner I. 

lighten 1 Do you think it freezes 1 It is a 2 remarkable > thing. It 
eclairer ? croyez que geler ? Ce Ce 

was a 2 terrible hurricane. It is ten o'clock. It (was not my friend's fault) 
J. ouragan. heure. ne tenir pas a mon ami 

that (it) was not so. It will freeze long. I do not think 
la chose S. ne ainsi. long-temps. crois 

so ; it seems, (on the contrary), that it thaws. * It (is fit) to act 
le ; sembler au contraire de*geler. convenir de 



EXERCISES ON FALLOIR AND Y AVOIR. 99 

so. It (was of great importance) to succeed. Would it be proper 
ai?isi. importer H. beaucoup de reussir. 4 apropos 

to write to your friends 1 It appears that he has not attended to that 
de ecrire s'occuper de 

business. Perhaps it (would be) better (to give up) the undertaking. 

vaudrait abandonner entreprise. 

It (was sufficient to) know his opinion. 
sujftsait de 

EXERCISE ON THE VERB FALLOIR. 

See Verbs, page 136. 

270. Observe, that all expressions implying necessity, obligation, or 
want, may be rendered by falloir ; as, I want a new grammar, il me faut 
line grammaire neuve. 

You must speak to him about that affair. It was necessary for him 
de f. H. que * il 

to consent to that bargain. We were obliged to (set out) immediately. 
* S. marche m. J. partir S. sur le champ. 

Children should learn every day something by heart. Shall I suffer 
art. N. S. L. Q. 

patiently 2 such *an 3 insult 1 He must have been a blockhead not to 

O. S. sot pour 

understand 2 such 2 easy * rules. \ (How much) do you want ? He 
comprendre des si regie f. l Combien 

does what is requisite. Do that as it (should be). What must he 
fait Fakes F. Que lui F. 

have for his trouble 1 You are the man I want. Do not give me 

peine f. que F. 

anymore bread; I have already more (than I want). (I need 
de en deja quHl ne m'en faut. line me 

not) ask you whether you will come. I do not think that it is neces- 

faut pas A. si crois il Q. 

sary to be a conjurer to guess his motives. I could not suspect 

* * sorcier pour deviner motif. pouvais soupconner 

that I ought (to ask) pardon for a fault I have not committed. 

8. A. de faute f. que commise. 

EXERCISE ON Y AVOIR, THERE TO BE. 

See Verbs, page 20 and following. 

271. N. B. This verb in English is used in the plural, when followed 
by a substantive plural ; in French it remains always in the singular. 

There must be a great difference of age between those two persons. 
il doit f. 

There being (so many) 2 vicious 'people in this world, is it astonishing 

tant de gens m. pi. etonnant 

that there are so many persons who become the victims of the corruption 

Q- devenir perversity f. 

of the age 1 (It is a thousand ' to one) that he will not succeed. 

siecle m. U y a mille a parier contre un reussir. 



100 EXERCISES ON THE IRREGULAR VERES. 

There would be more happiness if (every one) knew how to moderate 
bonheur chacun savait * * modirev 

his desires. I did not think that there could be (any thing) to blame 

desir. croyais S. rien reprendre 

in his conduct. There would not be so many duels (did people) 
conduite f. si Von 

reflect that one of the first obligations of a Christian is to forgive 
refiechir H. f. f. Chrttien de pardonner 

injuries. Could there be a king more happy than this, who 
art. Pourrait-il celui-ci, 

has always been the father of his subjects ] 

sujet ? 

EXERCISE ON THE IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE 
FIRST CONJUGATION. 

See Verbs, s'en alter, to go away, page 112; also page 122. 

272. The imperative va of alter, to go, takes an s when followed by 
y ; as vas-y, go thither : however, it takes no s when the y is followed 
by a verb ; as va y donner ordre, go and order that affair. 

273. Je vas, I go, and je rrfen vas, I am going, although, authorized, 
are but seldom used by any writer. 

Will you go this evening into the country ? I am going to pay 
soir a campagne f. * faire 

some visits, and if I be 2 early *(at liberty) I shall certainly 

F. de bonne heure libre 
go home. Go there with thy brother. Go and do that 

s^en alter chez-moi. * faire 

errand. Go there, and put (every thing) in order. Let him go 

commission f. * mettre tout en 

to church on (holidays). By being loaded with scents, 

art. eglise f. * les jour de fete, A force de A. charge de odeurf. 

and particularly amber, he (offends the smell). They have woven 

surtout d'ambre, sentir mauvais. tissu 

silk and cotton together, and (made) a very pretty stuff. I shall 

m. en ont fait etoffe f. 

send 2 spring lowers to those ladies. I would go to Rome, if I 
printanier f. dame. 

could. We would (send back) our horses. Why do they go 
le pouvais. Pourquoi 

away so soon? My brother and my sister went yesterday to 

ma J. 

Windsor. I will not go (any more) (a hunting). 
plus a la chasse. 

EXERCISES ON THE IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE 
SECOND CONJUGATION. 

See Verbs, page 124 and following. 

May the name of that good king be -(-blessed from generation to gener- 
nom m. benir en 

f See page 87, art. 204. 



EXERCISES ON THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 101 

ation! These trees blossomed twice (every year). The arts and 
H. deux fois tous les ans. 
sciences ^flourished at Athens in the time of Pericles. Horace 
art. H. a Athenes Pericles. 

and Virgil f flourished under the reign of Augustus. We discovered 
Yirgile H. sous regne Auguste. decouvrir 

from the top of the mountain a vast plain full of 2 flowery 

haut plainei. rempli Jieurissant 

] meadows. The empire of the Babylonians was long a flourishing 

pre* m. Babyloniens J. long-temps * 

one. We did not thate the man, but his vices. Does she really +hate 
* 

that vain pomp and ail the parade of grandeur 1 
pompe f. appareil art. 

Take that water off the fire ; it boils too fast. Do not let 
Retirer f. de dessus m. elle boidllir fort. laisser 

-the ^soup 2 (boil away) ] (so much). That sauce has 2 (boiled away) 

ebouillir taut f. * 

'(too much). Boil that meat again; it has not 2 boiled 

trop. Faites r ebouillir viande f. * f. 

'(long enough). He runs faster than I. He ran about uselessly 

assez. plus vtte moi. J. * inutilement 

all the morning. We ran at the voice of that honest man, and assisted 

matinee f. J. f. J. 

him. (The moment) he saw us in danger, he ran to us and delivered us. 

Des que vit en J. * J. 

By 3 so 4 whimsical ] a ^conduct, should we not contribute to our destruction ? 

bizarre concourir perte f. 

He discoursed so long on the immortality of the soul, and the certainty 

J. sur certitude f. 

of another life, that he left nothing unsaid. If we (were to act 

laisser J. en arriere. agir H. 

thus), we should certainly incur the displeasure of our parents. I 
ainsi disgrace f. 

would not have recourse to 3 so 4 base l a 2 method. Will men 

bas moyen m. art. 

always run after shadows 1 
c him ere f. 

* 

He (was near) losing his life in that rencounter. He (was near) 
faillir J. perdre * art. rencontre f. faillir 

falling into the snare which was laid for him. His * strength 
donner A. piege m. quon avait tendu * lid. * art. f. pi. 

fails him (every day).' Let us have something 2 to ? eat 

defaillent lid tous les jours. Donnez-nous * * manger 

'directly ; we are fainting with fatigue and hunger. I cannot meet 
vUe ; defaillons de de faim. ne puis rencontrer 

him ; he shuns me. When (we have no employ), we endea- 

fair on ne sait pas s'occuper, on cher- 

vor to fly from ourselves. Would he not avoid flatterers, if he 
che se fuir * soi-meme. fuir art. Jlatteur m. 

f See Verbs, page 128. J See Verbs, page 129. 

i2 



102 EXERCISES ON THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 

knew all their falsehood 1 He died by a 2 (very painful) 'disease. 
connaitre H. faussete f. de cruel maladie f. 

She died of grief (for the loss of) her son. He (is dying.) She 

J. chagrin m. d 1 avoir perdu se mourir. 

was expiring with grief, when the fear of death (at last) wrested 

se mourir de craintef. art. enjin arracherJ. 

her secret from her. 
m. * lui. 

(Send for) the physician, and follow exactly his advice. Go and 
JLnvoyez querir medecin, suivez * 

fetch my cane. Every day he acquired celebrity by works 

canne f. Tous les jours H. f. desouvragem. 

calculated to fix the attention of an 2 enlightened public. That I 

fait pour eclaire 

would acquire riches at the expense of my honesty ! He had acquired 

S. depe?ism.ip\. probite f. 

by his merit great influence over the opinions of his contemporaries. 
line f. sur opinion sing. contemporain. 

I have inquired about that man (every where), and have not 

de homme-la part out je 

(been able) (to hear any thing of him). Who s has Requested 

pu en avoir de nouvelles. Qui est-ce qui requerir 

2 it of 'you 1 Sesostris, king of Egypt, conquered a great part of Asia. 
en * J. art. 

The formidable 'empire which Alexander conquered did not last 

Alexandre I. ne durer pas 

longer than his life. I have heard that important 'news. 

plus long-temps f. ouir-dire sing. 

He dressed himself (in haste), and (went out) immediately. I wish 

se vttir a la hate sortir J. sur-le-champ. voudrais 

she would dress the children with more care. If his fortune 

que vttir S. de 

''permitted 'him, he would clothe all the poor of his parish. Two 
le permettait lui, paroisse f. 

servants clothed him with his 2 ducal 'mantle. He only passed 
domestique revetir H. de manteau m. ne que H. 

for a traveller ; but lately he has assumed the character of an envoy. 
voyageur ; depuis peu revetir uu * envoyi. 

It begins to be very warm ; it is time to (throw off some clothing). 
commencer faire chaud ; de se divttir. 

I will gather with pleasure some of these flowers and fruits, 

quelques-unes de ces 

since you wish to 2 have 'some. Do not gather those peaches 

puis que seriez Hen aise de en f. 

before they are ripe. That is a country where they neither 
avant que ne Q. milr. Ce pays ou on ne 

reap com nor gather grapes. We shall collect in 2 ancient 

recueillir ni bit ni * vin. recueillir 

'history important -and Valuable 'facts. He received us in 2 the 

precieux fait. accueillir dela la 

3 most 1 polite 'manner. Poverty, misery, sickness, per- 

maniere f. art. f. art. f. art. maladie f. art. 



EXERCISES ON THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 103 

secution, in a word, all the misfortunes in the world, have (fallen upon) 

f. en malheur m. de accueillir 

him. You will give six inches to that cornice ; it will project 
voulez donner ponce J. cornichef. elle saillir 

too much. That balcony projected too much ; it darkened the 

balcon m. H. obscurcir H. 

dining-room. When Moses struck the rock, there gushed out 
Quand Jfo'ise f rapper J. rocher m. il saillir J. 

of it a spring of 2 (fresh running) ] water. The blood gushed from 

en source f. vif f. H. 

his vein with impetuosity. We shall assault the enemy to-morrow in 

veine f. pi. demain 

their entrenchments. Were we not overtaken by a horrible storm 1 

retranchement. J. assailli tempete f. 

At every word they said to him concerning his son, the good 
A chaque que on disait * de 

(old man) leaped for joy. Shall you not shudder with fear 1 

vieillard tressaillir H. de joie. tressaillir peur f, 

EXERCISES ON THE IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE 
THIRD CONJUGATION. 

See Verbs, page 134 and following. 

274. Important direction. — Whenever the student has a French verb 
ending with oir to translate, the first thing he must do is to look for it 
among the verbs composing the list given page 162. If the verb looked 
for is not to be found in the above mentioned list, he must conjugate it on 
recevoir, to receive, page 66 ; and if it be found in the list, he will be 
directed on which verb to conjugate it. 

I had apartments that I liked ; I will endeavor to have them 

H. un logement sing. aimer H. veux essayer de le sing, 

again. Beware of falling. How has he fallen into poverty 1 

Prenez-garde A. Comment * de choir en pauvrete ' ? 

Since the publication of his last work, he has much fallen in the 
Depuis dernier dechoir dans 

esteem of the public. If he do not alter his conduct, he will 

changer F. de * 
decline (every day) in his reputation and credit. He has 

de' choir de jour en jour de f. de son m. 

put in the lottery, and he hopes that a capital prize will fall 
7??/.? a loterie f. * art. gros lot m. echoir 

(to his share). That bill of exchange has expired. The first term 

lid lettre f. change echoir. terme m. 

expires (at Midsummer). You have drawn on me a bill of ex- ■ 

a la Saint Jean. tirer sur moi 

change ; when is it payable 1 I did not believe that (I must) so 

echoir F. croyais il me fallut 

soon (have taken) that journey. He must have sunk under 

faife voyage m. afalluqxCil succomber S. 

the efforts of (so many) enemies. 
tant de 



104 EXERCISES ON THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 

The spring which moves 2 the •whole machine is very ingenious, 
ressort m. tout f. 

though very simple. It was passion which moved him to that 
guoique Ce H. art. f. J. 

action. Can you doubt that the soul, though it is spiritual, moves 

f. Pouvez douter f. * * spirituelne Q. 

the body (at pleasure) % That is a man whom nothing moves. We 

a sa volonte ? Ce iraouvoir, 

had scarcely lost 4 sight 3 of ! land 2 when there arose a 
H. a peine perdu vue f. la terre f. que il s' 'emouvoir 

violent tempest. We were moved with fear and pity. When 
grande temptte f. J. 'emus de crainte f. de pitie f. Quand 

the famous d'Aguesseau was promoted to the dignity of chancellor, all 
celebre J. f. chancelier 

France shewed the greatest joy. That bishop 2 well 
art. f. en temoigner J. f. eveque 

'deserved, by his talents and by his virtues, that the king should promote 
miriter H. S. 

him to the dignity of primate. The people think that it rains 
primat. peuple sing, croit 

frogs and insects at certain seasons. It will not rain 
grenouille f. insecte m. en temps m. 

to-day, but I (am fearful) (of its) raining to-morrow. 
d/aujourd'hui craindre qii'il ne Q. 



When he arrived at home he (was quite exhausted). The 
fat arrive chez-lui n'en pouvoir H. plus, 

minister had (so many) people at his levee, that I could not 
ministre H. tant de monde a audience f. G. 

speak to him. Are 2 you ] afraid that he will not accomplish 

* craignez pouvoir Q. venir a bout de 

that affair 1 I know that he is not your friend, but I know likewise 

savoir de pi. aussi 

that he is a man of probity. Let them know that their pardon depends 
bien. savoir grace dependre 

on their submission. I could wish that he knew his lessons a 
de soumission. desirer N. savoir Q. 

little better. Let us see if this 2 (new-fashioned) ! gown becomes 

voir cVun nouveau gout robe seoir 

you or not. Be assured that 2 too s gaudy 'colors will not become 

non. art. voyant f. seoir 

you. The head-dress which that lady wore became her very ill. 

coY'ffure f. que porter H. H. lui 

These colors become you so well, you (would do wrong) to wear any 

C. avoir N. tort de en porter 

others. Set that child in this arm-chair, and take care lest 
Asseoir m. fauteuil m. prenez-garde que 

he fall. I will sit down on the top of that hill, whence 

ne Q. s 'asseoir sommet m. coteau m. 

I shall discover a prospect (no less) magnificent than diversified. 

decouvrir seine f. aussi magnifique * vari't. 

We (were seated) on the banks of the Thames, whence we were 
s y asseoir I. bord m. Tamise f. 



EXERCISES ON THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 105 

contemplating myriads of vessels, which bring (every year) the 

H. milliers vaisseau, apporter tous les ans 

riches of the two hemispheres. 



See the 2 admirable ] order of the universe: does it not announce a 
Voir m. 

2 supreme 'architect] Has he again seen with pleasure his country and 

artisan m. revoir pays 

his friends 1 (Had he a glimpse of) the dawn of this fine day 1 To 

entrevoir aurore Pour 

finish their affairs, it would be necessary for them to (see one another). 

falloir N. que * Us * $' entrevoir S. 

I clearly foresaw (from that time) all the obstacles he would have to 
bien pre voir J. des lors m. 

surmount. Would you have the judge (put off) the execution 
surmonter. H. * que surseoir S. 

of the sentence that he had pronounced ] I shall not put off the 
arret rendu ? 

pursuit of that affair. If men do not provide (for it), God 

poursuite f. pi. art. pourvoir y 

will provide for it. Would this book (be good for) nothing 1 You 

valoir N. 
have not paid for this ground more than it is worth ; (are you afraid) 

* terre f. f. ne valoir F. craignez-vous 

that it is not worth six hundred pounds 1 Let us take arbitrators. 

que Q. livres sterlings? prenons arbitre. 

One ounce of gold is equivalent to fifteen ounces of silver. Doubt 

once f. equivaloir 

not that reason and truth will prevail (at last). I can 

art. art. * ne pre valoir Q. a la longue. pouvoir 

and will tell the truth. If you are willing, he will be willing 
je vouloir dire le vouloir le 

too. Let us resolve to resist our passions, and we shall be sure 
aussi. veuillons combattre 

to conquer them. (Be so good as) to lend me your grammar. 
de vaincre veuillez * preter 

EXERCISES ON THE IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE 
FOURTH CONJUGATION. 

See Verbs, page 141 and following. 

Wood which (is burned) (resolves itself) into ashes and 
art. bois m. on bride \se resoudre en cendre f. - en 

smoke. Have they resolved on peace or war ] The fog 
f umte i. on resoudre * art. f. art. f. brouillardm. 

(has resolved itself) into ram. Could that judge 2 thus 3 lightly 

se resoudre I. pluie f. si legtrement 

Absolve the guilty 1 2 Strong J waters dissolve metals. 

absoudre N. coupable m. pi. art. Fort f. dissoudre art. 

t See page 91, art. 265. 



106 EXERCISES ON THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 

2 Those s drugs (were dissolved) (before they were put) into that 

drogue on a dissous avant que de les mettre A. 
medicine. My sister was sewing all day yesterday. That piece is not 
remede m. coudre J. * hier m. 

well sewed ; it must (be sewed over again). Unpick that lace, 

la recoudre F. Decoudre dentelle f 

and sew it again very carefully. Does he set a great value 

avec beaucoup de soin. mettre prix m. 

upon riches 1 I never admitted those principles. Has he committed 
aux admettre J. commettre 

that fault? If he (would take my advice), he would resign his 

faute f. irfen croyait se demettre de 

charge in favor of his son. He put his arm (out of joint) 

f. en se demettre J. le bras m. 

yesterday. I will omit nothing that depends on me to serve 

omettre de ce qui dependre L. de pour 

you. God frequently permits the wicked to prosper. 

souvent permettre que mediant m. pi. * prosperer Q. 
Put this book in its place again. Under whatever form of govern- 

Remettre a f. * Sotis quelque gouverne- 

ment you may live, remember that your first duty is to be 

ment m. que vivre, se souvenir devoir m. de 

obedient to the laws. It frequently happens that fathers transmit to 
soumis arriver art. transmettre 

their children both their vices and their virtues. He has long 

et long-temps 

meddled with 2 public 'affairs; but his endeavors have not 

s'entremettre de art. effort 

been crowned with success. 
couronner de art. m. 



I took great pains ; but, at last, I ground all the coffee. 

prendre J. beaucoup enfin moudre J. cafe m. 

Grind those razors with care. Those knives (are just) ground. 

imoudre rasoirm. couteaum.vieiment d'etre 

This grain is not sufficiently ground ; it should be (ground again). 

assez il faut le remoudre. 

I wish that you would take courage. What news have you learned 1 

vouloir Q. f. pi. 

Philosophy comprehends logic, ethics, physics, 

art. comprendre art. logiquei. art. ?no rate f.s. art. physique f. s. 

and metaphysics. It is (with difficulty) that he (divests himself) 

art. metaphysique f. s. Ce diffi 'cilement que se deprendre 
of his opinions. He has forgotten all that he knew. I fear 
desapprendre ce que savoir H. 
you will undertake a task above your strength. Could 

que ne entreprendre Q. tache f. au-dessus de f. pi. 

he have been mistaken so grossly 1 I reproved him continually 
setromperO. grossitrement reprendrelA. sans cesse 

for his faults, but (to no purpose). We surprised the enemy, and 
defaut, inutilement. surprendre J. pi. 

cut them to pieces. In the middle of the road the axletree of our 
taillerJ. en a chemin essieu m. 



EXERCISES ON THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 107 

carriage broke. Bad company corrupts the minds of young people. 

carrosseserompre J. art. f. pi. corrompre esprit s. gens'pl. 

Why do you interrupt your brother, when you see him busy 1 
Pourquoi interrompre occupe ? 

3 (For a long while) J we followed that method, which was only 
long-temps suivre J. f. H. ne que 

calculated to mislead us. What (is the consequence) 1 See the errors 
propre igarer Que s'ensuivre 

that (have sprung) from this proposition, which appeared so true. 

se sont ensuivies f. H. 

We pursued our course, when some cries, which came from the 

suivre H. che?nin, lorsque des cri 3 * sortis 

midst of the forest excited terror in our souls. The Greeks 

fond m. foret f. porter J. art. f. ame. Grec 

vanquished the Persians at Marathon, Salamis, Platea, and Mycale. 

Perse a a Salamine, a Platee, a 

I have at last convinced him, by 2 such 3 powerful 'reasons, of the 

convaincre des si fort f. 

greatness of his fault, that I (have no doubt) but he will 
enormite faute f. ne doitte nullement que ne 

repair it. It is during winter that they thrash corn in 

riparer Q. Ce pendant art. on battre ble* 

2 cold Countries. The enemy was so completely beaten in that 
les froid pays m. pi. battre 

engagement, that he was forced to abandon thirty leagues of the country. 
rencontre f. de lieue f. * pays. 

The cannon (beat down) the tower. They were fighting with 

canon abattre J. tour f. combattre an 

2 unexampled 'fury when a -panic ] terror made them take 

sans exemple acharnement m. panique f. faire J. leur 

flight, and dispersed them in an instant. Beat these mattresses 
dxi.fuitef. J. m. Rebattre matelasm. 

again. Happy are those who live in solitude ! 2 Long ] live that 

vivre art. retraite f. Long-temps Q. 
good king ! He did not long survive a person who was so dear to him. 
survivrc a . f. 
Fathers live again in their children. He was in a strange dejection 
art. revivre accablement 

of mind ; but the news which he has received (has revived) him. 
esprit; f. pi. f. pi. ont fait revivre A. 

What will you (have him do) ] Do not make (so much) 
Que vouloir que il fasse ? tant 

noise. Do they never exact ] That woman mimicked all the 
de bnut. surfaire ? contrefaire H. 

persons whom she had seen ; this levity rendered her odious. It was 
f. que f. pi. legerete f. J. f. Ce J. 

with difficulty he (divested himself) of the false opinions which 

peine^jiue se defaire f. on 

had been §JB|him in his infancy. Could it be possible that we should 

* f. pi. ; lui f. 

not again make a journey to Paris, Rome, and Naples ? He 
refaire S. art. * voyage de de de 



108 EXERCISES ON THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 

says that you have offended him, and that, if you do not satisfy him 
(lit offense satisfaire 

quickly, he will find means to satisfy himself. 

promptement, art. moyen sing, de se satisfaire lui-meme. 

(Every night) she milked her sheep, which gave her a - (great 
Tons les soirs traire H. brebis pi. H. lui abon- 

quantity) of 3 wholesome 'milk. Have you milked your goats 1 Are 
dant * et sain lait m. chevre f. 

the cows milked 1 Salt is good to entice pigeons. You 

vache art. Sel m. pour attraire art. m. 

will never know the nature of bodies, if you do not abstract their 

connattre art. abstraire 

2 necessary Qualities from those which are inherent (in them). The 
celles leur. 

least thing (diverts his attention). Will you not extract that 
moindre le distraire F. extraire 

charming passage 1 Have you darned your gown 1 Should he 

m. rentraire 

not redeem that land? What! would you (have me screen) 
retraire Quoi ! F. que je soustraie 

those (guilty persons) from the rigor of the laws 1 
coupable m. pi. a rigueur f. 

Was not Virgil born at Mantua? It is from that 2 poisoned Source 
naitreJ. JMantoue? Ce empoisonne f. 

that have arisen all the 2 cruel ] wars that have desolated the universe. 
que naitref.ipl. f. desoler 

The fable says that, (as soon as) Hercules had (cat off) one of the heads 
f. dit aussitbt que H.ercule couper tete f. 

of the hydra, 2 others '(sprang up). While their 2 united 

hydre f. d'autres il en renaitre H. Tandis qua re*uni 

'flocks fed on the 2 tender 3 and 4 flowery ] grass, they 

troupeau m. paitre H. * fieuri herbe f. 

sang under the shade of a tree the sweets of 2 rural 'life. 

chanter H. a ombre douceur f. art. champHre f. 

Your horses have not fed to-day: (you must have them fed). 

repaltre d'aujourd'hui ilfaut les f aire repaltre A. 
He is a man who thirsts 2 after nothing 'but blood and slaughter. 
Ce ne se repaltre de * que de carnage m. 

The thunder which roared from afar announced a 

tonnerre m. bruyait dans art. lointain m. H. 

2 dreadful 'storm. They heard roar the waves of an 2 agitated 

terrible orage m. On entendre H. bruire A. fot m. agite 

'sea. That street is too noisy for those who love retirement and 
mer f. rue f. bruyant art. retraite f. 

study. I (have a glimpse of) something that shines through 
art. entrevoir quelque chose a travers 

those trees. A ray of hope shone upon us in the midst of the 

rayon m. hare J. * a milieu 

misfortunes which overwhelmed us. (Every thing) is^ll rubbed in 
malheur m. accabler H. Tout frotti 

that house : every thing shines, even the floor. Would he not 
y reluire, jusque a, plancher m. 



EXERCISES ON THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 109 

have injured you in that affair 1 Jesus Christ was circumcised eight 

nuire circoncis 

days after his birth. Will you preserve these peaches with sugar, 

naissancet confire a art. sucrem. 

with honey, or with brandy 1 Did you pickle cucumbers, 

a art. miel m. a art. eau-de-vie f. concombre m. 

purslane, and sea-fennel? If he loses his lawsuit, all his 

pour pier m. perce-pierre f. proces m. 

property will not suffice. 

bien suffire. 

Always speak truth, but with discretion. Never contradict 
dire art. f. 
(any one) in public. You thought you were serving me in speaking 
per sonne en penser G. * * A. en parler 

thus : well (let it be so) ; you shall not be contradicted. What ! 
ainsi: eh! bien, soit ; rfen pas tie dire, Quoi! 

would you forbid him all communication with his friends 1 That 

interdire f. 

woman who slandered (every one) soon lost all kind of 

H. de tout le monde, J. espece f. 

respect. You had foretold that event. Let us curse no one ; 

consideration. ne personne ; 

let us remember that our law forbids us to curse even those who 

se rappeler def entire * de 

persecute us. Write (every day) the reflections which you make 
persecuter ecrire tons les jours 

on the books you read. Did he not read that interesting 'history with 

lire. J. 

(a great deal) of pleasure 1 God is an infinite 'being, who is circum- 

beaucoup ttrem. ne 

scribed neither by time nor place. Will you not describe 

ni art. ni par art. lieu m. pi. 

in that episode the 2 dreadful 'tempest which assailed your hero? ! Get 
m. horrible f. J. /aire 

3 those 4 soles 5 and 6 whitings 2 fried. If you wish to form your taste, 

ces merlan frireA. vouloir * 

(read over and over) unceasingly the ancients. He was elected by a 

lisez et relisez sans cesse J. » a 

great majority of voices. We have laughed heartily, and have 

f. rire de bon coeur, nous 

resolved to (goon). He did not answer him (any thing:) but he 
resolu de continuer. ne repondre J. lui rien 

smiled at him, as a sign of approbation, in the 2 kindest banner. 
sourirs J. * lui y en * de gracieux air m. 

Seated under the shade of palm-trees, they were milking their 

Assis a art. palmier 

goats and ewes, and 2 merrily 'drinking that nectar, which 

chevre f. leurs brebis f. avec joie m. 

(was renewed) every day. Should they not have drunk with ice 1 
se renouveler H. boire a art. 

This window does not shut well ; when you have made some alterations 
clore M. reparation f. 

K 



110 OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 

(to it), it will shut better. He had scarcely closed his eyes, when the 

y f. clove mieax. a peine G. les que 

noise which they made at his door awoke him. Have they not 

que on H. a reveiller J. on 

enclosed the suburbs within the city 1 Will you enclose your park 
enclore faubourg m. dans ville f. pare 

with a wall or a hedge 1 Put the eggs of those silk-worms 
de murm.de hale f. JVIetiez ceufm. vers a soiem. 

in the sun, that they may hatch. Those flowers just blown, 
soleil m. eclore Q. nouvellement e close, 

spread the sweetest fragrance. When did they conclude this treaty 1 
repandre doux parfum m. G. traite m. 

His enemies managed so well, that he was unanimously excluded from 

/aire J. J. unanimement 

the company. Did you think me capable of 3 so 4 black ' an 2 acf? 

compagnie f croire F. noir trait m. 

He possesses some kind of knowledge ; but (not so much as he thinks). 

quelque espece savoir il s* en fait trop accroire. 



CHAPTER VI. 

OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 



275. Prepositions, which are so called from being prefixed to the nouns 
which they govern, serve to connect words with one another, and to show 
the relation between them. Thus, in this phrase, le fruit de Varbre, the 
fruit of the tree, de expresses the relation between fruit and arbre. 
Likewise in this, utile a Vhomme, useful to man ; a forms the relation 
between the noun homme and the adjective utile. De and a are preposi- 
tions, and the word to which they are prefixed is called their regimen. 

276. There are different kinds of prepositions. 

277. Some denote place, as : 

Chez. II est chez-lui, he is at home. 

Dans. II se promene dans le jar din, he is walking in the garden. 
Devant. II est toujours devant mes yeux, he is always before my eyes. 
Derriere. line r eg arde jamais derriere lui,he never looks behindhim. 
Parmi. Que de fous parmi les homines ! how many fools among men ! 
Sous. La taupe vit sous terre, the mole lives under ground. 
Sur. II a le chapeau sur la tete, he has his hat on his head. 
Vers. Vaimant se touvne vers le nord, the loadstone points towards 
the north. 

EXERCISE ON THESE PREPOSITIONS. 

We find less 2 real 'happiness in an 2 elevated 'condition than in a 
On de bonheur f. 

2 middling 'state. One is never truly peaceful, but at home. 

moyen ve'ritablement tranquille que soi. 

He walked before me to serve me as a guide. There was a ^delightful 
marcher pour de * H. 



OF THE PRErOSITIONS. Ill 

'grove behind his house. Among (so many) different 'nations, 
bosquet m. tant de 

(there is not one) that has not a 2 religious 'worship. Nature 

il n'y en a pas une Q. culte m. art. 

displays her riches with magnificence under the 2 torrid 'zone. 
deployer torride f. 

s Eternal 2 snows '(are to be seen) on the summit of the Alps. Towards 

f. on voit sommet JLlpes. 

the noith, nature assumes a 2 gloomy and wild 'aspect, 
art. triste sauvage aspect m. 

278. Some mark order, as : 

Avant. La nouvelle est arrivee avant le courrier, the news is come 

before the courier. 
Apres. II est trop vain pour marcher apres les autres, he is too proud 

to walk after other people. 
Entre. Elle a son enfant entre les bras, she holds her child in (for 

bettveen) her arms. 
Depuis. Depuis la creation jusqita nous, from the creation to the 

present time. 
Des, Des son enfance,from his infancy ; des sa source, from its source. 

EXERCISE. 
We (were up) before (daylight) (in order to) enjoy the 2 mag- 
se lever I. art. jour pour de ma- 

nificent 'spectacle of the 2 rising ] sun. After such great faults, 
gnifique m. levant, de si faute f. 

it only remained for us to repair them (as well as we could). Be- 
ne que r ester H. * reparer de notre mieux. 
tween those two mountains runs a ? deep 2 hollow 'road. 2 Many 

est pro fond et creux chemin m. 
4 very 5 astonishing s events '(have taken place) 6 within these ten years. 

il s'est passe depuis * 
From my earliest infancy I have had an abhorrence of lying. 

iendre * horreur art. mensonge m. 

279. Some denote union, as : 

Avec. Ufaut savoir avec qui on se lie, we ought to know ivith whom 

we associate. 
Durant. Durant la guerre, during the war; durant Vete, during 

the summer. 
Pendant. Pendant Vhiver,in winter ; pendant lapaix, in time of peace. 

This preposition denotes a duration more limited than durant. 
Outre. Outre des qualites aimables, il faut encore, &c, besides 

amiable qualities, there ought still, <fec. 
Suivant. Je me deciderai suivant les cir Constances, I shall determine 

according to circumstances. 
Selon. Le sage se conduit selon les maximes de la raison, a wise 

man acts according to the dictates of reason. 

EXERCISE. 
With wit, politeness, and some (readiness to oblige), one generally 
unpen de provenance, 



112 OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 

succeeds in the world. We are fit for meditation during winter. 

reussir On est propre a art. f. 

(In the course of) that siege the commandant of the city made some 

Pendant siege m. J. 

-very Successful tallies. Besides the 2 exterior 'advantages of figure 

heuveux sortie f. art. 

and the graces of deportment, she possesses an Excellent 'heart, a 

art. maintien m. avoir 

2 correct judgment, and a Sensible 'soul. Always act according 

Miin jugement se conduire 

to the maxims which I have given you. 
f. inculquer f. pi. 

280. Some express opposition, as : 

Contre. Je plaide contre lui, I plead against him. 
Malgre. II V a fait malgre moi, he has done it in spite of me. 
Nonobstant. Nonobstant ce qxton lui a dit, not-withstanding what 
has been said to him.. 

EXERCISE. 
We cannot long act (contrary to) our own character : notwith- 
savoir N. agir "■ contre * 

standing all the pains we take to disguise it, it (shews itself), and 

que pour se montrer 

betrays us on many occasions. (In vain we dissemble) ; in spite 
trahir en bien nous avons beau f aire ; 

of ourselves, (we are known) at last. 

o?i nous commit a la longue, 

281. Some express privation or separation, as: 

Sans. Des troupes sans chef troops -without commanders. 
Excepte. Excepte quelques malheureux, except some wretches. 
Hors. Tout est perdu hors Vhonneur, all is lost save honor. 
Hormis. Tons sont entres hormis mon frere, they are all come in 
except my brother. 

EXERCISE. 
(Had it not been for) your care, I should have been ignorant all my 
Sans pi. tin 

life. A\[ the philosophers of antiquity, except a few, 

art. trts-petit nombre> 

have held the world to be eternal. All laid down their arms, 

croire * * mettre bas les 

except two regiments, who preferred (making their way) through 

se faire F. jour a travers 
the enemy. Every thing is absurd and ridiculous in that work, 

P i. 

except a chapter or two. 

282. Some denote the end, as: 

Envers. II est charitable envers les pauvres, he is charitable to the 
poor. 



OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 113 

Touchaxt. E a ecrit touchant cette affaire, he has written respect- 
ing- that business. 
Pour. U travaille pour le bien public, he labors for the public good. 

EXERCISE. 
I have written to you concerning that business, in which I take the 

a laquelle 
most lively interest ; and as I know your benevolence towards the 
vif connaitre bienveillance f. 

unfortunate, I (make not the least doubt) that you (will carefully 
malheureux pi. ne doute nullement ne donner Q. tons 

attend) (to it), (not so much) for the satisfaction of obliging me, as for 
vos soins y moins A. 

the pleasure of justifying innocence and confounding calumny. 
justijier A. art. de confondre A., art. f. 

283. Others mark the cause and means , as : 

Par. 77 Vajlichi par ses prieres, he has softened him by his entreaties. 
Motennant. II reussira moyennant vos avis, he will succeed by 

means of 5 r our counsels. 
Attendu. II ne pent partir attendu les vents contraires, he cannot 

sail on account of contrary winds. 

EXERCISE. 

Is there any man that has never been softened by tears or dis- 

aucun Q. fechir art. ni des- 

armed by submission 1 Through the precautions which we took, 

armer art. • que J. 

we avoided the rocks of that 2 dangerous ] coast. Owing to the bad 

J. ecueilm. cote f. 

state y(of my father's health), I shall not travel this year. 

voyager annee f. 

284. The use of the prepositions a, de, en, is very extensive. 

285. A is generally used to express several relations, as destination, 
tendency, place, time, situation, &c, being often a substitute for various 
other prepositions ; ex. : — destination, to : aller a Londres, to go to 
London. — Tendency, to, toward : courir a sa perte, to hasten to one's 
ruin. — Aim, at, for : aspirer a la gloire, to aspire to glory. — Residence, 
at, in : ctre a Rome, to be at Rome. — Time, at : a midi, at twelve 
o'clock. — Concern, on : a ce sujet, on this subject. — Manner, -with : sup- 
plier a mains jointes, to entreat earnestly. — Means, with : peindre a 
Vhuile, to paint in or with oil ; with : has a troisfls, three-thread stock- 
ings — that is, with three threads. — Situation, at, with : itre a. son aise, 
to be at ease. — Purpose, for : une table a manger, a dining-table. — Suit- 
ableness, for, to : homme a reussir, a man likely to succeed. — Desert, to : 
crime a ne pas pardonner, a crime not to be forgiven, &c. 

EXERCISE ON THE PREPOSITION d. 
Fathers ! give good counsels and ? still better 2 examples to your 

encore meilleur 

f Translate as if it stood thus :— Of 'the health of my father. 

k2 



114 OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 

children. A good minister only aims at the glory of 2 serving 3 his 

ne que aspirer a A. 

4 country 'well. When we were in the country, we devoted the 
pays H. a campagne f. consacrerH. 

morning to study, we walked at noon, and at three or four 
matinee, f. art. se promener H. midi 

o'clock we went a hunting or fishing. Michael Angelo has 
heure H. a art. chasse £ a la peche f. JWichel-Ange 

painted (a great deal) in fresco. It is a bed with (ivory posts) 

beaucoup art. f res que f. Ce litm. colonnes dHvoire 

and (mahogany feet). That man, with his 2 gloomy 'looks and 
a pied d' 'acajou. les sombre regard m. 

2 surly 'behaviour, seems fit only to serve as a scarecrow. 
an brusque maintienm. semble propre ne que de * epouvantail. 

286. Be is generally used to express separation, extraction, possession, 
appurtenance, cause, shift, result, <&c, and supplies the place of several 
prepositions; as, from: je viens de France, I come from France; cVun 
bout a f autre, from one end to the other. — Of: le palais du roi, the 
palace of the king ; les facultes de Vame, the faculties of the soul ; un 
homme ft esprit, a man of wit. In a partitive sense — of: moitie de, 
quart de, &c, the half of, the fourth of, &c. : it is used for par, by : il 
est aime de tout le monde, he is beloved by every hody ; for, through, 
or by, &c. ; mourir de faim, de soif to die of hunger, of thirst — On, 
upon, -with : vivre de fruits, to live upon fruit. — On account of, or for : 
sauter dejoie, to leap for joy. 

EXERCISE ON THE PREPOSITION de. 
I come from London, where I have spent (a week) very agreeably* 
ou passe huit jours 

From one end of the horizon to the other, the sky was covered with 

bout m. m. ciel m. 

2 thick s black 'clouds. The marble of Pares is not finer than that 
epais et noir nuage m. 
which we get from Carrara. Montaigne, Madame de Sevigne, and 

qui nous vient Car rare. 

La Fontaine, were writers of 2 truly 3 original 'genius. One half 

H. ecrivain un moitie f. 

of the 2 terrestrial 'globe, is covered with water, and above a (third part) 

terrestre globe m. plus de tiers m. 

of the rest is uninhabited, either through 2 extreme 'heat or through 
inhabitt, ou par un chaleur f. 

2 excessive 'cold. In that happy retreat, we lived on the milk of 
un froid m. asile m. H. 

our flocks, and the 2 delicious 'fruits of our orchards. 
brebis pi. de verger m 

287. Es" serves to mark the relations of time, place, situation, &c, and 
is variously expressed ; as, e'etait en hiver, it was during winter ; etre 
en Angleterre, to be in England; alter en Italie, to go into Italy; elle 
est en bonne sante, she is in good health ; il vaut mieux etre en paix, 
qu'en guerre, it is better to be at peace than at war ; il V a fait en haine 
de lui, he did it out of hatred to him, &c. 



OF THE ADVERB. 115 

EXERCISE OX THE PREPOSITION en. 
2 He had 'for 2 (a long while) 4 lived in France ; the troubles which 
* depuis long-temps vivre H. 
agitated that fine kingdom obliged him to retire to Switzerland, 

J. royaume m. J. cle se retirer Suisse, 

whence E he 'soon 2 after (set out) for Italy. We were at peace, and 
cVoii se rendre J. H. 

enjoyed all its blessings, when ambition rekindled the 
nous en gwuter H. art. * charme m. art. rallumer 

flames of war, and forced us to put our frontiers in a state of 
feu sing. art. J. de mettre frontiere f. * 

defence. The savage is almost continually at war ; he cannot remain 

presque toujours 
at rest. He has acted, on this occasion, like a great man. 
repos. dans en * 



CHAPTER VII. 
OF THE ADVERB. 



238. The adverb is a word which accompanies verbs, adjectives, and 
even other adverbs, to express their manner or circumstances. 

289. Remark. There are adjectives which are sometimes used as 
adverbs ; as, il chante juste, he sings well ; elle chante faux, she sings 
out of tune ; Us ne voient pas clair, they do not see clear ; cette fleur 
sent ban, this flower has a good smell, &c. The adjectives juste, faux, 
clair, and bon, here supply the place of adverbs. 

290. Adverbs are of different kinds. 

291. The most numerous are those which express manner, and are 
formed from adjectives by the following method : 

292. Rule I. When the adjective ends in the masculine with a vowel, 
the adverb is formed by adding ment ; as, modeste-ment, modestly ; poli- 
ment, politely; ingenu-ment, ingenuously, &c. 

293. Exceptions. Impuni makes impunement, and traltre, trai- 
treusement. 

294. The following six take e close before ment, instead of the e mute 
in the adjective : 

aveuglement, blindly conformement, conformably 

commode ment, commodiously enormement, enormously 

incommodement, incommodiously opiniatrement obstinately 

295. Rule II. When the adjective ends with a consonant, in the mas- 
culine, the adverb is formed from the feminine termination, by adding 
ment; as, grand, grandement, greatly; franc, franchement,, frankly; 
naif, na'ivement, artlessly, &c. 

EXCEPTIONS. 

298. 1st, Gentil, makes gentiment, prettily. 

297. 2d, The following eight adverbs, 
communement, commonly importune ment, importunately 

confuse ment, confusedly obscure ment, obscurely 



116 OF THE ADVERB. 

diffuse ment, diffuse dly precise ment, precisely 

expressement expressly profondement, deeply 

take before ment the e close, instead of the e mute, in the feminine of the 

adjectives from which they are derived. 

298. Remark.. The six following adverbs are not derived from adjectives : 
comment, hoiv profuse ment, lavishly 
incessamment, presently nuitamment, by night 
notamment, especially sciemment, knowingly 

299. 3d, Adjectives ending in nt form their adverbs by changing nt 
into inment ; as consta-nt, consta-mment, constantly ; eloque-nt, eloque- 
?nment. Except lent and present, the only two of this class that follow 
the second general rule, making lentement and presentement. 

300. Remark. Most adverbs denoting manner, and a few others, have 
the three degrees of comparison ; as, profondement, aussi, plus, or moins 
profondement, fort, bien, or tres-profondtment, and le plus profondement. 

301. The following degrees of comparison are irregular : 

POSITIVE. COMPARATIVE. SUPERLATIVE. 

bien, -well mieux, better le mieux, the best 

mal, bad pis, -worse le pis, the xvorst 

peu, little moins less le moins the least 

EXERCISE ON THESE ADVERBS. 

Bourdaloue and Massillon have both spoken very eloquently 

Vun et V autre 
on 2 evangelical 'truths ; but (the former) has principally (proposed 
art. evangelique celui-la se pro- 

to himself) to convince the mind ; (the latter) has generally had in 
poser de convaincre celui-ci en 

view to touch the heart. Several of f La Bruyere's characters are 
vue de art. 

as finely drawn as they are delicately expressed. Buffon is one of 

finement trace * * 

the best writers of the 2 last ] century ; he thinks deeply, describes for- 

siecle m. peindre for- 

cibly, and expresses himself (with dignity). Corneille and Racine are 
tement, noblement. 

the two best 3 French 2 tragic ] poets ; the pieces of the former are 

tragique f. 

2 strongly 3 but incorrectly 'written ; those of the latter are more regu- 
larly beautiful, more purely expressed,- and more delicately conceived. 
beau, pense* 

302. There are likewise various other sorts of adverbs 
(^Affirmation, as Certes, certainly ; oui, yes. 

J Consent, as Soit, be it so ; volontiers, willingly. 

OF ] Doubt, as Peut-ttre, perhaps. 

^Denial, as Non, ne, ne pas, ne point, no, not. 

t Translate, Of the characters of La Bruyere.-^ All such phrases are rendered in 
French in this manner. 



OF THE ADVERB. 117 

EXERCISE ON THE ADVERBS OF AFFIRMATION, &c. 

Certainly, either I mistake, or the business passed (in that 
ou se tromper, se passer J. 

manner). Do you think that he listens willingly to this proposal? 
ainsi. ecouter * 

Have you ever read in Racine the famous scene of Phaedra's delirium 1 

f. Phtdre delire m. 

Yes, I have ; and I own it is one of the finest of the 2 French 

la lue ; avouer que ce 

'theatre. Perhaps you will discover, on a second perusal of La 

dans lecture f. 

Fontaine's Fables, beauties which you did not perceive at first. 

f. que avoir H. apercues a la f. 

Will you have some 1 No. Will you not have any 1 The 

Vouloir Y. * en * 

man who (is willing) to do good is not stopped by any obstacle. 

vouloir Y. * * art. arrete aucun 

I will pay him what I owe, but not (all at once). 
lui ce que lui non pas a la fois. 

To A - C Premier ement, first; secondement, secondly, &c. 

I T? k ' ) D'abord, at first ; ensuite, apres, afterwards, then ; 

rt^rt J ' C. auparavant, before. 

)E ] p, C Ou, where ; id, here ; la, there ; de-ga, on this side ; 

J yy ' < de-la, on that side ; partout, every where ; pres, 

\^ ' £ proche, near, nigh ; loin, far, &c. 

EXERCISE ON THE ADVERBS OF ORDER, Sec. 

We ought first to avoid doing evil ; afterwards we ought to do 
Ilfaut * de art. * 

good. ! Read 2 books 4 of ^instruction 2 first, and then you may 
art. art. * 

proceed to those of entertainment. If you will go, settle 

passer L. agrtment. vouloir s 9 en aller regler 

first what is to be done. The painter had (brought together) 
auparavant falloir * * A. r assembler 

in the same picture several 2 dirTerent 'objects: — here, a troop of Bac- 
un tableau Bac- 

chants : there, a troop of young people ; here, a sacrifice ; there, a 
chante : gens 

disputation of philosophers. Sesostris carried his conquests farther 

dispute Sesostris pousser conquete 

than Alexander did afterwards. Call upon your cousin; he 

ne faire J. depuis. Passer chez 

lives 2 near 'here. I cannot see that, if I be not near it. When 
loger F. aupres * Quand 

he knew where he was, he began to fear the consequence of 

savoir J. ~H. commencer J. suite 

his imprudence. Contemplate (at a distance) lofty mountains, 

de loin art. haut f 

if you wish to behold prospects ever varied and ever new. 
vouloir * decouvrir site m. 



304. OF TIME.^ 



118 OF THE ADVERB. 

"p , C JVTaintenant, now ; a present, at pre- 

(_ sent ; actuellement, this moment, &c. 
p , CHier, yesterday ; avant-hier, the day 

< before yesterday ; autrefois, former- 

£ ly, &c. 
■p . C Demain, to-morrow ; apres-demain, the 

(_ day after to-morrow, &c. 

C Souvent, often ; d' ordinaire, generally ; 
Indeterminate < quelquefois, sometimes ; matin, early; 
^_ £ tot, soon ; tard, late, &c. 

EXERCISE ON THE ADVERBS OF TIME. 
I have finished the work you prescribed me ; what do you wish 
achever que ordonner I. que vouloir 

me to do now 1 Formerly, education was neglected ; it is 3 now 
que je * Q. on 

2 (very much) •attended to ; it is (to be hoped) that 2 new 4 views 

beaucoup s'occuper en; falloirY. esptrer A. on 

will 2 soon '(be adopted). They grieved (at it) yesterday; now 

adopter. On s' 'affligerH. en aujourd'hui 

they laugh (at it) ; to-morrow, it will no longer (be thought) of. It is 

rire en ; on plus penser L. y. 

one of those accidents which it is sometimes impossible to avoid. The 

de 
dew incommoded 'me 2 (very much) ; I shall not (in future) 
serein m. G. desormais 

walk so late. 2 Rude 8 and 4 coarse 'criticism gene- 

se promener JMalhonnete grossier une f. 

rally (does greater injury) to the person who indulges himself in 
nuire plus se permettre * * 

it, than to him who is the object (of it). 
celle en. 



C Peu, little, few; assez, enough; trop, too 
Quantity, as < much ; beaucoup, much, very much, ma- 
305. of<^ C ny ; tant, so much, &c. 

Comparison, as S Flus ' mo f \ moins > less ; aussi < so ' autant ' 



1 

| Cuu 

L (_ as much, <&c. 

EXERCISE ON THE ADVERBS OF QUANTITY, &c. 

There are many people who have pretensions ; but very few who 

gens * * a en 

have such as are well founded. To 2 embellish 3 a 4 subject 'too much, 

Q. * * * * defondef.pl. * 
frequently betrays a want of judgment and taste. One very often 

souvent etre faute 
experiences disgust in the midst of 2 the most riotous 'pleasures. 

trouver art. ennui a des bruyant 

She is a 2 giddy 3 and 4 thoughtless 'woman, who speaks much and 
Ce leger inconsequent 

reflects little. She has so much kindness, that it is impossible 
refechir de de 

not to love her These stuffs are beautiful ; consequently they (are 
itoffe f. aussi coutent 



OF CONJUNCTIONS. 119 

dear). This book has merit; but there are others as good. If he 

cner . en de aussi 

has done that, I can do (as much). What I say to you (about it) is 

en autant. en 

meant less to give you pain, than to apprize you of the language 
* pour faire avertir proposal. 

(that is used). She is six years younger than her brother. Nobody 
qiton tient. avoir de moins 

is more interested than you are s (in the success) of Uhe 2 affair. 

n e * a ce que reussir Q. * 

You do not offer enough for this garden : give something more. The 

offrir de de * 

l more 4 ignorant 2 we s are, the 5 less we (believe ourselves so). 
on est, * on croit Vetre. 



CHAPTER VIII. 

OF CONJUNCTIONS. 



306. The conjunction is a word which serves to connect words or sen- 
tences ; as, E pleure et rit en meme temps, he cries and laughs at the 
same time : the word et unites the first sentence, il pleure, with the second, 
il rit. Likewise in Pierre et Paul rient, Peter and Paul laugh : the 
word et unites these two sentences into one, Pierre rit and Paul rit, 

307. There are different kinds of conjunctions. 

308. To unite two words under the same affirmation, or under the 
same negation, et is used for the affirmation and ?ii, neither, nor, for the 
negation. 

309. To denote an alternative or distinction — ou, either, or ; soit, que, 
whether, or ; tantot, sometimes, &c. 

310. To restrict an idea — sinon, but, except; quoique, encore que, 
though, although ; a moins que, unless, till. 

EXERCISE ON THESE CONJUNCTIONS. 

Gold and silver are metals less useful than iron. To listen 
art. art. art. * 

with joy to a slanderer, and to applaud him, is to cherish the serpent 

* medisant, lui, ce * rechauffer 

which stings, that he may sting more effectually. I like neither 

piquer, ajin que plus surement. les 

flatterers nor the wicked. Those who have never suffered, know 
Jlatteur pi. s avoir 

nothing ; they know neither good nor evil. You may choose 
connaitre art. bien art. mal. avez a choisir 

either a happy mediocrity or a sphere more elevated, but exposed to 

de de f. 

many dangers. He is an inconsistent ! man ; he is sometimes of one 
bien Ce inconsequent tantot 

opinion and sometimes of another. I have (nothing more) to say to 
avis ne autre chose 



120 OF CONJUNCTIONS. 

you, only that I will have it so. I shall not yet proceed to the perusal 

sinon que vouloir * * encore lecture f. 

of the authors of the second class, unless you advise me to do so. 

ordre m. ne conseiller Q. * * le 

311. To express opposition — mats, but ; cependant, yet, nevertheless ; 
neanmoins, for all that, however ; pourtant, however, though ; toutefois, 
bien que, although. 

312. To express a condition — -si, if; sinon que, except that; pourvu 
que, provided that ; a condition que, on condition that. 

313. To express consent — a la verite, indeed; a la bonne heure, 
very well. 

314. For explanation — savoir, c y est-a~dire, viz., that is to say; 
comme, as. 

EXERCISE. 
The serpent bites ; it is only a bite ; but from this bite the venom 
ce ne que morsuref; venin 

communicates itself to the whole body : the slanderer speaks ; it is but 

ne que 
a word ; but this word resounds every where. (That is) certainly a 

parole f. retentir Voila 

superb picture ; nevertheless, there is some incorrectness in the design. 
tableau ; incorrection pi. dessein. 

Although Homer, according to Horace, slumbers (at times), he (is) 

Homere, sommeiller Q. quelquefois n'e?i est 

nevertheless the first of all poets. You will succeed, provided you 
pas moins art. reus sir, 

act with vigor. We have within us two faculties that are seldom 
agir Q. en * * 

united, viz : imagination and judgment, 
art. f. art. m. 

315. To express relation or parity — comme, as; ainsi, thus, so; de 
meme, as, just as ; ainsi que, as ; autant que, as much as ; 5/ que, as, &c. 

316. To express augmentation — d'ailleurs, besides, moreover; outre 
que, besides that ; de plus, au surplus, besides, furthermore. 

317. For diminution — au moins, du moins, pour le moins, at least. 

318. To express the cause or the reason of a thing — car, for; comme, 
as ; parce que, because ; puisque, since ; pour que, that, in order that, &c. 

EXERCISE. 

The most beautiful flowers last but a moment ; thus 3 human 
durer ne que art. 

2 life J passes away. The (greatest part) of mankind have, like 
* plupart f. art. h.omme pi. 

plants, 2 hidden Qualities that chance discovers. Madame 
art. cache propriete f. art. hazard fait decouvrir. 

de Sevigne's letters are models of elegance, simplicity, and taste ; 

art. de de 

besides, they are replete with interesting Anecdotes. Nothing is 

plein de f. * de 

more entertaining than history ; besides, nothing is more instructive. 
amusant art. * de 



OF CONJUNCTIONS. 121 

Circumstances show us to others, and still more to our- 

art. Occasion faire connattre encore 

selves. I shall always advise you to take the ancients as your 

conseiller cle pour 

guides ; at least, 2 quit ! but seldom the way which they 

ecarter cle ne vous que de route f. que 

have traced for you. We must, at least, know the 2 general principles 

trace e * II faut, 

of a language, before (we take upon ourselves) to teach it. 

langue f. de se mtler A. de * enseigner 

Certain people hate grandeur, because it lowers and hu- 

f. gens art. f. elle les rabaisser quelle 

miliates them, and makes them feel the privation of the 

que elle leur 

advantages which they covet. 
bien aimer, 

319. To draw a conclusion — or, now; done, then; par consequent, 
consequently ; e'est pourquoi, therefore. 

320. To express a circumstance — quand, lorsque, when; pendant que, 
tandis que, whilst, while; tant que, as long as; depuis que, ever since; 
avant que, before; dts-que, aussitot que, tfabord que, as soon as; 
a peine, hardly, scarcely ; apres que, after that ; erifin, in fine, finally, to 
conclude, &c. 

321. To express a transition — car, for; en effet, indeed, in effect; au 
reste, besides, otherwise ; a propos, now I think of it ; apres tout, after all. 

EXERCISE. 
We ought to love what is amiable : now, virtue is amiable ; there- 
II faut * cequi art. 

fore we ought to love virtue. We ought to practise what the 
* art. * ce que 

Gospel commands us ; now, it commands us, not only to forgive 
evangilem. non de pardonner 

our enemies, but also to love them. Despreaux was (extremely 
a encore de de la plus grande 

particular) in not coming late, when he was invited to dinner ; he 
exactitude a A. trop H. 

said that all the faults of those who (are waited for) present themselves 
H. defaut se font attendre 

to those who wait for them. The pride which possesses us, 

attendre * posseder tout 

visible as it is, escapes our eyes, while it manifests, itself to the eyes of 

que a 

the public, and displeases (every one). After we had examined 

choquer tous les esprits. A. 

that ^singular 'effect, we (inquired into) (its) causes. We had hardly 
rechercher J. en les H. 

done, when he (came in). Pride counterbalances all our imperfections; 
finir, que entreri. contre-peser misere 

for, whether it hides them, or whether it discovers them, it glories in 
ou cacher si se glorifier de 

knowing them. (None but) an Englishman can (be a judge) 
connaitre A. II rty a que Anglais qui Q. juger A. 

L 



122 



OF INTERJECTIONS. 



of Shakspeare ; for what foreigner is sufficiently versed in the English 
quel a?iglais 

language to discover the 2 subiime 'beauties of that author ? 
langue f. pour 

322. The conjunction que is always placed between two ideas, both 
necessary to complete the sense ; as, II est tres-important que tout le 
monde soit instruit, it is of great importance that every body should be 
well instructed. It differs from the relative pronoun que, as it can never 
be converted into lequel, laquelle. The conjunction que is generally 
repeated in French before every member of a period, although it is often 
understood in English. 

EXERCISE. 

(As long as I live), this image will be before my eyes ; and, if 

Toute ma vie f. f. peint f. 

ever the gods permit me to reign, I shall not forget, after 3 so 4 terrible J an 

faire de 
2 example, that a king (is not) worthy to govern (nor) happy in 

n J est de commander et n'est 

his power, (but in proportion as) he subjects it to reason. I 

puissance f. qu'autant que soumettre art. 

am very glad to see that you do not love flattery, and that one 

de 
(runs no risk) in speaking to you with sincerity. 
ne hazarde rien a A. 



CHAPTER IX. 

OF INTERJECTIONS. 



323. Interjections are words which serve to express the sudden emo- 
tions of the soul. The only point to be attended to, is not to place them 
between words which custom has made inseparable. There are interjec- 
tions for every feeling, viz : Of 



Pain ahi, aie ! ouf ! ah ! 

Grief he las ! mon Dieu, &c. 

Fear ha ! he ! 

Joy ah ! bon, bon ! o ! 

Aversion fi ! fi done ! oh, oh ! 
Disgust pouah, pouah ! 
Indignation foin de ! 
Imprecation peste de, la peste de ! 
Disbelief chansons, tarare ! 
Surprise ouais ! 



Astonishment oh ! bon Dieu ! mise- 

ricorde ! peste ! 
Warning gare ! hem ! hola, ho ! 
Checking tout beau ! hola ! 
Encouraging alerte ! allons ! ga cou- 
Applauding bravo, vivat ! [rage ! 
Encoring bis, bis ! 
Calling hola ! ho ! hem, hem ! 

Derision oh! eh! zest! oh, oh, oh! 
Silence chut ! paix ! s 



(123) 

PART II 



THE SYNTAX; 

OR, 

WORDS CONSIDERED IN THEIR CONSTRUCTION. 



CHAPTER I. 

OF THE SUBSTANTIVE. 



324. There are some substantives which are never used in the plural ; 
such are — I. The names of metals, considered in their original state ; as, 
Vor, gold ; le platine, platina. — 2. The names of virtues and vices ; as, la 
chastete, chastity ; Vivrognerie, drunkenness. — 3. Some words of a phy- 
sical or moral nature ; as, Von'ie, hearing ; V odor at, smelling ; le sang, 
blood ; le. sommeil, sleep ; la pauvrete, poverty. — 4. The infinitive of 
verbs and adjectives used substantively, together with some other words, 
which cannot be reduced to any particular class. 

325. Others, on the contrary, which likewise cannot be reduced to any 
particular class, are never used in the singular ; as, annales, annals ; ance- 
tres, ancestors ; mouchettes, snuffers, &c. 



OF COMPOUND NOUNS. 

Of the formation of their Plural 

326. When a noun is compounded of a substantive and an adjective, 
they both take the sign of the plural ; as, un gentilkomme, a nobleman ; 
des gentilshommesy noblemen. 

327* When a noun is compounded of two substantives, united by a 
preposition, the first only takes the sign of the plural ; as, arc-en- del, a 
rainbow ; des arcs-en-ciel, rainbows. 

328. When a noun is compounded of a preposition or verb and a sub- 
stantive, the substantive alone is put in the plural ; as, un entresol (a 
low room between two floors), des entresols ; un garde-fou (rails on 
bridges), des-garde-fous. 

329. Remark. There is a small number of substantives composed of 
a verb and an adverb ; as, un passe-partout, a master or general key ; or 
of a verb repeated ; as, passe-passe, sleight of hand : they never take the 
sign of the plural. 

See page 41, art. 103 and following. 



124 SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. 

EXERCISE ON SUBSTANTIVE AND COMPOUND NOUNS. 

Gold is the most pure, the most precious, the most ductile, and, 
^.rt. par fait, 

after platina, the heaviest of all metals. Chastity is an obligation 

art. m. pesant art. art. * 

of all times, all ages, and all conditions. Intoxication 
art. de art. de art. etat m. art. Ivresse 

which proceeds from beer is of longer duration than that which pro- 

venir art. * * celle 

ceeds from wine. It is the sense of feeling which teaches 

art. Ce art toucher apprendre 

to guard against the errors of sight. Sleep is the image of 
a se garantir de art. art. 

death. 2 (Early) ] learn to distinguish truth from 

art. De bonne-heure apprendre distinguer art. 

falsehood. That is more bitter than wormwood. Dignity 

art. faux, amer de art. absinthe, art. Elevation 

of mind was formerly the (distinguishing mark of) 

art. sentiment m. pi. H. ce qui * distinguer H. 

noblemen. One of the buttresses of the vault has fallen, 

art. arc-boutant m. pi. tomber. 

He is always making (cock-and-bull stories). The Tartars always 

fait des coq-a-Vane m. Tartare 

form the scouts of an army. The fish-carriers did not 

etre avanfccourier m. chasse^maree m. 

arrive in time. This door is only fastened with a latch ; and 

J. a ne que fermer a * art. loquet m. * 

all (the persons) in the house have each their key. 

ceux de passe-partout m. 



CHAPTER II. 
OF THE ARTICLE. 



330. The difficulty attendant on rendering into French the a or an 
which precedes a substantive, when it follows the verb to be, will easily 
be removed by examining whether that substantive be restricted by a 
particular idea: if it be not restricted, the a or an is not expressed in 
French ; thus, i" am a Frenchman, I am a prince, must be translated by 
.je suis Francois, je suis prince. But if it be restricted, then the a or 
an must be expressed by the word un placed before the substantive ; as, 
I am a Frenchman of an illustrious family, I am a very unfortunate 
prince, must be translated by^'e suis un Francais d'une illustre maison, 
je suis un prince tres-malheureux. 

331. When the verb etre is preceded by the demonstrative ce, in 
phrases of this kind, ten is always required before the substantive ; as, 
e'est un tresor, Sec. 

332. The French do not use the article before substantives expressing 
the quality of a preceding noun, though in cases of this kind the English 



SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. 



125 



usually employ the article the, and still more frequently a or an ; as, 
Telemaque, Jils cVUlysse roi d'ltaque, Telemachus, the son of Ulysses 
king of Ithaca; le Due cVYork, prince die sang, the Duke of York, a 
prince of the blood. 

EXERCISE ON THE ARTICLE. 
I am a Frenchman and a merchant ; after having (been at) the most 
negotiant ; A. parcouru 

famous (trading towns) in the Levant, (my commercial concerns) have 

echelle f. de m. les affaires de mon commerce 

brought me here. I am an unhappy Frenchman, who, a 2 striking 
conduire * memorable 

'example of the vicissitudes of fortune, seeks an asylum where I 

art. chercher asile m. 

may end my days in peace. He was a man of 2 uncommon 'probity 
puissefinir Ce un rare f. 

and of 2 tried 'virtue : (as a reward) for the services he 

un eprouve f. pour le recompenser de que 

had rendered to the church and state, the king has made him a 

H. m. pi. eglise a le 

bishop. Neoptolemus had hardly told me that he was a Greek, when 
eveque. J^eoptoltme exit a peine dit que 

I (cried out), " O, enchanting words ! after so many years of silence 

s 'eerier J. doux parole f. de 

and 2 unceasing 'pain ! O, my son, what misfortune, what 

de sans consolation malheur m. 

storm, or rather what 2 propitious 'wind has brought you hither 
tempete f. plutbt favorable conduire 

to end my woes 1" He replied, " I am of the island of Scyros, I 
pour malPm. repondrei. He 

am returning thither ; (I am said to be) the son of Achilles." 
retourner y on dit que je suis Achille, 

333. Without entering more minutely into this subject, the following 
comparative table, in which the same words are exhibited, according to 
circumstances, both with and without the article, will, it is presumed, be 
considered as a sufficient illustration of custom. 

COMPARATIVE TABLE. 



WITH THE ARTICLE. 

The writings of Cicero are full of 

the soundest ideas. 
Divest yourself of the prejudices 
se defaire 

of childhood. 
The different kinds of animals that 

are upon the earth. 
He enters into a detail of the rules 

of a good grammar. 
He affects circumlocutions. 

chercher des detour. 



l2 



WITHOUT THE ARTICLE. 

The writings of Cicero are full of 

2 sound 'ideas. 
Have no prejudice (with regard 

to) this question. 

sur 
There are different kinds of animals 

upon the earth. 
He enters into a long detail of 2 fri- 

volous 'rules. 
He affects long circumlocutions, in 

order to explain the Simplest 

Uhings. 



126 



SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. 



WITH THE ARTICLE. 

He loads his memory with the verses 

of Virgil and the phrases of Cicero. 
Essays supported by 2 strong 'ex- 
Discours soulenu 

pressions. 
He has collected precepts of 
recueillir sur 

morality. 

mceurs pi. 
Make use of the tokens 

se servir signe dont 

(we agreed upon). 

nous sommes convenu. 
The choice of studies, proper &c. 

Knowledge has always been the 
Cofinaissance pi. 
object of the esteem, the praise, 

eloge pi. 
and the admiration of men. 
The riches of the mind can (only 
be acquired) by study. 

ne que s'acquerir. 
The gifts of fortune are uncertain. 
fr agile s. 
The connexion of proofs makes 
enchainement preuve 
them please and persuade. 
qu'elles 
It is by meditation upon what we 
read, that we acquire 2 fresh 
1 knowledge. 
connaissance pi. 
The advantages of memory. 
The memory of facts is the most 
showy. 
brillant. 
The aim of good masters should 
devoir F. 
be to cultivate the mind and 
ttre de 
reason of their pupils. 
The taste of mankind is liable to 
homme pi. 
great changes. 
He has no need of the lessons you 

wish to give him. 
France, Spain, England, &c. 

The isle of Japan. 
He comes from China. 
He arrives from America. 
The extent of Persia. 



WITHOUT THE ARTICLE. 

He loads his memory with 4 insipid 

'verses 2 and s phrases. 
Essays supported by 2 lively 'ex- 
vive 

pressions. 
A collection of precepts in morals. 
* recueil sur 



We are obliged to use some Ex- 
terior 'signs in order to make 
ourselves understood. 
nous entendre. 

He has made a choice of books 
which are, &c. 

It is an object of esteem, of praise, 

Ce 
and admiration 



There is in Peru a prodigious 
le JPerou 

abundance of 2 useless 'riches. 
Gifts of fortune. 
Bien 
There is in this book an admirable 

connexion of 2 solid 'proofs. 



It is by meditation that we acquire 
2 fresh 'knowledge. 



There are different kinds of memory. 
He has only a memory of facts. 



He has an air of pedantry that 
ton m. m ait re 
shocks you at first sight. 
abord. 



Society of 2 chosen 'men. 



He has no need of lessons. 

avoir besoin 
Kingdom of France, of Spain, of 

England, &c. 
Island of Candia. 
He comes from Poland. 
He arrives from Italy. 
He is gone to Persia. 
en 



SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. 



127 



WITH THE ARTICLE. 

He has returned from the East In- 
dies, from Asia, &c. 

He lives in Peru, in Japan, in the 
a 
Indies, in Jamaica, &c. 

The politeness of France, &c. 

The circumference of England. 

The interest of Spain. 

The invention of printing is attri- 
buted to Germany. 

He comes from 2 French 'Flanders. 
franc ais Flandre f. 



WITHOUT THE ARTICLE. 

He has returned from Spain, from 

Persia, &c. 
He lives in Italy, in France, 

in London, in Avignon, &c. 

a a 

The fashions of France. 
The horses of England. 
The wines of Spain. 
The empire of Germany is divided 

into a great number of states. 
He comes from Flanders. 



ON MEASURE, WEIGHT, &c. 

334. The English make use of a or an before nouns of measure, 
weight, and purchase; as, ivheat is sold for a crotvn a bushel; butter 
sells for sixpence a pound ; -wine sold yesterday for forty crowns a hogs- 
head, 'tis more than a groat a bottle. But the French make use of the 
article le, la ; as, le ble se vend un ecu le boisseau ; le beurre se vend 
six sous la livre ; le vin se vendit hier quarante ecus le muid, c'est plus 
de quatre sous la bouteille. 

335. When speaking of time, a or an is expressed in French by the 
preposition par ; as, so much a -week, tant par semaine. 

336. In English a is sometimes put between the pronoun which ex- 
presses admiration and the substantive that accompanies it ; as, -what a 
beauty ! but in French, the un is never expressed in similar cases ; as, 
quelle beaute ! 

337. In English, when the adverbs more and less are repeated to express 
a comparison, they must be preceded by the article ; as, the more difficult 
a thing is, the more honorable it is. But in French, the article is omitted ; 
as, plus une chose est difficile, plus elle est honorable. 

EXERCISE ON MEASURE, WEIGHT, &c. 

Corn sells for eight shillings a bushel. Veal and mut- 

art. ble m. se vendre * schelling boisseau. art. Veau art. 

ton cost ten pence a pound. This lace (is sold at) 2 half 'a 3 guinea 

couter sou livre f. f. se vendre F. demi guinee 

an ell. The best 2 French 'wines (are sold at) from twelve to fifteen 

aune. de France se vendre F. 

shillings a bottle. My father goes to Ireland four or five times a year. 
bouteille f, en Irlande fois an. 

He gives his son seven shillings a day. It (is necessary), if you 

falloir 
desire (to improve fast) that you should take a lesson three 

faire des pr ogres rapides preniez * 

times a week. The more I contemplate those precious remains of 

Teste m. 
antiquity, the more I am struck with wonder. What a beautiful 
art. frappe de etonnement* 

morning ! come, let us go and walk in the fields. 

matinee f. * se promener A. champ m. 



128 SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. 

CHAPTER III. 

OF THE ADJECTIVE. 



338. It has been said (page 46) that an adjective agrees in gender 
and number with the substantive which it qualifies : from this rule, how- 
ever, must be excepted, nu, bare, and demi, half, when placed before a 
substantive, and feu, late, when before the article or a pronominal adjec- 
tive ; as il va nu-pieds, he goes barefoot ; je suis a vous dans une demi' 
heure, I will be with you in half an hour ; feu la reine, the late queen ; 
feu ma mere, my late mother. But the agreement takes place if nu and 
demi be placed after the substantive, and feu between the article or prono- 
minal adjective and the substantive ; as, il a les pieds nus, his feet are 
bare ; je suis a vous dans une heure et demie, I will be with you in an 
hour and a half; lafeue reine, mafeue mere. 

339. An adjective frequently serves to qualify two or more substantives 
expressing either persons or things of different genders. 

340. If it be used to qualify more than two substantives, it must agree 
with them, for either these substantives perform the office of subject ; as, 
la grammaire, la logique, et la rhetorique, methodiquement enseignees, 
ne s'oublient guere, grammar, logic, and rhetoric, when taught with 
method, are seldom forgotten : or they constitute the regimen ; as, c'est 
un homme d'une valeur, d'une vertu et d?une fdelite, eprouvees, he is 
a man of tried courage, virtue, and fidelity. 

341. If it be used to qualify only two substantives, the substantive of 
persons must be distinguished from the substantive of things ; with the 
first, the rules of agreement are to be observed in all cases ; with the 
second, custom allows, when the substantives form the regimen, to make 
the adjective agree with the last only ; as, elle avait les yeux et la bouche 
ouverte. Nevertheless, modern grammarians prefer the agreement, even 
in this case. 

342. With respect to phrases like the following, les langues anglaise 
et francaise sont fort cultivees, though they are in opposition to the 
rules of grammar, yet it is allowable to use them. However, in strict 
propriety, it seems better to say, la langue francaise et V anglaise sont 
tres-cultivees. 

EXERCISE ON THE ADJECTIVE. 

He ran through the streets like a madman, bare-foot and bare-headed. 
H. * rue f. tete. 

His 2 legs ] (were) s bare. Give me half a guinea, and then you 

* art. jambe f. il avait 

(will only owe) me a guinea and a half. I shall be at home in 
ne devrez plus que chez-moi dans 

half an hour. Come before 2 half '(past one). 2 The ] late queen 

une heure et. 
was idolized. The late queen was universally regretted. His impetuosity 
H. adore. J. 

and courage, long restrained, soon surmounted all obstacles. The 
son enchaine, J. art. 



SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. 129 

imagination and genius of Ariosto, although irregular in their 

art. VArioste, quoique 

course, yet interest, (hurry along), and captivate the reader, 

marche, nianmoins attacher, entrainer, lecteur, 

who can never be tired of admiring them. There are in Gessner's 
se lasser A. 

idylls sentiments and a grace altogether affecting. The good taste 
art. idylle tout-a-fait touchant. 

of the Egyptians, (from that time), made them love solidity and 

des-lors J. leur art. 

2 una domed 'regularity. In those climates, the dry and the rainy 

tout nu sec pluvieux 

monsoons divide the year. 
mousson f. se diviser annee. 



Difference of construction between the English and French 
Languages, 

343. In English, the substantive of measure is placed before the sub- 
stantive or adjective expressing the dimensions ; as, a tower two hundred 
feet high, or in height. In French, the word which expresses dimension 
is placed first, if it be an adjective, and the preposition de be added to it 
as a regimen ; as, une tour haute de deux cents pieds. But if it be a 
substantive, or an adjective used substantively, it is placed after, with the 
preposition de, either before the noun of measure or of dimension ; as, 
une tour de deux cents pieds de haut, or de hauteur. This last mode 
is the most elegant. 

344. The English manner of expressing dimensions is to use the verb 
to he i as, the walls of Algiers are twelve feet thick and thirty feet high : 
the French, in general, make use of the verb avoir when there are two 
constructions ; as, les murs d 1 Alger ont douze pieds d'epaisseur, et trente 
de hauteur ; or les murs d? Alger ont douze pieds d'epaisseur sur trente 
de hauteur. This second mode of expression is most generally adopted. 

345. In comparative sentences, to express difference, the English sen- 
tence often runs thus : she is taller than her sister by the whole head. 
The French, in this manner : elle est plus grande que sa sceur de toute 

la tete 

EXERCISE ON THE DIFFERENCE OF CONSTRUCTION. 

This trunk, which is six feet long, is very convenient. You will 
c off re m. commode, 

be stopped in your march by a river three hundred feet broad. This 

arrite f. 

observatory, which is twelve hundred feet high, is very proper for 

knowing the true position of the stars. It is a terrace a hundred 
connaitre A. astrem, Ce terrace f. 

and eighty feet broad and twelve hundred feet long. The walls of 

large mur m. 

our garden are twenty feet high and three broad. It is one of the 
jar din Ce 



130 SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. 

finest stones that (was ever seen) : it is twenty feet long and six 
on ait jamais vues : longueur 

thick. This ditch is nine feet six inches deep and six 

epaisseur, fosse m. pouce m. profondeur f. 

feet broad. My son is taller than yours by two inches. 



Regimen of the Adjectives. 

346. Several adjectives have a regimen ; some require the preposition 
de and others the preposition a before a noun or a verb, which is then 
called the regimen or government of the adjective. 

EXAMPLES. 

Digne de recompense, Worthy of reward. 

Utile a Vhomme, Useful to man. 

Digne de regner, Worthy of reigning. 

Content de son sort, de vivre, &c. Satisfied -with his lot, -with living. 

Beau a voir, bon a manger, Fine to the sight, good for eating. 

JLpre au gain, avide d'honneur, Eager after gain, greedy of honor. 

Propre a la guerre, Fit for war. 

347. Recompense is the government of the adjective digne, as it is 
joined to that adjective by the word de : Vhomme is the government of 
the adjective utile, because it is joined to that adjective by the word a, 
and so of the rest. 

EXERCISE ON THE REGIMEN OF THE ADJECTIVES. 

2 Virtuous 'men are always worthy of esteem. A 2 weak 'mind 

art. Vertueux toujours estime f. faible m. 

is liable to many contradictions. A heart free from cares enjoys 

sujet bien des f. cceur m. libre de soin m. jouit 

the greatest 2 possible 'felicity. Voltaire was always greedy of 

de f. fut avide 

praise and insatiable of glory. Rousseau, endowed with a 2 strong 

louange f. pi. done de fort 

3 and 4 fiery 'imagination, was all his (life time) subject to frequent 

boidllant f. vie f. enclin a de 

fits of misanthropy, and liable to all the variations (attendant upon it) . 

acces m. sujet f. qui en sont la suite. 

PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES ON THE ARTICLE AND THE 
ADJECTIVES. 

THE FAULTS OF INFANCY. 

defaut m. art. enfance. 

The amiable Louisa and her young brother Charles were gentle, 

Louise H. doux, 

humane, and sensible. To the 2 most interesting 'person, Louisa joined 

sensible, spirituel. interessant figure f. Louise H. 

all the modesty, the pleasing ingenuousness, and 2 artless 'graces of her 

f. heureux ingenuite f. naif art. f. 

sex ; and Charles, the vivacity, the fire, and the manly gracefulness 
sexem. f. feum. male agrement m.pl. 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 131 

of his. But these advantages, the 2 precious 'gifts of nature, were 
du sien. av ant age m. * don m. art. f. H. 

obscured by great defects. They were both inclined 

unpen obscurci de defaut m. Vun et V autre enclin 

to idleness, and liable to fits of sullenness and ill humor 

art. paressef. sujets des acces bouderief. de * h.umeur 

when they were contradicted. Faults are diseases of the soul, 

lorsque H. contredit. art. Defaut des maladies a?ne, 

2 the 3 cure ' (of which) is the work of time. In (good dispositions), 
guerison f. dont ouvrage art. m. les ames bien nees 

it is generally the fruit of the developement of reason and 
elle d'ordinaire m. developpement m. art. de 

the desire of pleasing. Though their parents 2 were 3 persuaded '(of this), 

m. A. Quoique S. en 

they employed, to hasten it, an expedient which succeeded. If 
employer J. pour hater la, moyen m. leur reussir. * 

2 they 'were satisfied with them, contentment and joy were painted 
H. content de art. satisfaction f. art. f. H. peint 

in their countenances; if dissatisfied, they did not 

sur figure f. * en etaient-ils mecontent, les 

scold, but they received them with a 2 sorrowful 'air, a 2 dejected 
gronder H. H. triste regard, abattu 

Countenance, and every sign of chagrin and trouble. 

maintien, tons art. signe m. pi. art. m. de art. douleur. 

Louisa and Charles were naturally kind and feeling ; they could 

naturellement bon sensible; ne pouvaient 

not long support the idea of having afflicted 2 such s tender 

long-temps resister a idee A. ajfflige des si tendre 

'parents. They felt their error, burst into tears, and asked pardon. 

H. fautef.fondreH. larme, H. m. 

2 A11 3 was 'immediately 4 forgotten, and satisfaction (again smiled) 

H. aussitbt oublie, art. contentement m. renaitre H. 

around. It was by this means that these amiable children 2 soon 

autour d'eux. Ce fut moyen que bientot 

'became models of docility, complaisance, and application, 

devenirJ. des mo dele m. de de 



CHAPTER IV. 

OF THE PRONOUNS. 



OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 



Of the Place of Personal Pronouns. — See page 61. 

348. There is no difficulty in placing personal pronouns, when they 
act as subjects : the person who speaks always names himself last, and 
the person addressed is generally named first. 



132 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 

EXAMPLES. 

Vous et moi, nous irons a la cam- You and I will go into the coun- 

pagne, try. 

JYous irons ce soir a la promenade, We will take a walk this evening, 

vous, voire frere, et moi, you, your brother, and I. 

EXERCISE. 

My sister and I were walking by the last rays of the 2 setting 
nous H. a rayons m. couchant 

'sun, and we were saying, what a mild splendor does 2 it 3 still 'spread 

disions, eclat m. pas ne repand 

over all nature ! In the long 2 winter 'evenings, my father, my 

art. de hdver soiree f. 

brothers, and I (used to spend) two hours in the library, and 

nous passer H. bibliothlque f. nous 

to read there, (in order to) (unbend our minds) from the 2 serious 'studies 
* lisions y, pour nous se delasser 

of the day, those 2 amiable 'poets who interest most the heart, by the charms 

le plus 
of a 2 lively 'imagination, and make us love truth, by disguising it under 

riant art. en deguiser 

the mask of an 2 ingenious ' fiction. You and your friend shall accompany 
trait m.ipl. f. accompagner 

me to the museum, where we shall study nature in her three kingdoms. 
• musee m. ou regne m. 

349. Rule. The pronouns il and Us always represent a substantive 
masculine — il, if it be singular and Us, if it be plural ; and elle and elles, 
on the contrary, represent a substantive feminine — elle, if it be singular, 
and elles, if plural. 

350. Thus, in speaking of the rose, we should say, elle a un parfum 
exquis, aussi est-elle lajleur la plus recherche e, it has an exquisite fra- 
grance, and is indeed the choicest of flowers — because rose is feminine 
and singular ; and, in speaking of several ladies, elles ont autant de mo- 
destie que de beaute, d^ esprit, et de grace, they have as much modesty 
as they have beauty, wit, and accomplishments — because dames is femi- 
nine and plural. 

EXERCISE. 

(Look at) that magnificent building ; it unites grace to beauty, 

JRegarder magnifique bailment m. reunir art. grace f. art. f. 

and elegance to simplicity. Ignorance is jealous, presumptuous, 

art. f. art. f. f. presomptueux 

and vain ; it sees difficulties in nothing, (is surprised) at nothing, 

ne de f. a rien, ne s'etonner de 
and stops at nothing. Let us gather these roses ; Heavens ! what 
ne s'arrtter a cueillir del ! quel 

a sweet fragrance they exhale ! Never judge from appearances ; 

parfum exhaler ! sur art f. 

they are often deceitful : the wise man examines them, and does not 



* 



se 



decide upon them till he has had time to fix his judgment. 
decider d'apres f. que lorsque art. m. de fixer 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 133 

351. With respect to pronouns, when used as a regimen, custom has 
established the following rules : 

352. Rule I. The pronouns me, te, se, leur, le, la, les, y, and en, are 
generally placed before verbs, as are nous, vous, and lui, when without a 
preposition in French, whether they are or not in English. 

EXAMPLES. 

M me dit, he tells me. Je lui parle, I speak to him. 

Je le vois, I see him. J'y songerai, I will think of it. 

Je les icoute, I listen to them. J'en suis ravi, I am delighted at it. 

EXERCISE. 

(As soon as) he had explained to us the maxims of Socrates, he 
Des que expliquer K. * So crate, 

said, you see that it is not without reason (he is looked upon) as 
J. ce que on le regarde 

truly wise. He was continually saying to me, Yet a little patience, 
un vrai de 

and you will disarm even envy itself. You have, no doubt, 
desarmer * art. ttre, sans doute, 

(some foundation) for reproaching him with his faults ; but is there 

fonde a A. lui de * art. m. 

(any man) on earth that is exempt (from them) 1 To please 
quelqiCun art. qui Q. en Pour 

her, you must never flatter her. To abandon one's self to 2 metaphv 
lui, des me'taphy' 

sical Abstractions, is to plunge into an 2 unfathomable ] abyss. 
sique ce * sejeter sans fond abime m. 

353. Rule II. The pronouns moi, toi, soi, nous, vous, lui, eux, elle, 
and elles, are placed after verbs, when they are preceded by a preposition, 
in French, whether they are or not in English. 

EXAMPLES. 

Cela depend de moi, That depends on me. 

Je pense a toi, I think of thee. 

On s'occupe trop de soi, We are too attentive to ourselves. 

Que dites-vous d'eux 1 What do you say of them ? 

EXERCISE. 

My father loved me so tenderly, that he thought of none but me, 
H. penser H. a, ne que 

(was wholly taken up) with me, and saw none but me in the universe. 
ne s'occuper H. que de H. 

If you wish to obtain that favor, you must speak to him himself. It 

de 
depended on you to excel your rivals, but you would not. 

H. de de Vemporter sur le vouloir G. 

2 Philip, s father 4 of 5 Alexander, 1 (being advised) to expel from 
Philippe comme on conseillait a de chasser 

his dominions a man who (had been speaking) ill of him, I shall take care 
etat m. parler I. se garder Hen 

not to do that, said he ; he would go and slander me every where. 
1 * en, J. * medire de 

M 



134 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 

354. Rule III. In imperative phrases, when affirmative, moi, toi, nous, 
vous, lui, leur, eux, elle, elles, le, la, les, y, and en are placed after verbs ; 
but, with a negation, me, te, se, nous, vous, lui, leur, le, la, les, y, and 
en are placed before verbs. 

EXAMPLES. 

AFFIRMATIVELY. 

Dites-moi, Tell me. 

Donnez-m'en la moitii, Give me half of it. 

Songez-y serieusement, Think of it seriously. 

NEGATIVELY. 

Ne me dites pas, Do not tell me. 

Ne m'en donnez point, Do not give me any. 

N'y songez pas, Do not think of it. 

355. Remark. If the pronouns me, te, moi, toi, intervene between an 
imperative and an infinitive, me, te are used when the imperative is 
without a regimen direct. 

EXAMPLES. 
Venez me parler, Come and speak to me. 

Va tefaire co'effer, Go and get thy hair dressed. 

. 356. But moi, toi are used if the imperative have a regimen direct. 

EXAMPLES. 

Lais sez-moi fair e, Let me do it. 

Fais-toi co'effer, Get thy hair dressed. 

357. If moi, toi, when placed after the imperative, be followed by the 
pronoun en, they are changed into me, te. 

EXAMPLES. 

Donnez-m'en, Give me some. Retourne-t' 'en, Go back. 

358. When there are two imperatives joined together by the conjunc- 
tions et, ou, it is most elegant to place the second pronoun before the verb. 

EXAMPLES. 

Polissez-le sans cesse etlerepolissez, Polish and repolish it continually. 
Gar dez-les, ou les r envoy ez, Keep them or send them back. 

EXERCISE. 
Listen to me ; do not condemn me without a hearing. Complain ; 
ecouter * * m' 'ecouter A. se plaindre ; 

thou hast just cause of complaint: however, do not complain too 
un sujet plaint e : 

bitterly of the injustice of mankind. Give some. Do not give any. 
amerement art. hommeyA. en. en. 

Think (of it). Do not think of it. Repeat to them continually, that, 

y 

without honesty, one can never succeed in the world. Do not repeat to 

on 
them continually the same things. Acknowledge him as your master, 

JReconnaitre pour 

and obey him. Tread upon that spider, and kill it. 
lui. JMarcher araignte f. ecraser 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 135 

359. Rule IV. When several pronouns accompany a verb, me, te, se, 
nous, vous, must be placed first ; le, la, les, before lui, leur ; and y before 
en, which is always the last. 

EXAMPLES. 

Pretez-moi ce livre ; je vous le Lend me that book ; I will return it 
rendrai demain ; si vous me le to you to-morrow ; if you refuse 
refusez, je saurai m'en passer, me, I can make shift without it. 

Aurez-vous la force de le leur Will you have resolution enough to 
dire ? mention it to them 1 

II n'a pas voulu vous y metier, He would not take you there. 

Je vous y en porterai, I will bring you some there. 

360. Exception. In an imperative sentence, when affirmative, le, la, 
les, are always placed first ; as, donnez-le-moi, give it me ; offrez-la-lui, 
offer it to him ; conduisez-les-y, conduct them thither : and moi is placed 
after y ; as, menez-y-moi, carry me thither : but nous will precede y ; as, 
menez-nous-y, take us thither. 

361. Remark. The word meme is sometimes added to the pronouns 
moi, toi, soi, nous, vous, eux, lui, elle, elles, to specify the person or thing 
spoken of. 

EXAMPLES. 
lis se sont perdus eux-memes, They have ruined themselves. 

Le monde estime bien des choses The world prizes many things whichj 
qui, en elles-memes, sont fort in themselves, are worthless. 
meprisables, 

EXERCISE. 
You wish to make a present to your sister. (There is) a beautiful 

vouloir * Voila 

fan; you should present her with it. (How many) people are there 
event ail m. devoir N. offrir lui * Que de gens * * 

(destitute of) merit and without occupation, (who would be mere nothings) 

sans ne tenir N. a rien 

in society, did not gaming introduce them (into it). I shall speak 

art. si art. jeu m. inlroduire H. y. 

to them (about it), and give you a 2 faithful 'account of it. It is cer- 

en je rendre exact compte m. 

tain that old Geronte has refused his daughter to Vale re : but because 

art. 
he does not give her to him, it does not follow that he will give her to you. 

s'ensuivre 



OF THE RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 

362. The relative pronouns are qui, que, dont, lequel, &c. — See page 69. 

363. Rule I. Qui, when a relative, is always of the number, gender, 
and person of its antecedent. 

EXAMPLES. 
Jlfoi qui suis sonfils, I who am his son. 

Toi qui es si jeune, Thou who art so young. 

Venfam qui joue, The child who plays. 

Nous qui etudions, We who study. 

Vous qui riez, You who laugh. 

Les livres qui instruisent, The books which instruct. 



136 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 

364. In the first example, qui is singular and of the first person, because 
the pronoun moi is in the singular and of the first person. In the second, 
it is singular and of the second person, for a similar reason, &c. 

EXERCISE. 
I, who did not suspect (so much) falsehood, cunning, and 

soupconner H. tant de faussete f. de ruse f. de 
perfidy, in a man whom I loved, blindly followed his counsels. 

f. H. aveuglement je suivre J. conseil m. 

Thou, who art candor and innocence itself, trust not too lightly. 

art. f. art. f. meme, te confie legerement. 

The great empire of the Egyptians, which was, (as it were), detached 

m. Egyptien, J. comme, detache* 

from all others, was not of long duration. We who know the 

art. J. duree f. connaltre 

value of time ought to make a good use (of it), instead 

przxm, art nous devoir F.* emploi m. en, au lieu 

of wasting it in idleness and frivolity. What ! is it you, my 

perdre A. dans art. oisivete f. art. inutilite f. Quoi ! ce 
daughter, who (would wish) that I (should love) you less] The 

vouloir N.' que S. 

greatest men, who were the ornament and glory of Greece, Homer, 
G. ornement art. f. art. Grece f. ffomere, 

Pythagoras, Plato, even Lycurgus and Solon, went to learn 
Pythagore, Platon, mime Lycurgue Solon, J. * apprendre 

wisdom in Egypt, 
art. sagesse f. en Egypte. 

365. Rule II. Que, when a relative, is of the number and gender 
of its antecedent. 

EXAMPLES. 

C'est moi que Von demande, It is I whom they ask for. 

C'est toi qu'on appelle, It is thou whom they call. 

La femme que je vois si bien paree, The woman whom I see so well 

dressed. 
C'est nous que vous offensez, It is we whom you offend. 

C'est vous que je cherche, It is you I am seeking. 

Les dames que vous voyez, The ladies whom you see. 

EXERCISE. 
I, whom temptation surrounded on every side, fell 

art. seduction f. environner H. de tout part f.jrt.je tombai 
into the snare. It is thou whom the 2 public Woice calls to that 
dans piege m. Ce f. appeler 

employ. A power which terror and force have founded, 
place f. puissance f. art. f. art. f. fonde* f. 

cannot be of long duration. It is we whom they persecute with 
ne peut duree f. Von pour suit avec une 

2 unexampled ^age. You, whom (every body) respects, hasten to 
sans exemple fureur f. tout le monde respecter, se hater de 

(come forward). (Everything) in the universe alters and parishes; 

paraitre. Tout dans univers m. s'alterer pe*rir ; 

but the writings which genius has dictated shall be immortal. 
ecrit ra. art. ginie m. dicte m. pi. immortel. 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 137 

366. Dont sometimes represents dequi, duquel, de laquelle, desquels, 
desqaelles, and even de qicoi. 

EXAMPLES. 

Vhomme dont vous parlez est The man of whom you are speak- 

parti, ing is gone. 

La tour dont nous apercevons les The tower whose battlements we 

creneaux doit etre tres-eleve'e, perceive must be very high. 

Ce dont je vous ai parle V autre What I was speaking to you of the 

jour n'a pas reussi, other day did not succeed. 

367. Qui, que, and dont may equally apply to persons and things ; 
but qui, preceded by a preposition, can never apply to things : in this 
case, lequel, duquel, auquel, &c. must be used. 

368. Lequel, laquelle, &c. apply both to persons and things; but 
quoi applies only to things. 

369. The adverb oil is likewise employed as a relative pronoun, for 
dans lequel, auquel, dans laquelle, &c. 

EXAMPLES. 

Voila le but oil il tend, That is the object he has in view. 

Ce sont des affaires, oil je suis Those are affairs with which I am 
embarrasse, perplexed. 

370. Remark. Ou admits the prepositions de and par, 

EXAMPLES. 

Voila une chose d'oii depend le That is an affair on which the 
bonheur public, public happiness depends. 

Tels sont les lieux par ou il a These are the places through 
passe, which he passed. 

EXERCISE. 

Persons of ^ordinary 'condition have not the same need of 
art. Per sonne f. commun f. mtme besoin m. 

being cautioned against the dangers to which elevation and 

A. precautionnei.\A, contre ecueil m. art. f. 

authority expose those who are destined to govern man- 

art, autorite f. exposer ceux destin6 m. gouverner art. horn- 

kind. The protection on which he relied has been too weak. 
me pi. f. sur compter H. faible. 

That after which a true philosopher sighs most ardently, is 

Ce apres vrai philosophe m. soupirer art. plus ar detriment, 

to spread that sentiment of 2 universal benevolence which should 
de repandre m. universel bienveillance f. devraii 

unite and (bring together) all men. These are conditions 
unir rapprocher art. Ce sont de 

without which the thing would not have been concluded. Nature, of 

sans fait f. art. f. 

whose 3 secrets ! we 2 (are ignorant), will be always s a 4 source 5 of 

art. m. ignorer f. 

Conjecture 'to 2 mankind. That of whieh we complain most 

f. pi. pour art. homme pi. Ce se plaindre 

m2 



138 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 

bitterly is not always what affects us the most. The only 
amerement ce qui affecter seul 

moments in which his soul -still Expands to pleasure, are 

m. pendant encore s'ouvrir art. 

those which he devotes to study. The mountains from whence 
ceux consacrer art. etude f. f. oil 

2 goId *(is extracted) are not in general fruitful. The different 
art. or on tire * en infertile. 

countries through which he has passed have furnished his pencil 
pays m. par passe fourni a pinceau m. 

with 2 romantic s and 4 picturesque 'scenes. 

de art, romantique pittoresque 



OF PRONOUNS ABSOLUTE. 

See page 112 — The pronouns absolute qui, que, quoi, quel, lequeL 

371. Qui signifies quel homme, what man ; quelle per sonne, what person. 

EXAMPLES. 

Qui vous a dit cela ? Who told you that ? 

T ignore qui a fait cela, I don't know who did that. 

372. Que signifies quelle chose, what thing. 

EXAMPLES. 
Que dit-on ? What do they say ? 

Je ne sais qu y en penser, I don't know what to think of it. 

373. Quoi has the signification of que. 

EXAMPLES. 

A quoi s y occupe-t-on P What are they engaged in 1 

Dites-moi en quoi je puis vous servir, Tell me how I can serve you. 

374. Remark.. If que or quoi be followed by an adjective, it requires 
the preposition de before that adjective. 

EXAMPLES. 

Que dit-on de nouveau ? What news is there 1 

Quoi de plus instructif et de plus What is more instructive and 
amusant ? amusing ? 

EXERCISE. 
Who will not agree that life has few real pleasures and 

convenir art. f. peu de vrai 

many 2 dreadful 'pains % (Some one) entered secretly ; guess 
heaucoup d? affreux peine f. On entra secretement ; deviner 

who it was. What have you read in that book that can have excited 
* * m. qui puisse porte 

in your soul emotion and enthusiasm 1 I know not what to 

art. f. art. enthousiasme m. savoir * 

think (of it). At what did you find them occupied ] There is in 

en. avez trouves occupe m. pi. 

that discourse I know not what, which appears to me designing. What 
discours m. savoir sembler * insidieux. 



SYTNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 139 

have you remarked good, beautiful, and sublime in Homer ? What more 

remarque Homere ? 

brilliant, and, at the same time, more false than the expressions of a 
man who has (a great deal) of wit, but wants judgment ? 

beaucoup esprit, qui manque de jugement ? 

375. In interrogations, or after a verb, quel is used to ask the name 
or qualities of a person or thing. 

EXAMPLES. 
Quel homme est-ce ? What man is it ? 

Quel temps fait-il ? What weather is it 1 

Je ne sais quel homme c'est, I don't know what man it is. 

U sait quel parti prendre, He knows what steps to pursue. 

376. The adverb oil, it has been already seen, is employed as a relative 
pronoun ; it is likewise used as a kind of absolute pronoun. 

377. Oil represents en quel endroit, in what place, or a quoi, to what. 

EXAMPLES. 

Ou allez-vous ? Where are you going to ? 

Oil cela nous mtnera-t-il ? Where will that take us to 1 [me. 

T ignore oil Von me conduit, I don't know whither they are taking 

11 n'a pas prevu ou cette conduite He did not foresee where such a con- 
le mtnerait, duct would lead him to. 

378. Remark I. When ou is preceded by the preposition de, it marks 
the place or cause spoken of. 

EXAMPLES. 

D'ou vient-il? Where does he come from 1 

D y ou sa haine procede-t-elle ? Whence proceeds his hatred 1 

Voila d'ou il vient, It was there he came from. 

he mal me vient d'ou fattendais The evil proceeds from that quarter 
mon remede, whence I had expected a remedy. 

379. Remark II. Ou, preceded by the preposition par, signifies 
through what place, or by what means. 

EXAMPLES. 

Par oil avez-vous passe ? Which way did you come 1 

Par oil me tirerai-je d y affaire ? Which way shall I extricate myself? 
Voila par oiifai passe, This is the way I came. 

Je ne sais par oil je me tirerai I don't know which way I shall ex- 
d* affaire, tricate myself. 

380. By the manner in which these pronouns are employed, it will be 
seen they are only interrogative when at the beginning of a sentence, and 
consequently the most proper name for them is that of pronouns absolute, 

EXERCISE. 
WJiat grace, what delicacy, what harmony, what coloring, what 
grace f. delicatesse f. f. coloris m. 

beautiful lines in Racine! What, 2 then, ! must have been that 

vers m. done doit 



140 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 

Extraordinary 'man, to whom seven cities contested the glory of 

se sont dispute f. 

having given birth 1 He does not know what model to follow. 

avoir A. donne art. jour m. savoir modelem. * suivre. 

I have told you what man it is. Which of those ladies do you 

ce f. dames f. 

think- the most amiable ] Choose which 4 of 5 those 6 two 7 pictures 

trouver f. Choisir m. tableau m. 

J you 2 like 2 best. Where am II He knows not where 

aimer art. mieux. Oil en savoir 

he is. He is gone, I don't know whither. (Whence) does he get 

en alle, ne savoir D'ou * lui vient 

that pride ] (It is) from where he derives his origin. (Which way) 

orgueilm. Voila de tirer origine. Par oil 

did you come 1 (That is) (the road) I came. 

etes-vous arrive ? Voila par oil venir G. 



OF DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.— Page 113. 

381. Ce, cette, ces, are often joined to the adverbs of place — ci, here, 
and la, there — in order to point out in a more precise manner the thing 
spoken of; the demonstrative pronoun is then placed before the substan- 
tive, and ci and la after it. 

EXAMPLES. 
Ce livre-ci, this book. Get homme-lct, that man. 

Cette Jleur-ci, this flower. Ces femmes-la, those women. 

3S2. Celui, celle, ceux, celles, are followed by the preposition de, when 
placed before a substantive, and by a pronoun relative when placed before 
a verb. 

EXAMPLES. 
Les maladies de Vame sont plus The disorders of the mind are more 

danger euses que celles du corps, dangerous than those of the body. 
Vhomme dont je vous ai parle, The man of whom I spoke to you is 

est celui que vous voyez, he whom you see. 

De toutes les choses du monde, Of all the things in the world, it is 

c'est celle que faime le moins, that which I like least. 

383. Rem auk. The pronouns celui, celle, ceux, celles, when followed 
by a pronoun relative, are expressed in English by the personal pronouns 
he, she, they, or by that which, those which, such as, &c. 

EXERCISE. 
The pleasures of the wise resemble in nothing those of a 2 dissipated 
ressembler a dissipe 

'man. He that suffers himself to (be ruled) by his passions, must 
se laisse * dominer A. doit 

renounce happiness. This stuff will become you wonderfully. 

renoncer a art. bonheur m. etoffe-ciS. siera a merveille* 

That action is worthy of blame. This scene is calculated to 
f. la blame. f. ci faite pour 

interest all men, but that cannot succeed. 
interesser art. la ne saurait reussir 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 141 

384. Celui-ci and celui-la adopt the gender and number of the sub- 
stantives whose place they supply. When opposed to each other, celui- 
ci marks the nearest object, and celui-la the remotest. 

EXAMPLE. 
Celui-ci plait, mais celui-la captive, This pleases, but that captivates. 

385. Ci and la coalesce with ce, and form two other demonstrative 
pronouns, ceci and cela — the first of which signifies cette chose-ci, this 
object ; the second, cette chose-ld, that object. 

386. They may be used singly ; but when they are opposed to each 
other, ceci expresses the nearest object and cela the remotest. 

EXAMPLE. 
Je n'aime point ceci, donnez-moi cela, I don't like this, give me that. 

387. Remark. When cela is alone, and not opposed to the pronoun 
ceci, it refers, like this last, to an object pointed to. 

EXAMPLES. 
Que dites-vous de cela ? What do you say of that? 

Cela est fort beau, That is very handsome. 

EXERCISE. 
(Here are) certainly two charming prospects; this has some- 
Voila certainement beau perspective f. quelque 

thing more cheerful, but many people think that more 

chose de riant, Men de art. personne f. pi. trouver 

striking and more majestic. The body perishes, the soul is 
imposant majestueux, m. perir, f. 

immortal ; yet all our cares are for that, while we neglect 

immortel ; cependant soin tandis que negliger 

this. What means this 7 That is true. It is not that. This 

veut dire Ce 

is low and mean, but that is grand and sublime. 
bas rampant, 



OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 
FIRST CLASS. 

Of those that are never joined to a Substantive. — Page 114. 

388. Quelqu'un, quelqu'une, means un, une, one. 

EXAMPLES. 

JVbws attendons des homines, il en We expect men, some one will 

viendra quelqiCun, come. 

Plusieurs femmes m 'ont promts de Several women have promised me to 

venir, il en viendra quelqu'une, come, some one of them will come. 

389. Quelqioun, quelqu'une, taken absolutely and substantively, is of 
both genders, and means une personne, a person, some one, any one. 

EXAMPLE. 
V attends id quelqu'un, I wait here for somebody. 



142 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 

390. Quelques-uns, quelques-unes, signifies some people, some ; plu- 
sieurs dans un plus grand nombre, several out of a great number. 

EXAMPLES. 
Quelques-uns assurent, Some people affirm. 

Entre les nouvelles qiiil a debitees, Among the reports he has circu- 
il y en a quelques-unes de vraies, lated, several are true. 

391. Quiconque, whoever, signifies quelque personne que ce soit, qui 
que ce soit, any person whatever. It takes no plural, and is never used 
but of persons. 

EXAMPLE. 
Ce discours s'adresse a quiconque This speech is addressed to who- 
est coupable, ever is guilty. 

392. Chacun, chacune, every one, is used either distributively or col- 
lectively. Tt has no plural. 

393. Distributively, it means chaque personne, chaque chose, each 
person or thing. It is then used likewise in the feminine, and requires 
the preposition de after it. 

EXAMPLES. 
Chacun de nous vit a, sa mode, Each of us lives as he pleases. 

Voyez separement chacune de ces Look at each of these medals 
medailles, separately. 

394. Collectively, it signifies toute personne, every person. 

EXAMPLES. 
Chacun a ses dtfauts, Every body has his faults. 

EXERCISE ON THE INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 

2 Can 'any one (be still ignorant) that it is from the earliest 

JPourrait-il ignorer encore ce des tendre 

infancy we ought to form the mind, the heart, and the taste 1 Will 

enfance f. on doit * former 

not some one of these ladies be of the party 1 Some people like to read 

f. partie f. aimer 

(every thing new). (There are) beautiful pictures ; I could wish 
touies les nouveautes. Voila de superbe tableau m. vouloir en 

to buy some. Whoever has studied the principles of an art, knows that 
* acheter principes m. savoir 

it (is only) (by length of time) and by deep reflection, that he can 
ce n y est que a la longue de profond reflexion f. 

succeed in making it his own. All the ladies at the ball were very fine- 
re'ussir serendrele * propre. balm. H. super be- 

ly dressed, and each differently. Every one should, for 

ment pare, avait une parure differente. devrait,pour 

(the sake of ) his own happiness, listen only to the voice of reason 
propre m. n'ecouter que voixm. mct.raiso?if. 

and of truth. What is the price of each of these medals 1 

art. verite f. prix m. f. me'daille f. 

395. Autrui means les autres personnes, other people : it only applies 
to persons, is never accompanied by an adjective, has no plural, and is 
never used in a sentence without being preceded by a preposition. 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 143 

EXAMPLE. 

La charite se rejouit du bonheur Charity rejoices in the happiness 
d'autrui, of others. 

396. Personne, which is always masculine and singular, means nul, 
qui que ce soit, no one, nobody, whosoever. In this sense, it is preceded 
or followed by the negative ne, which is placed after personne when this 
word stands before the verb, and before the verb when personne stands 
after. The same observation applies to rien. 

EXAMPLES. 

II nefaut mare a personne, We must injure nobody. 

Personne n'est assure de vivre Nobody is certain of living till to- 
jusqu'au lendemain, morrow. 

397. Remark I. The negative is sometimes understood ; as, y a-t-il 
quelqu'un ici? is there any body here? personne, nobody. Personne 
stands for il n'y a personne, there is nobody here. 

398. Remark II. In interrogative phrases without negation, or in 
those expressing doubt, personne signifies quelqu'un, any body. 

EXAMPLES. 
Personne oserait-il nier ? Would any body dare deny 1 

Je doute que personne soit assez I doubt whether any body be bold 
hardi, enough. 

399. Remark III. When personne is placed in the second member 
of a comparison, it means any body. 

EXAMPLE. 

Cette place ltd convient mieux That place suits him better than 
q\Ca personne, any body. 

400. Rien, nothing, which is masculine and singular, is used with or 
without a negation. When with a negation, it means nulle chose, nothing. 

EXAMPLE. 

II ne s' attache a rien de solide, He applies himself to nothing fixed. 

401. When used without a negation it means quelque chose, something. 

EXAMPLE. 

Je doute que rien soit plus propre I doubt whether any thing be more 
a f aire impression que, &c. suited to make an impression 

than, &c. 

402. The negation is sometimes understood — que vous a coute cela ? 
rien, how much did you pay for that ! nothing. 

403. It always requires the preposition de before the adjective or parti- 
ciple that follows it, and then the verb is understood, as is likewise the 
negation ; as, rien de beau que le vrai, nothing is noble but truth. 

EXERCISE. 
To most men, the misfortunes of others are but a 

Pour la plupart de art. mal m. ne * 

dream. Do not to others what you would not wish (to be done to you). 

song-em. vouloir qu'onvous fit. 



144 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 

No one knows whether he deserves love or hatred. An egotist 
savoir si est digne de de tgotiste 

loves nobody, not even his own children ; in the whole universe, he 

pas meme propre dans * univers, 

sees no one but himself. He is, more than (any body), worthy of the 
voit que lui seuL digne 

confidence (with which) the king honors him. I doubt whether any 
confiancei. dont honorer que 

one (ever painted) nature, in its amiable simplicity, better than 

ait jamais peint art. f. f. 

the sentimental Gessner. Has 2 any body Called s on me this 

sensible * est-il venu chez 

morning 1 Nobody. There was nothing but what was great 
matin m. H. que * de * grand 

in the designs and works of the Egyptians. I doubt 

dans dessein m. art. ouvrage m. Egyptiens. 

whether there is any thing better calculated to exalt the soul than the 

que Q. plus propre 

contemplation of the wonders of nature. 
merveille f. art. f. 



OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 

SECOND CLASS. 

Of those which are always joined to a Substantive. — P. 116. 

404. Quelque, some, signifies un, une, entre plusieurs, one out of 
several ; it is of both genders, and takes the number of the substantive. 

EXAMPLE. 

Adressez-vous a quelque autre personne, Apply to somebody else. 

405. Chaque, each, every, which is of both genders, has no plural. 

EXAMPLE. 

Chaque pays a ses coutumes, Each country has its customs. 

406. Quelconque, aucun, any, quel que ce soit, whatever it be ; quel 
quHl soit, whoever he be, is of both genders, and is always placed after a 
substantive ; when used with a negative it is always singular. 

EXAMPLE. 

72 ne veut se soumettre a aucune He will submit to no authority 
autorite' quelconque, whatever. 

407. Certain signifies quelque, certain, some. In this sense it is used 
alike of persons and things ; but it is always placed before the substantive. 

EXAMPLE. 
J'ai ou'i dire a certain homme, a I have heard some man say. 
un certain homme, 

408. Un, une, a or an, when used indeterminately for quelque, certain, 
some person or some thing, takes the gender of the substantive to which 
it is joined. 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 145 

EXAMPLES. 

Tai vu un homme qui courait, I saw a man who was running. 

Je me suis promeni dans une I walked in a large fine meadow. 
grande et belle prairie, 

EXERCISE ON THE SECOND CLASS. 

Some 2 enlightened J people among the Egyptians preserved the 
eclaire esprit m. pi. JEgyptiens conserver H. 

idea of a first being, whose 3 attributes 'they Represented under 
idee etre, art. attribut m. representer H. 

various symbols ; (this is proved by the following) inscription 
different symbole m. c' 'est ce que prouve cette f. 

upon a temple : — " I am all that has been, is, and shall be : 2 no 2 mortal 
de m. ce qui mortel 

'ever removed the veil that covers me." Every nation has 2 (in its turn) 
lever G. voile m. f. a son tour 

'shone on the theatre of the world. There is no reason whatever that 
brille m. raison f. 

can bring him to it. Some figures appear monstrous and deformed, 
puisse determiner f. monstrueux 

considered separately or too near ; but if (they are put) in their proper 

f. pi. separement de pres ; on les met * 

light and place, the true point of view restores their beauty 

jour a leur m. vice m. leur rendre * art. f. 

and grace. Yesterday I saw a lady 2 remarkably beautiful. 

art. f. J. tfune rare beaute. 



OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 
THIRD CLASS. 

Of those which are sometimes joined to a Substantive and 
sometimes not. — Page 117. 

409. Nul, m. nulle, f. and pas un, m. pas une, f., not any, not one, no 
one, are employed either alone or in conjunction with a substantive. 
They are accompanied by the negation, have no plural, and may be fol- 
lowed by the preposition de. 

EXAMPLES. 

J\ *ul de tons ceux qui y ont ete Not one of those who went there 

ix'en est revenu, has returned. 

Pas un ne croit cette nouvelle, Not one believes that intelligence. 

Je n'en ai nulle connaissance, I have no knowledge of it. 

E n'y a pas une seule personne There is not a single person that 

qui le croie, believes it. 

410. Aucun, m. aucune, f., signifies nid, no, not any, none, when 
accompanied by a negation, and may be followed by the preposition de. 

EXAMPLES. 
Vous n'avez aucun moyen de reus sir You have no means of succeeding 
dans cette affaire, in that affair. 

N 



146 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 

411. This pronoun is seldom employed in the plural, except before 
substantives which, in some particular sense, are better employed in the 
plural. 

EXAMPLE. 
E n a fait aucunes dispositions, He has made no dispositions. 

412. Remark. Aucun, m. aucune f., any, any one, may be employed 
without a negation in interrogative sentences, or those which express 
doubt or exclusion. 

EXAMPLES. 

Aucun homme fut-il jamais plus Was ever any man more success- 

heureux ? ful ] 

On doute q\V aucune de ces affaires They doubt whether any of those 

re'ussisse, affairs will succeed. 

Le plus beau more eau d? eloquence The finest piece of eloquence that 

quHl y ait dans aucune langue, exists in any language. 

EXERCISE ON THE THIRD CLASS. 

No one likes (to see himself) as he is. No expression, no truth of 
se -voir tel que f. f. 

design and coloring, no strokes of genius in that great work. He is 
dessein de coloris, trait ouvrage m. 

as learned as any one. Not one of these engravings announces any 
aussi savant que gravure f. annoncer un 

great skill. None of his works will descend to posterity. He is so 

talent m. passer art. f. 

ignorant, and at the same time so obstinate, that he will not 

en * mtme temps obstine, 

(be convinced) by any reasoning. Did any man ever attain 

se rendre a raisonnement m. jamais parvenir J. 

to such a pitch of glory ! I doubt whether there be, in any science, 

ce * comble m. que Q. f. 

a 2 more 3 evident 'principle. 
plus lumineux principe m. 

413. Autre, other, expresses a difference between two objects, or 
between one and several ; as, quelle autre chose souhaitez-vous de moi ? 
what else do you wish of me 1 

414. Remark. Autre is sometimes used to express a person but inde- 
terminate ; as, j'aime mieux que vous Vappreniez de tout autre que de 
moi, I had rather you learn it of any other person than of me. 

415. Un is sometimes opposed to autre } in which case these two words 
are preceded by the article, supply the place of the substantives to which 
they relate, adopt their gender and number, and form the pronouns Vun 
V autre, Vune V autre, les uns les autres, les tines les autres, Vun et V autre, 
and ni Vun ni V autre. 

416. Vun V autre, each other, one another, applies both to persons and 
things : it takes both gender and number, and requires the article before 
the two words of which it is composed. If there be any preposition, it 
must be placed before the last. When these two words are used in con- 
junction, they express a reciprocal relation between several persons or 
things. 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 147 

EXAMPLE. 

Ilfaut se secourir tun I 1 autre, We ought to assist each other. 

417. When used separately, they denote a difference. 

EXAMPLE. 
Les passions s'entendent les unes Our passions have a relation with 
avec les autres ; si Von se laisse each other ; if we indulge some, 

aller aux unes, on attire bientut the others will soon follow. 

les autres, 

418. Remark. In the latter case Vun is used for the person or thing 
first mentioned, and V autre for the person or thing last spoken of. 

419. Vun et V autre, m., Vune et V autre, f., both; these two words 
mark union. They require the verb to be in the plural. 

EXAMPLE. 
Vune et V autre sont bonnes, Both are good. 

420. yV2 Vun ni V autre, neither ; these two words mark separation. 
The verb ought to be put in the singular ; however, many writers put it 
in the plural in French. 

EXAMPLE. 
JV7 Vun ni V autre rVont fait leur devoir, Neither has done his duty. 

EXERCISE. 
Ask another. W 7 ould any other have been so 

Demander a * aurait-il eu * assez 

self-conceited as to think that his 2 pri vat e 'opinion could counter- 
d } amour-propre* pour pens er particulier f. put ba- 

balance the 2 public ] sentiment'? Reason and faith 2 equally 

lancer opinion f. art. Raison f. art. foi f. 

•demonstrate that we were created for another life. They speak ill of 
dimontrer crier G. f. mal 

one another. The happiness of the people constitutes that of the prince ; 

m. faire m. 

their true interests are connected with each other. Presumption 
intiret m. Hi a pi. pi. art. Prisomption f. 

and pride -easily 'insinuate themselves into the heart ; if we 

art. orgueil se glisser m. Von y 

allow 2 one the 'entrance, it is much to (be feared) that we shall 
donne a f. * entrie, bien craindre on * 

2 soon '(abandon ourselves) to the other. Both relate the same 
bientbt ne se livre rapporter 

story, though neither believes it to be true. 

fait m. ne pens er que * soit 

421. Meme, same, signifies qui ?V est pas autre, which is not different 
It is of both genders, and takes the plural. 

EXAMPLES. 

C'est le meme homme, It is the same man. 

La meme personne, The same person. 

Ce sont les memes raisons, They are the same reasons. 

Ce poeme est le meme que celui This poem is the same that I was 
dont je voics ai parli, mentioning to you. 



148 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 

422. Tel, m. telle, f. tels, m. pi. telles, f. pi., means pareil, semblable, 
de meme, such, like, similar. It takes both genders and both numbers. 

EXAMPLES. 

Tin tel projet ne saurait reussir, Such a scheme cannot succeed. 

II n'y a pas de tels animaiix, de There are no such animals, no such 

telles coutiimes, customs. 

423. When used alone, it either preserves its proper signification, or it 
expresses a person indeterminately. 

EXAMPLES. 

Vans ne sauriez me persuader You cannot persuade me of any such 

Hen de tel, thing. 

Tel fait des liberalites, qui ne The same man is liberal in giving 

paie pas ses dettes, who does not pay his debts. 

424. Plusieurs, several, which is plural and of both genders, is used 
alike of persons and of things. When united to a substantive, or relating 
to it, it signifies an indeterminate number, without relation to another. 

EXAMPLES. 

Plusieurs motifs Vont determine, Several reasons determined him. 
Je crois cela pour plusieurs raisons, I believe that for several reasons. 

425. But it is likewise used as a part of a greater number. 

EXAMPLE. 

Parmi un si grand nombre de gens, Out of so great a number of per- 
il y en eut plusieurs qui s'y oppo- sons, several objected to it. 

serent, 

426. When plusieurs is employed absolutely as a substantive, it 
always means plusieurs personnes, several persons. 

EXAMPLE. 

Plusieurs aiment mieux mourir que Many would rather die than forfeit 
de perdre leur reputation, their character. 

427. Tout is used either alone or with a substantive. 

428. When employed alone, it signifies toutes choses, all things ; toute 
sorte de choses, every kind of things. 

EXAMPLE. 

Tout nous abandonne au moment Every thing forsakes us at the mo- 
de la mort; il ne nous reste que ment of death ; we retain nothing 
nos bonnes osuvres, but our good works. 

429. When united to a substantive, it is used either collectively or 
distributively. 

430. Considered collectively, tout signifies the totality of a thing, and 
is then followed by the article. 

EXAMPLES. 

Tout Vunivers, The whole universe. 

Tous les corps celestes, All the celestial bodies. 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 149 

431. Considered distributively, tout signifies chaque, each; in this 
case, it is not accompanied by the article. 

EXAMPLE. 
Tout bien est desirable, Every good is desirable. 

EXERCISE. 
Does he always maintain the same principles 1 Yes, they are abso- 
soutenir principe ? Qui, ce abso- 

lutely the same. That general is the same that commanded 2 last 
lument pi. H. art. dernier 

'year. 2 Such 'a 3 conduct is inexplicable. There are no such 
annee f. conduite f. de 

customs in this country. I never heard (any thing) similar. 

coutumes f. pays m. ai entendu dire rien de 

The same man sows who often reaps nothing. l I s this 4 morning 

* semer recueillir matin 

deceived several letters. Among those manuscripts, there are several 
G. letire f. manuscrits, 

much esteemed. Many, by endeavoring to injure others, 

qiion beaucoup estime. en s'ejforcer de nuire a art. 

injure themselves more than they think. All is in God and 
se nuire a ne penser. en 

God is in all. The whole course of his life has been distinguished 

coursm. f. marque 

by ^generous Actions. Every vice is odious. 
des f. m. 



OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 
FOURTH CLASS. 

Of those which are followed by que. — Page 118. 

432. Qui, que, whoever, is only said of persons, and signifies quelque 
personne que, whatever person ; it requires the verb following to be in 
the subjunctive. 

EXAMPLES. 

Qui que ce soit qui ait fait cela, Whoever has done that is a man 

Jest un habile homme, of talent. 

Qui que je sois, Whoever I may be. 

Qui que (fait ete, Whoever it may have been. 

Qui que ceut ete, Whoever it might have been. 

Qui que ce puisse etre, Whoever it may be. 

433. When qui que, followed by ce soit, is used with a negative, it 
signifies aucune personne, nobody, no one ; as, je rfy trouve qui que ce 
soit, I find nobody there. 

434. Quoi que, whatever it be, is only used of things, and signifies 
quelque chose que, whatever thing ; it requires also the verb following to 
be in the subjunctive. 

EXAMPLES. 
Quoi que ce soit quHl fasse, ou Whatever he does or says, he is 

qu'il dise, on se dejie de lui, distrusted. 

Quoi que vous disiez, je le ferai, Whatever you may say, I will do it. 

n2 



150 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 

435. Remark. When quoi que, followed by ce soit, is used with a 
negation, it signifies aucune chose, not any thing. 

EXAMPLE. 

Sans application, on ne pent re- Without application, it is impossible 
ussir en quoi que ce soit, to succeed in any thing whatever. 

EXERCISE ON THE FOURTH CLASS. 

Whoever has told you so, he is mistaken. Passenger, whoever 
le, se tromper G. Passant, 

thou be, contemplate with 2 religious 'veneration this monument erected 

contempler un respect m. m. eleve 

hj gratitude; it is the tomb ofa 2 just s and 4 benevolent 1 man. 

art. reconnaissance f. ce tombeau m. hienfaisant 

How can he hope to be beloved who has regard for no one 1 
Comment esperer de lui ne Regards 

Whatever he may do or say, he (will find it) very difficult to de- 
qiCil aura bien de la peine de- 

stroy prejudices so deeply rooted. A mind vain, presump- 

tive des prejuge m. si profondement enracine. presomp- 

tuous, and inconsistent, will never succeed in any thing whatever. 
tueux, sans consistance, reussir 

Whatever a 2 frivolous 'world may think of you, never swerve 

frivole monde puisse se dttourner 

from the path of virtue. 
chemin m. art. f. 

438. Quel que, m. quelle que, f. quels que, m. pi. quelles que f. pi., 
signifies de quelque sorte, de quelque espece que ce soit, of whatever sort 
or kind it may be, when relating to things ; or, qui que ce soit, whoever 
it may be, when relating to persons. It takes both gender and number 
according to the person or thing it relates to, and requires the subjunctive. 

EXAMPLES. 

Quelles que soient vos affaires, Whatever business you may have, 

venez, come. 

Je rien excepte personne, quel I except nobody, whoever he may 

qriil soit, be. 

437. Remark. Lequel que, m. laquelle que, f. lesquels que, m. pi. 
lesquelles que, f. pi., whosoever, whichever, is also used ; as, lequel des 
trois que vous choisissiez, peu tri import e, whichever of the three you 
choose, I care little. 

438. Quelque-que m. f. s. quelques-que m. f. pi., of both genders, when 
united to a substantive, signifies quel que soit le, quelle que soit la, &c, 
whatever be the, &c. It has both numbers, and requires the subjunctive. 

EXAMPLES. 

Quelque raison qii 'on lui apporte, Whatever reason is adduced, he 
il rien croit rien, believes nothing about it. 

Quelques efforts que vousfassiez, Whatever attempts you may make, 
vous ne reussirez point, you will never succeed. 

439. When united to an adjective, it operates as an adverb, and signifies 
a quelque point que, however great a degree ; it then does not take number. 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 151 

EXAMPLES. 

Quelque belle qu'elle puisse etre, However beautiful she may be, she 
elle ne doit pas etre vaine, ought not to be vain. 

Quelque puissans qn'ils soient, je However powerful they may be, I 
ne les crains point, am not afraid of them. 

440 Tel que, such as, serves to mark a parity between objects by com- 
parison. 

EXAMPLE. 
Cest un homme tel qiCil vous lefaut, He is just such a man as you want. 

441. Tout — que signifies quoique, encore que, though, quelque, how- 
ever. On this occasion, tout is considered as an adverb, and is employed 
with adjectives of every kind, and even with some substantives. 

EXAMPLES. 
Tout artificieux quails sont, je Artful as they are, I doubt whether 

douie que le public soit long- the public will be long their dupe. 

temps leur dupe, 
Toute femme qu'elle est, Woman as she is. 

EXERCISE. 
Let 3 the laws 2 be ! (what they may), we must always respect them. 
lot f. Q. quel que respecter 

Whatever efforts you make, I doubt whether you will succeed. All 
m. Q. que * reussir Q. 

men, however opposite they may be, agree on that point. The 
art. oppose s'accorder m. 

man who descends into himself only to discover his defects, and 

rentrer en ne que pour y demtler m. 

» correct them, likes to see himself as he is. However surprising 
se corriger en, * surprenant 

2 that -'phenomenon ] may be, it is not against the order of nature. 
phenomene m. contre ordre m. art. 

. Children as they are, they behaved remarkably well. 
se sont conduits fort 

A GENERAL EXERCISE ON THE PRONOUNS. 

lf THE EVENING nVALK. 

du soir promenade f. 

On a fine ^summer 'evening, my brother, my sister, and myself 
Dans de soiree f. moi 

(were walking) (by the side) of a wood (not far distant) 
^ nous nous promenions le long boism. qui n'est pas bien eloignS 

from the castle which we inhabit. We (were contemplating) with 
chateau m. habiter. contempler H. 

rapture the 2 majestic Scenery which nature exhibits at the 
transport majestueux scene f. art. deployer 

approach of night, when we perceived at the foot of an ancient 
approchef. art. nuit f. quand apercevoir J. a pied in. vieux 

oak a boy of a 2 most ^interesting ] countenance. His beauty, 
chene m. enfant art. inter essant art. figure f. f. 



152 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 

his air of ingenuousness and candor, his gracefulness struck us, and 

m. ingenuite de grace pi. frapper J. 

we approached him. What ! alone here, my boy 1 said we ; 

nous appro cher J. en. senl ici, enfant lui dimes 

whence art thou 1 Whence comest thou ] What art thou doing here 

d'ou fais 

alone 1 I am not alone, answered he, (smiling) ; I am not alone ; 

rtpondre J. dhin air riant ; 
but I was fatigued, and I (have seated myself) under the shade of this 
H. fatigue s'asseoir G. a ombre f. 

tree, while my mother is busy in gathering simples to 
arhre m. tandis que occupe a cueillir des .. pour 

give some relief to the pains which 2 her 3 aged 4 father 

apporter soulagement m. douleur f. vieux 

buffers. Ah ! (how many) troubles 2 my ? good 4 mamma 'has ! 
souffrir. que de peine f. maman 

How many troubles ! Did you know them, there is not one of you 

si connaitre H. 

that would not be touched with pit}^, and who could refuse the tribute 
qui * S. pitie, lui S. un tribut 

of your tears. We said to him, lovely child, thy ingenuousness, 

* larme f. J. * aimable ta 

candor, innocence, (every thing), interests us in thy misfortunes and 
f. ton f. tout, inter esser a malheur 

those of thy mother. Relate them to us ; whatever they be, fear not 
a Raconter * 

to afflict us. (Wo be) to whoever cannot feel for the 

de qffliger Jblalheur ne sait pas s'attendrir sur 

misfortunes of others ! 2 He 'immediately related the history of his mother, 

mal m. aussitot J. 

with an expression, an artlessness, a grace, altogether affecting. Our 

f. naivete f. f. t out- a- -fait touch ant f. sing, 

hearts felt the liveliest emotions ; tears (trickled down our cheeks), 

eprouverZ. vif f. nos couler J. 

and we gave him what little money we had about us. (In the 

lui le peu de argent que H. sur Ce- 

mean time), the mother returned. (As soon as) he saw her, ho 

pendant revenir J. Des-que apercevoir J. 

exclaimed, (make haste), mamma; make haste: see what these good 
s 1 eerier J. accourir sing. sing. sing, ce que 

little folks have given me ; I have related to them thy misfortunes ; 

ge?is f. 
they have been affected (by them), and their sensibility (has not been 
m, touch" m. pi. en f. ne s'est pas 

satisfied) with shedding tears. See, mamma, see what they have 
borne f. a * des sing. sing, 

given me. The mother was moved ; she thanked us, and 

J. attendri f. remercierJ. nous 

said : 2 generous, 'feeling 'souls, the good action which you (have 

J. et sensible ame f. f. 

just been doing) will not be lost. He who sees (every thing) and 

venez de faire perdu f. 

judges (every thing) will not let it go unrewarded. 
juger laisser * sans recompense* 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 153 

CHAPTER V. 

OF THE VERB. 





Agreement of the Verb with the Subject. 



442. The subject is that of which something is affirmed, and may 
always be known by the answer to this question, qui est-ce qui ? who 
or what is it 1 as, Pierre vit, Peter lives ; Voiseau vole, the bird flies. 
If it be asked, qui est-ce qui vit? who is it that lives'? — qui est-ce qui 
vole ? what is it that flies 1 — the answers Pierre and Voiseau shew that 
Pierre and Voiseau are the subjects of the verbs vit and vole, 

443. Rule. The verb must be of the same number and person as its 
subject. 

EXAMPLES. 
Je ris I laugh. JYous parlous, We speak. 

Tujoues, Thou playest. Vous plaisantez, You jest. 

II aime, He loves. lis sont fous, They are mad. 

La vertu est aimable, Virtue is amiable. 

444. Ris is in the singular number and the first person, because je, its 
subject, is in the singular and the first person. Joues is in the singular 
and the second person, because tu is in the singular and the second 
person, &c. 

EXERCISE. 
The most free of all men is he who can be free, even in slave- 
libre art. celui meme art. es cla- 

ry. Are we not often blind to our defects 1 All men 
vage m. s'aveugler sur defaut ? art. 

(are inclined) to idleness, but the savages of 2 hot Countries are 

tendre art. sauvage art. chaud pays 

the laziest of all men. Do you think of imposing long on the 

* en imposer A. long-temps a 
credulity of the public 1 Thou canst not deny that he is a great man. 
f. m. pouvoir nier ne Q. 

445. Remark I. When a verb has two subjects, both singular, it is 
put in the plural. 

EXAMPLE. 
Mon ptre et ma mere m'aiment My father and mother love me 
tendrement t tenderly. 

EXERCISE. 
His uprightness and honesty make him courted by every body. 
droiture f. his honnetete faire rechercher de 
Strength of body and of mind meet not always 

art. f. art. celle art. se rencontrer 

together. A good heart and a noble soul are 2 precious J gifts of nature. 
ensemble. m. beau f. don m. art. f. 



154 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 

446. Remark IT. When a verb relates to subjects of different persons, 
it agrees with the first, in preference to the other two, and with the second, 
in preference to the third. The person addressed is named first and the 
person addressing last. On this occasion, the pronoun plural nous is 
generally placed before the verb, if the first person has been mentioned 
before, or the pronoun plural vous, if no first person has been mentioned. 

EXAMPLES. 

Vous, votre fr ere, et moi, nous li sons You, your brother, and I, read 
ensemble la brochure nouvette, together the new pamphlet. 

Vous et votre ami, vous viendrez You and your friend will come 
avec moi, with me. 

EXERCISE. 

You, your friend, and I, have each a 2 difFerent Opinion. In our 

chacun f. 

childhood, you and I (were pleased) with playing together. Neither 
enfance f. se plaire H. A. ni 

I nor (any one else) has been able to understand (any thing) in that 

ni d'autres ne pouvoir G. * comprendre rien a 

sentence. (Take good care), you and your brother, not to 
phrase f. se garder Men P. * de 

(give way) to the impetuosity of your character. 
s'abandonner caractere m. 

447. Remark III. When a verb has the relative pronoun qui for its 
subject, it is put in the same number and person as the noun or pronoun 
to which qui relates. 

EXAMPLES. 

Est-ce moi qui ai dit cette nouvelle? Is it I who told this news *? 
Est-ce nous qui Vavons voulu ? Is it we who desired it 1 

Ceux qui aiment sincerement la Those who sincerely love virtue 
vertu sont heureux, are happy. 

EXERCISE. 
He that complains most of mankind, is not always he that 
Celui se plaindre le plus art. homme pi. 
(has most reason) to complain (of them). You that wish to enrich 
est le plus fon de en. vouloir * enrichir 

your mind with thoughts vigorously conceived and nobly expressed, 
esprit de f. forlement concu . noblement exprime' 

read the works of Homer and Plato. 
ouvrage Ho mere 



OF THE REGIMEN OF VERBS. 

448. A verb is active when it will admit after it quelqu\m or quelque 
chose, and the word which is put after the verb is called the regimen of 
that verb. Observe that this regimen may be known by asking the ques- 
tion, qu' est-ce que? It is called direct — that is, governed directly by 
the verb, without any preposition being necessary between the verb and 
its object, and may be either a noun or a pronoun. 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 155 

449. Rule. When the regimen of the active verb is a noun, it is always 
placed after the verb ; when it is a pronoun, it is generally placed before it. 

EXAMPLE. 

JWa mere aime tous ses enfans, My mother loves all her children. 

Je vous aime, and not as in English, J'aime vous, I love you ; 
II maime, and not II aime moi, he loves me. 



EXERCISE ON THE REGIMEN OF VERBS. 
He has discovered to all other nations his 2 ambitious 'design of 
montrer art. penple m. dessein m. 

enslaving them, and has left us no means of 

mettre dans Vesclavage A. ne laissev aucun moyen 

defending our liberty but by endeavoring to overturn his new kingdom. 

A. que en tdcher de renverser royaume m. 

Homer represents Nestor as he that restrained the ungovernable 
Homtre celui moderer H. bouillant 

wrath of Achilles, the pride of Agamemnon, the haughtiness of Ajax, 
courroux m. Jierte 

and the 2 impetuous T courage of Diomed. He dared not (lift up) his 
m. Diomede. oser H. lever * 

eyes, lest they should meet those of his friend, whose 

art. de peur de * * rencontrer A. art. 

2 very 'silence condemned him. He caresses them, because he loves them. 
meme m. H. 

450. Besides this regimen direct, some active verbs may have a second, 
which is called indirect, and is marked by the words a or de. 

EXAMPLES. 

77 a fait un present a, sa sceur, He has made a present to his sister. 
II accuse soil ami rf imprudence, He accuses his friend of imprudence. 

EXERCISE. 

In submitting to the yoke of Asia, Greece would have thought 
En subir * jougm. art. art. croire 

2 virtue Subjected to voluptuousness, the mind to the body, and 
art. assujettir A. art. volupte f. 

courage to a 2 senseless ! force, which consisted only in numbers. 
art. inse?ise f. H. neque ait. multitude f. s. 

Three hundred Lacedemonians hastened to Thermopylae to 

Lacedemo7iiens courirJ. art. Thermopiles pi. un 
2 certain 'death, content, in dying, to have sacrificed to their country an 
assure f. en de immoler pays m. 

infinite dumber of barbarians, and to have left to their countrymen the 

barbare de laisser compatriote 

example of an 2 unheard of j bravery. You knew the importance 

inoiii * hardiesse f. savoir H. f. 

which your parents attached to the success of that affair : why 

que H. reussite f. f. pourquoi 

have you not hastened to announce it to them ? 
s'empresser G. de f. 



156 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 

451. The second regimen is known by the answer to these questions : a 
qui P to whom 1 a quoi P to what 1 de qui P of whom 1 de quoi P of what 1 

EXAMPLES. 
Ji qui a-t-ilfait un present P To whom did he make a present 1 

A sa socur, To his sister. 

De quoi ,accuse-t-il son ami P Of what does he accuse his friend 1 

D' imprudence, Of imprudence. 

452. Passive verbs require de or par before the noun or pronoun that 
follows them. 

EXAMPLES. 

La souris est mangee par le chat, The mouse is eaten by the cat. 
Un enfant sage est aime de tout le A good child is loved by every 
monde, body. 

453. Remark. The French never use the word par before Dieu, God ; 
they say, les medians seront punis de Dieu, which, in order to avoid 
making use of by, may be thus Englished : God will punish the wicked. 

EXERCISE. 

The city of Troy was taken, plundered, and destroyed by the 2 con- 
Troie pris, saccage, detruit con- 

federate Greeks, eleven hundred and forty-eight years before the 2 Christian 
feder6 avant 

%ra : this event has been celebrated by the two greatest poets of Greece 
ere f. art. 

and Italy. You will only be beloved, esteemed, and courted 

de art. rechercher 

by men (in proportion as) you join the qualities of the heart 
de art. que autant que joindre L. 

to those of the mind. fGod punished the Jews every time when, 
punir J. peuple Juif toutes lesfois que 
deaf to the voice of the prophets, they fell into idolatry and 
sourd f. prophete, sing, tomber J. dans art. 

impiety. 

454. Some few neuter verbs have no regimen ; as, dormir, to sleep ; 
but many of them have a government. 

455. Rule. Some neuter verbs require a and others de before their 
regimen, 

EXAMPLES. 
Tout genre d'exces nuit a la Every kind of excess is hurtful to 

sante, health. 

H mtdit de tout le monde, He slanders every body. 

EXERCISE. 

This sentiment has pleased the king and all the nation. In his 
a a Dans 

retirement, he (has the full enjoyment) of the faculties of his soul. To 
retraite f. jouir de tout f. 

t Translate as if it stood thus -.—The people Jewish were punished by God every, &c 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 157 

slander (any one) is to assassinate him in 2 coId 'blood. The honest 
me dire de quelqitun Jest * de sang, 

man seldom (permits himself ) (to jest), because he knows 

rarement se permettre des plaisanteries parce que savoir 
the most innocent jests may sometimes hurt the reputation. 
que f. pi. * pouvoir F. quelquefois nuire a f. 

It is only in retirement that one truly enjoys one's self. His 
Ce ne que art. on veritablement jouir de sot, 

work has pleased (every one) because it unites to 2 real 'utility 
ouvrage m. a tout le monde joindre tin f. 

the charms of style and the beauties of sentiment. 
agrement m. art. m. sing. art. pi. 

456. Reflected verbs have for their regimen the personal pronouns me, 
te, se, nous, and vous, and this regimen is sometimes direct and some- 
times indirect. 



OF THE NATURE AND USE OF MOODS AND TENSES. 
Of the Indicative. 

457. The indicative is that mood which simply declares and affirms a 
thing. It contains eight tenses, viz : — the present, the imperfect, the 
preterit definite, the preterit indefinite, the preterit anterior, the plu- 
perfect, the future simple, and the future anterior. 

458. The present marks that a thing is either existing or doing at the 
moment one mentions the circumstance. 

EXAMPLES. 

J'aime, I love. lis jouent, They play. 

459. The imperfect is used to express a thing done at a time past, but^ 
as present with regard to another thing done at a time likewise past. 

EXAMPLE. 
.Ventrais au moment ou vous I came in at the moment you were 
sortiez, going out. 

460. It is also used to express something past, but habitual, without 
fixing the time of its duration. 

EXAMPLE. 

Cesar etait un habile general, Caesar was an able general. 

46 1 . The preterit definite marks that a thing took place at a time 
mentioned and completely past. 

EXAMPLE. 
Pecrivis hier a Rome, I wrote yesterday to Rome. 

462 The preterit indefinite expresses a thing as having taken place 
at a time which is neither precise nor determinate. 

o 



158 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 

EXAMPLE. 
U n?a fait un vrai plaisir en He has given me real pleasure by 
tenant me voir, coming to see me. 

463. Or at a time which is not absolutely past. 

EXAMPLE. 
J y ai vu cette semaine beaucoup de I have seen many people this 
monde, week. 

EXERCISE ON THE INDICATIVE. 
My sister is in her chamber, where she (is occupied) in reading 

ou s'occuper F. a. A. 

2 ancient history, 2 the study '(of which) pleases her extremely, 
art. do nt lui injiniment. 

Benefits bestowed are (so many) trophies erected 

art. Bienfait que on repandre F. des trophee que on s^rigerY. 

in the hearts of those whose 2 felicity ' (has been promoted) (by them) . 

art. on /aire F. * 

The great Corneille was busy in his study tracing the plan of one 

occupe cabinet a A. m. 

of his tragedies, when a servant, terrified, came to tell him that 

domestiquem. tout effr aye J. * lui 

s his 4 house 2 was on 'fire : " Go and find my wife," re- 

prendre I. a * art. * trouver A. re- 

plied he ; "I do not understand household concerns." 

pondre J. entendre rien a art. affaire pi. du menage rn. 

Some 2 Hungarian 'noblemen revolted from the Emperor Sigismund ; 
Des Hongrois seigneur se revolter contre Sigismond ; 

this prince heard it, and marched boldly against them : 

apprendre fitrement au-devant de 

11 Which among you," said he (to them), " will lay 2 hands -upon 

Centre mettre art. f. sing, 

his king 'first? If there be one 2 bold 'enough, let him advance." 

art. en un hardi 

This noble firmness struck the rebels (with awe), who returned 
en imposer a seditieux rentrer 

immediately to their duty. I have travelled through almost all 
aussitbt dans le * devoir. voyager dans 

Europe, and I have visited the most Celebrated 'places in Asia, 
art. f. celebre lieu de art. dsie y 

and Africa ; if, on the one hand, I admired the masterpieces 

de art. Jlfrique ; cote m. G. chefs-d'oeuvre 

of art, of every kind, which the protection of 2 enlightened 'govern- 

art. en tout genre, art. 

ments has produced, on the other, I shed tears (on seeing) the 

faire naitre, G. sur 

ravages of ignorance and barbarism, 

art. de art. barbarie f. 

464. The preterit anterior expresses that a thing had taken place 
immediately before a time which is passed, and this tense is either definite 
or indefinite. There is the same difference between its two forms as 
between the two preterits, definite and indefinite. — See page 93, art. 54. 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 159 

EXAMPLES. 

J'eus dine hier a midi, I had dined yesterday at twelve. 

Quan d feus dine hier, midi When I had dined yesterday, it 

sonna, struck twelve. 

J'ai eu dejeuni ce matin a, dix I had done breakfast this morning 

heures, at ten o'clock. 



465. The pluperfect is that past tense which expresses a thing as 
having taken place at any period antecedent to the time when another 
thing happened, or it expresses a thing habitually done before another. 

EXAMPLES. 

J^avais soupi quand il entra, I had supped when he came in. 

Lorsque fetais a la campagne, dts When I was in the country, as 
que f avals dejeune, fallals a la soon as I had breakfasted, I 
chasse, used to go a hunting. 



466. The future absolute is that tense which expresses that an action 
or event will take place at a time which does not yet exist. 

EXAMPLE. 
J'irai demain a la campagne, I shall go to-morrow into the country. 

467. The future anterior is the tense which expresses that at a lime 
when a thing will take place, another thing will have already taken place. 

EXAMPLE. 

Quand faurai fini, je sortirai, W T hen I have done, I shall go out 

EXERCISE ON THE PRETERIT ANTERIOR, &c. 

I had done yesterday at noon. I (went out) (as soon as) I had dined. 
fnir midi. sortir J. des que 

As soon as Caesar had crossed the Rubicon, he had no longer to deliberate ; 

passer plus 

he (was obliged) to conquer or to die. I had finished the task that 

devoir H. * vainer e * tdchef. 

you had imposed upon me when you came in. Those who had con- 
imposer f. * con- 

tributed most to his elevation to the throne of his ancestors, were those 
tribuer le plus sur 

who labored with the most eagerness to precipitate him (from it). 

travailler de acharnement en. 

I shall shortly go into the country, where I intend to (collect 
ne point tarder a a campagne, se proposer de h.erbo- 

plants), (in order tor) (make myself perfect) in the knowledge of 
riser, pour se perfectionner 

botany. When I have done reading the 2 divine 'writings 

art. botanique f. achever M. de A. ecrit m. 

of Homer and Virgil, and my mind has imbibed their 

H.omere de que se ptnetrer M. de 

beauties, I shall read the other 2 epic 'poets. 



160 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 

Of the Conditional. 

468. The conditional is the mood which affirms on conditions ; it has 
two tenses, the present and the past. 

469. The present of the conditional is that tense which expresses that 
a thing would take place on certain conditions. 

EXAMPLE. 

Je ferais votre affaire avant pen, si I would settle your business before 
elle dependait uniquement de moi, long, if it only depended upon me. 

470. The past of the conditional is that tense which expresses that a 
thing would have taken place at a time which no longer exists, dependant 
on certain conditions. 

EXAMPLE. 

J'aurais, ou feusse fait votre I would have settled your business, 
affaire, si vons m'en aviez, ou if you had mentioned it to me. 
m'en eussiez parle, 

EXERCISE ON THE CONDITIONAL. 
What would not be the felicity of man, if he always sought his 
Quel * f. art. chercher H. 

happiness in himself] I shall be glad to see you harmonious, happy, 

uniy 
and comfortable. A dupe to my imagination, I should have (been 

tranquille. * de 

bewildered), (but for) you, in my search after truth. Enquire 

s egarer sans * art. recherche f. art. s y informer 

whether he would have consented to those conditions, in case 

si consentir dans art. que 

he had thought himself able to fulfil them. 
se croire T. capable de remplir 



Of the Imperative. 

471. The imperative is that mood which commands, exhorts, entreats, 
or reproves. It is a present with respect to the injunction and a future 
with respect to the thing enjoined. 

472. In many verbs a compound of the imperative may be used to 
express an injunction to have a thing done previously to another ; as, 
ayez dine avant que je revienne, have dined before I return. 

EXERCISE ON THE IMPERATIVE. 
Be not fond of praise ; but seek virtue, which pro- 

sing, passionne pour art. louange f. art. at- 

cures it. Let us remember that unless virtue guide us, our 

tirer se souvenir a moins que art. ne 

choice must be wrong. Let us not be deceived by the first 

devoir F. mauvais. se laisser prendre a 

appearances of things ; but let us take time to fix our judgment. 

art. se donner art. de 

Arbiters of the destinies of men, do good, if you wish to be happy ; 
Arbitve destine'e art. art. bien vouloir * 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 161 

do good, if you wish that your memory should be honored ; do good, if 

Q. 
you wish that heaven should open to you its 2 eternal 'gates. Never 

art. Q. porte f. 

forget that the 2 truly 3 free 'man is he who, superior to all fears 

veritablement degage de f. sing, 

and all desires, is subject only to God and to reason. 
de m. sing. soumis ne que art. f. 



Of the Subjunctive. 

473. The subjunctive is that mood which expresses a subordination to 
what precedes. With this dependence it forms a sense, and none without. 
Je voudrais qiCil tut, forms a sense, but qiCil lut, alone and unconnected, 
does not. 

474. This mood contains four tenses : the present — which sometimes 
expresses a future — the imperfect, the preterit, and the pluperfect, 

475. The present and the future of the subjunctive can only be distin- 
guished by the sense. In this phrase, It faut que je vous sots bien 
attache pour venir vous voir par le temps qiCilfait, I must have a great 
esteem for you to come and see you in such weather as this, je sots ex- 
presses a present time ; but in this, Je ne crois pas que vous obteniez 
cela de ltd, I do not think you will obtain that of him, vous obteniez 
expresses a future, and stands for vous obtiendrez. 

476. The imperfect, the preterit, and the pluperfect of the subjunctive 
express also a past or future, according to circumstances. In this phrase, 
Soiipconniez-vous qiiil ne le fit pas ? Did you suspect he would not do 
it, fit expresses a past; but in this, Je desirerais qiCil vit du monde, I 
wish him to see company, vit marks a future. 

EXERCISE ON THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 

2 Men 'must r be (very much) blinded by their passions, not to 
art. ilfaut que bien aveugle pour 

acknowledge that they ought (to love one another) as parts of a 

convenir devoir F. s 1 entr* aimer art. 

whole, and as 2 (the members of our body) '(would do) if (every one) 
tout, chacun 

had a particular 'vitalit}^. You asked him to come with us, but I 

s a vie. prier G. de 

doubt whether he will have that complaisance. I could not persuade 

que Q. H. 

myself that he was so vain as to aspire to that place. Though every 

S. assez * pour f. 

body says so, I do not believe that he is gone to Rome. (Is it possible) 
Q. le, Q. se pouvoir F. 

that he should let slip 2 so ? good 'an 4 opportunity of acquiring 

laisser R. echapper beau, occasion f. A. un 

2 immortal 'glory ] I could have wished that he had availed himself of his 

profiterH. 
abode in the country to perfect himself in the study of philosophy. 
sejour a campagne pour se perfectionner art. f. 

o2 



\ 



162 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 

Of the Infinitive. 

477. The infinitive is that mood which affirms indeterminately, without 
either number or person. 

478. It denotes of itself neither present, past, nor future, except when 
it follows other verbs. The present always expresses a present, relative 
to the preceding verb ; as, je le vois,je le vis.je le verrai venir, I see, I 
saw, I shall see him come. The past always expresses a past, relative to 
the verb that precedes it; as, je crois, je croyais V avoir vu venir, I think, 
I thought that I had seen him coming. To express a. future, the infinitive 
must be preceded by the infinitive of the verb devoir ; as, je croyais 
devoir y alter, I thought I was to go there. 

479. Remark. The infinitive also expresses a future after the verbs 
permettre, esperer, compter, s* attendre, and menacer ; as, il promet de 
venir fquHl viendra), he promises to come (that he will come) ; il 
menace de s'y rendre (quHl s'y rendraj, he threatens to go (that he 
will go) there. 

EXERCISE ON THE INFINITIVE. 
We only shut our eyes to truth, because we tear to 2 see 
ne * art. art. que parce que de 

'ourselves as we are. We were yet far from the castle, when 

nous tel que H. encore 

one of our friends came to join us. I did not think I was to set 

J. * H. * devoir A. * 

out so soon. He promises every day that he will amend, but I do 

de * * se corriger A. 
not rely upon his promises. They talk of a 2 secret 'expedition; he 

compter promesse f. On 

hopes to be (in it). He relies upon seeing you (very soon) to 

en. compter * A au premier j our pour 

terminate amicably his affair with you. You expected to take a 

a V amiable s'attendre H. faire 

journey this year, but your father has changed his mind. He threat- 
voyage m. de * avis. 

ens to punish us severely, if we (fall again) into the same error. 
de sivtrement retomber faute. 



OF THE PARTICIPLE. 

480. The participle is a part of the verb which partakes of the properties 
both of a verb and an adjective : of a verb, as it has its signification and 
regimen — of an adjective, as it expresses the quality of a person or thing o 

481. There are two participles, the participle present and the parti- 
ciple ]) as t. 

Of the Participle Present. 

482. The participle present always terminates in ant ; as, aimant, 
finissant, recevant, rendant. 

483. Rule. The participle present remains unchanged, and takes 
neither gender nor number when it expresses an action ; as, une montagne, 
or des montagnes dominant sur des plaines immense s, a mountain, or 



SYNTAX OF THE PARTICIPLE. 163 

mountains commanding immense plains ; un homme, des homines, une 
femme, des femmes lisant, parlant, mar chant, a man, men, a woman, 
women reading, speaking, walking. But when, like an adjective, it ex- 
presses simply a quality, it takes both the gender and number of its sub- 
stantive ; as, un homme obligeant, an obliging man ; une femme obligeante, 
an obliging woman ; des tableaux parlans, speaking portraits; la religion 
dominante, the established religion ; a la nuit tombante, at night fall. 

484. What grammarians call" gerund is nothing but the participle 
present, to which the word en is prefixed ; on se forme V esprit en lisant 
de bons livres, we form our minds by reading good books. 

EXERCISE ON THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 

That mountain being very high, and thus commanding a vast 

eleve, ainsi dominer sur grande 

extent of country, was very well calculated for our observations. This 

elendue pays, H. * propre a 

woman is of good disposition, obliging every one whenever she 

caractere m. tout le monde quand 

(has it in her power). They go cringing before the great, that they 

en a le pouvoir. romper devant pi. afin de * 

may be insolent to their equals. The state of pure nature is that of 

* A, avec egal. 

the savage living in the desert, but living in his family, knowing his 

famille f. connaitre 
children, loving them, (making use) of speech, and (making himself 

user art. parole, se faire 

understood). An 2 agreeable ] langor imperceptibly (laying hold) 
entendre. langueur f. insensiblement s'emparer 

of my senses, suspended the activity of my soul, and I (fell asleep). 
sens, suspendre J. s'endormeri. 

Time is a real blunderer, placing, replacing, ordering, disordering, 
art. vrai bronillon, mettre, remettre, ranger, deranger, 

impressing, erasing, approaching, removing, and making all things, good 
imprimer, effacer, appro cher, eloigner, rendre f. 

and bad ; and almost always (impossible to be known again). 
presque meconnaissable. 

Of the Participle Past. 

485. The participle past has various terminations ; as, aime,jini, recu, 
ouvert, dissous, &c. 

486. This participle sometimes agrees with its subject and sometimes 
with its regimen. 

Agreement of the Participle Past toith its Subject. 

487. Rule I. The participle past, when accompanied by the auxiliary 
verb etre, agrees with its subject in gender and number. 

EXAMPLES. 
Man frere est tombe, My brother is fallen. 

Mes freres sont tombes, My brothers are fallen. 

Ma sceur est tombe e, My sister is fallen. 

Mes sceurs sont tombees, My sisters are fallen. 



164 SYNTAX OF THE PARTICIPLE 

La nuit sera bientbt passee, The night will soon be over. 

Les spectacles sont frequent es, The theatres are frequented. 

Cette fleur est fort recherchee, This flower is much sought after. 

lis sont fort estimes, They are very much esteemed. 

EXERCISE ON THE PARTICIPLE PAST. 

Fire-arms were not known to the ancients. Ishmael, the son of 
art. arme~a-feu f. H. connu de Ismail, * 

Abraham, is known among the Arabs as (the man) from whence they 
parmi Arabe celui 

sprung, and circumcision has remained (among them) as the 
etre sorti G. art. f. etre demeure leur 

mark of their origin. Heaven is that permanent ] city (into which) 

f. art. cite f. oil 

the just are to be received after this life. In - Abraham's Hime, 

pi. devoir * apres De art. 

the threatenings of the true God was dreaded by Pharaoh, king of Egypt; 

menace f. H. redoute de Pharaon, 

but in the time of Moses, all nations were corrupted, and the world, 

JVCotse, art. f. H. perverti, 

which God has made to manifest his power, was become a temple of 

pour pouvoir, H. devenu 

idols. That 2 dreadful 'crisis which threatened the state with 2 instant 
terrible crise f. H. de pro chain 

destruction, was happily soon over. She is come to bring us all 

f. J. heureusement passe. * 

kinds of refreshments. The sciences have always been 

sorte f. sing, rafraichissement. f. 

protected by 2 enlightened 'governments. 
protege art. eclair t 

488. Rule II. The participle past, when it follows the verb avoir, 
never agrees with its subject. 

JVlon frere a ecrit, My brother has written. 

JSIes frtres ont ecrit. My brothers have written. 

Ma sccur a ecrit, My sister has written. 

JVLes sceurs ont ecrit, My sisters have written. 

Les Amazones ont acquis de la The Amazons have acquired cele- 

ciltbrite, brity. 
J'ai contraint les soldats a marcher, I have forced the soldiers to march. 

489. Remark. The participle of the verb etre, and of all the neuter 
verbs which are conjugated with the auxiliary verb avoir, never vary; as, 
il or elle a ete, he or she has been ; ils or elles ont ete, they have been ; 
il or elle a dormi, he or she has slept ; ils or elles ont nui, they have 
annoyed. 

EXERCISE. 
The Romans successively triumphed over the 2 most warlike J na- 
Romainssuccessivement G. de belliqueux 

tions, Lampridius relates that Adrian erected to Jesus Christ some 
raconter Adrien e lever I. de 

temples, which (were still to be seen) in his time. Happy those 
art. on encore voir H. de * 



SYNTAX OF THE PARTICIPLE. 165 

princes who have never (made use) of their power but to do 
art. user pouvoir que pour 

good ! We have spent the whole day in tormenting ourselves, 
art. bien ! journee f. a A. nous. 

One has seldom seen a great stock of good sense in a man of ima- 
On rarement fonds m. sens a 

gination. The errors of Descartes (proved very useful) to Newton. 

beaucoup servir G. 

Agreement of the Participle Past with its Regimen. 

490. Rule I. The participle past always agrees with its regimen 
direct, when that regimen is placed before the participle, whether the 
auxiliary verb that accompanies it be avoir or etre. 

EXAMPLES. 

Les ecoliers que fai eus, out fait de The pupils whom I have had, have 

grands pr ogres, made rapid progress. 

Lucrece s'est tuee, Lucretia has killed herself. 

Jai renvoye les livres que vous I have sent back the books which 

m'aviez prttes, you had lent me. 

Que de soins je me suis donnes ! What pains I have taken ! 

Quelle affaire avez-vous entre- What business have you under- 

prise ? taken 1 

Quand la race de Cain se fut muU When the race of Cain had mul- 

tipliee, tiplied. 

Cesyeux que n'ont emus ni soupirs Those eyes which neither sighs 

ni terreur, nor terror have moved. 

Le Dieu JSIercure est un de ceux The god Mercury is one of those 

que les anciens ont le plus mid- whom the ancients have multi- 

tiplies, plied the most. 

491. Remark. The regimen which precedes the participle is either 
one of these pronouns — que, me, te, se, le, la, les, noiis, and vous — or a 
noun sometimes joined to the pronoun quel, sometimes preceded by the 
word of quantity, combien or que — signifying combien, how much — as 
may be seen in the examples already given. 

EXERCISE ON THE AGREEMENT OF THE PARTICIPLE 
PAST WITH ITS REGIMEN. 

All the letters which I have received, confirm that ^important 'news. 

f. conjirmer sing. 

The 2 agitated 'life which I have led till now, makes me sigh 

agite f. mener jusqiCa present, soupirer 

for retirement. The difficulties which the academies (have pro- 

apres art. retraite f. f. se 

posed to one another) do not seem easy to (be resolved). The 

faire G. paraitre aise rhoudre. 

sciences which you have studied will prove infinitely useful (to you). 

f. etre 

The death which Lucretia (gave herself) has (made her immortal). The 
f. se donner G. immortaliser G. 

cities which those nations have (built for themselves) are but a 
ville f. peuple se batir G. ne que 



166 SYNTAX OF THE PARTICIPLE. 

collection of huts. The persons whom you have instructed appear to 

amas m. chaumitre. f. 

me possessed of reason and taste. Nothing can equal the ardor of 

plein de egaler 

the troops which I have seen (setting off). The chimeras which she 
f. A. c him ere f. 

has got in her head (are beyond) all belief. What measures 
se mettre * art. passer croyancef. demarche f. 

have I not taken ! What fortunes has not this revolution ruined ! 

faire ! f. renverser ! 

What tears has she not shed ! what sighs has she not heaved ! The 
Que de f. verser ! m. pousser ! 

Amazons (made themselves) famous by their courage. The city of 

f. se rendre G. celebre f. 

London (has made itself), by its commerce, the metropolis of the uni- 

m. metropole f. 

verse. I have thought her agitated by the furies. This day is one 

croire 
of those which they have consecrated to tears. The language in 
m. consacrer art. langue f. * 

which Cicero and Virgil have written will live in their works. I 

Ciceron Virgile par ouvrage. 

could have wished to avoid entering into those details, but I thought 
vouloir * eviter d'entrer A. m. croire G. 

them necessary. The tribunes demanded of Clodius the execution 

tribun m. J. a 

of the promises which the consul Valerius had given them, 
f. faire leur, 

492. Rule TI. The participle past never agrees with its regimen, 
either when that participle is without regimen direct or when, having a 
regimen direct, that regimen is placed after it. 

EXAMPLES. 

La lettre dontje vous ai parte, The letter which I have mentioned 

to you. 
La perte et les profits auxquels il a The loss and profits which he has 

participe, shared. 

Les academies se sont fait des ob- The academies have proposed ob- 

jections, jections to one another. 

Vous avez instruit ces personnes a You have taught these persons to 

dessiner, draw. 

Lucrece s'est donne la mort, Lucretia has put a period to her 

existence. 

EXERCISE. 

The persons whose 5 visit 'you s had 4 announced to 2 me, are not 
f. art. f. * 

come. Men built themselves cities.' The Amazons acquired 
art. se batir G. * G. 

great celebrity. I have forced the soldiers to march. That 
beaucoup de contraindre 

woman (has bestowed on herself) fine gowns. 3 Letters 4 and 

se donner G. de art. 



SYNTAX OF THE PARTICIPLE. 167 

5 writing ] were invented to represent speech. She has 
art. ecriiure on a pour peindre art. parole. 

cut two (of her) fingers. Titus has made his wife mistress of his 
se couper * doigt m. rendre 

riches. I have given myself (a great deal) of trouble. Commerce 
bien. bien art. peine f. art. m. 

nas made this city flourishing. They have made an appointment. 
rendre f. forissant. se donner * rendezvous. 

4-93. RuiJe III. The participle past takes neither gender nor number 
when the participle and the auxiliary verb to which it is joined are used 
impersonally, nor when that participle is followed by a verb which governs 
the pronoun or pronouns preceding it. 

EXAMPLES. 

Les chaleurs excessives qu\l a fait The excessive heats which we have 
cet ete, out beaucoup nui a la had this summer have done great 
re colt e, injury to the corn. 

Quelle fdcheuse aventure vons est-il What unpleasant adventure have 
arrive ? you met with 1 

La maison que fai fait batir, The house which I have ordered 

to be built. 

Imitez les vertus que vous avez Imitate the virtues which you have 
entendu loner, heard praised. 

Les mathematiques que vous ?i'avez The mathematics which you would 
pas voulu que fetudiasse, not permit me to study. 

Elle s'est laisse' seduire, She has suffered herself to be se- 

duced. 

494. Remark. To make a right application of the second part of this 
rule, we ought to examine whether we can put the regimen immediately 
after the participle. As we cannot say, J'ai fait la maison, vous avez 
entendu les vertus, vous n'avez pas voxdu les mathematiques, it follows 
that the regimen belongs to the second verb. Sometimes, however, the 
regimen may relate either to the participle or to the following verb, 
according to the meaning of the speaker. Thus, Je Vai vu peindre, 
means, I saw her picture drawn ; but Je Vai vue peindre, signifies, I saw- 
her painting. 

495. Sometimes it happens likewise that, in sentences which seem to 
resemble each other, the regimen in one belongs to the participle and in 
the other to the verb which follows it. For instance, this question — Avez- 
vous entendu chanter la nouvelle actrice ? Have you heard the new 
actress sing? — should be thus answered, Oui,je Vai entendue, chanter g 
Yes, I have : but this question — Avez-vous entendu chanter la nouvelle 
ariette? Have you heard the new song? — must be answered, Oui,je Vai 
entendu chanter j Yes, I have. 

EXERCISE. 
The great changes which (have taken place) in the administration 
changement y avoir G. 

have astonished many people. The heavy rains which (we 

bien des personnes. grand pluie f. il 

have had) in the spring have been the cause of many diseases. The 
faire G. jmaladie f. 



168 SYNTAX OF THE ADVERB. 

scarcity which there was 2 last Winter has afforded the opportunity 

disettef. G. art. dernier donner occasion 

of doing much good. What news (has reached you 1) (How many) 

A. Men. vous est-ilvenu ? Que de 

imprudent steps (were taken) on that occasion ! How many large 
faux demarche f.il s' est fait en gros 

ships have been built in England within these fifty years ! The 

il se construire G. depids * 

figures which you have learned to draw are of great beauty. (We 

apprendre dessiner un II 

ought) never to swerve from the good path which we have begun 

falloir F. * s* eloigner route f. on 

to follow. The measures which you advised me to adopt have 

mesurei. conseiller G. de prendre 

not succeeded. The rule which I have begun to explain seems to 

reussir. regie f. expliquer sembler 

me very easy to (be understood) . You see that I have not been mistaken 
saisir A. se tromper G. 

respecting the affairs which I had foreseen you would have in hand. 

prevoir que * * 



CHAPTER VI. 
OF THE ADVERBS. 



Situation of the Adverbs. 



496. Rule I. In the simple tenses, the adverb is generally placed 
after the verb, and, in the compound tenses, between the auxiliary and 
the participle. 

EXAMPLES. 

Vhomme le plus eclaire est ordi- The man who is most learned is 
nairement celui qui pense le plus generally he who thinks most 
modestement de lui-mcme, modestly of himself. 

Avez-vous jamais vu un pedant plus Have you ever seen a pedant more 
absurbe et plus vain ? absurd and more vain 1 

497. Compound adverbs, and those which have or might have a regi- 
men like the adjectives from which they are derived, are always placed 
after the verb. 

EXAMPLES. 
C'est a la mode. That is fashionable. 

II a agi consiquemment, He has acted consistently. 

498. Adverbs which denote time in an indeterminate manner are like- 
wise placed after the verb. 

EXAMPLES. 
Tl eutfallu se lever plus matin, It would have been necessary to 

rise earlier. 
On a vu cela autrefois. That has been seen formerly. 



SYNTAX OF THE ADVERBS. 169* 

499. Exceptions. 1st. — Adverbs of order, rank, and those which 
express a determinate time, are placed either before or after the verb. 

EXAMPLES. 

Nous devons premierement /aire We ought, first, to do our duty; 

notre devoir; secondement, cher- secondly, enjoy lawful pleasures. 

cher les plaisirs permis, 
Aujourd'hui ilfait beau; il pleuvra To-day it is fine ; it will rain per- 

peut-etre demain, haps to-morrow. 

500. 2d. — These adverbs — comment, ou, d'ou, par ou, combien, pour- 
quoi, guand, used with or without interrogation — are always placed before 
the verb which they modify. 

EXAMPLES. 
Comment vous portez-vous ? How do you do 1 
Ou allez-vous ? Where are you going 1 

II ne sait comment s'y prendre, He does not know how to set about it. 

501. Rule II. The adverb is always placed before the adjective which 
it modifies. 

EXAMPLE. 
C'est line femme fort belle, tres- She is a woman very beautiful, of great 
sensible, et infiniment sage, sensibility, and infinitely prudent. 

502. Rule III. Adverbs of quantity and comparison, and the three 
adverbs of time — souvent, toujours, jamais — are placed before the other 
adverbs. 

EXAMPLES. 

Si poliment, fort poliment, So politely, very politely 

Tres-heureusement, Very happily. 

Le plus adroitement, The most skilfully. 

Us ne seront jamais etroitement urds, They never will be intimately united. 

lis sont toujours ensemble, [arrive, They are always together. 

Cest souvent a Vimproviste qiCil He often comes unexpectedly. 

503. Souvent may, however, be preceded by an adverb of quantity or 
comparison ; as, si souvent, assez souvent, fori souvent, plus souvent, 
moins souvent, trop souvent. 

504. Remark. When adverbs of quantity and comparison meet toge- 
ther in a sentence, the following is the order which custom has established : 

Si peu Bien peu f Beaucoup trop Tant mieux 

Trop peu Bien plus Beaucoup plus Tant pis 

Tres-peu Bien davantage Beaucoup moins &c. 

505. When bien stands before another adverb, it means very, much, 
&c, as in the preceding and following examples. 

Bien assez, Quite enough. Frapper bien fort, To strike very hard. 
Bien moins, Much less. Bien tard, Very late. 

506. But when it is placed after the adverb, it signifies well; as, 
Jssez bien, Pretty well. Fort bien, Very well. 
Moins bien, Not so well. Jlussi bien, As well. 

t Beaucoup is not, as the English much, susceptible of being modified by any 
adverb preceding; thus, tr&s-beaucoup, trop beaucoup, &c. would be barbarism. 

w p 



170 



SYNTAX OF THE CONJUNCTIONS. 



CHAPTER VII. 



OF THE CONJUNCTIONS. 



507. The conjunction que serves to complete a comparison ; it is 
elliptically used to express a restriction when placed after ne, and it gene- 
rally gives grace, energy, and precision to sentences. 

EXAMPLES. 

r ' VAsie est plus^i A • • i t i 

1 ; , ^ ?! » -Ei r Asia is larger than 

l grander l Eu-<j. £ « 

rope, 3 

" 0?z ne parle que d<Q They talk of no thing 
I Za nouvelle vie- 

toire, 
~Qu'*7 vive, pour Je 
. souhaite qu'/Z 



expressing compari- 
son. 



for nen que 



-je souhaite que 



avE, *> 



— a moms que 

— avant que 

— sans que 

— des que 

— aussitot que 

— s£, or quand 

— sozV que 



— jusqu a ce que 

— pourquoi ? 



Cela ne jinira pas ( 
qu!il ne vienne, \ 



but the new vie 

tory. 
May he live, for 1 

•wish that he may 

live. 
There will be no 

end to it, unless 

he come. 



— combien 



QuVZ fasse le moin-^) If he commits the 
dre exces, il est > least excess, he is 
malade, J ill. 

fQu'il perde, ou o$£iV\ Whether he gains 
gagne son proces, I or loses his law- 
e'est un homme \ suit, he is a ruined 
mine, J man. 

dttendez qu'i 

vienne, 
Que ne se corrige- 1 Why does he not 

t-il ? 5 reform 1 

JMechant qu^7 est, Wicked as he is. 
fQue Dieu est 7 Hotv great is the 
J grand ! 5 Almighty ! 

i Que je hais les me- ? How much I 
L chans ! 5 the wicked ! 



{■ 



ll'lZ? 



Wait till he comes. 



EXERCISE ON THE CONJUNCTIONS. 
We have every thing to fear from his wisdom, even more than from 

encore 

his power. What men style greatness, glory, power, profound 

Ce que art. appeler profond 

policy, is in the eyes of God only misery, weakness, and vanity. 

politique f. a 

May they understand, at last, that without internal ] peace, there 

comprendre, avec soi-meme art. 

is no happiness. May she be as happy as she deserves to be ! 

point de dele 

Never write before you have thoroughly Examined the subject 

que Q. sous toutes ses faces 

which you propose to treat. Let him but hear the least noise, his 
se proposer de traiter. * 



SYNTAX OF THE CONJUNCTIONS. 171 

2 terrified 'imagination presents to him nothing but monsters. Do 
effraye f. * ne que 

not sift this question till I (can be your guide). Do not go 

approfondir ne vous mettre Q. sur la voie. 

out till your brother comes in. Why does he not (take advantage) of 

ne rentrer Q. profiter 

his youth, (in order to) acquire the knowledge he wants 1 

pour connaissance pi. dont avoir besoin. 

508. Another frequent use of the conjunction que is to save the repe- 
tition of co?nme, parceque, puisque, quand, quoi que, si, &c, when to 
phrases beginning with these words, others are added under the same 
regimen, by means of the conjunction et ; as, 

Si Von aimait son pays, et q\Con en If we loved our country, and 
desirdt sinctrement la gloire, on sincerely wished its glory, we 
se conduirait de maniere, &c. should act so as &c. 

EXERCISE. 
Full as he was of his prejudices, he would not acknowledge 
Rempli H. prejuge, J. convenir de 

(any thing). Full 2 of 3 self-love '(as he is), expect nothing good 

rien. Petri 

(from him). 'How 6 beautiful £ is 2 that Cultivated 2 nature ! How, by 
en par 

the care of man, is it brilliantly and richly adorned ! Had 

f. pompeusement orne" ! si * de 

profound philosophers presided at the formation of languages, and 

G. a art. langue, *que. 

had they carefully examined the elements of speech, not only in 

avec soin T. m. art. discours, non 

their relations (to one another), but also in themselves, it is not 

entr'eux encore en m. 

(to be doubted), that languages would present principles more 

douteux art. ne offrir S. 

simple, and, at the same time, more luminous. 



Government of Conjunctions, 

509. The conjunctions which unite sentences to one another are fol- 
lowed either by the infinitive, the indicative, or the subjunctive. 

510. Those which are followed by an infinitive are, 

511. 1st. — Such as are distinguished from prepositions only by being 
followed by a verb ; as, 

II faut se reposer apres avoir One ought to rest after having 
travaille, labored. 

512. 2d. — Those which have the preposition de after them; as, 

II travaille afin de votes surpasser, He works that he may surpass you. 

EXERCISE ON THE GOVERNMENT OF CONJUNCTIONS. 

They were going to spend (a few) days in town, only that 
ne * passer quelques a art. que pour 






172 SYNTAX OF THE CONJUNCTIONS. 

they might return with more pleasure to their charming solitude. 

* * se retr oaver A. dans 

Many persons work only (in order to) acquire consideration and riches, 

ne que afin de 
but the 2 honest, s humane 'man spends ' (so much) time in 
de Men sensible ne employer tant de a 

study, only to be useful to his fellow-creatures. I reveal to you 
art. que pour semblables. devoiler 

the plot which your enemies have concerted in secret, 

trame f. ourdir art. tenebres f. pi. 

in order to warn you against their artifices. 
premunir 

513. Conjunctions that govern the indicative 

bien attendu que, autant que, puisque, peut-etre que, 

a condition que, non plus que, lorsque, comme, 

a la charge que, outre que, pendant que, comme si, 

de me me que, parce que, tandis que, quand, 

ainsi que, attendu que, durant que, pourquoi, 

aussi bien que, vu que, tant que, comment, &c. 

514. They are followed by the indicative, because the principal sen- 
tence, which they unite with that which is incidental, expresses the 
affirmation in a direct, positive, and independent manner. 

515. The use of the six following conjunctions, 

si non que, de sorte que, tellement que, 

si ce n'est que, en sorte que, de maniere que, 

varies according to the meaning expressed by the principal sentence. 

EXAMPLE OF THE INDICATIVE. EXAMPLE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Je ne lux ai repondu autre chose Je ne veux autre chose, si non 

si non que f avals execute ses que vous travailliez avec plus 

ordres, d'ardeur, 

I made him no other answer but I desire nothing else but that you 

that I had executed his orders. would study with greater ardor. 

516. The indicative is required in the first sentence by the verb fai 
repondu expressing a positive affirmation, and the subjunctive in the 
second, because je veux expresses but a desire. 

EXERCISE. 
When you have a more ^extensive 'knowledge of geometr}' and 

L. art. de 

algebra, I shall give you (a few) lessons in astronomy and 
art. algebre f. quelques de de 

optics. Form your mind, heart, and taste while you are still 
optique. voire votre encore 

young. Do not keep truth a prisoner, though you should (draw 

retenir art. * captive, quand devoir IN. s'aU 

upon you) a cloud of enemies. I will give you this fine picture upon 
tirer nuiei. tableau m. a 

condition that you keep it as a testimony of my friendship. 
conserver L, ttmoignage rrj, 



PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES. 173 

517. The conjunctions which govern the subjunctive are, 

soit que, jusqu'a ce que, suppose que, afin que, 

sans que, encore que, au cas que, de peur que, 

pour que, a moins que, avant que, de crainte que, 

quoique, pourvu que, non pas que, &c. &c. 

518. They require the subjunctive, as they always imply doubt, desire, 
ignorance. 

EXERCISE. 
You know too well the value of time, to 2 make ] it 

connaitre pvix m. art. pour que etre Q. il 

necessary to tell you to (make a good use of) it. Study only great 

de de bien employer art. 

models, lest those which are but middling should spoil your 

de peur que * mediocre ne gdter Q. 

taste before it be entirely formed. I (make not the least doubt) that 

ne douter F. nidlement 
your method will succeed, provided it be well known. Several 

f. ne Q. f. 

phenomena of nature are easy (to be explained), supposing the 

art. a expliquer, 

principle of 2 universal gravitation to be true. 
art. f. * 



PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES ox the NINE PARTS OF SPEECH. 

THE GOOD MOTHER. 

What a fine morning! said the amiable Charlotte to her brother 
matinee f. J. 
George. Come, let us go into the garden, and enjoy the 2 magnificent 
sing. « * A. de 

1 sight of 2 rich s and 4 abundant 'nature. We will gather there 
spectacle m. line fertile cueillir y 

the 2 freshest 3 and 4 sweetest 'flowers. We will make a nosegay, which 

frais odorantf. bouquet m. 

we will offer to mamma. You know she loves flowers. This 

maman. sing, savoir que art. 

attention will give her pleasure. Ah ! brother, it will obtain us a 

faire lui mon f. valoir 

smile, a caress, perhaps even a kiss. Ah ! sister, replied 

sourirem. f. baiserm. ma repondreS. 

George, your proposal delights me ; let us run, let us fly, that 

sing, projet enchanter courir, voter, ajin de 

we may offer her (when she rises) this tribute of our gratitude and 
* * A. lui a son lever hommage de 

our love. Full of this idea, Charlotte and George hastened 

Plein se hater J. de se rendre 

into the garden. Charlotte gathered violets, jessamine, and (young 

J. des bote- 

rose-buds), which (had but just begun) to open their 2 purple 

tons de rose, ne commencer H. que * entr'ouvrir depourpre 

! cups, while George prepared 2 green 'sprigs of myrtle and thyme* 

calice, H. verdoyant jet m. myrte thym, 

p2 



174 PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES. 

intended to support the flowers. ] Never 5 had 2 these s amiable 4 children 
destine soutenir H. 

6 worked with (so much) zeal and ardor. Satisfaction and pleasure 
travailler tant de zile art. f. art. 

beamed in all their features, sparkled in their eyes, and added still 
etrepeintH. trait m. petiller H. 

to their beauty. 

While they (were employing themselves) (in this manner), their 
s'occuper H. ainsi 

mother, who had seen them in the garden, came to join them. 

J. joindre 

(As soon as) they perceived her, they flew to her, and said : Ah ! 

Des que J. J. elle, lui J. 

mamma, how 3 glad 'we 2 are to see you ! how (impatient we were) 

que aise de que il tardait a notre impatience 

(for) this pleasure ! In the pleasing expectation (of it) we were preparing 
d 1 avoir ce doux attente f. * 

this nosegay for you. What satisfaction should we have had in 

f. ne pas a 

presenting it to you ! Look at these rose-buds, these violets, this jessamine, 

offrir Voir * 

this myrtle, and this thyme. Well, we designed them for you. 

Eh ! bieiiy destiner H. ~~ 
These flowers, coming from us, would have been dear to you. When 

cher En 

you wore them, you would have said, My children were thinking of 

* porter C. s'occuper 

me while I slept. I am always as present to their minds as to their 

dormir H. sing. 

hearts. They love me, and it is by giving me every day new proofs 
sing. ce en de preuvef. 

of their affection that they acknowledge the care I have taken 

reconnaitre soin m. pi. que 

of them in their childhood, and all the marks of tenderness I 

que 
(am unceasingly) giving them. 
ne cesser F. de A. leur. 

My dear children, replied the mother, embracing them, how 
repondre J. en embrasser quel 

charming you render all my days ! your gratitude, your tenderness, 
charme repandre sur 

your attention to me, make me forget my former misfortunes, and 
pi. pour outlier ancien malheur m. 

yield my heart again to the soft impressions of pleasure. May 
rouvrir * f. art. JPouvoirQ. 

Heaven continue to bless my labor ! May it be your guide and 
art. continuer de soin pi. JPouvoir 

your support in the career which (will soon be opened) to you ! 

soutien carritre f. alter F. s'ouvrir devant 

may it complete its kindness by preserving you from the dangers 

mettre le comble a bienfait\>\. en garantir de 

to which you (cannot fail) to be soon exposed ! Alas ! I shudder 
ne pas tarder L. * fre'mir 



PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES. 175 

(at them) beforehand, my dear children ; the moment is come when you 

en (Tavance ou 

must enter the world. Your persons, your birth, and your 
devoir dans figure sing. naissance, 

fortune call you there, and ensure you a distinguished 'rank (in it). 

appeler y assurer m. y 

I cannot always be your guide. Young and inexperienced, you will 

L. sans experience, allerT. 

(find yourselves) surrounded by every kind of temptation. 

se trouver A. entoure sorle f. seduction. 

(Every thing), even vice, (presents itself ) there under an ^agreeable 

Tout j 'usque a art. m. s'offrirY. y sous * 

'form, and almost always in the shape of pleasure, which has (so many) 
pi. sous image art. tant de 

attractions for youth. They will try to mislead you, to 

attrait f. art. jeunesse f. chercher egarer 

corrupt you ; they (will make use of) artifice, raillery, and even 
employer art. art. meme 

ridicule, and, if necessary, they will assume even the mask 

il est . prendre jusque a masque m. 

of virtue. If you (abandon yourselves) to first impressions, you 

art. se laisser Y. alter 

are lost. The poison of example (will insinuate itself) into your 

art. se glisser L. 

hearts, will corrupt the innocence and purity (of them), and will substitute 

alter er en, 

2 violent ] passions for the mild affections which have hitherto formed 
declarant f. a doux faire 

your happiness. m 

Do not imagine, my dear children, that in placing before your eyes a 

croire en mettre sous 

picture of the dangers of the world, my intention is to prohibit 
le tableau m. Q de inter dire 

you every kind, of pleasure. (God forbid) ! Pleasure is necessary 

espece f. a JDieu ne plaise ! art. 

to man ; without it, our existence would be dreadful ; (and therefore) 
art. hoi, afifreux ; aussi 

Providence, ever attentive to our wants, has multiplied the 

art. f. besoin, -t-elle 

sources of it, both in and out of ourselves. But, in tasting the 

en nous nous. en go liter 

pleasures of the world, never (abandon yourselves) (to them). Take 

se livrer F. y Avoir 

care that they do not govern you ; know how to quit them the 

dominer s avoir * * ■ de 

moment they have acquired (too much) sway over you. It is the 

que prendre L. trop de empire Ce 

only way to enjoy with delight that 2 exquisite 'pleasure which we 

moyen de volupte de delicieux 

can only find in ourselves, and which has its source in an 2 upright "and 
en dans droit 

Ah ! why can I not give you all my experience? 
f. que 



176 PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES. 

Why can you not, like me, read the depths of the heart 1 With 

dans abime sing. pi. 

what astonishment would you often see chagrin, agitation, and 

art. m. art. 
trouble, disguised under the appearance of joy and tranquillity ; 
art. m. de guise sous apparence pi. art. du calme ; 

hatred and envy concealed under the air of confidence and 
art. f. art. f. / cache art. confiance f. de 

friendship ; indifference and selfishness affecting the most lively 
la f. art. egoisme vif 

interest; 2 the most dreadful and perfidious 'plots contrived deliber- 

trame f. ourdi de sang 
ately in the dark ; in a word, 2 the most odious ' vices endea- 
froidet tenebresf.ip]. en art. s'ef- 

voring to show themselves under the features of 2 (their opposite) 
forcer de traits qui leur sont oppose 

'virtues ! In the world, there is but one (moving principle) ; 
art. ne que seul mobile m. 

that is 2 self- 'interest. (To that, every) action refers, 

ce art. personnel Cest a lui que toutes art. pi. se rapporter 

every thing tends to that as to its end. I know very well, my dear 

ltd fin f. s avoir 

children, that your hearts will not be infected by this vice. The senti- 

de 
ments of Universal 'benevolence with which I (have always) 

bienveillance * ne point cesser G. de 

inspired you, and of which I have seen you give (so many) proofs, 
A. tant de preuve, 

(remove already every fear I might have) upon that subject : but will you 

me rassurent d'avance sur point m. 

not yield to other vices not less dangerous 1 Cruel idea ! terrible 
de non f. affreux 

uncertainty ! If this misfortune were to happen, ah ! my dear children, 

f. * * arriver, H. 

instead of being the joy and consolation of my life, you would be the 

art. f. 

torment, the shame, and the disgrace (of it). You would poison 

honte f. opprobre en, empoisonner 

my days, and you would plunge a dagger into the 2 very 'bosom which 

porter * art. mortf. meme sein.ta. 

gave you life. But whither is my tenderness for you hurrying me? 

art. oil emporter F. 

No, my children ; no, I have nothing to fear ; you love me (too much) to 
Non, trop pour 

wish to afflict me so cruelly ; and I shall have the pleasure (as long as) 
vouloir * tant que 

I live of seeing you walk in the ways of honor and virtue. 

L. A. marcher sentier art. pr. art. 



( 177 ) 

PART III. 



IDIOMS; 



WORDS CONSIDERED IN THEIR PARTICULAR RULES. 



CHAPTER I. 
OF THE SUBSTANTIVE. 



519. The substantive performs three functions in language, 
that of the subject, the regimen, and the apostrophe. 

520. The substantive is the subject whenever it is that of 
which something is affirmed. When we say Voiseau vole, 
the bird flies ; le lion ne vole pas, the lion does not fly ; the 
substantives oiseau and lion are subjects ; because it is affirmed 
of the first that it flies, and of the second that it does not fly. 

521. It is to the substantive as the subject that every thing 
relates in a sentence. In the following, tin homme juste et 
ferine n' 'est ebranle, ni par les clameurs cVune populace 
injuste, ni par les menaces oVun fier tyran; quand meme le 
monde brise s'ecr outer ait, il en serait frappe, mais non pas 
emu, the adjectives juste smdferme modify the subject homme, 
and all the rest modify un homme juste etferme. 

EXERCISE ON THE SUBSTANTIVE. 

1. A Hm>-who is inaccessible to men is inaccessible to truth also, and 
passes his life in a ferocious, inhuman grandeur : as he is continually 
afraid of being deceived, he always unavoidably is, and deserves to be so ; 
besides, he is at the mercy of slanderers and tale-bearers — a base, malicious 
tribe, who feed on venom, and invent mischief, rather than cease to injure. 

2. The good which a man does, is never lost; if men forget it, God 
remembers and rewards it. 



(1.) Is inaccessible also, Test aussi— ; ferocious, sauv age— inhuman, et farouche — as 
he is afraid, craisnant— is. Test — to be so, de l'etre— besides, de plus — tale-bearers, 
rapporteur — tribe, nation— feed upon, se nourrir de — mischief, mal — to injure, denuire. 

(2.) Good, bien — a man, on — remember, s'en souvenir. 

522. The substantive is the regimen, when governed either 



178 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE SUBSTANTIVE. 

by another substantive, by an adjective, by a verb, or by a 
preposition ; as, 

La loi de Dieu, The law of God. 

Utile a Vhomme, Useful to man. 

Aimer son pro chain, To love one's neighbor. 

Chez son pere, At his father's. 

523. In French, a substantive cannot be governed by an- 
other substantive but by the help of a preposition ; such as de — 
as, la difficult^ de V ent reprise, the difficulty of the undertaking ; 
or a ox pour — as, V abandon a ses passions, the giving way to 
one's passions ; le gout pour le plaisir, the love of pleasure. 
224. General Rule. When two substantives are found 
together — the one governing, the other governed — the former 
is generally placed first. 

EXAMPLE. 
La beaute des sentimens, la violence The beauty of sentiments, the vio- 
des passions, la grandeur des lence of passions, the grandeur 
e^enemensetlessuccesmiraculeux of events, and the prodigious 
des grandes epees des heros, tout successes of the huge swords of 
cela m? entr^aljie comme une petite heroes, all these transport me 
Jille. — Sevigne. like a little girl. 

525. Remark. This order is not followed — 1. When, in 
English, two substantives are joined by an s and an apostrophe 
placed after the first — thus, 's; as, the king's palace — that is, 
the palate of the king — le palais du roi. 2. When the two 
substantives form a compound word ; as, silk-stockings — that 
is, stockings of silk — bas de soie, 

EXERCISE. 

1 . The silence of the night, the calmness of the sea, the trembling light of 
the moon diffused over the surface of the water, and the dim azure of the sky 
bespangled with glittering stars, served to heighten the beauty of the scene. 

2. Nothing was heard but the -warbling of birds, or the soft breath of 
the zephyrs sporting in the branches of the trees, or the murmurs of a 
lucid rill falling from the rocks, or the songs of the young swains who 
attended Apollo. 

3. A smiling boy was, at the same time, caressing a lap-dog, which is 
his mother's favorite, because it pleases the child. 

4. There are several gold and silver mines in this beautiful country 
but the inhabitants, simple, and happy in their simplicity, do not even 
deign to* reckon gold and silver among their riches. 

(1.) Trembling, tremblant — diffused, repandu— <Zm, sombre — bespangled, parseme 
— with, de— heighten, rehausser — scene, spectacle. 

(2.) Nothing but, on ne plus que — breath, haleine — sporting (which sported), qui 
se jouer H. — branches, rameaux— lucid rill, eau cla'ne— falling, (which fell) — swains, 
bergers — attended, suivre H. 

(3.) Smiling boy, enfant d'un air riant— was caressing, caresser— lap-dog, bichon— 
pleases, amuser. 

* In the following exercises, when an asterisk [*] is put after an English word, 
it shows that that word is not to be expressed in French. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ARTICLE. 179 

526. The substantive is an apostrophe whenever it is the 
object addressed ; as, Rois, peuples, terre, mer, et vous, cieux 
ecoutez-moi! — Kings, nations, earth, sea and you heaven, 
listen to me ! In this sentence, the substantives wis, peuples, 
terre, mer, and cieux, form an apostrophe. 

527. N. B. — It is only in highly oratorical language that the 
address is thus directed to inanimate or absent objects. 

EXAMPLE OF A BEAUTIFUL APOSTROPHE. 
O, Hippias ! Hippias ! I shall never see thee again ! O, my dear Hip- 
pias ! it is I, cruel and void of compassion, who taught thee to despise 
death. Cruel gods ! ye prolonged my life only that I might see the death 
of Hippias ! O, my dear child, whom I had brought up with so much 
care, I shall see thee no more. O, dear shade, summon me to the banks 
of the Styx ; the light grows hateful to me ; it is thou only, my dear 
Hippias, whom I wish to see again. Hippias, Hippias ! O, my dear Hip- 
pias ! I live but to pay the last duty to thy ashes. — Fenelon, 

Never, ne plus — void of compassion, moi impitoyable — taught, apprendre— pro- 
longed, prolonger — only that I might, pour me faire — brought up, nourrir I. — with so 
much care, et qui me couter I. tant de soins — shade, ombre — summon, appeler — to, 
sur — banks, rive — grows hateful, etre odieux — Hive but to, ne vivre encore que pour 
—pay, rendre— ashes, cendre. 



CHAPTER II. 
OF THE ARTICLE. 



528. General Principle. — The article is to be used before 
all substantives common, taken in a determinate sense, unless 
there be another word performing the same office ; but it is 
not to be used before those that are taken in an indeter- 
minate sense 



Cases in which the Article is to be used. 

529. Rule I. — The article necessarily accompanies all 
substantives common, which denote a whole species of things 
or determinate things. 

EXAMPLES. 

L'homme se repait trop souvent de Man too often feeds on chimeras. 

chimeres, 

Les hommes a imagination sont ton- Men of fanciful dispositions are 

jours malheureux, always unhappy. 

L'homme dont vous parlez est trts- The man you speak of is very 

instruit, learned. 



180 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ARTICLE. 

530. In the first example, the word homme is taken in its 
fullest sense; it denotes a collective universality. In the 
second, les hommes a imagination denotes a whole particular 
class. In the third, V homme denotes but one individual, being 
restricted by the incidental proposition dont vous parlez. 

531. Remark. — In English, the article is not used before 
substantives taken in a general sense ; as, Men of genius, 
women of sound understanding. 

EXERCISE ON THE ARTICLE. 

1. The moment elegance, the most visible image of fine taste, appears, 
it is universally admired : men differ respecting the other constituent parts 
of beauty, but they all unite without hesitation in acknowledging the 
power of elegance. 

2. Men of superior genius, while they* see the rest of mankind pain- 
fully* struggling to comprehend obvious truths, glance themselves* 
through* the most remote consequences, like lightning through a track 
that cannot be measured. 

3. The man ivho lives under an habitual sense of the divine presence, 
preserves a perpetual cheerfulness of temper, and enjoys every moment 
the satisfaction of thinking himself* in company with the dearest and 
best of friends. 



(1.) The moment, du moment que— fine, delicat — appears, se montrer — is, elle est— 
respecting-, sur— constituent, (which constitute) — hesitation, hesiter — in, pour. 

(2.) While, tandis que — struggling, se tourmenter — obvious, qui s'offrent d'elle- 
memes — glance, ils penetrent en un instant. — lightning, foudre, f. — through, traverse 
— track, espace — that, qu'on — be measured, mesurer. 

(3.) Under, dans — sense, conviction — preserves, conserver — perpetual, constant — 
cheerfulness, gaiete — temper, caractere — enjoys, jouir de — of thinking, se croire — in, 
dans la— with, de. 

532. Rule II. — The article is put before substantives em- 
ployed in the sense of an extract, or denoting only a part of 
a species ; but it is omitted if they be preceded by an adjec* 
tive or a word of quantity. 

EXAMPLES. 

Du pain et de l'eau me feraient Some bread and water would please 

plaisir, me. 

Je vis hier des savans qui ne pen- I yesterday saw some learned men, 

sent pas comme vous, who do not think as you do. 

Voila de beaux tableaux, There are beautiful pictures. 

.Vachetai hier beaucoup de livres, I bought yesterday many books. 

Que de livres fachetai hier ! How many books I bought yesterday ! 

533. Remark.— Among the words of quantity must be 
reckoned plus, moins, pas, point, and jamais. 

EXAMPLES. 

Iln'y eut jamais plus de lumieres. There never was more learning. 

H y a moins d'habitans a Paris There are fewer inhabitants in Paris 

qu'a Londres, than in London. 

Je ne manque pas d'amie, I do not want for friends. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ARTICLE* 181 

534. Exceptions. — Bien is the onty word of quantity 
which is followed by the article. 

EXAMPLES. 

II a bien de V esprit, He has a great deal of wit. 

Elle a bien de la grace, She is very graceful. 

535. Remark. — The sense of extract is marked in English 
by the word some or any, either expressed or understood, 
which answers to quelques, a particular adjective, and conse- 
quently to da, de la, de V , des, which are elegantly used 
instead of quelque, quelques, &c. 

536. These expressions — des petit s-maitres, des petits- 
pates, &c. — are not exceptions to this rule ; because, in cases 
of this kind, the substantives are so united with the adjectives 
as to form but one and the same word. We should likewise 
say, le propre des belles actions, les sentimens des anciens 
philosophes, &c. ; because, in expressions of this kind, the 
substantives are taken in a general sense. 

EXERCISE. 

1. We could not cast our eyes on either shore without seeing opulent 
cities, country hoiises agreeably situated, lands yearly covered with a golden 
harvest, meadows abounding in flocks and herds, husbandmen bending 
under the weight of the fruits, and shepherds who made the echoes around 
them repeat the sweet sounds of their pipes and flutes. 

2. Provence and Languedoc produce oranges, lemons, figs, olives, 
almonds, chestnuts, peaches, apricots, and grapes, of an uncommon 
sweetness. 

3. The man who has never seen this pure light is as* blind* as* one* 
who is born blind : he dies without having seen any thing ; at most, he 
perceives nothing but glimmering and false lights, vain shadows and 
phantoms that have no reality. 

4. Among the Romans, those who were convicted of having used illicit 
or unworthy means to obtain an employ, were excluded from it for ever. 

5. Those who govern are like the celestial bodies, which have great 
splendor and no rest, 

6. What beauty, sweetness, modesty, and, at the same time, what 
nobleness and greatness of soul ! 

7. Themistocles, in order to ruin Aristides, made use of many artifices, 
which would have covered him with infamy in the eyes of posterity, had not 
the eminent services which he rendered his country blotted out that stain. 



(1 ) Could, pouvoir, H. — our, les— -either, les deux — seeing, apercevoir, A. — yearly, 
tous les ans — covered with, qui se couvreut de — abounding in, remplis de— flocks and 
herds, troupeau — bending, qui etaient accables— weight, poids — shepherds, bergers — 
pipes, chalumeau — the echoes, aux echos — around them, d'alentour. 

(3.) Who is born Mind, aveugle ne — zoithout having, n'avoir jamais, C. — any thing, 
rieu — at most, tout au plus— perceives nothing but, apercevoir ne que — glimmering, 
sombre — lights, lueur — no reality, rien de reel. 

(4.) Used, employer — illicit or unworthy means, moyen illicite ou voie indigne, pi. 
were, H.—from it, en. 

(5.) Great, beaucoup de — splendor, eclat — no rest (that have no rest), repos. 

(6.) What, que de. (7.) Ruin, perdre — made use of many, employer J. bien — 

artifices, manoeuvres — with, de — infamy^ opprobre — in, a — had, si — rendered, G. a — 
blotted out, eflacer, T. — stain, tache. 

Q 



1 82 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ARTICLE. 

8. The consequences of great passions are blindness of mind and 
depravity of heart. 

9. Noblemen should never forget that their high birth imposes great 
duties on* them. 



(9.) Noblemen, gentilhomme— should, devoir, F. 

537. Rule III. — The article is put before proper names of 
countries, regions, rivers, winds, and mountains. 

EXAMPLES. 

La France a les Pyrenees et la France is bounded on the south by 
JSlediterranee an sud, la Suisse the Pyrenees and the Mediterra- 
et la Savoie a Vest, les Pays- nean, on the east by Switzerland 
Bas au nord, et V ocean a and Savoy, on the north by the 
Vouest, Netherlands, and on the west by 

the ocean. 

La Tamise, le Rhone, Vaquilon, The Thames, the Rhone, the north 
les Alpes, le Cantal, wind, the Alps, the Cantal. 

538. Remark. — By apposition we find the words le mont 
Parnasse, le mont Valerien, &c, lefleuve Don, &c. But we 
should say, la montagne de Tarare, &c, la riviere de Seine, 
&c, though never lefleuve du Rhone, but simply le Rhone, 

EXERCISE. 

1. Europe is bounded on the north by the Frozen Ocean; on the 
south by the Mediterranean Sea, which separates it from Africa ; on the 
east by the continent of Asia ; on the west by the Atlantic Ocean. It 
contains the following states : — on the north, Norway, Sweden, Den- 
mark, and Russia ; in the middle, Poland, Prussia, Germany, the 
United Provinces, the Netherlands, France, Switzerland, Bohemia, 
Hungary, the British Isles; on the south, Spain, Portugal, Italy, 
Turkey in Europe. 

2. The principal rivers in Europe are, the Wolga, the Don or Tana'is, 
and the Boristhenes or Nieper, in Muscovy ; the Danube, the Rhine, 
and the Elbe, in Germany ; the Vistula or Wezel, in Poland ; the Loire, 
the Seine, the Rhone, and the Garonne, in France ; the Ebro, the Tagus, 
and the Douro, in Spain ; the Po, in Italy ; the Thames and the Severn, 
in England ; and the Shannon, in Ireland. 

3. The principal mountains in Europe are, the Daarne Fields, between 
Norway and Sweden ; Mount Crapel, between Poland and Hungary ; 
the Pyrenean Mountains, between France and Spain ; the Alps, which 
divide France and Germany from Italy. 

4. The bleak north wind never blows here, and the heat of summer is 
tempered by the cooling zephyrs which arrive to refresh the air towards 
the middle of the day. 

(1.) Bounded, borne — on, 'a— frozen ocean, mer glaciale, f. — south, sud or midi — 
Mediterranean sea, Mediterranee, f.— cast, est or orient — west, ouest or Occident — 
British isles, iles Britanniques — Turkey in, Tnrquie de. 

(2.) Muscovy, Moscovie— Rhine, Rhin, m. — Fistula, Vistule, f. — Loire, f — Seine, f. 

Rhone, m — Garonne, f.—Ebro, Ebre— Tagus, Tage, m.— Thames, Tamise, f. — 
Severn, Saverne, f. 

(3.) Pyrenean Mountains, Pyrenees. 

(4 ) Bleak, rigoureux— north wind, aquilon— heat, ardeur— cooling, rafraichissant 
— arrive, venir — to refresh, adoucir 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ARTICLE. 183 

539. Exceptions. — The article is not used before the 
names of countries, 

540. 1, When those countries have the names of their 
capitals ; as, Naples est un pays delicieux, Naples is a de- 
lightful country. 

541. 2, When these are governed by the preposition en; 
as, il est en France, he is in France ; il est en Espagne, he 
is in Spain. 

542. 3, When those names are governed by some preceding 
noun, and have the sense of an adjective ; as, vins de France, 
French wines ; noblesse d'Angleterre, the English nobility. 

543. 4, When speaking of those countries as of places we 
come from ; as, je viens de France, I come from France ; 
f 'arrive d'ltalie, I am just arrived from Italy. However, when 
speaking of the four parts of the world, the present practice 
favors the use of the article ; as, je viens de V Amerique, f ar- 
rive de VAsie. 

EXERCISE. 

1 . Naples may be called a paradise, from its beauty and fertility. 2 (From 
this country) ^some suppose) Virgil took the model of the Elysian Fields. 

2. I have been a* prisoner in Egypt, as a* Phoenician : under that 
name I have long suffered, and under that name I have been set at liberty. 

3. He has received French and Spanish wines, Italian silks, Provence 
oil, and English wool. 

4. We set sail from Holland for the Cape of Good Hope. 

5. I was but just arrived from Russia when I had the misfortune to 
lose my father. 

6. I had set off from America when my brother arrived there. 

(1.) From, a cause de—from this country, que c'est la ou — some suppose, quelques 
personnes penser. 
(2 ) Prisoner, captif— under that name, c'est sous ce nom que. 
(4.) Set sail, partir— /or, pour se rendre. 
(5.) I was but just, ne faire que de. 
(6) Set off, partir— there, y. 

544. The article is also used before the names of countries, 
either distant or little known ; as, la Chine, China ; le Japon, 
Japan ; le Mexique, Mexico ; and before those which have 
been formed from common nouns ; as, le Havre, le Perche, 
la Fleche, &c. 

545. Remark. — In English the article is generally omitted 
before the names of countries. 



Cases in which the Article is not used. 

546. Rule I. — The article is omitted before nouns common 
when, in using them, nothing is said as to the extent of their 
signification. 



»* 



184 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ARTICLE. 

EXAMPLES. 

Le sage n'a ni amour, ni haine, The wise man has neither love nor hatred. 

lis ont renverse religion, morale, They have overturned religion, morality, 
gouvernement, sciences, beaux- government, sciences, fine arts, in a 
arts, en un mot, tout ce qui fait word, every thing which constitutes 
la gloire et la force d\in Etat, the glory and strength of a state. 

547. Hence the article is not employed before nouns, 
48. 1, When they are in the form of a title or an address. 
EXAMPLES. 
Preface, Preface. II demeure He lives in 

Livre premier, Book the first. Hue Piccadilly, Piccadilly, 

Chapitre dix, Chapter the tenth. Quartier St. James, St. James's. 

549. 2, When they are governed by the preposition en. 

EXAMPLES. 
Regarder enpitie, To look with pity. Vivre en roi, To live as a king. 

550. 3, When they are joined to the verbs avoir or fair e, 
with which they form only one idea. 

EXAMPLES. 
Avoir peur, To be afraid. Faire pitie, To excite pity. 

551. 4, When they are used, as an apostrophe or interjection. 

EXAMPLE. 

Courage, soldats, tenez ferme, Courage, soldiers, stand firm. 

552. 5, When they serve to qualify a noun or pronoun. 

EXAMPLES. 

II est quelquefois plus qiChomme, He is sometimes more than man. 
Son Altesse Roy ale le Due d'York, His Royal Highness the Duke of 
prince du sang, &c. York, prince of the blood. 

553. 6, The article is not put before the substantive begin- 
ning an incidental sentence, which is opposed to what has 
been said. 

EXAMPLE. 
Toils les peuples de la terre ont unc All the nations of the earth have 
idee plus oumoins developpee d'un an idea more or less clear of 
Etre-Supreme ; preuve evidente a Supreme Being ; an evident 
que le peche originel iiHa pas proof that original sin has not to- 
tout-afait obscurci Ventendement, tally obscured the understanding. 

554. 7, When they are governed by the words genre> 
espece, sorte, or terms of this kind. 

EXAMPLES. 

Sorte deficit, A sort of fruit. 

Genre tfowvrage, A kind of work. 

Monceau $ argent, A heap of money. 

Bande de voleurs, A band of robbers, 

Pile de livres, A pile of books. 

Meute de chiens, A pack of dogs, 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ARTICLE 185 

EXERCISE. 

1. The highways are bordered with laurels, pomegranates, jessamines, 
and other trees, which* are* always green, and always in bloom. The 
mountains are covered with flocks, which yield a fine wool, in great 
request among all the known nations (of the world).* 

2. The fleets of Solomon, under the conduct of the Phoenicians, made 
frequent voyages to the land of Ophir and Tharsis (of the kingdom of 
Sophala, in Ethiopia), whence they returned at the end of three years, 
laden with gold, silver, ivory, precious stones, and other kinds of 
merchandise. 

3. 2 ( Costly furniture) ] (is not allowed there), nor magnificent attire, 
nor sumptuous feasts, nor gilded palaces. 

4. We contemplated with pleasure the extensive fields covered with 
yellow ears of corn, the* rich gifts of bounteous Ceres. 

5. He was in a kind of ecstacy when he perceived us. 

6. In the most corrupt age, he lived and died a wise man* 

7. Are you surprised that the worthiest men are but men, and betray 
remains of the weakness of humanity, amid the innumerable snares and 
difficulties which* are* inseparable from royalty 1 

8. He excited our pity when we saw him after his disgrace. 

9. Hear then, O nations full of valor ! and you, O chiefs, so wise and 
so united ! hear what I have* to* offer to you. 

10. Out of this cavern issued, from time to time, a black thick smoke, 
which made a sort of night at mid-day. 







(J.) Highways, chemin — with, de— pomegranates, grenadier— in bloom, fleuri — 
yield, fournir — wool, laine, pi. — in great request, recherche — among, de. 

(2.) End, bout— laden, charge. 

(3.) Is not allowed there, on n'y souffre ni— furniture, meuble — costly, precieux — 
attire, ornement— feasts, repas. 

(4.) Extensive, vaste— fields, campagne — ears, epi — bounteous, fecond, f. 

(5.) In a kind of, comme en. 

(6 ) Age, siecle. 

(7.) That, de ce que— worthy, estimable— but, encore— betray, montrer— remains, 
reste — difficulties, embarras. 

(8.) He excited our pity, il nous fit pitie. 

(9.) Hear, ecouter. 
(10.) Out of, de — issued, sortir— thick, et epais — mid-day, milieu du jour. 

555. Rule II. — The article is not used either before nouns 
preceded by the pronominal adjectives ?non, ton, son, notre, 
votre, four, ce, nul, aucun, chaque, tout (used for chaque), 
certain, plusieurs, tel, or before those which are preceded by 
a cardinal number without any relation whatever. 

EXAMPLES. 

Nos moeurs mettent le prix a nos Our manners fix the value of our 

richesses, riches. 

Toute nation a ses lots, Each nation has its laws. 

Cent ignorans doivent-ils Vemporter Are a hundred blockheads to be 

sur un homme instruit ? preferred to one learned man .? 

EXERCISE. 

1. That good father was happy in his children and his children were 
happy in him. 

Q2 



186 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ARTICLE. 

2. Those imitative sounds are common to all languages, and form, 
as it were, their* real basis. 

3. Every man has his foibles, his moments of ill* humor, even his 
irregularities. 

4. Each plant has virtues peculiar to it, the knowledge of which 
could not but be infinitely useful. 

5. In ail his instructions, he is careful to remember that grammar, 
logic, and rhetoric are three sisters that ought never to be disjoined. 

(2.) Common, fondu— to, dans— and form, as it were, et ils en sont comme la— 
real, fondamentale. 

(4.) Peculiar, qui sont propres— to it, lui— could, N. — not but, ne que. 

(5.) He is careful to remember, il ne point perdre de vue — ought, on devoit — to be 
disjoined, separer. 

556. Rule III. — Proper names of deities, men, animals, 
towns, and particular places, do not take the article. 

EXAMPLES. 

Dieu a cree* le del et la terre, God has made heaven and earth. 

Jupiter etait le premier des dieux, Jupiter was the first of the gods. 

Buctiphale etait le cheval d'Jllex- Bucephalus was Alexander's horse. 

andre, 

Rome est une ville d'une grande Rome is a city of great beauty. 

beaute, 

557. Exceptions. — Proper names, however, take the ar- 
ticle when used in a limited sense. 

EXAMPLES. 

Le Dieu des Chretiens, The God of Christians. 

Le Dieu de paix, The God of peace. 

Le Jupiter d'Homere, Homer's Jupiter. 

Le Bucephale d 1 Alexandre, Alexander's Bucephalus, 

UAncienne Rome, Ancient Rome. 

La Rome moderne, Modern Rome. 

558. N. B. — In imitation of the Italians, the French use 
the article before the names of several painters and poets of 
that nation, by an elliptical mode of expression, the words 
peintre, poete, or seigneur being understood. 

EXERCISE. 

1. Jupiter, son of Saturn and Cybele or Ops, after having expelled 
his father from the throne, divided the paternal* inheritance with his two 
brothers, JYeptune and Pluto. 

2. On a dispute, at a feast of the gods, between Juno, Pallas, and 
Venus, for the pre-eminence of beauty, Jupiter, not being able to bring 
them to an agreement, referred the decision to Paris, a shepherd of Mount 
Ida, with directions that a golden apple should be given to the fairest. 
I J aris assigned to Venus the golden* prize. 

3. God said, let there* be light ; and there* was light. 

(1.) Expelled, chasser— divided, en partager J. — inheritance, heritage. 

(2.) On, dans — at a feast, qu'il y eut a un festin — being able, pouvoir — to bring to 
an agreement, accorder — referred, renvoyer — directions, ordre — that a golden, &c. to 
give a golden apple to-^-assigned, adjuger. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ADJECTIVE. 187 

4. The Apollo di Belvidere and the Venus di Medicis are valuable 
remains of antiquity. 

5. May and September are the two finest months of the year in the 
south of France. 

6. The God of Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob was the only true God. 

(4.) Di Belvidere de Belveder — di, de — valuable, precieux. 
05.) Only, seul. 



CHAPTER III. 
OF THE ADJECTIVE. 



Of the Adjective ivith the Article. 



559. Rule I.— Adjectives used substantively are, like sub- 
stantives common, accompanied by the article, if the occasion 
require it. 

EXAMPLE. 
Les fous inventent les modes, et Fools invent fashions, and wise men 
les sages s'y conforment, conform to them. 

EXERCISE. 

1. Were the learned of antiquity to come to life again, they would be 
much astonished at the extent of our knowledge. 

2. The ignorant have, in a* large stock of presumption, what they want 
in real knowledge, and that is the reason they are admired by fools. 

(1.) Were the, si les — to come again, revenir II.— life, monde— at, de— knowledge, 
connaissance, pi. 

(2.) Large stock, forte dose — they want, il leur manquer — knowledge, science — the 
reason, ce qui fait que — they are, &.C., the fools admire them. 

560. Rule II.— When a noun is accompanied by two ad- 
jectives, expressing opposite qualities, the article must be 
repeated before each adjective. 

EXAMPLES. 
Les vieux et les nouveaux soldats The old and the newly-raised soldiers 

sont remplis d'ardeur, are full of ardor. 

II faut frequenter la bonne com- We ought to frequent good and shun 

pagnie et fuir la mauvaise, bad company. 

561. Remark. — But if those qualities be nearly similar, the 
article is not repeated ; as, Le sage et pieux Fenelon. If 
merely different, it is perhaps better to repeat it; as, Le 
sensible et Vingenieux Fenelon. 

562. N. B. — In French, the substantive must be joined to 
the first adjective, when governed by different words. 



188 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ADJECTIVE. 

EXERCISE. 

1. The ancient and modern writers are not agreed upon that point. 

2. The wise man preserves the same tranquillity of mind in good or 
bad fortune. 

3. The man who is jealous of his reputation frequents good and shuns 
bad company. 

4. Grand and vigorous thoughts are always the offspring of genius. 

(1 ) Writers, auteur — are agreed, s'accorder. 

(2.) The wise man, le sage. 

(3.) Vigorous, fort— offspring, fruit. 

563. Rule III. — The article is used before the adjective 
which is joined to a proper name, either to express its quality, 
or to distinguish the person spoken of from those who might 
bear the same name. 

EXAMPLES. 

Le sublime JSossuet, Le vertueux Fenelon, Le tendre Racine, 

The sublime Bossuet, The virtuous Fenelon. The tender Racine. 

Louis le Gros, Louis le Juste, Louis le Grand, 

Louis the Fat. Louis the Just. Louis the Great. 

564. Remark.— If the adjective which is joined to a proper 
name precede that name, it expresses a quality which may be 
common to many; if it follow, it expresses a distinguishing 
quality. Thus, Le savant Varron, and Varron le savant, do 
not convey the same meaning: in the first example, Varron 
merely obtains the quality of savant ; in the second, Varron 
is distinguished for his learning from all of the same name. 

EXERCISE. 

1. The great Corneille astonishes by beauties of the first order and by 
faults of the worst taste. If the tender Racine does not often rise so high, 
at least, he is always equal, and possesses the art of always interesting 
the heart. 

2. The more we read the fables of the good and artless La Fontaine, 
the more we are convinced they are a book for all ages, and the manual 
of the man of taste. 

3. It was only under the reign of Louis the Just (XIII.), that good 
taste began to show itself in France ; but it was under that of Louis the 
Great that it was carried to perfection. 



(1.) By, par des — order, ordre — is always equal, se soutenir— possesses, avoir. 
(2.) The more we, plus on — artless, simple — are convinced, on se convainc — they 
are, que c'est — a, \e—for, de — manual, manuel. 
(3.) Only, ne que — carried, porter a. 

565. Rule IV. — When a, superlative relative precedes a 
substantive, the article serves for both ; if it follow, the article 
must be repeated before eaen. 

EXAMPLES. 

Les plus habiles gens font quelquefois les plus grandes f antes ; or 
Les gens les plus habiles font quelquefois les f antes les plus grandes, 
The ablest men sometimes commit the grossest blunders. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ADJECTIVE. 189 

EXERCISE. 

1. It has been said of the Telemachus of the virtuous F^nelon, that it 
is the most useful present the muses have made to mankind ; for, could 
the happiness of man be produced by a poem, it would be by that. 

2. The smoothest -waters often conceal the most dangerous gulfs. 

(1.) It has been said, on a dit — present, don que — have made, R. — could, (if the, &c. 
could H.)— be produced by, naitre de — would be, naitre, N. 
(2.) Smoothest, tranquille. ** 






The Place of Adjectives. 

566. Rule I. — Pronominal and numerical adjectives pre- 
cede their substantives as do generally the following sixteen : 
beau, bon, brave, cher, chetif, grand, gros, jeune, mauvais, 
me chant, meilleur, moindre, petit, saint, vieax, and vrai, 
when taken in their literal sense. 

EXAMPLES. 
JMon pere, My father. Plusieurs officiers, Several officers. 

Quel homme, What man. Grand homme, Great man. 

Vieille femtne, Old woman, Six arbres, Six trees. 

Dix guinees, Ten guineas. Che 'tive mine, Mean look. 

567 Exception 1, The pronoun quelconque. 

EXAMPLE. 

D'une maniere quelconque, In whatever manner. 

568. 2, Adjectives of number, joined to proper names, pro- 
nouns, and substantives, as quotations. 

EXAMPLES. 

George Trois, George Third. Chafjifre dix, Chapter tenth. 

Lui dixieme, He the Tenth. JFk^rtrerite, Page the thirtieth. 

569. 3, The above sixteen adjectives, when connected by 
a conjunction w r ith another adjective, which is to be placed 
after the substantive. 

EXAMPLE. 

C'est une femme grande et bienfaite, She is a tall, well-made woman. 

570. Remark. — In English, two or even several adjectives 
may qualify a substantive, without a conjunction : but in 
French, this is generally required ; as, c' 'est un homme aimable 
et poli, he is an amiable, well-behaved man; except when 
custom allows the substantives to be placed between two ad- 
jectives ; as, e'est an grand homme sec, he is a tall, thin man. 

EXERCISE ON THE PLACE OF ADJECTIVES. 

1 . There have been ages when a great man was a sort of prodigy, 
produced by a mistake of nature. 

2. In almost all nations, the great geniuses that have adorned them 
were contemporaries. 



(1.) 



Ages, Jes siecles — when, ou — produced, enfanter. 
In, chez— nations, peuple — adorned, illustrer, G. 



190 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ADJECTIVE. 

3. Young people, says Horace, are supple to the enticements of vice, 
lavish, presumptuous, and equally impetuous and light in their passions ; 
old people, on the contrary, are covetous, dilatory, timid, ever alarmed 
about the future, always complaining, hard to please, panegyrists of times 
past, censors of the present, and great givers of advice. 

4. What man was ever satisfied with his condition and dissatisfied 
with his abilities 1 

5. Thirty chambers, which have a communication one with another, 
and each of them an iron door, with six huge bolts, are the places where , 
he shuts himself up. 

(3.) People, gens — supple, souple — lavish, prodigue — impetuous, vif— old, f. pi. (the 
following adjectives in the pi.) — covetous, avare — dilatory, temporiseur — about, sur 
— complaining, plaintif — hard, difficile — please, contenter — times, sing. 

(4.) Dissatisfied, mecontent — abilities, esprit. 

(5.) Have a communication, communiquer — each of them, dont chacun avoir — huge, 
gros— bolts, verrou— places, lieu, sing. — shuts himself, se renfermer. 

571. Rule II. — Adjectives formed from the participle pre- 
sent of verbs, are generally placed after the substantive : 
ouvrage divertissant, entertaining work ; and from the par- 
ticiple past, always : figure arrondie, round figure ; those 
expressing form : table ovale, oval table ; color : maison 
blanche, white house ; taste : herbe amere, bitter herb ; sound : 
orgue harmonieux, harmonious organ; action: procureur 
actif, active attorney ; effect : coutume abusive, custom 
founded in abuse ; arrangement : ordre grammatical, gram- 
matical order ; species : qualite occulte, occult quality ; 
nation : generosite anglaise, English generosity ; those 
ending in -esque, 41, -ul^ic, -ique, -in : 

Style Burlesque, Burlesque si^£ Bien public, Public welfare. 

Jargon pueril, Childish jargon. Bis sardonique, Sardonic grin. 

Femme credule, Credulous woman, Voix enfantine, Childish voice. 

But in this, custom is the best guide 

EXERCISE. 

1. An affected simplicity is a refined imposture. 

2. The smiling images of Theocritus, Virgil, and Gessner, excite in 
the soul a soft sensibility. 

3. In that antique palace are to be seen neither -wreathed columns, 
nor gilded wainscots, nor valuable basso-relievoes, nor ceilings curiously 
painted, nor grotesque figures of animals, which never had existence but 
in the imagination of a child or a madman. 

4. If human life is exposed to many troubles, it is also susceptible of 
many pleasures. 

5. A ridiculous man is seldom so by halves. 

(1.) Refined, ddicat. 

(2.) Smiling, riant — excite, porter — soft, doux. 

(3.) Are to be seen, on ne voit — wreathed, torse — wainscots, lambris — basso-relievoes, 
bas relief— cielings, plafond— curiously, artistement — had existence, exister. 
(4) Many, bien de— troubles, peine. 
(5.) So, le—by halves, a demi. 



ARTICULAR RULES OF THE ADJECTIVE. 191 

6. Spanish manners have, at first sight, something harsh and uncivilized. 

7. French urbanity has become a proverb among foreign nations. 



(6.) Spanish, espagnol — manners, moeurs — at first sight, au premier abord — 
uncivilized, sauvage. 
(7.) Become, passer en — among, chez. 

572. Rule III. — Although it may seem that adjectives 
expressing moral qualities are placed indifferently before or 
after the substantive, yet taste and a correct ear will assign 
them their proper situation. 

573. In conversation, or in a broken, loose style, it may be 
indifferent to say, femme aimable or aimable femme ; talens 
sublimes or sublimes talens, &c. ; but in the dignified style, 
the place of the adjective may, in a variety of instances, affect 
the beauty of a sentence. 

EXERCISE. 

1. An amiable woman gives to every thing she says an inexpressible 
grace ; the more we hear, the more we wish to hear her. 

2. The majestic eloquence of Bossuet is like a river which carries 
away every thing in its rapid course. 

3. The sublime compositions of Rubens have made 2 an 4 English 
traveller 'say, that this famous painter was born in Flanders, through a 
mistake of nature. 



(].) Give to, repandre sur— we, on. [cours. 

(2.) River, fieuve — carries away, entrainer — its rapid course, la rapidite de son 
(3.) Say, dire a.— famous, celebre— through, par — mistake, meprise. 



Regimen of Adjectives. 

574. Rule. — A noun may be governed by two adjectives, 
provided these do not require different regimens ; as, Cet 
homme est utile et cher a sa famille, that man is useful and 
dear to his family. But it would be incorrect to say, Cet 
homme est utile et cheri de sa famille, that man is useful and 
beloved by his family; because the adjective utile does not 
govern the preposition de. 

EXERCISE ON THE REGIMEN OF ADJECTIVES. 

1. A young man, whose actions are all regulated by honor, and whose 
only aim is perfection in every thing, is beloved and courtedby every body. 

2. Cardinal Richelieu was all his life time feared and hated by the 
great whom he had humbled. 

3. A young lady, mild, polite, and delicate, who sees in the advantages 
of birth, riches, wit, and beauty nothing but incitements to virtue, is very 
certain of being beloved and esteemed by every body. 

(1.) Actions are regulated by honor, l'honneur dirige les actions — whose only aim 
is, qui ne se propose que — courted, recherche. 

(2.) Young lady, demoiselle — delicate, decent — nothing but ne que — incitements, 
encouragement — certain^ assure. 



192 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ADJECTIVES OF NUMBER. 

Adjectives of Number. 

575. Unieme is used only after vingt, trente, quarante, 
cinquante, soixante, quatre-vingts,cent, and mille. Cest la 
vingt-et-unieme fois, it is the twenty-first time. See page 58. 

576. Cent, in the plural, takes 5, except when followed by 
another noun of number ; as, 

Us etaient deux cents, They were two hundred. 

Trois cents hommes, Three hundred men. 

lis etaient deux cent dix, They were two hundred and ten. 

577. Vingt, in quatre-vingts and six-vingts, also takes s, 
when followed by a substantive ; as, 

Quatre-vingts hommes, Eighty men. 

Six-vingts abricots, Six score apricots. 

578. But it takes no s when followed by another term ex- 
pressing number, quatre-vingt-un arbres, quatre-vingt-dix 
hommes. 

579. The ordinal numbers, collective and distributive, 
always take the sign of the plural : les premieres douzaines, 
the first dozens ; les quatre cinquiemes, the four-fifths. 

580. For dates, the French write mil ; as, mil sept cent- 
quatre-vingt-dix-neuf, one thousand seven hundred and 
ninety-nine, &c. See page 60. 

581. Remark. — Cent and mille are used indefinitely; as, 

U luijit cent caresses, He showed him a hundred marks 

of kindness. 
Faites-lui mille amities de ma part, Present him for me a thousand 

compliments. 

EXERCISE ON THE ADJECTIVES OF NUMBER. 

1. It was the thirty-first year after so glorious a peace when the war 
broke out again, with a fury of which history offers few examples. 

2. There were only three hundred, and in spite of their inferiority in* 
numbers,* they attacked the enemy, beat, and dispersed them. 

3. He has sold his country house for tivo thousand five hundred and 
fifty pounds. 

4. Choose out of your nursery eighty fruit-trees and ninety dwarf- 
trees ; divide them into dozens, and put in the first two dozens of each 
sort those whose fruits are most esteemed. 

5. When Louis the Fourteenth made his entry into Strasburg the 
Swiss deputies having come to pay their respects to him, Le Tellier, arch- 
bishop of Reims, who saw among them the bishop of Basle, said to one 

(1.) Year, annee — when, que— broke out again, se rallumer. 

(2.) Only, ne que — in spite of, malgre. (3.) Pounds, livres sterling. 

(4.) Out of, dans — nursery, popiniere— fruit-trees, pied d'arbre fruitier — dwarf- 
trees, arbre nain. 
(5.) Swiss, (of the Swiss)— pay, presenter — respect, hommage — one near him. son 



ARTICULAR RULES OF THE ADJECTIVES OF NUMBER. 193 

near him, " That bishop is apparently some miserable character." " How !" 
replied the other, " he has a hundred thousand livres a year." " Oh, oh !" 
said the archbishop, " he is then a respectable man ;" and showed Mm a 
thousand civilities. 



voisin— that bishop, &c , c'est un miserable apparemment que cet eveque— a year, 
de rente — showed, faire — civilities, caresse. 

582. The French say, le onze, du onze, au onze, sur les 
onze heures, sur les une heure, pronouncing the words onze 
and line as if they were written with an h aspirated. 

583. The cardinal numbers are used for the ordinal. 

584. 1. — In reckoning time — that is, the hour of the day, 
the day of the month, the year of an era ; as, il est trois 
heures, it is three o'clock ; le vingt de Mars, the twentieth of 
March ; Van mil sept cent dix, Sic. See pages 60. 

585. 2. — In speaking of the order of sovereigns ; as, Louis 
seize, George trois; except the first two of the series; as, 
Henri premier, George second. Quint for cinq is only said 
of the Empereur Charles-quint and the Pape Sixte-quint. 

EXERCISE. 

1. They made in the parish and in the neighboring places a collection 
which produced a hundred and twenty-one guineas. 

2. William, surnamed the Conqueror, king of England and duke of 
Normandy, was one of the greatest generals of the eleventh century ; he 
was born at Falaise, and was the natural son of Robert, duke of Normandy, 
and of Arlotte, a furrier's daughter. 

3. Make haste ; it will soon be ten o'clock. We shall have a good 
deal of difficulty to arrive in time. 

4. The winter was so severe in one thousand seven hundred and nine 
that there was but one olive-tree that resisted it,* in a plain where there 
had been more than ten thousand. 

5. It was the twenty -first of January, one thousand seven hundred and 
ninety-three, that the unhappy Louis the sixteenth was led to the scaffold. 

(1.) They, on — neighboring places, voisinage, sing. — collection, quete. 
(2.) William. Guillaume— furrier, fourreur. [in, a. 

(3) Make haste, se depecher — will be, F. — a good deal of difficulty bien de la peine — 
(4.) Severe , rude — but, ne que — had been, H. 



R 



194 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 

CHAPTER IV. 
OF THE PRONOUNS. 



OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 



Office of Personal Pronouns. 

586. The personal pronouns have the three characteristics 
of the substantive — that is, subject, regimen, and apostrophe ; 
but with this difference, that some always form the subject; 
two only are used as an apostrophe : some always form the 
regimen, and lastly, others are sometimes the subject and 
sometimes the regimen. 

587. Je, tu, il, and Us, are always the subject; these four 
pronouns cannot be separated from the verb which they govern 
but by personal pronouns acting as a regimen or by the nega- 
tive ne. 

EXAMPLES. 
Je ne lui en veux rien dire, I will say nothing to him about it. 

Tu en apprendras des nouvelles, Thou wilt hear news of it. 
II nous raconta son histoire, He told us his history. 

lis sont survenus a Vimproviste, They are come unexpectedly 

588. The two acting as an apostrophe are toi, thou, and 
vous, you, whether they stand alone or are preceded by the 
interjection 6 ; as, toi, 6 toi: vous, 6 vous. 

EXERCISE ON PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 

1. The better to bear the irksomeness of captivity and solitude, / sought 
for books ; for / was overwhelmed with melancholy, for want of some 
knowledge to cherish and support my mind. 

2. Since thou art more obdurate and unjust than thy father, mayest 
thou suffer evils more lasting and more cruel than his ! 

3. What ! say they ; do not men die fast enough without destroying 
each other 1 Life is so short, and yet it seems that it appears too long to 
them. Are they sent into the world to tear each other in pieces, and to 
make themselves wretched ? 

4. O thou, my son, my dear son, ease my heart : restore me what is 
dearer to me than my life ! Restore to me my lost son, and restore thy- 
self to thyself. 

5. O ye, who hear me with so much attention, believe not that I despise 
men ! No, no ; I am sensible how glorious it is to toil to make them 
virtuous and happy ; but this toil is full of anxieties and dangers. 

(1.) To hear, supporter — irksomeness, ennui — overwhelmed with, accable He—for 
want, faute — to cherish, qui put nourrir — support, soutenir. 

(2 ) Obdurate, dur — mayest, pouvoir, Q,. — lasting, long. 

(3.) Die fast enough, etre assez mortel — destroying each other, se donner encore 
une niort pr£cipit6e — sent into, sur — world, terre — tear in pieces, se dechirer — make 
themselves, se rendre. 

(4.) Ease, soulager — restore, rendre — lost (whom I have lost), perdre. 

(5) lam sensible, savoir— glorious, grand— to toil, de travailler a— toil, travail— 
anxieties, inquietude, sing. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 195 

589. Me, te, se, leur, le, la, les, y, and en are always used 
as a regimen : direct, when acted upon by the verb — indirect, 
when referable to the prepositions a or de, (See page 155.) 
They always precede the verb, except in the imperative when 
affirmative, and can never be separated from it by any other 
word, except tout, rien, and jamais, which may intervene 
before an infinitive. 

EXAMPLES. 
Cest leur tout refuser, It is refusing them every thing. 

C'est ne me rien permettre, It is allowing me nothing. [him. 

77 a jure dene lui jamais par donner, He has sworn he would never pardon 

590. Me, te, se, form a regimen, sometimes direct and 
sometimes indirect: direct, when they represent moi, toi, 
soi ; indirect, when they supply the place of a moi, a toi, a 
soi. See pages 61 and 62. 

EXAMPLES. 

Vous me soupqonnez mal a propos, You suspect me unjustly. 

Je t'en remercie, I thank thee for it. 

H se perd de gaiete de cceur, He ruins himself out of wantonness. 

Vous me donnez un sage conseil, You give me prudent advice. 

Je te donne cela, 1 give thee that. 

II se donne bien du mouvement, He is an active, stirring man. 

591. Leur is always indirect, as it stands for a eux, or a elles. 

EXAMPLE. 

Je leur representai le tort quHls, I represented to them the injury 
ou qu } elles se fesaient, they did themselves. 

EXERCISE. 

1. He has been speaking to them with such energy as has astonished 
them. 

2. Women ought to be very circumspect ; for a mere appearance is 
sometimes more prejudicial to them than a real fault. 

3. He comes up to me with a smiling countenance, and, pressing my 
hand, says, " My frieiid, I expect you to-morrow at my house." 

4. He said to me, " Wilt thou torment thyself incessantly for advan- 
tages, the enjoyment of which could not render thee more happy] Cast 
thy eyes around thee : see how every thing smiles at thee, and seems to 
invite thee to prefer a retired and tranquil life to the tumultuous pleasures 
of a vain world." 

5. The ambitious man* agitates, torments, and destroys himself to 
obtain the places or the honors to which he aspires ; and when he has 
obtained them, he is still dissatisfied. 



(1.) Such energy as, une force qui. 

(2.) Mere, simple — more prejudicial, faire plus de tort. 

(3.) Comes up with, aborder de— pressing, serrer — my hand, la main — says, il me 
dit — at my house, chez moi. 

(4.) Incessantly, sans cesse— advantages, des Mens— could, savoirN.— cast, porter 
—thy, les — smiles, sourire. 

(1.) Destroys, consumer— to, pour. 



196 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 

592. Le, la, les, are always direct regimen ; as, 

Je le vois,je la vois, for je vois lui, je vois elle. 

Je les vois, for je vois eux, je vois elles. 

593. But y and en are always indirect regimen; as, 

Je rfy entends rien, for je rCentends rien a cela. 

Ces fruits sont bons, en voulez-vous ? for voulez-vous d'iceux 1 

Avez-vous recu de V argent ? — oui, for un peu, tine certaine somme, 
j'en at regit, or quantite d'argent. 

594. Though seeming to perform the function of regimen 
direct in this last and other phrases of the same kind, it is 
obvious that there is in the word e?i an ellipsis, which may 
be readily supplied. See pages 65 and 66. 

EXERCISE. 

1. I have known him since his childhood, and I always loved him on 
account of the goodness of his character. 

2. This woman is always occupied in doing good works : you see her 
constantly consoling the unhappy, relieving the poor, reconciling enemies, 
and promoting the happiness of every one around her. 

3. The more you live with men, the more you will be convinced that it is 
necessary to know them well before you* form a connexion with them. 

4. Enjoy the pleasures of the world, I consent to it ; but never give 
yourself up to them. 

5. I shall never consent to that foolish scheme ; do not mention it 
any* more. 

6. Have you received some copies of the new work 1 Yes, I have, 
(received some). 

(1.) Have known, connaitre F.— loved, G.—on account, a cause — the goodness of his, 
(his good). 

(2.) In, a — works, ceuvres, f. — constantly, sans cesse — consoling, A. — relieving, 
asmsler— promoting, faire — every one around her, tout ce qui l'environne. 

(3.) Live, lj.—be convinced, se convaincre— before, avant de— ^ form a connexion, vous 

(4.) Enjoy, jouir de — give yourself up, se livrer. [lier A. 

(5.) Scheme, entreprise — mention, parler de. 

(6.) Copies, exemplaires. 

595. The pronouns which are sometimes the subject and 
sometimes the regimen, are nous, vous, moi, toi, lui, elle, 
eux, elles. 

596. Nous and vous are the subject in nous aimons, vous 
aimez ; the regimen direct in Us nous aiment, Us vous aiment; 
and indirect in Us nous parlent, Us vous parlent. 

597. In general, moi, toi, are only the subject by apposition 
or reduplication, whether they precede or follow the verb ; as, 
Moi, dont il dechire la reputation, I, whose reputation he is aspers* 

je ne lui ai jamais rendu que de ing, always did him acts of 

bons offices, kindness. 

Toi, qui fais tant le brave, tu Wouldst thou, who pretendest to 

oserais, &c, be so brave, dare, &c. 

Je pretends, moi, I do maintain, I. 

Tu dis done, toi Thou sayest then, thou. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 197 

598. Remark. — Sometimes the personal pronouns je and 
tu are not expressed, but understood ; as, 

Moi, trahir le meilleur de mes amis ! I, betray my best friend ! 

Faire une lachett, toi ! Thou, be guilty of such baseness ! 

that is 1t /e voudrais moi, &c! tupourrais toi, &c. ! 

599. They are likewise the subject when they are placed 
in a kind of apposition expressed by ce and il in impersonal 
verbs ; as, quifut Men aise? cefut moi ; ce ne peutetre que 
toi ; que vous reste-t-il? — moi. 

600. After a conjunction, they are either the subject or 
regimen, according to the nature of the phrase ; as, nous y 
etions mon pere et moi ; il ne craint ni toi ni moi, 

601. In phrases which are not imperative, toi and moi can 
only be the object by apposition before or after the verb; as, 
voudriez-vous me perdre, moi, voire allie, &c. toi, je te 
soupgonnerais de perjidie ! 

602. After a preposition, they alone can be employed; as, 
vous servirez-vous de moi? selon moi vous ctvez raison; il 
est f ache contre toi. 

603. What has just been remarked of toi and moi is appli- 
cable to lui, but with this difference, that lux can only be the 
object after ne — que, signifying only, or in distributive 
phrases; as, 

N'aimez que lui, je ne le trouve That you should like only him, I 
pas mauvais ; mais ne me ha'is- do not disapprove, but do not 
sez pas, hate me. 

604. So, protegez-nous, lui, a cause de, &c. et moi, parce 
que, <fec. we may likewise say by apposition, aimez-le, lui 
qui, Sic. 

605. Eux is employed in the same manner as lui, but 
differs from it in this, that it cannot be the regimen indirect, 
except after a preposition ; as, parliez-vous d?eux ? est-ce a 
eux que vous parlez ? 

606. Remark. — Lui and eux may be the subject in distri- 
butive phrases without being in apposition ; as, 

Jlfes freres et mon cousin m'ont My brothers and cousin assisted me ; 
secouru ; eux m'o?it releve, et they took me up, and he dressed 
lui m?a pause, my wounds. 

607. The natural office of elle and elles is to form the 
subject ; however, they are susceptible of all the other uses just 
mentioned, except that they cannot be the regimen indirect, 
unless preceded by a preposition ; as, c*est a elles que je parte 

r2 



198 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 

EXERCISE. 

1. In the education of youth, we should propose to ourselves to culti- 
vate, to polish their* understanding, and thus to enable them to fill with 
dignity the different stations assigned them ; but, above all, we ought to 
instruct them in that religious worship which God requires of them. 

2. What ! you would suffer yourself 'to be overwhelmed by adversity ! 

3. I! stoop to the man who has imbrued his hands in the blood of 
his king ! 

4. Thou ! take that undertaking upon thyself? Canst* thou think of it? 

5. Your two brothers and mine take charge of the enterprise ; they find 
the money, and he will manage the work. 

6. It is / who have engaged him to undertake this journey. 

7. It is thou who hast brought this misfortune on thyself. 

8. When you are at Rome, write to me as often as you can, and give 
me an account of every thing that can interest me. 

9. He told it to thee thyself 

10. Fortune, like a traveller, shifts from inn to inn ; if she lodges to-day 
with me, to-morrow, perhaps, she will lodge -with thee. 

11. Whom dost thou think we were talking of? — it was of thee. 

12. Descartes deserves immortal praise, because it is he who has made 
reason triumph over authority in philosophy. 

13. He is dissatisfied -with himself 

14. She is never satisfied -with herself 

15. The indiscreet often betray themselves. 

16. Saumaise, speaking of the English authors, said that he had learned 
more from them than from any other. 

17. To love a person, is to render him, on every occasion, all the ser- 
vices in our power, and to afford him, in society, every comfort that 
depends upon us. 

(1.) Youth, jeunes gens — should, devoir F. — to cultivate, (to them) — to polish, (to 
them) orner — understanding, Fesprit — enable, disposer — stations, place — (which are) 
assigned (to) them— worship, culte — requires, demander. 

(2.) Suffer yourself, se laisser N. — to be overwhelmed, abattre. 

(3.) Stoop to, s'abaisser devant Q,. — imbrued, souiller — in, de. 

4.) Take upon thyself, se charger N.— of it, y. 

(5.) Take charge, se charger—; find, fournir— money, fond3, pi.— manage, conduire F. 

(6.) Undertake, faire— journey, voyage. 

(7.) Hast brought on thyself, s'attirer G. 

(8.) Are, li.—ean, lu.—give, faire— an account, le detail. 

(9.) Told, dire G. 

(10 ) Shifts from inn to inn, changer d'auberge— with, chez— she will lodge,e\\e etreL. 
(11.) Were talking, parler S. 
(12 ) Triumph over, triompher de. 
(13.) Is dissatisfied with, se deplaire. 
(14 ) Satisfied with, content de. 
(15.) Betray, se trahir. 

(17.) In our power, dont on etre capable— afford, procurer a— comfort, agrement— 
depends upon, dependre de. 



H» 



On the Pronoun soi. 
608. Soi % is generally accompanied by a preposition, and 
is used in phrases where there is an indeterminate pronoun, 
either expressed or understood : on doit rarement parler de 
soi; il est essentiel de prendre garde a soi. In this case, it 
is the regimen indirect, but it may be employed without a 
preposition. 






PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 199 

609. 1. — With the verb etre ; as, En cherchant a tromper 
les autres, c'est souvent soi que Von trompe, or on est souvent 
trompe soi-meme, in attempting to deceive others, we fre- 
quently deceive ourselves. In this situation it is the subject. 

610. 2. — After ne que, or by apposition ; as, 

Maimer que soi, c'est n'etre bon To love only ourselves is being good 

a rien, for very little. 

Penser ainsi, c'est s'aveugler soi- To think in this manner, is to blind 

mime j one's-self. 

611. It is in these examples the regimen ; but when de soi 
and en soi are used in a definitive sense in speaking of things, 
they mean de sa nature and dans sa nature. 

EXERCISE ON THE PRONOUN SOL 

1. To excuse in one's- self the follies which one cannot excuse in others 
is to prefer being a fool one's-self to seeing others so. 

2. To be too much dissatisfied with ourselves is a weakness ; but to 
be too much satisfied (-with ourselves) is (a) folly. 

3. We ought to despise no one : how often have we needed the assist- 
ance of one more insignificant than ourselves ? 

4. If we did not attend so much to ourselves, there would be less ego- 
tism in the world. 

5. Vice is odious in itself. 

6. The loadstone aUracts iron (to itself J, 

(1 ) Follies, sottises— others, autrui -to prefer, aimer mieux— ; fool, sot— to seeing, que 
de voir — so, tel. 

(3.) We ought, il falloir F. — how often, combien de fois — we, on — needed the assist- 
ance, n'avoir pas besoi n— insignificant, petit. 

(4.) We, on— attend to, s'occuper de — egotism, egoisme. 

(6.) Loadstone, aimant. 



Cases where the Pronouns elle, elles, etjx, ltji, letjr may 
apply to things. 

612. The personal pronouns elle and elles, when the regi- 
men, generally apply to persons only. Thus, in speaking of 
a woman, we must say, Je m'approchai d'elle, je rrfassis 
pres d'elle ; but, in speaking of a table, Je m?en approchai,je 
771* as sis aupres. 

613. However, with the prepositions avec, apres, a, de, 
pour, en, &c. they may be applied to things. Thus, it is 
correct to say — of a river, 

Cette riviere est si rapide, quand That river is so rapid when it over- 

elle dehor de, qiCelle entraine avec flows that it carries away every 

elle tout ce qu'elle rencontre; elle thing it meets with in its course ; 

ne laisse apres elle que du sable it leaves nothing behind but sand 

et des cailloux, and pebbles. 

614. — Of an enemy's army, 

Nous marchdmes a elle, We marched up to it. 



m 

200 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 

615. — Of things, reasons, truth, &c. ; as, 

Ces choses sont bonnes d'elles-memes, These things are good in themselves. 
J'aime la verite au point que je I love truth to that degree, that I 

sacrifierais tout pour elle, would sacrifice every thing for it. 

Ces raisons sont solides en elles- Those reasons are solid in them- 

memes, selves. 

616. After the verb etre, they are applied only to persons, 
and likewise when they are followed by the relatives qui and 
que; as, Cest a elle, c'est cf elles que je parle, c'est elle-meme 
qui vient. 

617. The same may be said of the pronoun eux, which is 
also generally applied to persons only, yet custom allows us 
to say, 

Ce Men et ces oiseaux font tout This dog and these birds are my only 

mon plaisir ; je n'aime qu'eux ; pleasure ; I love nothing but them ; 

eux seuls sont mon amusement ; they alone are my diversion; I 

je ne songe qita eux, think of nothing else. 

618. Ltd and leur are generally applied to persons, but 
are sometimes used in speaking of animals, plants, and even 
inanimate objects ; as, 

Ces chevaux sont rendus, faites- Those horses are exhausted ; give 

leur donner un peu de vin, them a little wine. 

Ces orangers vont perir, si on ne Those orange-trees will die unless 

leur donne de Veau, they have a little water. 

Ces murs sont mal faits, on ne Those walls are not skilfully built ; 

leur a pas donne assez de talus, they are not sufficiently sloped 

upward. 

619. Upon these previous observations, then, may be 
founded the following 

620. Rule. — The pronouns elle, elles, eux, lux, and leur, 
ought never to be applied to things, except when custom does 
not allow them to be replaced by the pronouns y and en. 

EXERCISE. 

1. Virtue is the first of blessings ; it is from it alone we are to expect 
happiness. 

2. The labyrinth had been built upon the lake Maeris, and they had 
given it a prospect proportioned to its grandeur. 

3. Mountains are frequented on account of the air one breathes on them : 
how many people are indebted to them for the recovery of their health 1 

4. War brings in its train numberless evils. 

5. It is a delicate affair which must not be too deeply investigated, it 
must be lightly passed over. 

(1.) Blessings, bien — are, devoir. 

(2) Had been built, on batir l.-^prospect, vue. [recovery, retablisseraent. 

(3.) On account, a cause — breathes, respirer — on them, y — are indebted for , devoir — 
(4.) Brings, en trainer — in its train, avec elle— numberless, bien de. 
(5.) JSffair, nwiiexe— must, il faut— be deeply investigated, approfondir A.— be 
passed, glisser— over dessus. 






PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 201 

6. I have had my house repaired, and have given it quite* a new 
appearance. 

7. Those trees are too much loaded ; strip them of part of their fruit. 

8. This book cost me a great deal, but I am indebted to it for my 
knowledge. 

9. Self-love is captious ; we, however, take it for our* guide ; to it are 
all our actions directed, and from it we take counsel. 

10. These arguments, although very solid in themselves, yet made no 
impression upon him, so powerful a chain is habit. 

11. These reasons convinced me, and by them I formed my decision. 

12. I leave you the care of that bird ; do not forget to give it water. 

(6) Have had, faire G. — appearance, air. 
(7.) Strip, oter — of part, une partie. 
(8.) A great deal, cher — knowledge, instruction. 

(9.) We, (it is it that we)— to it, (it is to it that we direct all, &c.)— direct, rapporter 
from it, (and it is from it that, &c) 
(10.J No, ne aucun— so strong, &c, (so much habit is a, &c.)— habit, habitude. 
(11.) And by, d'apres (and it is from them that)— formed my decision, se decider. 



Difficulty respecting the Pronoun le explained. 

621. Le, la, les, are sometimes pronouns and sometimes 
articles. The article is always followed by a noun — le roi, 
la reine, les hommes — whereas the pronoun is always joined 
to a verb, je le connais, je la respecte, je les estime. 

622. The pronoun le may supply the place of a substantive 
or an adjective, or even of a member of a sentence. 

623. There is no difficulty when it relates to a whole 
member of a sentence ; it is then always put in the masculine 
singular ; as, 

On doit s'accommoder a Vhumeur We ought to accommodate ourselves to 
des autres autant qiion le pent, the temper of others as much as we can. 

EXERCISE. 

1. The laws of nature and decency oblige us equally to defend the 
honor and interest of our parents when we can do it without injustice. 

2. We ought not to condemn, after their death, those who have not 
been condemned during their life. 



(1) Decency, bienseance. (2.) We ought, falloir — condemned, le. 

624. Nor is there any difficulty when le supplies the place 
of a substantive ; it then always takes the gender and number 
of that substantive ; as, Madame, etes-vous la mere de cet 
enfant? — -Oui,je la suis. Madame, are you the mother of 
that child ?■ — Yes, I am. Mesdames, etez-vous les parentes 
dont Monsieur rrCa parte? — Out, nous les sommes. 

625. Remark. — Though the word relating to the following 
questions is not expressed in English, yet it must always be 
so in French ; this word is le, which takes either gender or 
number, according to its relation. 



202 Particular rules of tpie pronouns. 

EXERCISE. 

1. Is that your idea 1 — Can you doubt that it is 1 

2. Are you Mrs. Such-a-one 1 — Yes, I am. 

3. Are those your servants 1 — Yes, they are. 



(1.) Idea, pensee — that it is, ce &tre Q,. 
(2.) Mrs., Madame — such-a-one, un tel. 
3.) Those, ce la— they, ce. 

626. It only remains therefore to lay down the following 

627. Rule. — The pronoun le takes neither gender nor 
number when occupying the place of an adjective. 

EXAMPLES. 

Madame, etes-vous enrhumee 1 — Oui, je le suis. 

Mesdames, etes-vous contentes de ce discours 1 — Oui, nous le sommes. 

Fut-ii jamais une femme plus malheureuse que je le suis 1 

628. Remark. — This rule is observed when the substan- 
tives are used adjectively; as, 

Madame, etes-vous mere 1 — Oui, je le suis. 
Mesdames, etes-vous parentes? — Oui, nous le sommes. 
Elle est fille, et le sera toute sa vie. 

629. But not if the adjectives be used substantively; as, 

Madame, etes-vous la malade 1 — Oui, je la suis. 

630. Therefore this question — Etes-vous fille de M. le due ? 
—is to be answered, Oui,je le suis ; but this — Etes-vous la 
fille de M. le due? — Qui,je la suis. 

EXERCISE. 

1. Ladies, are you glad to have seen the new piece ] — Yes, we are. 

2. I, a* slave ! I, born to command ! Alas ! it is but too true that I am so. 

3. She was jealous of her authority, and she ought to be so. 

4. Was there ever a girl more unhappy, and treated with more ridicule 
than I am. 

5. You have found me amiable : why have I ceased to appear so to you ? 

6. Have we ever been so quiet as we are 1 

7. Madam, are you married'? — Yes, I am. 

8. Madam, are you the bride 1 — Yes, I am. 

(].) Ladies, Mesdames. 

(2.) Slave, esclave — but, ne que. 

(3.) Ought, devoir H. 

<4 ) With more ridicule, plus ridiculement 

631. The same rule is likewise observed with the article 
placed before plus or moins and an adjective. It takes neither 
gender nor number when there is no comparison ; as, 

La lune ne nous iclaire pas autant The moon does not give us so 
que le soleil, meme quand elle est much light as the sun, even 
le plus brillante, when it shines brightest. 

632. But it takes them when there is comparison , as, 
De toutes les planltes, la lune est Of all the planets, the moon is the 

la plus brillante pour nous, most brilliant to us. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 203 

EXERCISE. 

1. This father could not bring himself to condemn his children, even 
when they were most guilty. 

2. This woman has the art of shedding tears, even when she is least 
afflicted. 

3. Out* of so many criminals, only the most guilty should be punished. 

4. Although that woman displays more fortitude than the others, she 
is not, on that account, the least distressed. 

(1.) Could, B.— bring himself, se resoudre. 

(2.) Shedding; r^pandre de — even when, dans le temps meme que. 
(3.) Only the most, &c. (one must punish only the most guilty) — only, ne que. 
(4.) Displays, montrei— fortitude, fermete — on that account, pour cela— distressed, 
afflige. 



Repetition of the Personal Pronouns. 

633. Rule I. — Pronouns expressing the first and second 
persons, when the subject, must be repeated before all the 
verbs, if those verbs are in different tenses ; it is always even 
better to repeat them when the verbs are in the same tense. 

EXAMPLES. 

Je soutiens et je soutiendrai ton- I maintain, and (I) will always 

jours, maintain. 

Vous dites, et vous avez tou jours You say, and (you) have always 

dit, said. 

Accable de doideur, je m'ecriai et Overwhelmed with sorrow, I ex- 

je dis, claimed and (I) said. 

JVous nous promenions sur le haut We were walking upon the sum- 

du rocher, et nous voyions sous mit of the rock, when we saw 

nos pieds, &c. under our feet, &c. 

634. In all cases these pronouns must be repeated, though 
the tenses of the verbs do not change if the first of these is 
followed by a regimen ; as, 

Vous aimerez le Seigneur votre You shall love the Lord your God, 
Dieu, et vous observerez sa loi, and (you shall) observe his law. 

EXERCISE on the REPETITION of the PERSONAL PRONOUN. 

1. My dear child, /love you, and / shall never cease to love you : but 
it is that very love that I have for you which obliges me to correct you for 
your faults, and to punish you when you deserve it. 

2. / heard and admired these words, which comforted me a little ; but 
my mind was not sufficiently at liberty to make him a reply. 

3. Thou art young, and doubtless thou aimest at the glory of surpassing 
thy comrades. 

4. God has said, you shall love your enemies, bless those that curse you, 
do good to those that persecute you, and pray for those who slander you. 
What a difference between this morality and that of philosophers ! 

(1.) Correct for, reprendre de. 

(2.) Heard, ecouter H. — words, discours, sing. — my mind, &c. (I had not the mind, 
Sec.) — sufficiently at liberty, assez libre — to make a reply, repondre a. 
(3.) Aimest at, aspirer a— surpassing, l'emporter sur. 
(4.) Slander, calomnier — between, de — and that, a celte. 



204 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 

635. Rule II.— The pronouns of the third person, when 
they form the subject, are hardly ever repeated before verbs, 
except when those verbs are in different tenses. 

EXAMPLES. 

La bonne grace ne gate rien ; elle A graceful manner spoils nothing : 

ajoute a, la beaute*, relive la mo- it adds to beauty, heightens mo* 

destie, et y donne du lustre, desty, and gives it lustre. 

Hn^ a jamais rien valu, et ne vaudra. He never was good for any thing, 

jamais rien, and never will be. 

H est arrive ce matin, et il repartira He arrived this morning, and (he) 

ce soir, will set off again this evening. 

636. However, perspicuity requires the repetition of the 
pronoun when the second verb is preceded by a long incidental 
phrase ; as, II fond sur son ennemi, et apres V avoir saisi 
(Tune main victorieuse, il le renverse, comme le cruel aquilon 
abat les tendres moissons qui dorent la campagne. 

EXERCISE. 

1. He took the strongest cities, conquered the most considerable pro- 
vinces, and overturned the most powerful empires. 

2. He takes a hatchet, completely cuts down the mast, which was 
already broken, throws it into the sea, jumps upon it amidst the furious 
billows, calls me by my name, and encourages me to follow him. 

3. He marshals the soldiers, marches at their head, advances in good 
order towards the enemy, attacks and breaks them, and, after having 
entirely routed them, (he) cuts them to pieces. 

(1.) Overturned, renverser J. [lows, onde, 

(2.) Completely cuts down, achever de couper— jumps upon it, s'elancer dessus — bil~ 
(3.) Marshals, ranger en bataille — breaks, renverser — entirely routed, achever de 
mettre en desordre — cuts, tailler. 

637. Rule III. — Any personal pronoun, when the subject, 
must be repeated before verbs when passing from an affirma- 
tion to a negative, and vice versa, or when the verbs are 
joined by any conjunction except et and ni. 

EXAMPLES. 

Jl veut et ne veut pas, He will and he will not. 

U donne d'excellens principes, He lays down excellent principles, 
parce quHl sait que les progres, because he knows that upon them 
ulte'rieurs en dependent, depends all further progress. 

II donne et recoit, He gives and receives. 

7Z ne donne ni ne recoit, He neither gives nor receives. 

EXERCISE. 

1. It is inconceivable how whimsical she is ; from one moment to an- 
other, she will and she will not. 

2. The Jews are forbidden to work on the sabbath ; they are, as it* 
were,* locked in slumber ; they light no fire and carry no water. 

(1.) (She is of a whimsical cast inconceivable) whimsical cast, bizarrerie, f. 
(2.) (It is forbidden to) forbidden, defendre— sabbath, jour du sabbat — locked, ert 
chaine— slumber, repos— light, allumer. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE fRONOUN. 



205 



3. For nearly a week she has neither eaten nor drunk. 

4. The soldier was not repressed by authority, but stopped from 
satiety and shame. 

(3.) For, depuis— nearly, pres de— a week, huit jours— has eaten.... drunk, F. 
(4.) Repressed, reprimer— stopped, s'arreter J.— from, par. 

638. Rule IV. — Pronouns, when they form the regimen, 

must be repeated before any verb. 

EXAMPLES. 
Videe de ses malheurs le pouvsuit, The idea of his misfortunes pursues 
le tourmente et Vaccable, (him), torments (him), and 

overwhelms him. 
II nous ennuie et nous obsede sans He wearies (us) and besets us 
cesse, unceasingly. 

639. Exception. — It is not repeated before such compound 
verbs as express the repetition of the same action, when the 
verbs are in the same tense ; as, 

Je vous le dis et redis, il le fait et refait sans cesse. 

EXERCISE. 

1. It is taste that selects the expressions — that combines, arranges, and 
varies them — so as to produce the greatest effect. 

2. Horace answered his stupid critics not so much to instruct them, as 
to expose their ignorance, and let them see that they did not even know 
what poetry was. 

3. Man embellishes nature itself; he cultivates, extends, and polishes it. 

(1.) So as to, de maniere a ce qiTelles Q,. 

(2.) Stupid, sot — not so much to, moins pour — as to, pour — show their, (show to 
them) — let see, faire entendre — teas, e'etait que. 



Relation of the Pronouns of the Third Person to a Noun 
as expressed before. 

640. Rule. — The pronouns of the third person — il, Us, 
elle, elles, le, la, les — must always relate to a noun, whether 
subject or regimen, taken only in a definite sense, before 
expressed in the same tense ; but they must not be applied 
to a subject and regimen at the same time. 

EXAMPLES. 

La rose est la reine des fleurs, The rose is the queen of flowers ; 

aussi est-e\\e Vembleme de la therefore it is the emblem of 

beaute, beauty. 

Vaime l'ananas ; il est exquis, I like the pine-apple ; it is delicious. 

641. But the two following sentences would be equivocal: 

Racine a imite Euripide, en tout Racine has imitated Euripides in all 
ce qu*i\ a de plus beau dans sa that he has most beautiful in his 
Phedre, Phedra. 

S 



208 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 

Le Ugat publia une sentence The legate published a sentence (£ 
(Vinterdit ; il dura trois mois, interdiction ; it lasted three months, 

642. As in the first of these two sentences il may relate 
either to Racine or to Euripides, and from the construction 
of the second sentence, il cannot, as it should, relate to inter- 
dit. Again, it is not altogether correct to say, 

Nulle paix pour Vimpie ; il la No peace for the wicked ; he seeks 
cherche, elle fuit> it, it flies. 

643. Because, from the construction, the pronouns la and 
elle seem to be used for nulle paix, whereas the meaning 
requires that they should supply the place of the substantive 
paix , in the affirmative. 

EXERCISE. 

1. Poetry embraces all sorts of subjects ; it takes in every thing that 
is most brilliant in history ; it enters the fields of philosophy ; it soars to 
the skies ; it plunges into the abyss ; it penetrates to the dead ; it makes 
the universe its domain ; and if this world be not sufficient, it creates new 
ones, which it embellishes with enchanting abodes, which it peoples with 
a thousand various inhabitants. 

2. Egypt aimed at greatness ; and wished to* strike the eye at a dis- 
tance, always pleasing it by the justness of proportion. 

3. Egypt, satisfied with its own territory, where every thing was in 
abundance, thought not of conquests ; it extended itself in another man- 
ner, by sending colonies to every part of the globe, and with them civili- 
zation and laws. 

4. The Messiah is expected by the Hebrews ; he comes and calls the 
Gentiles, as it had been announced by the prophecies ; the people that 
acknowledge him as come are incorporated with the people that expected 
Aim, without a single moment of interruption. 



(1.) Subjects, matiere — takes in, se charger de — that is, y avoir de — (in) the fields, 
soars to, s'elancer dans — plunges, s'enfoncer — to, chez — (its domain of the universe) 
— be sufficient, suffire — ones, inonde — enchanting-, enchanter— abodes, demeure — va- 
rious, divers. 

(2.) Greatness, grand — wished, vouloir — eye, pi. — at a distance, dans l'eloignement 
— (in) pleasing, contenter. 

(3.) Was in abundance, abonder — thought of, songer a— in, de—by, en—to, par-— 
every part of the globe, toute la terre. 

(4.) Gentiles, Gentil— (the prophecies had announced it)— acknowledges, recon 
naitre — with, a — without, sans qu'il y ait — single, seul. 



POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 

Explanation of si>me Difficulties attendant on the use of the 
Possessive Pronouns. 

644. The possessive pronouns son, sa, ses, leur, leurs 
relate either to persons, to things personified, or simply to 
things or to pronouns. If they relate to persons, or things 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 207 

personified, their place can never be supplied by others ; but 
if they relate to things, the following rules must be observed : 

645. The possessive pronouns are always employed, 

646. 1. — When the object to which they relate is either 
named, or designated by a personal pronoun in the same 
member of a phrase. 

EXAMPLES. 
U Amerique itend son commerce par America extends her commerce 

toute la terre, over the whole globe. 

Elle envoie ses Jlottes dans toiites She sends her fleets into every 

les mers, part of the ocean. 

647. 2. — Before a noun, when qualified even by a single . 
adjective, unless the noun form the regimen. 

EXAMPLE. 
Ses ressources immenses sont Her immense resources are inex- 
inipuisables, haustible. 

648. 3.— After every preposition. 

EXAMPLE. 
Cest par sa position, jointe a la It is by her situation, joined to the 
sagesse de son gouvernement, wisdom of her government, that 
qxCelle rtunit dans son sein de she unites such vast advantages 
si grands avantages, within herself. 

649. 4. — Before all words which can govern the preposi- 
tion de. 

EXAMPLES. 

Son congres est le sanctuaire de la Her congress is the seat of the 

plus sage politique, wisest policy. 

Son president n'a de pouvoir que Her president possesses power only 

pour J aire le Men, to do good. 

650. On all other occasions, the article, with the pronoun 
en, placed immediately before the verb, must be substituted. 

EXAMPLE. 
Tout enfin contribue a m'en /aire In short, every thing conspires to 
aimer le sejour ; fen admire make me love that residence : I par- 
surtout Yexacte police, en meme ticularly admire the strictness of her 
temps que les lois m'en parais- police, at the same time when her 
sent extremement sages, laws appear to me extremely wise. 

EXERCISE ON POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 

1. A new custom was a phenomenon in Egypt: for which reason, 
there never was a people that preserved so long its customs, its laws, and 
even its ceremonies. 

2. Solomon abandons himself to the love of women : his understanding 
declines, his heart weakens, and his piety degenerates into idolatry. 

3. That superb temple was upon the summit of a hill : its columns 
were of Parian marble, and its gates of gold. 

1.) Phenomenon, prodige— -for which reason, augsi — a, de— preserved, S. 
Understanding, esprit — declines, baisser— weakens, s'affaiblir. 
Summit, haut— hill, colline— Parian, de JParps. 



208 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS 

4. Laocoon is one of the finest statues in France : not only the whole, 
but all its features, even the least, are admirable. 

5. The Thames is a magnificent river : its channel is so wide and so 
deep below London-bridge, that several thousands of vessels lie at their 
tsase in it. 

6. This fine country is justly admired by foreigners : its climate is 
delightful, its soil fruitful, its laws wise, and its government just and 
moderate. 

7. The trees of that orchard have sun enough, yet its fruits are but 
indifferent. 

8. The Seine has its source in Burgundy, its mouth is at Havre-de- 
Grace. 

9. The pyramids of Egypt astonish, both by the enormity of their bulk 
and the justness of their proportions. 

10. Egypt alone could erect monuments for posterity : its obelisks are 
to this day, as well for their beauty as for their height, the principal orna- 
ment of Rome. 

11. History and geography throw mutual light on each other: a* per- 
fect knowledge of them ought to enter into the plan of a good education. 

(4.) In, qu'il y ait en — the whole, l'ensemble — even, jusqu'a. [le — in it, y. 

(5.) Magnificent, superbe — channel, lit — below, au dessous de — lie at, etre a — their \ 

(6.) Justly, avec raison — soil, sol. 

(7.) Have sun enough, etre bien expose — but indifferent, assez mauvais. 

(8.) Mouth, embouchure — Havre, le Havre. 

(9.) Both, egalement et — bulk, masse — and, et par. 
(10.) Egypt alone could, il n'appartenait qu'a TEgypte de — erect, elever— to this 

. day, encore aujourd'hui — as well for, autant par — height, hauteur. 
(II.) Throw mutual light, &c, s'eclairer i'une par l'autre— of them, (their). 

651. Again, when there exists any doubt whether the pos- 
sessive pronoun ought to be used or not before a noun that is 
the regimen, the following is the 

652. Rule.- — This article, not the possessive pronoun, must 
be put before a noun forming the regimen, when a pronoun 
which is either subject or regimen sufficiently supplies the 
place of that possessive, or when there is no sort of ambiguity. 

EXAMPLES. 

J'ai mal a la tete, I have the head-ache. [leg. 

II fan dr a lui couper l&jambe, It will be necessary to take off his 

Ce cheval a pris le mors aux dents, That horse has run away. 

EXERCISE. 

1. During the whole winter he has had bad eyes. 

2. I had a fall yesterday, and hurt my back and head. 

3. It would be better for a man to lose his life than forfeit* his honor 
by a criminal action. 

4. In this bloody battle he received a wound by a shot in his right 
arm and another in his left leg : by dint of care, his arm was saved, but 
it was necessary to amputate his leg. 

(1.) Has had bad, avoir mal a. 

(2.) Had a fall, se laisser tomber— hurt, se faire mal a— back, reins, pi. 
(3 ) Would be better, valoir mieux N. 

(4.) A wound by a shot, un coup de feu— in, a— by dint, a force— his arm,&,c. (they 
saved the arm to him)— was necessary, falloir J. — to amputate, to him. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 209 

653. But should either the personal pronouns or circum- 
stances not remove all ambiguity, then the possessive pronoun 
must be joined to the noun ; as, 

Je vols que m&jambe s'en/le, I see that my leg is swelling. 

II lui donna sa main a baiser, He gave him his hand to kiss. 

Elle a donne hardiment son bras She courageously presented her arm 
au chirurgien, to the surgeon. 

654. Ma, not la, because I may also see the leg of another 
person swelling, &c. 

EXERCISE. 

1. In this interview they made each other presents: she gave him her 
portrait and he gave her his finest diamond. 

2. A young surgeon preparing to bleed the great Cond£, this prince 
said to him, smiling, " Do you not tremble to bleed me 1" " I, my lord? 
no, certainly : it is not I, it is you who ought to tremble." The prince, 
charmed with the reply, immediately gave him his arm. 

(1.) Interview, entrevue — made each other, se faire mutuellement. 
(2.) Preparing, se disposer — bleed, saigner — smiling-, d'un air riant — it is not I, (it 
is not to me) — it is you, (it is to you)— who ought to, de — reply, repartie. 

655. Remark I. — Although verbs which are conjugated 
with two pronouns of the same person generally remove 
every kind of amphibology, yet custom authorizes some 
familiar expressions, in which the possessive pronoun seems 
to be redundant ; as, 

II se tient ferme sur ses pieds, He stands firm upon his feet. 

Je Vai vu y de mes propres yeux, I have seen it with my own eyes. 

656. II. — When speaking of an habitual complaint, the 
possessive pronoun is properly used ; as, 

Sa migraine Va repris y His head-ache is returned. 

657. The possessive pronouns are subject to the same 
rules as the article ; they must therefore be repeated before 
all substantives which are either subject or regimen, and before 
all adjectives which express different qualities, although this 
is seldom observed in English ; as, 

Son pere, sa mere, et ses freres His father, mother, and brothers are 

sont de retour, come back. 

Je lui ai montre mes plus beaux I have shewn him my finest and my 

et mes plus vilains habits, ugliest dresses. 

EXERCISE. 

1. Whatever he may do, he always finds himself safe 

2. Can you still doubt the truth of what I tell you 1 Would you ask 
a stronger proof than that I give you, it is that I heard it— yes, heard it — 
with my own ears. 

(1.) Finds himself, se retrouver — safe, sur ses jambes 
(2.) Can, N. — doubt, douter de — ask, exiger. 

s2 



2J0 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 

3. My gout does not allow me a moment's repose. 

4. It is in vain that I exhort you to work and study : your idleness, 
that cruel disease under* which you labor, renders useless all the exhorta- 
tions of friendship. 

5. If you wish to be beloved, fail not to perform the promises you have 
just made. 

6. In the retreat that I have chosen for myself, my study and my garden 
are my greatest delight. 

7. He brought me into his laboratory, and showed me his large and 
small vessels. 



(3.) Allow, laisser. 

(4 ) It is in vain that I, je ai beau— exhort, A. — you labor, vous travaille. 

(5.) Fail not, ne pas manquer— perform, remplir— have just made, venir de faire, 

(6.) For myself, (to me) — study, cabinet— are, faire— greatest, plus cher. 

(7.) Brought, mener — laboratory, laboratoire— vessels, vaisseau. 



RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 

658. Qui, when it is the subject, may very properly relate 
ooth to persons and things. 

EXAMPLES. 
Vhomme qvijoue perd son temps, The man who games loses his time. 
Jje livre, qui plait le plus, n'est The book which pleases most is not 
pas toujours le plus utile, always the most useful. 

659. But when it is the regimen, it can only be used of 
persons or of things personified, whether the regimen be 
direct or indirect. 

EXAMPLES. 

Quand on est delicat el sage dans He who is wise, and discriminates in 
ses gouts, on ne s* attache pas, his choice, does not form an attach- 
sans savoir qui Von aime, ment without knowing the person 

he loves. 

Vhomme a qui appartient ce beau The man to whom this fine garden 
jar din est tres-riche, belongs is very rich. [ing. 

La femme de qui vous parlez, The woman of whom you are speak- 

660. Remark. — When the regimen indirect is expressed 
by the preposition de, then dont should be preferred to de 
qui. It is better to say, La femme dont vous parlez; how- 
ever, when the verb expresses a kind of transfer or convey- 
ance, de qui must be used ; as, 

Celui de qui je tlens cette nouvelle, The person from whom I had that 

intelligence. 

661. Rule I. — Qui must not be separated from its antece- 
dent when that antecedent is a noun. 

EXAMPLE. 
f, r n jeune homme qui est docile A young man who is obedient to the 
aux conseils qu'on ltd donne, advice that is given him, and who 
et qui aime a en recevoir, aura loves to receive it, will infallibly 
inj 'lillblemeiti du me rite, have merit. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 211 

662. Remark. — In some phrases, qui may be separated 
from the substantive by several words — that is, when the 
sense obliges us to refer it to that substantive ; as, 

II a fallu, avant toute chose, vous faire lire dans Pecriture sainte, 
Vhistoire du peuple de Dieu, qui fait le fondement de la religion. 

663. This sentence is very correct; because, as du peuple 
determines the kind of history, and de Dieu the kind of 
people, the mind necessarily goes back to the substantive 
histoire, to which it refers. 

664. Qui may likewise be separated from its antecedent, 
when this antecedent is a pronoun used as the regimen 
direct; as, 

11 la trouva qui plenrait a chaudes larmes, He found her crying bitterly. 
Je le vois qui jone, I see him playing. 

665. Because, in this case, the true place of the pronoun 
is before the verb, and it is the same as saying, II trouva 
elle qui pleurait, &c. je vois lui qui joue. Also in these 
kinds of sentences, which are real gallicisms : 

Ceux-la ne sont pas les plus mal- Those are not the most unhappy 
heureux, qui se plaignent le phis, who complain the most. 

EXERCISE. 

1. A young man -who loves vanity of dress, like a woman, is unworthy 
of wisdom and glory ; glory is only due to a heart that knows how* to* 
suffer pain and trample upon pleasure. 

2. Thyself, O my son, my dear son, thou* thyself that now enjoyest a 
youth so cheerful and so full of pleasure, remember that this delightful 
age is but a flower, ivlrich will be withered almost as soon as blown. 

3. Men pass away like flowers, which open in* the morning, and at 
night are withered and trampled under foot. 

4. You must have a man that loves nothing but truth and you, that will 
speak the truth in spite of you, that will force all your entrenchments; and 
this necessary character is the very man whom you have sent into exile. 

5. We perceived him waiting for us, quietly seated under the shade 
of a tree. 



(1.) Vanity of dress, a se parer vainement — trample upon, fouler aux pieds. 

(2.) Cheerful, vif— full of, feconde en — remember, se souvenir — delightful, bel — 
withered, secher — bloivn, 6clore. 

(3.) Open, s'epanouir— and, (which)— at night, le soir— withered, fletrir— under, a 
—foot, les pieds. 

(4.) You must have, il vous faut — nothing but, ne que — will speak, Q,. — will force, 
Qt— entrenchments, retranchement— character, homme— man, merae— sent into exile, 
exiler. 

(5.) Waiting for, (who waited) attendre— under, a. 

686. Rule II. — The relative qui must always have a 
reference to a noun taken in a determinate sense 

EXAMPLES. 

V homme est un animal raisonable, qui, &c, 
II me rccut avec une politesse, qui, &c. 



**> 



212 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 

667. But we cannot say, 

Uhomme est animal raisonable, qui, &c. 
II me recut avec politesse, qui, &c. 

668. Remark. — Though in many phrases the determinate 
nature of the nouns is not expressed, yet it is clearly under- 
stood. Thus, all these phrases are correct : 

U n'a point de livre, qui ne soit He has not a book that is not of his 

de son choix, own selecting. 

Y arUil ville dans le royaume qui Is there a city in the kingdom that is 

soit plus favorisee ? more favored? 

Tl se conduit en homme qui con- He behaves himself like a man who 

nait le monde, knows the world. 

II est accabU de maux qui ne He is overwhelmed with misfortunes 

lui laissent pas un instant de that do not allow him a moment's 

reposy rest. 

C y est une sorte de fruit, qui ne It is a sort of fruit that does not ripen 

murit pas en Europe, in Europe. 

669. From the translation of all the above examples it is evi- 
dent that livre, ville, maux, are really determinate, the meaning 
being, it n'a pas, un livre qui, &c. ; y a-t-il une ville qui, &c. 

EXERCISE. 

1. He received us with such goodness, civility, and grace, as charmed 
us, and made us forget all we had suffered. 

2. There is no city in the world -where there are more riches and a 
greater population. 

3. Is there a man who can say, " I shall live till to-morrow?" 

4. He has no friend but would make for him every kind of sacrifice. 

5. He is surrounded by enemies, ivho are continually observing him, 
and would be very glad to detect him in a fault. 

6. In his retreat, he lives like a philosopher, -who knows men and 
mistrusts them. 

7. The pine-apple is a sort of fruit that in Europe ripens only in 
hot-houses. 

8. That man is a sort of pedant -who takes words for ideas, and facts 
confusedly heaped together for knowledge. 

Such as, un...qui — civility, politesse. (2.) There are, Q. 

Can, Q,. (4.) But, qui ne — would make, S. 

(8.) Like a, en— philosopher, sage — mistrusts, se defier de. 
N (7) Pine-apple, ananas — hot-houses, serre chaude. 
(8.) Heaped together, entasser — knowledge, savoir. 

670. Que relates both to persons and things. It is always 
the regimen direct, and cannot subsist without an antecedent 
expressed, which it generally follows. L'homme queje vols, 
la peche queje mange. We say generally, because in some 
instances it may be separated from the antecedent by several 
words — that is, when the mind necessarily goes back to that 
antecedent, as in this sentence of Flechier's : 

Qu'est-ce qu'une armee 1 — c'est un corps anime d'une infinite de passions 
difTe rentes, qu'm\ homme habile fait mouvoir pour la defense de la patrie 



(3.) 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 213 

671. Remark. — There are instances where que is appa- 
rently used as regimen indirect for a qui or dont ; as, Cest a 
vous que je parle ; c'est de lui que j e parle ; de la J agon que 
fai dit la chose. But in this case, que is a conjunction. 

EXERCISE. 

1. The God whom the Hebrews and Christians have always served, 
has nothing in common with the deities full of imperfection, and even of 
vice, worshipped by the rest of the world. 

2. The Epic poem is not the panegyric of a hero -who is proposed as 
a* pattern, but the recital of great and illustrious actions, -which are 
exhibited for imitation. 

3. The good which we hope for* presents itself to us, and disappears 
like an empty dream, which vanishes when we awake : to teach us that 
the very things which we think we* hold fast in* our* hands,* may slip 
away in an instant. 

4. Plato says that, in writing, we ought to hide ourselves, to disappear, 
to make the world forget us, that we may present nothing but the truths 
we wish to impress. 

(1.) (That the rest of the world worshipped). 

(2.) Is proposed, on propose — as, pour— pattern, modele— is exhibited, on donne — 
imitation, exemple. 

(3.) Good, bien — disappears, s'envoler — empty, vain — vanishes, &.C., le reveil fait 
evanouir — hold fast, tenir F. le mieux — slip away, nous echappent. 

(4.) We, on — to make the world forget, se faire oublier — that we may present but, 
pour ne produire que— wish, vouloir— impress, persuader. 

672. Lequel m., laquelle f., lesquels m. pi., lesquelles f. pi., 
and dont, relate both to persons and things. But lequel, &c. 
ought never to be used, either as a subject or object, except 
to avoid ambiguity; for whenever the sense is evident, qui 
or que must be used. 

673. Lequel, laquelle, lesquels, lesquelles, with the preposi- 
tion de, is either followed or preceded by a noun, which it 
unites to the principal sentence. If it be followed, dont is 
preferable to duquel m., de laquelle f., (lesquels m. pi., des- 
quelles f. pi., both for persons and things. Thus : 

La Tamise dont le lit, and not de laquelle 
Le prince dont la protection, and not duquel. 

674. If lequel, laquelle, lesquels, lesquelles, be preceded by 
the noun, we can only make use of duquel, de laquelle, des- 
quels, desquelles, when speaking of things ; as, La Tamise, 
dans le lit de laquelle : and it is always better to use it when 
speaking of persons ; as, Le prince a la protection duquel : 
de qui would not be so well. 

675. Lequel, laquelle, lesquels, lesquelles, with the prepo- 
sition a, when speaking of things, requires auquel m., a la- 
quelle f., auxquels m. pi., auxquelles f. pi.; as, Les places 
auxquelles il aspire; but we ought to prefer a qui when 






214 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 

speaking of persons ; as, Les rois a qui on doit obeir. Aux- 
quels would not do so well. 

676. So the relative qui, preceded by a preposition, never 
relates to things, but to persons only. 

EXERCISE. 

1 . The grand principle on -which the whole turns is, that all* the world 
is but one republic, of which God is the common father, and in which 
every nation forms, as it were, one great family. 

2. Homer, -whose genius is grand and sublime like nature, is the greatest 
poet, and perhaps the most profound moralist of antiquity. 

3. The celebrated Zenobia, -whose noble firmness you have admired, 
preferred dying with the title of queen, rather than accept the advantage- 
ous offers which Aurelian made her. 

4. The Alps, on the summit of -which the astonished eye discovers 
perpetual snow and ice, present at sunset the most striking and most 
magnificent spectacle. 

5. A king, to -whose care we owe a good law, has done more for his 
own glory than if he had conquered the universe. 

6. The ambitious man* sees nothing but pleasure in the possession of 
the offices to -which he aspires with so much eagerness, instead of seeing 
the trouble that is inseparable from them. 

7. Kings, -whom religion makes it our duty to obey, are, upon earth, 
the true representation of the providence of God. 

(1.) Turns, rouler — every, chaque — as it were, comme. 

(3 ) Preferred, aimer mieux— than, que de. 

(4.; Perpetual ,eteme\— snow, ice, pi. — sunset, soleil couchant — striking, imposant. 

(5.) Care, solicitude. [image. 

(7.) Whom, (to whom)— makes it our duty to, nous fait un devoir de — representation, 

677. Quoi only relates to things. It is placed after the 
word to which it relates, but is always preceded by a prepo- 
sition, and is generally followed by the subject of the phrase 
with which it is connected ; as, 

La chose a quoi on pense ; voila les conditions sans quoi la chose ne 
pent sefaire. 

678. To this mode of expression are to be preferred lequel, 
duquel, auquel, as being much better ; for quoi is never used 
with any degree of propriety but when it relates to a vague 
and indefinite subject, such as ce or rim; as, 

C'est de quoi ,/e rrCoccupe sans cesse. 
II n'y a rien a quoi je sois plus dispos4. 

679. Oil, d'ou, par oil, relate only to things. They are 
never used but when the nouns to which they refer express 
some kind of motion or rest, at least metaphorically ; as, 

Voila le but oil il tend, That is the end he aims at. 

Cest une chose d'ou depend le It is a thing upon which the public 

bonheur public, happiness depends. 

Les lieux par oh. il a passe', The places through which he has passed. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 215 

EXERCISE. 

1. What a young man, who begins the world, ought principally to 
attend to, is not to give it a high opinion of his understanding, but to 
gain numerous friends by the qualities of his heart. 

2. A youth passed in idleness, effeminacy, and pleasure, lays up for* 
us nothing but sorrow and disgust in old age ; this, however, is -what we 
little think of when we are young. 

3. There is nothing by -which we are more affected than the loss of 
fortune, although, being frail and perishable in its nature, it cannot con- 
tribute to our happiness. 

4. A grove, in which I defy the burning heat of the dog-star, a retired 
valley, where I can meditate in peace, a high hill, whence my eye extends 
over immense plains, are the places where I spend the happiest moments 
of my life. 

(1.) To what, ce a quoi— begins, entrer dans — to attend, s'attacher— it, y — opinion, 
idee — understanding, esprit — to gain, se faire — numerous, beaucoup de. 

(2.) Idleness, inutilite — effeminacy, mollesse— pleasure, volupte — lays up, preparer 
— of, a — we, on. 

(3.) By, a — we, on — affected, sensible— frail, frele — by, de — cannot, Q,. — our, the. 

(4.) Grove, bosquet — defy, braver — burning heats, ardeur — dog-star, canicule — 
spend, passer. 



ABSOLUTE PRONOUNS. 

680. Qui relates only to persons presenting but a vague, 
indeterminate idea ; as, 

Qui sera assez hardi pour Who will be bold enough to attack 
Vattaquer ? him. 

681. It is likewise used in the feminine and in the plural; as, 

Qui est cette personne-Za ? Who is that person ? 

Qui sont ces femmes-la? Who are those women 1 

682. Que and quoi relate to things only ; as, 

Que pouvait la valeur en ce com- What could valor do in that fatal 

batfuneste? combat] 

A quoi pensez-vous ? What are you thinking of? 

683. Que is sometimes used for a quoi, de quoi ; as, 

Que sert la science sans la vertu ? What avails learning without virtue ? 
Que sert a Vavare d' 'avoir des What use is it to the miser to possess 
tresors ? treasures 1 

that is, a quoi sert, &c. de quoi sert, &c. 

684. Quoi, when relating to a whole sentence, is the only 
authorized expression that can be used ; as, 

La vie passe comme un songe ; c'est cependant a quoi on ne pense gueres. 

685. Remark. — Que and quoi require the preposition de 
before the adjective or substantive that follows them ; as 

Que dit-on de nouveau 1 quoi de plus agreable ! 
Que d'inconsequences dans sa conduite ! 



216 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 

686. Quel m., quelle f., quels m. pi., quelles f. pi., relate 
beth to persons and things ; as, 

Quel homme peut se promettre un bonheur constant 1 
Quelle grace ! quelle beaute ! mais quelle modestie ! 

687. Ou, oVoii, par oil, relate but to things. 

EXERCISE ON ABSOLUTE PRONOUNS. 

1. Who could ever persuade himself, did not daily experience convince 
us of it, that, out of a hundred persons, there are ninety who sacrifice to 
the enjoyment of the present all the best-founded hopes of the future ? 

2. Who would not love virtue for its own sake could he see it in ail 
its beauty 1 

3. He who does not know how to apply himself in his youth, does not 
know -what to do when arrived at maturity. 

4. He was a wise legislator who, having given to his countrymen laws 
calculated to make them good and happy, made them swear not to violate 
any of those laws during his absence : after -which, he went away, exiled 
himself from his country, and died poor in a foreign land. 

5. What people of antiquity ever had better laws than the Egyptians 1 
What other nation ever undertook to erect monuments calculated to 
triumph over both time and barbarism 1 

6. What more instructive and entertaining- than to read celebrated 
authors in their own language 1 What beauty, -what delicacy, and grace, 
which cannot be transcribed into a translation are discovered in them ! 

7. When Menage had published his book on the Origin of the French 
Language, Christina, queen of Sweden, said : — " Menage is 3 (the most 
troublesome) 'man 2 (in the world) : he cannot let 2 one word 'go without 
its passport ; he must know -whence it comes, -where it has passed through, 
and -whither it is going." 

(].) Did, si — out of, sur— future, avenir. 

(2.) Its own sake, elle meme — could he, si on pouvoir H. [dans l'age mur. 

(3.) How, (to what) — what, (to what)— to do, s'occuper — when arrived at maturity, 

(4.) He, ce — calculated, propre — not to, (that they would not) — went away, partir. 

(5.) Calculated to, fait pour — both, egaleraent — over, de. 

(6.) Language, langue— delicacy, finesse — which cannot, qu'on ne peut — be tran- 
scribed, faire passer— translation, traduction — are, &c. n'y decouvre-t-on pas. 

(7.) When, apres que— Christina, Christine— troublesome, incommode— in the, du— 
cannot, ne saurait — go, passer — must, vouloir. 



DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 

688. Ce, joined to the verb etre, always governs this verb 
in the singular, except when it is followed by the third person 
plural. 

C'est moi, e'est toi, e'est lui, e'est nous, e'est vous. 

689. But in different cases we must say, 

Ce sont eux, ce sont elles, Sont-c<? les Anglais, qui ont fait cela? 

Ce furent vos ancetres qui, Est-ce les Anglais que vous aimez ? 

Fut-ce nos propres Jils qui, Fut-c«? nos propres Jils que. 

690. Ce, when relating to a person or thing mentioned 
before, supplies the place of il or elle 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 217 

691. Ce must always be used when the verb etre is fol- 
lowed by a substantive, accompanied by the indefinite article 
or the numerical adjective un. 

EXAMPLES. 

Lisez Homer e et Virgile : ce sont Read Homer and Virgil : they are 

les plus grands poetes de Van- the best poets of antiquity. 
tiquite, 

La douceur, VaffabiUte, et une Gentleness, affability, and a certain 

certaine urbanite, distinguent urbanity, distinguish the man 

Vhomme qui vit dans le grand who frequents polite company ; 

monde ; ce sont la les marques these are marks by which he 

auxquelles on le reconnait, may be known. 

Avez-vous hi Platon ? c'est un des Have you read Plato 1 he is one of 

plus beaux girdes de Vantiquite, the greatest geniuses of antiquity. 

692. But when the verb etre is followed by an adjective, or 
by a substantive taken adjectively, il or elle must be used. 

EXAMPLES. 

Lisez DSmosthene et Ciceron ; Read Demosthenes and Cicero ; 

ils sont tres-eloquens, they are very eloquent. 

Tai vu Vhbpital de Greenwich; I have seen Greenwich Hospital ; 

il est magnifique et digne d?une it is superb, and worthy of a 

grande nation, great nation. 

Compteriez-vous sur Valtre ? Would you rely upon Valere 1 do 

ignorez-vous gw'il est homme you not know that he is a man 

a ne jamais revenir de ses pre- who will never abandon his first 

mitres idets? opinions] 

EXERCISE ON DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 

1. It is -we who have drawn that misfortune upon* ourselves* through 
our thoughtlessness and imprudence. 

2. It -was the Egyptians that first observed the course of the stars, 
regulated the year, and invented arithmetic. 

3. Peruse attentively Plato and Cicero: they are the two philosophers 
of antiquity who have given us the most sound and luminous ideas upon 
morality. 

4. If you are intended for the pulpit, read over and over again Bour- 
daloue and Massillon : they are both very eloquent ; but the aim of the 
former is to convince, and that of the latter to persuade. 

(1.) Have drawn, s'attirer — thoughtlessness, legerete. 
(2.) First les premiers — stars, astres. 
(3.) Peruse, lire — sound, sain — morality, morale. 

(4.) Are intended for, se destiner a— pulpit, chaire— read over and over again, lire 
et relire sans cesse — aim, but. 

693. Ce, followed by a relative pronoun, relates to things 
only. It is always masculine singular, as it only denotes a 
vague object, which is not sufficiently specified to know its 
gender and number. 

EXAMPLE. 

Ce qui flatte est plus dangereux What flatters is more dangerous 
que ce qui offense, than what offends. 

T 



218 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 

694. Ce, joined to the relative pronouns qui, que, dont, 
and quoi, has in some instances a construction peculiar to 
itself. Both ce and the relative pronoun that follows it form, 
with the verb which they precede, the subject of another 
phrase, of which the verb is always etre. Now, etre may 
be followed by another verb, an adjective, or a noun. 

695. When etre, then, is followed by another verb, the 
demonstrative ce must be repeated ; as, 

Ge que f aime le phis, c'est d'etre seul, What I like most, is to be alone. 

696. When followed by an adjective, the demonstrative is 
not repeated ; as, 

Ce dont vous vertex de me parler What you have been mentioning to 
est horrible, ' me is horrid. 

697. When it is followed by a substantive, the demonstrative 
may either be repeated or not, at pleasure, except in the case 
of a plural or a personal pronoun. Thus, we may say, 

Ce que je dis, est la verite, or, c'est la virite, What I say is the truth, 

698. Though the former is best. But we must say, 

Ce qui nCindigne, ce sont les injus~ What provokes me, are the injuries 

tices, qifon ne cesse de faire, which are continually committed. 

Ce qui m J arrache au sentiment What alleviates the grief that op- 

qui rrCaccable, c'est vous, presses me, is you. 

699. Most of these rules contribute to the elegance of the 
language. 

EXERCISE. 

1. What is astonishing is not always -what is pleasing. 

2. What the miser thinks least of, is to enjoy his riches. 

3. What pleases us in the writings x>f the ancients is to see that they 
have taken nature as a model, and that they have painted her with a 
noble simplicity. 

4. What that good king has done for the happiness of his people de- 
serves to be handed down to the latest posterity. 

5. What constitutes poetry is not the exact number and regular 
cadence of syllables ; but it is the sentiment which animates every thing, 
the lively fictions, bold figures, and* beauty and variety of the imagery : 
it it the enthusiasm, fire, impetuosity, force — a something in the words 
and thoughts which nature alone can impart. 

6. What we justly admire in Shakspeare are those characters always 
natural and always well* sustained. 

7. What keeps me attached to life is you, my son, whose tender age 
has still need of my care and advice. 

(i) Is astonishing, 6tonner — is pleasing-, plaire. 
(2.) What, (that to which) — miser, avare. 
(3.) As a, pour. 

(4.) Deserves, 6tre digne — to be handed down, £tre transmis — latest, la plus reculee. 
(5.) Constitutes, faire — exact, fixe^—lively, vif— imagery, image, pi. — a something, 
un je ne aais quoi — words, paroles— impart, donner. 
(6-> We, on— justly, avec justice— natural, dans la nature— sustained, soutenu. 
(7.) Keeps attached, attacber— care, pi. — advice, pi. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 219 

700. There are two ways of employing celui m., celle f., 
ceux m. pi., celles f. pi. In the first, they are followed by a 
noun, or pronoun preceded by the preposition de. 

EXAMPLES. 

Celui de vous qui, &c. Whichever of you that, &c. 

Cette montre ressemble a celle de That watch is like that of your 
voire frere, brother. 

701. In the second, they are followed by qui,q ue, or dont ; as, 

Celui qui ne pense qu'a lui seul He who thinks of nobody but himself 
dispense les autres d'y penser, excuses others from thinking of him. 

Votre nouvelie est plus sure que Your intelligence is more authentic 
celle qu'on debitait hier, than that which was circulated yes- 

terday. 

702. In these two cases, they are applied both to persons 
and things. 

703. In the latter of these instances, celui, &c. are some- 
times omitted, and this turn gives strength and elegance to 
the expression ; as, 

Qui veut trop se faire craindre, He who wishes to make himself too 
se fait rarement aimer ; much feared, seldom makes him- 

self beloved. 

704. Ceci and cela apply only to things : however, in the 
familiar style, custom authorizes us to say, in speaking of one 
person individually, or of many collectively, Cela est heureux ! 
cela croupit dans lafange; cela est gueux et Jier, &c. 

EXERCISE. 

1. Whichever of you shall be found to excel the others, both in mind 
and body, shall be acknowledged king of the island. 

2. There are admirable pictures : these are after the manner of Rubens 
and those after the manner of Van-Huysum. 

3. Why are the statues of the most celebrated modern sculptors, not- 
withstanding the perfection to which the arts have been carried, so much 
inferior to those of the ancients 1 

4. He whose soul, glowing, as it were, with divine fire, shall represent 
to himself the whole of nature, and shall breathe into objects that spirit 
of life which animates them, those affecting traits which delight and ravish 
us, will be a man of real genius. 

5. He that judges of others by himself is liable to many mistakes. 

6. He that is easily offended discovers his weak side, and affords his 
enemies an opportunity of taking advantage of it. 

7. He -who loves none but himself deserves not to be loved by others. 

(1.) Be found to ezcelthe others, on jugera vainqueur— both in, et pour— and, et pour. 

(2.) There are, voila de — pictures, tableau — are after, etre dans — manner, genre. 

(3.) Are, (to be placed before so much inferior) — have been carried, on a porte— *■ 
inferior, au-dessous. 

(4.) Glowing with, enflamme de— as it were, pour ainsi dire— the whole of, tout 

shall breathe into, repandre sur — affecting, touchant— delight, seduire— real, vrai. 

(5.) By, d'apres — liable, expose — mistakes, meprises. 

(6.) Is offended, s'offenser— weak side, faible — affords, fournir a— of taking advan- 
tage, profiler. 



220 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 

CHAPTER V. 
PRONOUNS INDEFINITE. 



705. Though on may generally be considered as a mascu- 
line pronoun, as in the phrase on rfest pas toujours maitre 
de ses passions, there are, however, occasions in which it is 
evidently feminine; as, on ri* est pas toujours jeune et jolie: 
it may likewise be followed by a plural ; as, on se battit en 
desesperes ; est-on des traitres ? 

706. This pronoun must be repeated before all the verbs 
of a sentence, and refer to one and the same subject. Thus, 
the sentence 

On croit etre aime et on ne nous aime pas 
is incorrect : it should be, 

On croit etre aime et Ton ne Test pas. 

707. Quiconque is generally masculine : however, it is 
feminine when speaking of or to females ; as, quiconque de 
vous, Mesdames, &c. : though, perhaps, celle de vous, &c, 
is preferable. 

EXERCISE ON PRONOUNS INDEFINITE. 

1. Do you sincerely think, said Emily to Lucilla, that when women are 
sensible and pretty, they are ignorant of* it ] No, they know it very 
well : but if they are watchful over their character, they are not proud of 
these advantages. 

2. We are not slaves, to receive such treatment. 

3. Do you know what they do here ] They eat, they drink, they dance, 
they play, they walk — in a word, they kill time in the gayest manner 
possible. 

4. Whoever of you is bold enough to slander me, I will make him 
repent it. 

5. Wlwever of you is attentive and discreet shall receive a reward that 
will flatter her. 



(1.) Sincerely, de bonne foi — Emily, Emilie — women, on — they, on — know, savoir — 
watchful over, jaloux de — character, reputation — are proud, s'enorgueillir. 
(2.) We, on — slaves, des esclaves — to receive, pour essuyer de. 
(3) They, on — in the gayest manner, le plus gaiment— possible, (that they can). 
(4.^ Is, L. — to slander, pour medire de — it, (of it). 
(5.) Is, It.— that will, fait pour. 

708. Chacun m., chacune f., though always singular, may 
be followed sometimes by son, sa, ses, and sometimes by 
leur, leurs, which, in many instances, is embarrassing. 

709. There is no difficulty in those phrases where chacun 
is not contrasted with a plural number : for then son, sa, ses, 
must be used ; as, 

Donnez a chacun sa party Give to each his share. 

Que chacun songe a ses affaires, Let every one mind his own business* 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 221 

710. Rule. — In phrases where chacun is contrasted with 
a plural to which it refers, son, sa, ses, must be employed 
when chacun is placed after the regimen ; but leur, leurs, 
must be used when chacun is placed before the regimen. 

EXAMPLES OF SON, S^, SES. 

Remettez ces medailles chacune en Return those medals each into its 

sa place, proper place. 

Les homines devraient s 1 aimer cha- Men ought to love one another, 

cun pour son propre interet, each for his own interest. 

EXAMPLE OF LEUR, LEURS. 

Les hommes devraient avoir, chacun Men ought, for their own interest, 
pour leur propre interet, de to have an affection for each 
V amour les uns pour les autres, other. 

711. Remark. — In phrases where chacun is contrasted with 
a plural there are two senses, the collective and the distribu- 
tive. When chacun is placed after the regimen, the collective 
sense expressed by the plural is finished ; and the distributive 
chacun acts separately the part of each individual : but when 
chacun precedes the regimen, the collective sense remaining 
incomplete, must be carried on to the end ; and then the pro- 
noun which follows chacun is put in the plural ; as, 

La reine dit elle-meme aux deputes, qu'il etait temps qu'ils s'en retour- 
nassent chacun chez eux. 

EXERCISE. 

1. Go into my library, and put the books which have been sent back 
to me each into its place. 

2. They have all brought offerings to the temple, every one according 
to his means and devotion. 

3. Thierry charged Uncelanus to carry his orders to the mutineers, and 
to make them retire, each under his colors. 

4. Each of them has brought his offering, and fulfilled his religious duty. 

5. Had Ronsard and Balzac, each in his manner of writing, a sufficient 
degree of merit to form after them any very great man in verse and in prose ? 

6. After a day so usefully spent, we went back each to our own home. 

7. Minds that possess any correctness examine things with attention, 
in order to give a fair judgment of them ; and they place each of* them 
in the rank it ought to occupy. 



(2.) Offering, offrande. 

(3.) To carry, aller porter — toiutineers, rnutin — colors, drapeau, sing. 
(4.) (They have brought each their, &.c.)— fulfilled, remplir. 
(5.) Manner ofviriting, genre — a sufficient degree, assez — merit, bon — any, un, 
(6.) Day, journee — went back, retourner — to, chez — our own home, nous. 
(7.) Possess any, avoir de — correctness, justesse— give a fair judgment, juger avec 
connaissauce— place, mettre — to occupy t avoir. 

712. Per sonne, used as a pronoun, is always masculine ; of 
course, the adjective relating to it must be of that gender ; as, 

Per sonne n'est aussi heureux qu'elle, Nobody is so happy as she. 

t2 



222 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 

713. JJun et V autre require the verb they govern to be in 
the plural. See page 147. 

714. Ni Pun ni V autre likewise generally govern the verb 
in the plural, when both may at the same time receive the action 
expressed by the verb : however, the two following modes 

Ni Tun ni l'autre rfont fait leur devoir, or 
Ni Fun ni l'autre n'a fait son devoir, 

are authorized : but whenever this action applies only to a 
single object, the verb must be in the singular; as, 

Ni Tun ni l'autre n'est mon pere ; ni Tun ni l'autre ne sera nomme a 
cette ambassade. 

715. But when ni Pun ni P autre elegantly stand after the 
verb, the verb is always in the plural ; as, 

Us ne sont morts ni Tun ni l'autre. 

* i 

EXERCISE. 

1. Nobody is so severe, so virtuous in public, as some women who 
practise the least restraint in private. 

2. Nobody could be happier than she ; but as a consequence of that 
levity which you know she has, she has lost all the advantages that she 
had received from nature and education. 

3. Racine and Fenelon will be always the delight of feeling minds : 
both possessed in the highest degree the art of exciting in us at pleasure 
the most tender and the most lively emotions. 

4. Balzac and Voiture enjoyed in their time great celebrity ; but neither 
has been read since by good taste : the native and simple graces are pre- 
ferred to the bombast of the former and the affectation of the latter. 



(1.) So, aussi — some, certain — practise the least restraint, etre le moins retenu. 

(2.) Could, H. — that, un — levity, legerete — know she has, lui connaitre. 

(3.) Always, dans tous les temps — both, Tun et l'autre— in the, au— pleasure, gre. 

(4.) Enjoyed, G. — neither, ni Tun ni l'autre — has been read, (they read them no 
more) — native, du naturel — simple, de la simplicity — are preferred, depuis que le bon 
gout a fait preferer les, &c. — bombast, bouffissure. 

716. Tout and rien, when the regimen direct, are placed 
after the verb in simple tenses, and between the auxiliary and 
the participle in compound tenses; as, // avoue tout; il 
ri* avoue rien ; il a tout avoue ; il n'a rien avoue. 

717. But when they form the regimen indirect, they are 
always placed after the verb, both in simple and in compound 
tenses ; as, 77 rit de tout ; il ne se mele de rien; il a pense 
it lout ; il rt a pense a rien. 

718. Tout is sometimes used as an adverb ; as, 

E lui dit tout froidement, He has told him quite coolly. 

719. Sometimes also it represents quoique, encore que, 
entierement, quelque, in which case the following rule must 
be observed : 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 223 

720. Rule.-— Tout before an adjective, or a substantive 
which is used adjectively, never takes either gender or num- 
ber, except when immediately followed by an adjective femi- 
nine beginning with a consonant or h aspirated ; as, 

Les enj ans, tout aimables quHls sont, Children, amiable as they are. 

lis sont tout interdits, They are quite disconcerted. 

La vertu tout austere qu'elle parait, Virtue, austere as it may appear. 

Ces images tout amusantes qiCelles These images, entertaining as they 

sont y may be. 

Cest nne tete toute vide, It is quite a vacant head. 

Ces da?nes, toutes spirituelles qu'elles These ladies, witty as they may 

sont, be. 

Ces fieurs sont tout aussi fraiches These flowers are quite as fresh as 

que celles que vous avez, those which you have. 

Ces dames sont, tout ainsi que vous, These ladies, as well as you, are 

tout comme vous, belles, jeunes et handsome, young, and inge- 

spirituelles, nious. 

721. In this latter sense, tout is little more than a mere 
expletive. 

EXERCISE. 

1. Children, amiable as they are, have nevertheless many faults, which 
it is of importance to correct. 

2. The philosophers of antiquity, although very* enlightened, have 
given us but very confused ideas of the Deity, and very vague notions 
about the principal duties of the law of nature. 

3. Those flowers, inodorous as they are, are not the less esteemed. 

4. Virtue, austere as it is, makes us enjoy real pleasures. 

5. Fables, although very* entertaining, yet truly interest us only when 
they convey instruction to us, under the disguise of an ingenious allegory. 

6. Although that absurd pedant is an incessant scribbler, yet his head 
is altogether empty. 

7. Far be from us those maxims of flattery, that kings are born with 
talents, and that their favored souls come out of God's hands completely 
wise and learned. 

8. Those fountains glide quite gently through a mead enamelled with 
flowers. 

9. These peaches are quite as good as those of the south of France. 



(1 ) Have nevertheless, ne laisser pas a" avoir— faults, defaut — of importance, essen- 
ce.) Enlightened, eclaires qu'ils ttaient — of nature, naturel. [tiel. 
(3.) Inodorous, inodore — not, n'en. 

(4) Enjoy, gouter de. [convey, offrir — disguise, voile. 

(5.) Entertaining, amusantes qu'elles sont — truly, veritablement — only, ne que — 
C.) Incessant, infatigable — scribbler, tcrivailleur — his head is, (he has not less the 

head) — not, n'en — altogether, tout. 
(7.) Far be, loin — of, de la — are born, naissent — with talents, habile— favored, pri- 

vilegie — come out, sortir — learned, savant. 
(8.) Glide, couler— gently, doucement — through a mead y sur un gazon. 

722. Quelque — que, sing. m. and f., quelques — que, pi. m. 
and f., joined to a substantive, either alone or accompanied by 
an adjective, take the sign of the plural. 



224 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 

EXAMPLES. 
Quelques richesses que vous ayez, Whatever riches you may possess. 
Quelques bonnes ceuvres que vous "Whatever good actions you may 

fassiez, do. 

Quelques peines affreuses que vous However dreadful pains you may 

eprouviez, suffer. 

723. But when joined to an adjective separated from its 
substantive, it does not take the sign of the plural. 

EXAMPLES. 

Tous les hommes, quelque opposes All men, however opposite they 

qu'ils soient, may be. 

Ces actions, quelque belles qiCon Those actions, however brilliant 

les trouve, they may be found. 

724. Quelque — que, sing. m. and f., quelques — que, pi. m. 
and f., quel que, m. s., quelle que, f. s., quels que, m. pi., 
and quelles que, f. pi., joined to a substantive (see page 74), 
have the same meaning, although they are not used indiffer- 
ently for each other. If the pronoun stands before the sub- 
stantive, we must make use of quelque — que ; as, 

Quelques richesses que vous ayez ; 

725. But if the verb intervene, then we make use of quel 
que in two separate words ; as, 

Quelles que soient les richesses que vous ayez. 

EXERCISE. 

1. Whatever talents you may possess, whatever advantages you may 
have received from nature and education, with* whatever perfections you 
may be endowed, expect only the suffrage of a small number of men. 

2. However great services you may have rendered mankind, rather 
look for their ingratitude than their acknowledgements. 

3. However useful, however well written the works which you have 
published, yet think not that you will immediately reap the fruits of your 
labors : it is but by slow degrees that light introduces itself among men. 
The course of time is swift ; but it seems to lag when it brings reason 
and truth along with it. 

4. Whatever may be the obstacles which ignorance, prejudice, and 
envy oppose to the true principles of an art, yet we ought never to be 
deterred from propagating them : the sun does not cease to shine because 
its light hurts the eyes of night-birds. 

5. Whatever be your birth, whatever your riches and dignities, re- 
member, that you are frustrating the views of Providence, if you do not 
make use of them for the good of mankind. 



(1.) Possess, avoir— have received, tenir — be endowed, posseder — expect, ne s'attendre 
a — but, que. 

(2.) Mankind, homme, pi.— rather look for, compter plutot — acknowledg entente, 
reconnaissance, sing. 

(3.) Immediately, de suite— reap, recueillir — by slow degrees, avec lenteur — among, 
chez — swift, rapide — to lag, se trainer — along with it, a. sa suite. 

(4.) We, on — to be deterred, se rebuter— ^ ropagating, repandre — shine, eclairer-- 
it8, la — hurts, blesser — night-birds, oiseau de nuit. 

(5 ) Are frustrating, frustrer. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB* 225 

CHAPTER VI. 

OF THE VERB. 



Agreement of the Verb with its Subject. 



726. It has been observed that the verb which has two 
subjects, both singular, is put in the plural ; but to this rule 
there are the following 

727. Exceptions. — 1, A verb with two subjects in the 
singular is not put in the plural when the two subjects are 
only joined together by the conjunctions ou, comme, aussi- 
bien que, autant que, &c. 

EXAMPLES. 

La seduction ou la terreur /'a en- Either persuasion or terror has drawn 

traine dans le parti des rebelles, him into the party of the rebels. 

Le roi, aussi-bien que son minis- The king, as -well as his ministry, 

ttre, veut le bien public, -wishes for the public good. 

Son honnetete, autant que son es- His honesty, as much as his wit, 

prit, le fait rechercher, makes him be courted. 

Venvie, comme V ambition, est Envy, like ambition, is a blind pas- 

une passion aveugle, sion. 

728. 2. — The verb is likewise put in the singular, though 
preceded by plurals, either when there is an expression which 
collects all the substantives into one — such as, tout, ce, rien, 
&c. — or when the conjunction mats is placed before the last 
substantive, and this is in the singular. 

EXAMPLES. 

Biens, dignites, honneurs, tout Riches, dignities, honors, every thing, 

disparait a la mort, vanishes at death. 

Jeux, conversations, spectacles, Games, conversations, shows, no thing 

rien ne la distrait, diverts her. 

Perfidies, noirceurs, incendies, Perfidies, enormities, conflagrations, 

massacres, ce ?i , est la qiCune massacres, all this is but a feeble 

faible image, &c. representation, &c. 

J\*on~seulement toutes ses richesses Not only all his riches and honors, 

et tons ses honneurs, mais toute but all his virtue vanishes. 
sa vertu s'evanouit, 

EXERCISE ON THE VERB. 

1. Either fear or inability prevented them from moving. [bosom. 

2. The fear of death, or rather the love of life, began to revive in his 

3. Alcibiades, as ivell as Plato, was among the disciples of Socrates, 

4. Lycurgus, like Solon, was a wise legislator. 

(1.) Inability, impuissance — moving, remuer. 

(2.) Began to revive, se reveiller— in, au fond Ae-^-bosom, cceur,. 

(3.) Among, au nombre de. 

(4) Lycurgus, Lycurgue, 



* 



226 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 

5. Euripides, as much as Sophocles, contributed to the glory of the 
Athenians. 

6. Riches, dignities, honors, glory, pleasure, every thing loses its 
charms from the moment we possess it, because none of those things can 
fill the heart of man. 

7. The gentle zephyrs which preserved in that place, notwithstanding 
the scorching heat of the sun, a delightful coolness : streams gliding with 
a sweet murmur through meadows interspersed with amaranths and vio- 
lets : a thousand springing flowers, which enamelled carpets ever green : 
a wood of those tufted trees that bear golden apples, and the blossom of 
which, renewed every season, yields the sweetest of all perfumes : the 
warbling of birds : the continual prospect of a fruitful country : in a 
word, nothing of what till then had made him happy, could assuage the 
feelings of his grief. 



(6.) We, on — none, rien— those things, tout cela. 

(7.) Preserved, entretenir — scorching heat, ardeur — interspersed with, parsemer 
de — springing, naissant — carpets, tapis — tvfled, touffu — golden, (of gold) — renewed, 
(which renews) se renouveler— (in) every season — yields, re pandr q— prospect, spec- 
tacle — made, rendre— assuage, Tarracher k— feeling, sentiment. 



Of the Collective Partitive. 

729. The collectives general have nothing to distinguish 
them from substantives common, with regard to the laws of 
agreement ; but the collectives partitive apparently deviate 
from those laws in some instances. 

7B0. Rule. — The verb which relates to a collective parti- 
tive is put in the plural when that partitive is followed by the 
preposition de and a plural ; but it is put in the singular, either 
when the partitive is followed by a regimen singular, or when 
it expresses a determinate quantity, or lastly, when it presents 
an idea independent of the plural which follows it. 

EXAMPLES OF THE PLURAL. 

La plupart des hommes sont bien The greatest part of men are very 
prompts dans leurs jugemens, hasty in their judgments. 

Bien des philosophes se sont Many philosophers have been mis- 
trompes, taken. 

EXAMPLES OF THE SINGULAR. 

Une infinite de peuple est accourue An immense number of people 

(regimen singular), flocked together. 

La moitie des soldats a peri (deter- One half of the soldiers has 

minate quantity), perished. 

Le plus grand nombre des troupes a The greater number of the troops 

peri (idea independent of plural), has perished. 

731. Thus the substantives partitive la plupart, une infi- 
nite, unefoule, un nombre, la plus grande par tie, une sorte, 
&c, and words signifying quantity — such as peu, beaucoup, 
assez, moins, plus, trop, tant, combien, and que used for 
combien, followed by a noun joined to them by the preposition 






PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 227 

de — have not the least influence on the verb, and conse- 
quently, it is not with them that the verb agrees, but with the 
noun which follows them. 

732. Remark. — The words infinite and la plupart, used 
by themselves, require the verb in the plural ; as, Une infinite 
pensent, la plupart sont cTavis. 

EXERCISE ON THE COLLECTIVE PARTITIVE. 

1. Many persons experience that human life is every where a state in 
which much is to be endured and little to be enjoyed. 

2. Many poets think that poetry is the art of uniting pleasure with 
truth, by calling imagination to the help of reason. 

3. Few persons reflect that time, like money, may be lost by unseason- 
able avarice. 

4. So many years of familiarity were chains of iron which linked me 
to those men who beset me every hour. 

5. Hoiv many wise men* have thought that, to seclude one's self from 
the world was to pull out the teeth of devouring animals, to take away 
from the wicked the use of his poniard, from calumny its poisons, and 
from envy its serpents ! 

6. A company of young Phoenicians, of uncommon beauty, clad in 
fine linen, whiter than snow, danced a* long while the dances of their 
own* country, then those of Egypt, and lastly those of Greece. 

7. A troop of nymphs, crowned with flowers, whose lovely tresses 
flowed over their shoulders, and waved with the wind, swam in shoals 
behind her car. 

8. At the time of the invasion of Spain by the Moors, an innumerable 
multitude of people retired into the Asturias, and there proclaimed Pela- 
gius king. 

9. A third-part of the enemy were left dead on the field of battle ; the 
rest surrendered at discretion. 

10. The innumerable crowd of carriages which are to be seen in 
London during the winter astonishes foreigners. 

(1) Much is. Sec (one has a great deal of pains and little of real enjoyments). 
(3) Unseasonable, hors de propos. 

(4.) Familiarity, habitude — linked, lier — beset, obsMer. [takeaway from, 6ter a. 
(5.) How many, que de — to seclude one's self, se retirer— pull out of, arracher a — ta 
(6.) Company, troupe — clad in, et vetu de— linen, lin. 

(7.) Lovely, beau — tresses, cheven— flowed, pendre — waved, flotter — with, au gre de 
— swam, nager H — shoals, foule — car, char 
(8.) Moors, Maure — retired, se retirer — Qsturias, Asturies — Pelagius, Pelage. 
(9.) A third-part, un tiers— enemy, pi. — surrendered, se rendre. 
(10.) Crowd, quantite— which are, &c. (which one sees). 



Place of the Subject with regard to the Verb. 

733. It has been seen that the subject of a verb is either a 
noun or a pronoun, and that this subject must always be 
expressed in French. It remains to speak of the place of this 
subject with respect to the verb. 

734. Rule. — The subject, whether a noun or pronoun, is 
generally placed before the verb. 



* 



228 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 

EXAMPLES. 

L'ambition effrenee de quelques The boundless ambition of a few 

hommes, a, dans tous les temps, men has, in all ages, been the 

ete la vraie cause des revolutions real cause of the revolutions of 

des Hats, empires. 

Quand nous nageons dans Vabon* When we roll in plenty, we 

dance, il est bien rare que nous seldom think of the miseries of 

no us occupions des maux d'autrui, others. 

EXERCISE. 

1. Youth is full of presumption; it expects every thing from itself: 
although frail, it thinks itself all-sufficient, and that it has nothing to fear. 

2. Commerce is like certain springs : if you attempt to* divert their 
course, you dry them up. 

3. It is enough that falsehood is falsehood, to be unworthy of a man who 
speaks in the presence of God, and who is to sacrifice every thing to truth. 

4. The ambition and avarice of man are the sources of his unhappiness. 

5. They punished in Crete three vices which have remained unpunished 
in all other nations : — ingratitude, dissimulation, and avarice. 

6. Like the Numidian lion, goaded by cruel hunger, and rushing upon 
a flock of feeble sheep, he tears, he slays, he wallows in blood. 

(1.) Full of presumption, presomptueux— expects, se promettre — itself all-sufficient, 
pouvoir tout— that it has, avoir. 

(2.) Springs, source— attempt, vouloir— dry up, faire tarir. 

(3.) It is enough, sufhre— falsehood, mensonge — is, Q,. — in, en — is to sacrifice, doit. 

(5.) Punished, H. — have remained, etre — in, chez. 

(6.) Like the, semblable a un— J\Tumidian, de Numidie— goaded by, &c, (that cruel 
hunger goads) d^vorer— rushing, (which rushes upon)entrer dans — tears, dechirer— 
slays, egorger— wallows, nager. 

735. Exceptions. — 1, In interrogative phrases, the ques- 
tion is made either with a pronoun or a noun, as subject of the 
verb : if with a pronoun, it is always placed after the verb ; as, 

Que dit-on 1 irai-je a la campagne 1 de qui parle-t-on ? 

736. If with a noun, the noun is sometimes placed before 
and sometimes after the verb ; it stands before when the pro- 
noun personal which answers to it asks the question ; as, 

Cette nouvelle est-elle sure 1 les hommes se rendent-ils toujours a la raison ? 

737. It stands after when a pronoun absolute or an interro- 
gative adverb, placed at the beginning of the phrase, allow 
the suppression of the personal pronoun ; as, 

Que dit votre ami 1 a quoi s'occupe votre frere 1 ou demeure votre cousin 1 

738. Remark. — In interrogative sentences, when the verb 
which precedes il, elle, on, ends with a vowel, the letter -£- is 
put between that verb and the pronoun ; as, 

Arrive-t-il 1 viendra-t-elle 1 aime-t-on les vauriens ? 

739. Whence stands after a verb which ends with e mute, 
that e mute is changed into e acute; as, Jlime-je? puisse- 
je ? But when the transposition of je after the verb becomes 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 229 

harsh, euphony then requires another turn ; so, instead of 
cours-je? dors-je? which would be intolerable, we must 
say, est-ce queje cours? est-ce queje dors? 

EXERCISE. 

1. Have you forgotten all that Providence has done for you? how 
have you escaped the shafts of your enemies 1 how have you been pre- 
served from the dangers which surrounded you on all sides 1 could you 
be so blind as not to acknowledge and adore the all-powerful hand that 
has miraculously saved you ] 

2. What will posterity say of you if, instead of devoting to the happi- 
ness of mankind the great talents which you have received from nature, 
you make use of them only to deceive and corrupt them 1 

3. Do not the misfortunes which we experience often contribute to 
our* prosperity ! 

4. Why are the -works of nature so perfect 1 Because each work is a 
whole, and because she labors upon an eternal plan, from which she never 
deviates. Why, on the contrary, are the productions of man so imperfect? 
It is because the human mind, being unable to create any thing, and inca- 
pable of embracing the universe at a single glance, can* produce only 
after having been enriched by experience and meditation. 

(1.) Escaped, echapper a— shafts, trait— preserved, garantir— on all sides, de toutes 
parts — so as, assez pour — saved, conserver. 

(2.) Devoting, consacrer — mankind, homme pi. — deceive, egarer. 

(3.) Experience, eprouver — contribute to, tourner en. 

(4.) Because, e'est que— and because, et que — being- unable, ne pouvoir— incapable, 
(not being able)— at, ae — glance, wiQ—enriclied, ftconde. 

740. 2. — The subject is put after the verb in incidental sen- 
tences which express that we are quoting somebody's words ; as, 

Je meurs innocent, a dit Louis XVI. I die innocent, said Louis XVI. 
Je le veux bien, dit-il, I am very^ willing, said he. 

741. 3. — The subject is put after the verb if the sentence 
begins with an impersonal verb, or either of these words, tel, 
ainsi, &c. ; as, 

Tel etait V acharnement du soldat, Such was the fury of the soldier 

que, &c. that, &c. 

Ainsijinit cette sanglante tr age die, Thus ended that bloody tragedy. 

EXERCISE. 

1. True glory, said he, is founded in humanity : whoever prefers his own 
glory to the feelings of humanity, is a monster of pride, and not a man. 

2. There have happened for these* ten years so many events exceeding 
all probability, that posterity will find it difficult to credit them. 

3. Such -was that incorruptible Phocion who answered the deputies of 
Alexander, who were telling him that this powerful monarch loved him as 
the only honest man : Well, then, let him allow me to be and to appear so. 

(l.J Is founded, ne se trouver pas hors de— feelings, sentiment. 

(2.) There have happened for, il s'est passe depuis— exceeding, hors de— probability, 
vraisemblance— will find very difficult, avoir bien de la peine— to credit, ajouter foi a. 

(3.) Loved, cherir— honest man, homme de bien— well, ho !— to be so, d'etre tel— 
appear so, le paraitre. 

u 



230 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 

4. Thus ended, by the humiliation of Athens, that dreadful -war of 
twenty-seven years, to* which ambition gave rise, which hatred made 
atrocious, and which was as fatal to the Greeks as their ancient con- 
federation had proved advantageous to them. 

(4.) Ended, se terminer— gave rise, faire naitre — made, rendre — had proved, £tre I. 

742. 4. — The subject is put after the verb when the sub- 
junctive is used to express a wish, or to take the place of 
quand meme, whenever, and a conditional ; as, 

J'uissent tous les peuples se con- May all nations be convinced of 

vaincre de cette verite f this truth. 

Dusse-je y perir, firai, Should I perish there, I will go. 

743. 5. — The subject is put after the verb when that subject 
is followed by several words which are dependent upon it, 
and form an incidental sentence which, by its length, might 
obscure the relation of the verb to the subject ; perspicuity 
then requires that the subject should be displaced. 

744. Sometimes, however, this transposition of the subject 
is only the effect of taste, to avoid an inharmonious cadence ; 
or it is used by an orator who wishes to arouse the attention 
of his hearers by a bold and unexpected turn. 

EXERCISE. 

1. The gods grant that you may never experience such misfortunes ! 

2. May you, O wise old man ! in a repose diversified by pleasing 
occupations, enjoy the past, lay hold of the present, and charm your latter 
days with the hope of eternal felicity ! 

3. What is not in the power of the gods ! were you at the lowest depths, 
the power of Jupiter could draw you from thence ; were you in Olympus, 
beholding the stars under your feet, Jupiter could plunge you to the bottom 
of the abyss, or precipitate you into the flames of gloomy Tartarus. 

4. There, through meadows enamelled with flowers, glide a thousand 
various rivulets, distributing every where their pure (and) limpid waters. 

5. Already, for the honor of France, there* had come into administra- 
tion a man more distinguished for his understanding and virtues than for 
his dignities. 

(1.) Grant, faire — experience, eprouver de. 

(2.) Old man, vieillard — lay hold of, saisir — with, de. 

(3.) Is not in the power of, ne peuvent— were, S. — lowest depths, fond de l'abime — 
power, puissance — could, pouvoir N. — Olympus, Olympe — stars, astre — gloomy, noir 
— Tartarus, Tartare. 

(4.) Through, au milieu de — with, de — glide, serpen ter — rivulets, ruisseau — distri- 
buting, (which distribute) — their, une. 

(5.) Had come, £tre entre — administration, (of affairs)— /or, par — understanding, 
esprit. 



Government of the Verbs. 

745. When the regimen of a verb is a noun, it is generally 
placed after the verb ; but to this rule there is one exception, 
besides those which will hereafter be mentioned. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 231 

746. Exception. — In an interrogative sentence, the regi- 
men is placed before the verb when this regimen is joined 
to an absolute pronoun. 

EXAMPLES. 

Quel objet voyez-vous ? What object do you see 

A quelle science vous appliquez- To what science do you apply 

vons ? yourself] 

De quelle affaire vous occupez- About what business are you em- 

vous? ployed] 

747. Remark. — In French, a verb can never have two 
regimens direct : therefore, when a verb has two regimens, 
both nouns, one of them must necessarily be preceded by a 
preposition. 

EXAMPLES. 
Donnez ce livre a votre frire, Give that book to your brother. 

On a accuse Ciceron d? imprudence Cicero has been accused of impru- 
et de faiblesse, dence and weakness. 

748. Though the natural order of the ideas seems to require 
that the regimen direct be placed before the indirect, the per- 
spicuity of the sentence does not allow it in all cases. 

749. Rule. — When a verb has two regimens, the shorter 
is generally placed first ; but if they be of equal length, the 
regimen direct will precede the indirect. 

EXAMPLES. 

Les hypocrites s'etudient a parer Hypocrites make it their study to 

le vice des dehors de la vertu, deck vice with the exterior of virtue. 

Les hypocrites s'ttudient a parer Hypocrites make it their study to 

des dehors de la vertu les vices deck with the exterior of virtue 

les plus honteux et les plus the most shameful and most odious 

decries, vices. 

V ambition sacrifie le present a Ambition sacrifices the present to 

V avenir,maislavolupte sacrifie the future, but pleasure sacrifices 

l'avenir au present, . the future to the present. 

EXERCISE ON THE GOVERNMENT OF THE VERBS. 

1. Illustrious examples teach us that God has hurled from their thrones 
princes "who contemned his laws : he reduced to the condition of a beast 
the haughty Nebuchadnezzar, -who -wanted to usurp divine honors. 

2. Wretched is* the man who feeds his mind -with chimeras. 

3. Our interest should prompt us to prefer virtue to vice, wisdom to 
pleasure, and modesty to vanity. 

(1.) Illustrious, fameux — teach, apprendre — hurled, renverser — haughty, superbe — 
Nebuchadnezzar, Nabuchodonosor — wanted to, vouloir H. 
(2.) Feeds, repaitre — with, de. 
(3.) Should, devoir F.— prompt, porter—pleasure, volupte. 

750. Rule. — A noun may be governed at once by two 
verbs, provided those verbs do not require different regimens , 



232 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB 

EXAMPLES. 
On doit aimer et respecter les rois, We ought to love and respect kings. 
Ce general attaqua etprit la ville, That general attacked and took the city. 

751. But we must not say, 

Cet officier attaqua et se rendit That officer attacked and made 
maitre de la ville, himself master of the city. 

752. A different turn should be given to the sentence, by- 
placing the noun after the first verb and adding en before the 
second ; as, 

Cet officier attaqua la ville, et s'en That officer attacked the city, and 
rendit maitre, made himself master of it. 

EXERCISE. 

1. Luxury is like a torrent, which carries aivay and overthrows every 
thing it meets. 

2. Nothing can* resist the operation of time : it at length undermines, 
alters, or destroys every thing, 

3. Among the Spartans, public education had two objects : the first, to 
harden their bodies by fatigue ; the second, to excite and nourish in their 
minds the love of their country and an enthusiasm for what is great. 

(].) Carries away, entrainer — overthrows, renverser — every thing, tout ce que. 
(2.) Operation, action — at length, a la longue — undermines, miner. 
(3.) Among the Spartans, a Sparte — to, de — harden, endurcir — by, a — their, les— -for 
what is great, les grandes choses. 



On the use, proper or accidental, of Moods and Tenses. 

INDICATIVE. 

753. The present is used to express an existing state ; as, 
Je $uis id, I am here. 

754. An invariable state ; as, 

Dieu est de toute etemite, God is from all eternity. 

755. A future near at hand ; as, 

II est demain fSte, To-morrow is a holiday. 

756. Or even a preterit, when, to give a sort of animated 
picture, we relate a thing past as passing. Thus, we find in 
Racine, 

J y ai vu votre malheureux Jils traine I have seen your unhappy son 
par ses chevaux, dragged along by his horses. 

757. But suddenly passing from the preterit to the present, 
the speaker adds, 

Tl veut les rappeler, et sa voix les He calls out to stop them, but his 
effraie, voice frightens them. 

758. In English, the verb to be is frequently used with 
the participle present ; as, 

I am reading, I am translating, I shall be writing, 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 233 

759. This construction is not adopted in French; and, 
whenever found, it is to be translated in French simply by the 
verb, put in the tense expressed by the verb to be. Thus, / 
am reading, must be expressed by je lis ; I shall be writing, 
must be rendered fecrirai, &c. 

EXERCISE ON THE PROPER USE OF MOODS, &c. 

1. He is in his chamber, where he is relaxing his mind from the 
fatigue of business by some instructive and agreeable reading. 

2. Truth, eternal by its nature, is immutable as God himself. 

3. I never let* a day pass without devoting an hour or two to reading 
the ancients. 

4. It is this week that the new piece comes out. 

5. The armies were in sight: nothing was heard on all sides but 
dreadful cries : the engagement began. Immediately a cloud of arrows 
darkens the air and covers the combatants : nothing is heard but doleful 
cries of the dying, or the clattering of the arms of those who fall in the 
conflict ; the earth groans beneath a heap of dead bodies, and rivers of 
blood stream every where ; there is nothing in this confused mass of men 
enraged against one another but slaughter, despair, revenge, and brutal fury. 



(1.) Is relaxing, delasser — reading, lecture. 

(2.) By, de — immutable, inimitable. 

(3.) Devoting, consacrer — reading, la lecture de. 

(4.) Come out, on donne. 

(5.) Sight, presence— nothing was, Sec. on ne que II.— the engagement began, on en 
vint aux mains — cloud, nuee — arrows, trait — darkens, obscurcir — nothing is, &c. on 
n'entend plus que — doleful, plaintif— clattering, bruit — conflict, melee— groans, gemir 
— beneath, sous — heap, monceau — rivers, ruisseau — stream, couler— there is nothing 
in, &c. ce ne etre dans— mass, amas — enraged, acharne— 6wt, que— slaughter, mas- 
sacre. 

760. The imperfect is used — 1, To denote the recurrence 
of an action at a time which is past ; as, 

Quand fetais a, Paris, fallais When I was at Paris, I often went 
souvent aux Champs Ely sees, to the Champs Ely sees. 

761. 2, For a past which has some duration, especially in 
narrations ; as, 

Rome etait d? abord gouvernee par Rome was at first governed by 
des rois, kings. 

EXERCISE ON THE USE OF THE IMPERFECT. 

1. When I -was at Paris, I ivent every morning to take a walk in the 
Champs Elysees or the JBois de Boulogne : afterwards, I came home, 
where I employed myself till dinner either in reading or writing ; and in 
(he evening, I generally -went for amusement to the French Theatre or 
the Opera. 

2. When I was in the prime of life, like the light butterfly, I fluttered 
from object to object, without being able to settle to any thing : eager for 

(1.) Take a walk, se promener— in, a — came home, rentrer chez soi— employed, 
s'occuper — in reading, (say to read)— for amusement, me delasser — French Theatre, 
Comedie Francaise. 

(2.) Prime of life, fleur de VdgQ-butterfly, pavilion-fluttered, voler-being able, 

u2 



234 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 

pleasure, I seized every thing that had its appearance : alas ! how far -wan 
I then from foreseeing that I should deplore with so much bitterness the 
loss of that precious time. 

3. For a short time after Abraham, the knowledge of the true God still 
appeared in Palestine and Egypt. Melchisedec, king of Salem, -was the 
priest of the Most High God. Abimelech, king of Gerar, and his successor 
of the same name, feared God, swore by his name, and reverenced his 
power. But in Moses' time, the nations adored even beasts and reptiles. 
Every thing -was God but God himself. 

pouvoir— settle, me fixer— eager for, avide de—had its appearance, m'en presentait 
1 'image— how, que— with so much bitterness, (so bitterly). 
(30 Swore, jurer— reverenced, admirer— the riations, on— even, jusqu'a— but, excepte. 

762. In French, the preterit definite and the preterit inde- 
finite are not used indifferently. 

763. The preterit definite is used when speaking of a time 
which is entirely past, and of which nothing remains ; as, 

Je fis un voyage a Bath le mois I took a journey to Bath last 

dernier, month. 

fecrivis hier a Rome, I wrote yesterday to Rome. 

764. To authorize the use of this tense, there must be the 
interval of at least one day. It is the most used in the historic 
style, and for that reason called parfait historique. 

765. The preterit indefinite is used either for a past inde- 
terminate or for a past of which something still remains ; as, 

fai voyage en Italie, I have travelled in Italy. 

fai dejeune ce matin a Londres, I breakfasted this morning in London 
et dine* a Richmond, and dined at Richmond. 

EXERCISE ON THE PROPER USE OF THE PRETERIT. 

Amenophis conceived the design of making his son a conqueror. He 
set about it after the manner of the Egyptians — that is, with great ideas. 
All the children who were born on* the same day as Sesostris, -were 
brought to court by order of the king : he had them educated as his own 
children, and with the same care as Sesostris. When he ivas grown up, 
he made him serve his apprenticeship in a war against the Arabs : this 
young prince learned there to bear hunger and thirst, and subdued that 
nation, till then invincible. He afterwards attacked Lybia, and conquered 
it. After these successes, he formed the project of subduing the whole 
world. In consequence of* this,* he entered Ethiopia, which he made 
tributary. He continued his victories in Asia. Jerusalem -was the first 
to feel the force of his arms : the rash Rehoboam could not resist him, 
and Sesostris carried away the riches of Solomon. He penetrated into 
the Indies, farther than Hercules and Bacchus, and farther than Alexander 
did afterward. The Scythians obeyed him as far as the Tanais ; Armenia 
and Cappadocia -were subject to him. In a word, he extended his empire 
from the Ganges to the Danube. 



Making, faire de— set about it, s'y prendre— after, a— ideas, pensee— brought, amener 
— had educated, faire elever— grown up, grand— wade serve, fit faire— apprenticeship, 
apprentissage— in, par— entered, entrer dans— wade, rendre— as far as, jusqu'a— Cap* 
padocia, Cappadoce. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 235 

766. The preterit indefinite is sometimes used instead of a 
future just approaching ; as, 

Avez-vous bientut Jini ? Have you soon done! 

Oui,faiJini dans le moment. Yes, I shall have done in a moment. 

EXERCISE. 

1. Enflamed with the desire of knowing mankind, I have travelled, 
not only among the most polished nations, but even among the most bar- 
barous. I have observed them in the different degrees of civilization, 
from the state of simple nature to the most perfect state of society, and 
wherever I went, the result tvas the same : that is to say, I have every 
where seen beings occupied in drying up the different sources of happiness 
that nature had placed within their reach. 

2. I have travelled this year in Italy, where I had an* opportunity of 
seeing several masterpieces of antiquity, and where I made a valuable 
collection of scarce medals. I there admired the perfection to which they 
have brought architecture, painting, and music ; but what pleased me 
most there, was the beauty of the climate of Naples. 

(1.) With, tie— mankind, homme, pi. — among', chez— polished nations, peuple police 
— barbarous, nation sauvage— from, depuis — simple, pur — to, jusquVi — wherever I 
went, dans tous les pays — the result was the same, (I had the same result) — in drying 
up, a tarir — within their reach, a leur portee. 

(2.) Opportunity, occasion — masterpieces, chefs d'ceuvre — scarce, rare— pleased me 
most, faire le plus de plaisir— was, est. 

767. The two preterits anterior differ in the same manner 
as the two preceding preterits ; but they are always accom- 
panied by a conjunction, or an adverb of time; as, 

Je suis sorti des que fai eu dlni, I went out as soon as I had dined. 
Feus jini hier a midi, I had done yesterday at noon. 

768. The pluperfect denotes that a thing took place before 
another which had itself already taken place ; as, 

J' avals soupe quand il entra, I had supped when he came in. 

EXERCISE. [causes. 

1. As soon as I had examined this phenomenon, I tried to find out its 

2. As soon as we had crossed the river, we found ourselves in a wood 
where there was not a single foot-path traced. 

3. As soon as the great Sesostris had satisfied his ambition by the con- 
quest of so many empires, he returned into Egypt, where he devoted the 
whole of the day to administering strict justice to his people, and in the 
evening he recreated himself by holding conferences with the learned, or 
by conversing with the most upright people of his kingdom. 

4. I had only received, like most of the grandees, an education in which 
I had imbibed nothing but sentiments of pride and insensibility ; that is, 
they had done every thing in their power to stifle in me the happy and 
benevolent dispositions which I had received from nature. 

(1 ) As soon as, des que — tried to find out, en rechercher. 

(2.) Crossed, traverser— found ourselves, se trouver engage— foot-path, sentier de. 

(3 ) The whole of the day, jour entier — administering, rendre A.— strict, exact — 
recreated, delasser— by holding conferences, a s'entretenir— upright, honnete— 
people, gens. 

(4.) Grandee, grand— imbibed, puiser— they, on — in their power, ce qu'on pouvoir 
I — stifle, etouffer— benevolent, bienfaisant. 



236 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 

769. As the use of these different preterits is attended with 
some difficulty, the following analysis is added, in order more 
clearly to explain the manner in which they are used. 

770. We read in Marmontel the following extract : 

Celicour, a Vage de quinze ans, Celicour, at the age of fifteen, had 
avait ete dans le monde ce qvton been in the world what is called a 
appelle un petit pro dige. little prodigy. 

771. The author employs the pluperfect, as he speaks of a 
period of time anterior to all those which he is going to mention. 

// fesait des vers les plus galans He composed the most agreeable love- 

du monde ; il rCy avait pas dans sonnets imaginable ; there -was not 

le voisinage une jolie femme a pretty woman in the neighborhood 

qu'iln'eut celebree : c'etait dom- that he had not celebrated : it was a 

mage de laisser tant de talens pity to let so many talents be buried 

enfouis dans une petite ville ; in a little town : Paris -was the the- 

JParis devait en etre le theatre, atre on which they ought to be 

exhibited. 

772. Here the author makes use of the imperfect, because 
he speaks of the habitual employment of Celicour. 

Et Z'on fit si bien, que son pere And they contrived matters so that his 
se resolut de Vy envoy er, father determined to send him there. 

773. Now, the author passes to the preterit definite, because 
he is no longer speaking of what Celicour used to do, but what 
he did at a time past, and of which nothing remains. 

Ce pere etait un honnete homme, This father was a good sort of man, 

qid aimait V esprit sans en avoir, who -was fond of wit, without hav- 

et qui admirait, sans savoir ing any, and admired, without 

pourquoi, tout ce qui venait de knowing why, every thing that 

la capitale. II avait meme des came from the metropolis. Nay, 

relations litie'r aires, et du nom- he even had some literary con- 

bre de ses correspondans etait nexions, and among his corres- 

un connaisseur nomme JM. de pondents was a connaisseur of the 

Fintac, name of Fintac. 

774. Here, again, the author resumes the form of the im- 
perfect, as he is now speaking of the habitual state of Celi- 
cour's father in his little town, and because, in this passage, 
he merely relates what that father was doing, at a time past, 
which has no kind of relation to the present. 

Ce fut pnncipalement a lui que It was particularly to him that Celi- 
Ctlicour fut recommande", cour ivas recommended. 

775. The form of the preterit definite is now resumed, 
because this is an action passed, at a time of which nothing 
is left, &c. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 237 

EXERCISE. 

1. God, who had created his angels in holiness, -would have their 
happiness depend upon themselves : they could insure their felicity, by 
giving themselves willingly to their Creator ; but they delighted in them- 
selves, and not in God : immediately those spirits of light became spirits 
of darkness. 

2. There is a letter which Philocles has written to a friend of his, about 
his project of making himself king of Carpathus. I perused that letter, 
and it seemed to me to be the hand of Philocles. They had perfectly 
imitated his writing. This letter threiv me into a strange surprise. I 
read it again and again, and could not persuade myself that it -was writ- 
ten* by Philocles, when I recalled to my mind the affecting marks which 
he had given me of his disinterestedness and integrity. 

3. Those who had shewn the greatest zeal for the state and my person 
did not think themselves obliged to undeceive me after so terrible an 
example. I myself -was afraid lest truth should break through the cloud, 
and reach me in spite of all my flatterers. I felt within myself that it 
would have raised in me bitter remorse. My effeminacy, and the dominion 
which a treacherous minister had gained over me, threiv me into a kind 
of despair of ever recovering my* liberty. 

(1.) Have their happiness depend, (that their happiness) dependre S. — could, pouvoir 
—delighted in, se plaire en — of light, lumineux— darkness, tenebres. 

(2.) There is, voila— about, sur— Carpathus, Carpathie— to be, de—they, on— again 
and again, sans cesse— by, de—when J recalled to, repasser dans J .—integrity , 
bonne foi. 

(3.) Did not think themselves obliged to, se croire dispense de— was afraid lest, 
craindre que— break through, percer S.— reach, parvenir jusqu'a— in spite of, malgre— 
raised in, causer a— effeminacy, mollesse— dominion, ascendant— treacherous^ perfide 
—gained, prendre— threw, plonger— recovering, rentrer en. 

776. There is this difference between the two future 
tenses, that the period of time expressed by the future abso- 
lute may or may not be determined ; as, 

J'irai a la campagne, or j'irai demain a la campagne, 
while, in the future anterior, the time is necessarily deter- 
mined ; as, 

J'aurai fini, quand vous arriverez. 

EXERCISE. 

1 . Remember that youth is but a flower, which will wither almost as 
soon as it* opens. Thou wilt see thyself gradually changed. Smiling 
graces, sweet pleasures, strength, health, and joy, will vanish like a pleas- 
ing dream ; nothing but the sad remembrance will be left thee. 

2. I shall next year take a journey into Greece, and I am preparing 
myself for it by reading the travels of the young Anacharsis. 

3. When you have read the celebrated discourse of Bossuet on Uni- 
versal History, and studied in it the causes of the rise and fall of states, 
you will be less astonished at the revolutions, more or less sudden, that 
modern empires have experienced, which appeared to you in the most 
flourishing state. 

(1.) Will wither, (will be almost as soon withered) secher— opens, &c\ose-*»gradualty $ 
msensib\ement~-Hv ely, riant— pleasing, beau— nothing will be left, il n'en rester L. 

(2.) Take, faire— for it, y— reading, lecture de— the travels, celui. 

(3.) Have read, M.—and, que vous M.— in it, y—rise, grandeur— fall, chute— sudden^ 
gubite— (that have experienced the modern empires, which, fccl appeared) H, 



238 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 

CONDITIONAL. 

777. The conditional is used — 1, To express a wish; as, 

Que je serais, or que faurais e*te How glad I should be, or should 
content cle reus sir dans cette have been, to succeed in that 
affaire ! affair ! 

778. 2, With si, if, whether, expressing a doubt ; as, 

Demandez-lui sHl serait venu avec Ask him whether he would have 
nous suppose quHl rieint pas eu come with us, had he not been 
affaire, busy. 

779. 3, Before or after the imperfect, or pluperfect of the 
indicative, preceded by si ; as, 

Nous nous epargnerions bien des We should spare ourselves much 

peines, si nous savions moderer pain, did we know how to mode- 

nos desirs, rate our desires. 

Vous auriez ete phis heureux, si You would have been more happy 

vous aviez suivi mes conseils, - if you had followed my advice. 

780. 4, With quand, used instead of si, quoique, or quand 
meme ; the verb preceded by quand is generally in one of 
the conditionals ; as, 

Quand Vavare possederait tout Vor Were the miser to possess all the 
du monde, il ne serait pas encore gold in the world, still he would 
content, „ not be satisfied. 

781. 5, Lastly, for various tenses of the indicative ; as, 

Croiriez-vous votre Jils ingrat ? Could you think your son ungrateful 1 

which means croyez-voas, &c. 

I/auriez-vous soupconne d\m tel Could you have suspected him of 
vice ? such a vice 1 

which means Vavez-vous, &c. 

Quelle raison pourrait m'empecher What cause could prevent me from 
d'aller vous voir ? coming to see you 1 

which means quelle cause pourra, &c. 

EXERCISE ON THE CONDITIONAL. 

1. If it were even possible for men always to act conformably to equity, 
as it is the multitude that must judge their conduct, the wicked would 
always blame and contradict them from malignity, and the good some- 
times from mistake. 

2. What false steps I should have made, but for you, at my entrance 
into the world ! 

3. But for your counsels, I should have failed in this undertaking. 

(1.) J r f even, quand meme— were, N.—for men, (that men) — to act, 8.— judge, juger 
de — would blame, M. — contradict, croiser M. 

(2.) What, que de— steps, d6marche— but for, sans. 
(3.) But for, sans— failed, echouer. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 239 

4. How satisfied I should have been if you had sooner informed me of 
your happiness ! 

5. If we gave to infancy none but just and clear notions, there -would 
not be by far so many false wits in the world. 

6. Had Alexander conquered the whole world, his ambition -would not 
have been satisfied ; he -would still have found himself straitened in it. 

7. Could you believe him vain enough to aspire to that high degree 
of honor ? 

8. Could you ever have thought him capable of deserting the good 
cause, to go and side with rebels 1 

9. Would you renounce being useful to the present generation because 
envy fastens on you 1 

(4) How, que. 

(5.) We, on— there would not be by far so many, il y aurait bien moins de. 

(6.) (When Alexander would have conquered) — straitened, trop a Tetroit. [de. 

(8.) Deserting, abandonner — to go and side with, pour se ranger sous les drapeaux 

(9) Renounce, renoncer a.— fastens, s'attacher — on you, a vos pas. 

Remark on the use of the Conditional and Future. 

782. Foreigners are very apt to use the future or the con- 
ditional after si, when meaning suppose que. They say, 

J'irai demain a la campagne, s'il I shall go into the country to-morrow 

fera beau, if the weather be fine. 

Vous auriez vu le rot, si vous You would have seen the king if you 

seriez venu, had come. 

783. The impropriety of this construction will be obviated 
by attending to the following 

784. Rule. — When a verb is preceded by si, meaning 
suppose que, the present is used instead of the future abso- 
lute ; the preterit indefinite instead of the future anterior ; 
the imperfect instead of the conditional present ; and the 
pluperfect instead of the conditional past 

EXAMPLES. 

J'irai demain a la campagne, s'il I shall go to-morrow into the country, 

fait beau, if it be fine weather. 

H aura eu Cavantage, s'il a suivi He will have had the advantage, if 

vos conseils, he has followed your advice. 

Je serais content, si je vous voyais I should be pleased if I saw you 

applique, a PPty to study. 

J'aurais ete content, si je vous I should have been pleased if I had 

avais vu applique, seen you attentive to your studies. 

785. Remark. — This rule does not hold good, either when 
si is placed between two verbs, the first of which implies 
doubt, uncertainty; as, 

• Je ne sais s'il viendra, 

786. Or, with the second conditional past ; as, 
Vous m'eussiez trouve, si vous fussiez venu ce matin. 



240 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 

EXERCISE. 

1. A young man who is just entering the career of letters will conci- 
liate the good will of the public, if he consider his first successes only as 
an encouragement to do better. 

2. That absurd criticism -will have amused only fools or malicious 
people,* if attention has been paid to the spirit that pervades the whole, 
and the manner in which it is written. 

■ 3. Life -would possess many more sweets and charms, if men, instead 
of tearing one another to pieces, formed but one society of brethren. 

4. The Athenians -would have found in the young Alcibiades the only 
man capable of insuring their superiority in Greece, had not that vain, 
thoughtless people forced him, by an unjust, or, at least, imprudent sen- 
tence, to banish himself from his country. 

5. I know not -whether reason -will soon triumph over prejudice and 
ignorance, but I am certain it will be the case sooner or later. 

6. Rome -would have never attained that high degree of splendor and 
glory which astonishes us, had it not extended its conquests as much by 
its policy as by its arms. 

(1 ) Is just entering, debuter dans— career, carriere — conciliate, s'attirer— good 
will, bienveillance — consider, regarder. 

(2.) Fools, sot— malicious, mechant— paid, faire— pervades the whole, regner d'un 
bout a l'autre— in which, dont. 

(3.) Possess, avoir — tearing one another to pieces, s'entredechirer. 

(4.S Superiority, preponderance — thoughtless, leger — sentence, condamnation. 

(5.) Know, savoir — it will be the case, cela etre. 

(6.) rfttained,ipa.rvemr a— policy, politique. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

787. There are conjunctions which govern the indicative 
(page 172), and others which govern the subjunctive (page 
173). We call principal proposition the phrase which is 
followed by the conjunction, and incidental or subordinate 
proposition that which is placed after the conjunction. In 
this sentence, 

Je crois que vous aimez a jouer, 

je crois is the principal proposition, and vous aimez a jouer 
is the subordinate proposition : que is the conjunction which 
unites the two phrases. 

788. General Rule. — The verb of the subordinate pro- 
position must be put in the indicative when the verb of the 
principal proposition expresses affirmation, in a direct, posi- 
tive, and independent manner ; but it is put in the subjunc- 
tive when that of the principal proposition expresses doubt, 
wish, or uncertainty. 

Je sais qu'il est surpris, I know he is surprised. 

Je crois quHl viendra, I believe he will come. 

Je doute qu'il soit surpris, I doubt his being surprised. 

Je doute qu'il vienne, I doubt his coming. 

Je souhaite qu f il rSussisse, I wish he may succeed. 

Je tremble qu'il ne succombe I tremble lest he should fail. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 241 

EXERCISE ON THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 

1. The glory which has been ascribed to the Egyptians of being the 
most grateful of all men, shows that they were likewise the most sociable. 

2. In Egypt, when it was proved that the conduct of a dead man* 
had been bad, they condemned his memory, and he was denied burial. 

3. I am sure that by moderation, mildness, and politeness, you will 
disarm even* envy itself. 

4. The new philosophers say that color is a sensation of the soul. 

5. I believe you are as honest and disinterested as you seem to be. 

6. I doubt whether the Romans would ever have triumphed over the 
Gauls if the different chiefs of this warlike people had not been disunited. 

7. I could wish that the love which we ought to have for one another, 
were the principle of all our actions, as it is the basis of all virtues. 

8. Fear, lest it should be said that you feed upon chimeras, and that 
you take the shadow for the reality. 

9. The new philosophers will have color to be & sensation of the soul. 

10. I will have you to be as honest and disinterested as you seem to be. 

(1.) Which has, &c. qu'on — ascribed, dormer — grateful, reconnaissant. — men, peu- 

(2) Was denied, priver de — burial, sepulture. [pie, sing. 

(3.) By, avec— politeness, honnetete. 

(5.) Seem to be, le paraitre. 

(6.) Whether, que. 

(8 ) It, on ne—feed upon, se repaitre de. 

(9.) Will have, vouloir— color to be, (that color be). 

789. Do, did, will, would, should, can, could, may, and 
might, are sometimes, with respect to the French language, 
simply signs of tenses, at others they are real verbs. 

790. There can be no difficulty about do and did ; these 
are mere expletives, denoting interrogation, negation, or 
merely emphasis, when they are joined to a verb. 

/ do love, J'aime. 

/ did love, J'aimais, or j'aimai. 

Do I love? Aime-je? 

Did I love ? Aimais-je, or aimai-je 1 

I do not love, Je n'aime pas. 

/ did not love. Je n'aimais pas, or je n'aimai pas. 

91. In all these cases they are not expressed in French. 
But when they are followed by a noun or a pronoun, then 
they are real verbs, and mean /aire, to do. 

Do me that favor, Faites-moi ce plaisir. 

He did it, II le fit. 

792. In short, they are expressed by faire to do, when- 
ever they are followed by any thing else except by the verb 
with which they are necessarily connected ; as, 

He did more than could have been II fit plus qu'on n'eut pu esperer. 
expected, 

793. Should is only a sign of the conditional when it ex- 
presses a thing which may happen upon some condition. 

A. 



242 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 

I should like a country life if my J'aimerais la vie champetre, si mes 
affairs -would permit me to in- affaires me permettaient de suivre 
dulge my inclination, mon gout. 

794. But when it implies duty or obligation, it is a verb, 
and must be expressed by the verb devoir to owe ; as, 

We should never swerve from the Nous ne devrions jamais nous 
path of virtue, e carter du sentier de la vertu. 

795. Can, could, may, and might, are not so difficult as 
they appear at first sight ; because, in almost every instance, 
there is no impropriety in rendering them by the verb pouvoir. 
In general, can and could imply a power, a possibility, a ca- 
pability, &c, and may and might a permission, a probabi- 
lity, &c. 

796. Do, did, shall, will, Sic. in English, are sometimes 
used elliptically in the answers to interrogative sentences. 
The French answer with the repetition of the verb, accom- 
panied with a pronoun expressive of the idea of the interro- 
gative sentence ; as, 

Will you do your exercise to-day? Ferez-vous votre theme au jour- 
Yes, I -will. d'hui 1 — Oui, je le ferai. 

Relations between the Tenses of the Indicative. 

797. Rule. — When the first verb is in the imperfect, the 
preterit, or the pluperfect, and the second denotes a temporary 
action, this second verb is put in the imperfect, if we mean to 
express a present. 

EXAMPLE. 
Je croyais, fai cru, favais cru I thought, I have thought, I had 
que vous etudiiez les mathima- thought that you were studying 
tiques, mathematics. 

798. The second verb is put in the pluperfect, if we mean 
to express a past. 

EXAMPLE. 
U m'assura quHl n'avait jamais He assured me that he had never 
tant ri, laughed so much. 

799. The second verb is put in the present of the condi- 
tional, if we mean to express a future absolute. 

EXAMPLE. 

On nC adit que voire fr ere viendrait I was told your brother would 
a Londres Vhiver prochain, come to toWn next winter. 

800. But, although the first verb may be in some of these 
tenses, yet the second is put in the present when this second 
verb expresses a thing which is true at all times. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 243 

EXAMPLE. 

Je voiis disais, je vous ai dit, je I told you, I have told you, I had 
vous avais dit, que la saute fait told you, that health constitutes 
la felicite du corps, et le savoir the happiness of the body, and 
celle de Fame, knowledge that of the soul. 

801 . Remark. — In phrases where the imperfect is preceded 
by que it denotes sometimes a past, sometimes a present, with 
respect to the preceding verb. It denotes a past when the 
verb which is joined to it by the conjunction que is in the 
present or future. 

EXAMPLE. 
Vous savez, or rot/5 saurez que le You know, or you must know that 
peuple liomain etait aussi avide the Romans were a people as cove- 
qu ambit ieux, tous as they were ambitious. 

802. But it denotes a present when the verb which precedes 
it is in the imperfect, one of the preterits, or the pluperfect. 

EXAMPLE. 

On disait, on a dit, on avait dit It was said, it has been said, it had 

que P 'ho cion etait le plus grand been said, that Phocion was the 

et le plus honnete homme de son greatest and most upright man of 

temps, his age. 

Des qu'on eut appris a Athtnes As soon as it was known at Athens 

qu' Alcibiadc etait a Lace'de'- that Alcibiades was at Lacedemon, 

mone, on se repentit de la pr6- the Athenians repented of the pre- 

ripitatinn amec laquelle on cipitation with which they had 

Vavait condamne", condemned him. 

803. Nevertheless, the imperfect denotes the past, in this 
last instance, when it signifies an action which was past 
before that which is expressed by the first verb. 

EXAMPLE. 

En lisant Vhistoire des temps In reading the history of heroic 

heroiques, vous devez avoir times, you must have remarked 

remarqui que ces homines dont that those men who have beeu 

on a fait des demi-dieux, etaient made demi-gods were ferocious and 

des chefs feroces et bar bares, barbarous chiefs, scarcely deserving 

digues a peine du now. d'homme, the name of men. 

EXERCISE. 

1. I thought you were not ignorant that, to teach others the principles 
of an art or science, it is necessary to have experience and skill. 

2. I have been told that your sweetest occupation -was to form your 
taste, your heart, and your understanding. 

3. Darius, in his flight, being* reduced to the necessity of drinking 
water muddy and infected by dead bodies, affirmed that he never had 
drunk with so much pleasure. 

(1.) Were ignorant, ignorer— teach, inetruire dans— it is necessary, avoir besoin— 
(2.) I have, &c on m'a dit. [skill, habilete. 

(3) Flight, deroute — muddy, bourbeux— affirmed, assurer. 



244 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 

4. Care has been taken to inculcate in me, from infancy, that I should 
succeed in the world only in proportion as I should join to the desire of 
pleasing, a great deal of gentleness and civility. 

5. Ovid has said that study softens the manners and corrects every 
thing that is found in us rude and barbarous. 

6. You know that those pretended heroes whom pagan antiquity has 
made gods, were only barbarous and ferocious kings, who overran the 
earth, not so much to conquer as to ravage it, and who left every where 
traces of their fury and of their vices. 

7. It has been said of Pericles that his eloquence was like a thunder • 
bolt, which nothing could resist. 

8. As soon as Aristides had said that the proposal of Themistocles was 
unjust, the whole people exclaimed that they must not think of it any 
longer. 

9. Had you read the history of the early ages, you wotrfd know that 
Egypt was the most enlightened country in the universe, and the original 
spot* whence knowledge spread into Greece and the neighboring countries. 

(4.) Care has, &c. (active voice) on avoir — in me, me — in proportion, autant — 
(5.) Corrects, effacer — is found, se trouver de. [civility, nonnetete. 

(6 ) Overran, parcourir — not so much, moins. 
(7.) It, on — thunderbolt, foudre — (to), which. 

(8.) Exclaimed, s'ecrier — they must, falloir H. — of it, y — any longer, plus. 
(9.) Ages, temps — the original spot* whence, celui d'ou — neighboring, circonvoisin 
— countries, lieu. 



Relations between the Tenses of the Subjunctive and those 
of the Indicative. 

804. Rule I. —When the verb of the principal proposition 
is in the present or future, that of the subordinate proposition 
is put in the present of the subjunctive, to express a present 
or future, but in the preterit to express a past. We say, 

II faut que celui qui parle se He that speaks should accommodate 

mette a la port^e de celui qui himself to the understanding of 

Vecoute, him that listens. 

// voudra que voire fr ere soit de He will wish your brother to be one 

la partie, of the party. 

805. But we must say, 

Pour s'etre ilevi a ce point de To have risen to that pitch of grand 

grandeur, il faut que Rome ait . eur, Rome must have had an unin- 

eu une suite non interrompue de terrupted succession of great men, 
grands hommes, 

806. Exception. — Though the first verb be in the present 
or future, yet the second may be put in the imperfect, or plu- 
perfect of the subjunctive, when some conditional expression 
is introduced into the sentence. 

// rCest point d'homme, quelque There is no man, whatever merit he 

me'rite qidl ait, qui ne hit tres- may have, that would not feel very 

mortifte'ys'ilsavaittout cequ'on much mortified were he to know 

pense de lui, ail that is thought of him. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 245 

Ou trouvera-t-on un homme qui Where will you find the man who 
ne fit la meme faute, sHl etait would not have committed the 
expose* aux mimes tentations ? same error, had he been exposed 

to the same temptations 1 
Je doute que voire frere eut reussi I doubt whether your brother would 
sans votre assistance, have succeeded, had it not been 

for your assistance. 

EXERCISE. 

1. He who wishes to teach an art, must know it thoroughly ; he must 
give none but clear, precise, and well-digested notions of it : he must 
instil them, one by one, into the minds of his pupils ; and, above all, he 
must not overburden their memory with useless or unimportant rules. 

2. He must yield to the force of truth when they shall have suffered 
it to appear in its real light. 

3. There is no work, however perfect people may suppose it, that 
would not be liable to criticism, if it were examined with severity and in 
every point of view. 

4. I doubt whether his piece would have had the approbation of con- 
naisseurs if he had not determined to make in it the changes you judged 
necessary. 

(1.) It must, (that he who, &c. know it)— he must (not repeated), que— instil, faire 
entrer — by, a — overburden, surcharger — unimportant, insignifiant. 

(2.) (It must L. that he)— yield, se rendre— suffered, pennettre— it to appear, (that 
it appear) — real light, vrai jour. 

(3.) Would be liable, preter S.— with severity, a la rigueur— in, sous— point of view, 
face. 

(4.) Approbation, suffrage — had determined, se decider— in it, y— -judged, G. 

807. Rule II.— When the first verb is in the imperfect, 
either of the preterits, the pluperfect, or either of the condi- 
tionals, the second is put in the imperfect of the subjunctive, 
if we mean to express a present or future, but it is put in the 
pluperfect if we wish to express a past. 

Je voulais, j'ai voulu, j'eus voulu, je voudrais, or 
J'eusse voulu que vous Jinissiez cette affaire. 
Je ne savais pas, je n'ai pas su, &c. que vous eussiez 4tudi6 les 
mathematiques. 

808. Remark. — With the preterit indefinite the second 
verb is put in the present if it expresses an action which is 
or may be done at all times ; as, 

Dieu a entoure les yeux de tuniques God has surrounded the eyes with 

fort minces, transparantes au very thin tunics, transparent on 

dehors, ajin qu'o?i puisse voir a the outside, that we may see 

travers, through them. 

809. And in the preterit if we mean to express a past ; as, 

H a fallu qu v \\ ait sollicite ses He must have been obliged to solicit 
juges, his judges, 

x2 



246 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 

EXERCISE. 

1. Mr. de Turenne never ivould buy any thing on credit from tradesmen, 
for fear, he used to say, they should lose a great part of their demand, if 
he happened to be killed. All the workmen who were employed about 
his house had orders to bring in their bills before he set out for the cam- 
paign, and they were regularly paid. 

2. It -would be better for a man who truly loves himself to lose his life 
than to forfeit his honor by some base and shameful action. 

3. Lycurgus, in one of* his laws, had forbidden to light home* those 
who came from a feast in the evening, that the fear of not being able to 
reach their houses might prevent them from getting intoxicated. 

4. People used the bark of trees, or skins, to write upon* before paper 
■was known. 

5. Go and* ask that old man, " For whom are you planting'?" he will 
answer you, " For the immortal gods, who have ordered both that I 
should profit by the labor of those who have preceded me, and that those 
who should come after me should profit by mine." 

(1.) Would, vouloir H.—buy on credit, prendre a credit— of, chez— happened, venir 
— were employed, travailler — about, pour — bills, memoire — he, on — set out for, se 
mettre en. 

(2.) To lose, (that he would lose)— forfeit, ternir. 

(3.) In, par — to light, que on eel aire r S. — that, arm que — reach their houses, se 
rendre chez eux— getting intoxicated, s'enivrer. 

(4.) People, on — bark, ecorce — skins, peau — known, en usage. 

(5.) Have ordered, vouloir — both, et — by, de. 

810. In interrogative and negative sentences, the second 
verb is generally put in the subjunctive ; as, 

Quel est l'insense qui tienne pour siir qu'il vivra demain 1 

Vous ne vous persuadiez pas que les choses pussent tourner si mal. 

811. The verb is likewise in the subjunctive after the super- 
lative relative, and frequently after an impersonal verb ; as, 

Le meilleur cortege qu'un prince puisse avoir, e'est le coeur de ses sujets, 

812. The subjunctive is elegantly used in elliptical phrases, 
where the principal proposition is omitted ; as 

Qu'il vive ! (je souhaite qu'il), May he live ! 

Qu'il se soit oublie jusqu'a ce point ! That he should have so far forgot- 

(je suis surpris qu'il J, ten himself! 

Qui m'aime, me suive ! (je veux Whoever loves me, let him follow 

que celui qui), me ! 

Heureux I'homme qui pent, ne fut-ce Happy the man that can, were it 

que dans sa vieillesse, jouir de only in his old age, enjoy the 

toute la force de sa raison ! whole strength of his reason ! 

fquandce ne serait que), 

EXERCISE. 

1. Is there any one who does not feel that nothing is more degrading 
in a writer than the pains he takes to express ordinary and common 
things in a singular and pompous style. 

1) Is degrading in, degrader— in, de. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 247 

2. Do you think that, in forming the republic of bees, God has not 
had in view to teach kings to govern with gentleness and subjects to obey 
with love 1 

3. You to ill never be at peace, either with yourself or with others, 
unless you seriously endeavor to restrain your natural impetuosity. 

Had in view, vouloir. 

Be at peace, avoir la paix — either, ni — or, ni— endeavor, s'appliquer. 

813. Remark. — The relative pronouns qui, que, quel, dont, 
and ou, govern the subjunctive in similar circumstances. 

EXERCISE. 

1. Who is the writer that does not sometimes experience moments 
of sterility and languor 1 

2. There is not in the heart of man a good impulse that God does not 
produce. 

3. Choose a retreat where you may be quiet, a post whence you may 
defend yourself. 

4. The most flattering reward that a man can reap from his labors, is 
the esteem of an enlightened public. 

5. May he live, reign, and long constitute the happiness of a nation 
which he loves, and by which he is adored ! 

6. That he should thus degrade himself, is what posterity will find very 
difficult to believe. 

7. A man just and firm is not shaken, either by the clamors of an incon- 
siderate mob, or by the threats of an imperious tyrant : though* the whole 
world were to fall into ruins, he would be struck by it, but not moved. 

(2.) Impulse, mouvement. 
(3 ) May, pouvoir. 

(5 ) May he, (repeated before every verb)— constitute, faire— which he loves, cherir. 
(6.) Find difficult, avoir ie la peine — believe, se persuader. 

(7.) Is shaken, ebranler— inconsiderate, insense — mob, populace — imperious, fier — 
were, devoir — to fall into ruins, s'ecrouler. 



Further Observations upon the Conditional and Subjunctive. 

814. We have said the English auxiliaries should, would, 
could, may, and might, are not always to be considered as 
essentially and necessarily appertaining to the conditional and 
subjunctive. Indeed, it seldom happens that the French tenses 
are the same as the English ; at least, in subordinate, though 
they may r be in the principal propositions. For instance, 

I wish you would come to-night 
cannot be translated by 

Je souhaite que vous viendriez ce soir ; 

because " when the verb of the principal proposition is in the 
present, the verb of the subordinate proposition is put in the 
present of the subjunctive, if we mean to express a future." 
Therefore we must say, 

Je souhaite que vous veniez* 



248 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 

815. Or, "if the first verb is in either of the conditionals, 
the second must be in the imperfect of the subjunctive." 
For which reason we must also say, 

Je voudrais que vous vinssiez. (See Rule IL, page 245.) 

816. Now, in the first example, que vous veniez is marked 
in the conjunction of the verb by, that you may come, and in 
the second — que vous vinssiez — by, that you might come, 
neither of which is in the examples given. Again, 

II n'y a personne qui le croie, 

cannot be translated by, there is nobody who may believe it, 
although may is the sign of the subjunctive in the meaning ; 
but the meaning is, 

There is nobody that believes it ; or, simply, nobody believes it. 



Relations between the Tenses of the different Moods. 

817. Remark. — Our intention is not to give the relations 
which all the tenses bear to each other, but simply to mention 
some of the principal. 



Relations of the Indicative. 

818. To the imperfect are subjoined three tenses : 

C quand vous Jcriviez, 
Standard. — Je.lisaisK quand vous avez ecrit, 
(^quand vous ecrivites, 

819. The preterit anterior requires the preterit definite ; as, 
quand feus jini, vous entrdtes. 

820. To the pluperfect are subjoined the preterit definite, 
the preterit indefinite, the preterit anterior, and the imperfect. 

f quand vous entrdtes, 

o „_„_ T f -7 j quand vous etes entre', 

Standards. — J avaislu< i , u*. \ 

j quand vous jutes entre, 

\jquand vous entriez. 

821. To the preterit anterior indefinite is subjoined the 
preterit indefinite ; as, quand fai eu dine, vous etes entre. 

822. In conjunction with si, for suppose que, the future 
absolute requires the present, and the future anterior the 
preterit indefinite. 

o C Vous partirez, si je veux. 

£ fl 8 era parti, si vous Vavez voulu. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 249 

Relations to the Conditional and of the Conditional. 

823. In conjunction with si, for suppose que, the conditional 
present is accompanied by the imperfect, and the first condi- 
tional past by the pluperfect or by the second conditional past. 

C Voas partiriez, si je le voulais. 

Standards. — < T , . . Cm je Vavaisvoulu, 

) Vons seriez parti < . J . „ 7 

C (_si je I eusse vouiu. 

824. The tenses of the conditional present, and of the two 
conditionals past, are likewise accompanied by themselves. 

C Quand Vavare poss6derait tout Vor du monde, il 

ne serait pas encore content. 
Standards. — \ Quand Alexandre aurait conquis tout Vunivers y 

il n aurait pas 4te content. 
\JTous fussiez parti, si je V eusse voulu. 

825. It has been observed that when two words are joined 
by the conjunction que, the second verb is put sometimes in 
the indicative and sometimes in the subjunctive. (See page 
170 and following.) 



c C On dit, ~) 

Standard.- \ 0n ^ $ 



Relations of the Present and Future Absolute, of the Indicative 
to the Tenses of their own Mood, and of the Conditional. 

826. These two tenses may be accompanied by all the 
tenses of the indicative and conditional, 

"vous partez aujourd'hui, 
vous partirez demain, 
vous serez parti, quand, &c, 
vous partiez hier, 
vous partites hier, 
que, -^ vous etes parti ce matin, 

vous fates parti hier, quand, &c. 
vous etiez parti hier, quand, &c. 
vous partiriez aujourd'hui, si, &c 
vous seriez parti hier, si, &c. 

<jvous fussiez parti plus tot, si, &c 

827. Remark. — The same relation subsists when the sen- 
tence is negative ; except that for the present absolute of the 
indicative, the present of the subjunctive is substituted. In- 
stead of on ne dit pas que vous partez aujourd'hui ; the 
genius of the French language requires that we should say, 
on ne dit pas que vous partiez aujourd'hui* 

828. The imperfect, the preterit definite, the preterit inde- 
finite, and the pluperfect, are accompanied either by the 
imperfect or by the pluperfect, 



250 PARTICULAR RULES OF TPIE VERB. 

^ On dither "1 (vous partiezaujourtfhui, 

Standards.—^ Jf dlt ™ er > y«ue, + 
\ On a dit, f i 

^ .; ,. x rows efrez parti, 

\Jjn avait ait, J {_ r 

829. The future anterior requires the preterit indefinite ; 
as, on aura dit que vous avez menti. 

830. The conditional present may be accompanied by the 
present, the imperfect, the preterit indefinite, the pluperfect, 
the future of the indicative, as well as by the three conditionals. 



Standards. — On croirait,< 



Cqu'il se trompe, 

qu'il se trompait, 

qu'il s'est trompe, 

qu'il s'etait trompe*, 

quHl se trompera, 

qiCil se tromperait, si, &c. 

qu'il se serait trompe, si, &c. 
jqu'il se fat trompe, si, &c. 



831. The first conditional past may be accompanied by the 
imperfect, the pluperfect, as well as the two other conditionals. 

/qu'il tombait, 
qu'il etaittombt 
. qu il serait tomoe, 
\jquHl fut tombt. 

832. The second conditional past may be accompanied by 
the same tenses. 



Principal Relations with the Subjunctive. 

834. To the present, the future absolute, and the future 
anterior of the indicative, is generally subjoined the present 
of the subjunctive. 

CH veut ~) 

Standard. — < II voudra > que vous partiez. 
(^H aura voulu j 

834. To the imperfect, the preterit definite, the preterit 
indefinite, the pluperfect, and the preterit anterior, may be 
subjoined the imperfect of the subjunctive. 



Standard.- 



Je voulais, 
Je voulus, 
J'ai voulu 
Tavais voulu, 
i^J'eus voulu, 



>que vous partissiez* 



835. To the future anterior, the preterit of the subjunctive ; 
&s, // aura voulu qu'il soit parti, 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 251 

836. The conditional present is accompanied either by the 
imperfect, or by the pluperfect of the subjunctive. 

C ,- , . ~) vous partissiez, 

standard. — < Je voudrais que, > r r 

(_ 3 vous jussiez parti, 

837. To the first and second conditionals past is subjoined 
the pluperfect of the subjunctive. 



Standard 



C J' aureus voulu, ~) /. 

— £ J'eusse voulu, % Q™ vous fussiez parti. 



OF THE INFINITIVE. 

838. The preposition to before an infinitive is, according 
to circumstances, rendered either by pour, by a, or by de ; 
sometimes it is not even expressed at all. 

839. When to means in order to, it is expressed in French 
by pour ; as, 

He came to speak to me, II vint pour me parler. 

840. As for the other two cases, there is hardly any fixed 
rule to distinguish whether a or de, is to be used ; the regi- 
men which the preceding French verb requires after it is the 
only guide. Thus, 

He likes to play, will be expressed by il aime ajouer ; he told me to go, 
by il me dit tfaller ; and he preferred dying, b* il aima mieux mourir. 

841. The participle present is usee in English both as a 
substantive and an adjective, and frequently instead of the 
present of the infinitive. 

His ruling passion is hunting, Sa passion dominante est la chasse. 

He is gone a -walking, II est alle se promener. 

Prevent him from doing mischief, Empechez-le de faire le mal. 

There is a pleasure in silencing II y a plaisir a fermer la bouche aux 
great talkers, grands parleurs. 

842. It likewise takes almost every other preposition. In 
the first of the above examples, it is translated by the sub- 
stantive ; in the second, by the verbal adjective ; and in the 
others by the present of the infinitive. 

843. Sometimes the participle present must be expressed 
by the relative qui, with the verb in the indicative, especially 
when a different mode might create any ambiguity in the 
sense ; as, 

/ met them riding post, Je les ai rencontres qui couraient la poste. 

844. Sometimes it must be expressed by the conjunction 
que, with the verb in the indicative or in the subjunctive, as 



252 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 

circumstances may require : this is when the participle pre- 
sent is preceded by a possessive pronoun ; as, 

The fear of his coming vexed us, La crainte qu'il ne vint nous tourmen- 
I doubt his being faithful, Je doute qu'il soit fidele, &c. [tait 

845. It may be proper to observe that, in French, the 
preposition en alone is followed by the participle present. 
All other prepositions require the present of the infinitive. 

846. Foreigners are apt to mistake the use of the participle 
present, because they do not consider that, as it expresses an 
incidental proposition, it must evidently relate to the word 
which it restrains and modifies. 

847. Rule. — The participle present always forming a 
phrase incidental and subordinate to another, must necessarily 
relate to the subject of the principal phrase, when it is not 
preceded by another noun, as in this sentence : 

Je ne puis vuus accompagner a la I cannot accompany you into the 
campagne, ayant des affaires country, having some business 
qui exigent ma presence, that requires my presence here. 

848. The participle present ayant relates to the subject je, 
since the subordinate proposition, formed by ayant 9 could 
have no kind of relation to the principal proposition, if it 
could not be resolved into this : — Farce que fai des affaires 
qui, &c. But in tais sentence, 

Combien voyons-nous de gens qui, How many people do we see who, 
connaissant le prix du temps, le knowing the value of time, 
perdent mal-a-propos ! spend it improperly ! 

connaissant relates to ihe substantive gens, because this is the 
word which it restrains and modifies, and because the relative 
qui, placed between that substantive as the regimen and the 
participle present, obviates every kind of ambiguity. 

849. Remarks. — 1. Two participles ought never to be 
used together without being united by a conjunction ; as, 

C'est un homme aimant et craignant He is a man loving and fearing 
Dieu, God. 

850. The relative en ought never to be put either before a 
participle present or before a gerund. We cannot say, 

Je vous ai remis mon fils entre les mains, en voulant faire quelque chose 
de bon, 

because the sense would be ambiguous : for the meaning is not, 
As I wish to do something good — or, as I wish to do well — I have put 
my son into your hands, 

but, 

I have put my son into your hands, as I wish to make something of him. 
We should say, Voulant en faire, &c. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 253 

851. Likewise this sentence would be improper: 
Le prince tempere la rigueur du pouvoir, en en partageant les fonctions, 
on account of the repetition of the word en, used in two 
different senses, viz : as a preposition and a relative. An- 
other turn must then be adopted ; as, 

C'est en partageant les fonctions du pouvoir, qu'un prince en tempere 
la rigueur. 



CHAPTER VII. 
OF PREPOSITIONS. 



852. The office of prepositions is to bring the two terms 
between which they are placed into a state of relation, and that 
relation is generally expressed by their own signification; as, 

Avec, sur, pendant, dans, &c. 

853. But a, de, and en express it, either by their primitive 
and proper meaning, or figuratively and by extension ; so that, 
in this last case, they are merely prepositions serving to unite 
the two terms ; whence it happens that they often express 
either the same relations that others do, or opposite relations. 
For instance, in these two sentences : 

Appro chcz-vous dufeu. Come near the fire. 

Eloignez-vous dufeu, Go from the fire. 

854. Be merely establishes a relation between the two 
terms, without expressing in the first the relation of approxi- 
mation, or in the second the relation of distance. In order, 
therefore, to form a just idea of these three prepositions, it 
is of importance to consider only their primitive and proper 
signification. 

855. En and dans have nearly the same meaning; but 
they differ in this, that the former is used in a more vague, 
the latter in a more determinate sense ; as, 

J'etais en Angleterre, dans la province de Middlesex. 

856. From what has just been said, it follows, then, that 
en, on account of its indeterminate nature, ought not to be 
followed by the article, except in a small number of phrases 
sanctioned by usage ; such are, 

En la presence de Dieu; en la grand' chambre du parlement; en 
/'absence d'un tel ; en Z'annee mil huit cent dix-sept, &c. 

with respect to the expressions 

En I'honneur, en l'age, it is better to say, a ThonjieUr, a Tage. 



254 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 

857. Avant is a preposition in this phrase : 
Avant le jour. Before day-light, 
but it is an adverb in this : 

N'allez pas si avant, Do not go so forward, 

858. Some other prepositions are likewise occasionally 
adverbs. 

859. Autour and alentour must not be confounded ; autour 
is a preposition and alentour an adverb ; thus, 

Tous les grands ttaient autour du All the grandees stood round the 

trbne, throne. 

Le roi itait sur son trbne, et les The king was upon the throne, and 

grands etaient alentour, the grandees stood round. 

860. Avant and aupar avant are not used indifferently. 

861. Avant is followed by a regimen ; as, 
Avant Pdques, Before Easter. 
Avant ce temps, Before that time. 

862. Auparavant is followed by no regimen ; as, 

Si vous partez, venez me voir au- If you set off, come and see me 
paravant, first. 

863. Pret a and pres de are not the same expressions. 
Pret is an adjective : 

Je suis pret a /aire ce que vous I am ready to do what you 
voudrez, please. 

864. But pres is a preposition : 

JSIon ouvrage est pres d'etre fini, My work is nearly finished. 

865. Au travers and a travers differ in this : the first is 
followed by the preposition de, the second is not ; as, 

Use Jit jour au travers des ennemis, $ He fought his way through the 
Use Jit jour a travers les ennemis, (_ enemy. 

866. Avant denotes priority of time and order ; as, 
II est arrive avant moi, V article se met avant le nom. 

867. Devant is used for en presence, vis-a-vis ; 
II a paru devant le juge ; il loge devant Peglise. 

868. Remark. — Devant is likewise a preposition marking 
order, and is the opposite of apres ; as, 

II a le pas devant moi, He has precedence of me. 

Si vous etes presse courez devant, If you are in a hurry, run before. 



The use of the Article with Prepositions. 

869. Some prepositions require the article before their 
regimen ; others do not ; and others again sometimes admit, 
sometimes reject it. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 255 

870. Rule I. — The following prepositions generally re- 
quire the article before the noun which they govern : 

avant, depuis, envers, nonobstant, selon, 

apres, devant, excepte, parmi, suivant, 

chez, derriere, hors, pendant, touchant, 

dans, durant, hormis, pour, vers, 

avant l'aurore, chez le prince, envers les pauvres, 

apres la promenade, dans la maison, devant l'eglise, &c. 

871. There are, however, exceptions ; as, 

avant terme, avant diner, pour lit une paillasse, 

avant midi, apres diner, depuis minuit, &c. 

872. Rule II. — A noun governed by the preposition en is 
not, in general, preceded by the article ; as, 

En ville, en campagne, en extase, en songe, en pieces, &c. 

873. Remark. — Varmee est entree en campagne, means, 
the army had taken the field ; but Mr, N. est alle a la cam- 
pagne, means, Mr. N. is gone into the country. 

874. Rule III. — These eleven prepositions — ci, de, avec, 
contre, entre, malgre, outre, par, pour, sur, sans — some- 
times admit, sometimes reject the article before their regimen. 

875. The article is used in these phrases : 

Jouer sur le velours, 

St. Paul veut de la subordination entre la femme et le mari. 

Sans les passions, ou serait le m£rite 1 

876. It is suppressed in, 

Etre sur pied ; un peu de fagons ne gate rien entre mari et femme. 
Vivre sans passions, c'est vivre sans plaisirs et sans peines 



Repetition of the Prepositions, 

877. Rule I.— The prepositions de, a, and en, must be 
repeated before all the nouns which they govern ; as, 

Voyons qui V emportera de vous, de Let us see which of us will excel, 

lui, ou de moi, you, he, or I. 

Elle a de Vhonnetete, de la douceur, She has politeness, sweetness, 

des graces, et de V esprit, grace, and abilities. 

La loi, que Dieu a gravee au The law which God has deeply 

fond de mon cosur, ntinstruit engraven on my heart, instructs 

de tout ce que je dois a Vauteur me in every thing I owe to the 

de mon etre, au prochain, a moi- author of my being, to my neigh- 

meme, bor, and to myself. 

En Asie, en Europe, en Afrique, et In Asia, in Europe, in Africa, and 

jusqu'en Amerique, on trouve le even in America, we find the 

me me prejuge, same prejudice. 

878. Rule II. — The other prepositions, especially those 
consisting of two syllables, are generally repeated before 



256 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 

nouns which have meanings totally different; but seldom 

before nouns which are nearly synonymous : 

Rien n'est moins selon Dieu et Nothing is less according to God 

selon le monde, and according to the world. 

Cette action est contre Vhonneur et That action is contrary to honor 

contre toute espece de principes, andjto every kind of principle. 

879. But we ought to say, 

II perd sa jeunesse dans la mollesse He wastes his youth in effeminacy 

et la volupte, and pleasure. 

JV "otre loi ne condamne personne Our laws condemn nobody without 

sans V avoir entendu et examine, having heard and examined him. 



Of the Government of Prepositions 

880. Some prepositions govern nouns without the help of 
another preposition ; as, 

Devant la maison, Before the house. 

Hormis son frere, Except his brother. 

Sans son 6 pee, Without his sword, &c. 

881. Others require the help of the preposition de; as, 

Pres de la maison. Near the house, 

A Vinsu de son frere. Unknown to his brother. 

Au-dessus du pont, Above the bridge, &c. 

882. These four— jus que, par rapport^ quant, and sauf— 
are followed by the preposition a / as, 

Jusqu'au mois prockain, Till the next month. 

Quant a moi, As for me, &c. 

883. Practice alone can teach these different regimens. 

884. Rule. — A noun may be governed by two prepositions, 
provided they do not require different regimens ; thus, we 
may say with propriety, 

Celui qui ecrit selon les circon' He who writes according to circum- 
stances, pour et contre un parti, stances, both for and against a 
est un homme bien meprisable, party, is a very contemptible man, 

885. But it would be wrong to say, 

Celui qui ecrit en faveur et contre un parti, &c. 
because en faveur requires the preposition de. 

886. Rule. — Prepositions which, with their regimen, 
express a circumstance, are generally placed as nearly as 
possible to the word to which that circumstance relates ; as, 

On voit des personnes qui, avec We see persons who, with a great 
beaucoup d'esprit, commettent deal of wit, commit very great 
de tres-grandes fautes, faults. 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ADVERB. 257 

J'ai envoye a la poste les lettres I have sent to the post office the let- 

que vous avez ecrites, ters which you have written. 

Croyez-vous pouvoir ramener^ar Do you think you can reclaim by 

la douceur ces esprits egares P gentleness those mistaken people 1 

887. If we attempt to alter the place of these prepositions, 
we shall find that the sentences will become ambiguous. 



CHAPTER VIII. 

OF THE ADVERB ? 



Of the Negative ne. 



888. Negation is expressed in French by ne, either alone 
or accompanied by pas or point. On this point the Academy 
has examined the four following questions : 

1. Where is the place of the negatives ? [versa ? 

2. When is pas to be used in preference to point, and vice 

3. When may both be omitted ? 

4. When ought both to be omitted ? 

889. As this subject is of very material importance, we 
shall treat it upon the plan of the Academy, and agreeably to 
their views. 

890. First Question. — Where is the place of the negatives ? 

89 1 . Ne is always prefixed to the verb ; but the place of 
pas and point is variable. 

892. When the verb is in the infinitive, these are placed 
indifferently before or after it ; for we say, 

Pour ne point voir, or, pour ne voir point. 

893. In the other moods, except the imperative, the tenses 
are either simple or compound. In the simple tenses, pas 
or point is placed after the verb : 

II ne parle pas ; ne parle-t-il pas 1 

894. In the compound tenses, it is placed between the 
auxiliary and the participle : 

II n'a pas parle ; n'a-t-il pas parle 1 

895. In the imperative, it is placed after the verb : 

Ne badinez pas. Ne vous en allez pas. 

896. Second Question. — When is pas to be used in pre- 
ference to point, and vice versa ? 

y2 



258 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ADVERB. 

897. Point is a stronger negative than pas ; besides, it 
denotes something permanent : II ne lit point, means, he 
never reads. 

898. Pas denotes something accidental : II ne lit pas, 
means, he does not read now, or he is not reading. 

899. Point de denotes an absolute negation. Thus, Iln'a 
point d* esprit, is to say, he has no wit at all. 

900. Pas de allows the liberty of a reserve. So, H ri*a pas 
d } esprit, is to say, he has nothing of what can be called wit. 

901 . Hence, the Academy concludes that pas is more proper, 

902. 1. — Before plus, moins, si, autant, and other words 
denoting comparison ; as, 

JWilton n'est pas moins sublime qu y - Milton is not less sublime than 
Homere, Homer. 

903. 2. — Before nouns of number ; as, 

H rCy a pas dix ans, It is not ten years ago. 

904. Point is elegantly used, 

905. 1. — At the end of a sentence ; as, 

On s'amusait a ses deepens, et il They were amusing themselves at his 
ne s*en apercevait point, expense, and he did not perceive it. 

900. 2. — In elliptical sentences ; as, 
Je croyais avoir affaire a un hon- I thought I had to deal with an honest 
nete homme ; mais point, man ; but no. 

907. In answer to interrogative sentences ; as, 

Irez-vous ce soir au pare? — Shall you go this evening to the park * 
Point, — No. 

908. The Academy also observes, that when pas or point 
is introduced into interrogative sentences, it is with meanings 
somewhat different. We make use of point when we have 
any doubt on our minds ; as, 

jYavez-vous point ete la ? Have you not been there ? 

909. But we use pas when we are persuaded. Thus, 
Wavez-voas pas ete la ? But you have been there, have you not ? 

910. Third Question. — When may both pas and point 
be omitted ? 

911. They may be suppressed, 

912. 1. — After the words cesser, oser, and pouvoir ; but 
this omission is only for the sake of elegance ; as, 

Je ne cesse de rrCen occuper, I am incessantly attentive to it. 

Je n'ose vous en parler, I dare not speak to you about it. 

Je ne puis y penser sans frSmir, I cannot think of it without shuddering. 



PARTICULAR Rl LES OF THE ADVERB. 259 

913. We likewise say, but only in familiar conversation, 
Nc bougez, Do not stir. 

914. 2. — In expressions of this kind : 

.-:-i7 un homme dont elle tie Is there a man that she does not 
mediae ? ■lllfcrtrlf ! 

I hh ami qui ne soil d?s Have you a friend that is not like- 

ns ? wise mine ! 

). Pour m QnsmoH. — When ought both pas and point 
to be omitted [ 

916. They are omitted, 

917. 1. — When the extent which we mean to give to the 

sufficiently expressed, either by the words which 

rid it, by words which exclude all restriction, or lastly, 
by such H denote the Smaller parts of a whole, and which 
are without the article. 

iUrt. To exemplify the first part of this remark, we say, 

Je ne soi I go out but seldom. 

Je ne sortirai de trois jours, I shall not go out for three days. 

919. To exemplify the second, we lay, 

s jamais, In- <re. 

■ !us, I think l. it. 

>ie sait s'il est digue if amour, Mo body know-; whether he be de- 

ou d<> haiuc, Mmng ot Invc <,r hatred. 

J\"emjtl'jin'z aucun de ccs strat utagems. 

II ne plait a posh [gemes, Hfl \ O&J* 

Wtem ne^t plus charmant, thing is more charming. 

Je a' nillement, I do not think of it at all. 

920. To exemplify the third, we say, 

II n'y voit goutte. He cannot see at all. 

Je n'eti ai cueilli brin, I did not gather a sprig. 

Jl ne dit mot, He speaks not a word. 

921. But if to mot we join an adjective of number, pas 
must be added ; as, 

II ne dit pas un mot qui tiinte- He speaks not a word but what is 

resse, interesting. 

Dans ce discouvs, il n'y a pas trois In that speech, there are not three 

mots a rrprendre, words that are exceptionable. 

922. Pas is likewise used with the preposition de ; as, 

Jl ne fait pas de demarche inutile, He does not take any useless step. 

923. Remark. — If, after the sentences we have just men- 
tioned, either the conjunction que or the relative pronouns 



260 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ADVERB, 

qui or dont should introduce a negative sentence, then in this 

last, pas and point are omitted ; as, 

Je ne fais jamais d? execs, que je I never commit any excess without 

n'en sois incommode, being ill after it. 

Je ne vols personne qui ne vous I see nobody but what commends 

loue, you. 

924. 2. — When two negatives are joined by ni $ as, 
Je ne Vaime ni ne Vestime, I neither love nor esteem him. 

925. And when the conjunction ni is repeated, either in 
the subject, as, 

Ni for ni la grandeur ne nous Neither gold nor greatness can make 
rendent heureux, us happy, 

926. Or, in the attribute ; as, 

U n'est ni prudent ni sage, He is neither prudent nor wise, 

927. Or, in the regimen ; as, 

II n'a ni dettes ni proces, He has neither debts nor law-suits. 

928. Remark. — Pas is preserved when ni is not repeated, 
and when this last serves only to unite two members of a 
negative sentence ; as, 

Je rfaime pas ce vain etalage I do not like that vain display of eru- 

d 'erudition, prodiguee sans dition, lavished without choice and 

choix et sans gout, ni ce luxe without taste, nor that pomp of 

de mots qui ne disent rien, words which have no meaning. 

929. 3. — With the verb which follows que, used instead of 
pourquoi, and with a moins que, or si, used instead of it ; as, 

Que n'etes-vous aussi pose que Why are you not as sedate as your 

votre frere ? brother 1 

Je ne sortirai pas, a moins que I shall not go out, unless you come 

vous ne veniez me prendre, . to fetch me. 

Je n'irai pas chez lui, sHl ne m'y I shall not go to his house, if he does 

engage, not invite me 

930. 4. — With ne — que, used instead of settlement $ as, 

line jeunesse, qui se livre a ses Youth which abandons itself to its 
passions, ne transmet a la vieil- passions, transmits to old age noth- 
lesse qiCun corps use, ing but a worn-out body. 

931. When before the conjunction que, the word rien is 
understood ; as, 

It ne fait que rire, He does nothing but laugh. 

932. Or when that conjunction may be changed into sinon 
or si ce n'est ; as, 

II ne tient qu'a vbus de re*ussir, The success wholly depends upon you. 
Trop de mattres a la fois ne ser- Too many masters at once only serve 
vent qu f a embrouiller V esprit, to perplex the mind. 

933. 5. — With a verb in the preterit, preceded by the 



PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ADVERB. 261 

conjunction depuis que or by the verb il y a, denoting a 

certain duration of time ; as, 

Comment vous etes-vous porte depuis How have you been since I saw 

queje ne vous ai vu ? you? 

II y a trois mois que je ne vous ai I have not seen you for these three 

vu, months. 

934. But they are not omitted when the verb is in the 
present; as, 

Comment vit-il depuis que nous How does he live, now we do not 

ne le voyons point ? see him 1 

II y a six mois que nous ne le We have not seen him these six 

voyons point, months. 

935. 6. — In phrases where the conjunction que is preceded 
by the adverbs of comparison plus, moins, mieux, &c, or 
some other equivalent term ; as, 

On miprise ceux qui parlent au- We despise those who speak differ- 

trement qu'ils ne pensent, ently from what they think. 

II icrit mieux qiCil ne parle, He writes better than he speaks. 

C J est pire qiCon ne le disait, It is worse than was said. 

C est autre chose que jene croyais. It is different from what I thought. 

Peu s'enfaut quon ne ntait trompe, I have been very near being deceived. 

936. 7. — In sentences united by the conjunction que to the 
verbs douter, desesperer, nier, and disconvenir, forming a 
negative member of a sentence ; as, 

Je ne doute pas q\Cil ne vienne, I doubt not that he will come. 

Ne desesperez pas que ce moyen Do not despair of the success of 

ne vous reussisse, these means. 

Je ne nie pas, or je ne disconviens I do not deny that it is so. 

pas que cela ne soit, 

937. The Academy says, that after the last two verbs, ne 
may be omitted ; as, 

Je ne nie pas, or je ne disconviens pas que cela soit. 

938. 8. — With a verb united by the conjunction que to the 
verbs empecher and prendre garde, meaning to take care ; as, 

J'empecherai Men que vous ne I shall prevent your being of the 

souez du nombre, number. 

Prenez garde qu y on ne vous se- Take care that they do not corrupt 

duise, you. 

939. Remark. — The Academy observes, that in the above 
acceptation, prendre garde is followed by a subjunctive ; but 
when it means to reflect, the indicative is used with pas or 
point; as, 

Prenez garde que vous ne nten- Mind, you do not understand what I 
tendez pas, mean. 

940. 9. — With a verb united by the conjunction que to the 



262 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ADVERB. 

verb craindre, and those of the same meaning, when we do 
not wish the thing expressed by the second verb ; as, 

H craint que son frere ne Vaban- He is afraid his brother should for- 
do/me, sake him. 
Je crains que mon ami ne meure, I fear my friend will die. 

941. But pas is not omitted when we wish the thing ex- 
pressed by the second verb ; as, 

Je crains que mon pere n' arrive pas, I am afraid my father will not come. 

942. 10. — With the verb which follows de peur que, de 
crainte que, in similar circumstances with craindre. Thus, 
when we say, 

De crainte qu'il ne perde son proces, 
we wish that he may gain it ; and when we say, 

De crainte qu'il ne soit pas puni, 
we wish that he may be punished. 

943. Kemark.— In these phrases, 

Je crains que mon ami ne meure, I am afraid my friend will die, 
Vous empechez qu'on ne chante, You prevent them from singing, 

the expression ne is not a negation ; it is the ne or quin of 
the Latins, introduced into the French language, as may be 
seen by the English translation. 

944. 1 1 . — After savoir, whenever it has the meaning of 
pouvoir ; as, 

Je ne saurais en venir a bout, I cannot accomplish it. 

945. When it means etre incertain, it is the best to omit 
pas and point ; as, 

Je ne sais oule prendre, I do not know where to find him. 

II ne sait ce qu'il dit, He does not know what he says. 

946. Remark. — But pas and point must be used when 
savoir is taken in its true meaning ; as, 

Je ne sais pas le francais, I do not know French. 

947. 12. — We also say, 

Ne vous deplaise, ne vous en By your leave, under favor, or let it 
deplaise, not displease you. 

948. Plus and davantage must not be used indifferently. 

949. Plies is followed by the preposition de or the con- 
junction que; as, 

U a plus de brillant que de solide, He has more brilliancy than solidity. 

II se fie plus a ses lumitres quCa He relies more upon his own know- 

celles des autres, ledge than upon that of others. 

950. Davantage is used alone and at the end of sentences ; as, 
La science est estimable, mats la Learning is estimable, but virtue is 

vertu Vest davantage, still more so. 



OF GRAMMATICAL CONSTRUCTION. 263 

951. Though davantage cannot be followed by the prepo- 
sition de, it may be preceded by the pronoun en ; as, 

Je rten dirai pas davantage, I shall not say any more about it. 

952. It is incorrect to use davantage for le plus. We 
must say, 

De toutes les fieurs d\m parterre, Of all the flowers of a parterre, the 
I 9 anemone est celle qui me plait anemone is that which pleases me 
le plus, most. 

953. Si, aussi, tant, and autant, are always followed by 
the conjunction que, expressed or understood. 

954. Si and aussi are joined to adjectives, adverbs, and 
participles ; tant and autant to substantives and verbs. 

L 9 Angleterre n'est pas si grande England is not so large as 

que la France, France. [beloved. 

II est aussi estime qiCaime, He is as much esteemed as he is 

Elle a autant de beaute que de vertu, She has as much beauty as virtue. 

955. Remark.— Autant may, however, be substituted for 
aussi, when it is preceded by one adjective and followed by 
que and another adjective ; as, 

H est modeste autant que sage, He is as modest as wise. 

956. Aussi and autant are used in the affirmative ; si and 
tant in negative and interrogative sentences. The two last 
are, however, alone to be used in affirmative sentences, when 
they are put for tellement ; as, 

II est devenu si gros, qiCil a de la He is become so bulky that he can 

peine a marcher, hardly walk. 

77 a tant couru quHl en est hors He has been running so fast that 

d 9 haleine, he is out of breath. 

957. Jamais takes sometimes the preposition a, and tou- 
jours the preposition pour ; as, 

Soyez a jamais heureux, Be for ever happy. 

Cest pour toujours, It is for ever. 



CHAPTER IX. 
OF GRAMMATICAL CONSTRUCTION. 



958. Grammatical construction is the order which the 
genius of a language has assigned, in speech, to the different 
sorts of words into which it is distinguished. Construction 
is sometimes mistaken for syntax ; but there is this difference, 
the latter consists in the rules which we are to observe, in 
order to express the relations of words one to another, whereas 



264 OF GRAMMATICAL CONSTRUCTION. 

grammatical construction consists in the various arrangements 
which are allowed while we observe the rules of sy™ta 
Wow this arrangement is irrevocably fixed, not only as phrases 

S ST T ga i' Ve ' im P erative > <>' expositive/but also as 
each of these kinds may be affirmative or negative. 

959. In sentences simply interrogative, the subject is either 
a noun or pronoun. J 

fc* 9 l°* If ?° r bje( ? bC a n ° Un ' the foll °wing is the order to 
be observed: first, the noun, then the verb, then the corns- 
ponding personal pronoun, the adverb, if any, and the regimen 

he ad3 T eS a f thG cora P° und te nses, the pronoun and 
the adverb are placed between the auxiliary and the participle • 

lesl'Zt?/ l° nt 'fn UU - Uen - P ° Ur Are sciences an advantage to „a- 
t£,T* i ° r nt ' e , lleS i amalS COn - tions ? Have the X ever contri- 
tnbui a leur bonheur? bated to their happiness ? 

* Jl 1 ' a thC mh \ ec ) , be a P ronoun > the verb begins the series, 
and the other words follow in the order already pointed out ; as] 

V0 Zd£ e a i r "' V ° US t0UJ ° UrS * Wi ," T U alwa y s **» P leas »« « 
meaires slandering? 

Jurez-vous bientot Jim ? Shall you soon have done 1 

962. N. B.— When the verb is reflected, the pronoun 
forming the regimen begins the series : this pronoun always 
preserves its place before the verb, except in sentences 
simply imperative. 

963. In interrogative sentences, with negation, the same 
order is observed ; but ne is placed before the verb, and pas 
or point after the verb in the simple tenses, and between the 
auxiliary and the participle in the compound tenses ; as, 

V °!Z,£ ri 7 ne viendra -*- il P"' Will not yonr brother come to- 

aemam .< morrow ? 

JV aurez-vous pas bientdt fini ? Shall you not have soon done ? 

964. Remark— There are in French several other ways 
of interrogating. } 

965. 1. — With an absolute pronoun ; as, 
Qui vous a dit cela ? or } 

Qui est-ce qui vous a dit cela ? 5 Who told you that 1 

966. 2 — With the demonstrative pronoun ce; as, 

E '*T°Z% Isit y° u? Est-ce gu'ilfileut? Does it rain 1 

yb7. With an interrogative adverb ; as, 
Pourquoi ne vient-il pas ? Why does he not come ? 

Comment vous trouvez-vous ? How do you find yourself? 

;„*! 68 ' Hence we see that the absolute pronouns and the 
interrogative adverbs always begin the sentence: but the 
demonstrative pronoun always follows the verb. 



OF GRAMMATICAL CONSTRUCTION. 265 

969. In sentences simply imperative, the verb is always 
placed first, in the first and second persons ; but in the third, it 
comes after the conjunction que and the noun or pronoun; as, 

Allons la, Let us go there. 

Venez ici, Come here. 

QuHls y aillent, Let them go there. 

Que Pierre aille a Londres, Let Peter go to London. 

970. With negation, ne and pas are placed as in interro- 
gative sentences. 

971. For the place of the pronouns, see page 131. 

972. Sentences are expositive, when we speak without 
either interrogating or commanding. The following is the 
order of the words in those which are affirmative : the subject, 
the verb, the adverb, the participle, the regimen ; as, 

Un bon prince merite V amour cle A good prince deserves the love of 

ses sujets, et Vestime de tous les his subjects, and the esteem of all 

peuples, nations. 

Cesar eut inutilement passe le Caesar would have crossed the Rubi- 

Rubicon, s'il y eut en de son con to no purpose had there been 

temps des Fabius, Fabii in his time. 

973. The negative sentences differ from this construction 
only as ne is always placed before the verb, and pas or point 
either after the verb, or between the auxiliary and the par- 
ticiple ; as, 

Un homme riche ne fait pas ton- A rich man does not always do all 

jonrs le bien qu'il pourrait, the good he might. 

Ciceron n'eut peut-etre pas ete un Cicero would not perhaps have been 

si grand orateur, si le desir de so great an orator, had not the 

s'elever aux premieres dignites desire of rising to the first dignities 

ni! eat enjiamme son ame, inflamed his soul. 

974. Sentences are either simple or compound. They are 
simple when they contain only one subject and one attribute ; as, 

Vous lisez, You read. Vous etes jeune, You are young. 

975. They are compound when they associate several 
subjects with one attribute, or several attributes with one 
subject, or several attributes with several subjects, or several 
subjects with several attributes. 

976. This sentence, Pierre et Paul sont heureux, is com- 
pound by having several subjects ; this — cettefemme estjolie, 
spirituelle et sensible — is compound by having several attri- 
butes ; and this — Pierre et Paul sont spirituels et savans — is 
composed at once of several subjects and several attributes. 

977. A sentence may be compound in various other ways ; 
by the subject, by the verb, or by the attribute. 

Z 



266 OF GRAMMATICAL CONSTRUCTION. 

978. By the subject, when this is restricted by an inci- 
dental proposition ; as, 

Dieu, qui est bon. 

979. By the verb, when it is modified by some circum- 
stance of time, order, &c. ; as, 

Dieu, qui est bon, n'abandonne jamais. 

980. By the attribute, when this attribute is modified by a 
regimen which is itself restricted ; as, 

Dieu, qui est bon, n'abandonne jamais les hommes, qui mettent 
since rement leur confiance en lui. 

981. These simple or compound sentences may be joined 
to others by a conjunction; as, 

Quand on aime V etude, le temps When we love study, time flies with- 
passe sans qu'on s'e?i apergoive, out our perceiving it. 

The two partial phrases here form but one. 

982. Rule. — When a sentence is composed of two partial 
phrases, joined by a conjunction, harmony and perspicuity 
generally require the shortest to go first. 

EXAMPLES. 

Quand les passions nous quittent When our passions leave us, we 

nous nous Jlattons en vain, que in vain flatter ourselves that it 

c'est nous qui les quittons, is we that leave them. 

On n'est point a plaindre, quand, He is not to be pitied who, for 

au defaut de plaisirs reels, on want of real pleasure, finds 

trouve le moyen de s'occuper de means to amuse himself with 

chimeres, chimeras. 

983. Periods result from the union of several partial 
phrases, the whole of which make a complete sense. Periods, 
to be clear, require the shortest phrases to be placed first. 
The following example of this is taken from Flechier : 

N'attendez pas, Messieurs. 

1. Que j'ouvre une scene tragique ; 

2. Que je represente ce grand homme etendu sur ses propres trophees ; 

3. Que je decouvre ce corps pale et sanglant, aupres duquel fume encore 
la foudre qui Pa frappe ; 

4. Que je fasse crier son sang comme celui d'Abel, et que j'expose a 
vos yeux les images de la religion et de la patrie eploree. 

984. This admirable period is composed of four members, 
which go on gradually increasing. It is a rule not to give 
more than four members to a period, and to avoid multiplying 
incidental sentences. 

985. Obscurity in style is generally owing to those small 
phrases which divert the attention from the principal sen- 
tences, and make us lose sight of them 



OF GRAMMATICAL CONSTRUCTION. 267 

986. The construction which we have mentioned is called 
direct or regular, because the words are placed in those sen- 
tences according to the order which has been pointed out. But 
this order may be altered in certain cases, and then the con- 
struction is called indirect or irregular. Now, it may be 
irregular by inversion, by ellipsis, by pleonasm, or by syl- 
lipsis ; these are what are called the four figures of words. 



Of Inversion. 

987. Inversion is the transposition of a word into a place 
different from that which by usage is properly assigned to it. 
This ought never to be done except when it introduces more 
perspicuity, energy, or harmony into the language ; for it is 
a defect in construction whenever the relation subsisting be- 
tween words is not easily perceived. 

988. There are two kinds of inversion : the one, by its 
boldness, seems to be confined to poetry ; the other is fre- 
quently employed even in prose. 

989. We shall speak here of the latter kind only. 

990. The following inversions are authorized by custom. 

991. The subject by which a verb is governed may with 
propriety be placed after it ; as, 

Tout ce que lux promet Vamitie All that the friendship of the Romans 
des It o mains, promises him. 

992. Remark. — This inversion is a rule of the art of 
speaking and writing whenever the subject is modified by an 
incidental sentence, long enough to make us lose sight of the 
relation of the verb governed to the subject governing. 

993. The noun governed by the prepositions de and a may 
likewise be very properly placed before the verb ; as, 

D'utie voix entrecoupee de sanglots, In a voice interrupted by sobs, 

ils s'ecritrent, they exclaimed. 

A tant ^injures, qiCa-t-elle re- To so much abuse, what answer 

pondu P did she give ? 

994. The verb is likewise elegantly preceded by the 
prepositions apices, dans, par, sous, contre, &c. with their 
dependencies, as well as by the conjunctions si, quand, 
puree que, puisque, quoique, lorsque, &c. ; as, 

Par la hi du co**ps,je tiens a ce By the law of the body, I am con- 

monde qui passe, nected with this passing world. 

PuisquHl le veut, quHl lefasse, Since he wishes it, let him do it. 



268 OF GRAMMATICAL CONSTRUCTION. 

Of the Ellipsis. 

995. Ellipsis is the omission of a word, or even several 
words, which are necessary to make the construction full and 
complete. In order to form a good ellipsis, the mind must 
be able easily to supply the words omitted ; as, 
J'accepterais les offres de Darius, I would accept the offers of Darius, 

si fetais Alexandre : — et moi if I were Alexander : — and so 
aussi, si fetais Parmenion, would I, if I were Parmenio. 

Here the mind easily supplies the words je les accepter 'ais in 
the second number. 

996. The ellipsis is very common in answers to interro- 
gative sentences ; as, 

Qua?id viendrez-vous ? — Demain, When will you come 1 — To-morrow. 
— that is, je viendrai demain. 

997. In order to know whether an ellipsis be good, the 
words that are understood must be supplied. It is correct 
whenever the construction completely expresses the sense 
denoted by the words which are supplied : otherwise, it is 
not exact. 



Of the Pleonasm. 

998. Pleonasm, in general, is a superfluity of words ; in 
order to constitute this figure good, it must be sanctioned by 
custom, which never authorizes its use but to give greater 
energy to language, or to express, in a clearer manner, the 
internal feeling with which we are affected. 

Et que m'a fait a, moi cette Troie ou je cours ! 

Je me meurs. S'il ne veut pas vous le dire, je vous le dirai, moi. 

Je l'ai vu de mes propres yeux. 

Je l'ai entendu de mes propres oreilles. 

— fL moi, in the first sentence; me, in the second; moi, in 
the third ; de mes propres yeux, in the fourth ; and de mes 
propres oreilles, in the fifth, are employed merely for the 
sake of energy, or to manifest an internal feeling. But this 
manner of speaking is sanctioned by custom. 

999. Remark. — Expletives must not be mistaken for 
pleonasms ; as, 

Cfest une affaire, ou il y va du It is an affair in which the safety of 
salut de Vetat, the state is concerned, 

which is better than c'est une affaire, ou il va, &c. by omit- 
ting y, which is in reality useless on account of ou : but y 
here, is a mode of expression from which it is not allowable 
to deviate 



OF GRAMMATICAL DISCORDANCES. 269 

Of the Syllepsis. 

1000. The syllepsis is a figure by which a word relates 
more to our meaning than to the literal expressions ; as in these : 

H est onze heures ; l'an mil sept cent quatre-vingt-dix-neuf. 

1001. When using it, the mind, merely intent upon a 
precise meaning, pays no attention to either the number 01 
the gender of heures and an. 

1002. There is likewise a syllepsis in these sentences : 

Je crains qu'il ne vienne. 
J'empecherai qu'il ne vous nuise. 
J'ai peur qu'il ne m'oublie, &c. 

1003. Full of a wish that the event may not take place, we 
are willing to do all we can that nothing should present an 
obstacle to that wish. This is the cause of the introduction 
of the negative, which, although unnecessary to complete the 
sense, yet must be preserved for the idiom. 

1004. There is again a very elegant syllepsis in sentences 
like the following from Racine : 

Entre le peuple et vous, vous prendrez Dieu pour juge ; 
Vous souvenant, mon fils, que cache sous ce lin, 
Comme eux vous ftites pauvre, et comme eux, orphelin. 

1005. The poet forgets that he has been using the word 
peuple: nothing remains in his mind but ties pauvres and 
des orphelins, and it is with that idea of which he is so fully 
impressed that he makes the pronoun eux agree. For the 
same reason, Bossuet and Mezengui have said, 

Quand le peuple Hebreu entra dans la terre promise, tout y celebrait 
leurs ancetres. — Bossuet. 

Moise eut recours au Seigneur, et lui dit : que ferai-je a ce peuple * 
bientot ils me lapideront. — Mezengui. 

1006. Leurs and ils stand for les Hebreux. 



CHAPTER X. 

OF GRAMMATICAL DISCORDANCES, AMPHIBOLOGIES, 
AND GALLICISMS. 



1007. We have chiefly to notice two incorrect modes of 
construction, which are contrary to the principles laid down 
in the preceding chapters — grammatical discordances and 
amphibologies. 

z2 



270 OF GRAMMATICAL DISCORDANCES. 

OF DISCORDANCES. 

1008. In general, there is a discordance in language when 
the words which compose the various members of a sentence 
or period do not agree with each other, either because their 
construction is contrary to analogy, or because they bring 
together dissimilar ideas, between which the mind perceives 
an opposition, or can see no manner of affinity. 

1009. The following examples will serve to illustrate this : 
Notre reputation ne depend pas des louanges qu'on nous donne, mais 

des actions louables que nous fesons. 

1010. This sentence is not correct, because the first member 
being negative, and the second affirmative, cannot come under 
the government of the same verb. It ought to be, 

Notre reputation depend, non Our reputation depends, not upon the 

des louanges qxCon nous donne, praises which are bestowed on us, 

mais des actions louables que, but upon the praiseworthy actions 

&c. which we perform. 

1011. But the most common discordances are those which 
arise from the wrong use of tenses ; as in this sentence : 

II regarde votre malheur comme une punition du peu de complaisance 
que vous avez eue pour lui, dans le temps qu'il vous pria, Sec. ; 

because the two preterits, definite and indefinite, cannot well 
agree together ; it should be, 

Que vous eutes pour lui dans le temps qu'il vous pria. 

1012. There is discordance in this sentence : 

On en ressentit autant de joie que d'une victoire complete dans un 
autre temps; 

because the verb cannot be understood after the que which 
serves for the comparison when the verb is to be in a different 
tense : it should be, 

On en ressentit autant de joie qu'on en aurait ressenti, &c. 

1013. This line of Racine, 

Le flot, qui Tapporta, recule epouvante, 
is also incorrect, because the form of the present cannot asso- 
ciate with that of the preterit definite : it should have been, 
qui Va apporte. 



OF AMPHIBOLOGIES. 

1014. Amphibology in language is when a sentence is so 
constructed as to be susceptible of two different interpretations : 
this must be carefully avoided. As we speak only to be un- 



OF GRAMMATICAL DISCORDANCES. 271 

derstood, perspicuity is the first and most essential quality of 
language ; we should always recollect that what is not clearly 
expressed in any language, is no language at all. 

1015. Amphibologies are occasioned, 1. — By the misuse 
of moods and tenses. 2. — Of the personal pronouns il, le, 
la, &c. 3. — Of the possessive pronouns son, sa, ses, &c. 
4. — By giving a wrong place to nouns. 

Of an Amphibology of the first kind. 

Qu'ai-je fait, pour -venir accabler en ces lieux 

Un heros, sur qui seul j'ai pu tourner les yeux ] — Racine. 

1016. Pour venir forms an amphibology, because we do 
not know whether it relates to the person who speaks or to 
the person spoken to : it should have been, Pour que vous 
veniez. 

Of an Amphibology of the second hind. 

Cesar voulut premie rement surpasser Pompee ; les grandes richesses 
de Crassus lui firent croire, quVZ pourrait partager la gloire de ces 
deux grands hommes. 

1017. This sentence is faulty in its construction, because 
the pronouns il and lui seem to relate to Cesar, although the 
sense obliges us to refer them to Crassus. 

Of an Amphibology of the third kind. 
Vale re alia chez Leandre ; il y trouva son fils. 

1018. The pronoun son is ambiguous, because we do not 
know to which it relates, to Valere or to Leandre. 

Of an Amphibology of the fourth kind. 
J'ai envoy e les lettres, que j'ai ecrites, a la poste. 

1019. A la poste, thus placed, is equivocal, because we do 
not know whether it is meant that the letters have been writ* 
ten at the post office or sent to the post office. 



OF GALLICISMS. 



1020. We have distinguished in our " Grammaire Philo- 
sophique et Litteraire," four sorts of gallicisms : we shall 
only mention here those of construction. 

1021. The gallicisms of construction are in general irre- 
gularities and deviations from the customary rules of syntax : 



272 OF GRAMMATICAL DISCORDANCES. 

there are some, however, which are mere ellipses, and others 
which can only be attributed to the caprice of custom. 

1022. General Principle. — Every gallicism of construc- 
tion which obscures the meaning of the sentence, ought to be 
condemned. Those only ought to be preserved which do 
not impair perspicuity by introducing irregularity of con- 
struction, and which are at the same time sanctioned by long 
practice. 

1023. According to this principle, this elliptic gallicism is 
now rejected : 

Et qu'ainsi ne soit ; meaning, ce que je vous dis est si vrai que, 

because it obscures the sentence. For instance, 

J'etais dans ce jardin, et qiCainsi ne soit, voila une fleur que j'y ai 
cueillie ; that is, Et pour preuve de cela, voila une fleur, &c. 

Moliere and La Fontaine seem to ■ have been the last great 
writers that have used this expression. 

1024. One of the most common gallicisms is that in 
which the impersonal verb il y a is used for il est, il existe. 
These expressions, 

II y avait une fois un roi ; il y a cent a parier contre un, 

are gallicisms. There are two in the following sentence : 

17 n'y a pas jusqu'aux enfans, qui Even children will meddle with it. 
ne s'en melent, 

1025. The verb falloir forms a sort of gallicism with the 
pronoun en when it is conjugated like pronominal verbs with 
the double pronouns il se ; as, 

II s'en faut, il s'en fall ait, &c. 

It then means, to be wanting ; and when preceded by an 
adverb of quantity, the first pronoun is omitted ; as, 

Peu s'en faut, tant s'en faut. 

1026. These several manners of using the verb falloir will 
be found in the following sentences : 

EXAMPLES. 

H s'en faut bien qu'il soit aussi He is far from being so clever as 

habile qu'il croit Vetre, he thinks. 

Peu s'en est fallu qu'il. n'ait sue- He was very near failing in that 

combe dans cette entreprise, undertaking. 

II ne s'en est presque rien fallu He was as near as possible being 

qu'il n'ait ete tue, killed. 

Vous dites qu'il s'en faut vingt You say it w r ants twenty pounds 

livres que la somme entiere n'y to complete the sum, but you 

soit, mais vous vous trompez, il are mistaken, it cannot want so 

ne pent pas s'en falloir tant, much. 



OF GRAMMATICAL CONSTRUCTION. 273 

Son rhume est entiirement gueri, His cold is entirely well, or very 

ou peu s'en faut, nearly so. 

Que s J en est-il fallu que ces deux How near were these two friends 

amis ne se soient brouilles ? quarrelling? 

Je ne suis pas content de votre ap- I am not satisfied with your appli- 

plication a V etude, taut s'en faut, cation to study, far from it. 

Tant s y en faut que cette comedie So far from this play pleasing me, 

me plaise, elle me semble an con- I think it insufferable. 

traire detestable, 

II s'en fallait beaucoup que jevous I was far from approving your 

approuvasse dans cette circon- conduct on that occasion. 

stance, 

1027. The sentences, 

II n'est rien mains que ginereux, He is far from being generous, 
Vous avez beau dire. You may say what you please, but, 

&c. 
A ce qu'il me semble, By what I can see. As the matter 

appears to me, &c. 
Nous voilci a nous lamenter, We began to lament. Here we are 

lamenting, crying, &c. 
Qu'est-ce que de nous, What wretched beings we are ! &c. 

are also gallicisms. 

1028. The use which is made of the preposition en, in 
many sentences is likewise another source of gallicisms ; 
some of this kind will be found in the following expressions : 

A qui en avez-vous ? Whom are you angry with \ 

Oil en veut-il venir ? What does he aim at 1 What would 

he be at 7 
// lui en veut, He has a quarrel with him, &c. 

1029. The preposition en changes also sometimes the sig 
nification of verbs, and then gives rise to gallicisms. 

1030. The conjunction que produces also a great number 
of gallicisms ; as, 

C'est une terrible passion que le jeu, Gaming is a terrible passion. 
C'est done en vain que je travaille, It is in vain then that I work. 
Ce n'est pas trop que cela, That is not too much. 

H n'est que d? avoir du courage, There is nothing like having cou- 

rage. 

1031. Many others will be found in the use which is made 
of the prepositions ci, de, dans, apres, &c. ; but enough has 
been said on the subject 

1032. Gallicisms are of very great use in the simple style ; 
therefore La Fontaine and Madame de Sevigne abound in 
them. The middling style has not so many, and the solemn 
oratorical but few, and these even of a peculiar nature. Only 



274 OF GRAMMATICAL CONSTRUCTION. 

two examples of this kind, both taken from the tragedy of 
Iphigenia, by Racine, will be here inserted. 

Avez-vous pu penser qu'au sang d'Agamemnon 
Achille preferat une fille sans nom, 
Qui de tout son destin ce qu'elle a pu comprendre. 
C'est qu'elle sort d'un sang, &c. 



And, 



Je ne sais qui m'arrete et retient mon courroux, 
Que par un prompt avis de tout ce qui se passe. 
Je ne coure des dieux divulguer la menace. 



1033. In the first instance, qui is the subject, though with- 
out relating to any verb ; and in the second, je ne sais qui 
m'arrete que je ne coure, is contrary to the rules of common 
construction. " But," says Vaugelas, " these extraordinary 
phrases, far from being vicious, possess the more beauty, as 
they belong to a particular kind of language," 



(275) 



FREE EXERCISES. 



MADAME DE MAINTENON TO HER BROTHER. 

'We can only be unhappy by our own fault ; this shall always be my 
text, and my reply to your lamentations. 2 Recollect, my dear brother, 
the voyage to America, -the misfortunes of our father, of our infancy and 
our youth ; and you will bless Providence instead of murmuring against 
fortune. Ten years ago we were both very far 4 (below our present situa- 
tion) ; and our hopes were 5 so feeble that we limited our wishes to an 
6 (income of three thousand livres). At present we have four times 7 that 
sum, and our desires are not yet satisfied ! we enjoy the happy mediocrity 
which you 8 have so often extolled ; let us be content. If possessions 
come to us, let us receive them from the hand of God, but 10 let not our 
views be n too extravagant. We have 12 (every thing necessary) and 
13 comfortable ; all the rest is 14 avarice; all these desires of greatness 
,5 spring from a restless heart. Your debts are all paid, and you may live 
16 elegantly without '"contracting more. What have you to desire 1 18 must 
19 schemes of wealth and ambition 20 occasion the loss of your repose and 
your health] Read the Life of St. Louis: you will see how 21 unequal 
the greatness of this world is to the desires of the human heart ; God only 
can 22 satisfy them. I repeat it, you are only unhappy by your own fault. 
Your 23 uneasiness destroys your health, which you ought to preserve 21 if 
it were only because I love you. 25 Watch your 26 temper : if you can 
render it less 27 splenetic and less gloomy, 28 (you will have gained a great 
advantage). This is not the work of reflection only : exercise, amuse- 
ment, and a regular life 29 (are necessary for the purpose). You cannot 
think well 30 (while your health is affected) ; when the body is ^debili- 
tated, the mind is without vigor. Adieu ! write to me more frequently, 
and in a style less gloomy. 

1 On ne etre.. ..que— 2 songer a — 3 the misfortunes of our infancy and those of 
our, &c. — 4 du point ou nous sommes au jourd'hui— 5 si peu de chose— 6 trois mille 
livres de rente— 7 that sum, en.. ..plus— 8 vantiez si fort— U biens— ]0 let us not 
have views— 11 trop vaste— 12 le necessaire — 13 le commode— 14 cupidite— 15 
spring from, partir du vide de — 16 delicieusement — 17 contracting more, en faire 
de nouvelles— 18 must, faut-il que— 19 projets— 20 couter Q — 21 au-dessous de — 
22 le rassasier— 23 inquietude pi.— 24 quand ce etre N— 25 travailler sur — 26 
humeur— 27 bilieux— 28 ce etre un grand point de gagne— 29 il y faut de— 30 tant 
que vous se porter mal — 31 dans l'abattement. 



THE CONVERT. 

AN EASTERN TALE. 

Divine 'mercy had brought a vicious man into a society of sages, whose 
morals were holy and pure. He was affected by their virtues : 2 it was 
not long 3 before he imitated them and lost his old habits : he became just, 
sober, patient, laborious, and benevolent. His deeds nobody could deny, 
but 4 they were attributed to odious motives. They praised his good 

1 Misericorde— 2 ne pas tarder— 3 a with the A.— 4 On donner des motifs. 



276 



FREE EXERCISES. 



actions without loving his person : they would always judge him by what 
he had been, not by what he had become. This injustice filled him with 
pef; he shed tears in the bosom of an ancient sage, more just and more 
humane than the others. « O, my son," said the old man to him, "thou 
art better than thy reputation ; be thankful to God for it. Happy the man 
Who can say, my enemies and my rivals censure in me vices of which I 
am not guilty *What matters it, if thou art good, that men persecute 
thee as wicked 1 Hast thou not, to comfort thee, the two best witnesses 
ofthy actions, God and thy conscience \"— Saint- Lambert. 
5 Q,u'importe. 



Mr. de Montausier has written a letter to Monseigneur upon the taking 
of Phihpsbourgh, which very much pleases me. " Monseigneur, I do not 
compliment you on the capture of Philipsbourgh : you had a good army, 
bombs, cannon, and Vauban ; neither shall I compliment you upon your 
valor, for that is an hereditary virtue in your family; but I rejoice that 
you are liberal, generous, humane, and that you know how to recompense 
the services of those who behave well : it is for this that I congratulate 
you."— Sevigne. & 



/ THE GOOD MINISTER. 

AN EASTERN TALE. 
The great Aaron Raschild began to suspect that his vizier Giafar was 
not deserving of the confidence which he had reposed in him. The 
women of Aaron, the inhabitants of Bagdad, the courtiers, the dervises, 
censured the vizier with bitterness. The caliph loved Giafar ; he would 
not condemn him upon the clamors of the city and the court: he visited 
his empire ; every where he saw the land well cultivated, the country 
smiling, the cottages opulent, the useful arts honored, and youth full of 
gaiety. He visited his fortified cities and sea-ports, he saw numerous 
ships, which threatened the coasts of Africa and of Asia ; he saw warriors 
disciplined and content ; these warriors, the seamen and the peasantry, 
exclaimed, « O God, pour thy blessings upon the faithful, by giving them 
a caliph like Aaron and a vizier like Giafar." The caliph, affected by 
these exclamations, enters a mosque, falls upon his knees, and cries out, 
" Great God, I return thee thanks ; thou hast given me a vizier of whom 
my courtiers speak ill and my people speak well"— Saint-Lambert. 



Providence conducts us with so much goodness through the different 
periods of our life, that we >(do not perceive our progress). This loss 
2 takes place gently ; it is imperceptible— it is the shadow of the sun-dial, 
whose motion we do not see. If, at twenty years of age, 3 we could see 
m a mirror the face we shall have at three-score, we 4 (should be shocked 
at the contrast) and terrified at our own figure ; but it is day by day we 
advance : we are to-day as we were yesterday, and shall be to-morrow as 
we are to-day ; so we go forward without perceiving it, and this is a 
miracle of that Providence whom I adore. — Sevigne. 

\ a \^ n V^J ent0nB P res( l ue P as ~ 2 va doucement-3 on nous fesait voir-4 tomber a 
i<* icii verse* 



FREE EXERCISES. 277 

THE MAGNIFICENT PROSPECT. 
This beautiful house was on the declivity of a hill, from whence you 
beheld the sea, sometimes clear and smooth as glass, sometimes Udly irri* 
tated against the rocks on which it broke, 2 bellowing and swelling its 
waves like mountains. On another side was seen a river, in which were 
islands bordered with blooming limes, and lofty poplars, which raised their 
proud heads to the very clouds. The several channels which formed those 
islands seemed 3 sporting in the plain. Some rolled their limpid waters 
with rapidity ; some had a peaceful and still course ; others, by long 
windings, ran back again to reascend as it were to their source, and 
seemed not to have power to leave these enchanting borders. At a dis- 
tance were seen hills and mountains which were lost in the clouds, and 
formed by their fantastic figure as delightful a horizon 4 (as the eye could 
wish to behold). The neighboring mountains were covered with verdant 
5 (vine-branches) hanging in festoons ; the grapes, brighter than purple, 
could not conceal themselves under the leaves, and the vine was over- 
loaded with its fruit. The fig, the olive, the pomegranate, and all other 
trees, overspread the plain, and made it one large garden. — Fintlon. 

1 Follement— 2 en gemir— 3 se jouer— 4 a souhait pour le plaisir des yeux— 5 
pampre, m— 6 vigne, f. 



Long hopes *wear out joy, as long illness wears out pain. 
All philosophic systems are only good when one 2 (has no use for 
them). — S6vign£, 

1 User— 2 n'en a que faire. 



A GENERAL VIEW OF NATURE. 

With what magnificence does nature 'shine upon earth ! A pure light, 
extending from east to west, gilds successively the two hemispheres of 
this globe ; an element transparent and light surrounds it ; a gentle fecun- 
. dating heat animates, 2 gives being to the seeds of life ; salubrious running 
streams contribute to their preservation and growth ; eminences diversified 
over the level land arrest the vapors of the air, make these springs inex- 
haustible and always new ; immense cavities, made to receive them, divide- 
the continents. The extent of the sea is as great as that of the earth ; it 
is not a cold, barren element ; it is a new empire, as rich, as populous as 
the first. The finger of God has marked their boundaries. 

The earth, rising above the level of the sea, 3 is secure from its irrup- 
tions ; its surface, enamelled with flowers, adorned with ever-springing 
verdure, peopled with thousands and thousands of species of different ani- 
mals, is a place of rest, a delightful abode, where man, placed in order to 
second nature, presides over all beings. The only one among them all 
capable of knowing and worthy of admiring, God has made him spectator 
of the universe and a witness of his wonders. The divine spark with 
which he is animated enables him to participate in the divine mysteries ; 
it is by this light that he thinks and reflects ; by it he sees and reads in 
the book of the universe as in a copy of the Deity. 

Nature is the exterior throne of the divine Majesty ; the man who con- 
templates, who studies it, rises by degrees to the interior throne of Omni- 
potence. Made to adore the Creator, the vassal of Heaven, sovereign of 

1 Ne brille-t-elle pas 2 faire eclore— 3 a l'abri d«. 

2A 



278 FREE EXERCISES. 

the earth, he ennobles, peoples, enriches it ; he establishes among living 
beings order, subordination, harmony ; he embellishes nature herself; he 
cultivates, extends, and polishes it ; lops off the thistle and the briar, and 
multiplies the grape and the rose. — Buffon. 



ANOTHER GENERAL VIEW OF NATURE. 

Trees, shrubs, and plants are the ornaments and 'clothing of the earth. 
Nothing is so 2 melancholy as the prospect of a country naked and "bare, 
exhibiting to the eye nothing but stones, mud, and sand. But, vivified 
by nature, and 4 clad in its nuptial robe, amidst the course of streams and 
the singing of birds, the earth presents to man, in the harmony of the 
three kingdoms, a spectacle full of life, of interest and charms — the only 
spectacle in the world of which his eyes and heart are never 5 weary. 

The more a 6 (contemplative man's soul is fraught with sensibility) the 
more he yields to the ecstasies which this harmony produces in him. A 
soft and deep melancholy then takes possession of his senses, and in an 
intoxication of delight he loses himself in the immensity of that beautiful 
system with which he feels himself identified. Then every particular 
object escapes him : he sees and feels nothing but in the whole. Some 
circumstance must contract his ideas, and circumscribe his imagination, 
"before he can observe by parcels that universe which he was endea- 
voring to embrace. — J. J. Rousseau, 

1 Vetement— 2 triste— 3 pele— 4 revetu— 5 se lasser— 6 contemplateur a Tame 
sensible— 7 pour qiTil. 



CULTIVATED NATURE. 

How beautiful is cultivated nature ! by the labors of man, how brilliant 
it is, and how pompously adorned ! He himself is its chief ornament, its 
noblest part; by multiplying himself, he multiplies the most precious 
germ ; she also seems to multiply with him : by his art he ' (brings forth 
to view) all that she 2 concealed in her bosom. How many unknown 
treasures ! What new riches ! Flowers, fruits, seeds, brought to perfec- 
tion, multiplied to infinity ; the useful species of animals transported, 
propagated, increased without number; the noxious species reduced, con- 
fined, banished ; gold — and iron, more necessary than gold — extracted 
from the bowels of the earth ; torrents 'confined ; rivers directed, A con- 
tracted ; the sea itself subjected, Explored, crossed from one hemisphere 
to the other ; the earth accessible in every part, and every where rendered 
equally cheerful and fruitful ; in the vallies. delightful meadows ; in the 
plains, rich pastures and still richer harvests ; hills covered with vines 
and fruits ; their summits crowned with useful trees and young forests ; 
deserts changed into cities inhabited by an immense population, which, 
continually circulating, spreads itself from these centres to their extremi- 
ties ; roads opened and frequented ; communications established every 
where, as so many witnesses of the strength and union of society ; a 
thousand other monuments of power and glory sufficiently demonstrate 
that man, possessing dominion over the earth, has changed, renewed 
the whole of its surface, and that, at all times, he shares the empire 
of it with nature. 

1 Mettre au jour— 2 receler-3 contenu— 4 resserre-5 reconnu. 



FREE EXERCISES. 279 

THE SAME SUBJECT CONTINUED. 

However, man only reigns by right of conquest ; he rather enjoys than 
possesses, and he can preserve only by means of continual labor. If this 
ceases, every thing droops, every thing declines, every thing changes, and 
again 'returns under the hand of nature ; she reassumes her rights, erases 
the work of man, covers with dust and moss his most pompous monu- 
ments, destroys them in time, and leaves him nothing but the regret of 
having lost through his fault what his ancestors had conquered by their 
labors. Those times in which man loses his dominion, those 2 barbarous 
ages during which every thing is seen to perish, are always preceded by 
war, and accompanied by scarcity and depopulation. Man, who can do 
nothing but by number, who is strong only by union, who can be happy 
only by peace, is mad enough to arm himself for his misery, and to fight 
for his ruin. Impelled by an insatiable thirst of having, blinded by ambi- 
tion still more insatiable, he renounces all the feelings of humanity, turns 
all his strength against himself, seeks mutual destruction, ^actually destroys 
himself, and after these periods of blood and carnage, when the smoke of 
glory has vanished, he contemplates with a sad eye the earth wasted, the 
arts buried, nations scattered, the people weakened, his own happiness 
ruined, and his real power annihilated. — Buffon. 

Rentrer— 2 de barbarie— 3 en efiet. 



INVOCATION TO THE GOD OF NATURE. 

Almighty God ! whose presence alone supports nature, and maintains 
the harmony of the laws of the universe : Thou who, from the immove- 
able throne of the empyrean, seest the celestial spheres roll under thy feet 
without shock or confusion : who, from the bosom of repose, reproducest 
every moment their immense movements, and alone governest in profound 
peace that infinite number of heavens and worlds ; restore, restore at 
length tranquillity to the agitated earth ! let it be silent at thy voice ; let 
discord and war cease their proud clamors ! God of goodness ! author 
of all beings ! thy paternal eye 'takes in all the objects of the creation ; 
but man is thy chosen being ; thou hast 2 illumined his soul with a ray 
of thy immortal light : complete the measure of thy kindness by pene- 
trating his heart with a ray of thy love : this divine sentiment, diffusing 
itself every where, will reconcile opposite natures ; man will no longer 
dread the sight of man ; his hand will no longer wield the murderous 
3 steel ; the devouring flames of war will no longer 4 dry up the sources of 
population : the human species, now weakened, mutilated, mowed down 
iir the blossom, 5 will spring anew, and multiply without number ; nature, 
overwhelmed under the weight of 6 scourges, will soon reassume with a 
new life its former fruitfulness ; and we, beneficent God, will second it, 
we will cultivate it, we will contemplate it incessantly, that we may every 
moment offer thee a new tribute of gratitude and admiration. — Buffon. 

1 Embrasser— 2 eclairer— 3 le fer armer sa main— 4 tarir— 5 germer de nouveau 

~6 fleau. 



Happy they who ] are disgusted with turbulent pleasures, and know 
2 how to be contented with the sweets of an innocent life ! Happy they 

1 Se degouter de-^2 se contender de> 



280 TREE EXERCISES. 



imr 



who delight s in being instructed, and who 4 take a pleasure in storing their 
minds with knowledge ! Wherever adverse fortune may throw them, 
they always carry entertainment with them; and the disquiet which 
preys upon others, even in the midst of pleasures, is unknown to those 
who can employ themselves in reading. Happy they who love to read, 
and are not like me deprived of the ability. As these thoughts were 
passing in my mind, I went into a gloomy forest, where I immediately 
perceived an old man, holding a book in his hand. The forehead of this 
sage was broad, bald, and a little wrinkled : a white beard hung down to 
his girdle ; his stature was tall and majestic ; his complexion still fresh 
and ruddy ; his eyes lively and piercing ; his voice sweet ; his words plain 
and charming. I never saw so venerable an old man. He was a priest 
of Apollo, and Officiated in a marble temple, which the kings of Egypt 
had dedicated to that god in this forest. The book which he held in his 
hand was a collection of hymns in honor of the gods. He accosted me 
in a friendly manner, and we discoursed together. He related things 
past so well, that they seemed present ; and yet with such brevity, that 
his account never tired me. He foresaw the future by his profound 
knowledge, which made him know men, and the designs of which they 
are capable. With all this wisdom, he was cheerful and complaisant, 
and the sprightliest youth has not so many graces as this man had at so 
advanced an age. He accordingly loved young men when they were 
teachable, and had a taste for study and virtue.— Fene Ion > 

3 S'instruire-^4 se plaire— 5 servir— 6 docile. 



THOUGHTS ON POETRY. 

Wherever I went, I found that poetry was considered as the '(highest 
learning), and regarded with a veneration 2 (somewhat approaching to) that 
which men would pay to angelic nature. 

It yet fills me with wonder that, in almost all countries, the most an- 
cient poets are considered as the best ; whether 3 (it be that) every kind 
of knowledge is an acquisition gradually attained, and poetry is a gift 
conferred at once ; or that the first poetry of every nation surprised them 
as a novelty, and retained the credit by consent which it received by acci- 
dent at first ; or whether, as the 4 province of poetry is to describe nature 
and passion, which are always the same, the first writers 5 (took possession) 
of 6 (the most striking objects for description), and 7 (the most probable 
occurrences for fiction), and left nothing to those that followed them but 
8 transcriptions of the same events, and 9 new combinations of the same 
images. Whatever be the reason, it is commonly observed that the 
early writers are in possession of nature, and their 10 followers of art; 
that the first excel in strength and invention, and the latter in elegance 
and refinement. 

I was desirous to add my name to this illustrious n fraternity. I read 
all the poets of Persia and Arabia, and was able to repeat by memory the 
volumes that are suspended in the mosque at Mecca. But I soon found 
that no man was ever great by imitation. My desire of • Excellence 
1 impelled me 14 to transfer my attention to nature and to ^life. Nature 

1 Partie la plus sublime de la litterature-2qui tenoit de— 3cela viennede ce que 
—4 but— 5 s'emparer— 6 objets qui fournissaient les plus riches descriptions— 7 evene- 
mens qui pretaient le plus a la fiction— 8 de copier— 9 faire de nouvelles combinai- 
sons— 10 successeurs— XI faraille— 12 exceUer-^3 engager-r-H reporter. ..sur-*15 ta.* 
bleau de la vie. 



FREE EXERCISES. 281 

was to be my subject, and men to be my auditors : I could never describe 
what I had not seen ; I could not hope 16 (to move those with delight or 
terror) whose interests and opinions I did not l7 understand. 

16 reveiller le plaisir ou la terreur dans ceux— 17 ne connaitre ni. 



THE SAME SUBJECT CONTINUED. 

Being now resolved to be a poet, I saw every thing ,8 (with a new 
purpose) ; my sphere of attention was suddenly magnified : no kind of 
knowledge 19 (was to be overlooked). I ranged mountains and deserts 
2 ofor images and resemblances, and 21 (pictured upon my mind) every 
tree of the forest and flower of the valley. , I observed with equal care the 
crags of the rock and the pinnacles of the palace. Sometimes I wandered 
along the mazes of the rivulet, and sometimes watched the changes of the 
summer clouds. To a poet nothing can be useless. Whatever is beau- 
tiful and whatever is dreadful must be familiar to his imagination : he 
must 22 (be conversant) with all that 23 (is awfully vast or elegantly little). 
The plants of the garden, the animals of the wood, the minerals of the 
earth, and the meteors of the sky, must all concur to store his mind with 
inexhaustible variety: for every idea is useful for the 24 (enforcement or 
decoration) of moral or religious truth ; and he who knows most will 
have most 25 power of diversifying his 2, ~scenes, and gratifying his reader 
with remote allusions and unexpected instruction. 

All the appearances of nature 27 I was therefore careful to study, and 
every country which I have surveyed has contributed something to my 
poetical powers. 

In so wide a survey, interrupted the prince, you must surely have left 
much unobserved. I have lived till now within the circuit of these 
mountains, and yet cannot walk abroad without the sight of something 
which I had never beheld before or never 2s heeded. 



ISSousunnouveau jour— 19 je ne devaisnegliger— 20 pour recueillir— 21 penetrer 
mon esprit du tableau de— 22 bien connaitre— 23 etonne par sa grandeur ou charme 
par son elegante petitesse— 24 fortifier, ou embellir— 25 ressources pour— 26 tableau 
—27 etudier avec soin toutes les, &c —28 remarquer. 



THE SAME SUBJECT CONTINUED. 

The business of a poet, said Imlac, is to examine, not the individual, 
but the species ; to remark general properties and 29 (large appearances) : 
he does not number the streaks of the tulip or describe the different shades 
in the verdure of the forest. He is to exhibit, in his portraits of nature, 
30 such prominent and striking features as recal the original to every mind ; 
and must neglect 31 the minuter discriminations, which one may have 
remarked and another neglected, 32 for those characteristics which 33 are 
alike obvious to 34 vigilance and 35 carelessness. 

But the knowledge of nature is only 36 half the task of a poet: he must 
be acquainted likewise with 37 all the modes of life. His character requires 
that he 38 estimate the happiness and misery of every condition ; observe 
the power of all the passions, in all their combinations, and 39 trace the 

29 Considerer les objets en grand— 30 de ces traits saillans et frappans qui, &c— 
31 ces petits details — 32 pour s'appliquer a caracteriser, &c. &c. — 33 frappe egale- 
ment— 34 ceil observateur— 35 esprit insouciant— 36 the half of— 37 tous les differens 
aspects— 38 apprecier — 39 suivre les vicissitudes. 

2 a2 



282 FREE EXERCISES. 

changes of the human mind, as they are modified by various institutions 
and accidental influences of climate or custom, from the sprightliness of 
infancy to the despondence of decrepitude. He must 4o divest himself of 
the prejudices of his age or country ; he must consider 4 'right and wrong 
42 in their abstracted and invariable state ; he must disregard present laws 
and opinions, and rise to general and transcendent truths, which will 
always be the same; he must therefore 43 (content himself with the slow 
progress of his name), contemn the applause of his own time, and commit 
his claims to the justice of posterity. He must write as the interpreter 
of nature and the legislator of mankind, and consider himself as 44 pre- 
siding over the thoughts and manners of future generations, as a being 
superior to time and place. 

His labor is not yet at an end : he must know many languages and 
many sciences ; and, that his style may be worthy of his thoughts, he 
must, by incessant practice, familiarize himself to every delicaey of speech 
and grace of harmony. — S. Johnson. 

40 Se depouiller— 41 ce qui est juste ou injuste — 42 abstraction faite de ces divers 
prejuges — 43 se resigner a voir son nom pereer difficilement — 44 influer. 



First follow nature, and your judgment frame 

By her just standard, which is still the same : 

Unerring nature, still divinely bright, 

One clear, unchanged, and universal light, 

Life, force, and beauty must to all impart j 1 

At once the source, and end, and test of art. 2 

Art, from that fund, its just supply provides ; 

Works without show, and without pomp presides ; 

In some fair body thus th' informing soul, 

With spirit feeds, with vigor fills the whole ; 

Each motion guides, and every nerve sustains 

Itself unseen, but in th' effect remains. 3 

Some, to whom Heav'n in wit has been profuse, 

Want as much more to turn it to its use : 

For wit and judgment often are at strife, 

Though meant each other's aid, like man and wife. 4 

'Tis more to guide than spur the muse's steed, 

Restrain his fury than provoke his speed : 5 

The winged courser, like a gen'rous horse, 

Shows most true mettle when you check its course. 6 — Pope, 



1. Light, clear, immutable, and universal nature, which never errs, and shines 
always with a divine splendor, must impart to all she does life, force, and beauty. 

2. She is at once the source, &c. 

3. So in a fair body, unseen itself, but always sensible by its effects, the soul 
continually acting, feeds the whole with spirit, fills it with vigor, guides every 
motion of it, and sustains every nerve. 

4. Some to whom Heaven has given wit in profusion, want as much yet to know 
the use they ought to make of it ; for wit and judgment, though made, like man 
and wife, to aid each other, are often in opposition. 

5. It is more difficult to guide than spur the courser of the muses, and to restrain 
its ardor than provoke its impetuosity. 

6. The winged courser is like a generous horse : the more we strive to stop it in 
its rapid course, the more it shows unconquerable vigor. 



( 283 ) 



EXAMPLES OF PHRASES 



PRINCIPAL DIFFICULTIES OF THE FRENCH LANGUAGE. 



Sur les Collectifs Partitifs. 
La plupart des fruits verts sont d'un gout 

austere, 
La plupart des gens ne se conduisent que 

par interet, 
La plupart du mc-nde se trompe, 
II meprise par philosophic les honneurs 

que la plupart du monde recherche, 
II devait me fournir tant d'arbres; mais 

j'en ai rejete la moitie qui ne valait 

rien, 
Un grand nombre de spectateurs ajoutait 

a la beaute du spectacle, 
Toute sorte de livres ne sont pas egale- 

ment bons, 
Beaucoup de personnes se sont presentees, 
Bien des personnes se font des principes a 

leur fantasie, 



Sur quelques Verbs qu'on ne pent 
conjuguer avec Avoir sans /aire 
des barbarismes. 

II lui est echu une succession du chef de 

sa femme, 
II est bien dechu de son credit, 
Ne sommes-nous pas convenus du prix? 
N'est-il pas intervenu dans cette affaire, 

comme il l'avait promis? 
II est survenu a l'improviste, 
La neige, qui est tombee ce matin, a 

adouci le temps, 
Que de neige il est tombe ce matin! 
Toutes les dents lui sont tombees, 
Ce propos n'est pas tombe a terre, 
Etes-vous alle voir votre ami 7 
lis sont arrives a midi et sont repartis de 

suite, 
Ces fleurs sont a peine ^closes, 
lis est ne de parens vertueux, qui n'ont 

rien neglige pour son education, 
Mademoiselle votre sceur est-elle rentree ? 
Madame votre mere n'est-elle pas encore 

venue ? 



Sur les Mots de Quantite. 

II a beaucoup d'esprit, mais encore plus 

d'amour propre. 
II a assez d'argent pour ses menus plaisirs, 
11 y avait bien du monde a l'Opira, 
II y avait hier au Pare je ne sais combien 

de gens, 
II boit autant d'eau que de vin, 
II a tant d'amis qu'il ne manquera de 

rien, 
Person ne n'y a plus d'interet que lui, 
II n'a pas plus d'esprit qu'il n'en faut, 
Trop de loisir perd souvent la jeunesse, 

J'y ai bien moins d'interet que vous, 



On the Collective Partitives. 

The greater part of green fruit is of a 

harsh taste. 
Most people are guided only by interest. 

The greater part of mankind live in error. 
As a true philosopher, he despises those 

honors which mankind in general court. 
He was to furnish me so many trees, but 

I refused half of them, which were good 

for nothing. 
A considerable number of spectators added 

to the splendor of the scene. 
Every kind of books are not equally good. 

Many people presented themselves. 
Many persons form principles to them- 
selves, according to their fancy. 



On some Verbs which cannot be con- 
jugated with the verb Avoir with- 
out making barbarous phrases. 

An estate fell to him in right of his wife. 

He has lost much of his credit. 

Have we not agreed about the price? 

Did he not interfere in that affair as he 
had promised? 

He came up unawares. 

The snow which fell this morning has 
softened the weather. 

How much snow has fallen this morning ! 

All his teeth have fallen out. 

That remark was not allowed to escape. 

Have you been to see your friend? 

They arrived at noon, and set out again 
immediately. 

These flowers are scarcely blown. 

He was born of virtuous parents, who be- 
stowed on him the best education. 

Is your sister returned ? 

Is not your mother come yet ? 



On words of Quantity. 

He has a great deal of sense, but still 

more vanity. 
He has sufficient pocket-money. \Opera. 
There were a great many people at the 
There were I do not know how many people 

in the Park yesterday. 
He drinks as much water as wine. 
He has so many friends that he will want 

for nothing. 
Nobody has more interest there than he. 
He is not overburdened with sense. 
Too much leisure time is frequently the 

destruction of youth. 
I am much less concerned in it than you. 



284 



PHRASES ON SOME DIFFICULTIES. 



Sur les Pronoms Personnels, 

Sors et te retire, 

Cours vite et ne t'amuse point, 

II dit aujourd'hui u-ne chose et demain il 

se dementira, 
II s'est dementi lui-m6me, 
La jeunesse est naturellement emportee ; 

elle a besoin de quelque entrave qui la 

retienne, 
II ne peut voir person ne dans la prosperity 

sans lui porter envie, 
Ce que vous me dites est une enigme pour 

moi, 
C'est un homme extreme en tout ; il aime 

et il hait avec fureur, 

Si vous n'y avez jamais ete, je vous y 

menerai, 
Je I'ai connu doux et modeste; il s'est 

bien gate dans le commerce de ses nou- 

veaux amis, 
Elle n'est pas encore revenue du saisisse- 

ment, que lui causa cette nouvelle. 

II menace de I'exterminer, lui et toute sa 

race, 
Si vous n'avez que faire dc ce livre-la, 

pretez-le-moi, 
Je lui avais envoye un diamant, il l'a 

refuse, je le lui ai renvoye, 
II apprencl facilement et oublie de meme, 
Je lui pardonne facilement d'avoir voulu 

se faire auteur ; mais je ne saurais lui 

pardonner toutes les puerilites dont il a 

farci son livre, 
Je me plains a vous de vous-meme, 
Si vous ne voulez pas etre pour lui, au 

moins ne soyez pas contre, 
Q,uand sera-ce que vous viendrez nous 

voir? 



Sur soi, lui, soi-meme, et lui-meme. 

duand on a pour soi le temoignage de sa 

conscience, on est bien fort, 
L'estime de toute la terre ne sert de rien 

a un homme qui n'a pas le temoignage 

de sa conscience pour lui, 
Un homme fait mille fautes, parce qu'il 

ne fait point de reflexions sur lui, 

On fait mille fautes, quand on ne fait 

aucune reflexion sur soi, 
II aime mieux dire du mal de lui, que de 

n'en point parler, 
L'egoiste aimera mieux dire du mal de 

soi, que de n'en point parler, 

On a souvent besoin d'un plus petit que 

soi, 
Un prince a souvent besoin de beaucoup 

de gens plus petits que lui, 
C'est un bon moyen de s'elever soi-meme, 

que d'exalter ses pareils ; et un homme 

adroit s'eleve ainsi lui-meme, 



On the Personal Pronouns. 

Go out and retire, withdraw. 

Go quick, and do not loiter. 

He advances a thing today, and will con* 

tradict himself to-morrow. 
He has contradicted himself. 
Youth is naturally hasty, it needs some 

check to restrain it. 

He can see the prosperity of nobody with- 
out envying them. 
What you tell me is a perfect riddle to me. 

He is a man that carries every thing to 
excess; he is alike violent in his love 
and in his hatred. 

If you have never been there, I will take 
you. 

I knew him when he was mild and modest ; 
he has been much corrupted by asso- 
ciating with his new acquaintances. 

She is not yet recovered from the con- 
sternation into which that intelligence 
threw her. 

He threatens to exterminate him and all 
his family. 

If you have done with this book, lend it 
me. 

I had sent him, a diamond, and he refused 
it, but I sent him it back again. 

He learns easily and forgets the same. 

lean easily pardon him for having at- 
tempted to turn author ; but I cannot 
pardon him all the absurdities with 
which he has filled his book. 

I complain to you of yourself. 

If you will not be for him, at least do not 
be against him. 

When will you come to see us ? 



On soi, lui, soi-meme, and lui-meme. 

The approbation of our conscience imparts 
great courage. 

The good opinion of the whole world is of 
no use to a man who has not the appro- 
bation of his own conscience. 

A man commits a thousand faults because 
he does not reflect on future conse- 
quences. 

We commit a thousand faults when we 
neglect to reflect on ourselves. 

He had rather speak ill of himself than 
not speak of himself at all. 

The egotist prefers speaking ill of himself 
rather than not be the subject of his own 
conversation. 

We frequently want the assistance of one 
who is below ourselves. 

A prince frequently needs the assistance 
of many persons inferior to himself. 

Il is an excellent method of exaltivg our- 
selves to exalt our equals, and a man of 
address by this means exalts himself. 



Sur les Pronoms Relatifs. 

II n'y a rien de si capable d'effeminer le 
courage, que l'oisivete et les delices, 

II faut empecher que la division, qui est 
dans cette famiile, n'eclate, 



On the Relative Pronouns. 

Nothing is so calculated to enervate the 
mind as idleness and pleasure. 

The dissension in that family must be 
prevented from becoming public, 



PHRASES ON SOME DIFFICULTIES. 



285 



II y a bien des evenemens que Ton suppose 

se passer pendant les entr'actes, 
Je le trouvai qui s'habillait, 
dui le tirera de cet embarras, le tirera 

d'une grande misere, 
Ceux-la sont veritablement heureux, qui 

croient l'etre, 
II n'y a que la vertu, qui puisse rendre un 

homme heureux en cette vie, 
II n'y a regie, si generate, qui n'ait son 

exception, 
C'est un orateur qui se possede et qui ne 

se trouble jamais, 
II n'y a pas dans le cceur humain de repli 

que Dieu ne connaisse, 
On n'a trouve que quelques fragmens du 

grand ouvrage qu'il avait promis, 
La faute, que vous avez faite, est plus 

importante que vous ne pensez, 
Les premieres demarches qu'on fait dans 

le monde, ont beaucoup d'influence sur 

le reste de la vie, 
Cette farce est une des plus risibles qu'on 

ait encore vues, 
Amassez-vous des tresors que les vers et 

la rouille ne puissent point gCiter, et que 

les voleurs ne puissent point derober, 
L'incertitude, ou nous sommes de ce qui 

doit arriver, fait que nous ne saurions 

prendre des mesures justes, 
Je m'etonne qu'il ne voie pas le danger 

ou il est, 
L'homme dont vous parlez, n'est plus ici, 

Celui de qui je tiens cette nouvelle ne 

vous est pas connu, 
Celui a qui ce beau chateau appartient 

ne l'habite presque jamais, 
Ce sont des evenemens auxquels il faut 

bien se soumettre, 
C'est ce a quoi vous ne pensez guere, 



There are many events in a piece which 

are supposed to happen between the acts. 
I found him dressing. 
Whoever extricates him from this difficulty 

will relieve him from much distress. 
Those are really happy who think them,' 

selves so. 
Virtue alone can render a man happy in 

this life. 
There is no rule so general but it admits 

of exceptions. 
He is an orator who is master of himself, 

and who is never embarrassed. 
There is no recess of the human heart but 

God perceives it. 
Only some fragments of the great work 

he had promised have been found. 
The error you have committed is of more 

consequence than you imagine. 
The first steps we take on entering the 

world have considerable influence on the 

rest of our lives. 
That farce is one of the most truly comic 

that ever was seen. 
Lay up for yourselves treasures which 

neither moth nor rust can corrupt, and 

which thieves cannot steal. 
Our uncertainty as to what shall happen 

makes us incapable of properly pro- 
viding against it. 
I am astonished he does not see the danger 

he is in. 
The man whom you are speaking of is not 

here now. 
The person from whom I received the in- 
telligence is not known to you. 
The proprietor of that beautiful seat set' 

dom resides there. 
These are events to which we must submit. 

It is what you seldom think of. 



Sur les Pronoms Demonstratifs. 

Ne point reconnaitre la divinite, c'est 

renoncer a toutes les lumieres de la 

raison. 
Mentir, c'est mepriser Dieu et craindre 

les hommes, 
11 y a des epidemies morales, et ce sont 

les plus dangereuses, 
Je crois que ce que vous dites est bien 

eloigne de ce que vous pensez, 
Les hommes n'aiment ordinairement que 

ceux qui les flattent, 
Celui qui persuade a un autre de faire un 

crime, n'est guere moins coupable que 

celui qui le commet, 
Penser ainsi, c'est s'aveugler soi-m6me, 

Ce qu'on rapporte de lui est inconcevable, 

Ce qui m'afilige, c'est de voir le triomphe 

du crime, 
Connaissez-vous la jeune Emilie? C'est 

une enfant dont tout le monde dit du 

bien, 
Jmitez en tout votre amie : elle est douce, 

appliquee, honnete et compatissante, 



On the Demonstrative Pronouns. 

Not to acknowledge the divinity is totally/ 
to renounce the light of reason. 

To lie is to despise God and to fear man. 

There are moral contagious disorders, 
and these are the most dangerous. 

What you advance is, I think, widely dif- 
ferent from your sentiments. 

Men in general love only those who flatter 
them. 

He who persuades another to the commis- 
sion of a crime is hardly less guilty 
than he who commits it. 

To think in this manner is to be wilfully 
blind. 

The reports concerning him are hardly 
conceivable. 

What distresses me is to see guilt tri° 
umphant. 

Do you know little Emily ? She is a child 
of whom every body speaks well. 

Imitate your friend in every thing ; she 
is mild, assiduous, polite, and comv&s* 
sionate. 



286 



FHRASES ON SOME DIFFICULTIES. 



Sur le verbe Avoir employe a Vim- 
personnel. 

Remarque. — Q.uand le verbe avoir s'em- 
ploie a l'impersonnel, c'est dans le sens 
d'etre, et alors il se joint toujours avec y. 
II y a un an que je ne vous ai vu, 

Y a-t-il des nouvelles? 
Non, il n'y en a pas, du moins que je sache, 
N'y a-t-il pas cinquante-quatre milles de 

Londres a Brighton ? 
II y avait deja beaucoup de monde lorsque 

j'arrivai, 
II n'y avait hier presque personne au 

pare, 

Y avait-il de grands debats? 

N'y avait-il pas beaucoup de curieux? 
Je l'avais vu il y avait a peine vingt- 

quatre heures, 
II n'y avait pas deux jours qu'il avait 

dine chez moi. 

Y avait-il si long-temps que vous ne l'aviez 
Ily eut hier un bal chez M. untel. [vu? 
II n'y eut pas hierde spectacle. 

Y eut-il beaucoup de confusion et de de- 
sordre ? 

N'y eut-il pas un beau feu d'artifice? 
II y a eu aujourd'hui une foule immense a 

la promenade, 
li n'y a pas eu de bal, comme on l'avait 

annonce, 
Est-il vrai qu'il y a eu un duel ? 
N'y a-t-il pas eu dans sa conduite un peu 

trop d'emportement ? 
Gluand il y eut eu une explication, les 

esprits se calmerent, 
N'y avait-il pas eu un plus grand nombre 

de spectateurs ? 
II y aura demain un simulacre de combat 

naval, 
II n'y aura aucun de vous, 

Y aura-t.il une bonne recolte cette annee ? 
N'y aura-t-il pas quelqu'un de votre fa- 
mine ? 

A coup sur il y aura eu bien du desordre, 
Sur cent personnes, il n'y en aura pas eu 
dix de satisfaites, 

Y aura-t-il eu un bon soupe ? 

N'y aura-t-il pas eu de mecontens ? 

II y aurait de la malhonnetete dans ce pro- 

II n'y aurait pas grand mal a cela. [cede. 

Y aurait-il quelqu'un assez hardi pour 
1'attaquer ? 

N'y auvait-il pas quelqu'un assez charita- 
ble pour l'avertir de ce qu'on dit de lui ? 
II y aurait eu de l'imprudence a cela. 

II n'y aurait pas eu tant de mesintelli- 

gence, si Ton m'en avait cru. 
II n'y aurait pas eu dix personnes, 

Y aurait il eu de l'inconvenient? 

N'y aurait il pas eu de jaloux pour le 
traverser dans ses projets? 

Jc ne crois pas qu'il y ait un spectacle 
plus tnagnifique, 

Je desirerais qu'il y eut moins de faussete 
dans le commerce de la vie, 

Je n'ai pas ou'i dire qu'il y ait eu hier des 
nouvelles du continent, 

Auriez-vous cru qu'il y eut eu tant de per- 
sonnes compromises dans cette affaire? 



On the verb Avoir, to have, employed 
impersonally. 

When the verb avoir is used impersonally 
it signifies etre, to be, and in this sense it 
is always accompanied by the adverb y. 
It is a twelvemonth since I saw you. 
Is there any news ? 
No, there is none, at least that I know. 
Is it not fifty -four miles from London to 

Brighton ? 
There were already a great many people 

when I arrived. 
There was hardly any body in the park 



Were there violent debates ? 

Were there not many curious people ? 

I had seen him scarcely four-and-twenty 

hours before. 
He had dined with me not two days before. 

Was it so long since you had seen him. 
There was yesterday a ball at Mr. A's. 
There was no play yesterday. 
Was there a great deal of confusion and 

disorder ? 
Were there not handsome fireworks? 
There was an immense crowd to-day at 

the public walks. 
There has not been any ball, as had been 

mentioned. 
Is it true that there has been a duel? 
Was there not rather too much hastiness 

in his behaviour ? 
After there had been an explanation, 

tranquillity was restored. 
Was there not a greater number of spec- 
tators ? 
To-morrow there will be the representation 

of a sea-fight. 
There will be none of you. 
Will there be a good harvest this year ? 
Will not there be some of your family ? 

[order. 
There must certainly have been much dis- 
Out of a hundred persons, there will not 

have been ten satisfied. 
Will there have been a good supper ? 
Will there not have been some dissatisfied ? 
Such a step would have been ungenteel. 
There would be no great harm in that. 
Would there be any one bold enough to 

attack him ? 
Would there be nobody kind enough to 

acquaint him with what is said of him ? 
There would have been some imprudence 

in that. 
There would not have been so great a mis- 
understanding had I been believed. 
There would not have been ten persons. 
Would there have been any inconve* 

nience 7 
Would there not have been some envious 

person to thwart him in his designs? 
I do not think there can be a more superb 

spectacle. 
I wish there were less duplicity in the 

concerns of life. 
I have not heard that there was any news 

from the continent yesterday. 
Could you have thought so many persons 

would have been exposed in that affair} 



phrases on some difficulties. 



287 



Phrases Diverses. 
Sa vie, ses actions, ses paroles, son air 

meme et sa demarche, tout preche, tout 

edifieen lui, 
On craignait qu'il n'arrivat quelque de- 

sordre dans 1'assemblee, mais toutes 

choses s'y passerent fort doucement, 
La vigne et le lierre s'entortillent autour 

des ormes, 
On ne disconvient point qu'il ne soit 

brave, mais il est un peu trop fanfaron, 
Le cadet est riche, mais l'aine Test encore 

davantage, 
Le ciel est couvert de nuages, et l'orage 

est pret a fondre, 
Apres qu'il eut franchi les Alpes avec ses 

troupes, il entra en Italie, 
La frugalite rend les corps plus sains et 

plus robustes, 
Ce discours est peut-etre un des plus 

beaux morceaux d'eloquence, qu'il y 

ait jamais eu, 
C'est un homme qui aime la liberte ; il n« 

se gene pour qui que ce soit, 
II est plus haut que moi de deux doigts, 
Irez-vous vous exposer a la barbarie et a 

l'inhospitalite de ces peuples? 

A la longue, les erreurs disparaissent, et 

la verite surnage, 
Si vous le prenez avec moi sur ce ton de 

fierte, je serai aussi fier que vous, 
C'est un homme rigide, qui ne pardonne 

rien, ni aux autres ni a lui-meme, 
Les uns montent, les autres descendent, 

ainsi va la roue de la fortune, 
Je ne vois rien de solide dans tout ce que 

vous me proposez, 
L'art n'a jamais rien produit de plus beau, 
Lequel est-ce des deux qui a tort ? 
On aime quelquefois la trahison, mais on 

hait toujours les traitres, 



Promiscuous Phrases. 
His life, his actions, his very look and 

deportment, every thing in him instructs 

and edifies. 
It was apprehended some disorder would 

take place in the assembly, but every 

thing went off very quietly. 
The vine and ivy twist round the elms. 

They do not deny that he is brave, but he 

boasts rather too much. 
The youngest is rich, but the eldest is still 

more so* 
The sky is covered with clouds, and the 

storm is preparing to burst. 
After having crossed the Alps with his 

troops, he entered Italy. 
Temperance imparts an increase of health 

and strength to the body. 
Tliis speech is perhaps one of the finest 

pieces of eloquence that was ever pro- 
nounced. 
He is a. man fond of liberty, he will be 

restrained by nobody. 
He is taller than I by two inches. 
Will you go and expose yourself to the 

barbarity and inhospitality of those 

nations? 
In time errors vanish and truth survives. 

If you treat me with that haughtiness, I 

can be as haughty as you. 
He is a strange character, who pardons 

nothing, either in himself or others. 
Some mount, others descend; thus goes 

the wheel of fortune. 
I see nothing certain in all you propose 

to me. 
It is one of the finest productions of art. 
Which of the two is in the wrong ? 
We sometimes love the treason, but, w» 

always hate the traitor. 



Continuation. 

L'elephant se sert de sa trompe pour pren- 
dre et pour enlever tout ce qu'il veut, 
Plus j'examine cette personne, plus je 

crois l'avoir vue quelque part, 
La nuit vint, de facon que je fus contraint 

de me retirer, 
II faut vivre de facon qu'on ne fasse tort 

a personne, 
Ella sut qu'on attaquait son mari et 

courut aussitot tout eperdue pour le 

secourir, 
Je Jrouvai ses parens tout eplores, 
Cet arbre pousse ses branches toutes 

droites, 
J'en ai encore la memoire toute fraiche, 
II a voulu faire voir par cet essai qu'il 

pouvait reussir en quelque chose de 

plus grand, 
II fut blesse au front et mourut de cette 

blessure, 
Ces chevaux prirent le mors aux dents et 

entrainerent le carrosse, 
C'est un homme qukcompose sans chaleur 

ni imagination ; tout ce qu'il ecrit est 

froid et plat, 
Ce batiment a plus de profondeur que de 

largeur, 



Continuation. 

The elephant makes use of his trunk to 

take and lift whatever he pleases. 
The more I look at that person, the more I 

think I have seen him. {or her) somewhere. 
Night came on, so that I was obliged to 

retire. 
We must live in such a manner as to 

injure nobody. 
She knew her husband was attacked, and, 

in a state of distraction, ran to his 

assistance. 
I found his relations all in tears. 
The branches of that tree grow quite 

straight. 
It is still quite fresh in my memory. 
He wished to show, by that attempt, that 

he could succeed in an enterprise of 

more consequence. 
He was wounded in the forehead, and died 

of this wound. 
Those horses ran away with the carriage. 

He is a man who writes without the least 
warmth or animation : all his produc- 
tions are cold and insipid. 

That building is deeper than it is broad. 



288 



PHRASES ON SOME DIFFICULTIES. 



Cet homme est un prodige de savoir, de 

science, de valeur, d'esprit, et de me- 

moire, 
II est attache a Tun et a l'autre, mais plus 

a Tun qu'a l'autre, 
lis ont bien de l'air Tun de Pautre, 
Si Ton mine cet homme-la, le contre-coup 

retombera sur vous, 
II serait mort, si on ne 1'eut assiste avec 

soin, 
Ce poeme serait parfait, si les incidens, 

qui le font languir, n'interrompaient la 

continuity de Taction, 



Continuation, 

Quand je le voudrais, je ne le pourrais pas, 
Je serai toujours votre ami, quand merae 

vous ne le voudriez pas, 
Quand vous auriez reussi, que vous en 

serait-ilrevenu ? 
Quand on decouvrirait votre demarche, 

on ne pourrait la blamer, 
Quand vous auriez consulte quelqu'un sur 

votre marriage, vous n'auriez pas mieux 

reussi, 
Le tonnerre et Peel air ne sont sensibles 

que par la propagation du bruit et de la 

lumiere jtisqu'a l'oeil et a l'oreille, 
Le langage de la prose est plus simple et 

moins figure que celui des vers, 
Le commencement de son discours est 

toujours assez sage ; mais, dans la suite, 

a force de vouloir s'elever, i 1 se perd dans 

les nues: on ne sait plus ni ce qu'on 

voit, ni ce qu'on entend, 
C'est une faute excusable dans un autre 

homme, mais a un homme aussi sage 

que lui, elle ne se peut pardonner, 
II ne suffit pas de paraitre honncte homme, 

il faut l'etre, 
II nous a recus avec bonte, et nous a 

ecoutes avec patience, 
Tout y est si bien peint, qu'on croit voir 

ce qu'il decrit, 
On ne pense rien de vous, qui ne vous soit 

glorieux, 
Les eaux de citernes ne sont que des eaux 

de pluie ramassees, 
S'il n'est pas fort riche, du moins a-t-il de 

quoi vivre honnetement, 
Quel quantieme du mois avons-nous? 
II lui tarde qu'il ne soit majeur, il compte 

les jours et les mois, 
Des qualites excellentes, jointes a de rares 

talens, font le parfait merite, * 

II a une mauvaise qualite, e'est qu'il ne 

saurait garder un secret, 



Jlfodfiles de phrases dans lesguelles, 

on doit /aire usage de Particle. 
L'homme est sujet a bien des vicissitudes, 
Les hommes d'un vrai genie sont rares, 
Les hommes a imagination sont rarement 

heureux, 
L'homme, dont vous parlez, est un de mes 

amis, 
La vie est un melange de biens et de maux, 
La perfection en tout genre est le but 

auquel on doit tendre, 



That man is a prodigy of knowledge 
judgment, courage, sense, and memory. 

He is attached to both, but to one more 
than to the other. 

They very much resemble each other. 

If that man is ruined, his misfortune will 
recoil upon you. 

He would have died, if he had not been 
kindly assisted. 

That would be a perfect poem, if the inci- 
dents which give a -heaviness to it, did 
not break the connection of the subject. 



Continuation. 

If I were disposed, I could not do it. 

I will always be your friend, even though 

you should not wish it. 
Had you even succeeded, what were you 

to have derived from it? 
Should the steps you have taken be dis* 

covered, they could not be blamed. 
Had you consulted somebody about your 

marriage, you could not have succeeded 

better. 
Thunder and lightning are only percep- 
tible by the transmission of sound and 

light to the ear and eye. 
Prose language is much more simple and 

less figurative than poetic. 
The beginning of his speech is always 

tolerably sensible ; but afterwards, by 

affecting the sublime, he loses himself 

and we no longer understand either 

what we see or hear. 
This fault would be excusable in another 

man, but in a man of his sense it is 

unpardonable. 
It is not enough to seem an honest man ; 

we must be so. 
He received us with kindness, and heard 

usjjpatiently. 
Every thing in it is so well delineated, you 

think you see what he describes. 
They think nothing of you but what is to 

your honor. 
Cistern-water is only rain-water collected. 

If he is not rich, at least he has enough to 

live upon respectably. 
What day of the month is it ? 
He longs to be of age, and counts the days 

and months. 
Excellent qualities, joinedto distinguished 

talents, constitute perfect merit. 
He has one bad quality, he cannot keep a 

secret. 



Examples of Phrases in which the 
Article is used. 

Man is liable to a variety of changes. 

Men of real genius are scarce. 

Men of a visionary character are seldom 

happy. 
The man you speak of is a friend of mine 

Life is a compound of good and evil. 
Perfection in every thing ought to be our 
object. 



PHRASES ON SOME DIFFICULTIES. 



289 



La beauty les graces, et l'esprit sont des 
avantages bien precieux. quand ils sont 
releves par la modestie, 
Voihi des tableaux d'une grande beaute, 
Faites-vous des principes, dont vous ne 

vous tcartiez jamais, 
Cet arbre porte des fruits excellens, 
Ces raisons sont des conjectures bien 

faibles. 
Servez-vousdes termesetablisparTusage, 
On doit eviter l'air de l'aftectation, 

Le Jupiter de Phidias etait d'une grande 
beaute, 



Beauty, gracefulness, and wit are valu- 
able endowments, when heightened by 
modesty. 

These are very beautiful pictures. 

Establish rules for yourself and never 
deviate from them. 

This tree bears very excellent fruit. 

These reasons are very idle conjectures. 

Use the expressions established by custom. 
We ought to avoid the appearance of 

affectation. 
The Jupiter of Phidias was extremely 

beautiful. 



Continuation des mimes Phrases. 

La memoire est le tresor de l'esprit, le 

fruit de Tattention et de la reflexion, 
J'achetai hier des gravures precieuses et 

rares, 
La France est le plus beau pays delEurope, 
L'intt ret de l'Allemagne etait oppose a 

celui de la Russie. 
La longueur de TAngleterre du nord au 

sud est de 360 milles, et sa largeur de 

Test a l'ouest est de 300. 
II arrive de la Chine, du Japon, et des 

Indes Orientales, &c. 
II arrive de r Amerique, de la Barbade, de 

la Jamaique, &x. 
II vient de la Flandre francaise, 
II s'estetabli dans la province deMiddlesex, 
Des petits maitres sont des etres insup- 

portables dans la societe, 
C'est l'opinion des nouveaux philosophes, 
Elle a bien de la grace dans tout ce 

qu'elle fait, 
Cette etoffe se vend une guinee l'aune, 
Ce vin coute 70 livres sterlings la piece, 



The same Phrases continued. 

Memory is the treasure of the mind, the 
result of attention and reflection. 

I yesterday bought some valuable and 
scarce engravings. 

France is the finest country in Europe. 

The German interest was contrary to the 
Russian. 

The length of England from north to 
south is 360 miles, and its breadth from 
east to west is 300. 

He comes from China, Japan, and the 
East Indies. 

He comes from America, Barbadoes, Ja- 
maica, 8(C. 

He comes from French Flanders. 

He has settled in the county of Middlesex. 

Coxcombs are insufferable beings in so- 
ciety. 

It is the opinion of the new philosophers. 

She does every thing most gracefully. 

This stuff sells at a guinea an ell. 
This wine costs seventy pounds the pipe. 



Modeles de Phrases da?is lesquelles Examples of Phrases in which the 
on ne doit pas fair e usage de V article. Article is omitted. 

Nos connaissances doivent etre tirees de 

principes evidens, 
Cet arbre porte d'excellens fruits, 
Ces raisons sont de faibles conjectures, 
Evitez tout ce qui a un air d'affectation, 



Ces exemples peuvent servir de modeles, 
II a une grande presence d'esprit, 
La memoire de raison et d'esprit est plus 
utile que les autres sortes de memoire, 
Peu de personnes reflichissent sur la 

rapidite de la vie, 
Que d'evenemens inconcevables se sont 

succedes les uns aux autres ! 
II y a plus d'esprit, mais moins de con- 
naissances, dans ce siecle que dans le 
siecle dernier, 
On ne vit jamais autant d'effronterie, 
Je pris hier beaucoup de peine pour rien, 

Candie est une des iles les plus agreables 

de la Mediterranee, 
II arrive de Perse, d'ltalie, d'Espagne, &c. 
II est revenu de Suisse, d'Allemagne, &c. 

Les vins de France seront chers cette 
annee ; les vignes ont coule, 

2 



Our knowledge ought to be derived from 

evident principles. 
This tree produces excellent fruit. 
These reasons are idle conjectures. 
Avoid whatever bears the appearance of 

affectation. 
These examples may serve as models. 
He has great presence of mind. 
The memory of reason and sense is more 

useful than any other kind of memory. 
Few persons reflect on the rapidity of life. 

How many inconceivable events have fol- 
lowed in succession ! 

There is more wit, but less knowledge, in 
this age than the last. 

So much assurance never was met with. 

I took a great deal of trouble yesterday 
about nothing. 

Candia is one of the most agreeable 
islands in the Mediterranean. 

He comes from Persia, Italy, Spain, Sec. 

He is returned from Switzerland, Ger- 
many, fyc. 

French wines will be dear this year ; tht 
vines have been blighted. 

B 



290 



PHRASES ON SOME DIFFICULTIES. 



L'empire d'AUemagne est compose de The German empire is composed of great 

grands et de petils etats, and small states. 

Les chevaux d'Angleterre sont excellens, English horses are excellent. 

Apres mon depart de Suisse, je me retirai After leaving Switzerland, I retired to 

a Rome. Rome. 



Continuation des memes Phrases. Continuation of the same Phrases. 



Vous trouverez ce passage page 120, livre 

premier, chapitre dix. 
II s'est retire en Angleterre, 
11 vit dans sa retraite en vrai philosophe, 
Quand il reflechit sur sa conduite, il en 

eut honte, 
C'est un nomine qui cherche fortune, 
II entend malice a tout, 
Ne portez envie a personne, 
Si vous promettez, tenez parole, 
Dans les affaires importantes ne vous 

decidez jamais sans prendre conseil, 
Courage, soldats, tenons fermes ; la vio- 

toire est a nous, 
Cette femme n'a ni grace ni beaute, 

Monseigneur le due de, &c. prince du sang, 

alia hier a la campagne, 
* Montrer tant de faiblesse, c'est n'etre pas 

homme, 
Cet homme est une espece de misanthrope, 

dont les brusqueries sont quelquefois 

tres-plaisantes, 
L'ananas est une sorte de fruit tres- 

commun aux Antilles, 
C'est un genre de vie qui ne me plait point, 



You will find this passage at page 120, 

book the first, chapter the tenth. 
He has retired to England. [pher. 

He lives in his retreat like a real philoso- 
When he reflected on his conduct, he was 

ashamed of it. 
He is a man that seeks to make a fortune. 
He puts a malicious construction on every 
Envy nobody. [thing. 

If you promise, keep your word. 
In matters of consequence, never decide 

without advice. 
Cheer up, soldiers, let us continue firm; 

the day is our own. 
This woman is destitute both of grace 

and beauty. 
The duke of, fyc. a prince of the blood, 

went yesterday into the country. 
To show so much weakness, is not acting 

like a man, 
This man is a kind of misanthropist, 

whose oddities are sometimes comical. 

The pine-apple is a kind of fruit very 

common in the Antilles. 
It is a kind of life that is not agreeable tome. 



Continuation des memes Phrases. The same Sentences continued. 



Cette dame plait a tout le monde par son 

honnetete et sa douceur, 
Tout homme a des defauts plus ou moins 

sensibles, 
Cette conduite augmentait chaque jour le 

nombre de ses amis, 
Tous les biens nous viennent de Dieu, 
Venus etait la deesse de la beaute, et la 

mere de 1'amour et des graces, 
Selon les paiens, Jupiter etait le premier 

des dieux, 
Apollon etait frere jumeau de Diane, 
Rubens a ete un grand peintre, 
Homere et Virgile sont les deux plus 

grands poetes epiques, 
Londres est la plus belle ville que je 

connaisse, 
L'eau de riviere est douce, et l'eau de 

mer est salee, 
C'est un excellent poisson de mer, 
Voila une superbe table de inarbre, 
L'eau de Seine est celle qu'on prefere a 

Paris, 
Pauvrete n'est pas vice, 
Citoyens, etrangers, grands, peuples, se 

sont montres sensibles a cette perte, 



This lady pleases every one by her good 
breeding and mildness. 

Every one has defects, more or less 
obvious. 

This behaviour daily increased the num- 
ber of his friends. 

Every blessing comes from God. 

Venus was the goddess of beauty, and the 
mother of love and the graces. 

According to the heathens, Jupiter was 
the first of the gods. 

Apollo was twin-brother to Diana. 

Rubens was a great painter. 

Homer and Virgil are the two greatest 
epic poets. 

London is the finest city that I know. 

River-water is sweet, and sea-water is 

salt. 
It is an excellent sea-fish. 
There is a superb marble table. 
The water of the Seine is preferred at 

Paris. 
Poverty is not a vice. 
Citizens, strangers, grandees, people, have 

shown themselves sensible of this loss. 



Modtles de Phrases sur le pronom Forms of Phrases upon the pronoun 

LE. LE. 

Est-ce la votre opinion ?— Ne doutez point Is that your opinion ?—Do not question it. 

que ce ne la soit. 

Sont-ce la vos domestiques ?— Oui, ce les Are these your servants? — Yes, they are. 

sont. 

Mesdames, etes-vous les etrangeres qu'on Ladies, are you the strangers that have 

m'a annoncees?— Oui, nous les sommes. been announced to me?— -Yes, we are. 



PHRASES ON SOME DIFFICULTIES. 



291 



Madame, etes-vous la malade pour la- 

quelle on m'a appele ? — Oui, je la suis. 
Madame, etes-vous la mere de cet enfant ? 

— Oui, je la suis. 
Mesdames, etes-vous contentes de cette 

musique ? — Oui, nous le sommes. 
Elle est malheureuse, et je crains bien, 

qu'elle ne le soit toute la vie. 
Madame, etes-vous mere? — Oui, jele suis. 
Madame, etes-vous malade ?-Oui,jele suis. 
Madame, depuis quel temps etes-vous 

mariee ? — Je le suis depuis un an, 
Y a-t-il long temps que vous etes arrivee ? 

— Je le suis depuis quinze jours, 
Aristote croyait que le monde etait de 

toute eternite ; mais Platon ne le 

croyait pas, 
Quoique cette femme montre plus de fer- 

mete que les autres, elle n'est pas pour 

cela la moins affligee, 
Cette femme a Tart de repandre des larmes 

dans le temps meme qu'elle est le moins 

affligee. 



Madam, are you the sick person for whom 

I have been called? — Yes, I am. 
Madam, are you the mother of this child? 

— Yes, lam. 

Ladies, are you pleased with this music ? 

— Yes, we are. 

She is unhappy, and I much fear she will 
continue so for life. 

Madam, are you a mother? — Yes, I am. 

Madam, are you sick? — Yes, I am. 

Madam, how long have you been married? 
— A year. 

Is it long since you arrived? — A fort- 
night. 

Aristotle believed the world to have been 
from all eternity, but Plato did not. 

Although this woman shows more resolu- 
tion than the others, she is nevertheless 
not the least afflicted. 

This woman has the art of shedding tears, 
even when she is least afflicted. 



JModeles de phrases sur les diffe- 
rentes regies du participe passe. 

La nouvelle piece a-t-elle ete applaudie ? 

Vos parens y seront-ils arrives a temps ? 

Elle s'est donne de belles robes, 

Elles nous out apporte de superbes Geillets, 

Cette ruse ne lui a pas reussi, 

La vie tranquille que j'ai men6e depuis 
dix ans, a beaucoup contribue a me faire 
oublier mes malheurs, 

Les lettres, qui j'ai recues, m'ont beau- 
coup afflige, 

Q,ue de peines vous vous etes donnees ! 

Cluelle tache vous vous etes impos6e ! 

C'est une satire que j'ai retrouvee dans 
mes papiers, 

Les lettres qu'a ecrites Pline le jeune, 
quelque agreables qu'elles soient, se 
ressentent neanmoins un peu de la de- 
cadence du gout parmi les Romains, 

Je ne serais pas entre avec vous dans tous 
ces details de grammaire, si je ne les 
avais crus necessaires, 

L'Egypte s'etait rendue celebre par la 
sagesse de ses lois long-temps avant 
que la Grece sortit de la barbarie, 

C'est une des plus grandes merveilles qu'on 
ait vues^ 

L'homme de lettres, dont vous m'avez 
parle, a un gout exquis, 

Vous avez tres-bien instruit vos eleves, 

Lucrece s'est donne la mort, 

La secheresse qu'il y a eu au printemps a 
fait perir tous les fruits, 

Je n'ai point reussi, malgre les mesures 

que vous m'avez conseiiie de prendre, 
Cluelle aventure vous est-il arrive ? 
Cette femme s'est proposee pour modele a 

ses enfans, 
Cette femme s'est propose d'enseigner la 
geographie et l'histoire a ses enfans. 



Forms of Phrases upon the different 
rules of the participle past. 

Did the new piece meet with applause? 
Will your relations have arrived there in 
She has given herself fine gowns, [time ? 
They have brought us beautiful pinks. 
He has not succeeded in this stratagem. 
The quiet life I have led these ten years 

has greatly contributed to make me 

forget my misfortunes. 
The letters I have received have afflicted 

me greatly. [yourself! 

What a deal of trouble you have given 
What a task you have imposed on yourself! 
It is a satire that I have again met with 

in my papers. 
The letters which the younger Pliny has 

written, however agreeable they may 

be, savor nevertheless a little of the 

decline of taste among the Romans. 
I would not have entered into these gram- 
matical details with you, had I not 

thought them necessary. 
Egypt had become celebrated for the wis 

dom of its laws long before Greece had 

emerged from barbarism. 
It is one of the greatest wonders that has 

ever been seen. 
The man of letters you spoke to me of kas 

an excellent taste. 
You have instructed your pupils extremely 
Lucretia killed herself. [well. 

The dry weather zoe had in the spring has 

destroyed all the fruit. 
I have not succeeded, notwithstanding the 

steps you advised me to take. 
What adventures have you met with? 
This woman proposed herself as a model 

for her children. 
This woman proposed to teach geography 

and history to her children. 



J^fo deles de Phrases sur les princi~ 
paux rapports des modes et des temps. 

Je Tattendais depuis long-temps, quand il 

vint ine joindre, 
li sortit au moment meme que j'entrais. 



Forms of Phrases upon the principal 
relations of moods and tenses. 

/ had waited a long time for him, when 

he came to me. [ing. 

He was going out at the time I was enter- 



292 



PHRASES ON SOME DIFFICULTIES. 



Je commencaisa avoir des craintes sur la 
reussite de votre affaire, lorsque j'ai 
recu votre lettre, 

Des que j'eus fait quelques visites indis- 
pensables, je rentrai chez moi, et je ne 
sortis plus, 

J'avais deja tout prepare pour mon depart, 
lorsque des affaires imprevues m'ont 
force a le differer de quelques jours, 

Vous etiez deja sorti, quand je me pre- 

sentai chez vous, 
J'avais deja livre a 1'impression mon 

ouvrage, lorsque vous me demandiez, 

si je le donnerais bientot au public, 
Lorsque j'ai eu termina mon affaire vous 

avez commence la votre, 
Lorsque j'eus dejeune je montai a cheval, 

et je fus a Londres, 
Lorsque j'aurai lu la nouvelle piece, je vous 

dirai avec franchise ce que j'en pense. 
Iriez-vous a Rome si vous le pouviez? — 

Oui, j'irais, 
Auriez-vous consenti a ces conditions, si 

on vous les avait proposees? 
Irez-vous demain a Londres, si vous le 

pouvez? — Oui, j'irai, 
II sera surement parti, si vous l'avez voulu, 
Vous eussiez laisse echapper une occasion 

si favorable, si Ton ne vous eut averti a 

temps, 



Continuation des memes Phrases. 
On dit que vous partez aujourd'hui pour 

Paris, 
Tout le monde soutient que vous ac- 

cepterez la place qu'on vous offre, 
On soupconne que vous aviez hier recu 

cette agreable nouvelle quand on vous 

rencontra, 
Beaucoup de vos amis croient que vous 

partites hier pour la campagne, 
Le bruit se repand que vous avez fait une 

grosse perte, 
J'apprends dans l'instant que vous fussiez 

parti il y a trois jours, si des engage- 

mens, que vous aviez contractus depuis 

long-temps, ne vous avaient retenu, 
N'est-il pas vrai que vous partiriez au- 
jourd'hui, si vous le pouviez? 
Est-il vrai que vous seriez parti depuis 

long-temps pour la campagne, si votre 

amour pour les arts ne vous avait retenu 

a la ville? 
Je ne crois pas que vous partiez, quoique 

tout le monde l'assure, 
Je ne croyais pas qu'il fut si-tot de retour, 
II a fallu qu'il ait eu affaire a bien des 

personnes, 
Je doute que votre ami fut venu a bout 

de ses projets, s'il n'avait pas ete forte- 

ment protege, 
II n'est point d'homme, quelque merite 

qu'il ait, qui ne fut trcs-mortifie, s'il 

savait tout ce qu'on pense de lui, 

Vous ne vous persuadiez pas que les af- 
faires pussent si mal tourner, 

J\fodtles de Phrases sur la negative 

JVE. 
II n'y a pas beaucoup d'argent chez ces 
gens de lettres, 



/ was beginning to be apprehensive of 

the success of your business when I 

received your letter. 
As soon as I had paid some indispensable 

visits, I went home, and did not go out 

afterwards. 
I had already made every preparation for 

my departure, when some unexpected 

business occurred that obliged me to 

defer it for some days. 
You were already gone out when I called 

upon you. 
My work had been sent to be printed 

when you asked me if I should soon 

bring it out. 
When my business was over, you began 

yours. 
When I had done breakfast, I got on 

horseback, and went to London. 
When I have read the new piece, I will 

candidly give you my opinion of it. 
Would you go to Rome if it were in your 

power? — Yes, I would. 
Would you have agreed to those terms , 

had they been proposed to you ? 
Shall you go to London to-morrow, if you 

can ? — Yes, 1 shall. [wished it. 

He will certainly have set out, if you, 
You would have let so favorable an oppor- 
tunity slip, had you not been warned in 

time. 



The same Phrases continued 
It is said that you set off to-day for Paris. 

Every one maintains that you will accept 

of the place that is offered to you. 
It is suspected that you had received this 

agreeable intelligence when you were 

met yesterday. 
Many of your friends believe that you set 

out yesterday for the country. 
There is a report that you have met with 

a considerable loss. 
I have this moment learned that you would 

have set out three days since, had not 

engagements which you had formed 

long ago detained you. 
Is it not true that you would set out to-day 

if you could? 
Is it true that you would have set out for 

the country long since, had not your 

love for the arts detained you in town? 

I do not imagine that you will set out f 
although every body asserts it. 

I did not believe he had gone back so soon. 

He must have had business with a great 
many persons. 

I doubt that your friend would have suc- 
ceeded in his plan, had he not been 
strongly patronized. 

There is not a man, whatever merit he 
may possess, that would not be very 
much mortified were he to know every 
thing that is thought of him. 

You never persuaded yourself that matters 
could have taken so unfortunate a turn. 



Forms of Phrases upon the negative 

NE. 
There is not much money to be found 
among men of letters. 



PHRASES ON SOME DIFFICULTIES. 



293 



II n'y a point de ressource dans une per- 

sonne qui n'a point d'esprit, 
C'est a tort que vous l'accusez de jouer ; 

je vous assure qu'il ne joue point, 
Entrez dans le salon ; vous pourrez lui 

parler ; il ne joue pas, 
Si pour avoir du bien, il en coute a la 

probite, je n'en veux point, 
Rien n'est stir avec les capricieux ; vous 

croyez etre bien en faveur, point du 

tout; rinstant de la plus belle humeur 

est suivi de la plus facheuse, 
Vous ne cessez de nous repeter les meines 

choses, 
Je n'aurais ose vous en parler le premier, 
Malgre ses protections, il n'a pu reussir 

dans ses projets, 
Cet ouvrage serait fort bon, n'etait pour 

la negligence du style, 
Y a-t-il quelqu'un dont elle ne medise, 
J'ai pris tant de gout pour une vie retiree, 

que je ne sors presque jamais, 
Voila ce qui s'est passe ; n'en parlez a 

personne, 
Mon parti est pris ; ne m'en parlez plus, 
N'employez aucun de ces moyens : ils sont 

indignes de vous, 
Rien n'est plus joli, 
Je ne dis rien que je ne pense, 
Je ne fais jamais d'exces que je n'en sois 

incommode, 



There are no resources in a person with- 
out sense. 

You accuse him wrongfully of gaming ; 
I assure you he never games. 

Go into the room, you may speak to him ; 
he is not playing. 

I do not wish to make a fortune, if it can 
only be done at the expense of honesty. 

Nothing is certain with capricious people; 
you think yourself in favor, by no 
means; the moment of the best humor 
is followed by that of the worst. 

You are constantly repeating the same 
thing to us. [speak to you of it. 

I should not havt dared to be the first to 

With all his interest, he has not been able 
to succeed in his plans. 

This work would be very good, were it 
not for the negligence of the style. 

Is there any one she does not slander? 

I have acquired so great a taste for retire- 
ment that I seldom go abroad. 

This is what has passed ; do not speak of 
it to any one. [of it. 

My resolution is fixed ; talk to me no more 

Do not employ any one of these measures ; 
they are unworthy of you. 

Nothing is more beautiful. 

I never speak but what I think. 

I never commit any excess without suffer- 
ing by it. 



Continuation des memes Phrases. Continuation of the same Phrases. 



C'est un homme pour qui je n'ai ni amour, 

ni estime, 
II n'est ni assez prudent ni assez eclaire, 
Je vous assure que je ne le frequente ni 

ne le vois, 
Ne faire que parcouri.r les differentes 

branches des connaissances humaines 
. sans s'arreter a aucune, c'est moins 

chercher a s'instruire, qu'a tuer le temps, 
due n'etes-vous toujours aussi complai- 
sant? 
II ne le fera pas, a moins que vous ne l'y 
*■ engagiez, 

II n'ira pas, si vous ne Ten priez, 
II nous a menaces de se venger ; nous 

n'avons fait qu'en rire, 
Trop d'insouciance ne peut que nuire, 
Q,ue devenez-vous ? il y a trois mois que 

nous ne vous avons vu? 
Comment vous etes-vous porte depuis que 

nous ne vous avons vu ? 
C'est bien pire qu'on ne le disait, 
Peu s'en faut que je n'aie donne tete 

baissee dans le piege, 
Dites la verite en toute occasion ; on me- 

prise toujours ceux qui parlent autre- 

ment qu'ils ne pensent, 
Ne desesperez pas que la verite ne se fasse 

jour a la longue, [ainsi, 

Je ne disconviens pas que la chose ne soit 
Prenez garde qu'on ne vous entraine dans 

quelque fausse demarche, 
J'empecherai bien qu'on ne vous nuise 

dans cette affaire, 
II craint qu'on ne le soupeonne d'avoir 

trempe dans ce complot, 
On lui a donne d'excellens conseils, de 

crainte qu'il ne manquat l'occasion de 

faire connaitre ce qu'il est en etat de 

faire, 2 



He is a man for whom I have neither 
love nor esteem. [lightened. 

He is neither sufficiently prudent nor en- 

J assure you I neither associate with him 
nor see him. 

To go through the different branches of 
human knowledge only, without fixing 
upon any one of them, is not to seek for 
instruction, but to kill time. 

Why are you not at all times equally com- 
plaisant ? 

He will not do it unless you persuade him 
to it. [him. 

He will not go, if you do not request it of 

He has threatened us with vengeance; we 
only laughed at him. 

Too great supineness cannot butbe hurtful. 

What had become of you ? we have not 
seen you these three months. 

How have you been since we saw you ? 

It is much worse than was said. 

I was near running headlong into the 

snare. 
Tell the truth on all occasions: those who 

speak what they do not think are always 



Do not despair that truth will appear in 

time. 
I admit that it is so. 
Take care that you are not led into some 

false step. 
I shall prevent them from doing you any 

harm in this business. 
He is apprehensive that he is suspected of 

being concerned in this plot. 
They have given him excellent advice, lest 

he should lose the opportunity of showing 

what he was capable of doing. 
j2 



294 



PHRASES ON SOME DIFFICULTIES 



J'y ai long-temps travaille ; je ne saurais 

en venir a bout, 
Vous feriez mieux de vous taire ; vous ne 

savez ce que vous dites, [plaisir, 

Vous ne sauriez me faire un plus grand 



I have been long employed about it; I 

cannot accomplish it. 
You had better be silent ; you do not know 

what you are saying. 
You cannot do me a greater favor. 



Phrases sur quelques Delicatesses 

de la Langue Francaise. 
Irez-vous ce soir a Topera?— Oui, j'irai, 

Iriez-vous avec plaisir a Rome?— Oui, 

j'irais, 
La justice qui nous est quelquefois refugee 

par nos contemporains, la posterite sait 

nous la rendre, 
Cette grandeur qui vous etonne si fort, il 

la doit a votre nonchalance, 
D perit, ce heros, si cher a son pays, 
Je l'avais bien prevu que ce haut degre de 

grandeur serai t la cause de sa ruine, 
Citoyens,etrangers,ennemis,peuples,rois, 

empereurs, le plaignent et le reverent, 
L'assemblee finie, chacun se retira chez 

soi, 
Heureux le peuple qu'un sage roi gouverne, 
II refusa les plus grands honneurs, content 

de les meriter, 
Prieres, remontrances, commandemens, 

tout est inutile, 
Le vent renverse tours, cabanes, palais, 

eglises, 
Notre reputation ne depend pas du caprice 

des homines ; mais elle depend des ac- 
tions louables que nous fesons, 
II y a beaucoup de choses qu'il n'importe 

point du tout de savoir, 
La vue de l'esprit a plus d'etendue que la 

vue du corps, 
Ce qui sert a la vanite, n'est que vanite, 
Tout ce qui n'a que le monde pour fonde- 

ment, se dissipe et s'evanouit avec le 

monde, 
Cest le privilege des grands hommes de 

vaincre l'envie ; le merite la fait naitre, 

le merite la fait mourir, 
L'amour-propre est plus habile que le plus 

habile homme du monde, 
En quittant le monde, on ne quitte le plus 

souvent ni les erreurs, ni les folles pas« 

sions du monde. 



Phrases on some Delicacies of the 
French Language. 

Shall you go to the opera this evening? — 

Yes, I shall. 
Would you cheerfully go to Rome ?—Yes, 

I would. 
Posterity knows how to do us that justice 

which is sometimes refused us by our 

contemporaries. 
That greatness which so much astonishes 

you, he owes to your indifference. 
That hero, so dear to his country, perished. 
I foresaw that the greatness of his eleva- 
tion would be his ruin. 
Citizens, strangers, enemies, nations, 

kings, emperors, pity and respect him. 
The assembly being over, each returned 

home. [by a wise king. 

Happy are the people who are governed 
He refused the greatest honors, satisfied 

with having deserved them. 
Entreaties, remonstrances, injunctions, 

are all useless. 
The wind overturns towers, cottages, pa- 
laces, churches. 
Our reputation does not depend on the 

caprice of men, but on the commendable 

actions we perform. 
There are many things which it is of no 

consequence at all to know. 
The eye of the mind reaches much farther 

than the bodily eye. 
What promotes vanity is only vanity. 
All that is confined to this lower world 

disperses and vanishes with the world. 

It is the prerogative of great men to con- 

quer envy ; merit gives it birth and 

merit destroys it. 
Self love is more ingenious than the most 

ingenious man in the world. 
In renouncing the world, we generally 

renounce neither the errors nor giddy 

passions of the world. 



THE END. 



OF VERBS. 1 

Of Verbs. 

1 . A verb is a word which expresses what is affirmed of 
persons, animals, things, etc. 

2. Or, as it is more commonly defined, a verb is a word, or 
that part of speech which signifies to do, to be, or to suffer. 

3. When we say John is polite, we affirm that the quality polite, be- 
longs to John. When we say John is not polite, we also affirm that the 
quality polite, does not belong to John — in both sentences, the word is, 
which expresses that affirmation, is a verb. 

Of the different so?*ts of French Verbs. 

4. There are in French seven sorts of verbs : — the auxiliary 
verb — the active verb — the neuter verb — the passive verb — the 
reflected verb — the reciprocal verb — and the unipersonal, or 
impersonal verb. 

Of Auxiliary Verbs. 

5. A verb is auxiliary when it serves to conjugate some of 
the tenses of other verbs. 

6. In French there are but two auxiliary verbs, Avoir to have, 
and Etre to be. 

7. Avoir, is sometimes an auxiliary verb, and sometimes an irregular 
active verb of the third conjugation. 

8. Avoir to have, is an auxiliary verb whenever it is used to conjugate 
the compound tenses of another verb, as: vous avez parle you have spoken, 
&,c. When auxiliary, it is always followed by the participle past of some 
other verb. 

9. Avoir to have, is an active verb, whenever it is used to indicate the 
possession of any thing — as, vous avez une pomme you have an apple, &c. 

10. Avoir to have, is used as an auxiliary verb — 1st, to all the active 
verbs, and 2d, to upward of six hundred neuter verbs. 

11. Eire to be, is sometimes an auxiliary verb and sometimes an 
irregular neuter verb of the fourth conjugation. It is also called substan- 
tive verb. 

12. Etre to be, is an auxiliary verb, whenever it is used to conjugate 
the compound tenses of another verb — as, je suis frappe I am struck, &,c. 
When auxiliary it is always followed by the participle past of some 
other verb. 

13. Etre to be, is a neuter verb whenever it is used to indicate the 
state of any person or thing — as, je suis ici I am here — cette table est 
ronde this table is round, &c. , 

14. Etre to be, is used as an auxiliary verb — 1st, To a few neuter verbs, 
the list of which may be found in page 160. — 2d, To all the passive verbs — 
and 3d, To all the reflected and reciprocal verbs, although these two last 
kinds of verbs are conjugated with to have in English. 

A 



2 OF ACTIVE, NEUTER, AND PASSIVE VERBS. 

Of Active Verbs. 

15. A verb is active in French when it expresses that an 
agent called nominative, or subject, performs an action on an 
object, or regimen, without the help of a preposition — as, Jean 
frappe Joseph John strikes Joseph, &c. 

Of Neuter Verbs. 

16. A verb is neuter in French — 1st, When it expresses that 
an agent called nominative, or subject, performs an action, that 
either is, or can be directed towards an object or regimen, with 
the help of a preposition — -as, Jean parle a Joseph John speaks 
to Joseph. 2d, When it expresses the state, situation, or man- 
ner of being, or existing, of the nominative or subject — as, 
je dors I sleep — Jean est ici John is here, &c. 

17. Note — The words active and neuter, applied to verbs, do not mean 
that an active verb expresses action, and that a neuter verb expresses 
inaction. For chanter to sing, which is an active verb, does not express 
so much action as courir to run, which is a neuter verb. It means that 
the verbs called active, are those after which une personne a person — -or 
une chose a thing ; can be put as an object or regimen, without a prepo- 
sition — &$,frapper une personne to strike a person — -frapper une chose to 
strike a thing ; whereas the verbs called neuter, are those after which 
une personne a person — or une chose a thing; cannot be put as an object 
or regimen without a preposition, being either expressed or understood — 
as, courir a une personne to run to a person ; in English the preposition is 
often understood — as, to run an hour meaning to run during an hour. Some 
neuter verbs, those that express the state of the nominative, or subject, 
admit of no object or regimen, either with or without a preposition — as, 
je dors I sleep — je suis I am. The best division of verbs, I think, is that 
of Mr. Noah Webster, in his Dictionary, who divides them into transitive 
and intransitive ; but I could not for the French adopt this division, which 
would confuse the pupil, whose French Dictionary would not be on that 
plan. 

Of Passive Verbs. 

18. A verb is passive in French, when it indicates that the 
nominative, or subject, bears the effect of another's action — as, 
Jean fut prappe par Joseph John was struck by Joseph — Jean 
fut tuepar une balle John was killed by a ball. 

19. The passive verbs in French, as in English, are formed with the 
help of the different tenses and persons of the auxiliary verb, Etre to be ; 
to which is joined the participle past, of the verb to be conjugated — as, je 
suis frappe I am struck — il sera vendu it will be sold, &c. 

20. All the French active verbs may be employed in the passive voice, 
except avoir to have. 



OF REFLECTED AND RECIPROCAL VERBS, &C. 3 

21. In French the passive voice of verbs is but very seldom used, we 
generally make use of the active voice ; for instance, instead of saying Jean 
fut frappe par Joseph John was struck by Joseph — we would more readily 
say, Joseph frappa Jean Joseph struck John, &c. 

22. Properly speaking, there are no passive verbs in French; for etre 
frappe to be struck — -je suis frappe I am struck ; is no more a passive verb 
than etre malade to be sick — -je suis malade I am sick, &c. 

Of Reflected Verbs. 

23. A verb is reflected when it expresses an action which 
falls on the nominative, or subject — as, je me flatte I flatter 
myself, &c. 

Of Reciprocal Verbs. 

24. A verb is reciprocal when it expresses that two or more 
nominatives, or subjects act upon each other — as, Jean et Joseph 
Raiment John and Joseph love one another — Jean, Joseph, et 
Paid Raiment John, Joseph, and Paul love each other, &c. 

Of Unipersonal or Impersonal Verbs. 

25. A verb is unipersonal or impersonal when it expresses 
what happens — as, il pleut it rains — il arriva it happened, &c. 

26. They are called by some unipersonal, because they are only used 
in one person ; the third person singular. 

27. They are called by others impersonal, because the acts indicated by 
them, are attributed to no person. 

Division of the Verbs. 

28. The above seven different sorts of verbs, are divided into 
regular, and irregular, perfect, and defective verbs. 

Of Regular Verbs. 

29. Regular Verbs are those whose tenses are conjugated 
in a uniform manner, according to some general standard. 

Of Irregular Verbs. 

30. Irregular Verbs are those which deviate, in the conjuga- 
tion of their tenses, from the general standard, given for the 
conjugation of regular verbs. 

Of Perfect Verbs. 

31. Perfect Verbs have all their moods, tenses, and persons. 

Of Defective Verbs. 

32. Defective Verbs are those which want some of their 
moods, tenses, or persons. 



4 OP MOODS AND TENSES. 

Conjugation of Verbs. 

33. To conjugate a verb, is to write or rehearse it, with all 
its different inflections, through every mood, tense, number, and 
person. 

Of Moods. 

34. Mood, signifies manner. We call moods the different 
manners of using a verb, in order to express the different ways 
in which an action is performed, or suffered. 

35. A verb may be used in French in five different man- 
ners, namely, in an indefinite, positive, conditional, imperative, 
and subordinate manner ; which constitute five moods in verbs, 
called the infinitive mood, the indicative mood, the conditional 
mood, the imperative mood, and the subjunctive mood. 

36. The Infinitive mood, is so-called, because it expresses 
an action in an indefinite manner, without any reference to 
number or person — as, chanter to sing — punir to punish. 

37. The Indicative mood, affirms in a direct, positive, and 
absolute manner, that a thing is or is not, without depending 
on any other word, whatever may be the time to which the 
affirmative relates — as, je connais ces dames I know these 
ladies— j'ai vu ces dames I have seen these ladies— -je ne 
porterai pas ce livre I will not carry this book, &c. 

38. The Conditional mood, denotes that a thing or an action 
would take place, or would have taken place, depending on a 
condition — as,je vous rendrais service si je le pouvais I would 
render you service if I could — je vous aurais rendu service si 
je Vavais pu I would have rendered you service if I had been 
able, &c. 

39. The Imperative mood, is used for either commanding, 
exhorting, entreating, or permitting — as, venez ici come here — 
faites cela do that — permettez-moi de sortir allow me to go 
out, &c. 

40. The Subjunctive mood, represents a person or a thing, 
under a condition, motive, wish, or supposition, and is depen- 
dant on a conjunction — as,je souhaite quHl vienne I wish (that) 
he may come, &c. In English the conjunction is often un- 
derstood. 

Of Tenses. 

41. Tenses indicate whether an action, is doing, has been 
done, or will be done : hence three tenses, the present, the 



NAMES AND NUMBER OF TENSES. 5 

past, and the future. These tenses have been subdivided, to 
mark their difference with accuracy. 

42. The tenses of verbs are divided into simple and com- 
pound. 

43. Simple tenses are those which are conjugated without 
the help of either the auxiliary, Avoir to have, or Etre to be. 

44. Compound tenses, (which have also other names, which 
indicate more clearly their use,) are those which are formed 
with the help of either the auxiliary, Avoir to have, or Etre 
to be ; to which the past participle of the verb to be conjugated, 
is joined. 

Names and Number of Tenses in each Mood. 

45. The Infinitive mood has five tenses ; 
The present, {which is the root of the verb,) 
The past or perfect, (or compound of the present,) 
The participle present or active, 

The compound of the participle present, and 
The participle past or passive. 

46. The Indicative mood has eight tenses ; 
The present, 

The perfect or preterit indefinite, (or compound of the present,) 

The imperfect, 

The pluperfect, (or compound of the imperfect,) 

The preterit definite, 

The preterit anterior, (or compound of the preterit definite,) 

The future absolute, and 

The future anterior, (or compound of the future absolute.) 

47. The Conditional mood has two tenses ; 
The present, and 

The past, (or compound of the present.) 

48. The Imperative mood has but one tense, which is at 
once present and future. Present with respect to the action 
of commanding, and future with respect to the thing enjoined. 

49. The Subjunctive mood has four tenses ; 
The present or future, 

The preterit or past, (or compound of the present,) 
The imperfect, and 

The pluperfect, (or compound of the imperfect.) 
a2 



6 OF NUMBERS AND PERSONS. 

Of Numbers. 

50. Number, is the form which verbs assume, to denote 
their agreement with their nominatives. 

51. There are two numbers in every tense : the singular, 
which is employed when only one thing, or one person is men- 
tioned — as, la maison tombe the house is falling — Joseph parle 
Joseph speaks. And the plural, which is employed when 
more than one thing, or more than one person are mentioned — 
as, les maisons tombent the houses are falling — Joseph et Jean 
parlent Joseph and John speak. 

Of Persons. 

52. Each number has three persons. 

First Person. 

53. The first person is the person who speaks, or the persons 
who speak; it is designated by je I, in the singular — as ?t ;e pense 
I think ; and by nous we, in the plural — as, nous pensons we 
think. 

Second Person. 

54. The second person is the person spoken to, or the per- 
sons spoken to ; it is expressed by tu thou, for the singular — as, 
tu penses thou thinkest ; and by nous you, for the plural — as, 
vous pensez you think. 

55. When in speaking to one person, we wish to be polite and respectful ; 
custom has established in modern languages that the second person plural 
be used instead of the second person singular : thus, for instance, a person 
speaking to Mr. A..., instead of saying tu es ici thou art here — will say 
vous etes ici you are here ; as he would if he was speaking to several 
persons. 

56. When one person only is spoken to, if an adjective comes after the 
verb, that adjective is put in the singular, although, through politeness and 
custom, the verb be in the plural : thus in speaking to Mr. A..., I shall say 
vous etes fort you are strong — whereas in speaking to several persons, the 
adjective will be in the plural ; speaking to Messrs A... and B..., I shall say 
vows etes forts you are strong. 

57. When in addressing ourselves to a person, politeness or respect 
induces us to use a dignifying expression, instead of a personal pronoun 
of the second person, the verb as well as what relates to that expression, 
is put in the third person: for instance, instead of saying Monsieur 
avez-vous eu la bonte de penser a ce que vous wfCavez promis, we say 
Monsieur a-t-il eu la bonte de penser a ce qu'il m'a promis ? Have you 
been so kind, Sir, as to think of what you promised me ? The literal 
translation of the French is : Sir has he had the goodness to think to 
what he has promised me. 



OF THE DIFFERENT WAYS OF CONJUGATING VERBS. 7 

Third Person. 

58. The third person, is the person spoken of or the persons 
spoken of; it is expressed by il he or it ; or elle she or it, for the 
singular, or by any noun in the singular — as, il parle he speaks 
— elle parle she speaks — Vhomme parle man speaks. And by 
Us they — elles they, or any noun in the plural — as, Us parlent 
they speak— elles parlent they speak — les hommes parlent 
men speak. 

Different Ways of Conjugating Verbs. 

59. There are four ways of conjugating verbs : — 1st, Affir- 
matively ; 2d, Negatively ; 3d, Interrogatively ; 4th, Nega- 
tively and Interrogatively* 

First Way. 

60. Affirmatively. When verbs are preceded by their nomi- 
natives or subjects, and used without any negation, they are said 
to be conjugated affirmatively — as^'e parle I speak — tu paries 
thou speakest, &c. 

Second Way. 

61. Negatively. Verbs are conjugated negatively, by placing 
ne immediately after the nominative or subject of the verb ; 
and pas after the verb, in simple tenses — as, je ne parle pas 
I speak not, &c. In compound tenses, ne is placed as in the 
simple tenses, after the nominative or subject of the verb ; 
but pas is placed between the auxiliary and the participle past, 
of the verb — as, je rtai pas parle I have not spoken. Ne and pas 
are generally placed together, before the infinitive present — as, 
ne pas parler not to speak ; however a few writers place ne before 
the infinitive present, and pas after ; ne parler pas not to speak* 

Third Way. 

62. Interrogatively. Verbs are conjugated interrogatively 
in French, by placing the pronoun, which is the nominative 
or subject of the verb, after the verb, in simple tenses ; the 
pronoun must be joined to the verb by a hyphen — as, parle-je 
do I speak — parles~tu dost thou speak — parle-Uil does he 
speak, dec. In compound tenses, the pronoun must be placed 
after the auxiliary, that is, between the auxiliary and the par- 
ticiple past of the verb ; the pronoun must also be joined to 
the auxiliary by a hyphen — as, ai-je parle have I spoken — 
as-tu parle hast thou spoken — a-t-il parle has he spoken, &c. 

2C 



OF THE DIFFERENT WAYS OF CONJUGATING VERBS* 

63. When a noun instead of a personal pronoun is the nomi- 
native of the verb, in the interrogative sentence, this noun, 
subject of the question, is placed before the verb ; and either of 
the pronouns il, elle, Us, or elles, according to the gender and 
number of the noun, is added and placed after the verb in 
simple tenses, joined to it by a hyphen ; and in compound 
tenses, after the auxiliary, joined to it by a hyphen. 

Example in Simple Tenses. 
Monfr&e sait-il ? My brother knows he ? 

Meaning Does my brother know ? 

Example in Compound Tenses. 

Mesfreres avaient-ils chante ? My brothers had they sung ? 
Meaning Had my brothers sung ? 

Observations. 

64. 1st, The first person of the present of the indicative mood, ending 
with e mute, (see page 44 ,) in all the verbs of the first conjugation, and 
in about fifteen of the irregular verbs of the second, we are obliged, 
to avoid a disagreeable sound, to put an acute accent on the e mute, when 
used interrogatively — as, je parle I speak — parle-je do I speak — fouvre 

1 open — ouvre-je do I open, &c. 

65. 2d, When the first person singular of the present of the indicative, 
of any verb, has only one syllable, we cannot use it interrogatively; thus, 
we cannot say, vends-je do I sell — prends-je do I take, &c. We have 
recourse to a different expression, we say, est-ce que je vends do I sell — 
est-ce que je prends do I take, &c. The only exceptions that custom 
authorises — &re,fais-je do I do — dis-je do I say — dois-je do I owe — vois-je 
do I see — ai-je have I — and vais-je do I go. 

66. 3d, When the third person singular of any tense, ends with e or a, 
we are obliged, to avoid a disagreeable sound, to put a t between two 
hyphens : thus, -£-, between the verb and the pronoun, il or elle — as, a-t-il 
has he — a-Uelle has she — parle-t-il does he speak — parle-t-elle does she 
speak, &c. 

67. 4th, The imperative mood, and the subjunctive mood, cannot be 
used interrogatively ; we however, can say, in the present of the subjunc- 
tive, puisse-je may I ; and in the imperfect of the subjunctive, dusse-je 
were I obliged to. 

Fourth Way. 

68. Negatively and Interrogatively. Verbs are conjugated 
negatively and interrogatively, in French, by placing in simple 
tenses ne before the verb, the subject or nominative pronoun, 
after the verb, joined to it by a hyphen, and pas after the 
pronoun — as, ne parle-je pas ? do I not speak ? &c. And in 
compound tenses, by placing ne before the verb, the subject or 
nominative pronoun, after the auxiliary ; and pas after the pro- 
noun ; then comes the participle past of the verb, to be conjuga- 
ted, which comes last, rfai-je pas parle ? have I not spoken 1 &c 



OF THE CONJUGATION OF THE AUXILIARY VERBS. 

69. When a noun instead of a personal pronoun, is the nomi- 
native of the verb, in a sentence both negative and interroga- 
tive, this noun, subject of the question, is placed before the 
verb, and either of the pronouns, il, elle, Us, or elles, is added, 
and placed after the verb in simple tenses, joined to it by a 
hyphen ; and in compound tenses, after the auxiliary, joined 
to it by a hyphen. 

Example in Simple Tenses. 

Ma sceur ne sait-elle pas ? My sister knows she not ? 

Meaning Does not my sister know ? 

Example in Compound Tenses. 

MCS lYante ! ? aVaient ' eUeS ^ \ M ? sisters had the y not sun ^ 
Meaning Had not my sisters sung ? 

70. The four observations made with regard to the conjugation of verbs 
interrogatively, apply also to verbs conjugated both negatively and inter- 
rogatively. 

Conjugation of the Auxiliary Verbs. 

71. The auxiliary verbs avoir to have, and etre to be, being 
used in the formation of the compound tenses of all the other 
verbs, it will be proper to begin by their conjugation. 

72. Avoir to have, is employed as an auxiliary, to conjugate 
its own compound tenses — so that any compound tenses of 
avoir to have, is one of its simple tenses, to which the participle 
past has been added ; thus the preterit indefinite, (or compound 
of the present,) is formed with the present indicative, fai I have, 
to which the participle past, eu had, is added — -fai eu I have 
had — tu as eu thou hast had, &c; and so on of the other com- 
pound tenses. 

73. The compound tenses of etre to be, are formed with the 
help of avoir to have, so that any compound tense of etre to be, 
is composed of a simple tense of avoir to have, to which the 
participle past of etre to be, is added; thus the preterit indefi- 
nite, (or compound of the present,) is formed with the present 
indicative, fai I have, of avoir to have, to which the participle 
past, ete been, of etre to be, is added ; fai ete I have been — 
tu as ete thou hast been, &c; and so on, of the other compound 
tenses. 

74. Observe that the terminations of the imperfects, and of the con- 
ditionals, which are now generally spelt «is, ais, ait, aient, in all verbs, 
were formerly, and are still now, by a few writers, spelt ois, ois, oit, oient. 
Both ways are pronounced alike, but the new spelling is nearer the pro- 
aunciation than the old one. 



10 



AVOIR 



to have. 



x amu ane. te. ecrit. mere. etre. idole. g£te % opera, oter. tout, youte. 
2 at. arm. tub. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over, too, fool. 

tCQNJUGATION OF THE AUXILIARY VERB. 

Avoir to have. {Affirmatively. ) 



-A- 

avoir 



avoir en 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

to have 

PAST Or PERFECT, 
or compound of the present, 
to have had 

-C- PARTICIPLE PRESENT Or ACTIVE. 

ay ant having 

-D- COMPOUND OF THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 

ayant eu having had 

-E- PARTICIPLE PAST Or PERFECT ©r PASSIVE. 

eu, m. s, eue,/. s. eus, m.p. eues,/. p. had 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 



a voi ra 
e yan 
e yan tu 
u 



-F- 


PRESENT. 




J'ai 


I have 


je* 


tu as 


thou hast 


tu a 


il a 


he has 


i la 


nous avons 


we have 


nou za von 


vous avez 


you have 


vou za v£ 


ils ont 


they have 


il zon 


-G- PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 






or compound of the present. 




J'ai eu 


I have had 


je u 


tu as eu 


thou hast had 


tua zu 


il a eu 


he has had 


i la u 


nous avons eu 


we have had 


nou za von zu 


vous avez eu 


you have had 


vou za ve" zu 


ils ont eu 


they have had; 


il zon tu 


-H- 


IMPERFECT. 




J'avais 


1 had 


jave 


tu avais 


thou hadst 


tu a ve 


il avait 


he had 


ila ve 


nous avions 


we had 


nou za vi on 


vous aviez 


you had 


vou za vi e 


ils avaient 


they had 


il za v$ 


-i- 


PLUPERFECT, 
or compound of the imperfect. 




J'avais eu 


I had had 


ja ve zu 


tu avais eu 


thou hadst had 


tu a ve zu 


il avait eu 


he had had 


i la ve tu 


nous avions eu 


we had had 


nou za vi on ztt 


vous aviez eu 


you had had 


vou za vi e* zu 


ils avaient eu 


they had had 
t,See page 1, arU 7. 


il za ve tu 



AVOIR 



to h 



li 



3 mwr. mtir. jeune. j>tine. boite. boile. ancie, tngrat. onde. un, amcx. 
4 j, as s in plea jure, gn, as ni in union. ill, as /it, in Wi Mi ana* 



-J- 


PRETERIT 1 - 




rai 


I had 




tu eus 


thou hadst 


tu u 


ileut 


he had 


ilu 


nous eumes 


we had 


nou zum 


vous eutes 


you had 


VOU lUt 


ils eurent 


they had 


il rur 


-K- 


PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 




07 


itrnjitmni of tkt pr 




J'eus eu 


I had had 


ju 


• . 


thou hadst had 


tu u zu 


1 eu 


he had had 


ilu tu 


nous eumes eu we had had 


nou zum zu 


vous eutes eu 


you had had 


vou zut zu 


ils eurent eu 


they had had 


il no 


-L- 


FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 




J'aurai 


/ shall or uri 11 hate \ 




tu auras 


thou shall or wilt hate 


ri 


iI ajun 


he shall or will hate 


i lo ra 


nous aurons 


tee shall or trill hate 


M ron 


vous aurez 


you shall or trill hawe 




ils auront 


they shall or trill hate 


il zo ron 



-M- * FUTURE ANTERIOR, 

or c ompound of the future 

J'aurai eu I shall or trill hate had jo re* u 

tu auras eu thou shalt or \cilt hate had tu o ra zu 

il aura eu he shall or trill hate had i lo ra u 

nous aurons eu we shall or trill hate had nou zo ron zu 

vous aurez eu you shall or will hate had vou zo re x» 

ils auront eu they shall or trill haze had il zo ron tu 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 



J-aurais 



tu aurais 



il aurait 



nous iunons 



vous auriez 



ils auraient 



PRE5I 

/ should, would, could. 

or might hate 

thou shouldst, wouldst, 

couldst. or mightst hate 
he should, would, could, 
or might hate 
tee should, would* could, 
or might hate 
you should, would* could* 
or might hate 
they should* would, could, 
or mish: 
% c % 



: It 

tnore 

l ri on 
tou zo ri e 
ilzo re 



12 



AVOIR 



to have. 



l an\L one. te. ecrit. mere. e'tre. zdole. gfte. opera, dter. towt. voute. 
2 at. arm. tab. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 



J'aurais eu, 
or feusse eu 
tu aurais eu, 
or tu eusses eu 
il aurait eu, 
or il eut eu 
nous aurions eu, 
or nous eussions eu 
vous auriez eu, 
or vous eussiez eu 
ils auraient eu, 
or ils eussent eu 



aie 
qu'il ait 
ayons 
ayez 
qu'ils aient 



-ct- 

Que j'aie 
que tu aies 
qu'il ait 
que nous ayons 
que vous ayez 
qu'ils aient 



PAST, 
or compound of the present. 

I should, would, could r 

or might have had 
thou shouldst, wouldst, 
couldst, or mightsl have had 
he should, would, could, 

or might have had 
we should, would, could, 

or might have had 
you should, would, could r 

or might have had 
they should, would, could, 
or might have had 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

have (thou) 
let him have 
let us have 
have (you) 
let them have 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD, 

PRESENT. 

that I may have 
that thou mayst have 
that he may have 
that we may have 
that you may have 
that they may have 



Que j'aie eu 
que tu aies eu 
qu'il ait eu 
que nous ayons eu 
que vous ayez eu 
qu'ils aient eu 

-S- IMPERFECT 



PRETERIT Or PAST, 
or compound of the present. 

that I may have had 
that thou mayst have had 
that he may have had 
that we may have had 
that you may have had 
that they may have had 



Que j'eusse 
que tu eusses 
qu'il eut 

que nous eussions 
que vous eussiez 
qu'ils eussent 



that I might have 
that thou mightst have 
that he might have 
that we might have 
that you might have 
that they might have 



Que j'eusse eu 
que tu eusses eu 
qu'il eut eu 
que nous eussions eu 
que vous eussiez eu 
qu'ils eussent eu 



PLUPERFECT, 

or compound of the imperfect. 



that I might have had 
that thou mightst have had 
that he might have had 
that we might have had 
that you might have had 
that they might have had 



jo re zu 
jus u 
tu o re zu 
tu us zu 
i lo re tu 
i lu tu 

nou zo ri on zu 
nou zu si on zu 
vou zo ri e* zu 
vou zu si 6 zu 
il zo re tu 
il zus tu 



kite 

£yon 
e ye 
kilzS 



keje 

ke tu e 

kile 

ke nou ze* yon 

ke vou ze* ye 

kilze 



ke je u 

ke tu e zu 

ki le tu 

ke nou ze yon zu 

ke vou ze ye zu 

kil ze tu 

ke jus 

ke tu us 

kilu 

ke nou zu si on 

ke vou zu si € 

kil zus 



ke jus u 

ke tu us zu 

ki lu tu 

ke nou zu si on zu 

ke vou zu si 4 zu 

kil zus tu 



AVOIR 



to have 



13 



3 mwr. mwr. jeime. jewne. boite. bozte. ancre. ingrat. onde. un. amex. 
4 j, as s in pleasure, gn, as ni in union, ill, as Hi, in WW/iam. 

CONJUGATION OF THE AUXILIARY VERB. 

Avoir to have (Negatively.) 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 



PRESENT. 

not to have 



-A- 

ne pas avoir 

-B- PAST Or PERFECT, 

or compound of the present. 

n'avoir pas eu not to have had 

-C- PARTICIPLE PRESENT OT ACTIVE. 

n'ayant pas not having 

-D- COMPOUND OF THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 

n'ayant pas eu having not had 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 



ne pa za voir 

na voir pa zu 
ne* yan pa 
ne" yan pa zu 



Je n'ai pas 
tu n'as pas 
il n'a pas 
nous n'avons pas 
vous n'avez pas 
ils n'ont pas 



I have not 
thou hast not 
he has not 
we have not 
you have not 
they have not 



PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 

or compound of the present. 



Je n'ai pas eu 
tu n'as pas eu 
il n'a pas eu 
nous n'avons pas eu 
vous n'avez pas eu 
ils n'ont pas eu 



I have not had 
thou hast not had 
he has not had 
we have not had 
you have not had 
they have not had 



IMPERFECT. 



Je n'avais pas 
tu n'avais pas 
il n'avait pas 
nous n'avions pas 
vous n'aviez pas 
ils n'avaient pas 



J had not 
thou hadst not 
he had not 
we had not 
you had not 
they had not 



Je n'avais pas eu 
tu n'avais pas eu 
il n'avait pas eu 
nous n'avions pas eu 
vous n'aviez pas eu 
ils n'avaient pas eu 



PLUPERFECT, 
or compound of the imperfect. 



I had not had 
thou hadst not had 
he had not had 
we had not had 
you had not had 
they had not had 

B 



je ne* pa 
tu na pa 
il na pa 
nou na von pa 
vou na ve pa 
il non pa 



je ne* pa zu 
tu na pa zu 
il na pa zu 
nou na von pa zu 
vou na ve" pa zu 
il non pa zu 



je na ve pa 
tu na ve pa 
il na ve pa 
nou na vi on p& 
vou na vi e pa 
il na ve pa 



je na ve pa zu 
tu na ve pa zu 
il na ve pa zu 
nounavionpazu 
vou navi e pazu 
il na ve pa zu 



14 



AVOIR 



to have. 



l ami. dne. te. ecrit. mere. etre. z'dole. gite % opera, dter. tout, voute. 
2 at. arm. tub. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over, too, fool. 



Je n'eus pas 
tu n'eus pas 
il n'eut pas 
nous n'eumes pas 
vous n'eutes pas 
ils n'eurentpas 



PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

/ had not 
thou hadst not 
he had not 
we had not 
you had not 
they had not 



je nu pa 
tu nu pa 
il nu pa 
nou num pa 
vou nut paj 
il nur pa 



Je n'eus pas eu 
tu n'eus pas eu 
il n'eut pas eu 
nous n'eumes pas eu 
vous n'eutes pas eu 
ils n'eurent pas eu 



PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the preterit. 

I had not had 
thou hadst not had 
he had not had 
we had not had 
you had not had 
they had not had 



Je n'aurai pas 
tu n'auras pas 
il n'aura pas 
nous n'aurons pas 
vous n'aurez pas 
ils n'auront pas 



FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

J shall or will not have 
thou shalt or wilt not have 
he shall or will not have 
we shall or will not have 
you shall or will not have 
they shall or will not have 



je nu pa zu 
tu nu pa zu 
il nu pa zu 
nou num pa zu 
vou nut pa zu 
il nur pa zu 



je no re pa 
tu no ra pa 
il no ra pa 
nou no ron pa 
vou no re pa 
il no ron pa 






Je n'aurai pas eu 
tu n'auras pas eu 
il n'aura pas eu 
nous n'aurons pas eu 
vous n'aurez pas eu 
ils n'auront pas eu 



FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the future. 

I shall or will not have had je no re* pa zu 

thou shalt or wilt not have had tu no ra pa zu 

he shall or will not have had il no ra pa zu 

we shall or will not have had nou no ron pa zu 

you shall or will not have had vou no re pa zu 

they shall or will not have had il no ron pa zu 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 



Je n'aurais pas 
tu n'aurais pas 
il n'aurait pas 
nous n'aurions pas 
vous n'auriez pas 
ils n'auraient pas 



/ should, would, could, 
or might not have 
thou shouldst, wouldst, 

couldst, or mightst not have 
he should, would, could, 

or might not have 
we should, would, could, 

or might not have 
you should, would, could, 

or might not have 
they should, would, could, 
or might not have 



je no re pa 
tu no re pa 
il no re pa 
nou no ri on pa 
vou no ri 6 pa 
il no re pa 



AVOIR 



to have. 



15 



*mwr. mvx. jewne. jeune. boite. boite. cmcre, ingrat. onde. un, ameN. 
4 j, as $ in pleasure, gn, as ni in union. i/Z, as Hi, in Wi/Ziam 

-o- PAST, 

or compound of the present. 
Je n'aurais pas eu, I should, would, could, je no re pa zu 

orje rteussepas eu or might not have had je nus pa zu 

tu n'aurais pas eu, thou shouldst, wouldst, couldst, tu no re pa zu 
or tu n'eusses pas eu or mightst not have had tu nus pa zu 

il n'aurait pas eu, he should, would, could, 

or il n'eut pas eu or might not have had 

nous n'aurions pas eu, we should, would, could, 
or nous n'eussions pas eu or might not have had 
vous n'auriez pas eu, you should, would, could, 
or vous n'eussiez pas eu or might not have had 
ils n'auraient pas eu, they should, would could, 
or might not have had 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

have not (thou) ne pa 

let him not have kil ne pa 

let us not have ne yon pa 

have not (jyou) ne ye" pa 

let them not have kil ne pa 



or Us n'eussent pas eu 

-p- 

n'aie pas 
qu'il n'ait pas 
n'ayons pas 
n'ayez pas 

qu'ils n'aient pas 



il no re pa zu 
il nu pa zu 
nou no ri on pa zu 
nou nu si on pa zu 
vou no ri e* pa zu 
vou nu si e pa zu 
il no re pa zu 
il nus pa zu 



Que je n'aie pas 
que tu n'aies pas 
qu'il n'ait pas 
que nous n'ayons pas 
que vous n'ayez pas 
qu'ils n'aient pas 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. 



that I may 
that thou mayst 
that he may 
that we may 
that you may 
that they may 



kej ne pa 
3 ke tu ne pa 
**■ kil ne pa 
' |T ke nou n6 yon pa 
oS ke vou ne ye* pa 

kil ne pa 



PRETERIT Or PAST, 
or compound of the present^ 



that I may 
that thou mayst 
that he may 
that we may 
that you may 
that they may 



Que je n'aie pas eu 
que tu n'aies pas eu 
qu'il n'ait pas eu 
que nous n'ayons pas eu 
que vous n'ayez pas eu 
qu'ils n'aient pas eu 

•S- IMPERFECT. 

Que je n'eusse pas that I might 

que tu n'eusses pas 

qu'il n'eut pas 

que nous n'eussions pas 

que vous n'eussiez pas 

qu'ils n'eussent pas 

-T- PLUPERFECT, 

or compound of the imperfect. 
Que je n'eusse pas eu that I might 

que tu n'eusses pas eu that thoumightst 
qu'il n'eiit pas eu that he might 

que nous n'eussions pas eu that we might 
que vous n'eussiez pas eu that you might 
qu'ils n'eussent pas eu that they might 






that thou mightst J 
that he might I 
that we might [ 
that you might 
that they might J 



vj kej ne pa zu 
S. ke tu ne pa zu 
>* kil ne pa zu 

ke nou ne yon pa zu 
g" ke vou ne ye p£ zu 
a- kil ne pa zu 

kej nus pa 
3 ke tu nus pa 
S. kilnupa 
§" ke nou nu si on p& 
OS ke vou nu si 6 pa 

kil nus pa 



s kej nus pa zu 

S. ke tu nus pa zu 

g" kil nu pa zu 

^ ke nou nu si on p& zu 

>* ke vou nu si 6 pa zu 

ft kil nus pa zu 



16 



AVOIR 



to have. 



"ami. ane. te. ecrit. mere. etre. i&ole. gzte. opera, dter. tout, vouto. 
2 at. arm. tub. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 

CONJUGATION OF THE AUXILIARY VERB. 

Avoir to have. {Interrogatively.) 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



-F- 


PRESENT. 


Ai-je 


have I 


as-tu 


hast thou 


a-t-il 


has he 


avons-nous 


have we 


avez-vous 


have you 


ont-ils 


have they 



a tu 
a til 

a von nou 
a ve vou 
on til 



-G- PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 

or compound of the present. 

Ai-je eu have I had ej u 

as-tu eu hast thou had a tu u 

a-t-il eu has he had a til u 

avons-nous eu have we had a von nou zu 

avez-vous eu have you had a ve* vou zu 

ont-ils eu have they had on til zu 



-H- 


IMPERFECT. 




Avais-je 


had I 


avej 


avais-tu 


hadst thou 


a ve tu 


avait-il 


had he 


a ve til 


avions-nous 


had we 


a vi on nou 


aviez-vous 


had you 


a vi e vou 


avaient-ils 


had they 


a ve til 


-i- 


PLUPERFECT, 




4 or 


1 compound of the imperfect. 




Avais-je eu 


had I had 


a vej u 


avais-tu eu 


hadst thou had 


a ve tu u 


avait-il eu 


had he had 


a ve til u 


avions-nous eu 


had we had 


a vi on nou zu 


aviez-vous eu 


had you had 


a vi 6 vou zu 


avaient-ils eu 


had they had 


a ve til zu 


-j- 


PRETERIT DEFINITE. 




Eus-je 


had I 


U J 


eus-tu 


hadst thou 


u tu 


eut-il 


had he 


util 


eumes-nous 


had we 


um nou 


eutes-vous 


had you 


ut vou 


eurent-ils 


had they 


ur til 



AVOIR 



to have 



17 



3 mwr. mwr. jeime, 


. jewne. boite. bozte. ancre. mgrat. onde. un. ameN. 


4 j, as 5 in pleasure, gn, as ni in umon. ill, 


as Hi, in Wii/um, 


-K- 


PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the preterit. 




Eus-je eu 


had I had 


uj u 


eus-tu eu 


hadst thou had 


u tu u 


eut-il eu 


had he had 


u ti lu 


eumes-nous eu 


had we had 


um nou zu 


eutes-vous eu 


had you had 


ut vou zu 


eurent-ils eu 


had they had 


ur til zu 


-L- 


FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 




Aurai-je 


shall or will I have 


orej 


auras-tu 


shall or wilt thou have 


o ra. tu 


aura-t-il 


shall or will he have 


o ra til 


aurons-nous 


shall or will we have 


o ron nou 


aurez-vous 


shall or will you have 


o re" vou 


auront-ils 


shall or will they have 


o ron til 


-M- 


FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the future. 




Aurai-je eu 


shall or will I have had 


o rej u 


auras-tu eu 


shall or wilt thou have had 


o ra tu u 


aura-t-il eu 


shall or will he have had 


o ra til u 


aurons-nous eu 


shall or will we have had 


o ron nou zi| 


aurez-vous eu 


shall or will you have had 


o re vou zu 


auront-ils eu 


shall or will they have had 
CONDITIONAL MOOD. 


o ron til zu 


-N- 


PRESENT. 




Aurais-je 


should, would, could, 
or might I have 


orej 


aurais-tu 


shouldst, wouldst, couldst, 
or mightst thou have 


ore tu 


aurait-il 


should, would, could, 
or might he have 


o re til 


aurions-nous 


should, would, could, 
or might we have 


o ri on nou 






auriez-vous 


should, would, could, 
or might you have 


o ri e vou 


auraient-ils 


should, would, could, 

or might they have 


o re til 


-0- 


PAST, 




or compound of the present. 




Aurais-je eu, 


should, would, could, 


o r8j u 


or eusse-je eu 


or might I have had 


u sej u 


aurais-tu eu, 


shouldst, wouldst, couldst, 


o re tu u 


or eusses-tu eu 


or mightst thou have had 


us tu u 


aurait-il eu, 


should, would, could, 


o re til eu 


or eut-il eu 


or might he have had 


u ti lu 


aurions-nous eu, 


should, would, could, 


o ri on nou zu 


or eussions-nous eu or might we have had 


u si on nou zu 


auriez-vous eu, 


should, would, could, 


o ri e vou zu 


or eussiez-vous eu 


or might you have had 


u si e vou zu 


auraient-ils eu, 


should, would, could, 


o re til zu 


or eussent-ils eu 
b2 


or might they have had 


us til zu 



18 



AVOIR 



to have. 



'ami. ane. te. ecrit. mere. etre. tdole. gite, opera, oter. tout, vowte. 
7 at. arm. twb. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 

CONJUGATION OF THE AUXILIARY VERB. 

Avoir to have (Negatively and Interrogatively.) 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



N'ai-je pas 
n'as-tu pas 
n'a-t-il pas 
n'avons-nous pas 
n'avez-vous pas 
n'ont-ils pas 



PRESENT. 



have I not 
hast thou not 
has he not 
have we not 
have you not 
have they not 



nejpa 
na tu pa 
na til pa 
na von nou ] 
na ve voup 
non til pa 



PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 
or compound of the present. 



N'ai-je pas eu 
n'as-tu pas eu 
n'a-t-il pas eu 
n'avons-nous pas eu 
n'avez-vous pas eu 
n'ont-ils pas eu 



have I not had 
hast thou not had 
has he not had 
have we not had 
have you not had 
have they not had 



nej pa zu 
na tu pa zu 
na til pa zu 
na von nou pa. zu 
na ve* vou pa zu 
non til pa zu 



N'avais-je pas 
n'avais-lu pas 
n'avait-il pas 
n'avions-nous pas 
n'aviez-vous pas 
n'avaient-ils pas 



IMPERFECT. 

had I not 
hadst thou not 
had he not 
had we not 
had you not 
had they not 



na vej pa 
na ve tu pa 
na ve til pa 
na vi on nou pa 
na vi 6 vou pa 
na ve til pa 



PLUPERFECT, 
or compound of the imperfect* 



N'avais-je pas eu 
n'avais-tu pas eu 
n'avait-il pas eu 
n'avions-nous pas eu 
n'aviez-vous pas eu 
n'avaient-ils pas eu 



had I not had 
hadst thou not had 
had he not had 
had we not had 
had you not had 
had they not had 



na v£j pa zu 
na ve* tu pa zu 
na ve til pa zu 
navionnoupazu 
na vi 6 vou pa zu 
na ve til pa zu 



N'eus-je pas 
n'eus-tu pas 
n'eut-il pas 
n'eumes-nous pas 
n'eutes-vous pas 
n'eurent-ils pas 



PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

had I not 
hadst thou not 
had he not 
had we not 
had you not 
had they not 



nuj pa 
nu tu pa 
nu til pa 
num nou pa 
nut vou pa 
nur til pa 









AVOIR 



to have. 



21 



hnur. ra«r. jeune. jeioie. boite. boitc. ancie, zngrat. onde. un, amt. ftNi 
4 j, as 5 in pleasure, gn, as ni in union. t#, as Hi, in WiZZi am. 



PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 

or compound of the preterit. 



N'eus-je pas eu 
n'eus-tu pas eu 
n'eut-il pas eu 
n'eumes-nous pas eu 
n'eutes-vous pas eu 
n'eurent-ils pas eu 

-L- 

N'aurai-je pas 
n'auras-tu pas 
n'aura-t-il pas 
n'aurons-nous pas 
n'aurez-vous pas 
n'auront-ils pas 

-M- 



h.ad I not had 
hadst thou not had 
had he not had 
had we not had 
had you not had 
had they not had 

FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

shall or will I not have 
shalt or wilt thou not have 
shall or will he not have 
shall or will we not have 
shall or will you not have 
shall or will they not have 

FUTURE ANTERIOR, 



nuj pa zu 
nu tu pa zu 
nu til pa zu 
num nou pa zu 
nut vou pa zu 
nur til pa zu 

no rej pa 
no ra tu pa 
no ra til pa 
no ron nou pa 
no re vou pa 
no ron til pa 



or compound of the future. 
N'aurai-je pas eu shall or will I not have had 

shalt or wilt thou not have had 
shall or will he not have had 
shall or will we not have had 
shall or will you not have had 
shall or will they not have had 



n'auras-tu pas eu 
n'aura-t-il pas eu 
n'aurons-nous pas eu 
n'aurez-vous pas eu 
n'auront-ils pas eu 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

should, would, could, 
or might I not have 
shouldst, wouldst, couldst, 
or mightst thou not have 
should, would, could, 

or might he not have 
should, would, could, 

or might we not have 
should, would, could, 

or might you not have 
should, would, could, 

or might they not have 

PAST, 
or compound of the present. 
'aurais-je pas eu, should, would, could, 

or might I not have had 
shouldst, wouldst, couldst, 

or mightst thou not have had 
should, would, could, 
or might he not have had 
n'aunons-nous pas eu, should, would, could, 
or n'eus: ions-nous pas eu or might we not have had 
n'auriez-v ous pas eu, should, would, could, 
or wwmez-vous pas eu or might you not have had 
n'auraient-ils pas eu, should, would could, 
or ri*eusscnt~ils pas eu or might they not have had 

2D 



N'aurais-je pas 
n'aurais-tu pas 
n'aurait-il pas 
n'aurions-nous pas 
n'auriez-vous pas 
n'auraient-ils pas 



er n'eusse-jepas eu 
n aurais-tu pas eu, 
or n'eusses-tupas eu 
n'aurait-il pas eu, 

or n ut-il pas e> 



no rej pa zu 
no ra tu pa zu 
no ra til pa zu 
no ron nou pa zu 
no re vou pa zu 
no ron til pa zu 



no rej pa 
no re tu pa. 
no re til pa 
no ri on nou pa 
no ri e vou pa 
no re til pa 



no rej pa zu 
nu sej pa zu 
no re tu pa zu 
nus tu pa zu 
no re til pa zu 
nu til pa zu 
no ri on nou pa zu 
nu si on nou pa zu 
no ri e vou pa zu 
nu ? A e vou pa zu 
no re til pa zu 
nus til pa zu 



18 



Y AVOIR 



there to be. 



x om\ai. ane. te. ecrit. mere. etre. zdole. gzte. opera, oter. tout, youte. 
* (2 at. arm. tuh. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 



CONJUGATION OF THE UNIPERSONAL VERB. 
Y avoir there to be (Affirmatively.) 



-A- 

Y avoir 

-B- 

Y avoir eu 
-c- 

Y ayant 

-D- 

Y ayant eu 



-F- 

II y a 

-G- 

II y a eu 

-H- 

II y avait 
-i- 



II y avait eu 

-ir- 

II y eut 

-K- 

II y eut eu 

-L- 

II y aura 
-•Bi- 
ll y aura eu 

-Pi- 
ll y aurait 
-o- 

II y aurait eu 

-a- 
Qu'il y ait 

-R- 



Qu'it y ait eu 

-s- 

Qu'il y eut 

-T- 



INFIN1TIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

there to be 

PAST Or PERFECT, 
or compound of the present. 

there to have been 

PARTICIPLE PRESENT Or ACTIVE. 

there being 

COMPOUND OF THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 

there having been 
INDICATIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

there is or there are 

PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 
or compound of the present. 

there has been or there have been 

IMPERFECT, 

there was or there were 

PLUPERFECT, 
or compound of the imperfect, 
there had been 

PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

there was or there were 

PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the preterit. 

there had been 

FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

there will be 

FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the future, 
there will have been 
CONDITIONAL MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

there would be 

PAST, 
or compound of the present. 

there would have been 
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

that there may be 

PRETERIT Or PAST, 
or compound of the present, 
that there may have been 

IMPERFECT. 

that there might be 

PLUPERFECT, 



l a voir 

i a voi ru 
i eyan 
i e yan tu 

il ya 



il ya u 


il ya ve 


il ya ve tu 


ilyu 


il yu tu 


il yo ra 


il yo ra u 


il yo re 


il yo re tu 


kil ye 


kil ye tu 


kil yu 



n or compound of the imperfect. 

Qu'il y eut eu that there might have been 



kil yu tu 



Y AVOIR 



there to be 



21 



3 mur. mwr. jeune. jeune. bo/te. boiie. ancre. iwgrat. onde. un. ameN. 
4 j, as s in pleasure, gn, as ni in rim oh. i% as Hi, in WW/iam. 

CONJUGATION OF THE UN1PERSONAL VERB. 

Y avoir there to be (Negatively,) 



-A- 

Ne pas y avoir 
-fi- 



ll n'y a pas eu 

-H- 

II n'y avait pas 
-i- 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

not there to be 

PAST Or PERFECT, 

or compound of the present. 

Ne pas y avoir eu not there to have been 

-C- PARTICIPLE PRESENT Or ACTIVE, 

N'y ay ant pas there not being 

-D- COMPOUND OF THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT 

N'y ayant pas eu there not having been 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

-F- PRESENT. 

II n'y a pas there is not or tlierc art not 

-G- PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 

or compound of the present. 

there has not been 

or there have not been 

IMPERFECT. 

there was not or there were not 

PLUPERFECT, 
or compound of the imperfect. 
II n'y avait pas eu there had not been 

-J- PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

II ny eut pas there was not or there were not 

-K- PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 

or compound of the preterit. 

II n'y eut pas eu there had not been 

-L- FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

II n'y aura pas there will not be 

-M- FUTURE ANTERIOR, 

or compound of the future. 

11 n'y aura pas eu there will not have been 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 

-N- PRESENT. 

II n'y aurait pas there would not be 

-o- PAST, 

or compound, of the present. 
II n'y aurait pas eu there would not have been 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

-Q- PRESENT. 

Qu'il n'y ait pas that there may not be 

-R- PRETERIT Or PAST, 

or compound of the present, 

Qu'il n'y ait pas eu that there may not have been 

-S- IMPERFECT. 

Qu'il n'y eut pas that there might not be 

-T- PLUPERFECT, 

or compound of the imperfect. 

Qu'il n'y eut pas eu that there might not have been 



ne pa zi a voir 

ne pa. zi a voi ru 
ni e yan pa. 
ni e yan pa. zu 

il gna pa 

il gna pa zu 
il gna ve pa. 

il gna ve pa zu 
il gnu pa 

il gnu pa zu 
il gno ra pa. 

il gno ra pa. zu 

il gno re pa. 

il gno re pa zu 

kil gne pa 

kil gne pa zu 
kil gnu pa 

kil gnu pa zu 



22 y avoir there to be. 

'ami. «ne. te. ^crit. mere. etre. idole. gite. opera, oter. tout, vowte. 
2 at. arm. t?.tb. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 

CONJUGATION OF THE UNIPERSONAL VERB. 

Y avoir there to he (Interrogatively.) 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 

-F- PRESENT. 

Y a-t-il is there or are there ya til 

-G- PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 

or compound of the present. 

Y a-t-il eu has there been or have there been ya ti lu 

-H- IMPERFECT. 

Y avait-ii was there or were there ya ve til 

-I- PLUPERFECT, 

or compound of the imperfect. 



Y avait-il eu 


had there been 


ya ve ti lu 


-j- 


PRETERIT DEFINITE. 




Y eut-il 


was there or were there 


yu til 


-K- 


PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 






or compound of the preterit. 




Y eut-ii eu 


had there been 


yu ti lu 


-L- 


FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 




Y aura-t-il 


will there be 


yo ra til 



FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the future. 

Y aura-t-il eu will there have been yo ra ti lu 
CONDITIONAL MOOD. 

-N- PRESENT. 

Y aurait-il would there be yo re til 

-o- PAST, 

or compound of the present. 

Y aurait-il eu would there have been yo rd ti lu 



y avoir there to be 23 



3 mwr. mux. jewne. jeiaie. boite. bo/?te. ancve. ingrat. onde. un. amex. 
4 j, as s in pleasure, gn, as ni in union. 2//, as Ki, in Wi/Ztam. 

CONJUGATION OF THE UNIPERSONAL VERB. 

Y avoir there to be (Negatively and Interrogatively.) 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 

-F- PRESENT. 

N'j a-t-il pas is (here not or are there not gna til pa 

-G- PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 

or compound of the present. 

Ny a-t-il pas eu has there not been gna til pa zu 

or have there not been 

-H- IMPERFECT. 

X y avait-il pas was //iere not or z^ere f^ce hoi yna ve til pa 

-I- PLUPERFECT, 

or compound of the imperfect. 

Ny avait-il pas eu had there not been gna ve til pa zu 

-J- PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

N'y eut-il pas icas therenot or were there not gnu til pa 

•K- PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 

or compound of the preterit. 

NY eut-il pas eu had there not been gnu til pa zu 

-L- FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

N'y aura-t-il pas will there not be gno ra til pa. 

-M- _ FUTURE ANTERIOR, 

or compound of the future. 

N'y aura-t-il pas eu will there not have been gno ra til pa zu 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 

-N- PRESENT. 

N'y aurait-il pas would there not be gno re til pa 

-o- PAST, 

or compound of the present. 

N'y aurait-il pas eu would there not have been gno rd til pa zu 

2d2 



24 



ETRE 



to be. 



l am\. tine. te. ecrit. mere. etre. idole. gzte. opera, oter. tout, vowte. 
2 at. arm. tuh. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 

tCONJUGATION OF THE AUXILIARY VERB. 

Etre to be (Affirmatively.) 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 

"A- PRESENT. 

etre to be 

-B- PAST Or PERFECT, 

or compound of the present. 
avoir ete to have been 

-C- PAP„TICIPLE PRESENT Or ACTIVE. 

etant being 

-D- COMPOUND OF THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 

ay ant ete having been 

-E- PARTICIPLE PAST OR PERFECT OR PASSIVE. 

ete been 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 



e tre 

a voi re te 
e tan 

e yan te te 
e te 



-F- 


PRESENT. 


Je suis 
ta es 
il est 


I am 
thou art 
he is 


nous sommes 


we are 


vous etes 
ils sont 


you are 
they are 


-G- PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 


or compound of the present. 
J'ai ete I have been 
tu as ete thou hast been 
il a ete he has been 
nous avons ete we have been 
vous avez ete" you have been 
ils ont ete they have been 


-H- 


IMPERFECT. 


J' etais 
tu etais 
il etait 


I was 
thou wast 
he was 


nous etions 


we were 


vous etiez 
ils etaient 


you were 
they were 


-i- 


PLUPERFECT, 


or 
J'avais ete 
tu avais e*te 
il avait ete 
nous avions ete 
vous aviez 6t6 
ils avaient €t€ 


compound of the imperfect. 
1 had been 
thou hadst been 
he had been 
we had been 
you had been 
they had been 

tSee page 1, art. U. 



je su l 
tu e 
ile 

nou som 
vou zet 
il son 



je e te 

tu a ze te 

i la e te 

nou za von ze te 

vou za ve ze t£ 

il zon te t6 

je te 
tu e te 
il e te 

nou ze* ti on 
vou ze ti 6 
il ze te 



ja ve ze te 
tu a ve z6 t6 
i la ve t^ te 
nou za vi on ze te 
vou za vi 6 ze t€ 
il za ve te t^ 



ETRE 



to be. 



25 



3 mwr. mur. jewne. jcioie. bo/te. hoite. ancie, mgrat. onde. un, ameN. 
4 j, as 5 in pleasure. g?i, as ni in union. iH, as Hi, in Wi Hi am t 



-J- 


PRETERIT DEFINITE. 




Je fus 


/ was 


jefu 


tu fus 


thou wast 


tu fu 


il fat 


he was 


ilfu 


nous fumes 


we were 


nou fum 


vous futes 


you were 


vou fut 


ils furent 


they were 


ilfur 



,Teus ete 
tu eus ete 
il eut ete 
nous eumes ete 
vous eutes £te 
ils eurent ete 



PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the preterit* 

I had been 
thou hadst been 
he had been 
we had been 
you had been 
they had been 



ju ze te 
tu u ze te* 
i lu te te 
nou zum z6 te 
vou zut ze t£ 
il zur te t£ 



Je serai 
tu seras 
il sera 
nous serons 
vous serez 
ils seront 



FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

/ shall or will be 
thou shall or wilt be 
he shall or will be 
we shall or will be 
you shall or will be 
they shall or will be 



je sr£ 
tu sra. 
il sra 
nou sron 
vou sre 
il sron 



-M- 



J-aurai ete 
tu auras ete 
il aura ete 
nous aurons ete 
vous aurez ete 
ils auront ete 



FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the future. 

I shall or will have been 
thou shalt or wilt have been 
he shall or will have been 
we shall or will have been 
you shall or will have been 
they shall or will have been 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 



jo re* e te 
tu o ra ze te 
il o ra e te 
nou zo ron ze* te 
vou zo re ze te 
il zo ron te te 



-N- 

Je serais 
tu serais 
il serait 
nous serions 
vous seriez 
ils seraient 



i" should, would, could, 

or might be 
thou shouldst, wouldst, couldst, 

or mightst be 
he should, would, could, 

or might be 
we should, would, could, 

or might be 
you should, would, could, 

or might be 
they should, would, could, 

or might be 

c 



je sre 
tu sre 
il sre 

nou se ri on 
vou se ri 6 
il sr£ 



26 



ETRE 



to be. 



•ami. ane. te. ecrit. mere. etre. idole. gzte. opera, dter. tout, vowte. 
2 at. arm. Uib. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 



-o- 



PAST, 
or compound of the present. 



J'aurais ete 
or feusse ete 
tu aurais ete 
or tu eusses ete 
il aurait ete 
or il exit ete 
nous aurions ete 
or nous eussions ete 
vous auriez ete 
or vous eussiez ete 
ils auraient ete 
or its eussent ete 



-p- 

Sois 
qu'il soit 
soyons 
soyez 
qu'ils soient 



Que je sois 
que tu sois 
qu'il soit 
que nous soyons 
que vous soyez 
qu'ils soient 

-R- 



/ should, would, could, 

or might have been 
thoushouldst, wouldst, couldst, 

or mightst have been 
he should, would, could, 

or might have been 
we should, would, could, 

or might have been 
you should, would, could, 

or might have been 
they should, would, could, 

or might have been 

IMPERATIVE MOQD. 

be (thou) 
let him be 
let us be 
be (you) 
let them be 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

that I may be 
that thou mayst be 
that he may be 
that we may be 
that you may be 
that they may be 

PRETERIT Or PAST, 



or compound of the present, 

that I may have been 
that thou mayst have been 
that he may have been 
that we may have been 
that you may have been 
that they may have been 

IMPERFECT. 

that I might be 
that thou mightst be 
that he might be 
that we might be 
that you might be 
that they might be 

PLUPERFECT, 
or compound of the imperfect. 

Que j'eusse ete that I might have been 

que tu eusses ete that thou mightst have been 

qu'il eut ete that he might have been 

que nous eussions ete that we might have been 
que vous eussiez ete that you might have been 
qu'ils eussent ete* Jhat they might have been 



Que j'aie ete 
que tu aies ete 
quil ait ete 
que nous ayons ete 
que vous ayez ete 
qu'ils aient ete 



Que je fusse 
que tu fusses 
qu'il fut 

que nous fussions 
que vous fussiez 
qu'ils fussent 

-T- 



jo re ze te 
jus e te 
tu o re ze te 
tu us ze te 
i lo re te te 
i lu te te 
nou zo ri on ze te 
nou zu si on ze te 
vou zo ri e ze te 
vou zu si e ze te 
il zo re te te 
il zus te te 



soi 

kil soi 
soi yon 
soi ye 
kil soi 



kej soi 

ke tu soi 

kil soi' 

ke nou soi yon 

ke vou soi ye 

kil soi 






ke je e te 

ke tu e ze te 

ki le te te 

ke nou ze yon ze te 

ke vou ze ye ze te 

kil ze te te 

kej fus 

ke tu fus 

kilfu 

ke nou fu si on 

ke vou fu si e 

kil fus 



ke jus e te 

ke tu us ze te 

ki lu te t6 

ke nou zu si on ze te 

ke vou zu si e ze te 

kil zus te te 



ETRE 



to be 



27 



3 mwr. mur. jeioie. jewne. bo/te. boite. ancre. mgrat. onde. un. ameN. 
4 j, as s in pleasure, gn, as ni in um'on. ill, as Hi, in Wi/Ziam. 

CONJUGATION OF THE AUXILIARY VERB. 

6tre to 6e (Negatively.) 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 



-A- 

Ne pas etre 

-B- 



PRESENT. 

zio/ to be 



ne pa ze tre 



PAST Or PERFECT, 
or compound of the present. 

ne pas avoir ete not io have been 



ne pa. za voi re* te" 
ne tan pa, 



.-C- PARTICIPLE PRESENT Or ACTIVE, 

n' etant pas not being 

-D- COMPOUND OF THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 

n'ayant pas ete not having been ne yan pa z6 t6 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 



Je ne suis pas J am not 

tu n'es pas thou art not 

il n'est pas he is not 

nous ne sommes pas we are not 

vous n'etes pas you are not 

Us ne sont pas they are not 

-G- PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 

or compound of the present. 

Je n'ai pas ete / have not been 

tu n'as pas ete thou hast not been 

il n ? a pas ete he has not been 

nous n'avons pas ete ive have not been 
vous n'avez pas ete you have not been 
ils n'ont pas ete they have not been 



Je n^tais pas 
tu n'etais pas 
il n'etait pas 
nous n'etions pas 
vous n'etiez pas 
ils n'etaient pas 



IMPERFECT. 

J was not 

thou wast not 
he was not 
we were not 
you were not 
they were not 



-I- PLUPERFECT, 

or compound of the imperfect. 

Je n'avais pas ete / had not been 
tu n'avais pas ete thou hadst not been 
il n'avait pas ete he had not been 

nous n'avions pas ete we had not been 
vous n'civiez pas ete you had not been 
ils n'avaient pas ete they had not been 



jeN su i pa 
tu ne pa 
il ne pa 
nouN som pa 
vou net pa. 
il ne son pa. 



je ne pa. ze te* 

tu na pa ze t€ 

il na pa ze t£ 

nou na von pa. ze te 

vou na ve paze te 

il non pa. ze te 

je ne te pa 
tu ne te pa. 
il ne te pa 
nou ne ti on pa 
vou ne ti e pa 
il ne te pa 



je na ve pa. ze* te 
tu na ve pa. ze te 
il na ve pa. ze te 
nou na vi on pa zd te* 
vou na vi e pa ze t6 
il na vd pa 2,6 t6 



ETRE 



to be. 



x am\. tine. te. e'crit. mere. etre. idole. gzte. op£ra. dter. tout, voute, 
2 af. arm. tub. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 



Je ne fus pas 
tu ne fus pas 
il ne fut pas 
nous ne fumes pas 
vous ne futes pas 
ils ne furent pas 



PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

/ was not 
thou wast not 
he was not 
we were not 
you were not 
they were not 



jeN fu pa 
tuN fu pa 
il ne fu pa 
nouN fum pa 
voun fut pa 
il ne fur pa 



-K- PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 

or compound of the preterit. 

Je n'eus pas ete I had not been 

tu n'eus pas ete thou hadst not been 

il n'eut pas ete he had not been 

nous n'eumes pas ete ive had not been 

vous n'eutes pas ete you had not been 

ils n'eurent pas ete they had not been 



je nu pa ze t^ 
tu nu pa ze te 
il nu pa ze te 
nou num pa ze te 
vou nut pa ze te 
il nur pa ze te 



Je ne serai pas 
tu ne seras pas 
il ne sera pas 
nous ne serons pas 
vous ne serez pas 
ils ne seront pas 



FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

J shall or will not be 
thou shalt or wilt not be 
he shall or will not be 
we shall or will not be 
you shall or will not be 
they shall or will not be 



jeN sre pa 
tuN sra pa 
il ne sra pa 
nouN sron pa 
voun sre pa 
il ne sron pa 



FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the future. 



Je n'aurai pas ete 
tu n'auras pas ete 
il n'aura pas ete 
nous n'aurons pas ete 
vous n'aurez pas ete 
ils n'auront pas ete 



/ shall or will not have been jno re* pa ze* te 
thou shall or wilt not have been tu no ra pa ze te 
he shall or will not have been il no ra pa ze te 
we shall or will not have been nou no ron pa ze te 
you shall or ivill not have been vou no re pa ze te 
they shallov will not have been il no ron pa ze t€ 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 



-N- PRESENT. 

J should, ivould, could, 



Je ne serais pas 
tu ne serais pas 
il ne serait pas 
nous ne serions pas 
vous ne seriez pas 
ils ne seraient pas 



or might not be 



jeN sre pa 



thoushouldst 9 wouldst,couldst, , , . 

or mighlst not be 
he should, would, could, 

or might not be 
we should, would, could, 

or might not be 
you should, would, could, 

or might not be 
they should, would, could) 

or might not be 



il ne sre pa 
nouN se ri on pa 
voun se ri e* pa 
il ne sre p&, 



ETRE 



to be. 



29 



3 mur, mur. jeune. jewne. boj'te. bottc. cmcre, mgrat. onde. Mn, ameN. 
4 j, as s in pleasure. gTi, as ni in um'on. i7Z, as Hi, in Wi ZZi am. 



PAST, 
or compound of the present. 



Je n'aurais pas ete 
otje rfeusse pas ete 
tu n'aurais pas ete 
or tu rCeusses pas eti 
il n'aurait pas ete 
or il n'eut pas ete 
nous n'aurions pas ete 
or nous rteussions pas ete 
vous n'auriez pas ete 
or vous n'eussiez pas ete 
ils n'auraient pas ete 
or ils rCeussent pas ete 



I should, would, 

could, or might 
thou shouldst, wouldst, 
couldst, or mightst 
he should, would, 

could, or might 
iv e should, would, 

could, or might 
you should, would, 

could, or might 
they should, would, 

could, or might 



!-§ 



je no re pa ze te 
je nus pa ze te 
tu no re pa ze te 
tu nus pa ze te 
il no re pa ze te 
il nu pa ze te 
nou no ri on pa ze te 
nou nu si on pa ze te 
vou no ri e pa ze" t£ 
vou nu si e pa ze te 
il no re pa ze te 
il nus pa ze te 



Ne sois pas 
qu-'il ne soit pas 
ne soyons pas 
ne sovez pas 
quails ne soient pas 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

be not (thou) 
let him not be 
let us not be 
be not (you) 
let them not be 



ne soi pa 
kil ne soi pa 
ne soi yon pa 
ne soi ye pa 
kil ne soi pa 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

tliat I may 
that thou mayst 
that he may 
that tee may 
that you may 
that they may 

PRETERIT Or PAST, 
or compound of the present. 
Que je 11 Vie pas ete that I may 

que tu n'aies pas ete that thou mayst 

qu'il n'ait pas ete that he may 

que nous n'ayons pas ete that we may 
que vous n'ayez pas ete that you may 
qu'ils n'aient pas ete that they may 

-S- IMPERFECT. 



Que je ne sois pas 
que tu ne sois pas 
qu'il ne soit pas 
que nous ne soyons pas 
que vous ne soyez pas 
qu'ils ne soient pas 

-R- 



f 

11 
fl 

jl 



ke jeN soi pa 
ke tux soi pa 
kil ne soi pa 
ke nouN soi yon pa. 
ke voun soi ye" pa 
kil ne soi pa 



kej ne pa ze te* 

ke tu ne pa ze te" 

kil ne pa ze te 

ke nou ne" yon pa ze te* 

ke vou ne ye" pa ze" te" 

kil ne pa ze t£ 



that I might 
that thou mightst 



that he might 
that we might 
that you might 
that they might 



Que je ne fusse pas 
que tu ne fusses pas 
qu'il ne fut pas 
que nous ne fussions pas 
que vous ne fussiez pas 
qu'ils ne fussent pas 

-T- PLUPERFECT, 

or compound of the imperfect. 
Que je n'eusse pas ete that I might 
que tu n'eusses pas ete that thou mightst 
qu'il n'eut pas ete that he might 

que nous n'eussions pas ete that we might 
que vous n'eussiez pas ete" that you m^ht 
qu'ils n'eussent pas ete that they might 
2c 



j 



ke jeN fus pa 

ke tux fus pa 

kil ne fu pa 

ke no UN fu si on pa 

ke voun fu si e" pa 

kil ne fus pa 



"] 3 kej nus pa ze te 

| ^ ke tu nus pa ze te" 

| |" kil nu pa ze" te" 

f ^ ke nou nu si on pa ze" te 

| jI" ke vou nu si e pa ze" te" 

J I kil nus pa ze te" 



30 



&TRE 



to be. 



J ami. ane. te. ecrit. mere. etre. zdole. gzte. opera, oter. tout, vowte. 
2 a/. arm. tub. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 

CONJUGATION OF THE AUXILIARY VERB. 

Etre to be (Interrogatively.) 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



-F- 


PRESENT. 


Suis-je 

es-tu 

est-il 


am I 
art thou 
is he 


sommes-nous 


are we 


etes-vous 
sont-ils 


are you 
are they 



SU 1J 

e tu 
etil 

som nou 
et vou 
son til 






PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 
or compound of the present. 



Ai-je ete 


have I been 


6 }4 te* 


as-tu ete 


hast thou been 


a. tu e te 


a-t-il ete 


has he been 


a ti le te 


avons-nous ete 


have we been 


a von nou ze te 


avez-vous ete 


have you been 


a ve vou ze te 


ont-ils ete 


have they been 


on til ze te 


-H- 


IMPERFECT. 




Etais-je 


was I 


e tej 


£tais-tu 


toast thou 


e te tu 


etait-ii 


was he 


6 te til 


£tions-nous 


were we 


e ti on nou 


£tiez-vous 


were you 


e ti e vou 


£taient-ils 


were they 


6 te til 


-i- 


PLUPERFECT, 




or 


compound of the imperfect 




Avais-je ete 


had I been 


a ve je te 


avais-tu ete 


hadst thou been 


a ve tu e te 


avait-il 6te 


had he been 


a ve ti le t€ 


avicns-nous ete 


had we been 


a vi on nou ze te* 


aviez-vous ete 


had you been 


a vi e vou ze te 


avaient-ils ete* 


had they been 


a ve til ze te* 


-j- 


PRETERIT DEFINITE. 




Fus-je 


was I 


*j 


fus-tu 


wast thou 


futu 


fut-il 


was he 


fu til 


fumes-nous 


were we 


fum nou 


futes-vous 


were you 


fut vou 


furent-ils 


were they 


fur til 



ETRE 



to be 



31 



3 mwr. mwr. jewne. jeitne. bofte. boite. ancre. mgrat. onde. un. araeN. 
4 j, as s in pleasure, gn, as ni in union, ill, as Hi, in WWZz'am. 



Eus-je ete 
eus-tu ete 
eut-il ete 
eumes-nous ete 
eutes-vous ete 
eurent-ils ete 

-L- 

Serai-je 

seras-tu 

sera-t-il 

serons-nous 

serez-vous 

seront-ils 



Aurai-je ete 
auras-tu ete 
aura-t-il ete 
aurons-nous ete 
aurez-vous ete 
auront-ils ete 



PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the preterit, 
had I been 
hadsi thou been 
had he been 
had we been 
had you been 
had they been 

FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

shall or will 1 be 
shall or wilt thou be 
shall or will he be 
shall or will we be 
shall or will you be 
shall or will they be 

FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the future 

shall or will I have been 
shall or wilt thou have been 
shall or will he have been 
shall or will we have been 
shall or will you have been 
shall or will they have been 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 



Serais-je 



serais-tu 



serait-il 



senons-nous 



senez-vous 



seraient-ils 



•o- 



PRESENT. 

should, would, could, 

or might I be 
shouldst, wouldst, couldst, 

or mightst thou be 
should, would, couldy 

or might he be 
should, would, could, 

or might ice be 
should, would, could, 

or might you be 
should, would, could, 

or might they be 

PAST, 
or compound of the present. 



Aurais~je 6t6 
or eusse-je ete 
aurais-tu ete 
or eusses-tu tie 
aurait-il ete 
or eut-il ete 
aurions-nous ete 
or eussions-nous ete 
aunez-vous ete 
or eussiez-vous ete 
auraient-ils ete* 
or eussent-ils ete 



should, would, could, 

or might I have been 
shouldst, ivouldst, couldst, 

or mightst thou have been 
should, would, could, 

or might he have been 
should, ivould, could, 

or might we have been 
should, would, could, 

or might you have been 
should, would, could, 

or might they have been 
2 E 



u je te 
u tu e te 
u ti le te 
urn nou ze te 
ut vou ze te 
ur til ze te 



se rej 
se ra tu 
se ra til 
se ron nou 
se re vou 
se ron til 



o re je te 
o ra tu e te 
o ra til e te 
o ron nou ze te* 
o r£ vou ze te 
o ron til ze te 



se rej 
se re tu 
sa re til 
se ri on nou 
se ri e vou 
se re til 



o re je te* 
u seje te 
o re tu e te 
us tu e te 
o re ti le te 
u ti le te 
o ri on nou ze te* 
u si on nou ze ti 
o ri e vou ze te 
u si e vou ze te 
o rd til ze* te 
us til ze te 



32 



ETRE 



to be. 



'ami. dne. te. e'crit. mere. etre. ^dole. gzte. opera, dter. tout, vowte. 
2 at. arm. tub. ale. mare, there, zdiom. eel. opera, over. too. fool. 

CONJUGATION OF THE AUXILIARY VERB. 
Etre to be (Negatively and Interrogatively,) 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



Ne suis-je pas 
n'es-tu pas 
rrest-il pas 
ne sommes-nous pas 
n'etes-vous pas 
ne sont-ils pas 



am I not 
art thou not 
is he not 
are we not 
are you not 
are they not 



ne su ij pa 
ne tu pa 
ne til pa 
ne som nou pa 
net vou pa 
ne son til pa 



N'ai-je pas ete 
n'as-tu pas ete 
n'a-t-il pas ete 
n'avons-nous pas ete 
n'avez-vous pas ete 
n'ont-ils pas ete 



PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 
or compound of the present. 

have I not been 
hast thou not been 
has he not been 
have we not been 
have you not been 
have they not been 



nej pa ze* te* 
na tu pa ze te" 
na til pa ze te 
na von nou pa ze* te* 
na ve vou pa ze te 
non til pa ze te 



-H- 

N'etais-je pas 
n'etais-tu pas 
n'^tait-il pas 
n'etions-nous pas 
n'etiez-vous pas 
n'etaient-ils pas 



IMPERFECT. 

was I not 
wast thou not 
was he not 
were we not 
were you not 
were they not 



-I- PLUPERFECT, 

or compound of the imperfect. 

N'avais-je pas ete had I not been 
n'avais-tu pas ete* hadst thou not been 

n'avait-il pas ete* had he not been 

n'avions-nous pas ete had we not been 
n'aviez-vous pas ete* had you not been 
n'avaient-ils pas <He* had they not been 



ne tej pa 
ne te tu pa 
ne te til pa 
ne ti on nou pa 
ne ti e* vou pa 
ne te til pa 



na ve j pa ze* te* 
na ve tu pa ze te* 
na ve til pa ze* te* 
na vi on nou pa ze* te* 
na vi e vou pa ze* te* 
na ve til pa ze* te* 



Ne fus-je pas 
ne fus-tu pas 
ne fut-il pas 
ne fumes-nous pas 
ne futes-vous pas 
ne furent-ils pas 



PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

was I not 
wast thou not 
was he not 
were we not 
were you not 
were they not 



ne fuj pa 
ne fu tu pa 
ne fu til pa 
ne fum nou pa 
ne fut vou pa 
ne fur til pa 



to be. 



33 



3 mwr. mwr. jeune. jewne. boite. hoita. ancve. ingrat. onde. un, ameN, 
4 j, as 5 in pleasure. gn t as ni in union. iZZ, as Hi, in Wi ZZi am. 



-K- PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 

or compound of the preterit. 
N'eus-je pas ete had I not been 

n'eus-tu pas ete hadst thou not been 

n'eut-il pas ete had he not been 

n'eiimes-nous pas ete had we not been 
n'eutes-vous pas ete had you not been 
n'eurent-ils pas ete had they not been 

-L- FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 



Ne serai-je pas 
ne seras-tu pas 
ne sera-t-il pas 
ne serons-nous pas 
ne serez-vous pas 
ne seront-ils pas 

-M- 



shall or ivill I not be 
shalt or wilt thou not be 
shall or will he not be 
shall or will we not be 
shall or will you not be 
shall or will they not be 

FUTURE ANTERIOR, 



-N- 

Ne serais-je pas 
ne serais-tu pas 
ne serait-il pas 
ne serions-nous pas 
ne seriez-vous pas 
ne seraient-ils pas 



PRESENT. 

should, would, could, 

or might I not be 
shouldst, wouldst, couldst, 

or mightst thou not be 
should, would, could, 

or might he not be 
should* would, could, 

or might we not be 
should, would, could, 

or might you not be 
should, would, could, 

or might they not be 



PAST, 

or compound of the present. 



N'aurais-je pas ete, 
or n'eusse-je pas tie 
n'aurais-tu pas ete, 
or rfeusses-tupas ete 
n'aurait-il pas ete, 
or n-eut-il pas tte 
n'aurions-nous pas ete, 



should, would, 

could, or might I 
shouldst, wouldst, 
couldst, or mightst thou 
should, would, 
could, or might he 
should, would, 



or rieussions-nouspas ete could, or might we 

n'auriez-vous pas ete, should, would, 

or rieussiez-vouspas €U could, or might you 

n'auraient-ils pas £te, should, would, 

or rCeussent-ilspas ete could* or might they 

c 



nuj pa. ze te 
nu tu pa. ze t£ 
nu til pa. ze te 
num nou pa ze te 
nut vou pa. ze te* 
nur til pa ze te 

ne srej pa. 
ne sra tu pa. 
ne sra til pa. 
ne sron nou pa 
ne sre vou pa 
ne sron til pa. 



or compound of the future. 

N'aurai-je pas ete shall or will I not have been 
n'auras-tu pas ete shalt or wilt thou not have been 
n'aura-t-il pas ete shall or will he not have been 
n'aurons-nous pas ete shall or will ice not have been 
n'aurez-vous pas ete shall or will you not have been 
n'auront-ils pas ete shall or will they not have been 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 



no rej pa. ze te* 
no ra. tu pa. ze t€ 
no ra til pa ze te 
no ron nou pa. ze te 
no re vou pa. ze t€ 
no ron til pa. ze ti 



ne srej pa 
ne sre tu pa. 
ne sre til pa 
ne se ri on nou pa, 
ne se ri -e vou pa 
ne sre til pa. 



no rej pa z^ te 

nu sej pa ze te 
no re tu pa. ze t^ 
nus tupa ze te 
no re til pa. ze t4 
nu til pa ze te 
no ri on nou pa. ze" te 
1 nusionnoupazete 
no ri e vou pa. ze te 
nu si i vou pa ze. ti 
no re til pa ze te 
nus til pa ze te 



34 



OP THE FIRST CONJUGATION. 



Of the different hinds of Conjugations. 

75. There are in French, four Conjugations, (comprising' 
upwards of 3164 verbs,) which are distinguished from each 
other by the termination of the present of the Infinitive. 

First Conjugation. 

76. The present of the Infinitive of the first conjugation, has 
for termination er — as, pari er, donn er, &c. 

Second Conjugation. 

77. The present of the Infinitive of the second conjugation, 
has for termination ir — as, fin ir, pun ir, &c. 

Third Conjugation. 

78. The present of the Infinitive of the third conjugation, 
has for termination oir — as, recev oir, Sav oir, &c. 

Fourth Conjugation. 

79. The present of the Infinitive of the fourth conjugation, 
has for termination re — as, vend re, rend re, &c. 

Of the First Conjugation. 

80. All verbs whose present of the Infinitive ends with er, 
(to the number of about 2500) are of the first conjugation, and 
if regular, are conjugated like parler to speak ; which is here- 
after conjugated, to be used as a model. 

81. The only irregular verbs of the first conjugation, are 
s'en alter to go away, page 112 — oiler to go, page 122 — envoy er 
to send, page!23 — and renvoyer to send back; conjugated like 
envoyer to send. 

82. Some verbs ending in er, although not among the 
irregular verbs of the first conjugation, are not exactly conju- 
gated like parler ; these verbs are noticed at page 48. 

83. Conjugate in the same manner — as, pari er to speak ; the 
following verbs : — 



accord er 


to grant, 


epouvant er 


to frighten, 


accus er 


to accuse, 


inspir er 


to inspire, 


affirm er 


to affirm, 


lim er 


to file, 


camp er 


to encamp, 


patin er 


to skate, 


donn er 


to give, 


piqu er 


to sting, 


port er 


to carry, 


prepar er 


to prepare, 


montr er 


to show, 


priv er 


to deprive, 


trouv er 


to find, 


propos er 


to propose, 


cass er 


to break, 


imagin er 


to imagine, 



OF THE FORMATION OF THE COMPOUND TENSES. 35 



allum er 


to light, 


import er 


to import, 


pleur er 


to weep, 


improuv er 


to disapprove, 


vol er 


to steal, 


irrit er 


to irritate, 


dejeun er 


to breakfast, 


invent er 


to invent, 


din er 


to dine, 


pens er 


to think, 


soup er 


to sup, 


vant er 


to praise, 



84. To conjugate the above verbs, or any other regular 
verb, of the first conjugation : observe that in French a regular 
verb is divided into two parts : — 1st, The radical part, which 
is, that portion of the word which is the same in all tenses and 
persons of the verb ; 2d, The termination, which is, that portion 
of the word that varies at almost every tense and person ; for 
instance, in parler to speak ; pari is the radical part, and er is 
the termination : then pari will be the same in all tenses and 
persons ; whereas the termination er, will change at every tense 
and person. Knowing the above, when a verb is to be conju- 
gated on parler, the only thing to be done, is to place the ter- 
minations of the different tenses and persons of parler after 
the radical part of the verb to be conjugated. 

85. In the different conjugations throughout this volume, the 
radical part, and the terminations have been separated, and the 
terminations in the model verbs have been besides printed in 
italics. 

Formation of the Compound Tenses* 

86. The formation of the compound tenses, in all the verbs 
of the four conjugations, whether regular or irregular, is the 
same. 

87. When a scholar wants to form a compound tense, he 
must first ascertain whether the verb in question, takes the 
auxiliary avoir to have, or etre to be, which he can easily do, 
by referring to page 1, Art. 10 and 14; afterwards he must 
take from avoir to have, or etre to be, the tense named, and add 
to it the participle past, of the verb he has to conjugate ; for in- 
stance, suppose a scholar wants to form the compound of the 
future absolute, of parler to speak, he must after having ascer- 
tained that parler to speak, is one of those neuter verbs that 
takes the auxiliary avoir to have, as not being among the neuter 
verbs, that are put down in pagel61 ; take the future absolute 
of avoir to have, which is, faurai I shall or will have, and add 
to it the participle past of parler to speak, which is, parle 
spoken ; then he shall have for the compound of the future ab- 
solute faurai parle I shall or will have spoken — tu auras parle 
thou shalt or wilt have spoken, &c. 

2e2 



36 TABLE OF THE TERMINATIONS OF THE REGULAR VERBS. 



Table of the Terminations of the Regular Verbs. 

SIMPLE TENSES. 



tu 

il or elle 

nous 

VOU3 

ils or elles 

JQ 
tu 

il or elle 

nous 

vous 

ils or elles 

je 

tu 

il or elle 

nous 

vous 

ils or elles 

je 

tu 

il or elle 

nous 

vous 

ils or elles 



J e 

tu 

il or elle 

nous 

vous 

ils or elles 



qu'il or qu'elle 
qu'ils or qu'elles 



queje 

que tu 

qu'il qr qu'elle 

que nous 

que vous 

qu'ils or qu'elles 

queje 

que tu 

qu'il or qu'elle 

que nous 

que vous 

qu'ils or qu'elles 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. 



pari 


er 


fin 


ir 


rec 


evoir 


vend 


re 




PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 








pari 


ant 


fin issant 


rec 


evant 


vend ant 




PARTICIPLE 


PAST OR PASSIVE. 






pari 


e 


fin 


i 


rec 


u 


vend 


u 




INDICATIVE MOOD. 












PRESENT. 










pari 


e 


fin 


is 


rec 


ois 


vend 


s 




es 




is 




ois 




s 




e 




it 




oit 


vend 






ons 




issons 




evons 




ons 




bZ 




issez 




evez 




ez 




ent 




is sent 




oivent 




ent 






IMPERFECT. 










pari 


ais 


fin 


issais 


rec 


evais 


vend 


ais 




ais 




Ass ais 




evais 




ais 




ait 




is s ait 




en ait 




ait 




ions 




issions 




evions 




ions 




iez 




issiez 




eviez 




iez 




aient 




issaient 




ev aient 




aient 




PRETERIT DEFINITE 










pari 


ai 


fin 


is 


rec 


us 


vend 


is 




as 




is 




us 




is 




a 




it 




ut 




it 




dmes 




imes 




umes 




imes 




dtes 




ties 




utes 




ites 




event 




irent 




urent 




irent 




FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 










pari 


erai 


fin 


irai 


rec 


evrai 


vend 


rai 




eras 




iras 




evras 




ras 




era 




ira 




evra 




ra 




erons 




irons 




evrons 




rons 




ercz 




irez 




evrez 




rez 




eront 




iront 




evront 




ront 




CONDITIONAL MOOD. 












PRESENT. 










pari 


erais 


fin 


irais 


rec 


evrais 


vend 


rais 




erais 




irais 




evrais 




rais 




erait 




irait 




evrait 




rait 




erions 




irions 




evrions 




rions 




eriez 




iriez 




evriez 




riez 




er aient 




ir aient 




evraient 




raient 




IMPERATIVE 








pari 


e 


fin 


is 


rec 


ois 


vend 


s 




e 




isse 




oive 




e 




ons 




issons 




evons 




ons 




ez 




issez 




evez 




ez 




ent 




issent 




oivent 




ent 




SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 












PRESENT. 










pari 


e 


fin 


isse 


rec 


oive 


vend 


e 




es 




isses 




oives 




es 




e 




isse 




oive 




e 




ions 




issions 




evions 




ions 




iez 




issiez 




eviez 




iez 




ent 




issent 




oivent 




ent 






IMPERFECT. 










pari 


asse 


fin 


isse 


rec 


usse 


vend 


isse 




esses 




isses 




usses 




isses 




dt 




it 




ut 




it 




assions 




issions 




ussions 




issions 




assiez 




issiez 




ussiez 




issiez 




assent 




issent 




ussent 




issent 


1st Conjugation 




%l ConJ. 




2d Conj. 




4th Con 






OP THE FOUR REGULAR CONJUGATIONS. 



37 



ayant 



Of the Fuitr Regular Conjugations* 

COMPOUND TENSES. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 
past or perfect, (or compound of the present.) 

pari e fin i rec u 

COMPOUND OP THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 

pari e fin i rec u 



vend 



vend u 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 
perfect or preterit indefinite, (or compound of the present.) 



jai 

tu as 

il or elle a 

nous avons 

vous avez 

ils or elles ont 



pari e 



fin 



vend u 



pluperfect, (or compound of the Imperfect.) 
pari e fin i rec u 



j'avais 

tu avais e i u 

il or elle avait e i u 

nous avions e i u 

vous aviez e i u 

ils or elles avaient e i u 

preterit anterior, {or compound of the preterit definite.) 



vend u 



j'eus 


pari 


e 


fin 


i 




rec 


u 


tu eug 




e 




i 






u 


il or elle eut 




6 




i 






u 


nous eumes 




e 




i 






u 


vous eutes 




e 




i 






u 


ils or elles eurent 




e 




i 






u 


FUTURE 


anterior 


, (or compound of the future absolute.) 


j'aurai 


pari 


e 


fin 


i 




rec 


u 


tu auras 




e 




i 






u 


il or elle aura 




e 




i 






u 


nous aurons 




e 




i 






u 


vous aurez 




e 




i 






u 


ils or elles auront 




e 




i 






u 




COND 








TAST, ( 


ir compound of the 


present.) 




j'aurais 


pari 


e 


fin 


i 




rec 


u 


tu aurais 




e 




i 






u 


il or elle aurait 




e 




i 






u 


nous aurions 




e 




i 






u 


vous auriez 




6 




i 






u 


ils or elles auraient 




e 




i 






u 



vend 



vend u 



vend 



JVb Compound of the Imperative. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
preterit or past, (or compound of the present.) 



pari e 



fin 



que j aie 

que tu aies e i 

qu'il or qu'elle ait 6 \ 

que nous ayons e s 

que vous ayez k \ 

qu'ils or qu'elles aient e s 
pluperfect, (or compound 



quej'eusse pari e fin i 

que tu eusses e i 

qu'il or qu'elle eut e i 

que nous eussions e i 

que vous eussiez 6 i 

qu'ils or qu'elles eussent e i 

1st Conjugation. 2i Conj. 

D 



of the imperfect.) 
rec u 



3d Conj. 



vend 



vend u 



4th Conj. 



38 



FIRST CONJUGATION. 



parler to speak. 



l ami. one. te. eerit. mere. etre. z'dole. gite. opera, dter. tout, voute 
' 2 at. arm. tub. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 



CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB. 



Parler 



to speak. 



(•Affirmatively.) 



-A- 

Parl er 



Avoir pari t 

-c- 

Parl ant 

-D- 

Ayant pari e 

-E- 

Parl e 



-F- 

Je pari e 
tu pari es 
il pari e 
nous pari ons 
vous pari es 
ils pari ent 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

to speak 

PAST Or PERFECT, 

or compound of the present. 
to have spoken 

PARTICIPLE PRESENT OT ACTIVE. 

speaking 

COMPOUND OF THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 

having spoken 

PARTICIPLE PAST Or PASSIVE. 

spoken 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

I speak, do speak, or am speaking 
thou speakest, dost speak, or art speaking 
he speaks, does speak, or is speaking 
we speak, do speak, or are speaking 
you speak, do speak, or are speaking 
they speak, do speak, or are speaking 






J'ai pari e 

tu as pari e 

il a pari e 

nous avons pari e 

vous avez pari e 

ils ont pari e 

-H- 

Je pari ais 
tu pari ais 
il pari ait 
nous pari ions 
vous pari iez 
ils pari aient 



J'avais pari e 
tu avais pari 6 
il avait pari e 
nous avions pari e 
vous aviez pari i 
ils avaient pari 6 



PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 

or compound of the present. 

I have spoken, did speak, or have been speaking 
thou hast spoken, didst speak, or hast been speaking 
lie has spoken, did speak, or has been speaking 
we Jvave spoken, did speak, or have been speaking 
you have spoken, did speak, or have been speaking 
they have spoken, did speak, or have been speaking 

IMPERFECT. 

I spoke, did speak, or ivas speaking 
thou spokest, didst speak, or wast speaking 
he spoke, did speak, or was speaking 
we spoke, did speak, or were speaking 
you spoke, did speak, or were speaking 
they spoke, did speak, or were speaking 

PLUPERFECT, 

or compound of the imperfect. 

^ / had spoken, or had been speaking 

thou hadst spoken, or hadst been speaking 
he had spoken, or had been speaking 
we had spoken, or had been speaking 
you had spoken, or had been speaking 
they had spoken, or had been speaking 



FIRST CONJUGATION. PARLER tO Speak. 



39 



3 mwr. mwr. jewne. jeane. boite. boite. ancre. ingrat. onde. un, ameN. 
4 j, as s in pleasure, gn, as ni in union, ill, as Hi, in Wi/Ziam. 



-j- 

Je pari ai 
tu pari as 
il pari a 
nous pari cmcs 
vous pari dies 
il pari erent 



J'eus pari e 
tu eus pari e 
il eut pari e 
nous eumes pari e 
vous eutes pari e 
ils eurent pari e 

-L- 

Je pari erai 
tu pari eras 
il pari era 
nous pari erons 
vous pari eres 
ils pari trout 



J'aurai pari i 
tu auras pari t 
il aura pari e 
nous aurons pari e 
vous aurez pari e 
ils auront pari e 



Je pari emis 
tu pari erais 
il pari erai£ 
nous pari erions 
vous pari eriez 
ils pari eraient 



J'aurais pari e, 
or feusse pari e 
tu aurais pari e, 
or tu eussesparl e 
il aurait pari e, 
or iZ ew/ pari e 



PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

I spoke, or did speak 
thou spokest, or didst speak 
he spoke, or did speak 
we spoke, or did speak 
you spoke, or did speak 
they spoke, or did speak 

PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the preterit. 

I had spoken 
thou hadst spoken 
he had spoken 
we had spoken 
you had spoken 
they had spoken 

FUTURE AESOLUTE. 

/ shall, or will speak 
thou shall, or wilt speak 
he shall, or will speak 
we shall, or will speak 
you shall, or will speak 
they shall, or will speak 

FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the future. 

I shall, or will have spoken 
thou shall, or wilt have spoken 
he shall, or will have spoken 
we shall, or will have spoken 
you shall, or will have spoken 
they shall, or will have spoken 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

I should, would, could, or might speak 

thou shouldst, wouldst, couldsi, or mightst speak 

he should, would, could, or might speak 

we should, would, could, or might speak 

you should, would, could, or might speak 

they should, would, could, or might speak 

PAST, 
or compound of the present. 

> i" should, would, could, or might have spoken 

> thou shouldst, wouldst, couldst, or mightst have speken 
he should, would, could, or might have spoken 



40 



FIRST CONJUGATION. PARLER to Speak. 



l ami. one. te. ecrit. 
2 at. arm. tub. ale. 



mere. etre. tdole. gzte. opera, oter. tout, vowte. 
mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 



nous aurions pari e, 
or nous eussions pari 
vous auriez pari e, 
or vous eussiezparl e 
ils auraient pari e, 
or ils eus sent pari e 



Pari e 
qu'il pari e 
pari ons 
pari ez 
qu'ils pari ent 



,lwe should, would, could, or might have spoken 

> you should, would, could, or might have spoken 

> Z/iej/ should, would, could, or mg/i/ have spoken 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

speak or do speak (thou) 

let him speak 

let us speak 

speak or do speak (you) 

let them speak 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



-a- 

Que je pari e 
que tu pari es 
qu'il pari e 
que nous par! ions 
que vous pari iez 
qu'ils pari ent 



that I may speak 
that thou mayst speak 
that he may speak 
that iv e may speak 
that you may speak 
that they may speak 



Que j'aie pari e 
que tu aies pari e 
qu'il ait pari e 
que nous ayons pari e 
que vous ayez pari e 
qu'ils aient pari e 



PRETERIT Or PAST, 
or compound of the present^ 

thai I may have spoken 
that thou mayst have spoken 
that lie may have spoken 
that we may have spoken 
that you may have spoken 
that they may have spoken 



Que je pari asse 
que tu pari asses 
qu'il pari at 
que nous pari assions 
que vous pari assies 
qu'ils pari assent 



IMPERFECT. 

that I might speak 
that thou mighlst speak 
that fie might speak 
that we might speak 
that you might speak 
that they might speak 

PLUPERFECT, 



or compound of the imperfect. 

Que j'eusse pari e* that I might have spoken 

que tu eusses pari e that thou mighlst have spoken 

qu'il cut pari e that he might have spoken 

que nous eussions pari 6 that we might have spoken 

que vous eussiez pari e that you might have spoken 

qu'ils eussent pari e that they might have spoken 






FIRST CONJUGATION. 



parler to speak. 



4«1 



3 mwr. mwr. je?/ne. jewne. boite. boite. ancie. ingr&i. onde. un, ameN. 
4 j, as 5 in pleasure, gn, as ni in union, ill, as Hi, in Wi Hi am. 

CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB. 

Parler to speak. {Negatively.) 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 



-A- PRESENT. 

Ne pas pari er not to speak 

-B- PAST Or PERFECT, 

or compound of the present. 

N'avoir pas pari 6 not to have spoken 

-C- PARTICIPLE PRESENT Or ACTIVE, 

Ne pari ant pas not speaking 

-D- COMPOUND OF THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 

N'ayant pas pari e not having spoken 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

J speak not, do not speak, or am not 
thou speakest not, dost not speak, or art not 
he speaks not, does not speak, or is not 
we speak not, do not speak, or are not 
you speak not, do not speak, or are not 
they speak not, do not speak, or are not 

PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 
or compound of the present. 

I have not spoken, did not speak, or have not 

thou hast not spoken, didst not speak, or hast not 

he has not spoken, did not speak, or has not 

nous n'avons pas pari e we have not spoken, did not speak, or have not 

vous n'avez pas pari e you have not spoken, did not speak, or have not 

they have not spoken, did not speak, or have not 

IMPERFECT. 

J spoke not, did not speak, or was not 
thou spokest not, didst not speak, or wast not 
he spoke not, did not speak, or was not 
we spoke not, did not speak, or were not 
you spoke not, did not speak, or were not 
they spoke not, did not speak, or were not 

PLUPERFECT, 

or compound of the imperfect. 

I had not spoken, or had not been 
thou hadst not spoken, or hadst not been 
he had not spoken, or had not been 
nous n'avions pas pari e we had not spoken, or had not been 
vous n'aviez pas pari e you had not spoken, or had not been 
ils n'avaient pas pari e they had not spoken, or had not been 
D 2 



-F- 

Je ne pari e pas 
tu ne pari es pas 
il ne pari e pas 
nous ne pari ons pas 
vous ne pari ez pas 
ils ne pari ent pas 



Je n'ai pas pari e 
tu n'as pas pari e 
il n'a pas pari e 



ils n'ont pas pari e 

-H- 

Je ne pari ais pas 
tu ne pari ais pas 
il ne pari ait pas 
nous ne pari ions pas 
vous ne pari iez pas 
ils ne pari aient pas 
-I- 

Je n'avais pas pari e 
tu n'avais pas pari e 
il n'avait pas pari e 



<*5 



^ 






42 



FIRST CONJUGATION. 



parler to speak. 



l ami. ane. te. eerit. mere. etre. idole. gzte. opera, dter. tout, vowtt), 
tat. arm. U«b. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 



Je ne pari ai pas 
tu ne pari as pas 
il ne pari a pas 
nous ne pari times pas 
vous ne pari ates pas 
ils ne pari event pas 



Je n'eus pas pari e 
tun'eus pas pari e 
il n'eut pas pari e 
nous n'eumes pas pari e 
vous n'eutes pas pari e 
ils n'eurent pas pari e 



PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

i" spoke not or did not speak 
thou spokes t not or didst not speak 
he spoke not or did not speak 
we spoke not or did not speak 
you spoke not or did not speak 
they spoke not or did not speak 

PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the preterit. 
I had not spoken 
thou hadst not spoken 
he had not spoken 
we had not spoken 
you had not spoken 
they had not spoken 



Je ne pari erai pas 
tu ne pari eras pas 
il ne pari era pas 
nous ne pari erons pas 
vous ne pari erez pas 
ils ne pari eront pas 



FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

J shall or will not speak 
thou shalt or wilt not speak 
he shall or will not speak 
we shall or will not speak 
you shall or will not speak 
they shall or will not speak 



Je n'aurai pas pari e 
tu n'auras pas pari e 
il n'aura pas pari e 
nous n'aurons pas pari e 
vous n'aurez pas pari e 
ils n'auront pas pari 6 



FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the future. 

I shall or will not have spoken 
thou shalt or wilt not have spoken 
he shall or will not have spoken 
we shall or will not have spoken 
you shall or will not have spoken 
they shall or will not have spoken 



-N- 

Je ne pari erais pas 
tu ne pari erais pas 
il ne pari erait pas 
nous ne pari erions pas 
vous ne pari eriez pas 
ils ne pari eraient pas 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

/ should, would, could, or might 
thou shouldst, wouldst, couldst, or mightst 
he should, would, could, or might 
s we should, would, could, or might 
you should, would, could, or might 
they should, would, could, or might 



f% 



PAST, 

or compound of the present. 



Je n'aurais pas pari e, 
orje n'eusse pas pari e 
tu n'aurais pas pari 6, 
or tu n'eusses pas pari e 
il n'aurait pas pari e, 
or il n'eut pas pari 6 



I should, would, could, 
or might not have spoken 

thou shouldst, wouldst, couldst^ 
or mightst not have spoken 

he should, would, could, 
or might not have spoken 



FIRST CONJUGATION. 



parler to speak. 43 



3 mwr. mur. jewne. jeune. boite. bozte. ancre. mgrat. onde. un. ameN 
4 j, as 5 in pleasure, gn, as ni in union, ill, as Hi, in Wi/Ziam 



nous n'aurions pas pari e 
or nows rteussions pas pari e 
vous n'auriez pas pari e 
or vows n'eussiez pas pari e 
ils n'auraient pas pa^l e 
or iZs rCeussent pas pari e 



we should, would, could, 
or might not have spoken 

you should, would, could, 
or might not have spoken 

they should, ivould, could, 
or might not have spoken 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 



Ne pari e pas 
qu'il ne pari e pas 
ne pari o?is pas 
ne pari ez pas 
qu'ils ne pari ent pas 



(thou) 



speak not or do not speak 

let him not speak 

let us not speak 

speak not or do not speak (you) 

let them not speak 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



-Q- 

Que je ne pari e pas 
que tu ne pari es pas 
qu'il ne pari e pas 
que nous ne pari ions pas 
que vous ne pari iez pas 
qu'ils ne pari ent pas 



PRESENT. 

that I may not speak 
that thou may st not speak 
that he may not speak 
that we may not speak 
that you may not speak 
that they may not speak 



Que je n'aie pas pari e 
que tu n'aies pas pari e 
qu'il n'ait pas pari e 
que nous n'ayons pas pari e 
que vous n'ayez pas pari e 
qu'ils n'aient pas pari e 



PRETERIT Or PAST, 
or compound of the present. 

that I may not have spoken 
that thou mayst not have spoken 
that he may not have spoken 
that we may not have spoken 
that you may not have spoken 
that they may not have spoken 



Que je ne pari asse pas 
quo tu ne pari asses pas 
qu'il ne pari at pas 
que nous ne pari assions pas 
que vous ne pari assiez pas 
qu'ils ne pari assent pas 



IMPERFECT. 

that I might not speak 
that thou mightst not speak 
that he might not speak 
that we might not speak 
that you might not speak 
that they might not speak 



-T- PLUPERFECT, 

or compound of the imperfect. 
Que je n'eusse pas pari e that 1 might not have spoken 

que tu n'eusses pas pari e that thou mightst not have spoken 
qu'il n'eut pas pari e that he might not have spoken 

que nous n'eussions pas pari e that we might not have spoken 
que vous n'eussiez pas pari e that you might not have spoken 
qu'ils n'eussent pas pari e that they might not have spoken 

2 F 



44 



FIRST CONJUGATION. 



parler to speak. 



l amu one. te. ecrit. mere. etre. idole. gite % opera, oter. tout, voute. 
2 at. arm. tub. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 

CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB. 



Parler 



Pari e'-jef 
pari es-tu 
pari e-t-il 
pari ons-nous 
pari es-vous 
pari en/-ils 



to speak. 



(Interrogatively.) 



j 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



do I speak or am I speaking 
dost thou speak or art thou speaking 
does he speak or is he speaking 
do we speak or are we speaking 
do you speak or are you speaking 
do they speak or are they speaking 




Ai-je pari e 
as-tu pari e 
a-t-il pari e 
avons-n?ous pari e 
avez-vous pari e 
ont-ils pari e 



PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 

or compound of the present. 

have I spoken or did I speak 
hast thou spoken or didst thou speak 
has he spoken or did he speak 
have we spoken or did we speak 
have you spoken or did you speak 
have they spoken or did they speak 



-H- IMPERFECT. 

Pari ais-je did I speak or was I speaking 

pari ais-tw didst thou speak or wast thou speaking 

pari ait-il did he speak or was lie speaking 

pari zons-nous did we speak or were we speaking 

pari iez-vous did you speak or were you speaking 

pari aient-ils did they speak or tvere they speaking 



Avais-je pari e 
avais-tu pari e 
avait-il pari e 
avions-nous pari e 
aviez-vous pari I 
avaient-ils pari e 



PLUPERFECT, 
or compound of the imperfect. 

had I spoken or had I been speaking 
hadst thou spoken or hadst thou been speaking 
had he spoken or had he been speaking 
had we spoken or had we been speaking 
had you spoken or had you been speaking 
had they spoken or had they been speaking 



-i- 

Parl ai-je 
pari as-tu 
pari a-t-il 
pari ames-nous 
pari ates-vous 
pari erent-)lB 



PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

did I speak 
didst thou speak 
did he speak 
did we speak 
did you speak 
did they speak 
tSee page 8, art. 67* 



FIRST CONJUGATION. 



parler to speak. 



45 



s mwr. mur. jewne. jewne. boite. boztc. ancie. 2/igrat. onde. un. ameN 
4 j, as s in pleasure. gn 9 as ni in union. ill, as Hi, in Wi Hi am 



Eus-je pari £ 
eus-tu pari e 
eut-il pari e 
eumes-nous pari e 
eiites-vous pari e 
eurent-ils pari e 



PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the preterit. 

had I spoken 
hadst thou spoken 
had he spoken 
had we spoken 
had you spoken 
had they spoken 



Pari erai-}e 
pari eras-tu 
pari enz-t-il 
pari erons-nous 
pari erez-vous 
pari eront-ils 



FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

shall or will I speak 
shalt or wilt thou speak 
shall or will lie speak 
shall or will we speak 
shall or will you speak 
shall or will they speak 



Aurai-je pari e 
auras-tu pari e 
aura-t-il pari e 
aurons-nous pari t 
aurez-vous pari e 
auront-ils pari e 



-N- 

Parl erais-]Q 
pari erais-tu 
pari erait-U. 
pari erions-nous 
pari eri'e^-vous 
pari eraient-iis 



Aurais-je pari e, 
or eusse-je pari t 
aurais-tu pari e, 
or eusses-tu pari e 
aurait-il pari e, 
or eut-il pari e 
aurions-nous pari e, 
or eussions-nous pari i 
auriez-vous pari <?, 
or eussiez-vous pari e 
auraient-ils pari e, 
or eussent-ils pari e 



FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the future. 

shall or will I have spoken 
shalt or wilt thou have spoken 
shall or will he have spoken 
shall or will we have spoken 
shall or will you have spoken 
shall or will they have spoken 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

should, would, could, or might I speak 
shouldst, wouldst, couldst, or might si thou speak 
should, would, could, or might he speak 
should, would, could, or might we speak 
should, would, could, or might you speak 
should, would, could, or might they speak 

PAST, 
or compound of the present. 

should, would, could, 

or might I have spoken 
shouldst, wouldst, couldst, 

or 77iightst thou have spoken 
should, would, could, 

or might he have spoken 
should, would, could, 

or might we have spoken 
should,, would, could, 

or might you have spoken 
should, would, could, 

or might they have spoken 



46 



FIRST CONJUGATION. PARLER to Speak. 



l ami» due. te. ecrit. mere. etre. idole. gite. opera, oter. tout, \oute. 
2 at. arm. tub. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 

CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB. 

Parler to speak, (Negatively and Interrogatively.) 



-F- 

Ne pari e-je pas 
ne pari es-tu pas 
ne pari e-t-il pas 
ne pari ons-nous pas 
ne pari es-vous pas 
ne pari ent-ils pas 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

do I not speak or am I not speaking 
dost thou not speak or art thou not speaking 
does he not speak or is he not speaking 
do we not speak or are we not speaking 
do you not speak or are you not speaking 
do they not speak or are they not speaking 



N'ai-je pas pari e 
n'as-tu pas pari e 
n'a-t-il pas pari e 
n'avons-nous pas pari e 
n'avez-vous pas pari e 
n'ont-ils pas pari e 



PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 
or compound of the present. 

have Inot spoken, did I not speak, 

or have Inot been speaking 
hast thou not spoken,didst thou not speak, 

or hast thou not been speaking 
has he not spoken, did he not speak ) 

or has he not been speaking 
have we not spoken, did we not speak, 

or have we not been speaking 
have you not spoken, did you not speak 

or have you not been speaking 
have they not spoken, did they not speak, 

or have they not been speaking 



-H- 

Ne pari ais-je pas 
ne pari ais-tu pas 
ne pari ait-il pas 
ne pari ions-nous pas 
ne pari iez-vous pas 
ne pari aient-ils pas 



N'avais-je pas pari e 
n'avais-tu pas pari e 
n'avait-il pas pari e 
iravions-nous pas pari e 
n'aviez-vous pas pari e 
n'avaient-ils pas pari e 

-j- 

Ne pari ai-je pas 
ne pari as-tu. pas 
ne pari a-t-il pas 
' ne pari dmes-noas pas 
ne pari a/es-vous pas 
ne pari erenMls pas 



IMPERFECT. 

did I not speak or was I not speaking 
didst thou not speak of wast thou not speaking 
did he not speak or was he not speaking 
did we not speak or were we not speaking 
did you not speak or were you not speaking 
did they not speak or were they not speaking 

PLUPERFECT, 
or compound of the imperfect. 
had I not spoken or had Inot been 
hadst thou not spoken or hadst thou not been 
had he not spoken or had he not been 
had we not spoken or had we not been 
had you not spoken or had you not been 
had they not spoken or had they not been 



^3 



PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

did I not speak 
didst thou not speak 
did he not speak 
did we not speak 
did you not speak 
did. they not speak 



FIRST CONJUGATION. 



parler to speak. 47 



'inwr. mm. jewne. jeune. boite. boite. ancre. mgrat. onde. un. ameN. 
^j, as s in pleasure, gn, as ni in union. ill, as Wi, in Wi//iam. 



N'eus-je pas pari e 
n'eus-tu pas pari e 
n'eut-il pas pari e 
n'eumes-nous pas pari e 
n'eutes-vous pas pari e 
n'eurent-ils pas pari e 



PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the preterit. 
had I not spoken 
hadst thou not spoken 
had he not spoken 
had we not spoken 
had you not spoken 
had they not spoken 



Ne pari erai-je pas 
ne pari eras-tu pas 
ne pari era-t-il pas 
ne pari e?'07is-nous pas 
ne pari eres-vous pas 
ne pari eront-ih pas 



FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

shall or will I not speak 
shalt or wilt thou not speak 
shall or will he not speak 
shall or will we not speak 
shall or will you not speak 
shall or will they not speak 



N'aurai-je pas pari e 
n'auras-tu pas pari e 
n'aura-t-il-pas pari e 
n'aurons-nous pas pari e 
n'aurez-vous pas pari e 
n'auront-ils pas pari e 



FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
cr compound of the future. 

shall or will I not have spoken 
shall or wilt thou not have spoken 
shall or will he not have spoken 
shall or will ice not have spoken 
shall or will you not have spoken 
shall or will they not have spoken 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 



Ne pari erais-)e pas 
ne pari erais-tu pas 
ne pari erait-il pas 
ne pari erions-nous pas 
ne pari eries-vous pas 
ne pari eraient-ils pas 



should, Would, could, or might I 
shouldst, ivouldst, couldst, or mightst thou 
should, ivould, could, or might he 
should, would, could, or might we 
should, would, could, or might you 
should, would, could, or might they 



N'aurais-je pas pari e, 
or n'eusse-je pas pari e 
n'aurais-tu pas pari e, 
or n'eusses-tu pas pari e 
n*aurait-il pas pari e, 
or n'eut-il pas pari e 
n'aurions-nous pas pari e, 
or n'eussions-nous pas pari e 
n'auriez-vous pas pari i, 
or n'eussiez-vous pas pari e 
n'auraient-ils pas pari e, 
or n'eussent-ils pas pari e 



PAST, 
or compound of the present. 

should, would, could, 

or might I not have spoken 
shouldst, ivouldst, couldst, 

or mightst thou not have spoken 
should, would, could, 

or might he not have spoken 
should, would, could, 

or might we not have spoken 
should, ivould, could, 

or might you not have spoken 
should, would, could, 

or might they not have spoken 

2f2 



48 OBSERVATIONS ON SOME VERBS. 

Of Irregularities in some Verbs of the First Conjugation. 

N. B. What follows will be better studied after the pupil shall have 
learned the other three conjugations. 

88. Of the verbs of the first conjugation ; that is, of all the verbs having 
the termination of the infinitive present, in er, (amounting to about 2500,) 
four only are, properly speaking, irregular ; that is, cannot take the termi- 
nations of the model verb, parler to speak, in all their tenses and persons : 
these verbs are, s^en oiler, pagellS.— alter , page 122.— ew2)o?/er, pagel23,— 
and r envoy er, conjugated like envoy er. 

89. However, besides these four irregular verbs, there are some, which 
though generally classed among the regular verbs of the first conjugation, 
undergo some changes in the orthography of some of their tenses and per- 
sons ; these irregularities deserve so much the more attention, as they are 
absolutely necessary to a correct pronunciation. 

90. This subject has not been clearly explained in any books published 
for the use of the English pupil. The following directions will supply the 
deficiency : 

91. Some of the verbs ending with eler — as, appeler to call, generally 
speaking, take a second I, in those tenses and persons only, in which the let- 
ter I is followed by e, es, ent. Those tenses and persons are the following : — 



f j 'appelle 

l j'appellerai 

nous appellerons 

n j'appellerais 

nous appellerions 



a que j'appelle 



tu appelles 

tu appelleras 
vous appellerez 
tu appellerais 
vous appelleriez 
appelle 

que tu appelles 



il appelle 
ils appellent 
il appellera 
ils appelleront 
il appellerait 
ils appelleraient 
qu'il appelle 
qu'ils appellent 
qu'il appelle* 
qu'ils appellent. 



92. Conjugate in the san^e manner: — atteler to put to — amonceler to 
heap — chanceler to stagger — dtteler to unteam — ttinceler to sparkle — 
Jiceler to tie with pack thread — niveler to level — rappeler to recall — rcnou- 
veler to renew. 

93. Some other verbs, ending also with eler, instead of taking a second I 
in those tenses and persons, in which the letter I is followed by e, es, ent, 
take a grave accent upon the e, which precedes the I — as, peler to peal. 



je pele 

je pelerai 

nous pelerons 
je pelerais 

nous pelerions 



a que je pele 



tu peles 

tu peleras 
vous pelerez 
tu pelerais 
vous peleriez 
pele 

que tu peles 



il pele 
ils pelent 
il pelera 
ils peleront 
il pelerait 
ils peleraient 
qu'il pele 
qu'ils pelent 
qu'il pele 
qu'ils pelent. 



94. Conjugate in the same manner : — bourreler to torment — congeler to 
congeal — degeler to thaw — geler to freeze — harceler to torment — regeler 
to freeze again. 



OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION. 



49 



95. Some of the verbs ending with eter — as, jeier to throw, take a 
second t, in those tenses and persons only in which the letter t is followed 
by e, es, ent. 



e jette 

e jette rai 
nous jette rons 

e jetterais 
nous jetter ions 



Q que je jette 



tu jettes 

tu jetteras 
vous jetterez 
tu jetterais 
vous jetteriez 
jette 

que tu jettes 



il jette 
ils jettent 
il jetter a 
ils jetteront 
il jetterait 
ils jetteraient 
qu'il jette 
qu'ils jettent 
qu'il jette 
qu'ils jettent. 



96. Conjugate in the same manner : — cacheter to seal — dicacheter to un- 
seal — projeter to project — recacheter to seal again. 

97. Some other verbs, also ending with eter, instead of taking a second t 
in those tenses and persons in which the t is followed by e, es, ent, take 
a grave accent upon the e which precedes the t — as, acheter to buy. 

f j 'achete tu achetes il achete 

ils achetent 
l j 'acheter ai tu acheter as il acheter a 

ils acheteront 
n j 'acheter ais tu acheter ais il acheterait 

ils acheteraient 
p achete qu'il achete 

qu'ils achetent 
q que j'achete que tu achetes qu'il achete 

qu'ils achetent. 
98 Conjugate in the same manner : — collet er to collar — coqueter to 
coquet — decolleter to uncover the neck — etiqueter to label — suracheter to 
overpay — trompeter to summon with sound of trumpet. 

99. Conjugate also, in the same manner, all verbs ending with 



ecer — as, depecer to carve, 


ever — as, achever 


to finish, 


emer — as, semer to sow, 


evrer — as, sewer 


to wean. 


ener — as, mener to lead, 






100. All verbs ending with 






ebrer — as, ctlebrer 


to celebrate, 




seer — as, rapitcei 


to piece, 




echer — as, lecher 


to lick, 




£der — as, posseder 


to possess, 




egler — as, regler 


to regulate, 




£gner — as, rtgner 


to reign, 




egrer — as, rtintegre 


r to reinstate, 




£guer — as, alleguer 


to allege, 




eler — as, reveler 


to reveal, 




emer — as, hlasphemt 


>r to blaspheme, 




ener — as, aliener 


to alienate, 




equer — as, hypotheqi 


ter to mortgage, 




erer — as, esperer 


to hope, 




eter — as, inquieter 


to make uneasy, 


etrer — as, penetrer 
E 


to penetrate. 





50 



OBSERVATIONS ON SOME VERBS. 



change the acute accent which is on the c of the last syllable but one t 
(the penultimate,) into a grave accent, in those tenses and persons in 
which that penultimate syllable is followed by e, es, ent — as, esperer to 
hope. 



F 
L 

N 
P 

a 



j'espere 

j'espererai 
nous espererons 
j'espererais 
nous espererions 



que j'espere 



tu esperes 

tu espereras 
vous espererez 
tu espererais 
vous espereriez 
espere 

que tu esperes 



il espere 
ils esperent 
il esperera 
ils espererons 
il espererait 
ils espereraient 
qu'il espere 
qu'ils esperent 
qu'il espere 
qu'ils esperent. 



101. In verbs ending with cer — as, avancer to advance, a cedilla, that 
is a small comma, (9) is put under the c, in those tenses and persons in 
which the c is followed by a, 0, in order to preserve the soft sound the 
c has in the infinitive present, and in other tenses and persons. See 
page 11, Art. 40. Cedilla. 

102. In verbs ending with ger — as, negliger to neglect; the g having 
the sound of;, an e mute must be put after the g, in those tenses and per- 
sons in which the g is followed by a, ; in order to preserve the sound 
of j, throughout the tenses. 

103. In the verbs ending with 

ayer — as, essayer to try, 

eyer — as, grasseyer to speak thick, 

oyer — as, employer to employ, 

uyer — as, appuyer to support, 

the y is changed into i, in those tenses and persons only, in which 
the y is followed by e, es, ent ; but y is preserved when followed by any 
other letters, even when followed by i — as, essayer to try. 

The pronunciation of this verb being very difficult, it is figured under 
every 'person. 




-a- essayer, 
e-se-y£, 

-F- j'essaie, 

j.e-se, _ 

tu essaies, 

tu e-se, 

il essaie, 

il £-se, 

-H- j'essayais, 
j.£-se-ye, _ 

tu essayais, 
tu e-se-ye, 

il essayait, 
il d-se-ye, 



-c- essayant, 
d-se-yan, 



-E- essaye, 
e-se-ye\ 



nous essayons, 
nou z.d-se-yon, 

vous essayez, 
vou z.e-se-ye, 

ils essaient. 
il z.d-se. 

nous essayions, 
nou z.e-se-yion, 

vous essayiez, 
vou z.£-se-yi£, 

ils essayaient. 
il z.6-se-ye. 



• 



-j- j'essayai, 

j.e-se-ye\ 
tu essay as, 

tu e-se-ya, 
il essaya, 

il e-se-ya, 

-L- j'essaierai, 

j.e-se-re, 
tu essaieras 

tu e-se-ra, 
il essaiera, 

il e-se-ra, 

-N- j'essaierais, 

j.e-se-re, 
tu essaierais, 

tu e-se-re, 
il essaierait, 

il £-se-re, 



i 

-P- 



essaie, 

£-se, 
qu'il essaie, 

k.il 6-sd, 



OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION. 

nous essayames, 
nou z.e-se-yam, 

vous essayates, 
vou z.e-se-yat, 

ils essayerent. 
il z.e-se-yer. 

nous essaierons, 

nou z.e-se-ron, 
vous essaierez, 

vou z.e-se-re, 
ils essaieront. 

il z.e-se-ron. 

nous essaierions, 
nou z.e-se-rion, 

vous essaieriez, 
vou z.e-se-rie, 

ils essaieraient. 
il z.e-se-re. 

essayons, 

e-se-yon, 
essayez, 

e-se-ye, 
qu'ils essaient. 

k.il z.e-se. 



5] 



-Q- que j essaie, 

ke j.e-se, 
que tu essaies, 

ke tu e-se, 
qu'il essaie, 

k.il e-se, 

-s- que j'essayasse, 

ke j.e-se-yas, 
que tu essayasses, 

ke tu e-se-yas 
qu'il essayat, 

k.il e-se-ya, 



que nous essayions, 
ke nou z.e-se -yion, 

que vous essayiez, 
ke vou z.e se-yie, 

qu'ils essaient. 
k.il z.e-se. 

que nous essayassions, 
ke nou z.e-se -ya-sion, 

que vous essayassiez, 
ke vou z.e-se-ya-sie, 

qu'ils essayassent. 
k.il z.e-se-yas. 



104. In verbs whose participle present ends with uant — as, saluant, 
from saluer to bow ; a dioeresis is put upon the i, thus, z, to cause the u 
and 2 to be pronounced separately in the first and second person plural of 
the imperfect of the indicative : nous salmons we bowed — vous salwiez 
you bowed ; and of the subjunctive present : que nous salu'ions that we 
may bow — que vous saluiez that you may bow. 

105. All the verbs of that kind are found in the first conjugation, except 
conclure to conclude — and exclure to exclude, which belong to the fourth 
sonjugation. 



52 OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 

Of the Second Conjugation. 

106. The verbs of the second conjugation, like those of the 
first, are known by the termination of the present of the in- 
finitive. 

107. The present of the infinitive of the second conjugation, 
has for termination ir — as, fin ir to finish. 

108. All verbs whose present of the infinitive end with ir, 
to the amount of about 366, are of the second conjugation ; and, 
if regular, are conjugated likejinir to finish ; which is hereaf- 
ter conjugated to be used as a model. 

109. There are in the second conjugation about 294 regular 
verbs which take the termination of finir to finish, and 92 ir- 
regular which are all conjugated in this volume, and which are 
to be found in the alphabetical list of all the irregular verbs, 
pagel62. 

110. To diminish the number of the irregular verbs of this conjuga- 
tion, several schemes have been invented. Among others, Levizac, in his 
grammar, has divided the verbs of this conjugation into four, what he 
calls branches ; this plan, which is not in accordance with any of our 
French grammars, affords no advantage over the old one, as every prac- 
tical teacher must have found out, to his great annoyance ; it is besides 
erroneous in many instances. I shall here mention some of the errors 
alluded to : page 151, Levizac's Grammar, sen tir, to feel, is there given 
as the model verb, of all the verbs composing the second branch, page 150, 
among which, are, dor mir to sleep — redor mir to sleep again — ser vir to 
serve ; and several others. 

Now taking any tense cf the model verb, sen tir to feel ; the present 
of the indicative, for instance, we shall have — 

je sen s, je dor s, je ser s, 

tu sen s, tu dor s, tu ser s, 

il sen t, il dor t, il ser t, 

nous sen tons, nous dor tons, nous ser tons, 

vous sen tez, vous dor tez, vous ser tez, 

ils sen tent, ils dor tent, ils ser tent. 

Taking any other tense, the future, for instance, we shall have — 

je sen tirai, je dor tirai, je ser tirai, 

tu sen tiras, tu dor tiras, tu ser tiras, 

il sen tira, il dor tira, il ser tira, 

nous sen lirons, nous dor tirons, nous ser tirons 

vous sen tirez, vous dor tirez, vous ser tirez, 

ils sen tiront, ils dor tiront, ils ser tiront, 

and so on for the other tenses, which are by no means correct. The fact 
is, that Levizac, deceived by the first three persons of the present of the 
indicative, which happened to be right, concluded, without further inquiry, 
that the rest would also be rig-lit. 



OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 



53 



These faults, and a great many others, are in the first edition of 
Levizac's ; since that first edition, the grammar has gone through nine 
editions in England, and through seven in America, and the same faults 
are still in it, although the preface of every edition announces that the 
work has been thoroughly revised, corrected, and improved, by the ablest 
masters. 

111. Hint. The best way for a pupil to ascertain whether a verb end- 
ing in the present of the infinitive, with ir, is regular or irregular : he 
must look for it in the alphabetical list of all the irregular verbs, given at 
page 162, if met there, the scholar will be referred to the page where it is 
conjugated ; if not to be met in the above mentioned table, it is a regular 
verb, and is to be conjugated like the model verb, Jinir to finish. 

112. Those who have already learned the verbs, will readily ascertain 
whether a verb of the second conjugation, is regular or irregular, if they 
remember that issant is the termination of the participle present, of all the 
regular verbs of the second conjugation. 

113. Conjugate in the same manner — as, fin ir to finish, 
the following verbs : — 



adouc ir 


to soften, 


gem ir 


to groan, 


compat ir 


to sympathise, 


noire ir 


to blacken, 


demol ir 


to pull down, 


per ir 


to perish, 


eblou ir 


to dazzle, 


pun ir 


to punish, 


etabl ir 


to establish, 


rempl ir 


to fill, 


fourn ir 


to furnish, 


sais ir 


to seize. 



114. For the formation of the compound tenses, see page 35, 
art. 86 and 87. 



E2 



54 SECOND CONJUGATION. FINIR to finish. 

l ami. dne. te. ecrit. mere. etre. idole. gite. op£ra. oter. tout, vowte« 
?at. arm. tub, ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 

CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB. 

Finir to finish. (Affirmatively^) 



-A- 

Fin ir 



Avoir fin i 

-c- 

Fin issant 



Ayant fin i 

-E- 

Fini 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

to finish 

PAST Or PERFECT, 

or compound of the present. 
to have finished 

PARTICIPLE PRESENT Or ACTIVE, 

finishing 

COMPOUND OF THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 

having finished 

PARTICIPLE PAST Or PASSIVE. 

finished 
INDICATIVE MOOD. 



-F- 

Je fin is 
tu fin is 
il fin it 

nous fin issons 
vous fin issez 
ils fin issent 



J'ai fin i 
tu as fin i 
il a fin i 
nous avons fin i 
vous avez fin i 
ils ont fin i 

-H- 

Je fin issais 
tu fin issais 
il fin issait 
nous fin issions 
vous fin issiez 
ils fin issaient 

-I- 




I finish, do finish, or am finishing 
thoufinishest, dost finish, or art finishing 
he finishes, does finish, or is finishing 
we finish, do finish, or are finishing 
you finish, do finish, or are finishing 
they finish, do finish, or are finishing 

PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 
or compound of the present. 
I have finished, did finish, or have been 
thou hast finished, didst finish, or hast been 
he has finished, did finish, or has been 
we have finished, did finish, or have been 
you have finished, did finish, or have been 
they have finished, did finish, or have been 

IMPERFECT. 

I finished, did finish, or was finishing 
thou finishedst, didst finish, or wast finishing 
he finished, did finish, or was finishing 
we finished, did finish, or were finishing 
you finished, did finish, or were finishing 
they finished, did finish, or were finishing 



> 



PLUPERFECT, 
or compound of the imperfect. 

J'avais fin i I had finished or had been finishing 

tu avais fin i thou hadst finished or hadst been finishing 

il avait fin i he had finished or had been finishing 

nous avions fin^ we had finished orjiad been finishing 

vous aviez fin i you had finished or had been finishing 

ils avaient fin i they had finished or had been finishing 



SECOND CONJUGATION. FINIR to finish. 55 

3 mwr. miir. jeune. jewne. boite. hoite. ancre. ingrat. onde. un. ameN. 
4 j, as s in pleasure. gn, as nz in um'on. ill, as /ft in William. 



Je fin i* 
tu fin is 
il fin it 
nous fin t'mes 
vous Unites 
ils fin iren/ 

-K- 

J'eus fin i 
tu eus fin i 
il eut fin i 
nous eflmes fin z 
vous eutes fin i 
ils eurent fin i 

-L- 

Je fin irai 
tu fin zras 
il fin ira 
nous fin irons 
vous fin zVe* 
ils fin iront 



J'aurai fin i 
tu auras fin i 
il auras fin i 
nous aurons fin i 
vous aurez fin i 
ils auront fini 



PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

I finished or did finish 
thou finishedst or didst finish 
he finished or did finish 
we finished or did finish 
you finished or did finish 
they finished or did finish 

PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the preterit. 

I had finished 
thou hadst finished 
he had finished 
we had finished 
you had finished 
they had finished 

FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

I shall or will finish 
thou shall or ivilt finish 
he shall or will finish 
we shall or willfinish 
you shall or willfinish 
they shall or willfinish 

FUTURE ANTERIOR, 

or compound of the future. 

I shall or will have finished 
thou shalt or will have finished 
he shall or will have finished 
we shall or will have finished 
you shall or will have finished 
they shall ox will have finished 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 



-N- 

Je fin irais 
tu fin irais 
il fin irait 
nous fin irions 
vous fin iriez 
ils fin iraient 

T 

J'aurais fini, 
if or feusse fini 
tu aurais fin «', 
or tu eussesfin i 
il aurait fin t, 
or il eut fin i 



I should, would, could, or might finish 

thou shouldst, ivouldst, couldst, or mightst finish 

he should, would, could, or might finish 

we should, would, could, or might finish 

you should, woiild, could, or might finish 

they should, would, could, or might finish 

PAST, 
or compound of the present. 

I should, would, could) 

or might have finished 
thou should st, wouldst, couldst \ 

or mightst have finished 
he should, ivould, could, 
or might have finished 
2G 



56 



SECOND CONJUGATION. 



finir to finish. 



x ami. tine, te. e'crit. mere. etre. idole. gzte, opera, dter. tout, voute. 
7 at. arm. tub. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 



nous aurions fin », 
or nous eussionsjin i 
vous auriez fin i, 
or vous eussiezjin i 
ils auraient fin i, 
or ils eussentjin i 



Fin w 
qu'il fin isse 
fin issons 
fin isses 
qu'ils fin wen^ 



we should, would, could, 
or might have finished 

you should, would, could, 
or might have finished 

they should, would, could, 
or might have finished 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

finish (thou) 

let him finish 

let us finish 
finish (you) 

let them finish 



-Q- 

Que je fin me 
que tu finises 
qu'il fin isse 
que nous fin issions 
que vous fin issiez 
qu'ils fin issent 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

that I may finish 
that thou may st finish 
that he may finish 
that we may finish 
that you may finish 
that they may finish 



-B- 

Que j'aie fin i 
que tu ales fin i 
qu'il ait fin i 
que nous ayons fin i 
que vous ayez fin i 
qu'ils aient fin i 



PRETERIT Or PAST, 

or compound of the present, 

that I may havefinished 
that thou mayst havefinished 
that he may havefinished 
that we may havefinished 
that you may havefinished 
that they may havefinished. 



Que je fin we 
que tu fin isses 
qu'il finlf 
que nous fin issions 
que vous fin issiez 
qu'ils fin issent 



IMPERFECT. 

that 1 might finish 
that thou mightst finish 
that he migh i finish 
that we might finish 
that you might finish 
that they might finish 



Que j'eusse fin i 
que tu eusses fin i 
qu'il eut fin i 
que nous eussions fin i 
que vous eussiez fin i 
qu'ils eussent fin i 



PLUPERFECT, 
or compound of the imperfect. 

that I might havefinished 
that thou mightst havefinished 
that he might havefinished 
that we might havefinished 
that you might havefinished 
that they might havefinished 



# 1 



SECOND CONJUGATION. FINIR tO finish. 57 

l mur. mur. jewne. jeune. boite. boite. ancre. mgrat. onde. un. araeN 
4 j, as s in pleasure, gn, as ni in union. ill, as /Zi, in Wi Hi am. 

CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB 

Finir to finish. (Negatively.) 





INFINITIVE MOOD. 


-A- 


PRESENT. 


Ne pas fin ir 


not to finish 


-B- 


PAST Or PERFECT, 




or compound of the present. 


N'avoir pas fin i 


not to have finished 


-c- 


PARTICIPLE PRESENT OT ACTIVE. 


Ne fin wsa?2i pas 


not finishing 



-D- COMPOUND OF THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 

N'ayant pas fin i not having finished 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 



Je ne fin is pas I finish not, do not finish, or am not 1 

tu ne fin is pas thoufinishest not, dost not finish, or art not | g* 

il ne fin it pas he finishes not, does not finish, or is not I £' 

nous ne fin issons pas we finish not, do not finish, or are not 

vous ne fin isses pas you finish not, do not finish, or are not i °*? 

il ne fin issent pas they finish not, do not finish, or are not J 

-G- PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 

or compound of the present. 
Je n'ai pas fin i I have not finished, did not finish, or have not 

tu n'as pas fin i thou hast no [finished, didst not finish, or hast not 

il n'a pas fin i he has not finished, did not finish, or has not 

nous n'avons pas fin i we have not finished, did not finish, or have not 
vous n'avez pas fin i you have not finished, did not finish, or have not 
ils n'ont pas fin i they have not finished, did not finish , or have not^ 

-H- IMPERFECT 

Je ne fin issais pas I finished not, did not finish, or was 

tu ne fin issais pas thou finishedst not, didst not finish, or ivast 

il ne fin issait pas he finished not, did not finish, or was 

nous ne fin issions pas we finished not, did not finish, orivere 

vous ne fin issicz pas you finished not, did not finish, or were 

ils ne fin issaient pas they finished ?wt, did not finish, or were 

-I- PLUPERFECT, 

or compound of the imperfect. 

Je n'avais pas fin i I had not finished or had not been 

tu n'avais pas fin i thou hadst not finished or hadst not been 

il n'avait pas fin i he had not finished or had not been 

nous f n'avions pas fin i we had not finished or had not been 

vous n'aviez pas fin i you had npt finished or had not been 

ils n'avaient pas fin i they had not finished or had not been 






^ 

s 



<s>. 



58 



SECOND CONJUGATION. FINIR to finish. 



'ami. ane. te. ecrit. mere. etre. idoie. gite. opera, oter. tout, \oute 
^at. arm, tub. ale. mare, there, zdiom. eel. opera, over. too. fool. 



-j- 

Je ne fin is pas 
tu ne fin is pas 
il ne fin it pas 
nous ne fin imes pas 
vous ne fin ites pas 
ils ne fin irent pas 



Je n'eus pas fin i 
tu n'eus pas fin i 
il n'eut pas fin i 
nous n'eumes pas fin i 
vous n'eutes pas fin i 
ils n'eurent pas fin i 



Je ne fin irai pas 
tu ne fin iras pas 
il ne fin ira pas 
nous ne fin irons pas 
vous ne fin ires pas 
ils ne fin iront pas 



Je n'aurai pas fin i 
tu n'auras pas fin i 
il n'aura pas fin i 
nous n'aurons pas fin i 
vous n'aurez pas fin i 
ils n'auront pas fin i 



PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

I finished not or dzd not finish 
iltoujinishtdst not or rfidta/ not finish 
he finished not or die? not finish 
we finished not or c?zd not finish 
you finished not or c?id not finish 
they finished not or didnoi finish 

PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 

or corn-pound of the -preterit. 
I had not finished 
thou hadst not finished 
he had not finished 
we had not finished 
you had not finished 
they had not finished 

FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

I shall or will not finish 
thou shalt or wilt not finish 
he shall or will not finish 
we shall or will not finish 
you shall or will not finish 
they shall or will not finish 

FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the future. 

I shall or will not have finished 
thou shalt or ivilt not have finished 
he shall or will not have finished 
we shall or will not have finished 
you shall or will not have finished 
they shall or will not have finished 





CONDITIONAL MOOD. 



-N- 

Je ne fin irais pas 
tu ne fin irais pas 
il ne fin irait pas 
nous ne fin irions pas 
vous ne fin iriez pas 
ils ne fin iraient pas 



Je n'aurais pas fin i, 
orje n'eusse pas fin i 
tu n'aurais pas fin t, 
or lu rfeussts pas fin i 
il n'aurait pas fin i, 
or il n'eut pas fin i 



PRESENT. 

J should, would, could, or might 
thoushouldst, ivouldst, couldst, or mightst 
he should, would, could, or might 
we should, would, could, or might 
you should, would, could, or might 
they should, would, could, or might 

PAST, 
or compound of the present. 
I should, would, could, 

or might not have finished 
thou shouldst, wouldst, couldst, 
or might si not have finished, 
he should, would, could, 
or might not have finished 






SECOND CONJUGATION. 



FINIR 



tojinih. 59 



3 mwr. m?2r. jeune. jewne. boite. boito. ancie. ingra.t. onde. un. amex. 
4 j, as s in pleasure, gn, as ni in a moil, ill, as Hi, in Wi/Ziam. 



nous n'aurions pas fin i, 
or nous rCeussions pas Jin i 
vous n'auriez pas tin i, 
or vous n^eussiez pas Jin i 
ils n'auraient pas fin i, 
or Us n'eussent pas Jin i 



we should, would, could, 
or might not havejinished 

you should, icould, could, 
or might not havejinished 

they should, would, could, 
or might not have Jinished 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 



Ne fin is pas 
qu'il ne fin isse pas 
ne fin issons pas 
ne fin issez pas 
qu'ils ne fin. issent pas 



{thou) 



Jinish not or do notjinish 

let him notjinish 

let us notjinish 

Jinish not or do notjinish (you) 

let them notjinish 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



Que je ne fin isse pas that I may notfinisi) 

que tu ne fin isses pas that thou mayst notjinish 

qu'il ne fin isse pas that he may notjinish 

que nous ne fin issions pas that we may notjinish 

que vous ne fin issiez pas that you may notjinish 

qu'ils ne fin issent pas that they may notjinish 



PRETERIT Or PAST, 

or compound of the present. 



Que je n'aie pas fin i 
que tu n'aies pas fin i 
qu'il n'ait pas fin i 
que nous n'ayons pas fin i 
que vous n'ayez pas fin i 
qu'ils n'aient pas fin i 



that I may not have Jinished 
that thou mayst not havejinished 
that he may not have finished 
that we may not havejinished 
that you may not have finished 
that they may not have finished 



Que je ne fin isse pas 
que tu ne fin isses pas 
qu'il ne fin it pas 
que nous ne fin issions pas 
que vous ne fin issiez pas 
qu'ils ne fin issent pas 



IMPERFECT. 

that I might notjinish 
that thou mighlst notjinish 
that he might notjinish 
that ice might notjinish 
that you might notjinish 
that they might notjinish 



-T- PLUPERFECT, 

or compound of the imperfect. 

Que je n'eusse pas fin i that I might not havejinished 
f que tu n'eusses pas fin i that thou mightsl not havejinished 
qu'il n'eut pas fku that he might not havejinished 

que nous n'eussions pas fini that ice might not havejinished 
que vous n'eussiez pas fini that you might not havejinished 
qu'ils n'eussent pas fin i that they might not havejinished 

2 g 2 



SECOND CONJUGATION. 



finir to finish. 



Wi ane te ecrit. mere. etre. tdole. gfte. "^Toter. tout. voOto. 

CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB. 

Finir to finish (Interrogatively. ) 



Fin is-]e 
fin is-tu 
fin it-i\ 

fin issons-nous 
fin issez-voua 
fin issenMls 



Ai-je fin i 
as-tu fin £ 
a-t-il fin i 
avons-nous fin % 
avez-vous fin i 
ont-ils fin i 



Fin issais-]e 
fin issais-tu 
fin issait-i\ 
fin imons-nous 
fin issies-vo\is 
fin issaier^-ils 



avais-je fin i 
avais-tu fin i 
avait-il fini 
avions-nous fin i 
aviez-vous fin i 
avaient-ils fin i 

-j- 

Fin is-jo 

fin is-tu 

fin it-W 

fin i/n^s-noua 

fin Ues-vouB 

fin irent'ils 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

do I finish or am I finishing 
dost thou finish or art thou finishing 
does he finish or is he finishing 
do we finish or are we finishing 
do you finish or are you finishing 
do they finish or are they finishing 

PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 
or compound of the present. 
have I finished or did I finish 
hast thou finished or didst thou finish 
has he finished or did he finish 
have we finished or did we finish 
have you finished or did you finish 
have they finished or did they finish 

IMPERFECT. 

did 1 finish or was I finishing 
didst thou finish or wast thou finishing 
did he finish or was he finishing 
did we finish or were we finishing 
did you finish or were you finishing 
did they finish or were they finishing 

PLUPERFECT, 
cr compound of the imperfecta 
had I finished or had I been finishing 
hadst thou finished or hadst thou been finishing 
had he finished or had he been finishing 
had wefinished or had we been finishing 
had you finished or had you ^n finishing 
had they finished or had they been finishing 

PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

did I finish 
didst thou finish 
did he finish 
did we finish 
did you finish 
did they finish 



SECOND CONJUGATION. FINIR tO finish. 61 

3 mwr. mdr. jewne. jewne. boite. bolto. ancre. t'ngrat. o/ide. nn. ameN. 
4 j, as s in pleasure, gn, as ni in union. ill, as //i, in Wi Hi am. 



Eus-je fin i 
eus-tu finz 
eut-il fin i 
eumes-nous fin i 
eutes-vous fin i 
eurent-ils fin i 



PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 

or compound of the preterit. 

had I finished 
hadst thou finished 
had he finished 
had we finished 
had you finished 
had they finished 



-L- 

Fin irai-']Q 
fin iras-tn 
fin ira-t-il 
fin irons-nous 
fin ires- vo as 
fin iront-ils 



FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

shall or will I finish 
shalt or wilt thou finish 
shall or ivill lie finish 
shall or will we finish 
shall or will you finish 
shall or will they finish 



Aurai-je fin i 
auras-tu fin i 
aura-t-il fin i 
aurons-nous fin i 
aurez-vous fin i 
auront-ils fin i 



FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the future. 

shall or will I have finished 
shalt or will thou have finished 
shall or will he have finished 
shall or will we have finished 
shall or will you have finished 
shall or will they have finished 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 

-N- PRESENT. 

Fin irais-fo should, would, could, or might I finish 

fin irais-tu shouldst, wouldst, couldst, or mightst thoufinish 

fin irait-i\ should, would, could, or might he finish 

fin irions-nous should, would, could, or might we finish 

fin iriez-vous should, would, could, or might you finish 

fin iraient-ils should, would, could, or might they finish 

.0- PAST, 

or compound of the present. 

should, would, could, 

or might I have finished 
shouldst, wouldst, couldst, 

or mightst thou have finished 
should, would, could, 

or might he have finished 
should, would, could, 

or might we have finished 
should, would, could, 

or might you have finished 
should, would, could, 

or might they have finished 



Aurais-je fin i, 
or eusse-jefin i 
aurais-tu fin i, 
lor eusses-tufin i 
aurait-il fin i, 
or eut-il fin i 
aurions-nous fin i, 
or eussions-nous fin i 
'auriez-vous fini 
or eussiez-vous fin i 
auraient-ils fin i, 
or eussent-ils fin i 

F 



62 



SECOND CONJUGATION. 



finir to finish. 



x ami. ane. te, ecrit. mere, etre. idole. gzte. opera, oter. tout, voiite 
2 at. arm. U«b. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 



CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB. 

Finir to finish. (Negatively and Interrogatively.) 



Ne fin is-]e pas 
ne fin is-tu pas 
ne fin U'il pas 
n»e fin issons-nous pas 
ne fin issez-vous pas 
ne fin issent-ils pas 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

do I not finish or am I not finishing 
dost thou not finish or art thou not finishing 
dots he not finish or is he not finishing 
do we not finish or are we not finishing 
do you not finish or are you not finishing 
do they not finish or are they not finishing 



N'ai-je pas fin i 
n'as-tu pas fin i 
n'a-t-il pas fin i 
n'avons-nous pas 



nVvez-vous pas fin i 
n'ont-ils pas fin i 



PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 
or compound of the present. 

have Inot finished, did I not finish, 

or Itave I not been finishing 
hast thou not finished, didst thou not finish^ 

or hast thou not been finishing 
has he not finished, did he not finish, 

or has he not been finishing 
have we not finished, did we not finish, 

or have we not been finishing 
have you not finished, did you not finish, 

or have you not been finishing 
have they not finished, did they not finish 

or have they not been finishing 



fin 



-H- 

Ne fin issais-je pas 
ne fin issais-tu. pas 
ne fin issait-il pas 
ne fin issions-nous pas 
ne fin issiez-\ ous pas 
ne fin issaient-ils pas 



N'avais-je pas fin i 
n'avais-tu pas fin i 
n'avait-il pas fin i 
n'avions-nous pas fin i 
n'aviez-vous pas fin i 
n'avaient-ils pas fin i 

-j- 

Ne fin is- je pas 
ne fin is-tu. pas 
ne fin it-il pas 
ne fin imes-nous pas 
ne fin ites-vous pas 
ne fin irent-ils pas 



IMPER.FECT. 

did I not finish or was I not finishing 
didst thou not finish or wast thou not finishing 
did he not finish or was he not finishing 
did we not finish or were we not finishing 
did you not finish or were you not finishing 
did they not finish or were they notjinishing 

PLUPERFECT, 
or compound of the imperfect, 
had I not finished or had I not been 
hadst thou not finished or hadst thou not been 
had he not finished or had he not been 
had we not finished or had we not been 
had you not finished or had you not been 
had they not finished or had they not been 

PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

did I not finish 
didst thou not finish 
did he not finish 
did we not finish 
did you not finish 
did they not finish 



SECOND CONJUGATION. 



finir to finish. 



63 



3 mui. mux. jewne. jemie. boite. boite. awcre. zngrat. onde. ?m. ameN. 
I 4 j, as 5 in pleasure, gn, as ni in um'on. ill, as //*', in William. 



N'eus-je pas fini 
n'eus-tu pas fin i 
n'eut-il pas fin i 
n'eumes-nous pas fin i 
n'eutes-vous pas fin i 
n'eurent-ils pas fin i 



PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 

or compound of the preterit. 

had I not finished 
hadst thou not finished 
had lie not finished 
had we not finished 
had you not finished 
had they not finished 



Ne fin irai-je pas 
ne fin iras-tu pas 
ne fin zra-t-il pas 
ne fin irons-nous pas 
ne fin irez-\o\is pas 
ne fin iront-ils pas 



FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

shall or will I not finish 
shalt or wilt thou not finish 
shall or will he not finish 
shall or will we not finish 
shall or will you not finish 
shall or will they not finish 



N'aurai-je pas fin i 
n'auras-tu pas fin i 
n'aura-t-il-pas fin i 
n'aurons-nous pas fin i 
n'aurez-vous pas fin i 
n'auront-ils pas fin i 



FUTURE ANTERIOR, 

or compound of the future. 

shall or will I not have finished 
shalt or wilt thou not have finished 
shall or will he not have finished 
shall or will we not have finished 
shall or will you not have finished 
shall or will they not have finished 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 



Ne fin irais-je pas 
ne fin irais- tu pas 
ne fin ir ail -il pas 
ne fin irions-nous pas 
ne fin mes-vous pas 
ne fin iraient-ils pas 



N'aurais-je pas fin i\ 
or n'eusse-je pas fin i 
n'aurais-tu pas fin i, 
or rteusses-tu pas fin i 
n'aurait-il pas fin i, 
or n'eut-il pas fin i 
n'aurions-nous pas fin i, 
or n^euss ions-nous pas fin 
n'auriez-vous pas fin i, 
or n'eussiez-vous pas fin i 
n'auraient-ils pas fin i, 
or n'cussent-ils pas fin i 



PRESENT. 

should, would, could, or might I 
shouldst, wouldst, couldst, or mightst thou 
should, would, could, or might he 
should, icould, could, or might we 
should, would, could, or might you 
should, would, could, or might they 

PAST, 

or compound of the present. 

should, would, could, 

or might I not have finished 
shouldst, wouldst, couldst, 

or mightst thou not havefi?iishod 
should, would, could, 

or might he not have finished 
should, would, could, 

or might we not have finished 
should, would, could, 

or might you not have finished 
should, would, could, 

or might they not have finished 



•I 



64 OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION. 

Of the Third Conjugation. 

115. The verbs of the third conjugation, like those of the 
first and of the second, are known by the termination of the 
present of the infinitive. 

116. The present of the infinitive, of the third conjugation, 
has for its termination, oir — as, recevoir to receive. 

117. All verbs whose present of the infinitive ends with oir, 
to the amount of 230, are of the third conjugation ; and If 
regular, are conjugated like recevoir to receive ; which is here- 
after conjugated, to be used as a model. 

118. There are in the third conjugation 7 regular verbs 
only. The regular verbs of this conjugation are easily known, 
from the irregular ones ; they all 7 end with evoir, in the 
present of the infinitive. 

119. There are about 223 irregular verbs in this conjugation ; 
they are all conjugated in this volume, and are to be found in 
the alphabetical list of all the irregular verbs, page 162. 

120. List of the 7 regular verbs, all conjugated like 
rec evoir to receive. 

aperc evoir to perceive, 

cone evoir to conceive, 

dec evoir to deceive, 

perc evoir to collect taxes, 

rec evoir to receive, 

d evoir to owe, 

red evoir to owe again. 

121. When the termination of any tense or person begins 
with a, o, u, the c, which terminates the radical part of the 
five regular verbs — 

aperc evoir to perceive, 

cone evoir to conceive, 

dec evoir to deceive, 

perc evoir to collect taxes, 

rec evoir to receive, 

take a cedilla, thus c, to change the hard sound the c would 
have before a, o, u, into the soft sound it has in the infinitive 
present, and in other tenses and persons, when before e. 

122. In conjugating d evoir to owe, and red evoir to owe 
again, on rec evoir, care must be taken to observe what is the 
radical part of these two verbs. 



OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION. 05 

123. In the participle past du owed, from devoir to owe, a 
circumflex accent is put over the u to distinguish du owed, 
from du of the. ■ 

124. The circumflex accent is put on du owed, in the mas- 
culine singular only. 

125. The participle past redu owed again, from redevoir to 
owe again, takes no accent. 

126. Apercevoir to perceive, which is an active verb, is 
very often used as a reflected verb : thus, s' apercevoir (to per- 
ceive one's self of) that is, to notice. We say, apercevoir quel- 
que chose to perceive something — but we say, s'apercevoir de 
quelque chose (to perceive one's self of something,) that is, to 
notice something. It must be remembered that the verb 
s^apercevoir, requires the preposition de of, before its object ; 
whereas apercevoir being an active verb, requires no preposition 
before its object. 

127. Apercevoir to perceive, forms its compound tenses with 
avoir to have, like all other active verbs. 

128. S^apercevoir to notice, is conjugated like apercevoir to 
perceive, with this difference ; that, like all other reflected 
verbs, it forms its compound tenses with etre to be, and takes 
two pronouns. See se lever to rise, page 92. 

129. For the formation of the compound tenses, see page 35, 
art. 86 and 87. 



F2 



66 THIRD CONJUGATION. 



RECEVOIR 



to receive. 



*ami. ane. te. ecrit. mere. etre. idole. gite. opera, oter. tout, voute 
7 at. arm. tub. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 



CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB. 

Recevoir to receive. (Affirmatively.) 



-A- 

Rec evoir 



Avoir reg u 

-c- 

Rec evant 

-D- 

Ayant reg u 

-E- 

Reg u 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

to receive 

PAST Or PERFECT, 

or compound of the present. 
to have received 

PARTICIPLE PRESENT Or ACTIVE. 

receiving 

COMPOUND OF THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 

having received 

PARTICIPLE PAST Or PASSIVE. 

received 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 



-F- 

Je reg ois 
tu reg ois 
il rec oit 
nous rec evons 
vous rec eves 
ils rec oivent 



J'ai rec u 
tu as rec u 
il a rec. u 
nous avons reg u 
vous avez reg u 
ils ont reg u 

-H- 

Je rec evais 
tu rec evais 
il rec evait 
nous rec evions 
vous rec evies 
ils rec evaient . 

-I- 

J'avais reg u 
tu avais reg w 
il avait reg u 
nous avions reg u 
vous aviezreg u 
ile avaient reg w 



PRESENT. 

/ receive^ do receive, or am receiving 
thou receives^ dost receive, or art receiving 
he receives, does receive, or is receiving 
we receive, do receive, or are receiving 
you receive, do receive, or are receiving 
they receive, do receive, or are receiving 

PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 

or compound of the present. 

■I have received, did receive, or have been 
thou hast received, didst receive, or hast been 
he has received, did- receive, or has been 
we have received, did receive, or have been 
you have received, did receive, or hast been 
they have received, did receive, or have been 

IMPERFECT. 

/ received, did receive, or was receiving 
thou receivedst, didst receive, or wast receiving 
he received, did receive, or was receiving 
we received, did receive, or were receiving 
you received, did receive, or were receiving 
they received, did receive, or were receiving 

PLUPERFECT, 
or compound of the imperfect. 
I had received or had been receiving 
thou hadst received or hadst been receiving 
he had received or had been receiving 
we had received or had been receiving 
you had received or had been receiving 
they had received or had been receiving 



* 



I 



third Conjugation. 



recevoir 



to receive. 67 



3 mur. mur. jeune. jeune. boite. hoite. ancre. mgrat. onde. un. ameN. 
4 j, as s in pleasure. gn, as ni in u 77 ion. ill, as Hi in Wil/iam. 



-j- 

Je re 9 us 
tu re 9 ws 
il re$ ut 
nous rec rhnes 
vous rec utes 
ils re§ urent 



J'eus re9 w 
tu eus re9 u 
il eut rec u 
nous eumes re9 u 
vous eutes re9 i£ 
ils eurent re9 u 



Je rec evrai 
tu rec evras 
il rec evra 
nous rec evrons 
vous rec evresr 
ils rec evront 

-M- 

J'aurai re9 w 
tu auras re9w 
il aura re9 u 
nous aurons re9 u 
vous aurez re9 u 
ils auront re9 u 



7 

Je rec evrais 
tu rec evrais 
il rec evrait 
nous rec cvrions 
vous rec evriez 
ils rec evraient 



) J'aurais re9 w, 
orfeusse re$ u 
tu aurais re9 w, 
or /w eusses re$ u 

, il aurait re9 w, 
or # eut re$ u 



PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

I received or did receive 
thou receivedst or didst receive 
he received or did receive 
ice received or did receive 
you received or did receive 
they received or did receive 

PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the preterit. 

I had received 
thou hadst received 
he had received 
we had received 
you had received 
they had received 

FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

I shall or will receive 
thou shall or wilt receive 
he shall or will receive 
we shall or will receive 
you shall or will receive 
they shall or will receive 

FUTURE ANTERIOR, 

or compound of the future. 

I shall or will have received 
thou shalt or wilt have received 
he shall or will have received 
we shall or will have received 
you shall or will have received 
they shall or will have received 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

/ should, would, could, or might receive 

thou shouldst, wouldst, couldst, or mightst receive 

he should, would, could, or might receive 

we should, would, could, or might receive 

you should, would, could, or might receive 

they should, would, could, or might receive ■ 

PAST, 
or compound of the present. 

I should, would, could, 

or might have received 
thou shouldst, wouldst, couldst, 

or mightst, have received 
he sJwuld, would, could 

or might have received 
2H 



68 THIRD CONJUGATION. 



reoevoir to receive. 



'ami. due. te. ecrit. mere. etre. idole. gite, opera, dter. tout. Youte 
2 at. arm. tub. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 



nous aunons reg u, 
or nous eussions re$ u 
vous auriez reg u, 
or v ous eussiez reg u 
ils auraient reg u, 
or ils eussent reg u 



Reg ois 
qu'il reg oive 
rec evons 
rec eves 
qu'ils reg oivent 



we should, would, could, 
or might have received 

you should, would, could, 
or might have received 

they should, would, could 
or might have received 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

receive (t;hou) 
let him receive 
let us receive 
receive {you) 
let them receive 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



Que je reg oive 
que tu reg oives 
qu'il reg oive 
que nous rec evions 
que vous rec eviez 
qu'ils reg oivent 



PRESENT. 

that I may receive 
that thou mayst receive 
that he may receive 
that we may receive 
that you may receive 
that they may receive 



que j'aie reg u 
que tu aies reg u 
qu'il ait reg u 
que nous ayons reg u 
que "vous ayez reg u 
qu'ils aient reg u 



Que je reg usse 
que tu reg usses 
qu'il reg ut 
que nous reg ussions 
que vous reg ussiez 
qu'ils reg ussent 



Que j'eusse reg u 
que tu eusses reg u 
qu'il eut reg u 
que nous eussions reg u 
que vous eussiez reg u 
qu'ils eussent reg u 



PRETERIT Or PAST, 
or compound of the present. 

that I may have received 
that thou mayst have received 
that he may have received 
that we may have received 
that you may have received 
that they may have received 

IMPERFECT. 

that I might receive 
that thou mightst receive 
that he might receive 
that we might receive 
that you might receive 
that they might receive 

PLUPERFECT, 

or compound of the imperfect. 

that I might have received 
that thou mightst have received 
that he might have received 
that we might have received 
that you might have received 
that they might have received 



THIRD CONJUGATION. 



recevoir to receive* 69 



3 mwr. mCa\ jeune. jeune. boz'te. boitc. ancre. z/zgrat. <mde. un. ameN. 
4 j, as 5 in pleasure, gn, as nt in union, ill, as ZZi , in Wi Hi am. 

CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB. 

Recevoir to receive. (Negatively.) 



-A- 

Ne pas rec evoir 



N'avoir pas reg u 

-c- 

Ne rec evant pas 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

not to receive 

PAST Or PERFECT, 
or compound of the present. 
not to have received 

PARTICIPLE PRESENT Or ACTIVE, 

not receiving 



-D- COMPOUND OF THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 

N'ayant pas rec u not having received 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 



PRESENT. 

1 receive not, do not receive, or am not 
thou receivest not, dost not receive, or art not 
he receives not, does not receive, or is not 
we receive not, do not receive, or are not 
you receive not, do not receive, or are not 
they receive not, do not receive, or are not 

-G- PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 

or compound of the present 

Je n'ai pas reg u I have not received, did not receive, or have not~] 

tu n'as pas reg u thou hast not received, didst not receive, or hast not 



Je ne reg ois pas 
tu ne reg ois pas 
il ne reg oit pas 
nous ne rec evons pas 
vous ne rec eves pas 
ils ne reg oiv-entpas 



* 



il n'a pas reg 



he has not received, did not receive, or has not 



i nous n'avons pas regit we have not received, did not receive, or have not 
vous n''avez pas reg u you have not received, did not receive, or have not 
ils n'ont pas reg u they have not received, did not receive, or have not 



»j 



-H- 

Je ne rec evais pas 
tu ne rec evais pas 
il ne rec evait pas 
nous ne receriowspas 
vous ne rec evies pas 
ils ne rec evaient pas 
-I- 



IMPERFECT. 

/ received not, did not receive, or was 
thou receivedst not, didst not receive, or wast 
he received not, did not receive, or was 
we received not, did not receive, or were 
you received not, did not receive, or were 
they received not, did not receive, or were 



PLUPERFECT, 

or compound of the imperfect. 

I had not received or had not been 
thou hadst not received or hadst not been 
he had not received or had not been 
nous n'avions pas reg u we had not received or had not been 
vous n'aviezpas reg u you had not received or had not been 
ils n'avaient pas reg u they had not received or had not been 



Je n'avais pas reg u 
tu n'avais pas reg u 
il n'avait pas reg u 



* 



70 THIRD CONJUGATION. 



RECEVOIR 



to receive. 



l ami. due. te. ecrit. mere. etre. idole. gite. opera, dter. tout, voute, 
2 at. arm. tub. ale. mare, there, zdiom. eel. opera, over. too. fool. 



Je ne reg us pas 
tu ne reg us pas 
il ne reg ut pas 
nous ne reg umes pas 
vous ne reg utes pas 
ils ne reg urent pas 



Je n'eus pas reg u 
tu n'eus pas reg u 
il n'eut pas reg u 
nous n'eumes pas reg u 
vous n'eutes pas reg u 
ils n'eurent pas reg u 



Je ne rec evrai pas 
tu ne rec evras pas 
il ne rec evra pas 
nous ne rec evrons pas 
vous ne rec evres pas 
ils ne rec evront pas 



Je n'aurai pas reg u 
tu n'auras pas requ 
il n'aura pas reg u 
nous n'aurons pas reg u 
vous n'aurez pas reg u 
ils n'auront pas reg u 



PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

/ received not or did not receive 
thou receivedst not or didst not receive 
he received not or did not receive 
ive received not or did not receive 
you received not or did not receive 
they received not or did not receive 

PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the preterit. 
1 had not received 
thouhadst not received 
he had not received 
we had not received 
you had not received 
they had not received 

FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

/ shall or will not receive 
thou shall or wilt not receive 
he shall or will not receive 
we shall or will not receive 
you shall or will not receive 
they shall or will not receive 

FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the future. 

I shall or will not have received 
thou shall or wilt not have received 
he shall or will not have received 
we shall or will not have received 
you shall or will not have received 
they shall or will not have received 




CONDITIONAL MOOD. 

-N- PRESENT. 

Je ne rec evrais pas / should, would, could, or might not 

tu ne rec evrais pas thou sJiouldst, wouldst, couldst, or mightst not 

il ne rec evrait pas he should, would, could, or might not 

nous ne rec evrions pas we should, would, could, or might not 

vous ne rec evries pas you should, would, could, or might not 

ils ne rec evraient pas they should, would, could, or might not 



Je n'aurais pas reg u, 
or je n^eusse pas reg u 
tu n'aurais pas reg u, 
or tu n'eusses pas regu 
il n'aurait pas reg u, 
or il n'eut pas reg u 



PAST, 
or compound of the present. 

I should, would, could, 
or might not have received 

thou sliouldsl, irouldsl, couldst, 
or mightst not have received 

he should, would, could, 
or might not have received 



THIRD CONJUGATION. 



RECEVOIR 



to receive. 71 



3 mwr. mux. jewne. jeihie. boite. boite. ancre. mgrat. onde. un. amoN. 
4 j, as s in pleasure, gn, as ni in umon. ill, as Hi, in Wi/Ziam. 



nous n'aunons pas re9 u, 
or nous n'eussions pas re$ u 
vous n'auriez pas re9 u, 
or vous n'eussiezpas ref u 
ils n'auraient pas reg u, 
or ils rteussent pas reg u 



we should, would, could, 
or might not have received 

you should, would, could, 
or might not have received 

they should, would, could, 
or might not have received 



Ne reg ois pas 
qu'il ne reg oive pas 
ne rec evons pas 
ne rec eves pas 
qu'ils ne rec, oivent pas 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

receive not or do not receive (thou) 

let him not receive 

let us not receive 

receive not or do not receive {you) 

let them not receive 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



Que je ne rec, oive pas 
que lu ne rec, oives pas 
qu'il ne rec, oive pas 
que nous ne rec evions pas 
que vous ne rec eviez pas 
qu'ils ne rec, oivent pas 



that I may not receive 
that thou mayst not receive 
that he may not receive 
that we may not receive 
that you may not receive 
that they may not receive 



Que je n'aie pas requ 
que tu n'aies pas reg u 
qu'il n'ait pas rec, u 
que nous n'ayons pas rec, u 
que vous n'ayez pas rec, u 
qu'ils n'aient pas reg u 



PRETERIT Or PAST, 

or compound of the present, 

that I may not have received 
that thou mayst not have received 
that he may not have received 
that we may not have received 
that you may not have received 
that they may not have received 



Que je ne reg usse pas 
que tu ne reg usses pas 
qu'il ne reg ut pas 
que nous ne reg ussions pas 
que vous ne reg ussiez pas 
qu'ils ne reg ussent pas 



IMPERFECT. 

that I might not receive 
that thou mightst not receive 
that he might not receive 
that we might not receive 
that you might not receive 
that they might not receive 



PLUPERFECT, 

or compound of the imperfect. 



Que je n'eusse pas reg u 
que tu n'eusses pas reg u 
qu'il n'eiit pas reg u 
que nous n'eussions pas reg it 
que vous n'eussiez pas reg u 
qu'ils n'eussent pas reg u 



that I might not have received 
that thou mightst not have received 
that he might not have received 
that we might not have received 
that you might not have received 
that they might not have received 
2 a 2 



7£ THIRD CONJUGATION. 



RECEVOIR 



to receive. 



'ami. ane. te. ecrit. mere. etre. zdole. gite. opera, oter. tout, voute. 
2 at. arm. twb. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 

CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB. 

Recevqir to receive. (Interrogatively.) 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



-F- 

Reg ow-je 
reg ois-tu 
reg oit-il 
rec evons-nous 
rec eve^-vous 
reg owen^-ils 



Ai-je reg u 
as-tu reg w 
a-t-il reg u 
avons-nous reg u 
avez-vous rec u 
ont-ils reg u 

-fl- 
it ec evais-]e 
rec evais-tu. 
rec evait-il 
rec evions-nous 
rec evies-vous 
rec evaient-ils 



Avais-je reg u 
avais-tu reg u 
avait-il reg u 
avions-nous reg u 
aviez-vous reg u 
avaient-ils regw 



Reg ws-je 
reg us-ivi 
reg ut-i\ 
reg umes-nous 
reg utes-vous 
reg urent-ils 



do I receive or am I receiving 
dost thou receive or art thou receiving 
does he receive or is he receiving 
do we receive or are we receiving 
do you receive or are you receiving 
do they receive or are they receiving 

PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 

or compound of the present. 

have I received or did I receive 
hast thou received or didst thou receive 
has he received or did lie receive 
have we received or did we receive 
have you received or did you receive 
have they received or did they receive 

IMPERFECT. 

did I receive or was I receiving 
didst thou receive or wast thou receiving 
did he receive or was he receiving 
did we receive or were we receiving 
did you receive or were you receiving 
did they receive or were they receiving 

PLUPERFECT, 
or compound of the imperfect. 

had I received or had I been receiving 
hadst thou received or hadst thou been receiving 
had he received or had he been receiving 
had we received or had we been receiving 
had you received or had you been receiving 
had they received or had they been receiving 

PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

did I receive 
didst thou receive 
did he receive 
did we receive 
did you receive 
did they receive 



i 



THIRD CONJUGATION. 



RE CE VOIR 



to receive. 



s rawr. mar. jei/ne. jeime. boite. bo/te. ff??cre. ingra.t. onde. un. ameN. 
4 j, as s in pleasure. gn. as ni in union. ill, as Hi in WW/iam. 



Eus-je re 9 u 
eas-tu rec u 
eut-il rec. u 
eumes-nous reg u 
eiites- vous re 9 u 
eurent-ils reg u 



PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
cr compound of the preterit, 
had I received 
hadst thou received 
had he received 
had we received 
had you received 
had they received 



-L- 

Rec evrai-je 
rec evras-tu 
rec evra-t-\\ 
rec evrons-nous 
rec evres-vous 
rec evronl-ils 



Aurai-je reg u 
auras-tu teq u 
aura-t-il reg u 
aurons-nous rec. u 
aurez-vous reg u 
auront-ils reg u 



FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

shall or will I receive 
shall or wilt thou receive 
shall or will he receive 
shall or will ice receive 
shall or will you receive 
shall or will they receive 

FUTURE ANTERIOR, 

or compound of the future. 

shall or will I have received 
shall or wilt thou have received 
shall or will lie have received 
shall or will we have received 
shall or will you have received 
shall or will they have received 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 



Rec evrais-je 

rec ev r a is -tu 
rec evrait-'il 
rec evr ions-nous 
rec cvriez-vous 
rec evraie?it-ils 



Aurak-je reg u, 
or eusse-je reg u 

aurais-tu rec u, 
or eusses-tu reg u 
aurait-il rec w, 
or eut-il rec, u 
aurions-nous reg u, 
or eussions-nous reg u 
auriez-vous reg u, 
or eussiez-vous reg u 
auraient-ils rec u, 
or eussent-ils reg u 



should, would, could, or might I receive 
shoiddsl.wouldst, couldst. or mighlst thoureceivc 
should, would, could, or might he receive 
should, would, could, or might we receive 
should, would, could* or might you receive 
should, would, could) or might they receive 

PAST, 
cr compound of the present. 

should, would, could, 

cr might I have received 
shouldst, wouhist, couldst, 

or mighlst thou have received 
should, would, could, 

or might he have received 
should, would, could, 

or might we have received 
should, would, could, 

or might you have received 
should, would, could, 

or might they have received 



74 THIRD CONJUGATION. 



RECEVOIR 



to receive. 



l ami. due. te. ecrit. mere. etre. -idole. gite % opera, dter. tout, voute. 
^at. arm. twb. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 

CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB. 

Recevoir to receive. (Negatively and Interrogatively. \ 



Ne reg ois-je pas 
ne reg ow-tu pas 
ne reg oit-\\ pas 
ne rec evons-nous pas 
ne rec eves-vous pas 
ne reg owen/-ils pas 



N'ai-je pas reg u 
n'as-tu pas reg u 
n'a-t-il pas reg u 
n^vons-nous pas reg u 
n'avez-vous pas reg u 
n'ont-ils pas reg u 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

do I not receive or am I not receiving 
dost thou not receive or art thou not receiving 
does he not receive or is he not receiving 
do we not receive or are we not receiving 
do you not receive or are you not receiving 
do they not receive or are they not receiving 

PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 

or compound of the present. 

have I not received, did I not receive, 

or have I not been receiving 
hast thou not received, didst thou not receive 

or hast thou not been receiving 
has he not received, did he not receive, 

or has he not been receiving 
have we not received, did we not receive, 

or have we not been receiving 
have you not received, did you not receive, 

or have you not been receiving 
have they not received, did they not receive 

or have they not been receiving 



Ne rec evais-]e pas 
ne rec evais-tu pas 
ne rec evait-i\ pas 
ne rec evions-noxis pas 
ne rec evies-vous pas 
ne rec euaie/i/-ils pas 



N'avais-je pas reg u 
n'avais-tu pas reg u 
n'avait-il pas reg u 
n'avions-nous pas reg u 
n'aviez-vous pas reg u 
n'avaient-ils pas reg u 

-j- 

Ne reg us-\e pas 
ne reg 7/5-tu pas 
ne reg ut-'i\ pas 
ne reg umes-nous pas 
ne reg utes-vous pas 
ne reg urent-ils pas 



IMPERFECT. 

did I not receive or was I not receiving 
didst thou not receive or wast thou not receiving 
did he not receive or was he not receiving 
did we not receive or were we not receiving 
did you not receive or were you not receiving 
did they not receive or were they not receiving 

PLUPERFECT, 

or compound of the imperfect. 

had 1 not received or had I not been 
hadst thou not received or hadst thou not been 
had he not received or had he not been 
had we not received or had we not been 
had, you not received or had you not been 
had they not received or had they not been 

PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

did I not receive 
didst thou not receive 
did he not receive 
did we not receive 
did you not receive 
did they not receive 



THIRD CONJUGATION. 



RECEVOIR 



to receive. 15 



3 raur. mur. jcwne. jewne. boile. boito. ancie. ingrat. onde. un. ameN. 
4 j, as 5 in pleasure. gn, as ni in union, ill, as Hi, in Wi lli am. 



N'eus-je pas reg u 
n'eus-tu pas reg u 
n'eut-il pas reg u 
n'eumes-nous pas reg u 
n'eutes-vous pas reg u 
n'eurent-ils pas reg u 



Ne rec evrai-je pas 
ne rec cvras-tu. pas 
ne rec evra-t-i\ pas 
ne rec evrons-nous pas 
ne rec evrez-\ous pas 
ne rec evront-ils pas 



N'aurai-je pas reg it 
n'auras-tu pas reg u 
n'aura-t-il pas reg u 
n'aurons-nous pas reg u 
n'aurez-vous pas reg u 
n'auront-ils pas reg u 



PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the preterit. 

had I not received 
hadst thou not received 
had he not received 
had we not received 
had you not received 
had they not received 

FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

shall or will I not receive 
shall or wilt thou not receive 
shall or will he not receive 
shall or will we not receive 
shall or will you not receive 
shall or will thty not receive 

FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the future. 

sJiall or will I not have received 
slialt or wilt thou not have received 
shall or will he not have received 
shall or will we not have received 
shall or will you not have received 
shall or will they not have received 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 



-N- 

Ne rec evrais-)e pas 
ne rec evrais-tu. pas 
ne rec evrait -il pas 
ne rec cvrions-nous pas 
ne rec evries-voas pas 
ne rec evraienl -ils pas 



PRESENT. 

should, would, could, or might I 
shouldstj wouldst, couldst, or mights t thou 
should, would, could, or might he 
should, would, could, or might we 
should, would, could, or might you 
should, would, could, or might they 



N'aurais-je pas reg u, 
or n'eussse-je pas reg u 
n'aurais-tu pas reg u, 
or n'eusses-tu pas reg u 
n'aurait-il pas reg w, 
: or n'eut-il pas reg u 
n'aurions-nous pas reg u, 
or rt eussions-nous pas reg u 
n'auriez-vous pas reg u 9 
or n'eussiez-vous pas reg u 
n'auraient-ils pas reg u, 
or rfeussent-ils pas reg u 



PAST, 
or compound of the present. 

should, would, could, 

or might I not have received 
shouldst, wouldst, couldst, 

or migldst, thou not have received 
should, would, could, 

or might he not have received 
should, would, could, 

or might we not have received 
should, would, could, 

or might you not have received 
should, would, could, 

or might they noj^ave received 



76 



F THE FOUSTH CONJUGATION. 



Of the Fourth Conjugation. 

130. The verbs of the fourth conjugation, like those of the 
first, second, and third, are known by the termination of the 
present of the infinitive. 

131. The present of the infinitive of the fourth conjugation, 
has for its termination re — as, vend re to sell. 

132. All verbs, whose present of the infinitive ends with re, 
to the amount of about 240, are of the fourth conjugation ; and 
if regular, are conjugated like vend re to sell, which is here- 
after conjugated, to be used as a model. 

133. There are in the fourth conjugation 40 regular verbs 
which take the termination of vend re to sell. 



134. Tliey are- 






append re 


to hang up, 


mord re 


to bite, 


attend re 


to wait, to expect, 


m or fond re 


to make very cold, 




to wait for, 


parfbnd re 


to melt equally, 


confond re 


to confound, 


pend re 


to hang, 


correspond re 


to correspond, 


perd re 


to lose, to destroy, 


defend re 


to defend, 


pond re 


to lay eggs, 




to prohibit, 


pourfend re 


to split, to cut in two, 




to forbid, 


pretend re 


to pretend, 


demord re 


to give up, 


refend re 


to cleave again, 




to cease biting, 




to split again, 


depend re 


to take down, 


refond re 


to melt again, 




to depend on or uuon, 




to cast again, 


descend, re 


to go down, 


remord re 


to bite again, 




to descend, 


rend re 


to render, to 




to take down, 




return, to give back, 


detend re 


to unbend, 


repand re 


to spill, to shed, 




to loosen, 


repond re 


to answer, to reply, 


detord re 


to untwist, 


retord re 


to twist again, 


distend re 


to distend, 


revend re 


to sell again, 




to extend, 


sous-entend re 


to understand, 


entend re 


to hear, 




not to express, 




to understand, 


survend re 


to sell too dear, 




to comprehend, 


suspend re 


to suspend, 


epand re 


to spread, 


tend re 


to hold out, 


etand re 


to spread, 




to stretch out, 


fend re 


to cleave, 




to bend, 




to split, 


tond re 


to shear, 


fond re 


to melt, 


tord re 


to twist, 


mevend re 


to undersell, 


vend re 


to sell. 



135. All the other verbs whose present of the infinitive ends 
with re, and not included in the above list, are irregular, and 
are to be found in the alphabetical list of all the irregular 
verbs, page 162. 



OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 77 

136. Those who have already learned the verbs, will readily 
ascertain, without having recourse to the above table of the 
regular verbs, whether a verb, whose present of the infinitive 
ends with re, is regular or irregular, if they remember that 
clant terminates the participle present of all the regular verbs 
of the fourth conjugation. 

137. The third person singular of the present of the indica- 
tive of this conjugation, consists of the radical part of the verb 
only, it does not take any termination. 

138. Observe, that when vendre to sell, like several other 
verbs, mentioned in page 8, art. 65, is conjugated Interroga- 
tively or Negatively and Interrogatively, the first person sin- 
gular of the present of the indicative, is not conjugated like 
other verbs; for the reason of this deviation, see page 8, 
art. 65. 

139. For the formation of the compound tenses, see page 
35, art. 86 and 87. 

G2 



78 FOURTH CONJUGATION. 



VENDRE 



to sell. 



l ami. dnc. te. ecrit. mere. etre. idole. gite. opera, oter. tout, voute. 
2 at. arm. tub. ale. mare, there, zdiom. eel. opera, over. too. fool. 

CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB. 

Vendre to sell. (Affirmatively.) 



A- 

Vend re 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

to sell 



Avoir vend u 

-o 

Vend ant 



PAST Or PERFECT, 

or compound of the present. 
to have sold 

PARTICIPLE PRESENT Or ACTIVE, 

selling 

-D- COMPOUND OF THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 

Ayant vend u having sold 

_E- PARTICIPLE PAST Or PASSIVE. 

Vend u sold 

INDICATIVE MOOD 

_ F - PRESENT. 

Je vend s I sell, do sell, or am selling 

tu vend s thou sellest, dost sell, or art selling 

il vend he sells, does sell, or is selling 

nous vend ons we sell, do sell, or are selling 

vous vend ez you sell, do sell, or are selling 

ils vend ent they sell, do sell, or are selling 

„ G - PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE 

or compound of the present. 
I have sold, did sell, or have been selling 
thou hast sold, didst sell, or hast been selling 
he has sold, did sell, or has been selling 
we have sold, did sell, or have been selling 
you have sold, did sell, or have been selling 
they have sold, did sell, or have been selling 

IMPERFECT. 

i" sold, did sell, or was selling 
thousoldest,didst sell, or wast selling 
he sold, did sell, or was selling 
we sold, did sell, or were selling 
you sold, did sell, or were selling 
they sold, did sell, or were selling 



J'ai vend u 
tu as vend u 
il a vend u 
nous avons vend u 
vous avez vend u 
ils ont vend u 

-H- 

Je vend ais 
tu vend ais 
il vend ait 
nous vend ions 
vous vend ies 
ils vend aient 

-i- 



J'avais vend u 
tu av ais vend u 
il avait vend u 
nous avions vend u 
vous aviez vend u 
ils avaient vend u 



PLUPERFECT, 

or compound of the imperfect. 
I had sold or had been selling 
thou hadst sold or hadst been selling 
he had sold or had been selling 
v;e had sold or had been selling 
you h ad sold or had been selling 
they had sold or had been selling 



FOURTH CONJUGATION. 



VENDUE 



to sell. 79 



3 mur. mux. jewne. jeane. bo*te. boito. ancre. mgrat. ojide. un. ameN. 
4 j, as s in pleasure, gn, as ni in union. ill, as lli, in WiZZiam. 



Je vend 2> 
tu vend z's 
iivend i/ 
nous vend imcs 
vous vend ties 
ils vend irm/ 



J'eus vend u 
tu eus vend u 
il eut vend w 
nous eiimes vend u 
vous eutes vend u 
ils eurent vend u 

-L- 

Je vend rai 
tu vend ms 
il vend ra 
nous vend rons 
vous vend res 
ils vend ron/ 

-M- 

J'aurai vend u 
tu auras vend u 
il aura vend u 
nous aurons vend u 
vous aurez vend w 
ils auront vendw 



-N- 

Je vend rais 
tu vend rais 
il vend rait 
nous vend rions 
, vous vend ries 
ils vend raient 



I 

f J'aurais vend u, 
or feusse vend u 
tu aurais vend u, 
01 tu eusses vend u 
ii aurait vend u, 
or il eut vend u 



PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

Isold or did sell 
thousoldest, or dZrfs/ scZ/ 
/ie sold or rf/rf se/Z 
we sold or tfzYZ seZZ 
t/ow sold or d/rf se/Z 
//ley sold or <Zid se/Z 

PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the preterit* 
I had sold 
thou hadst sold 
he Iiad sold 
we had sold 
you had sold 
they had sold 

FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

/ shall or will sell 
thou shall or will sell 
he shall or icill sell 
we shall or will sell 
you s/tall or will sell 
they shall or will sell 

FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the future. 

1 shall or will have sold 
thou shall or wilt have sold 
he shall or will have sold 
we shall or will have sold 
you shall or will have sold 
they shall or ivill have sold 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

I should, would, could, or might sell 

thou shouldst, wouldst,couldst, or mightst sett 

he should, would, could, or might sell 

we should, would, could, or might sell 

you should, would, could, or might sell 

they should, would, could, or might sell 



PAST, 

of the present. 
I should, would, could, 

or might have sold 
thou shouldst, wouldst, couldst t 

or mighlsl have sold 
he should, would, could, 
or might have sold 
21 



80 FOURTH CONJUGATION. 



VENDRE 



to sell. 



l ami. ane. te. ecrit, mere. etre. zdole. gite, opera, dter. tout, voiite. 
2 at. arm. tub. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool." 



nous aurions vend u, 
or ?irus eussions vend u 
vous auriez vend u, 
or vous eussiez vend u 
ils auraient vend u, 
or ils eussent vend u 



we should, would, could, 
or might have sold 

you should, would, could, 
or might have sold 

they should, would, could) 
or might have sold 



Vend s 
qu'il vend e 
vend ons 
vend ez 
qu'ils vend ent 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

sell (thou) 
let him sell 
let us sell 
sell (you) 
let them sell 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



Que je vend e 
que tu vend es 
qu'il vend e 
que nous vend ions 
que vous vend iez 
qu'il vend ent 



Que j'aie vendw 
que cu aies vend u 
qu'il ait vend u 
que nous ayons vend u 
que vous ayez vend u 
qu'ils aient vend u 



Que je vend isse 
que tu vend isses 
qu'il vend it 
que nousvend issions 
que 'vous vend issiez 
qu'ils vend issent 



that I may sell 
that thou mayst sell 
that he may sell 
that we may sell 
that you may sell 
that they may sell 

PRETERIT Or PAST, 
or compound of the present, 

that I may have sold 
that thou mayst have sold 
that he may have sold 
that we may have sold 
that you may have sold 
that they may have sold 

IMPERFECT. 

that I might sell 
that thou mightst sell 
that he might sell 
that we might sell 
that you might sell 
that they might sell 



Que j'eusse vendw 
que tu eusses vend u 
qu'il eut vend u 
que nous eussions vend u 
que vous eussiez vendw 
qu'ils eussent vend u 



PLUPERFECT, 

compound of the imperfect. 

that I might have sold 
that thou mightst have sold 
that he might have sold 
that we might have sold 
that you might have sold 
that they might have sold 



FOURTH CONJUGATION. 



VENDRE 



to sell. 81 



2 mur. mwr. jeime. jewne. boi'te. boitc. ancre, ingrat. onde. un. amen. 
4 j, as s in pleasure, gn, as ni in union, ill, as Z/i, in Wi Hi am. 

CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB. 

Vend re to sell. (Negatively.) 



Ne pas vend re 



N'avoir pas vend u 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

not lo sell 

PAST Or PERFECT, 
or compound of the present, 
not lo have sold 



-C- PARTICIPLE PRESENT Or ACTIVE. 

Ne vend ant pas not selling 

-D- COMPOUND OF THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 

N'ayant pas vend u not having sold 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



-F- 

Je ne vend 5 pas 
tu ne vend 5 pas 
il ne vend pas 
nous ne vend ons pas 
vous ne vend ez pas 
ils ne vend ent pas 

-G- 



PRESENT. 

I sell not, do not sell, or am not selling 
thou sellesl not, dost not sell, or art not selling 
he sells not, does not sell, or is not selling 
we sell not, do not sell, or are not selling 
you sell not, do not sell, or are not selling 
they sell not, do not sell, or are not selling 

PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 
or compound of the present. 

Je n'ai pas vend u I have not sold, did not sell, or have not 

tu n'as pas vend u thou hast not sold, didst not sell, or hast not 

il n'a pas vend u he has not sold, did not sell, or has not 

nous n'avons pas vend u we have not sold, did not sell, or have not 

vous n'avez pas vend u you have not sold, did not sell, or have not 

ils n'ont pas vend u they have not sold, did not sell, or have not 

-H- IMPERFECT. 

/ sold not, did not sell, or was not selling 
thou soldest not, didst not sell, ox wast not selling 
he sold not, did not sell, or was not selling 
we SGld not, did not sell, or were not selling 
you sold not, did not sell, or were not selling 
they sold not, did not sell, or were not selling 

PLUPERFECT, 
or compound of the imperfect. 
I had not sold or had not been selling 
thou hadst not sold or hadst not been selling 
he had not sold or had not been selling 
nous n'avions pas vend u we had not sold or had not been selling 
vous n'aviez pas vend u you had not sold or had not been selling 
ils n'avaient pas vend u they had not sold or had not been selling 



Je ne vend ais pas 
tu ne vend ais pas 
il ne vend ait pas 
nous ne vend ions pas 
vous ne vend ies pas 
ils ne vend aient pas 



Je n'avais pas vend u 
tu n'avais pas vend u 
il n'avait pas vend u 



82 FOURTH CONJUGATION. 



to sell. 



^mi. ane. te. ecrit. mere. etre. idole. gite, opera, dter. tout, voute. 
*at. arm. tab. ale. mare, there, zdiora. eel. opera, over. too. fool. 



Je ne vend is pas 
tu ne vend is pas 
il ne vend it pas 
nous ne vend imes pas 
vous ne vend ites pas 
ils ne vend irenl pas 



Je n'eus pas vend u 
tu n 1 eus pas vend u 
il n'eut pas vend u 
nous n'eumes pas vend u 
vous n'eutes pas vend u 
ils n'eurent pas vend u 



Je ne vend rai pas 
tu ne vend ras pas 
il ne vend ra pas 
nous ne vend rons pas 
vous ne vend res pas 
ils ne vend ront pas 



Je n'aural pas vend u 
tu n'auras pas vend u 
il n'aura pas vend u 
nous n'aurons pas vend u 
vous n'aurez pas vend u 
ils n'auront pas vend u 



PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

/ sold not or did not sell 
thou soldest not or didst not sell 
he sold not or did not sell 
we sold not or did not sell 
you sold not or did not sell 
they sold not or did not sell 

PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the preterit. 

I had not sold 
thou hadst not sold 
he had not sold 
we had not sold 
you had not sold 
they had not sold 

FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

I shall or will not sell 
thou shall or wilt not sell 
he shall or will not sell 
we shall or will not sell 
you shall or will not sell 
they shall or will not sell 

FUTURE ANTERIOR, 

or compound of the future. 

I shall or will not have sold 
thou shall or will not have sold 
he shall or will not have sold 
we shall or will not have sold 
you shall or will not have sold 
they shall or will not have sold 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 



-N- 

Je ne vend rais pas 
tu ne vend rais pas 
il ne vend rait pas 
nous ne vend rions pas 
vous ne vend ries pas 
ils ne vend raient pas 



Je n'aurais pas vend w, 
or je n'eusscpas vend u 
tu n'aurais pas vend w, 
or tu n'eusses pas vend u 
il n'aurait pas vend w, 
or il n^eut pas vend u 



PRESENT. 

I ihould, would, could, or might 

thou shouldsl, wouldst, couldst, or mightst 

he should, would, could, or might 

we should, would, could, or might 

you should, would, could, or might 

they should, would, could, or might 



PAST, 

or compound of the present. 

I should, vjould, could, 

or might not have sold 
thou shouldst, wouldst, couldst, 

or mightst not have sold 
he should, would, could, 

or might not have sold 



FOURTH CONJUGATION. VENDRE to SelL 88 

3 m«r. mur. jeime. jetme. boite. boite. ancre. ingrat. onde. un, ameir. 
4 j, as s in pleasure. gn, as ?zz in um'on. ill, as Z& in Wi/Zianu 

nous n'aurions pas vend it, we should, would, could. 
or now* rCeussions pas vendu or might not have sold 

vous n'auriez pas vend w i/ow should, would, could, 
or vows rieussiez pas vend u or might not have sold 

ils n'auraienl pas vend u, they should, icould, could, 
or ils n'eussent pas vend u or might not have sold 

-P- IMPERATIVE MOOD 

Ne vend s pas sell not or do not sell (thou) 

qu'il ne vend e pas let him not sell 

ne vend ons pas Ze/ ws not sell 

ne vend es pas sell not or do not sell (you) 

qu'ils ne vend ent pas let them not sell 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

-Q, PRESENT. 

Que je ne vend e pas Ma/ / may not sell 

que tu ne vend es pas that thou mayst not sell 

qu'il ne vend e pas that he may not sell 

que nous ne vend ions pas that ive may not sell 

que vous ne vend iez pas that you may not sell 

qu'ils ne vend ent pas that they may not sell 

-R- PRETERIT Or PAST, 

or compound of the present. 

Que je n'aie pas vend u that I may not have sold 

que tu n'aies pas vend u that thou mayst not have sold 

qu'il n'ait pas vend u that he may not have sold 

que nous n'ayons pas vend u that we may not have sold 

que vous n'ayez pas vend u that you may not have sold 

qu'ils n'aient pas vend u that they may not have sold 

-S- IMPERFECT. 

Que je ne vend isse pas that I might not sell 

que tu ne vend isses pas that thou mightst not sell 

qu'il ne vend it pas that he might not sell 

que nous ne vend issions pas that we might not sell 

que vous ne vend issies pas that you might not sell 

qu'ils ne vend issent pas that they /night not sell 

-T- PLUPERFECT, 

j or compound of the imperfect. 

Que je n'eusse pas vend u that I might not have sold 

que tu n'eusses pas vend u that thou mightst not have sold' 

qu'il n'eut pas vend u that he might not have sold 

que nous n'eussions pas vend u that we might not have sold 
que vous n'eussiez pas vend u that you might not have sold 
qu'ils n'eussent pas vend u that they might not have sold 

2 i 2 



84 FOURTH CONJUGATION. 



VENDUE 



to sell. 



l ami. ane. te. ccrit. ratie. etre. idole. gite. opera, oter. tout, voute. 
2 at. arm. tub. ale. mare, there, -idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 

CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB. 

Vend re to sell (Interrogatively.) 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



Est-ce que je vendst 

vend s-tu 

vend-il 

vend ons-nous 

vend es-vous 

vend ent-ils 



PRESENT. 

do I sell or am I selling 
dost thou sell or art thou selling 
does he sell or is he selling 
do we sell or are we selling 
do you sell or are you selling 
do they sell or are they selling 



PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 

or compound of the present. 



Ai-je vendt« 
as-tu vend u 
a-t-il vend u 
avons-nous vend u 
avez-vous vend u 
ont-ils vend u 



Vend ais-]e 
vend ais-t\x 
vend ait-il 
vend ions-nous 
vend ies-vous 
vend aienl-lls 



Avais-je vend u 
avais-tu vend u 
avait-il vend u 
avions-nous vend u 
aviez-vous vend u 
avaient-ils vend u 



Vend is-]Q 
vend is-txi 
vend it-i\ 
vend imes-no\ia 
vend z^es-vous 
vend irent-ila 



have I sold or did I sell 
hadst thou sold or didst thou sell 
has he sold or did he sell 
have we sold or did we sell 
have you sold or did you sell 
have they sold or did they sell 

IMPERFECT. 

did I sell or vms 1 selling 
didst thou sell or wast thou selling 
did he sell or was he selling 
did we sell or were we selling 
did you sell or were you selling 
did they sell or were they selling 

PLUPERFECT, 
or compound of the imperfect. 

had I sold or had I been selling 
hadst thou sold or hadst thou been selling 
had he sold or had he been selling 
had we sold or had we been selling 
had you sold or had you been selling 
had they sold or had they been selling 

PRETERIT DEFINITE, 

did I sell 
didst thou sell 
did he sell 
did we sell 
did you sell 
did they sell 

tSee page 8, art. 65. 




FOURTH CONJUGATION. 



VEND RE 



to sell. 85 



3 mwr. mwr. jeune. jeune. hoite. boito. ancie, mgrat. onde. un. ameN. 
4 j, as s in pleasure. gn 9 as m in union, ill, as /Zi, in Wi Hi am. 



Eus-je vend u 
eus-tu vend u 
eut-il vend u 
eumes-nous vend u 
eutes-vous vend u 
eurent-ils vend u 

-L- 

Vend rai-je 
vend ras-tu 
vend ra-t-il 
vend rows-nous 
vendres-vous 
vend ropJ-ils 



PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the preterit. 
had I sold 
hadst thou sold 
had he sold 
had we sold 
had you sold 
had they sold 

FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

shall or will I sell 
shall or wilt thou sell 
shall or will he sell 
shall or will we sell 
shall or will you sell 
shall or will they sell 



Aurai-je vend u 
auras-tu vend u 
aura-t-il vend u 
aurons-nous vend u 
aurez-vous vend u 
auront-il vend u 



FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the future. 

shall or will I have sold 
shall or wilt thou have sold 
shall or ivill he have sold 
shall or will we have sold 
shall or will you have sold 
shall or will they have sold 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 



-N- PRESENT. 

Vend raw-je should, would, could, or might I sell 

vend rais- tu shouldst, wouldst, couldst, or mightst thou sell 

vend rait-il should, would, could, or might he sell 

vend rims-nous should, ivould, could, or might we sell 

vend ries-vous should, would, could, or might you sell 

vend raie?it~ils should, would, could, or might they sell 



Aurais-je vend u, 
or eusse-je vend u 
aurais-tu vend u 9 
or eusses-tu vendu 
aurait-il vend u, 
or eut-il vendu 
aurions-nous vend u, 
or eussions-nous vend u 
auriez-vous vend u, 
or evssiez-vous vend u 
auraient-ils vend u, 
or eussent-ils vend u 



PAST, 
or compound of the present 

should, would, could, 

or might I have sold 
shouldst, wouldst, couldst, 

or mightst thou have sold 
should, ivould, could, 

or might he have sold 
should, would, could, 

or might we have sold 
should, would, could, 

or might you have sold 
should, would, could, 

or might they have sold 



H 



FOURTH CONJUGATION. 



VENDRE 



to sell. 



l ami. ane. te. eerit. mere. etre. idole. gzte. opera, oter. tout, vowte. 
7 at. arm. Utb. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 

CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR VERB. 

Vend re to sell. (Negatively and Interrogatively.) 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 

-F- PRESENT. 

Est-ce que je ne vend s pas do I not sell or am I not selling 
ne vend s-tu pas dost thou not sell or art thou not selling 

ne vend-il pas does he not sell or is he not selling 

ne vend ons-nons pas do we not sell or are we not selling 

ne vend es-vous pas do you not sell or are you not selling 

ne vend ent-ils pas do they not sell or are they not selling 

^G- PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 

or compound of the present. 



N'ai-je pas vend u 
n'as-tu pas^ vend u 
n'a-t-il pas vend u 
n'avons-nous pas vend u 
n'avez-vous pas vend u 
n'ont-ils pas vend u 



Ne vend ais~]e pas 
ne vend ais-tu pas 
ne vend ail-il pas 
ne vend ions-nous pas 
ne vend ies-vous pas 
ne vend aient-ils pas 



N'avais-je pas vend u 
n'avais-tu pas vend u 
n'avait-il pas vend u 
n'avions-nous pas vend u 
n'aviez-vous pas vend u 
n'avaient-ils pas vend u 

-j- 

Ne vend is-je pas 

ne vend is-tu pas 

ne vend il-i\ pas 

ne vend zmes-nons pas 

ne vend iles-vous pas 

ne vend irent-ih pas 



have I not sold, did I not sell, 

or have I not been selling 
hast thou not sold, aidst thou not sell, 

or hast thou not been selling 
has he not sold, did he not sell, 

or has he not been selling 
have we not sold, did we not sell, 

or have we not been selling 
have you not sold, did you not sell, 

or have you not been selling 
have they not sold, did they not sell, 

or have they not been selling 

IMPERFECT. 

did I not sell or was I not selling 
didst thou not sell, or wast thou not selling 
did he not sell or was he not selling 
did we not sell or were we not selling 
did you not sell or were you not selling 
did they not sell or were they not selling 

PLUPERFECT, 
compound of the imperfect, 
had I not sold or had I not been 
hadst thou not sold or hadst thou not been 
had he not sold, or had he not been 
had we not sold or had we not been 
had you not sold or had you not been 
had they not sold or had they not been 

PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

did I not sell 
didst thou not sell 
did he not sell 
did we not sell 
did you not sell 
did they not sell 



FOURTH CONJUGATION. 



to sell 87 



3 mwr. mfii. jewne. jeune. bcu'te. boite. ancre. ingraU onde. un. ameN. 
4 j, as s in pleasure, gn, as ni in uriion. ill, as Hi, in Wi//zam. 



N'eus-je pas vend u 
n'eus-tu pas vend u 
n'eut-il pas vend u 
n'eumes-nous pas vend u 
n'eutes-vous pas vend u 
n'eurent-ils pas vend u 



pretep.it anterior, 
or compound of the preterit. 

had I not sold 
hadst thou not sold 
had lie not sold 
had we not sold 
had you not sold 
had tkey not sold 



Ne vend nu-je pas 
ne vend ras-tu. pas 
ne vend ra-t-il pas 
ne vend rons-noas pas 
ne vend rez-vous pas 
ne vend ronl-ils pas 



future absolute. 

shall or will I not sell 
shalt or wilt thou not sell 
. shall or will he not sell 
shall or will we not sell 
shall or will you not sell 
shall or will tliey not sell 



N'aurai-je pas vend u 
n'auras-tu pas vend u 
n'aura-t-il pas vend u 
n'aurons-nous pas vend u 
n'aurez-vous pas vend u 
n'auront-ils pas vend u 



FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the future. 

shall or will I not have sold 
shalt or will thou not have sold 
shall or will he not have sold 
shall or will we not have sold 
shall or will you not have sold 
shall or will they not have sold 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 



Ne vend rais-je pas 
ne vend rais-iu pas 
ne vend rail-il pas 
ne vend rioiis-nous pas 
ne vend ricz-v ous pas 
ne vend raient-ils pas 



PRESENT. 

should* would, could, or might I 
sliouldst, wouldst, couldst, or mightst thou 
should, would, could, or might he 
should, would, could, or might ice 
should, would, could, or might you 
should, would, could, or might they 



j N'aurais-je pas vend u, 
J or n'eusst-je pas vend u 
n'aurais-tu pas vend u, 
or n'eusses-lupas rendu 
n'aurait-il pas vend u, 
i or n'eut-il pas vend u 
n'aurions-nous pas vend u, 
or n'eussions-nous pas vend 
n'auriez-vous pas vend u, 
or rteussii'z-rons pas vendu 
n'auraient-ils pas vend it, 
or rteussent-ils pas vend u 



PAST, 

mpound of the present. 

should, would, could, 

or might I not have sold 
shoulast, wnuldst, couldst, 

or mightst thou not have sold 
should, would, could, 

or might he not have sold 
sliould, would, could, 
u or might we not have sold 

should, would, could, 

or mi gld you not have sold 
should, would, could, 

or might they not have sold 



88 OF PRONOMINAL AND REFLECTED VERBS. 

Of Pronominal Verbs, 

140. The Pronominal verbs, are those in which each person 
is conjugated through all the tenses, with two personal pro- 
nouns. 

141. When the verbs begin with a consonant or an k 
aspirated, the two pronouns are — 

Singular. Plural, 

je me I myself, nous nous we ourselves, 

tu te thou thyself, # vous vous you yourselves, 

il se he himself, ils se they themselves, 

elle se she herself, elles se they themselves. 

* Sometimes vous vous you yourself \ for thou thyself: see page 6 art. 55, 

142. When the verbs begin with a vowel or an h mute, the 
two pronouns take the following form : — 

Singular. Plural, 

je m' I myself, nous nous we ourselves, 

tu t' thou thyself, # vous vous you yourselves, 

il s' he himself, ils s' they themselves, 

elle s' she herself, elles s' they themselves. 

* Sometimes vous vous you yourself for thou thyself: see page 6, art 55. 

143. The pronominal verbs, comprise the reflected verbs, 
and the reciprocal verbs. 

Of Refected Verbs. 

144. There are active and neuter reflected verbs. 

145. A reflected verb is active, when the action of the verb 
falls upon the subject-— as, je me flatie I flatter myself — il se 
loue he praises himself. 

146. Almost all the active verbs are susceptible of being 
used as reflected verbs. 

147. A reflected verb is neuter, when it indicates only a state 
or a disposition of the subject — &s,je me repens I repent. 

148. There are also unipersonal or impersonal refected 
verbs ; these are only used in the third person singular ; active 
verbs frequently assume this form, in a passive sense, for the 
sake of brevity and energy — &$,il se batit beaucoupde maisons 
for beaucoup de maisons sont bdties there are a great many 
houses building — il se donnera unc grande bataille for une 
grande bataille sera donnee a great battle will be fought. 

149. All the simple tenses of the reflected verbs are con- 
jugated like those of the verbs of the respective conjugations 



OF RECIPROCAL VERBS. 89 

to which they belong ; for instance, se lev er to rise, takes the 
same terminations as par ler to speak — s'enrich ir to grow rich, 
takes the same terminations as fin ir to finish. 

149. When a reflected verb is formed with an irregular verb, 
it is conjugated like the irregular verb would be, if not used as a 
reflected verb, that is with two pronouns ; for instance, se ser vir 
to make use of, will be conjugated like ser vir to serve, see 
page 131. 

151. All the compound tenses of all the reflected verbs, 
without exception, are conjugated with the auxiliary, etre to be, 
although they be all conjugated in English with the auxiliary 
avoir to have. 

152. In compound tenses, the participle past must agree in 
gender and number, with the nominative or subject of the verb, 

je me suis leve (a gentleman,) I have risen, 

je me suis levee (a lady,) I have risen, 

nous nous sommes leves (gentlemen,) we have risen, 

nous nous sommes levees {ladies,) we have risen. 

152. When a reflected verb is governed in the infinitive 
mood by another verb, the pronoun se, which precedes the pre- 
sent of the infinitive, must be made to correspond with the 
nominative of the first verb, thus — 

je veux me moquer de lui I wish to laugh at him, 

tu veux te moquer de lui thou wishesi to laugh at him, 

il veut se moquer de lui he wishes to laugh at him, 

elle veut se moquer de lui she wishes to laugh at him, 

nous voulons nous moquer de lui we wish to laugh at him, 

vous voulez vous moquer de lui you wish to laugh at him, 

ils veulent se moquer de lui they wish to laugh at him, 

j elles veulent se moquer de lui they wish to laugh at him, 

Pupils are very liable, if not put on their guard, to express themselves 
thus — je veux se moquer de lui — tu veux se moquer de lui, &c, because se 
is generally put before the infinitive present of all reflected verbs. 

Of Reciprocal Verbs. 

154. A verb is reciprocal, when it expresses that two or 
more nominatives or subjects act upon each other. 

155. Reciprocal verbs are conjugated like reflected verbs, 
both in their simple and in their compound tenses ; but they 
have no singular as they express the reciprocal action of per- 
sons or of things upon each other ; for instance, John and 
Joseph will say, 

h2 



J 



90 



LIST OP REFLECTED VEKBS. 



1st, nous nous secourons Pun Fautre we assist one another* 

Mary and Sarah will say, 
2d, nous nous secourons l'une Fautre we assist one another. 

John, Joseph, Paul, and any number of others will say, 
Sd, nous nous secourons les uns les autres we assist one another. 

Mary, Sarah, Rebecca, and any number of others will say, 
AAh, nous nous secourons lesunes les autres we assist one another. 

156. Remark that when two persons only, are the nomina- 
tives or subjects of the verb, one another, is put in the singular 
in French ; and if both persons, or one only, is of the masculine 
gender, one another is rendered by Van V autre as in the 1st 
example ; but if both persons are of the feminine gender, one 
another is rendered by Vune Vautre, as in the 2d example. 

157.* When more than two persons are the nominatives or 
subjects of the verbs, then one another is put in the plural in 
French ; and if all the persons, or one only, is of the masculine 
gender, one another is rendered by les uns les autres, as in the 
3d example ; but if all the persons are of the feminine gender, 
one another is rendered by les unes les autres, as in the 4th 
example. 

158. A list of Verbs, which, though not admitting in English, 
the pronouns one^s-self, myself, thyself, himself, herself, our- 
selves, yourselves, themselves, are nevertheless reflected in 
French. 



to abstain 
to agree 
to apply 
to bathe 

to bear up against 
to be angry 
to be offended 
to become liquid 
to be dying 
to be eager 
to be eclipsed 
to begin to thrive 
to be moved 
to be obstinate 
to be out of con- 
ceit with 
to be renewed 
to be resolved 
to be silent 
to beware 
to blow 
to boast 



s^abstenir, 

s'accorder, 

s'adresser, 

se baigner, 

se raidir, 

se facher, 

se facher, 

se li*uefier, 

se mourir, 

s'empresser, 

s'eclipser, 

se remplumer, 

s'attendrir, 

s'opiniatrer, 

■ se degoutsr, 

se renouveler, 
S3 resoudre, 
se tairc, 
se garder, 
s'epanouir, 
se vanter, 



to break loose 

to catch cold 

to care for 

to complain 

to come forward 

to confer 

to congeal 

to creep into 

to delight in 

to delight in 

to diminish 

to desist 

to discharge 

to discourse with, 

to distrust 

to determine 

to elapse 

to endeavour 

to exclaim 

to expect 

to evaporate 

to fade away 



se dechainer, 

s'enrhumer, 

se soucier, 

se plaindre, 

s'avancer, 

s'aboucher, 

se %er, 

se glisser, 

se plaire, 

se complaire, 

s'apetisser, 

se desister, 

s'acquitter, 

s'entretenir. 

se defier, 

se determiner, 

s'ecouler, 

s'efforcer, 

se recrier, 

s'attendre, 

s'evaporer, 

se fletrir, 



LIST OF REFLECTED VERBS. 



91 



to faint away 

to fall asleep 

to fall asleep again 

to fall furiously ) 
upon $ 

to fall tooth and ) 
nail upon \ 

to fancy 

to fancy 
• to new feather 

to flock in crowds 

to flow out 

to fly away 

to fly into a passion 
. to gangrene 

to get intoxicated 

to get palsied 

to get preferment 
. to get up 

to get weary 
- to give over 
I to give up 

to go away 

to go forward 

to go to bed 

to grieve 

to grow better 

to grow bold 

to grow drowsy 

to grow familiar 

to grow impatient 

to grow milder 

to grow poor 

to grow proud 

to grow rich 

to grow tired 

to heal 

to inquire 

to intermeddle 

to intermeddle 

to keep from 

to kneel down 

to laugh at 

to lay hold of 

to league 

to lean on one's ) 
elbow \ 

to lean upon 

to make haste 
Jo make haste 
'to make one'' s escape 

to make one's escape 

to make an alliance 

to marry 

to meddle with 



s'evanouir, 
s'endormir, 
se rendormir, 

s'acharner, 

s'acharner, 

se figurer, 

s'imaginer, 

se remplumer, 

s'attrouper, 

s'ecouler, 

s'envoler, 

s'emporter, 

se gangrener, 

s'enivrer, 

se paraliser, 

s'avancer, 

se lever, 

s'ennuyer, 

se desister, 

se demettre, 

s'en aller, 

s'avancer, 

se coucher, 

s'attrister, 

s'amender, 

s'enhardir, 

s'assoupir, 

se familiariser, 

s'impatienter, 

se radoucir 

s'appauvrir, 

s'enorgueillir, 

s'enrichir, 

se lasser, 

se guerir, 

s'enquerir, 

s'entremettre, 

s'ingerer, 

se garder, 

s'agenouiller, 

se moquer 

se saisir, 

se liguer, 

s'accouder, 

s'appuyer, 
se depecher, 
se hater 
s'evader, 
s'echapper, 
s'allier, 
se marier 
se meler, 



to melt 
to mistake 
to mistrust 
to move forward 
to mutiny 
to oppose, 
to overflow 
to paint 
to perceive 
to persist 
to putrefy 
to quit one 's country 
to rebel 
to recant 
to rejoice 
to remember 
to remember 
to repent 
to resign 
to retract 
to rise 

to run into debt 
to run away 
to seize 
to sell 
to set off 
to shrink 
to sit down 
to sit down at table 
to slip 
to stay 
to steal away 
to stick to 
to stiffen 
to stoop 
to stop 
to strive 
to struggle 
to submit 
to subscribe 
to surrender 
to take a strong ) 
fancy J 

to take delight in 
to take offence 
to take pet 
to take refuge 
to take rest 
to take root 
to trust 

to vanish away 
to walk 
to withdraw 
to wonder 
to wonder 
2K 



se fondre, 
se meprendre, 
se mefier, 
s'avancer, 
se mutiner, 
s'opposer, 
se deborder, 
se farder, 
s'apercevoir, 
s'obstiner, 
se putrefier, 
s'expatrier, 
se revolter, 
se dedire, 
se rejouir, 
se souvenir, 
se ressouvenir, 
se repantir, 
se ddmettre, 
se r^tracter, 
se lever, 
s'endetter, 
s'enfuir 
se saisir, 
se vendre, 
s'acheminer, 
s'apetisser, 
s'asseoir, 
s'attabler, 
se glisser, 
s'arreter, 
s'esquiver, 
s'attacher, 
se raidir, 
se baisser, 
s'arreter, 
s'efforcer, 
se debattre, 
se soumettre, 
s'abonner, 
se rendre, 

s'enteter, 

se plaire, 
se formaliser, 
se piquer, 
se refugier, 
se reposer, 
s'enraciner, 
se fier, 
s'eclipser, 
se promener, 
se retirer, 
s'etonner, 
s'emerveiller, 



92 



PRONOMINAL VERBS. 



Jtfmi. dne. te. ecrit. mere. etre. idole. gite. opera, oter. tout, voute. 
2 at. arm. tub. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 

CONJUGATION OF THE REFLECTED VERB. 

Se lever to rise. (Affirmatively.) 





INFINITIVE MOOD. 


-A- 


PRESENT. 


Se lev er 


to rise 


-B- 


PAST Or PERFECT, 




or compound of the present. 


S'etre lev e 


to have risen 


-c- 


PARTICIPLE PRESENT Or ACTIVE, 


Se lev ant 


rising 


-D- 


COMPOUND OF THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 


SMtant lev £ 


having risen 


-E- 


PARTICIPLE PAST Or PASSIVE. 


Leve 


risen 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 

-F- PRESENT. 

Je me lev e / rise, do rise, or am rising 

tu te lev es thou risest, dost rise, or art rising 

il se lev e he rises, does rise, or is rising 

nous nous lev ons we rise, do rise, or are rising 

vous vous lev ez you rise, do rise, or are rising 

ils se lev ent they rise, do rise, or are rising 

-G- PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 

or compound of the present. 

Je me suis lev £ I have risen, did rise, or have been rising 

tu t'es lev £ thou hast risen, didst rise, or hast been rising 

il s'est lev £ he has risen, did rise, or has been rising 

nous nous sommes lev es we have risen, did rise, or have been rising 



vous vous etes lev es 
ils se sont lev es 

-H- 

Je me lev ais 

tu te lev ais 

il se lev ait 

nous nous lev ions 

vous vous lev iez 

ils se lev aient 

-i- 

Jem'6tais lev £ 

tu t'^tais lev £ 

il s'6tait lev £ 

nous nous £tions lev es 

vous vous £tiez lev £s 

ils s'6taient lev es 



you have risen, did rise, or have been rising 
they have risen, did rise, or have been rising 

IMPERFECT. 

J rose, did rise, or was rising 
thou rosest, didst rise, or wast rising 
he rose, did rise, or was rising 
we rose, did rise, or were rising 
you rose, did rise y or were rising 
they rose, did rise, or were rising 

PLUPERFECT, 

or compound of the imperfect. 
1 had risen or had been rising 
thou hadst risen or hadst been rising 
he had risen or had been rising 
we had risen or had been rising 
you had risen or had been rising 
they had risen or had been rising 



PRONOMINAL VERBS. 



93 



3 mur. mur. jeime. jewne. boite. boite. ancre. mgrat. onde. un. araeN. 
4 j, as s in pleasure. gn, as ni in union. *//, as Hi in WiMiam. 



-j- 

Je me lev ai 

tu te lev as 

il se lev a 

nous nous lev times 

vous vous lev a/es 

ils se lev erent 

-K- 

Je me fus lev e 

tu te fus lev e 

il se fut lev i 

nous nous fumes lev is 

vcus vous futes lev is 

ils se furent lev is 

-L- 

Je me lev erai 
tu te lev eras 
il se lev era 
nous nous lev erons 
vous vous lev erez 
ils se le v eront 



Je me serai lev e 

tu te seras lev i 

il se sera lev i 

nous nous serons lev is 

vous vous serez lev is 

ils se seront lev is 



PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

/ rose or did rise 
thou rosest or didst rise 
he rose or did rise 
we rose or did rise 
you rose or did rise 
they rose or did rise 

PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the preterit. 

I had risen 
thou liadst risen 
he had risen 
we had risen 
you had risen 
they had risen 

FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

/ shall or will rise 
thou shalt or wilt rise 
he shall or will rise 
we shall or will rise 
you shall or will rise 
they shall or will rise 

FUTURE ANTERIOR, 

or compound of the future. 

I shall or will have risen 
thou shalt or wilt have risen 
he shall or will have risen 
we shall or will have risen 
you shall or will have risen 
they shall or will have risen 



-N- 

Je me lev erais 
tu te lev erais 
il se lev erait 
nous nous lev erions 
vous vous lev eriez 
ils se lev eraient 



Je me serais lev i % 
or je mefusse lev e 
tu te serais lev e, 
or tu te fusses lev i 
il se serait lev e, 
or il sefut lev e 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

/ should, would, could, or might rise 

thou shouldst, wouldst, couldst, or mightst rise 

he should, would, could, or might rise 

we should, would, could, or might rise 

you should, would* could, or might rise 

they should, would, could* or might rise 

PAST, 
or compound of the present. 

J should, would, could, 

or might have risen 
thou shouldst, wouldst, couldst* 

or mightst have risen 
he should, would, could, 

ox might have risen 



94 



PRONOMINAL VERBS. 



^mi. tine. te. ecrit. mere. etre. idole. gite % opera, oter. tout, voute. 
2 at. arm. tub. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 



nous nous serions lev is, 
or nous nous fussions lev es 
vous vous seriez lev es, 
or vous vous fuss iez lev es 
ils se seraient lev is, 
or Us sefussent lev es 



we should, would, could, 
or might have risen 

you should, would, could, 
or might have risen 

they should, would, could, 
or might have risen 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 



Lev e-toi 
qu'il se lev e 

lev ons-nous 
leves-vous 
qu'ils se lev ent 



rise (thou) 
let him rise 
let us rise 
rise {you) 
let them rise 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



-a- 

Que je me leve 
que tu te lev es 
qu'il se lev e 
que nous nous lev ions 
que vous vous lev iez 
qu'ils se lev ent 



that I may rise 
that thou mayst rise 
that he may rise 
that we may rise 
that you may rise 
that they may rise 



Que je me sois lev e 

que tu te sois lev e 

qu'il se soit lev e 

que nous nous soyons lev es 

que vous vous soyez lev is 

qu'ils se soient lev is 



PRETERIT Or PAST, 

or compound of the present. 

that I may have risen 
that thou mayst have risen 
that he may have risen 
that we may have risen 
that you may have risen 
that they may have risen 



Que je me lev asse 
que tu te lev asses 
qu'il se lev at 
que nous nous lev assions 
que vous vous lev assies 
qu'ils se lev assent 



IMPERFECT. 

that I might rise 
that thou mightst rise 
that he might rise 
that we might rise 
that you might rise 
that they might rise 



Que je me fusse lev e 

que tu te fusses lev e 

qu'il se fut lev i 

que nous nous fussions lev es 

que vous vous fussiez lev is 

qu'ils se fussent lev is 



PLUPERFECT, 
or compound of the imperfect. 

that I might have risen 
that thou mightst have risen 
that he might have risen 
that we might have risen 
that you might have risen 
that they might have risen 



PRONOMINAL VERBS. 



95 



3 mur. raur. jewne. jewne. boite. boite. ancre. mgrat. onde, un. ameN. 
4 j, as s in pleasure, gn, as ni in umon. z//, as Hi, in Wi Z/i am. 

CONJUGATION OF THE REFLECTED VERB. 

Se lever to rise. (Negatively.) 



-F- 

Je ne me lev e pas 
tu ne te lev es pas 
il ne se lev e pas 
nous ne nous lev ons pas 
vous ne vous lev ez pas 
ils ne se lev ent pas 

-G- 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 

-A- PRESENT. 

Ne pas se lev er not to rise 

-B- PAST Or PERFECT, 

or compound of the present. 
Ne pas s'etre lev i not to have risen 

-O PARTICIPLE PRESENT Or ACTIVE. 

Ne se lev ant pas not rising 

-D- COMPOUND OF THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 

Ne s'etant pas lev e not having risen 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

/ rise not, do not rise, or am not 
thou risesi not, dost not rise, or art not 
he rises not, does not rise, or is not 
we rise not, do not rise, or are not 
you rise not, do not rise, or are not 
they rise not, do not rise, or are not 

PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 
or compound of the present. 
Je ne me suis pas lev e / have not risen, did not rise, 

or have not been rising 
tu ne t'es pas lev i thou hast not risen, didst not rise, 

or hast not been rising 
il ne s'est pas lev i he has not risen, did not rise, 

or has not been rising 
nous ne nous sommes pas lev is we have not risen, did not rise, 

or have not been rising 
you have not risen, did not rise, 

or have not been rising 
they have not risen, did not rise, 
or have not been rising 

IMPERFECT. 

/ rose not, did not rise, or was 
thou rosest not, didst not rise, or wast 
he rose not, did not rise, or was 
we rose not, did not rise, or were 
you rose not, did not rise t or were 
they rose not, did not rise, or were 

PLUPERFECT, 
or compound of the imperfect. 

I had not risen or had not been 
thou hadst not risen or hadst not been 
he had not risen or had not been 
we had not risen or had not been 
you had not risen or had not been 
they had not risen or had not been 
2 k2 



> Be* 



vous ne vous etes pas lev es 
ils ne se sont pas lev is 

-H- 

Je ne me lev ais pas 
tu ne te lev ais pas 
il ne se lev ait pas 
nous ne nous, lev ions pas 
vous ne vous lev iez pas 
ils nese lev aient pas 
T i 



Je ne m'etais pas lev e 

tu ne t'etais pas lev e 

il ne s'etait pas lev e 

nous ne nous etions pas lev is 

vous ne vous etiez pas lev is 

ils ne s'etaient pas lev is 



96 PRONOMINAL VERBS. 



'ami. dne. te. ecrit. mere. etre. idole. gite. opera, oter. tout YOuXe. 
2 at. arm. ticb. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 

-J- PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

Je ne me lev ai pas I rose not or did not rise 

tu ne te lev as pas thou rosest not or didst not rise 

il ne se lev a pas he rose not or did not rise 

nous ne nous lev times pas we rose not or did not rise 

vous ne vous lev dtes pas you rose not or did not rise 

ils ne se lev erent pas they rose not or did not rise 

-K- PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 

or compound of the preterit. 
Je ne me fus pas lev i I had not risen 

tu ne te fus pas lev e thou hadst not risen 

il ne se fut pas lev e he had not risen 

nous ne nous fumes pas lev is we had not risen 
vous ne vous futes pas lev es you had not risen 
ils ne se furent pas lev es they had not risen 

-L FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

Je ne me lev erai pas J shall or will not rise 

tu ne te lev eras pas thou shalt or wilt not rise 

il ne se lev era pas he shall or will not rise 

nous ne nous lev erons pas we shall or will not rise 

vous ne vous lev erez pas you shall or will not rise 

ils ne se lev eront pas they shall or will not rise 

-M- FUTURE ANTERIOR, 

or compound of the future. 
Je ne me serai pas lev e J s/mZZ or will not have risen 

tu ne te seras pas lev e thou shalt or wilt not have risen 

il ne se sera pas lev e lie shall or wi'ZZ not have risen 

nous ne nous serons pas lev es we shall or will not have risen 
vous ne vous serez pas lev es you shall or will not have risen 
ils ne se seront pas lev es they shall or will not have risen 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 

•N- PRESENT. 

Je ne me lev erais pas / should, would, could, or might 

tu ne te lev erais pas thou shouldst, wouldst, couldst, or mightst 

il ne se lev erait pas lie should, would, could, or might 

nous ne nous lev erions pas we should, would, could, or might 
vous ne vous lev eriez pas you should, would, could, or might 
ils ne se lev eraient pas they should, would, could, or might 

-o- PAST 

o?' compound of the present. 

Je ne me serais pas lev e, I should, would, could, 
or je ne mefusse pas lev e or might not have risen 

tu ne te serais pas lev e, thou shouldst, wouldst, couldst, 
or tu ne te fusses pas lev e or mightst not have risen 

\\ ne se serait pas lev e, he should, would, could, 
or il ne seful pas lev e or might not have risen 






PRONOMINAL VERBS. 97 

3 mur. mi/r. jewne. jeune. boite. bozte. ancre. trcgrat. onde. un. ameN. 
4 j, as s in pleasure, gn, as ni in union, ill, as Hi, in William. 

nous ne nous serions pas lev is, we should, would, could, 

or nous ne nousfussions pas lev es or might not have risen 

vous ne vous seriez pas lev es, you should, would, could, 

or vous ne vous fussiez pas lev es or might not have risen] 

ils ne se seraient pas lev is, they should, would, could, 

or ils ne sefussent pas lev is or might not have risen 

-p- IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Ne te lev e pas rise not or do not rise (thou) 

qu'il ne se lev e pas let him not rise 

ne nous lev ons pas let us not rise 

ne vous lev es pas rise not or do not rise (you) 

qu'ils ne se lev ent pas let them not rise 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



Que je ne me lev e pas that I may not rise 

que tu ne te lev es pas that thou mayst not rise 

qu'il ne se lev e pas that he may not rise 

que nous ne nous lev ions pas that we may not rise 

que vous ne vous lev iez pas that you may not rise 

qu'ils ne se lev ent pas that they may not rise 

-R- PRETERIT Or PAST, 

or compound of the present, 

Que je ne me sois pas lev e that I may not have risen 

que tu ne te sois pas lev i that thou mayst not have risen 

qu'il ne se soit pas lev i that he may not have risen 

que nous ne nous soyons pas lev es that we may not have risen 

que vous ne vous soyez pas lev es that you may not have risen 

qu'ils ne se soient pas lev is that they may not have risen 

-S- IMPERFECT. 

Que je ne me lev asse pas that I might not rise 

que tu ne te lev asses pas that thou mightst not rise 

qu'il ne se lev at pas that he might not rise 

que nous ne nous lev assions pas that we might not rise 

que vous ne vous lev assies pas that you might not rise 

qu'ils ne se lev assent pas that they might not rise 

-T- PLUPERFECT, 

or compound of the imperfect. 

Que je ne me fusse pas lev e that I might not have risen 

que tu ne te fusses pas lev i that thou mightst not have risen 

qu'il ne se fut pas lev i that he might not have risen 

que nous ne nous fussions pas lev is that we might not have risen 

que vous ne vous fussiez pas lev es that you might not have risen 

qu'ils ne se fussent pas lev is that they might not have risen 



98 



PRONOMINAL VERBS. 



] Hmi. dne. te. ecrit. mere. etre. idole. gite. opera, oter. tout, vowte. 
2 ai. arm. tub. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 

CONJUGATION OF THE REFLECTED VERB. 

Se lever to rise. (Interrogatively.) 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



Me lev e-je 

te lev es-iu. 

se lev fi-t-il 

nous lev ons-nous 

vous lev es-vous 

se lev ent-ils 



PRESENT. 

do I rise or am I rising 
dost thou rise or art thou rising 
does he rise or is he rising 
do we rise or are we rising 
do you rise or are you rising 
do they rise or are they rising 



-G- PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 

or compound of the present. 
Me suis-je lev e have I risen or did I rise 

t'es-tu lev e hadst thou risen or didst thou rise 

s'est-il lev e has he risen or did he rise 

nous sommes-nous lev es have we risen or did we rise 
vous etes-vous lev es have you risen or did you rise 
se sont-ils lev es have they risen or did they rise 



-H- 

Me lev ais-je 
te lev ais-tu 
se lev ait-il 
nous lev ions-nous 
vous lev ies-vous 
se lev aient-ils 



IMPERFECT. 

did I rise or icas I rising 
didst thou rise or wast thou rising 
did he rise or was he rising 
did we rise or were we rising 
did you rise or were you rising 
did they rise or were they rising 



M'etais-je lev e 
tMtais-tu lev e 
s'etait-il lev e 
nous etions-nous lev is 
vous etiez-vous lev es 
s'etaient-ils lev es 



PLUPERFECT, 
or compound of the imperfect, 
had I risen or had I been rising 
hadst thou risen or hadst thou been rising 
had he risen or had he been rising 
had we risen or had ice been rising 
had you risen or had you been rising 
had they risen or had they been rising 



Me lev ai-}e 

te lev as-tu 

se lev a-t-il 

nous lev ames-nous 

vous lev ates-vous 

se lev erent-ila 



PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

did I rise 
didst thou rise 
did he rise 
did we rise 
did you rise 
did they rise 



PRONOMINAL VERBS. 



99 



3 mt*r. mur. jeune. jewne. boite. bozte. ancre. ingr&t. onde. un. araeN. 
4 j, as s in pleasure. gn, as ni in union. ill, as Hi in WU/iam. 



iMe fus-je lev e 

te fus-tu lev e 

se fut-il lev e 

nous fumes-nous lev es 

vous futes-vous lev es 

se farent-ils lev es 

-L- 

Me lev erai-je 
te lev eras- tu. 
se lev era-t-il 
nous lev erons-nous 
vous lev e?*es-vous 
se lev eront-ils 



PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the preterit. 

had I risen 
hadst thou risen 
had he risen 
had we risen 
had you risen 
had they risen 

FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

shall or will I rise 
shalt or wilt thou rise 
sltall or will he rise 
shall or will we rise 
shall or will you rise 
shall or will they rise 



Me serai-je lev e 

te seras-tu lev e 

se sera-t-il lev e 

nous serons-nous lev es 

vous serez-vous lev es 

se seront-ils lev es 



FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the future. 

shall or will I have risen 
shalt or wilt thou have risen 
shall or ivill he have risen 
shall or will we have risen 
shall or will you have risen 
shall or will they have risen 



-N- 

Melev erais-je 
te lev erais-tu. 
se lev erait-il 
nous lev er/ons-nous 
vous leveri'es-vous 
se lev eraienl-'ils 



CONDITIONAL MOOD 

PRESENT. 

should, would, could, or might I rise 
shouldst, wouldst, couldst. or mightst thou rise 
should, would, could, or might he rise 
should, would, could, or might we rise 
should, would, could, or might you rise 
should, icould, could, or might they rise 



Me serais-je lev e, 

or mefusse-je lev e 

te serais-tu lev e, 

or te fusses-tu lev e 

se serait-il lev e, 

or se fut-il lev e 

nous serions-nous lev es, 

or nous fussions-nous lev is 

vous seriez-vous lev es, 

or vqus fits siez -vous lev es 

se seraient-ils lev es, 

or se fussent-ils lev es 



PAST, 
or compound of the present. 

should, would, could, 

or might I have risen 
shouldst, wouldst, couldst, 

or mightst- thou have risen 
should, ivould, could, 

or might he have risen 
should, would, could, 

or might we have risen 
should, would, could, 

or might you have risen 
should, would, could, 

or might they have risen 



100 PRONOMINAL VERBS. 



l ami. due. te. ecrit. mere. etre. idole. gite % opera, oter. tout, voute 
2 at. arm. tub. ale. mare, there, -idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 

CONJUGATION OF THE REFLECTED VERB. 
Se lever to rise. (Negatively and Interrogatively.) 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 

-F- PRESENT. 

Ne me lev e-je pas do I not rise or am I not rising 

ne te lev es-tu pas dost thou not rise or art thou not rising 

ne se lev e-t-i] pas does he not rise or is he not rising 

ne nous lev o?2s-nous pas do we not rise or are we not rising 

ne vous lev es-vous pas do you not rise or are you not rising 

ne se lev ent-ils pas do they not rise or are they not rising 

-G- PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 

or compound of the present. 

Ne me suis-je pas lev e have I not risen, did I not rise, 

or have I not been rising 
ne t"es-tu pas lev e hast thou not risen, didst thou not rise, 

or hast thou not been rising 
ne s'est-il pas lev e has he not risen, did he not rise, 

or has he not been rising 
ne nous sommes-nous pas lev es have we not risen, did we not rise, 

or have we not been rising 
ne vous etes-vous pas lev es have you not risen, did you not rise, 

or have you not been rising 
ne se sont-ils pas lev es have they not risen, did they not rise, 

or have they not been rising 

-H- IMPERFECT. 

Ne me lev ais-je pas did I not rise or was 1 not rising 

ne te lev aw-tu pas didst thou not rise or umst thou not rising 

ne se lev ait-ii pas did he not rise or was he not rising 

ne nous lev ions-nous pas did we not rise or were we not rising 

ne vous lev tes-vous pas did you not rise or were you not rising 

ne se lev aient-ils pas did they not rise or were they not rising 

-I- PLUPERFECT, 

or compound of the imperfect. 
Ne m'etais-je pas lev e had I not risen or had I not ~) 

ne t'etais-tu pas lev e hadst thou not risen or hadst thou not £ 

ne s'etait-il pas lev e had he not risen or had he not [ a 

ne nous etions-nous pas lev es had we not risen or had we not 
ne vous etiez-vous pas lev es had you not risen or had you not 
ne s'6taient-ils pas lev es had they not risen or had they not 

-J- PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

Ne me lev «/-je pas did 1 not rise 

ne te lev as-tu pas didst thou not rise 

ne se lev a-t-il pas did he not rise 

ne nous lev ames-nous pas did we not rise 

ne vous lev#7es-vous pas did you not rise 

ne se lev ere^-ils pas did they not rise 



PRONOMINAL VERBS. 101 

3 m«r. mur. jeime. jeune. botte. boitc. ancie. mgrat. onde. un. ameN 
4 j, as s in pleasure, gn, as ni in union. ill, as Hi, in Wi Hi am 

-K- PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 

or compound of the preterit. 

Ne me fus-je pas lev e had I not risen 

ne te fus-tu pas lev e hadst thou not risen 

ne se fut-il pas lev t had he not risen 

ne nous fumes-nous pas lev es had we not risen 

ne vous futes-vous pas lev is had you not risen 

ne se furent-ils pas lev es had they not risen 

-L- FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

Ne me lev erai-je pas shall or will I not rise 

ne te lev eras-tu pas shalt or ivilt thou not rise 

ne se lev era-t-il pas shall or will he not rise 

ne nous lev enms-nous pas shall or will we not rise 

ne vous lev eres-vous pas shall or will you not rise 

ne se lev eront-ils pas shall or will they not rise 

-M- FUTURE ANTERIOR, 

or compound of the future. 

Ne me serai-je pas lev e shall cr will I not have risen 

ne te seras-tu pas lev e shalt or wilt thou not have risen 

ne se sera-t-il pas lev e shall or will he not have risen 

ne nous serons-nous pas lev es shall or will ive not have risen 

ne vous serez-vous pas lev es shall or will you not have risen 

ne se seront-ils pas lev es shall or will they not have risen 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 

-N- PRESENT. 

Ne me lev erais-je pas should, would, could, or might I 

ne te lev erais-tu pas shouldst, wouldst, couldst, or mightst thou 

ne se lev erait-i\ pas should, would, could, or might he 

ne nous lev erions-nous pas should, would, could, or might we f 2. 

ne vous lev eries-vous pas should, would, could, or might you 

ne se lev eraieni-ils pas should, would, could, or might they 

-O- PAST, 

or compound of the present. 

Ne me serais-je pas lev 6, should, would, could 9 
or ne mefasst-je pas lev e or might I not have risen 

ne te serais-tu pas lev e, shouldst, ivouldst, couldst, 
or ne tefusses-tupas lev e or mightst thou not have risen 

ne se serait-il pas lev e, should, would, could, 
or ne se fut-il pas lev e or might he not have risen 

ne nous serions-nous pas lev es, should, would, could, 
or ne nous fuss ions -nous pas lev es or might we not have risen 

ne vous seriez-vous pas lev is, should, would, could, 
or ne vous fas 3 iez -vous pas lev es or might you not have risen 

ne se seraient-ils pas lev es, should, would, could, 
or ne sefussent-ils pas lev es or might they not have risen 

12 



102 PRONOMINAL VERBS. 



'ami. ane. te. ecrit. mere. etre. idole. glte. opera, oter. tout, vowte. 
2 at, arm. tuh. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 

CONJUGATION OF THE REFLECTED VERB. 

Se bien porter to be well. (Affirmatively.) 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 

-A- PRESENT. 

Se bien port er to be well 

-B- PAST Or PERFECT, 

or compound of the present. 

S'etre bien port i to have been well 

-C- PARTICIPLE PRESENT Or ACTIVE, 

Se port ant bien being well 

-D- COMPOUND OF THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 

S'etant bien port t having been well 

-E- PARTICIPLE PAST Or PASSIVE. 

Bien port e been well 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

-F- PRESENT. 

Je me port e bien J am well 

tu te port es bien thou art well 

il se port e bien he is well 

nous nous port ons bien we are well 

vous vous port ez bien you are vjell 

ils se port ent bien they are well 

-G- PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 

or compound of the present. 
Je me suis bien port e / have been well 

tu t'es bien port e thou hast been well 

il s'est bien port e he has been well 

nous nous sommes bien port es we have been well 

vous vous etes bien port es you have been well 

ils se sont bien port es they have been well 

-H- IMPERFECT. 

Je me port ais bien / was well 

tu te port ais bien thou wast well 

il se port ait bien he was well 

nous nous port ions bien we were well 

vous vous port iez bien you were well 

ils se port aient bien they were well 

-I- PLUPERFECT, 

or compound of the imperfect. 

Je m'etais bien port 6 I had been well 

tu t'dtais bien port e thou hadst been well 

il s'etait bien port e he had been well 

nous nous etions bien port cs we had been well 

vous vous etiez bien port ts you had been well 

ils s'etaient bien port es they had been well 



PRONOMINAL VERBS. 103 

3 m«r. mui. jeime. jeime. boite. bolte. ancre. mgrat. onde. un. araeN. 
4 j, as s in pleasure, gn, as ni in union, ill, as Ui, in William. 

-J- PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

Je me portcu bien I was well 

tu te port as bien Z/iow wasZ well 

il se port a bien he was well 

nous nous port dmes bien we were well 

vous vous port ales bien #ow were weZ/ 

ils se port event bien they were well 

-K- PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 

or compound of the preterit. 
Je me fus bien port e / had been well 

tu te fus bien port e thou hadst been well 

il se fut bien port e he had been well 

nous nous fumes bien port is we had been well 
vous vous futes bien port is you had been well 
ils se furent bien port es they had been well 

-L- FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

Je me port erai bien / shall or will be well 

tu te port eras bien thou shall or wilt be well 

il se port era bien he shall or will be well 

nous nous port erons bien we shall or will be well 

vous vous port erez bien you shall or will be well 

ils se port eront bien they shall or will be well 

-M- FUTURE ANTERIOR, 

or compound of the future. 

Je me serai bien port e / shall or i0«7Z have been well 

tu te seras bien port e //tow shalt or mft /tare 6een well 

il se sera bien port e /te sAaZ/ or will have been well 

nous nous serons bien port es we shall or will have been well 

vous vous serez bien port is you shall or will have been well 

ils se seront bien port es they shall or will have been well 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 

-N- PRESENT. 

Je me port erais bien I should, would, could, or might 

tu te port erais bien thou shouldst, wouldst, couldst, or mightst 

il se port trait bien he should, would, could, or might 

nous nous port erions bien we should, vjould, could, or might 

vous vous port eriez bien you should, would, could, or might 

ils se port eraient bien Z/iey should, would, could, or might 

-o- PAST, 

or compound of the present. 
Je me serais bien port e, I should, would, could, 

orje mefusse bien port e or might have been well 

tu te serais bien port e, //iot< shouldst, wouldst, couldst, 

or f?/ te fusses bien port e or mightst have been well 

il se serait bien port i, he should, ivould, could, 

or il sefut bien port e or might have been well 

2L 



104 PRONOMINAL VERBS. 



'ami. tine. te. eerit. mere. etre. idoie. gite. opera, oter. tout, voiite. 
2 at. arm. tuh. ale. mare, there. idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 

nous nous serions bien port es, we should, would, could, 

or nous nous fussions bien 'port is or might have been well 

vous vous seriez bien port is, you should, would, could, 

or vous vousfussies bien port is or might have been well 

ils se seraient bien port es, they should, would, could, 

or Us sefussenl bien port is or might have been well 

-p- IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Port e-toi bien be well (thou) 

qu'il se port e bien let him be well 

port ora-s-nous bien let us be well 

port es-vous bien be well (you) 

qu'ils se port ent bien let them be well 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

-a- PRESENT. 

Que je me port e bien that I may be well 

que tu te port es bien that thou mayst be well 

qu'il se port e bien that he may be well 

que nous nous port ions bien that we may be well 

que vous voas porties bien that you may be well 

qu'ils se port ent bien that they may be well 

-R- PRETERIT 0T PAST, 

or compound of the present. 

Que je me sois bien port e that I may have been well 

que tu te sois bien port 6 that thou mayst have been well 

qu'il se soit bien port e that he may have been well 

que nous nous soyons bien port es that we may have been well 

que vous vous soyez bien port es that you may have been well 

qu'ils se soient bien port es that (hey may have been well 

-8- IMPERFECT. 

Que je me port asse bien that I might be well 

que tu te port asses bien that thou mightst be well 

qu'il so port at bien that he might be well 

que nous nous port assions bien that we might be well 

que vous vous port assiez bien that you might be well 

qu'ils se port assent bien that they might be well 

-T- PLUPERFECT, 

or compound of the impcifect. 

Que je me fusse bien port i that I might have been well 

que tu te fusses bien port i that thou mightst have been well 

qu'il se fut bien port i that he might have been well 

que nous nous fussions bien port is that we might have been well 

que vous vous fussiez bien port I* that you might have been well 

qu'ils se fussent bien port is that they might have been well 



PRONOMINAL VERBS. 105 

3 mwr. mur. jewne. jewne. bot'te. bo/ie. ancre. z'ngrat. onde. un. ameN. 
4 j, as s in pleasure. gn, as ni in union. i7/, as //i in WiZ/4'am. 

CONJUGATION OF THE REFLECTED VERB. 

Se bien porter to be well. (Negatively.) 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 

-A- PRESENT. 

Ne se pas bien port er not to be well 

-B- PAST Or FERFECT, 

or compound of the present. 

Ne s'etre pas bien porte not to hare been well 

-C- PARTICIPLE PRESENT Or ACTIVE. 

Ne se port ant pas bien not being well 

-D- COMPOUND OF THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 

Ne s'etant pas bien port i not having been well 

INDICATIVE MOOD 

-F- PRESENT. 

Jc ne me port e pas bien / am not well 

tu ne te port es pas bien thou art not well 

il ne se port e pas bien lie is not well 

nous ne nous port ons pas bien we are not well 

vous ne vous port es pas bien you are not well 

Us ne se port ent pas bien they are not icell 

-G- PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 

or compound of the present. 
Je ne me suis pas bien port e I have not been well 

tu ne t'es pas bien port e Ihou hast not been well 

il ne s'est pas bien port e he has not been well 

nous ne nous sommes pas bien porte's we have not been well 
vous ne vous etes pas bien porte's you have not been well 

ils ne se sont pas bion port is they have not been weU 

-H- IMPERFECT. 

Je ne me port ais pas bien I was not well 

tu ne te port ais pas bien thou wast not well 

il ne se port ait pas bien he ivas not well 

nous ne nous port ions pas bien we were not well 

vous ne vous port iez pas bien you were not well 

ils ne se port aient pas bien they were not icell 

-I- PLUPERFECT, 

or compound of the imperfect. - 
Je ne m'etais pas bien port 6 I had ?wl been well 

tu ne t'etais pas bien port e thou hadst not been well 

il ne s'etait pas bien port i he had not been well 

nous ne nous etions pas bien port es we had not been well 
vous ne vous etiez pas bien port es you had not been well 

Hs ne s'etaient pas bien port is \hey had not been well 



106 PRONOMINAL VERBS. 



^mi. one. te. ecrit. mere. etre. idole. gzte. opera, dter. tout, voute. 
' 2 at. arm. tub. ale. mare, there, z'diom. eel. opera, over. too. fool. 

-J- PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

Je ne me port ai pas bien / was not well 

tu ne te port as pas bien thou wast not well 

il ne se port a pas bien he was not well 

nous ne nous port dimes pas bien ive were not well 

vous ne vous port dies pas bien you ivtre not well 

ils ne se port erent pas bien they were not well 

-K- PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 

or compound of the preterit. 

Je ne me fus pas bien port e I had not been well 

tu ne te fus pas bien port e thou hadst not been well 

il ne se fut pas bien port e he had not been well 

nous ne nous fumes pas bien port es we had not been well 

vous ne vous futes pas bien port es you had not been well 

il ne se furent pas bien port es they had not been well 

-L- FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

Je ne me port erai pas bien / shall or will not be well 

tu ne te port eras pas bien thou shalt or wilt not be well 

il ne se port era pas bien he shall or will not be well 

nous ne nous port erons pas bien we shall or will not be well 

vous ne vous port erez pas bien you shall or will not be well 

ils ne se port eront pas bien they shall or will not be well 

-M- FUTURE ANTERIOR, 

or compound of the future. 

Je ne me serai pas bien port e I shall or will not have 

tu ne te seras pas bien port e thou shalt or wilt not have 

il ne se sera pas bien port e he shall or will not have 

nous ne nous serons pas bien port es we shall or will not have 

vous ne vous serez pas bien port es you shall or will not have 

ils ne se seront pas bien port es they shall or will not have 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 

-N- PRESENT. 

Je ne me port erais pas bien / should, would, could, 

or might not be well 
tu ne te port erais pas bien thou shouldst, wouldst, couldst^ 

or mightst not be well 
il ne se port erait pas bien he should, would, could, 

or might not be well 
nous ne nous port erions pas bien we should, would, could, 

or might not be well 
vous ne vous port eries pas bien you should, would, could, 

or might not be well 
ils ne se port eraient pas bien they should, would, could, 

or might not be vjell 

-O- PAST, 

or compound of the present. 
Je ne me serais pas bien port e, I should, would, could, 

or je ne mefusse pas bien port e or might not have been well 

tu ne te serais pas bien port e, thou shouldst, wouldst, couldst, 

or tu ne te fusses pas bien port e or mightst not have been well 



PRONOMINAL VERBS. 107 

3 mwr. mur. jeune. jtune. boite. bo£to. ancie. mgrat. onde. un. ameN. 
4 j, as s in pleasure, gn, as ni in union, ill, as Hi, in Wi lli am. 

il ne se serait pas bien port e, he should, would, could, 

or il ne se fat pas bien port e or might not have been well 

nous ne nous serions pas bien port es, wt should, would, could, 

or nous ne nous fuss ions pas bien port es or might not have been well 

vous ne vous seriez pas bien port is, you should, ivould, could, 

or vous ne vousfussies pas bien port es or might not have been well 

ils ne se seraient pas bien port es, they should, would, could, 

or il ne sej 'assent pas bien port es or might not have been well 

-p- IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Ne te port e pas bien be not well or do not be well (thou) 

qu'il ne se port e pas bien let him not be well 

ne nous port ons pas bien let us not be well 

ne vous port ez pas bien be not well or do not be well (you) 

qu'ils ne se port eni pas bien let them not be well 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



Que je ne me port e pas bien thai I may not be well 

que tu ne te portes pas bien that thou maysl not be well 

qu'il ne se port e pas bien that he may not be well 

que nous ne nous port ions pas bien that we may not be well 

que vous ne vous port iez pas bien that you may not be well 

qu'ils ne se port ent pas bien that they may not be well 

-R- PRETERIT 0T PAST, 

or compound of tiic present, 

Que je ne me sois pas bien port e that I may not have been well 

que tu ne te sois pas bien port e that thou mayst not have been 

well 
qu'il ne se soit pas bien port e that he may not have been well 

que nous ne nous soyons pas bien port es that vje may not have been well 
que vous ne vous soyez pas bien port es that you may not have been well 
qu'ils ne se soient pas bien port es that they may not have been well 

-S- IMPERFECT. 

Que je ne me port asse pas bien that I might not be well 

que tu ne te port asses pas bien that thou mightst not be well 

qu'il ne se port at pas bien that he might not be well 

que nous ne nous port assions pas bien that we might not be well 

que vous ne vous port assiez pas bien that you might not be well 

qu'ils ne se port assent pas bien that they might not be well 

-T- PLUPERFECT. 

or compound of the imperfect 
Que je ne me fusse pas bien port e that I might not have 

que tu ne te fusses pas bien port e that thou mightst not have 

qu'il ne se fut pas bien port e that he might not have 

que nous ne nous fussions pas bien port es that we might not have \ § 

que vous ne vous fussiez pas bien port es that you might not have 
qu'ils ne se fussent pas bien port es that they might not have 

2l2 



108 PRONOMINAL VERBS. 



'ami. ane. te. ecrit. mere. etre. idoie. gite. opera, oter. tout, vowte 
2 at. arm. tub. ale. mare, there, -idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 

CONJUGATION OF THE REFLECTED VERB. 
Se bien porter to be well. (Interrogatively,) 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



Me port e'-je bien am I well 

te port es-tu bien art thou well 

se port e-t-il bien is he well 

nous port ons-nous bien are we ivell 

vous port es-vous bien are you well 

se port er^-ils bien are they well 

-G- PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 

or compound of the present. 

Me suis-je bien port e have I been well 

t'es-tu bien port e hast thou been weR 

s'est-il bien port e has he been well 

nous sommes-nous bien port is have we been well 

vous etes-vous bien port es have you been well 

se sont-ils bien port es have they been well 

-H- IMPERFECT. 

Me port ais-je bien was I well 

te port ais-iu bien wast thou well 

se port ait-il bien was he well 

nous port ?'om-nous bien were we well 

vous port zes-vous bien were you well 

se port aient-i\s bien were they well 

-I- PLUPERFECT, 

or compound of the imperfect. 

M'etais-je bien port i had I been well 

t'etais-tu bien port e hadst thou been well 

s'etait-il bien porte had he been well 

nous etions-nous bien port es had we been well 

vous ettez-vous bien port es had you been well 

s'etaient-ils bien port es had they been well 

-j- PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

Me port az-je bien was I well 

te port as-ta bien wast thou well 

se port a-t-il bien was he well 

nous port ames-nous bien were we well 

vous port ales-vous bien were you well 

se port erent-ils bien were they well 



PRONOMINAL VERBS. 109 

s mwr. m/2r. jezme. jeTme. boi'te. boitQ. ancre. ingrat. onde. un. ameN. 
4 j, as s in pleasure, gn, as ni in union. 2'//, as Hi, in WiZZzam. 

-K- PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 

or compound of the preterit. 

Me fus-je bien port e had I been well 

te fus-tu bien port e hadst thou been well 

se fut-il bien port e had he been well 

nous fumes-nous bien port es had we been well 

vous futes-vous bien port es had you been well 

se furent-ils bien port es had they been well 

-L- FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

Me port erai-je bien shall or will I be well 

te port eras-tu bien shall or wilt thou be well 

se port era-t-il bien shall or will he be well 

nous port erons-nous bien shall or ivill we be well 

vous port eres-vous bien shall or will you be well 

se port eront-ils bien shall or wiZZ /Ae?/ be well 

-M- FUTURE ANTERIOR, 

or compound of the future. 
Me serai-je bien port e shall or sciZZ J Zia^e been well 

te seras-tu bien port e shall or w?iZ2 thou have been well 

se sera-t-il bien port e shall or will he have been well 

nous serons-nous bien port es shall or will we have been well 

vous serez-vous bien port es shall or will you have been well 

se seront-ils bien port es shall or will they have been well 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 

-N- PRESENT. 

Me port erais-]e bien should, would, could, or might I 

te port erais-txi bien shouldst, wouldst,couldst, or mightst thou 

se port e rait-il bien should, would, could, or might he 

nous port eria?is-nous bien should, would, could, or might we 

vous port enes-vous bien should, would, could, or might you 

se port erais?iZ-ils bien should, would, could, or might they 

-O- PAST, 

or compound of the present. 

Me serais-je bien port e, should, would, could 9 

or mefusse-je bien porte or might I have been well 

te serais-tu bien port e, shouldst, ivouldst, couldst, 

or tefusses-tu bien port e or mightst thou have been well 

se serai t-il bien port e, should, would, could, 

or se fut-il bien port e or might he have been well 

nous serions-nous bien port es, should, would, could, 

or nous fussions-nous bien port es or might we have been well 

vous seriez-vous bien portes, should, would, could, 

or vous fussiez-vous bien port es or might you have been well 

se seraient-ils bien port es, should, would, could, 

or se fussent-ils bien port es or might they have been well 

K 



110 PRONOMINAL VERBS. 



^mi. tine. te. ecrit. mere. etre. idole. gzte. opera, oter. towt. vowte. 
^at. arm. ti^b. ale. mare, there, zdiom. eel. opera, over. too. fool. 

CONJUGATION OF THE REFLECTED VERB. 
Se bien porter to be well. (Negatively and Interrogatively.) 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 

-F- PRESENT. 

Ne me port e-je pas bien am I not well 

ne te port es-tu pas bien art thou not well 

ne se port e-t-il pas bien is he not well 

ne nous port ons-nous pas bien are we not well 

ne vous port es-vous pas bien are you not well 

ne se port ent-ils pas bien are they not well 

-G- PERFECT OT PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 

or compound of the present. 

Ne me suis-je pas bien port e have I not been well 

pe t'es-tu pas bien port e hast thou not been ivell 

ne s'est-il pas bien port e has he not been well 

ne nous sommes-nous pas bien port es have we not been well 

ne vous etee-vous pas bien port es have you not been well 

ne se sont-ils pas bien port es have they not been well 

-H- IMPERFECT. 

Ne me pert ais-je pas bien was I not well 

ne te port ais-t\i pas bien wast thou not well 

ne se port a?'/-il pas bien was he not well 

ne nous port -ions-nous pas bien were we not well 

ne vous port ies-vous pas bien were you not well 

ne se port aient-i\s pas bien were they not well 

-I- PLUPERFECT, 

or compound of the imperfect. 

Ne m'etais-je pas bien port e had I not been well 

ne t'etais-tu pas bien port e hadst thou not been well 

ne s'etait-il pas bien port e had he not been well 

ne nous etions-nous pas bien port es had we not been well 

ne vous etiez-vous pas bien port es had you not been well 

ne s'etaient-ils pas bien port es had they not been well 

-J- PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

Ne me port ai-]e pas bien was I not well 

ne te port as-tu pas bien wast thou not well 

ne se porta-t-il pas bien was he not well 

ne nous port ames-nous pas bien were we not well 

ne vous port ates-vous pas bien were you not well 

ne se port erent-ils pas bien were they not well 



PRONOMINAL VERBS. Ill 

s mwr. mur. jeime. jewne. boite. bozte. ancre. mgrat. onde. un. ameN. 
4 j, as 5 in pleasure. gn 9 as ni in union, ill, as Hi, in Wi Hi am. 

-K- PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 

or compound of the preterit. 

Ne me fus-je pas bien port i had I not been well 

ne te fus-tu pas bien port i hadst thou not been well 

ne se fut-il pas bien port e had he not been well 

ne nous fumes-nous pas bien port is had we not been well 

ne vous futes-vous pas bien port is had you not been well 

ne se furent-ils pas bien port is had they not been well 

-L- FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

Ne me port erai-je pas bien shall or will I not be well 

ne te port eras-lu. pas bien shalt or wilt thou not be well 

ne se port era-t-il pas bien shall or will he not be well 

ne nous port erons-nous pas bien shall or will we not be well 

ne vous port erez-vous pas bien shall or will you not be well 

ne se port eront-ils pas bien shall or will they not be well 

-M- FUTURE ANTERIOR, 

or compound of the future. 
Ne me serai-je pas bien port i shall or will I not have 

ne te seras-tu pas bien port i shall or wilt thou not have 

ne se sera-t-il pas bien port i shall or will he not have 

ne nous serons-nous pas bien port is shall or will we not have 
ne vous serez-vous pas bien port is shall or will you not have 
ne se seront-ils pas bien port is shall or will they not have 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 

-N- PRESENT. 

Ne me port erais-je pas bien should, would, could, 

or might I not be well 
ne te port erais-tu pas bien shouldst, wouldst, couldst, 

or mightst thou not be well 
ne se port erait-il pas bien should, would, could, 

or might he not be well 
ne nous port erions-nous pas bien should, would, could, 

or might we not be well 
ne vous port eriez-vons pas bien should, would, could, 

or might you not be well 
ne se port eraient-ils pas bien should, would, could, 

or might they not be well 
-o- PAST, 

or compound of the present. 

Ne me serais-je pas bien port i, should, icould, could, 

or ne mefusse-je pas bien port i or might I not have been well 

ne te serais- tu pas bien port i, shouldst, wouldst, couldsl, 

or ne tefusses-tu pas bien port e or mightst thou not have been well 

ne se serai t-il pas bien port e, should, would, could, 

or ne se fut-il pas bien port i or might he not have been well 

ne nous serions-nous pas bien port is, should, would, could, 

or ne nous f us sions -nous pas bien port is or might we not have been well 

ne vous seriez-vous pas bien port is, should, would, could, 

or ne vous fussiez-vous pas bien port is or might you not have been well 

ne se seraient-ils pas bien port is, should, would, could, 

or ne sefussent-ilspas bien port is or might they not have been welt 



112 



PRONOMINAL VERBS. 



ami. dne. te. ecrit. mere. etre. idole. gite. opera, oter. tout, voute. 
*at. arm. tub. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 



CONJUGATION OF THE REFLECTED VERB. 



S'en aller 



to go away. 



(Affirmatively. ) 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 



-A- PRESENT. 

S'en aller to go away 

-B- PAST Or PERFECT, 

or compound of the present. 

S'en etre alle* to have gone away 

-C- PARTICIPLE PRESENT Or ACTIVE, 

S'en allant going away 

-D- COMPOUND OF THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 

S'en etant alle having gone away 

-E- PARTICIPLE PAST Or PASSIVE. 

En alle gone away 



Je m'en vaist 

tu t'en vas 

il s'en va 

nous nous en allons 

vous vous en allez 

ils s'en vont 



Je m'en suis alle 

tu t'en es alle 

il s'en est alle 

nous nous en sommes alles 

vous\ous en etes alles 

ils s'en sont allts 

H- 

Je m'en allais 

tu t'en allais 

il s'en allait 

nous nous en allions 

vous vous en alliez 

ils s'en allaient 



Je m'en etais alle 

tu t'en etais alle 

il s'en etait alle 

nous nous en £tions alles 

vous vous en etiez alles 

ils s'en £taicnt alles 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

I go away, do go away, or am 
thou gocst away, dost go away, or art 
he goes away, does go away, or is 
we go away, do go away, or are 
you go away, do go away, or are 
they go away, do go away, or are 

PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 
or compound of the present. 

I went away, did go away, or have 
thou wentest away, didst go away, or hast 
he went away, did go away, or has 
we went away, did go away, or have 
you went away, did go away, or have 
they went away, did go away, or have 

IMPERFECT. 

/ went away, did go away, or was 
thou wentest aw ay, didst go away, ox wast 
he went away, did go away, or ivas 
we went away, did go away, or were 
you went away, did go away, or were 
they went away, did go away, or were 

PLUPERFECT, 

or compound of the imperfect. 
I had gone away 
thou hadst gone away 
he had gone away 
we had gone away 
you had gone away 
they had gone away 



i 



n> 



t Or Je m'en vas, noi much used. 



PRONOMINAL VERBS. 



113 



3 mwr. mur. ]eune. jeune. bozte. bo/te. ancre. zngrat. onde, an. ameN. 
4 j, as s in pleasure. gn, as ni in union. ill, as Hi in WiZh'am 



Je m'en allai 

tu t'en alias 

il s'en alia 

nous nous en allames 

vous vous en allates 

ils s'en allerent 

-K- 

Je m'en fus alle 

tu t'en fus alle 

il s'en fut alle 

nous nous en fumes alles 

vous vous en futes alles 

ils s'en furent alles 

-L- 

Je m'en irai 

tu t'en iras 

il s'en ira 

nous nous en irons 

vous vous en irez 

ils s'en iront 

-M- 

Je m'en serai alle 

tu t'en seras alle 

il s'en sera alle 

nous nous en serons alles 

vous vous en serez alles 

ils s'en seront alles 



PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

/ went away or did go away 
thou went est away or didst go away 
he went away or did go away 
we went away or did go away 
you went away or did go away 
they went away or did go away 

RETERIT ANTERIOR, 
compound of the preterit. 

I had gone away 

thou hadst gone away 

he had gone away 

we had gone away 

you had gone away 

they had gone away 

FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

J shall or will go away 
thou shall or wilt go away 
J he shall or will go away 
we shall or will go away 
you shall or will go away 
they shall or will go away 

FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the future. 

I shall or will have gone away 
thou shall or wilt have gone away 
he shall or will have gone away 
we shall or will have gone away 
you shall or will have gone away 
they shall or will have gone away 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 



-N- 

Je m'en irais 

tu t'en irais 

il s'en irait 

nous nous en irions 

vous vous en iriez 

ils s'en iraient 

-o- 

Je m'en serais alle, 
or/e m?enfusse alle 
tu t'en serais alle, 
or tu V en fusses alle 
il s'en serait alle, 
or il s'en fut alle 

K2 



J should, would, could, or might go away 

thou shouldst, wouldst, couldst, or mightst go away 

he should, would, could, or might go away 

we should, would, could, or might go away 

you should, would, could, or might go away 

they should, would, could, or might go away 

PAST, 
or compound of the present. 

I should, would, could, 

or might have gone away 
thou shouldst, wouldst, couldst, 

or mightst have gone away 
he should, would, could, 
or might have gone away 



114 



PRONOMINAL VERBS. 



] ami. tine. te. ecrit. mere. etre. idole. gite. ope>a. dter. tout, voute, 
2 at. arm. tub. ale. mare, there. idiom, eel. opera, oyer. too. fooL 



nous nous en serions alles, 
or nous nous enfussions alles 
vousvous en seriez alles, 
or vous vous enfussiez alles 
ils s'en seraient alles, 
or ils s 'en /assent alles 



we should, would, could, 
or might have gone away 

you should, would, could, 
or might have gone away 

they should, would, could, 
or might have gone away 



Va-t'en 

qu'il s'en aille 

allons-nous-en 
allez-vous-en 

qu'ils s'en aillent 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

go away {thou) 
let him go away 
let us go away 
go away (you) 
let them go away 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



Que je m'en aille 
que tu t'en ailles 
qu'il s'en aille 
que nous nous en allions 
que vous vous en alliez 
qu'ils s'en aillent 



PRESENT. 

that I may go away 
that thou mayst go away 
that he may go away 
that we may go away 
that you may go away 
that they may go away 



Que je m'en sois alle 

que tu t'en sois alle 

qu'il s'en soit alle 

que nous nous en soyons alles 

que vous vous en soyez alles 

qu'ils s'en soient alles 



PRETERIT &r PAST, 
or compound of the present, 

that I may have gone away 
that thou mayst have gone away 
that he may have gone away 
that we may have gone away 
that you may have gone away 
that they may have gone away 



Que je m'en allasse 

que tu t'en allasses 

qu'il s'en allat 

que nous nous en allassions 

que voiis vous en allassiez 

qu'ils s'en allassent 



IMPERFECT. 

that I might go away 
that thou mightst go away 
that he might go away 
that we might go away 
that you might go away 
that they might go away 



Que je m'en fusse alle 

que tu t'en fusses alle 

qu'il s'en fut alle 

que nous nous en fussions alles 

que vous vous en fussiez alles 

qu'ils s'en fussent alles 



PLUPERFECT, 
or compound of the imperfect. 

that I might have gone away 
that thou mightst have gone away 
that he might have gone away 
that we might have gone away 
that you might Juivc gone away 
that they might have gone away 



PRONOMINAL VERBS. 115 

3 mur. mui. jewne. jeune. bojte. boite. ancre. ingr&t. onde. un. ameN. 
4 j, as s in pleasure, gn, as ni in union, ill, as Hi, in Willi am. 

CONJUGATION OF THE REFLECTED VERB. 

S'en aller to go away. (Negatively.) 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 

-A- PRESENT. 

Ne pas s'en aller not to go away 

-B- PAST Or PERFECT, 

or compound of the present. 

Ne pas s'en etre alle" not to have gone away 

-C- PARTICIPLE PRESENT Or ACTIVE. 

Ne s'en allant pas not going away 

-D- COMPOUND OF THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 

Ne s'en etant pas alle not having gone away 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

-F- PRESENT. 

Je ne m'en vais pas / do not go away or am not 



0*5 



tu ne t'en vas pas thou dost not go away or art not 

il ne s'en va pas he does not go away or is not . (j| 

nous ne nous en allons pas ice do not go away or are not 

vous ne vous en allez pas you do not go away or are not 

ils ne s'en vont pas they do not go away or are not 

-G- PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 

or compound of the present. 

Je ne m'en suis pas alle I did not go away or have not 

tu ne t'en es pas alle thou didst not go away or hast not 

il ne s'en est pas alle he did not go away or has not 

nous ne nous en sommes pas alles we did not go away or have not 

vous ne vous en etes pas alles you did not go away or have not 

ilsne s'en sont pas alles they did not go away or have not^ 

-H- IMPERFECT. 

Je ne m'en allais pas / did not go away or was not 

tu ne t'en allais pas thou didst not go away or wast not 

il ne s'en allait pas he did not go away or ivas not 

nous ne nous en alliens pas we did not go away or were not 

vous ne vous en alliez pas you did not go away or were not 

ils ne s'en allaient pas they did not go away or were not 

-I- PLUPERFECT, 

or compound of the imperfect. 
Je ne m'en etais pas alle / had not gone away 

tu ne t'en etais pas alle thou hadst not gone away 

il ne s'en etait pas alle he had not gone away 

nous ne nous en etions pas alles we had not gone away 
vous ne vous en etiez pas alles you had not gone away 

ilsne s'en etaient pas alles they had not gone away 

2M 



fr? 



116 PRONOMINAL VERBS. 



^mi. one. te. e'crit. mere. etre. idole. gite. opera, dter. tout, voiite. 
2 at. arm. tub. ale. mare, there, ^diom. eel. opera, over. too. fool. 

-J- PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

Je ne m'en allai pas / did not go away 

tu ne t'en alias pas thou didst not go away 

il ne s'en alia pas -> he did not go away 

nous ne nous en allames pas we did not go away 

vous ne vous en allates pas you did not go away 

ils ne s'en allerent pas they did not go away 

-K- PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 

or compound of the preterit. 

Je ne m'en fus pas alle / had not gone away 

tu ne t'en fus pas alle thou hadst not gone away 

il ne s'en fut pas alle he had not gone away 

nous ne nous en fumes pas alles we had not gone away 

vous ne vous en futes pas alles you had not gone away 

ils ne s'en furent pas alles they had not gone away 

-L- FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

Je ne m'en irai pas / shall or will not go away 

tu ne t'en iras pas thou shalt or wilt not go away 

il ne s'en ira pas he shall or will not go away 

nous ne nous en irons pas we shall or will not go away 

vous ne vous en irez pas you shall or will not go away 

ils ne s'en iront pas they shall or will not go away 

M- FUTURE ANTERIOR, 

or compound of the future. 

Je ne m'en serai pas alle / shall or will not have gone away 

tu ne t'en seras pas alle thou shalt or wilt not have gone away 

il ne s'en sera pas alle he shall or will not have gone away 

nous ne nous en serons pas alles we shall or will not have gone away 

vous ne vous en serez pas alles you shall or will not have gone away 

ils ne s'en seront pas alles they shall or will not have gone away 

CONDITIONAL MOOD 



Je ne m'en irais pas / should, would, could, or might 

tu ne t'en irais pas thou shouldst,wouldst,couldst, or mightst 

il ne s'en irait pas he should, would, could, or might 

nous ne nous en irions pas we should, would, could, or might 

vous ne vous en iriez pas you should, would, could, or might 

ils ne s'en iraient pas they should, would, could, or might 



-o- PAST, 

or compound of the present. 

Je ne m'en serais pas all£, / should, would, could 9 

or je ne m'enfusse pas alle or might not have gone away 

tu ne t'en serais pas alle, thou shouldst, ivouldst, couldst, 

or tu ne Ven fusses pas alle or mightst not have gone away 

il ne s'en serait pas alle\ he should, would, could, 

or il ne s'enfulpas alle or might not have gone away 



PRONOMINAL VERBS. 117 



3 mwr. mur. jewne. jdune. boite. boite. ancie. ingr&t. onde. un. ameN. 
4 j, as s in pleasure. gn 9 as ni in union, ill, as Hi, in Wi Hi am. 

nous ne nous en serions pas alles, we should, would, could, 

or no us ne nous enfussionspas alles or might not have gone away 

vous ne vous en seriez pas alles, you should, would, could, 

or vous ne vous enfussiez pas alles or might not have gone away 

ils ne s'en seraient pas alles, they should, would, could, 

or ils ne s'enfussent pas alUs or might not have gone away 

-p- IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Ne t'en va pas do not go away (thou) 

qu'il ne s'en aille pas let him not go away 

ne nous en allons pas let us not go away 

ne vous en allez pas do not go away (you) 

qu'ils ne s'en aillent pas let them not go away 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

-a- PRESENT. 

Que je ne m'en aille pas thai I may not go away 

que tu ne t'en allies pas that thou mayst not go away 

qu'il ne s'en aille pas that he may not go away 

que nous ne nous en allions pas that we may not go away 

que vous ne vous en alliez pas that you may not go away 

qu'ils ne s'en aillent pas that they may not go away 

-R- PRETERIT Or PAST, 

or compound of the present. 

Que je ne m'en sois pas alle that I may not have gone 

que tu ne t'en sois pas alle that thou mayst not have gone 

qu'il ne s'en soit pas alle that ht may not have gone 

que nous ne nous en soyons pas alles that we may not have gone ■ <§ 

que vous ne vous en soyez pas alles that you may not have gone 

qu'ils ne s'en soient pas alles that they may not have gone J 



-s- IMPERFECT. 

Que je ne m'en allasse pas that I might not go away 

que tu ne t'en allasses pas that thou might st not go away 

qu'il ne s'en allat pas that he might not go away 

que nous ne nous en allassions pas that we might not go away 

que vous ne vous en allassiez pas that you might not go away 

qu'ils ne s'en allassent pas that they might not go awaij 

-T- PLUPERFECT, 

or compound of the imperfect. 
Que je ne m'en fusse pas alle that I might not have 

que tu ne t'en fusses pas alle that thou mightst not have 

qu'il ne s'en fut pas alle that he might not have 

que nous ne nous en fussions pas alles that we might not have 
que vous ne vous en fussiez pas alles that you might not have 
qu'ils ne s'en fussent pas alles that they might not have 



118 



PRONOMINAL VERBS. 



l ami. dne. te. ecrit. mere. etre. idole. gite. opera, oter. tout, voute. 
2 at. arm. tub. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 

CONJUGATION OF THE REFLECTED VERB. 

S'en aller to go away. (Interrogatively.) 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



M'en vais-je 

t'en vas-tu 

s'en va-t-il 

nous en allons-nous 

vous en allez-vous 

s'en vont-ils 



PRESENT. 

do I go away or am I going away 
dost thou go away or art thou going away 
does he go away or is he going away 
do we go away or are we going away 
do you go away or are you going away 
do they go away or are they going away 



M'en suis-je alle 

t'en es-tu alle 

s'en est-il alle 

nous en sommes-nous alles 

vous en etes-vous alles 

s'en sont-ils alles 



PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 

or compound of the present. 

did I go away or have I 
didst thou go away or hadst thou 
did he go away or has he 
did we go away or have we 
did you go away or have you 
did they go away or have they 



-H- 

M'en allais-je 
t'en allais-tu 
s'en allait-il 
nous en allions-nous 
vous en alliez-vous 
s'en allaient-ils • 



IMPERFECT. 

did I go away or was 1 
didst thou go away or wast thou 
did he go away or was he 
did we go away or were we 
did you go away or were you 
did they go away or were they 



9*1 

g 

1 



M'en etais-je alle 

t'en etais-tu alle 

s'en etait-il alle 

nous en etions-nous alles 

vous en etiez-vous alles 

s'en etaient-ils alles 



PLUPERFECT, 
or compound of the imperfect. 
had I gone away 
hadst thou gone away 
had he gone away 
had we gone away 
had you gone away 
had they gone away 



M'en allai-je 

t'en allas-tu 

s'en alla-t-il 

nous en allames-nous 

vous en allates-vous 

s'en allerent-ils 



PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

did I go away 
didst thou go away 
did lie go away 
did we go away 
did you go away 
did they go away 






PRONOMINAL VERBS. 



119 



3 mur. mui. jeune. jeune. boite. boite. ancre. mgrat. o?ide. un. araeN. 
4 j, as s in pleasure, gn, as ni in umon. ill, as Hi, in Wi//iam. 



M'en fus-je alle 

t'en fus-tu alle 

s'en fut-il alle 

nous en fumes-nous alles 

vous en futes-vous alles 

s'en furent-ils alles 



PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the preterit. 
had I gone away 
hadst thou gone away 
had he gone away 
had we gone away 
had you gone away 
had they gone away 



-L- 

M'en irai-je 
t'en iras-tu 
s'en ira-t-il 
nous en irons-nous 
vous en irez-vous 
s'en iront-ils 



FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

shall or will I go away 
shall or wilt thou go away 
shall or will he go away 
shall or will we go away 
shall or will you go away 
shall or will they go away 



-M- 

M'en serai-je alle* 

t'en seras-tu alle 

s'en sera-t-il alle 

nous en serons-nous alles 

vous en serez-vous alles 

s'en seront-ils alles 



FUTURE ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the future. 

shall or will I have gone away 
shalt or wilt thou have gone away 
shall or will he have gone away 
shall or will we have gone away 
shall or will you have gone away 
shall or will they have gone away 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 



-N- 

M'en irais-je 
t'en irais-tu 
s'en irait-il 
nous en irions-nous 
vous en iriez-vous 
s'en iraient-ils 



PRESENT. 



should, would, could, or might I go away 
shouldst,wouldst, couldst, or mightst thou go away 
should, would, could, or might he go away 
should, would, could, or might we go aicay 
should, would, could, or might you go away 
should, would, could, or might they go away 



-o- 



M'en serais-je alle, 

or m'enfusse-je alle 

t'en serais-tu alle, 

or Venfusses-tu alle 

s'en serait-il alle, 

or s'enfiit-il alle 

nous en serions-nous alles, 

or nous en fussions-nous alles 

vcus en seriez-vous alles, 

or vous enfussies-vous alles 

s'en seraient-ils alles, 

or s'enfussent-ils alles 



PAST, 
or compound of the present. 

should, wouldi> could, 

or might I have gone away 
shouldst, wouldst, couldst, 

or mightst thou have gone away 
should, would, could, 

or might he have gone away 
should, would, could, 

or might we have gone away 
should, would, could, 

or might you have gone away 
should, would, could, 

or might they have gone away 
2 m 2 



120 



PRONOMINAL VERBS. 



'ami. tine. te. ecrit. mere. etre. idole. gite. opera, oter. tout, voute. 
?at. arm. tub. ale. mare, there, idiom, eel. opera, over. too. fool. 

CONJUGATION OF THE REFLECTED VERB. 

S'en aller to go away. (Negatively and Interrogatively.) 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



Ne m'en vais-je pas 

ne t'en vas-tu pas 

ne s'en va-t-il pas 

ne nous en allons-nous pas 

ne vous en allez-vous pas 

ne s'en vont-ils pas 



Ne m'en suis-je pas alle 

ne t'en es-tu pas alle' 

ne s'en est-il pas alle 

ne nous en sommes-nous pas alles 

ne vous en etes-vous pas alles 

ne s'en sont-ils pas alles 



Ne m'en allais-je pas 

ne t'en ailais-tu pas 

ne s'en allait-il pas 

ne nous en allions-nous pas 

ne vous en alliez-vous pas 

ne s'en allaient-ils pas 



PRESENT. 

do I not go away or am I not 
dost thou not go away or art thou not 
does he not go away or is he not 
do we not go away or are we not 
do you not go away or are you not 
do they not go away or are they not 

PERFECT Or PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 
or compound of the present. 

did I not go away 

or have I not gone away 
didst thou not go away 

or hast thou not gone away 
did he not go away 

or has he not gone away 
did we not go away 

or have we not gone away 
did you not go away 

or have you not gone away 
did they not go away 

or have they not gone away 

IMPERFECT. 

did I not go away or was I not 
didst thou not go away or wast thou not 
did he not go away or was he not 
did we not go away or were we not 
did you not go away or were you not 
did they not go away or were they not 

PLUPERFECT, 

or compound of the imperfect. 



Ne m'en etais-je pas all£ 

ne t'en etais-tu pas alle 

ne s'en etait-il pas alle 

ne nous en etions-nous pas alles 

ne vous en etiez-vous pas alles 

ne s'en etaient-ils pas alles 

-J- PRETERIT DEFINITE. 



had I not gone away 
hadst thou not gone away 
had he not gone away 
had we not gone away 
had you not gone away 
had they not gone away 



Ne m'en allai-je pas 

ne t'en allas-tu pas 

ne s'en alla-t-il pas 

ne nous en allames-nous pas 

ne vous en allates-vous pas 

ne s'en allerent-ils pas 



did I not go away 
didst thou not go away 
did he not go away 
did we not go away 
did you not go away 
did they not go away 



PRONOMINAL VERBS. 



121 



3 mwr. mur. jeune. jeune. boite. boite. ancie. mgrat. onde. un. ameN. 
4 j, as s in pleasure. gn, as ni in union. ill, as Hi in WU/iam. 



Ne m'en fus-je pas alle 

ne t'en fus-tu pas alle 

ne s'en fut-il pas alle 

ne nous en fumes-nous pas alles 

ne vous en ffites-vous pas alles 

ne s'en furent-ils pas alles 



PRETERIT ANTERIOR, 
or compound of the preterit. 

had I not gone away 
hadst thou not gone away 
had he not gone away 
had we not gone away 
had you not gone away 
had they not gone away 



Ne m'en irai-je pas 

ne t'en iras-tu pas 

ne s'en ira-t-il pas 

ne nous en irons-nous pas 

ne vous en irez-vous pas 

ne s'en iront-ils pas 



FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

shall or will I not go away 
shall or wilt thou not go away 
shall or will he not go away 
shall or will we not go away 
shall or will you not go away 
shall or will they not go away 



FUTURE ANTERIOR, 

or compound of the future. 



Ne m'en serai-je pas alle 

ne t'en seras-tu pas alle 

ne s'en sera-t-il pas alle 

ne nous en serons-nous pas alles 

ne vous en serez-vous pas alles 

ne s'en seront-ils pas alles 



shall or will I not have 
shalt or wilt thou not have 
shall or will he not have 
shall or will we not have 
shall or will you not have 
shall or will they not have^ 



<*? 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 



-N- PRESENT. 

Ne m'en irais-je pas should, would, could, or might I 

ne t'en irais-tu pas shouldst, wouldst, couldst, or mightsi thou 

ne s'en irait-il pas should, would, could, or might he 

ne nous en ir ions-nous pas should, would, could, or might we 

ne vous en iriez-vous pas should, would, could, or might you 

ne s'en iraient-ils pas should, would, could, or might they 



PAST, 
or compound of the present. 



Ne m'en serais-je pas alle, 

or ne m'enfusse-je pas alle 

ne t'en serais-tu pas alle, 

or ne f en fusses- tu pas alle 

ne s'en serait-il pas alle, 

or ne s 'en fut-il pas alle 

ne nous en serions-nous pas alles, 

or ne nous en fuss ions -nous pas alles 

ne vous en seriez-vous pas alles, 

or ne vous enfussiez-vous pas alles 

ne s'en seraient-ils pas aHes, 

or ne s'enfussent-tis pas alles 



should, would, could, 

or might I not have gone away 
shouldst, ivouldst, couldst, 

or mightst thou not have gone away 
should, would, could, 

or might he not have gone away 
should, would, could, 

ox might ive not have gone away 
should, would, could, 

or might you not have gone away 
should, would, could, 

or might they not have gone away 



122 IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS 



Irregular Verbs are those, which differ in the variations of 
some of their tenses and persons, from the verbs which serve as models 
to the four regular conjugations. 

However great the irregularity of a verb may be, its irregu- 
larities never occur but in the simple tenses ; the compound are always 
regular, and consequently conjugated as the compound tenses of the 
verbs given as models of the four regular conjugations. 

Defective Verbs, are those, which are not employed in all 
tenses or persons. 

Unipersonal Verbs, or, as commonly called Impersonal Verbs, 
are those, which are only employed in the third person singular, as II 
importe, it matters ; Il pleut, it rains, &c. 





* 






r 


Aller to 


g°' 




-a- Aller. 


-c- Allant. 




-E- Alle*. 


-F- Je vais, 
nous allons, 


tu vas, 
vous allez, 




il va, 
ils vont. 


-H- J'allais, 

nous allions, 


tu allais, 
vous alliez, 




il allait, 
ils allaient. 


-j- J'allai, 

nous allames, 


tu alias, 
vous allates, 




il alia, 

ils alle rent. 


-L- J'irai, 

nous irons, 


tu iras, 
vous irez, 




il ira, 
ils iront. 


-N- J'irais, 

nous irions, 


tu irais, 
vous iriez, 




il irait, 
ils iraient. 


-p- 

allons, 


va, 

allez, 




qu'il aille, 
qu'ils aillent. 


-a- Que j 'aille, 

que nous allions, 


que tu aille, 
que vous alliez 




qu'il aille, 
qu'ils aillent. 


-s- Que j'allasse, 

que nous allassions 


que tu allasses, 
que vous allassiez, 


qu'il allat, 
qu'ils allassent 






The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Etre, to be. 

There is a very common error prevalent in France, even among 
pretty well informed people, in the application of the Compound Tenses 
of the above verb Aller, to go ; people are very liable to use the Com- 
pound Tenses Etre alle, je suis alle, tu es alle, il est alle, Sic. instead of 
using the Compound Tenses of Etre, to be; avoir tte,fai ete, tu as ete, 
il a ete, &c. 

The general rule to follow is, that, whenever the return from the 
place mentioned, has not taken place, etre alle, je suis alle, tu es alle, 
il est alle, &c. must be used ; for instance — Jean est alle a Vecole ce matin, 
John has gone to school this morning ; means that John has gone to 
school, and has not yet returned. 

Whenever the return from the place mentioned, has taken place, 
Avoir ete, j^ai ete, tu as ete, il a ete, &c. must be used, for instance — 
Jean a ete a Vecole ce matin, John has been to school this morning ; 
means that John has been to school and has returned, or' at least has 
left the school. 



OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION. 



123 



The following mode of expression, i" will come and see you — Je 
viendrai votes voir; is frequently erroneously used in English, instead of 
I will go and see you — Tirai vous voir. Venir, to come, must be used 
in the sense of coming again to the place where the person speaking is ; 
and Aller, to go, in the sense of going from the place where one is, to 
any other place ; for instance — being at a person's house, I must say, 
Jev-iendrai vous voir demain — I will come and see you to-morrow ; but 
being at any place out of the house of the person to whom I speak, I must 
say, Tirai vous voir demain — I will go and see you to-morrow. In French 
this distinction must absolutely be made. 

S'en aller, to go away, is conjugated, page 112. 



a- Envoyer. 

f- J'envoie, 

nous envoyons, 

h- J'envoyais, 
nous envoyions, 

-J- J'envoyai, 

nous envoyames, 

-L- J'enverrai, 

nous enverrons, 

-N- J'enverrais, 

nous enverrions, 

-p- 

envoyons, 

-d- Que j'envoie, 

que nous envoyions, 

-s- Que j'envoyasse, 



Envoyer to send. 

-c- Envoyant. -e- Envoye. 



tu envoies, 
vous envoyez, 

tu envoy ais, 
vous envoyiez, 

tu envoy as, 
vous envoyates, 

tu enverras, 
vous enverrez, 

tu enverrais, 
vous enverriez, 

envoie, 
envoyez, 

que tu envoies, 
que vous envoyiez, 

que tu envoyasses, 



il envoie, 
ils envoient. 

il envoyait, 
ils envoyaient. 

il envoya, 

ils envoyerent. 

il enverra, 
ils enverront. 

il enverrait, 
ils enverraient. 

qu'il envoie, 
qu'ils envoient. 

qu'il envoie, 
qu'ils envoient. 

qu'il envoyat, 



que nous envoyassions, que vous envoyassiez, qu'ils envoyassent. 
Conjugate after the same manner — Renvoyer, to send back. 
The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 



Defective and Unipersonal Verbs of the First Conjugation. 

The following verbs are conjugated as Parler, to speak; but are 
employed, at the third persons singular only. 



Neiger 



to snow. 



-a- Neig er 
-c- Neige ant 

-F- II neig e 
-G- II a neig e 
-H- II neige ait 



to have snowed, 
having snowed. 



to snow. -B- Avoir neige 

snowing. -d- Ayant neig e 

-E- Neig e snowed, 

it snows, it does snow, it is snowing, 
it has snowed, it did snow, it has been snowing, 
it snowed, it did snow, it was snowing. 



124 IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS 



-I- II avait neige 
-j- II neige a 
-K- II eut neig e 
-L- II neig era 
-M- II aura neig e 
-N- II neig trait 
-o- II aurait neig e, 
or it eut neig i 
-d- Qu'il neig e 
-It- Qu'il ait neig" e 
-s- Qu'il neige at 
-T- Qu'il eut neig e that it might have snowed. 

See the verb Parler, to speak, page 38, and conjugate liko it; 
the above verb Negatively, Interrogatively, and Negatively and Interroga- 
tively; in the third person singular of every tense. 

Conjugate after the same manner, the following verbs. 



it had snowed or had been snowing. 

it snowed or did snow. 

it had snowed. 

it will snow 

it will have snowed. 

it should, would, could, or might snow 

> it should, would, could, or might have snowed 

that it may snow. 

that it may have snowed. 



11 arriv e 


it happens. 


11 grel e 


it hails. 


11 bruin e 


it drizzles. 


11 gresill e 


it rimes. 


11 degsl e 


it thaws. 


11 import e 


it matters. 


11 eclair e 


it lightens. 


11 result e 


it follows. 


11 gel e 


it freezes. 


11 tonn e 


it thunders. 



Irregular, Defective, and Vnipersonal Verbs of the Second 
Conjugation. 

Acquerir to acquire. 



-a- Acquerir. 

-F- J'acquiers, 

nous acquerons, 

-H- J'acquerais, 

nous acqutrions, 

-J- J'acquis, 

nous acquimes, 

-L- J'acquerrai, 

nous acquerrons, 

-N- J'acquerrais, 

nous acquerrions, 

-p- 

acquerons, 

-a- Que j 'acquiere, 

que nous acquerions, 

-s- Que j'acquisse, 

que nous acquissions, 



-c- Acquerant. -e- 

tu acquiers, 
vous acquerez, 

tu acquerais, 
vous acqueriez, 

tu acquis, 
vous acquites, 

tu acquerras, 
vous acquerrez, 

tu acquerrais, 
vous acquerriez, 



acquiers, 
acquerez, 

que tu acquieres, 
que vous acqueriez, 

que tu acquisses, 
que vous acquissiez, 



Acquis. 

il acquiert, 
ils acquierent. 

il acquerait, 
ils acqueraient. 

il acquit, 
ils acquirent. 

il acquerra, 
ils acquerront. 

il acquerrait, 
ils acquerraient. 

qu'il acquiere, 
qu'ils acquierent. 

qu'il acquiere, 
qu'ils acquierent. 

qu'il acquit, 
qu'ils acquissent. 



The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 



OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 



125 



Conjugated after the same manner — 
Requerir to require. S'enquerir to inquire. 

Conquerir to conquer. Querir to fetch. 

Reconquerir to conquer again. 

Conquerir, to conquer, (defective) only used in -a- the present of the 
infinitive, in -j- the preterit definite, in -s- the imperfect of the subjunctive, 
and in the compound tenses. 

Reconquerir, to conquer again, {defective) chiefly used in -e- the past 
, participle. 

S'enquerir, to inquire, (defective) very little used, except in -a- the pre- 
sent of the infinitive, and in the compound tenses. 

Querir, to fetch, (defective) is only used in -a- the present of the infinitive, 
with the verbs Venir to come, Aller to go, and Envoyer to send, as 
il est venu querir Jean — he has come to fetch John ; alles me querir 
Jean — go and fetch me John ; fai envoy e querir Jean — I have sent for 
John ; this verb is only used in common conversation. 



Assaillir to assault. 

-c- Assaillant, -e- Assailli. 



-a- Assaillir. 

-F- J'assaille, 

nous assaillons, 

-H- J'assaillais, 

nous assaillions, 

-j- J'assaillis, 

nous assaillimes, 

-L- J'assaillirai, 

nous assaillirons, 

-N- J'assaillirais, 

nous assaillirions, 

-p- 

assaillons, 

-Q- Que j'assaille, 

que nous assaillions, 

-s- Que j'assaillisse, que tu assaillisses, qu'il assaillit, 

que nous assaillissions, que vous assaillissiez, qu'ils assaillissent. 
Conjugated after the same manner, Tressaillir, to start, to 

[leap for. 
The compound tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 



tu assailles, 
vous assaillez, 

tu assaillais, 
vous assailliez, 

tu assaillis, 
vous assaillites, 

tu assailliras, 
vous assaillirez, 

tu assaillirais, 
vous assailliriez, 

assaille, 
assaillez, 

que tu assailles 
que vous assailliez, 



il assaille, 
ils assaillent. 

il assaillait, 
ils assaillaient. 

il assaillit, 
ils assaillirent. 

il assaillira, 
ils assailliront. 

il assaillirait, 
ils assailliraient. 

qu'il assaille, 
qu'ils assaillent. 

qu'il .assaille, 
qu'ils assaillent. 



BOUILLIR 



to boil. 



-a- Bouillir, 

-F- Je bous, 

nous bouillons, 

^H- Je bouillais, 
nous bouillions, 



L2 



-c- Bouillant. 

tu bous, 
vous bouillez, 

tu bouillais, 
vous bouilliez, 



-E- Bouilli. 

il bout, 

ils bouillent. 

il bouillait, 

ils bouillaient. 



126 IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS 



-J- 


Je bouillis, 
nous bouillimes, 


tu bouillis, 
vous bouillites, 


il bouillit, 
ils bouillirent. 


»L- 


Je bouillirai, 
nous bouillirons, 


tu bouilliras, 
vous bouillirez 


il bouillira, 
ils bouilliront. 


»N- 


Je bouillirais, 
nous bouillirions, 


tu bouillirais, 
vous bouilliriez, 


il bouillirait, 
ils bouilliraient. 


-P- 


bouillons, 


bous, 
bouillez,' 


qu'il bouille, 
qu'ils. bouillent. 


-q- 


Que je bouille, 
que nous bouillions, 


que tu bouilles, 
que vous bouilliez, 


qu'il bouille, 
qu'ils bouillent. 



-s- Que je bouillisse, que tu bouillisses, qu'il bouillit, 

que nous bouillissions, que vous bouillissiez, qu'ils bouillissent. 

Conjugate after the same manner, Ebouillir, to boil away; 
Rebouillir, to boil again. 

The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 

The above verbs are but seldom employed in any persons, ex* 
cept the third person singular and plural of their different tenses, simple 
and compound — as Veau bout — the water boils ; les pois ont bouilli — the 
peas have boiled, &c. If any other person of these verbs is want- 
ing, the verb, Faire, to make, is used with the present of the infinitive 
Bouillir, Ebouillir, or Rebouillir, which is put after — thus we 
Ba yi J e fa™ bouillir— I boil ; je ferai bouillir— I shall boil, &c. 



COURIR 



to run. 



-a- Courir. 

-F- Je cours, 

nous courons, 

-H- Je courais, 
nous courions, 

-j- Je courus, 

nous courumes, 

-L- Je courrai, 
nous courrons, 

-n- Je courrais, 
nous courrions, 

-p- 

courons, 

-0,- Que je coure, 

que nous courions, 

-s- Que je courusse, 

que nous courussions, 

Conjugate after the same manner- 



c- Courant, 


■e- Couru. 


tu cours, 
vous courez, 


il court, 
ils courent. 


tu courais, 
vous couriez, 


il courait, 
ils couraient. 


tu courus, 
vous courutes, 


il courut, 
ils coururent. 


tu courras, 
vous courrez, 


il courra, 
ils courront. 


tu courrais, 
vous courriez, 


il courrait, 
ils courraient. 


cours, 
courez, 


qu'il coure, 
qu'ils courent. 


que tu coures, 
que vous couriez, 


qu'il coure, 
qu'ils courent. 


que tu courusses, 
que vous courussiez. 


qu'il courut, 
qu'ils courussent 






OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 



127 



Accourir, 
Concourir, 
Discourir, 
Encourir, 



to run to. 
to concur, 
to discourse, 
to incur. 



Parcourir, 

Recourir, 

Secourir, 



to run over. 

to have recourse. 

to succour^ to help 



The Compound Tenses, of the above verbs, are conjugated with 
Avoir, to have; those of Accourir, to run to* are also sometimes con- 
jugated with Etre, to be. 



Cueillir to gather. 

-c- Cueillant, -e- Cueilli. 



-A- Cueillir. 

-F- Je cueille, 

nous cucillons, 

-H- Je cueillais, 
nous cueillions, 

-j- Je cueillis, 

nous cueillftnes, 

-L- Je cueillerai, 
nous cueillerons, 

-N- Je cueillerais, 
nous cueillerions, 

-p- 

cueillons, 

-Q- Que je cueille, 

que nous cueillions, 

-s- Que je cueillisse, que tu cueillisses, qu'il cueillit, 

que nous cueillissions, que vous cueillissiez, qu'ils cueillissent. 

The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 
Conjugated after the same manner — 

Accueillir, to welcome. | Recueillir, to gather^ to reap 



tu cueilles, 
vous cueillez. 

tu cueillais, 
vous cueilliez. 

tu cueillis, 
vous cueillites. 

tu cueilleras, 
vous cueillerez. 

tu cueillerais, 
vous cueilleriez. 

cueille, 
cueillez. 

que tu cueilles, 
que vous cueilliez. 



il cueille, 
ils cueillent. 

il cueillait, 
ils cueillaient. 

il cueillit, 
ils cueillirent. 

il cueillera, 
ils cueilleront. 

il cueillerait, 
ils cueilleraient. 

qu'il cueille, 
qu'ils cueillent. 

qu'il cueille, 
qu'ils cueillent. 



-a- Dormir. 

-F- Je dors, 

nous dormons, 

-H- Je dormais, 
nous dormions, 

-j- Je dormis, 

nous dormimes, 

-L- Je dormirai, 
nous dormirons, 

-N- Je dormirais, 
nous dormirions. 



Dormir 

-c- Dormant. 



to sleep. 



-E- Dormi. 



tu dors, 
vous dormez, 

tu dormais, 
vous dormiez, 

tu dormis, 
vous dormites, 

tu dormiras, 
vous dormirez, 

tu dormirais, 
vous dormiriez, 

2N 



il dort, 

ils dorment. 

il dormait, 
ils dormaient. 

il dormit, 
ils dormirent. 

il dormira, 
ils dormiront. 

il dormirait, 
ils dormiraient. 



128 



IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS 



dormons, 

-Q- Que je dorme, 

que nous dormions, 



dors, 
dormez, 

que tu dormes, 
que vous dormiez, 



-s- Que je dormisse, 

que nous dormissions, 



qu'il dorme, 
qu'ils dorment. 

qu'il dorme, 
qu'ils dorment. 

qu'il dormit, 



que tu dormisses, 

que vous dormissiez, qu'ils dormissent. 

The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 
Conjugate after the same manner — 



Endormir, to lull asleep. 
S'endormir, to fall asleep. 



Redormir, to sleep again. 
Se rendormir, to fall asleep again. 
The Compound Tenses of S'endormir, and Se rendormir, are 
conjugated with Etre, to be, as all pronominal verbs are. 



-a- Faillir, 

-j- Je faillis, 

nous faillimes, 



Faillir 

-c- Faillant. 



to fail 



tu faillis, 
vous faillites, 



-E- Failli. 

il faillit, 
ils faillirent. 



This verb is defective, and only used in the above tenses, and in 
all the compound tenses, which are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 



Fleurir 



to blossom^ to flourish. 



This verb is regular and conjugated like Finir, when speaking 
of plants and flowers ; but when speaking of the prosperity of a king- 
dom, or of a town, -c- the participle present, is florissant ; and -li- 
the imperfect of the indicative, jeflorissais, tufiorissais, &c. 

Refleurir, to blossom, or flourish again, follows the same rule. 





• 






Fuir to fly. 




a- Fuir. 


-c- Fuyant. 


-E- Fui. 


f- Je fuis, 
nous fuyons, 


tu fuis, 
vous fuyez, 


il fuit, 
ils fuient. 


h- Je fuyais, 
nous fuyions, 


tu fuyais, 
vous fuyiez, 


il fuyait, 
ils fuyaient. 


j- Je fuis, 
nous fuimes, 


tu fuis, 
vous fuites, 


il fuit, 
ils fuirent. 


L- Je fuirai, 
nous fuirons, 


tu fuiras, 
vous fuirez, 


il fuira, 
ils fuiront. 


-N- Je fuirais, 
nous fuirions, 


tu fuirais, 
vous fuiriez, 


il fuirait, 
ils fuiraient. 


-p- 

fuyons, 


fuis, 
fuyez, 


qu'il fuie, 
qu'ils fuient. 



OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 



129 



-Q- Que je fuie, 

que nous fuyions, 

-s- Que je fuisse, 

que nous fuissions, 



que tu fuies, 
que vous fuyiez, 

que tu fuisses, 
que vous fuissiez, 



qrvil fuie, 
qu'ils fuient. 

qu'il fuit, 
qu'ils fuissent. 



The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 
Conjugated after the same manner, S'enfuir, to run away. 



Gesir 



to lie. 



This verb, (defective) which formerly signified to be lying down, 
is no longer in use ; we however, say sometimes, il git ; ci-git, here lies, 
is the common form by which an epitaph begins. 



Hair 



to hate. 



This verb is regular, and conjugated like Finir, except in the 
first three persons singular of -f- the present of the indicative, Je hais 9 
I hate ; tu hais, thou hatest; il hait, he hates ; and in the second person 
singular of -p- the imperative, hais, hate. 

A diaeresis ( •• ) is required over the i in all tenses and persons, 
except in those above mentioned ; this diseresis is to cause the a and i to 
be pronounced as two syllables. 







Mourir 


to die 




-A- 


Mourir. 


-c- Mourant. 


-E- 


Mort. 


-F- 


Je meurs, 


tu meurs, 




il meurt, 




nous mourons 


vous mourez, 




ils meurent. 


-H* 


Je mourais, 


tu mourais, 




il m our ait, 




nous mourions, 


vous mouriez, 




ils mouraient. 


-J- 


Je mourns, 


tu mourus, 




il mourut, 




nous mourumes, 


vous mourutes, 




ils moururent. 


-L- 


Je mourrai, 


tu mourras, 




il mourra, 




nous mourrone, 


xrans mourrez, 




ils mourront. 


-N- 


Je mourrais, 


tu mourrais, 




il mourrait, 




nous mourrions, 


vous mourriez^ 




ils mourraient. 


-F- 




meurs, 




qu'il meure, 




mourons, 


mourez, 




qu'ils meurent. 


-Q 


- Que je meure, 


que tu meures, 




qu'il meure, 




que nous mourions 


, que vous mouriez, 


qu'ils meurent. 



-s- Que je mourusse, que tu mourusses, qu'il mourut, 

que nous mourussions, que vous mourussiez, qu'ils mourussent. 

The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Etre, to be. 
Conjugated after the same manner, Se mourir, tG be dying. 



130 IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS ] 

Oum to hear. 

This verb, {defective) can only be used in -a- the present of the 
infinitive, ou'ir, to hear ; in -j- the preterit definite, fouis, I heard ; 
il ou'it, he heard ; in -s- the imperfect of the subjunctive, que fouisse, 
that I might hear ; qu'il ou'it, that he might hear ; and in its compound 
tenses, which are formed with the simple tenses of Avoir, to have, and 
its past participle owl, as fai out, I have heard, tu as out, &c. 





Ouvrir to open. 




-A- 


Ouv rir. 


-o Ouv rant. -e- 


- Ouv ert. 


-F- 


J'ouv re, 

nous ouv rons, 


tu ouv res, 
vous ouv rez, 


il ouv re, 
ils ouv rent. 


-H- 


J'ouvrais, 
nous ouv rions r 


tu ouv rais, 
vous ouv ries, 


il ouv rait, 
ils ouv raient. 


-J- 


J'ouv vis, 
nous ouv rimes, 


tu ouv ris, 
vous ouv rites, 


il ouv ro7, 
ils ouv rirent. 


-L- 


J 'ouv rirai, 
nous ouv rirons, 


tu ouv riras, 
vous ouv rirez, 


il ouv nra, 
ils ouv riront. 


-N- 


J'ouv rirais, 
nous ouv virions, 


tu ouv mm's, 
vous ouv riries, 


il ouv rir ait, 
ils ouv riraient. 


-P- 


ouv rons, 


ouv re, 
ouv res, 


qu'il ouv re, 
qu'ils ouv renf. 


-Q- 


Que j'ouv re, 

que nous ouv rions, 


que tu ouv res, 
que vous ouvWes, 


qu'il ouv re, 
qu'ils ouv ren/. 



-s- Que j'ouv risse, 



qu'il ouv rit, 
qu'ils oavrissent. 



que tu ouv risses, 
que nous ouv rissions, que vous ouv rissies 

Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 
Conjugated after the same manner — 

Decouv rir, to discover. 

Off rir, to offer. 

Me soff rir, to underbid, 

Souff rir to suffer. 



Rouv rir •, /o open again. 

Entr'ouv rir, £o /m?/* opm. 

Couv rir, £0 cover. 

Recouv rir, to cover again 



-a- Sen tir. 

-F- Je sen 5, 

nous sen tons, 

-H- Je sen tais, 
nous sen /ion^, 

-j- Je sen lis, 

nous sen times, 



Sentir to feel. 

-c- Sen tant. 

tu sen s, 
vous sen tez. 

tu sen tais, 
vous sen ties, 

tu sen tis, 
vous sen /£/es, 



-F- Sen ti. 

il sen /, 
ils sen tent. 

il sen tait, 
ils sen talent. 

il sen /z7, 
ils sen tirent. 



OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 



131 



-L- Je sen tirai, 
nous sen t irons, 

-N- Je sen tirais, 
nous sen tirions, 



tu sen tiras, 
vous sen tires, 

tu sen tirais, 
vous sen tiriez, 

sen s, 

sen tez, 

que tu sen tes, 
que vous sen tiez, 

que tu sen tisses, 
que vous sen tissiez, 



il sen ttra. 
ils sen iiront, 

il sen tirait, 
ils sen tiraient. 

qu'il sen te, 
qu'ils sen ten*. 



sen tons, 

■ Que je sen te, 
que nous sen tions, 

Que je sen tisse, 
que nous sen tissions, 

The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have, 

Conjugate after the same manner — 



qu'il sen te, 
qu'ils sen tent. 

qu'il sen tit, 
qu'ils sen tissent. 



Consen tir, to consent Jo agree. 
PressenfoY, to foresee. 
Ressen t ir, to resent, to feel still. 
Men tir, to lie. 

Demenft'r, to give the lie, to be- 
\Jie, to contradict. 
Repar tir, to reply. 

The Compound Tenses of the first six of the above verbs, are 
conjugated with Avoir., to have. 

Those of Se ressentir and Se repentir, as all other pronomi- 
nal verbs, are conjugated with Etre, to he. 

And those of Partir, Repartir, Sortir, and Ressortir, some^ 
times with Avoir, sometimes with Etre. 



Se ressen tir, tofeeLstill- 
Se repen tir 9 to repent. 

Par tir, to set out, to depart. 
Repar tir, to set out again. 
Sor tir, to go out. 
Ressor ft'r, to go out again. 



Servir 



to serve. 



X- 


Ser vir. 


-c- Servant. 


•e- Serve. 


-F- 


Je ser s, 
nous ser vons, 


tu ser s, 
vous servez, 


il ser t, 
ils ser vent. 


H- 


Je ser vais, 
nous seivions, 


tu ser vais, 
vous ser viez, 


il ser vait, 
ils ser vaient. 


J- 


Je ser vis, 
nous ser vimes, 


tu series, 
vous series, 


il ser vit, 
ils ser vir ent. 


L- 


Je ser vir ai, 
nous ser virons, 


tu ser viras, 
vous ser virez, 


il ser vir a, 
ils ser viront. 


N-« 


Je ser virais, 
nous ser virions, 


tu ser virais, 
vous ser viriez, 


il ser vir ait, 
ils ser viraient, 


P- 


ser vons, 


ser s, 
ser vez, 
2 h- 2 


qu'il ser ve, 
qu'ils serpen/. 



132 



IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS 



-a- Que je serve, que tu serves, qu'il serve, 

que nous ser vions, que vous ser vies, qu'ils ser vent, 

-s- Que je ser visse, que tu ser visses, qu'il ser vit, 

que nous ser vissions, que vous ser vissiez, qu'ils ser vissent. 

Conjugated after the same manner — 

Desser vir, to clear a table, to do an ill office to somebody. 
Se ser vir, to make use, to use. 

The Compound Tenses of Servir and Desservir, are conju 
gated with Avoir ; those of Se servir, with Etre. 

Asservir, to subject, is regular, and conjugated like Finir. 



Tenir 



to hold. 



-A- 


T enir. 


•c- T enant. 


-E- T em* 


-F- 


Je liens, 
nous t enons, 


tu liens, 
vous t eraes, 


il t ient, 
ils t iennent. 


-H- 


Je t enais, 
nous t enions, 


tu t enais, 
vous t eniez, 


il t enait, 
ils t enaient. 


-J- 


Je tins, 
nous tinmes, 


tu t ms, 
vous tznfes, 


il tm£, 
ils t invent. 


-L- 


Je tiendrai, 
nous tiendrons, 


tu t iendras, 
vous t iendrez, 


il t iendra, 
ils tiendront. 


-N- 


Je tiendrais, 
nous t iendrions, 


tu tiendrais, 
vous t iendriez, 


il tiendrait, 
ils t iendraient. 


-P- 


t enons, 


t iens, 
t enez, 


qu'il tienne, 
qu'ils t iennent. 


-Q- 


Que je tienne, 
que nous t enions, 


que tu tiennes, 
que vous t ernes:, 


qu'il tienne, 
qu'ils t iennent. 


-S- 


Que jet insse, 
que nous tinssions, 


que tu t insses, 
que vous tinssiez, 


qu'il tz/iJ, 
qu'ils tinssent. 



The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, /o /iowe, 
Conjugate after the same manner — 



*AppartemY, £0 belong. 
Av emY, £0 happen. 
*Circonv emY, £0 circumvent. 
*Cont emY, £0 contain. 
*ContrevemY, £0 contravene. 
Conv emY, £0 agree, to suit. 
*Deprev emY, /o unprepossess. 
*DetemY, £0 detain. 
Dev emY, £0 become. 



Disconv emY, to disagree. 
*Entret emY, to entertain. 
Interv emY, to intervene. 
*MaintemY, to maintain. 
MesavemY, to succeed ill. 
*ObtemY, £0 obtain. 
Parv emY, £0 attain. 
*Pre v emY, to prevent ^ to inform* 
Prov emY, £0 proceed from. 



OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 



133 



Redev enir, to become again. 
*Ret enir, to retain. 
Rev enir, to come again, 

[to come back. 
S'abst enir, to abstain. 
*Sout enir, to sustain,to support. 



Se ressouv enir, to recollect 
Se souvcmVj to remember. 
*Subv enir, to relieve. 
Surv enir, to come unexpectedly. 
V enir, to come. 



Those of the above verbs, which are marked with an asterisk (*), 
are conjugated in their compound tenses, with Avoir, to have, and the 
others, with Etre, to be. 

Avenir, to happen, is only used in the third person singular, of 
-F- the present of the indicative, as sHl avient, if it happens. 

Provenir, to proceed from, is employed in its third persons sin- 
gular, and plural; as cela provient de, that proceeds from ; Tous ses mal- 
heurs proviennent de, &c. all his misfortunes proceed from, &c. 



Vetir 



to clothe. 



-a- Vet ir. 

-F- Je vet s, 
nous vet ons, 

-H- Je vet aw, 

nous vet ions, 

-j- Je vet is, 

nous vet imcs, 

-L- Je vetir at, 
nous vet irons, 

-N- Je vetirais, 
nous vet irions, 



vet ons, 

-a- Que je vet e, 

que nous vet ions, 



•- Vet ant. 


-E- Vet u. 


tu vet s, 
vous vetes, 


il vet, 
ils vet ent. 


tu vet ais, 
vous vetiez, 


il vet ait, 
ils vet aient. 


tu vet is, 
vous vet ites, 


il vHit, 
ils vet ircnt. 


tu vetiras, 
vous v&t irez, 


il v&t ira, 
ils vet iront. 


tu vet irais, 
vous vet mesr, 


il vet iVmf, 
ils vetiraient. 


vets, 
v&t ez, 


qu'il v&t e, 
qu'ils vet en/. 


que tu vet es, 
que vous vtUez, 


qu'il vet e, 
qu'ils vet ent. 


que tu vetmes, 
que vous vetissiez, 


qu'il vet it, 
qu'il vetissent. 



-s- Que je vet me, 

que nous vetissions, 

The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 
Conjugated after the same manner — 



Revet ir, to clothe. 

De vetir, to strip, to undress. 



Se vetir, to dress, or clothe one's 

[self. 
Se devet ir, to divest one's self. 

The Compound Tenses of Se vetir, and >Se devetir, are conjuga- 
ted with Etre, to be; as all other pronominal verbs are. 

M 



134 IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS 



Irregular, Defective, and Unipersonal Verbs of the Tliird 
Conjugation. 

Avoir to have. 

This verb, (active and auxiliary) is one of the most irregular. 
See its conjugation, page 10. 



Ravoir 



to have again. 



This verb, {active and defective) is only used in -a- the present 
of the infinitive. 



Y avoir there to be. 

This verb, {unipersonal) is conjugated, page 20. 



S'asseoir 



to sit down. 



-a- S'asseoir. 

-F- Je m'assieds, 

nous nous asseyons, 

-H- Js m"^ppyais, 

nous nous asseyions, 

-j- Je m'assis, 

nous nous assimes, 

-L- Je m'asseyerai, 
or je m'asseierai, 
or je m'assierai, 
nous nous asseyerons, 
or nous nous asseierons, 
or nous nous assierons, 

-N- Je m'asseycrais, 
or je m'asseierais, 
or je m'assierais, 
nous nous asseyerions, 
or nous nous asseierions, 
or nous nous assierions, 



-c- S'asseyant. 

tu t'assieds, 

vous vous asseyez, 



-p- 



asseyons-nous, 



tu t'asseyais, 
vous vous asseyiez, 

tu t'assis, 

vous vous assites, 

tu t'asseyeras, 

tu t'asseieras, 

tu t'assieras, 

vous vous asseyerez, 

vous vous asseierez, 

vous vous assierez, 

tu t'asseyerais, 
tu t'asseierais, 
tu t'assierais, 
vous vous asseyeriez, 
vous vous asseieriez, 
vous vous assieriez, 

assieds-toi, 
asseyez-vous, 



-E- Assis 

il s'assied, 
ils s'asseyent, 
or ils s'asseient. 

il s'asseyait, 
ils s'asseyaient. 

il s'assit, 
ils s'assirent. 

il s'asseyera, 
il s'asseiera, 
il s'assiera, 
ils s'asseyeront, 
ils s'asseieront, 
ils s'assieront. 

il s'asseyerait, 
il s'asseierait, 
il s'assierait, 
ils s'asseyeraient, 
ils s'asseieraient, 
ils s'assieraient. 

qu'il s'asseye, 
or qu'il s'asseie. 



-a- Que je m'asseye, que tu t'asseycs, 

or que je m'asseie, or que tu t'asseies, 

que nous nous asseyions, que vous vous asseyiez, 

-s- Que je m'assisse, que tu t'assisses, 

que nous nous assissions, que vous vous assissiez, 



qu'ils s'asseyent, 
or qu'ils s'asseient. 

qu'il s'asseye, 
or qu'il s'asseie, 
qu'ils s'asseyent, 
or qu'ils s'asseient. 

qu'il s'assit, 
qu'ils s'assissent. 



OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION. 



135 



Conjugated after the same manner, Se rasseoir, to sit down again. 

The Compound Tenses of these two verbs, are conjugated with 
Etre, to be; as all other pronominal verbs are. 

Conjugate after the same manner, without the second pronoun, 
me, te % se f &c. Asseoir, to set, or to lay something, or somebody down. 

The compound tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 

The different ways of writing and pronouncing some of the 
tenses and persons of the above verbs, render them very difficult ; par- 
ticular attention must be paid to their conjugations. Of the three ways 
of writing and pronouncing, -l- the future, and -n- the conditional pre- 
sent ; I would recommend the third as being the easiest, and I believe 
the most used. 

Some Grammarians have imagined, to do away with the difficul- 
ties these verbs offer, even to French people, to conjugate them as 
follows — 



S'ASSOIR 



to sit down. 



-F- Je m'assois, 

nous nous assoyons, 

-H- Je m'assoyais, 

nous nous assoyions, 

-j- Je m'assis, 

nous nous assimes, 

-L- Je m'assoirai, 

nous nous assoirons, 

-N- Je m'assoirais, 

nous nous assoirions, 

-p- 

assoyons-nous, 

-a- Que je m'assoie, 



-c- S'assoyant. 

tu t'assois, 

vous vous assoyez, 

tu t'assoyais, 
vous vous assoyiez, 

tu t'assis, 

vous vous assites, 

tu t'assoiras, 
vous vous assoirez, 

tu t'assoirais, 
vous vous assoiriez, 

assois-toi, 
assoyez-vous, 

que tu t'assoies, 



-E- Assis. 

il s'assoit, 
ils s'assoient. 

il s'assoyait, 
ils s'assoyaient. 

il s'assit, 
ils s'assirent, 

il s'assoira, 
ils s'assoiront. 

il s'assoirait, 
ils s'assoiraient. 

qu'il s'assoie, 
qu'ils s'assoient, 

qu'il s'assoie, 



que nous nous assoyions, que vous vous assoyiez, qu'ils s'assoient. 

-s- que je m'assisse, que tu t'assisses, qu'il s'assit, 

que nous nous assissions, que vous vous assissiez. qu'ils s'assissent. 

It is certain that this way of conjugating the above, is much 
more convenient ; and I should like to recommend it; but although 
much used in some parts of France, it is not yet generally received as 
correct by most of those of the Old School — who in every country seem 
to be opposed to every thing that can facilitate knowledge, lest we 
should now acquire in a short time, and with little trouble, what has 
cost them much time and great trouble. 



Choir to fall. 

This verb is not used, except in -a- the present of the infinitive. 



136 IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS 

Dechoir to decay. 

This verb is seldom used, except in -a- the present of the infini- 
tive, and in its compound tenses, which are conjugated sometimes with 
Etre, sometimes with Avoir. 



Echoir to fall to, to expire, to he due, to fall due. 

This verb is only used in the third person of -f- present of the 
indicative, t'Z cchoit, sometimes pronounced ilechet; in -j- il tchut ; in 
-L- il echerra; in -n- il echerrait ; in -s- qu'il echiit, &c. in -a- echoir; 
in -c- echeant ; in -b- tchu ; and in the compound tenses, which are con 
jugated sometimes with Avoir, and sometimes with Etre. 



-f- II faut, 
-H- II fallait, 
-j- II fallut, 
-L- 11 faudra, 
-N- II faudrait, 
-p- (none) 
-a- Qu'il faille, 
-s- Qu'il fallut, 



Falloir to be necessary. 

it is necessary, 

it was necessary, 

it was necessary, 

it shall or ivill be necessary, 

it should, would) could) or might be necessary 



that it may be necessary, 
that it might be necessary. 

The Compound Tenses of this verb, (unipersonal and defective) 
are formed by the addition of its participle past, /aZZw, to the third person 
singular of the verb Avoir, as il afallu, it has been necessary, &c. 

The expressions, / must) he must) we must) you must) they must. 
Sic. are rendered by it must that I— it must that he) &c. the verb which 
follows is put in the subjunctive mood, and in the person indicated by the 
personal pronoun, which is before must) in the English ; as I must write — 
II faut que f ecrive ; you must drink — il faut que vous buvieZ) &c. we 
say also, il me faut ecrire) il vous faut boire. 



Mouvoir 



to move. 



-a- Mouvoir. 

-F- Je me us, 

nous mouvons, 

-H- Je mouvais, 
nous mouvions, 

-j- Je mus, 

nous mumes, 

-L- Je mouvrai, 
nous mouvrons, 



-c- Mouvant. 

tu meus, 
vous mouvez, 

tu mouvais, 
vous mouviez, 

tu mus, 
vous mutes, 

tu mouvras, 
vous mouvrez, 



-E- Mu. 



il meut, 

ils meuvent. 

il rnouvait, 
ils mouvaient. 

il mut, 
ils murent. 

il mouvra, 
ils mouvront. 



OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION. 



137 



\- 


Je mouvrais, 
nous mouvrions, 


tu mouvrais, 
vous mouvriez, 


il mouvrait, 
ils mouvraient. 


F- 


mouvons, 


meus, 
mouvez, 


qu'il meuve, 
qu'ils meuvent. 


ll- 


Que je meuve, 
que nous mouvions, 


que tu meuves, 
que vous mouviez, 


qu'il meuve, 
qu'ils meuvent. 


s- 


Que je musse, 
que nous mussions, 


que tu musses, 
que vous mussiez, 


qu'il mut, 
qu'ils mussent. 



This verb is very little used, except in 
infinitive. 



■a- the present of the 



The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 
The object in giving, here, all its tenses, is to have a model, for- 



S'emouvoir, to be concerned. 



Emouvoir, to move. 
Promouvoir, to promote. 

which are conjugated like it. The compound tenses of S^emouvoir^ are 
conjugated with Etre. 

Promouvoir, is only used in -a- the present of the infinitive, and 
in the compound tenses. 





Pleuvoir to rain. 


-a- Pleuvoir, 


to rain. 


-c- Pleuvant, 


raining. 


-E- Plu, 


rained. 


-F- 11 pleut, 


it rains, does rain, or is raining. 


-H- 11 pleuvait, 


it rained, did rain, or was raining. 


-j- 11 plut, 


it rained or did rain. 


-L- 11 pleuvra, 


it will rain. 


-N- 11 pleuvrait, 


it would rain. 


-p- (none.) 




-q.- Qu'il pleuve, 


that it may rain. 


-s- Qu'il plut, 


that it might rain. 



The compound tenses, of the above unipersonal verb, are formed 
by the addition of -e- its participle passive, plu, to the third person sin- 
gular of the simple tenses of Avoir; as il a plu, it has rained, &c. 



-a- Pourvoir. 



Pourvoir to provide. 

-c- Pourvoyant. -e- Pourvu. 



-F- Je pourvois, 

nous pourvoyons, 

-H- Je pourvoyais, 
nous pourvoyions, 

M2 



tu pourvois, 
vous pourvoyez, 

tu pourvoyais, 
vous pourvoyiez, 



il pourvoit, 
ils pourvoient. 

il pourvoyait, 
ils pourvoyaient. 



188 



IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS 



-J- Je pourvus, 

nous pourviimes, 

-L- Je pourvoirai, 
nous pourvoirons, 

-N- Je pourvoirais, 
nous pourvoirions, 

-p- 

pourvoyons, 

-a- Que je pourvoie, 



tu pourvus, 
vous pourviites, 

tu pourvoiras, 
vous pourvoirez, 

tu pourvoirais, 
vous pourvoiriez, 

pourvois, 
pourvoyez, 



il pourvut, 
ils pourvurent. 

il pourvoira, 
ils pourvoiront. 

il pourvoirait, 
ils pourvoiraient. 

qu'il pourvoie, 
qu'ils pourvoient. 

qu'il pourvoie, 
qu'ils pourvoient. 



que tu pourvoies, 
que nous pourvoyions, que vous pourvoyiez, 

s- Que je pourvusse, que tu pourvusses, qu'il pourvut, 

que nous pourvussions, que vous pourvussiez, qu'ils pourvussent. 



The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 



Pouvoir to be able. 


-a- Pouvoir. -c- Pouvant. 


-E- PU. 


-F- Je puis or je peux, 
nous pouvons, 


tu peux, 
vous pouvez, 


il peut, 
ils peuvent. 


-H- Je pouvais, 
nous pouvions, 


tu pouvais, 
vous pouviez, 


il pouvait, 
ils pouvaient. 


-j- Je pus, 

nous pumes, 


tu pus, 
vous putes, 


il put, 
ils purent. 


-L- Je pourrai, 
nous pourrons, 


tu pourras, 
vous pourrez, 


il pourra, 
ils pourront. 


-N- Je pourrais, 
nous pourrions, 


tu pourrais, 
vous pourriez, 


il pourrait, 
ils pourraient. 


-p- 


(none) 




-Q- Que je puisse, 

que nous puissions, 


que tu puisse, 
que vous puissiez, 


qu'il puisse, 
qu'ils puissent. 


-s- Que je pusse, 

que nous pussions, 


que tu pusses, 
que vous pussiez, 


qu'il put, 
qu'ils pussent. 


Compound Tenses 


are conjugated* with 


Avoir, to have. 
WW. 


Savoir to h 


-a- Savoir. -c- 


Sachant. 


-E- Su. 


-F- Je sais, 

nous savons, 


tu sais, 
vous savez, 


il sait, 
ils savent. 


H- Je savais, 
nous savions, 


tu savais, 
vous saviez, 


il savait, 
ils savaient 


j- Je sus, 
nous sumes, 


tu sus, 
vous sutes, 


^il sut, 
ils surent. 



OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION. 



139 



-L- 


Je saurai, 
nous saurons, 


tu sauras, 
vous saurez, 


il saura, 
ils sauront. 


-X- 


Je saurais, 
nous saurions, 


tu saurais, 
vous sauriez, 


il saurait, 
ils sauraient* 


-P- 


sachons, 


sache, 
sachez, 


qu'il sache, 
qu'ils sachent. 


-<*- 


Que je sache, 
que nous sachions, 


que tu saches, 
que vous sachiez, 


qu'il sache, 
qu'ils sachent. 


-s- 


Que je susse, 
que nous sussions, 


que tu susses, 
que vous sussiez, 


qu'il sut, 
qu'ils sussent. 



The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 

Savoir, to know ; must not be confounded with Connaitre, to 
know. Connailre, is mostly used, in the sense of, to be acquainted with ; 
and Savoir, in other circumstances. 



Seoir 



to jit \ to become, to jit well. 



-E- Sis. 



a- Seoir. -c- Seyant. 

-E- II sied, it Jits. 

-H- II seyait, it fitted. 

-j- (none) 

-L- 11 siera, it will fit. 

-N- II sierait, it would fit. 

-p- (?ione) 

-a- Qu'il siee, that it may fit. 

-s- (none') 

This verb, which is only employed in the third person of the 
singular, and of the plural, of some tenses, has no compound tenses. 



ils sieent, 
ils seyaient, 

ils sieront, 
ils sieraient, 



they fit. 
they fitted. 

they will fit. 
they would fit. 



qu'ils sieent, that they may fit. 



Surseoir 



to reprieve, to put off. 



This verb is seldom used, except in -a- the present of the 
infinitive. 



Valoir 



to be worth. 



-a- Valoir. 

-F- Je vaux, 
nous valons, 

-H- Je valais, 
nous valions, 

-j- Je valus, 

nous valumes, 



-c- Valant. 

tu vaux, 
vous valez, 

tu valais, 
vous vaiiez, 

tu valus, 
vous valutes, 
20 



-E- Valu. 

il vaut, 
ils valent. 

il valait, 
ils valaient. 

il valut, 
ils valurent. 



140 IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS 



-L- 


Je vaudrai, 
nous vaudrons, 


tu vaudras, 
vous vaudrez, 


il vaudra, 
ils vaudront. 


-N- 


Je vaudrais, 
nous vaudrions, 


tu vaudrais, 
vous vaudriez, 


il vaudrait, 
ils vaudraient. 


~P- 


valons, 


vaux, 
valez, 


qu'il vaille, 
qu'ils vaillent. 


-a- 


Que je vaille, 
que nous valions, 


que tu vailles, 
que vous valiez, 


qu'il vaille, 
qu'ils vaillent. 


-s- 


Que je valusse, 
que nous valussions, 


que tu valusses, 
que vous valussiez, 


qu'il valut, 
qu'ils valussent, 



The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 
Conjugated after the same manner — 



Pre valoir, to prevail 



Re valoir, to return like for like. 
Equi valoir, to be equivalent. 

This last, makes in -a- the subjunctive, que je private, que tu 
privates, quHl prevale, que nous prevalions, que vous prevalies, quHls 
prevalent. 



Voir 



to see. 



-a- Voir. 



-o Voyant. 



-E- Vu. 



F~ 


le vois, 
nous voyons, 


tu vois, 
vous voyez, 


il voit, 
ils voient. 


H- 


Je voyais, 
nous voyions, 


tu voyais, 
vous voyiez, 


il voyait, 
ils voyaient. 


J- 


Je vis, 
nous vimes, 


tu vis, 
vous vites, 


il vit. 
ils vircnt. 


■J> 


Je verrai, 
nous verrons, 


tu verras, 
vous verrez, 


il verra, 
ils verront. 


•N- 


Je verrais, 
nous verrions, 


tu verrais, 
vous verriez, 


il verrait, 
ils verraient. 


P- 


voyons, 


vois, 
voyez, 


qu'il voie, 
qu'ils voient. 


a- 


■ Que je voie, 
que nous voyions, 


que tu voies, 
que vous voyiez, 


qu'il voie, 
qu'ils voient. 


•fi- 


Que je visse, 
que nous vissions, 


que tu visses, 
que vous vissiez, 


qu'il vit, 
qu'ils vissent. 



The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 
Conjugate after the same manner — 

Re voir, to see again. Entre voir, to have a glimpse of. 



OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 



141 



Pre voir 



to foresee. 



This verb is conjugated like Voir, to see, except in -l- 
tuture, and in -n- the present of the conditional. 



-L- Je prevoirai, 
nous prevoirons, 

-N- Je prevoirais, 
nous prevoirions, 



tu prevoiras, 
vous prevoirez, 

tu prevoirais, 
vous prevoiriez, 



il prevoira, 
ils prevoiront. 

il pr^voirait, 
ils prevoiraient. 



the 



VOULOIE 



-a- Vouloir 



-F- Je veux, 

nous voulons, 

-H- Je voulais, 
nous voulions, 

-J- Je voulus, 

nous voulumes, 

-L- Je voudrai, 
nous voudrons, 

-N- Je voudrais, 
nous voudrions, 



-o.- Que je veuille, 
que nous voulions, 

-s- Que je voulusse, 

que nous voulussions, 



to be willing. 

Voulant, -E- Voulu, 

tu veux, il veut, 

vous voulez, ils veulent. 

tu voulais, il voulait, 

vous vouliez, ils voulaient. 

tu voulus, il voulut, 

vous voulutes, ils voulurent. 

tu voudras, il voudra, 

vous voudrez, ils voudront. 

tu voudrais, il voudrait, 

vous voudriez, ils voudraient. 

veuillez, 

que tu veuilles, qu'il veuille, 

que vous vouliez, qu'ils veuillent. 

que tu voulusses, qu'il voulut, 
que vous voulussiez, qu'ils vouiussent. 
with avoir. 



(is the only person) 



Irregular, Defective, and (Impersonal Verbs of the Fourth 
Conjugation. 



Battre 



to beat. 



■£- 


Battre. 


-c- Battant. 


-E- Battu. 


V- 


Je bats, 
nous battons, 


tu bats, 
vous battez, 


il»bat, 

ils battent. 


H- 


Je battais, 
nous battions, 


tu battais, 
vous battiez, 


il battait, 
ils battaient. 


-J- 


Je battis, 
nous battimes, 


tu battis, 
vous battites., 


il battit, 
ils battirent. 


^L- 


Je battrai, 
nous battronsj 


tu battras, 
$ous battrez, 


il battra, 
ils battront. 



142 IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS 



-N- Je battrais, 
nous battrions, 

-p- 

battons, 

-Q- Que je batte, 

que nous battions, 

-s- Que je battisse, 

que nous battissions, 



tu battrais, 
vous battriez, 

bats, 
battez, 

que tu battes, 
que vous battiez, 

que tu batisses, 
que vous battissiez, 



il battrait, 
ils battraient. 

qu'il batte, 
qu'ils battent. 

qu'il batte, 
qu'ils battent. 

qu'il battifc, 
qu'ils battissent. 



The compound tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 
Conjugate after the same manner — 



A battre, to pull down. 
Com battre, to fight. 
De battre, to debate. 
Ra battre, to pull down again, 
[to abate. 



Re battre, to beat again. 

S'e battre, to make or be merry. 

Se de battre, to struggle. 



The compound tenses of S'tbattre, and Se debattre^ are conjuga- 
ted with Etre, to be. 



BOIRE 



to drink. 



-a- Boire. 

-F- Je bois, 

nous buvons, 

-H- Je buvais, 
nous buvions, 

-j- Je bus, 

nous bumes, 

-L- Je boirai, 
nous boirons, 

-N- Je boirais, 
nous boirions, 

-p- 

buvons, 

-a- Que je boive, 
que nous buvions, 

-s- Que je busse, 

que nous bussions, 

The Compound 
Conjugate after 



c- Buvant. -e- Bu. 

tu bois, 
vous buvez, 

tu buvais, 
vous buviez, 

tu bus, 
vous butes, 

tuboiras, 
vous boirez, 

tu boirais, 
vous boiriez, 

bois, 
buvez, 

que tu boive, 
que vous buviez, 

que tu busses, 
que vous bussiez, 

Tenses are conjugated 
the same manner, Re 



il boit, 

ils boivent. 

il buvait, 
ils buvaient. 

il but, 
ils burent. 

il boira, 
ils boiront. 

il boirait, 
ils boiraient. 

qu'il boive, 
qu'ils boivent. 

qu'il boive, 
qu'ils boivent. 

qu'il but, 
qu'ils bussent. 

with Avoir, to have. 
boire, to drink again. 



OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 



143 



Clore 



to close. 



-a- Clore. 


(none) 


-E- Clos. 


-F- Je clos, 


tu clos, 


il clot. 


-L- Je clorai, 
nous clorons, 


tu cloras, 
vous clorez, 


il clora, 
ils cloront. 


-N- Je clorais, 
nous clorions, 


tu clorais, 
vous cloriez, 


il clorait, 
ils cloraient. 



This verb, (defective) is only used in the above few tenses, and 
persons, and in all the compound tenses, which are formed with 
Avoir, to have. Some write this verb with double r. 

Conjugated after the same manner, En clore, to enclose. 



CONCLURE 



to conclude 



-a- Conclure. 

-F- Je conclus, 

nous concluons, 

-H- Je concluais, 
nous conclu'ions, 

-j- Je conclus, 

nous conclumes, 

-L- Je conclurai, 
nous conclurons, 

-N- Je conclurais, 
nous conclurions, 



concluons, 

-a- Que je conclue, 

que nous concluions, 



-c- Concluant. 

tu conclus, 
vous concluez, 

tu concluais, 
vous conclu'iez, 

tu conclus, 
vous conclutes, 

tu concluras, 
vous conclurez, 

tu conclurais, 
vous concluriez, 

conclus, 
concluez, 

que tu conclues, 
que vous conclu'iez, 



-E- Conclu. 

il conclut, 
ils concluent. 

il concluait, 
ils concluaient. 

il conclut, 
ils conclurent. 

il conclura, 
ils concluront. 

il conclurait, 
ils concluraient, 

qu'il conclue, 
qu'ils concluent. 

qu'il conclue, 
qu'ils concluent. 



-s- Que je conclusse, que tu conclusses, qu'il conclut, 

que nous conclussions, que vous conclussiez, qu'ils conclussent. 

The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 
Conjugated after the same manner, Exclure, to exclude. 



CONFIRE 



to pickle. 



-a- Conf ire. 

-F- Je conf is, 

nous conf isons, 

-H- Je conf isais, 
nous conf isions, 



-c- Conf isant. 

tu conf is, 
vous conf ises, 

tu confisais, 
vous conf isies, 
2 o 2 



-E- Conf it. 

il conf it, 
ils conf isenU 

il conf isait, 
ils conf isaient. 



144 IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS 



-J- Je conf w, 

nous conf imes, 

-L- Je conf irai, 
nous conf irons, 

-N- Je conf i rais, 
nous conf irions, 



conf isons, 

-Q- Que je - conf we, 

que nous conf isions, 

-s- Que je conf me, 

que nous conf wwVms, 



tu conf w, 
vous conf ites, 

tu conf iras, 
vous conf irez, 

tu conf irais, 
vous confines, 

confw, 
confwes, 

que tu conf ises, 
que vous conf isiez, 

que tu conf isses, 
que vous conf issiez, 



il conf it, 
ils conf ire7i£. 

il conf ira, 
ils conf iront. 

il conf iraif, 
ils conf iraient. 

qu'il conf we, 
qu'ils conf wen/. 

qu'il conf we, 
qu'ils conf isent. 

qu'il conf it, 
qu'ils confissent. 



The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 
Conjugate after the same manner — 



Suffire. 



to suffice. Circonc ire, to circumcise. 



Coudre 



to sew. 



-a- Coudre. 

-F- Je couds, 
nous cousons, 

-H- Je cousais, 
nous cousions, 

-j- Je cousis, 

nous cousimes, 

-L- Je coudrai, 
nous coudrons, 

-N- Je coudrais, 
nous coudrions, 

-p- 

cousons, 

-Q- Que je couse, 

que nous cousions, 

-3- Que je cousisse, 
que nous cousissions 

The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 
Conjugate after the same manner — 

De coudre, to rip. 



c- Cousant. 


-E- Cousu. 


tu couds, 
vous cousez, 


il coud, 
ils cousent. 


tu colisais, 
vous cousiez, 


il cousait, 
ils cousaient. 


tu cousis, 
vous cousites, 


il cousit, 
ils cousirent. 


tu coudras, 
vous coudrez, 


il coudra, 
ils coudront. 


tu coudrais, 
vous coudriez, 


il coudrait, 
ils coudraient. 


couds, 
cousez, 


qu'il couse, 
qu'ils cousent. 


que tu couses, 
que vous cousiez, 


qu'il couse, 
qu'ils cousent. 


que tu cousisses, 
que vous cousissiez, 


qu'il cousit, 
qu'ils cousissent 



Re coudre, to sew again. 



OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 

Croire to believe. 



145 



-a- Croire. 

-F- Je crois, 

nous croyons, 

-H- Je croyais, 
nous croyions, 

*i- Je eras, 

nous crumes, 



-c- Croyant. 

tu crois, 
vous croyez, 

tu croyais, 
vous croyiez, 

tu crus, 
vous crutes, 



-E- Cru. 



il croit, 
ils croient. 

il croyait, 
ils croyaient. 

il crut, 
ils crurent. 



l- Je croirai, 
nous croirons, 

n- Je croirais, 
nous croirions, 



il croira, 
ils croiront. 



tu croiras, 
vous croirez, 

tu croirais, il croirait, 

vous croiriez, ils croiraient. 

crois, qu'il croie, 

croyez, qu'ils croient. 

que tu croies, qu'il croie, 

que vous croyiez, qu'ils croient. 

que tu crusses, qu'il crut, 

que vous crussiez, qu'ils crussent. 

The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 
Accroire, to make one believe, to impose upon one, 

Is only used in -a- the present of the infinitive with the verb Faire^ 
which serves as an auxiliary. 



-p- 

croyons, 

-Q- Que je croie, 

que nous croyions, 

-s- Que je crusse, 

que nous crussions, 







Croitre to 


grow 




-A- 


Croitre. 


-c- Croissant. 


-E- 


Crii. 


-F- 


Je crois, 

nous croissons, 


tu crois, 
vous croissez, 




il croit, 

ils croissent. 


-H- 


Je croissais, 
nous croissions, 


tu croissais, 
vous croissiez, 




il croissait, 
ils croissaient. 


-J- 


Je crus, 
nous crumes, 


tu cms, 
vous crutes. 




il crut, 
ils crurent. 


-L- 


Je croitrai, 
nous croitrons, 


tu croitras, 
vous croitrez, 




il croitra, 
ils croitront. 


-N- 


Je croitrais, 
nous croitrions, 


tu croitrais, 
vous croitriez, 




il croitrait, 
ils croitraient. 


-P- 


croissons, 


crois, 
croissez, 




qu'il croisse, 
qu'ils croissen 



-<X- Que je croisse, 

que nous croissions, 

-s- Que je crusse, 

que nous crussions, 

N 



que tu croisses, 
que vous croissiez, 

que tu crusses, 
que vous crussiez, 



qu'il croisse, 
qu'ils croissent. 

qu'il crut, 
qu'ils crussent. 



146 IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS 

The compound tenses are conjugated sometimes, with Avoir, 
sometimes with Etre ; with Avoir, when it expresses the action of 
growing, and with Etre, when it denotes the state in which one is. 

Conjugate after the same manner — 

Ac croitre, to increase, De croitre, to decrease. 



Dire 



to say 



-a- Dire. 


-c- Disant. 


-E- Dit. 


-F- Je dis, 

nous disons, 


tu dis, 
vous dites, 


il dit, 
ils disent. 


-H- Je disais, 
nous disions, 


tu disais, 
vous disiez, 


il disait, 
ils disaient. 


-j- Je dis, 

nous dimes, 


tu dis, 
vous dites, 


il dit, 
ils dirent. 


-L- Je dirai, 
nous dirons, 


tu diras, 
vous direz, 


il dira, 
ils diront. 


-N- Je dirais, 
nous dirions, 


tu dirais, 
vous diriez, 


il dirait, 
ils diraient. 


-p- 

disons, 


dis, 
dites, 


qu'il dise, 
qu'ils disent. 


-0,- Que je dise, 

que nous disions, 


que tu dises, 
que vous disiez, 


qu'il dise, 
qu'ils disent. 


-s- Que je disse, 

que nous dissions, 


que tu disses, 
que vous dissiez, 


qu'il dit, 
qu'ils dissent 



The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 
Conjugate after the same manner, Re dire, to say again. 
The following: verbs — 



Centre dire, 
De dire, 
Inter dire, 
Mau dire, 



to contradict, 
to disown, 
to interdict, 
to curse. 



Me dire, to slander. 
Pre dire, to foretell, 
Se de dire, to recant. 



are also conjugated like Dire, except in the second person plural of -f- 
the indicative present, and of -p- the imperative, in which they make 



Centre disez 
De disez. 
Inter disez. 



Mau dissez. Me disez. 
Pre disez. 
De disez. 



Mau dire, takes two s's in -c-, maudissant ; in the three persons 
plural of -F-, nous maudissons, vous maudissez, ils maudissent ; in all the 
persons of -11-, je maudissais, Sic; in the third person singular, and in 
the three persons plural, of -r-, qu'il maudisse, que nous maudissons Sic; 
and also in the three persons plural, of -a-, que nous maudissions, &c; in 
its other persons and tenses it is conjugated like Dire. 



OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 

Eolore to hatch, to blow, to open. 



147 



-a- Eclore, 


(none) 


-E- Eclos. 


-F- 11 £clot, 




ils eclosent. 


-H- 


(none) 




-j- 


(none) 




-L- 11 eclora, 




ils ecloront. 


-N- 11 eclorait, 




ils ecloraient. 


-F- 


(none) 




-Q- Qu'il eclose, 




qu'ils eclosent, 



(none) 
The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have* 



-a- Ecr ire. 

-F- J'£cr if, 

nous €cr ivons, 

-H- J 'ecr ivais, 

nous £cr ivions, 

-J- J'ecr ivis, 

nous ecr ivimes 

-L- J'ecr irai, 
nous ecr irons, 

-N- J'ecr irais, 
nous ecr irions, 

-p- 



EcRIRE 

-c- Ecr wan* 



to write. 

-E- Ecr i7. 



tu ecr it, 
vous ecr ivez, 

tu ecr ivais, 
vous ecr me*, 

tu ecr iris, 
vous ecr ivites, 

tu ecr iras, 
vous ecr zrcsr, 

tu ecr irais, 
vous ecr tries, 

ecr is, 

ecr iues, 

que tu 6crivcs, 
que vous ecr m'es, 



il ecr it, 
ils ecr ivent. 

il ecrivait, 
ils ecr ivaient. 

il ecr m£, 
ils ecr ivirent. 

il ecr ira. 
ils ecr iront. 

il ecr i>ai7, 
ils ecr iraient. 

qu'il ecr tve, 
qu'ils ecr ivent. 

qu'il ecr we, 
qu'ils ecr ivent. 



ecr ivons, 

-d- Que j'ecr iye, 

que nous ecr ivions, 

-s- Que j'ecr ivisse, que tu ecr wwse5, qu'il ecr zv^, 

que nous ecr missions, que vous ecr ivissies, qu'ils ecr ivissent. 

The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, /o have. 
Conjugate after the same manner — 

Circonscr ire, to circumscribe. 

Deer ire, to describe. 

Inscr ire, to inscribe. 

Preserve, to prescribe. 



Proscr ire, to proscribe. 
Jlecr ire, to write again. 
SouscrzYe, to subscribe. 
Transcr ire, to transcribe. 



Etre 
See its conjugation, page 24, 



to be. 



148 



IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS 



Faire 



to make, to do, to cause. 



-a- Faire. 


-c- Fesant. -e- Fait. 


-F- Je fais, 

nous fesons, 


tu fais, il fait, 
vous faites, ils font. 


-H- Je fesais, 
nous fesions, 


tu fesais, : 
vous fesiez, 


1 fesait, 
ils fesaient. 


-j- Je fis, 

nous fimes, 


tu fis, 
vous f ites, 


l1 fit, 
ils firent 


-L- Je ferai, 
nous ferons, 


tu feras, 
vous ferez, 


1 fera, 
ils feront. 


-N- Je ferais, 
nous ferions, 


tu ferais, il ferait, 
vous feriez, ils feraient 


-p- 

fesons, 


fais, 
faites, 


qu'il fasse, 
qu'ils fassent. 


-a- Que je fasse, 

que nous fassions, 


que tu fasses, qu'il fasse, 
que vous fassiez, qu'ils fassent. 


-s Que je fisse, 

que nous fissions, 


que tu fisses, < 
que vous fissiez, 


lu'il fit, 
qu'ils fissent. 



The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 
Conjugate after the same manner — 



Contre faire, to counterfeit, 

[to mimic. 
De faire, to undo. 
Rede faire, to undo again. 

Observe, that in the spelling of this verb, 1 have adopted the 
orthography of most modern writers. 



Re faire, to do again. 
Satis faire, to satisfy. 
Sur faire, to ask to much. 



Frire 



to fry. 



■a- Frire. 


(none) 


-E- Frit. 


F- Je fris, 


tu fris, 


il frit. 


L- Je frirai, 
nous frirons, 


tu friras, 
vous frirez, 


il frira, 
ils friront. 


N- Je frirais, 
nous fririons, 


tu frirais, 
vous fririez, 


il frirait, 
ils friraient. 


p- 


fris. 





This verb, (defective) is only used in the above few persons and 
tenses, and in all the compound tenses, which are formed with Avoir. 

To supply the persons and tenses which are wanting, we use 
the different tenses of Faire, to make, with the infinitive present of 
Frire ; as nous fesons frire, vous faites frire y ils font frire, &c. 



OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 

Joindre to join. 



149 



-a- Joi ndre, 

-F- Je joi ns, 

nous joi gnons, 

-H- Je joi gnai 5, 
nous joi gnions, 

-j- Je joi gnis, 

nous joi gnimesi 

-L- Je joi ndrai, 
nous joi ndrons, 

-N- Je joi ndrais^ 
nous joi ndrionS) 

-p- 

joi grams, 

-d- Que je joigra, 

que nous joi gnions, 

-s- Que je joi gm'sse, 

que nous joi gnissions, 

Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 

Conjugate after the same manner — all verbs, whose present of 
the infinitive ends 

{aindre as Crsdndre, to fear. 

eindre as Pei ndre, to paint. 

oindre as Poi ndre, to dawn, 

also. 



-c- Joi gram*. -e- 


■ Joi nt. 


tU joi 715, 

vous joigras, 


il joi nt, 
ils ]oi gnent. 


tu joi gram, 
vous joi gniez, 


il ]o\gnait, 
ils joi gnaient. 


tu joi gm>, 
vous joi gnites, 


il joigm'*, 
ils }o'l gnirent. 


tu joiraZras, 
vous joi ndrez, 


il joi ndra, 
ils joi ndront. 


tu ]oi ndrais, 
vous joi ndriez, 


il joi ndraitt 
ils joi ndraient. 


joi 715, 

joigraz, 


qu'il joigne, 
qu'ils joigramf. 


que tu joig7ie5, 
que vous joi gniez, 


qu'il joi gra, 
qu'ils joi gnent. 


que tu joi gnisses, 
15, que vous joi gnissiez, 


qu'il joi gnit, 
qu'ils \o\ gnissent 



Astrei ndre, to subject, to com- 
[_peL 
Attei ndre, to reach, to overtake. 
C eindre, to gird. 
C ontrai ndre, to constrain, to 
[force, 
Enfrei ndre, to infringe. 



Etei ndre, to put out, to extin- 
guish. 
¥ eindre, to feign, to pretend. 
Plai ndre, to pity. 
Restrei ndre, to restrain. 
Tei ndre, to dye. 



Lire 



to read. 



-A- 


Lire. 




-c- Lisant. 


-E- Lu. 




•&• 


Je lis, 
nous lisons, 




tu lis, 
vous lisez, 


il lit, 
ils lisent. 




-H- 


Je lisais, 
nous lisions, 




tu lisais, 
vous lisiez, 


il lisait, 
ils lisaient. 




-J- 


Je lus, 
nous lumes, 


N2 


tu lus, 
vous lutes, 


il lut, 
ils lurent. 




| 








, 


4 



150 



IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS 



-L- Je lirai, 
nous lirons, 


tu liras, 
vous lirez, 


il lira, 
ils liront. 


-N- Je lirais, 
nous lirions, 


tu lirais, 
vous liriez, 


il lirait, 
ils liraient. 


-p- 

lisons, 


lis, 
lisez, 


qu'il lise, 
qu'iJs lisent. 


-a- Que je lise, 

que nous lisions, 


que tu lises, 
que vous lisiez, 


qu'il lise, 
qu'ils lisent. 


-s- Que je lusse, 

que nous lussions, 


que tu lusses, 
que vous lussiez, 


qu'il lut, 
qu'ils lussent 



The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 
Conjugate after the same manner — 
Re lire, to read again. \ E lire, to elect. 





Mettre to 


put. 




-A- 


Mettre. 


-C- Mettant. 


-E- 


Mis. 


-F- 


Je mets, 
nous mettons, 


tu mets, 
vous mettez, 




il met, 

ils mettent. 


~H- 


Je mettais, 
nous mettions, 


tu mettais, 
vous mettiez, 




il mettait, 
ils mettaient. 


-J- 


Je mis, 
nous mimes, 


tu mis, 
vous mites, 




il mit, 
ils mirent. 


-L- 


Je mettrai, 
nous mettrons, 


tu mettras, 
vous mettrez, 




il mettra, 
ils mettront. 


-N- 


Je mettrais, 
nous mettrions, 


tu mettrais, 
vous mettriez, 




il mettrait, 
ils mettraient. 


-P- 


mettons, 


mets, 
mettez, 




qu'il mette, 
qu'ils mettent. 


-Q- 


Que je mette, 
que nous mettions, 


que tu mettes, 
que vous mettiez, 




qu'il mette, 
qu'ils mettent. 


~S- 


Que je misse, 
que nous missions, 


que tu misses, 
que vous missicz, 




qu'il mit, 
qu'ils missent. 



The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 
Conjugate after the same manner — 



Ad mettre, to admit. 
Com mettre, to commit, 
Compro mettre, to compromise. 
De mettre, to disjoint, to put 

[out, 
O mettre, to omit. 
Per mettre, to permit. 



Pro mettre, to promise. 
Re mettre, to put again, to set 
[again, to replace. 
Sou mettre, to submit. 
Trans mettre, to transmit. 
Se de mettre, to resign. 
S'entre mettre, to interpose. 



The two last have their compound tenses conjugated with Etre. 



OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 



151 





MOUDRE tO 


grind* 


-A 


- Moudre. 


-o Moulant. 


-E- Moulu. 


-P- 


Je mouds, 
nous moulons, 


tu mouds, 
vous moulez, 


il moud, 
ils moulent. 


-H- 


Je moulais, 
nous moulions, 


tu moulais, 
vous mouliez, 


il moulait, 
ils moulaient. 


-J- 


Je moulds, 
nous moulGmes, 


tu moulus, 
vous moulutes, 


il moulut, 
ils moulurent. 


-L- 


Je moudrai, 
nous moudrons, 


tu moudras, 
vous moudrez, 


il'moudra, 
ils moudront. 


-N- 


Je moudrais, 
nous moudrions, 


tu moudrais, 
vous moudriez, 


il moudrait, 
ils moudraient. 


-P- 


moulons, 


mouds, 
moulez, 


qu'il moule, 
qu'ils moulent. 


-Q- 


Que je moule, 
que nous moulions, 


que tu moules, qu'il moule, \ 
que vous mouliez, qu'ils moulent. 



-s- Que je moulusse, que tu moulusses, qu'il moulut, 

que nous moulussions, que vous moulussiez, qu'ils moulussenk 

The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 
Conjugated after the same manner — 

Re moudre, to grind again. | IS moudre, to grind, to whet 





Naitre to be born. 


-A- 


• Naitre. -c- 


■ Naissant. -e- 


• Ne. 


-F- 


Je nais, 
nous naissons, 


tu nais, 
vous naissez, 


il nait, 

ils naissent. 


-H- 


Je naissais, 
nous naissions, 


tu naissais, 
vous naissiez, 


il naissait, 
ils naissaient. 


-J- 


Je naquis, 
nous naquimes, 


tu naquis, 
vous naquites, 


il naquit, 
ils naquirent. 


-L- 


Je naitrai, 
nous naitrons, 


tu naitras, 
vous naitrez, 


il naitra, 
ils naitront. 


-N- 


Je naitrais, 
nous naitrions, 


tu naitrais, 
vous naitriez, 


il naitrait, 
ils naitraient. 


-P- 


naissons, 


nais, 
naissez, 


qu'il naisse, 
qu'ils naissent. 


-Q- 


Que je naisse, 
que nous naissions, 


que tu naisse, 
que vous naissiez, 


qu'il naisse, 
qu'ils naissent. 


-S- 


Que je naquisse, 
que nous naquissions, 


que tu naquisse, 
que vous naquissiez, 
2P 


qu'il naquit, 
qu'ils naquissent, 



152 IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS 

The Compound tenses are conjugated with Etre, to be. 
Conjugate after the same manner — 

Re naitre, to revive. 





Paitre to 


graze. 




-a- Paitre. 




-c- Paissant. 


-E 


■ Pu. * 


-F- Je pais, 

nous paissons, 




tu pais, 
vous paissez, 




il pait, 

ils paissent. 


-H- Je paissais, 
nous paissions, 




tu paissais, 
vous paissiez, 




il paissait, 
ils paissaient. 


-J- 


(none) 






-L- Je paitrai, 
nous paitrons, 




tu paitras, 
vous paitrez, 




il paitra, 
ils paitront. 


-N- Je paitrais, 
nous paitrions, 




tu paitrais, 
vous paitriez, 




il paitrait, 
ils paitraient. 


-p- 

paissons, 




pais, 
paissez, 




qu'il paisse, 
qu'ils paissent. 


-a- Que je paisse, 

que nous paissions, 


que tu paisses, 
que vous paissiez, 


qu'il paisse, 
qu'ils paissent. 



-s~ (none) 

This verb is very little used ; it has no compound tenses. 
Conjugate after the same manner — 

Re paitre, to feed. J Se re paitre, to feed one's self. 

These last two verbs, have a preterit definite, and an imperfect 
of the subjunctive. 

-j- Je repus, 

nous repiimes, 



tu repus, 
vous reputes, 



il reput, 
ils repurent. 



-s- Que je repusse, 

que nous repussions, 



que tu repusses, 
que vous repussiez, 



qu'il reput, 
qu'ils repussent. 



The compound tenses of Repailre, are conjugated with Avoir, 
and those of Se repaitre, with Etre. 



-a- Par aitre. 



Paraitre 

-g- Par aissant. 



to appear. 
-E- Par u. 



-p- Je par ais, 

nous par aissons, 

-H- Je par aissais, 
nous par aissions^ 



tu par ais, 
vous par aissez^ 

tu par aissais, 
vous par aissiez^ 



il par ait, 

ils par aissent. 

il par aissait, 
ils par aissaient. 



OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 



153 



-J- Je par us, 

nous par times, 

-L- Je par aitrai, 
nous par aitrons, 

-N- Je par attrais, 
nous par aitrions, 



par aissons, 

-a- Que je par aisse, 

que nous par aissions. 

-s- Que je parizsse, 

que nous par ussions, 



tu parws, 
vous par tiles, 

tu par aitras, 
vous par aitrez, 

tu par aitrais, 
vous par aitriez, 

par a is, 

par aissez, 



il par i//, 
ils par urent. 

il par az/ra, 
ils par aitront. 

il par aitrait, 
ils par aitraient. 

qu'il par az'sse, 
qu'ils par aisstnU 



que tu par aisses, qu'il par azsse, 

que vous par aissiez, qu'ils par aissent, 

que tu par zzsses, qu'il par uf, 

que vous par ussiez, qu'ils par ussent. 

The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 

Conjugated after the same manner — ■ 



Ap-pav aitre, to appear. 
Compar aitre, to appear. 
Conn attre, to know. 
DisparazYre, to disappear. 
Me conn ait re, to mistake, to 
[forget, to neglect. 
The compound tenses of the last verb, are conjugated with Etre, 



HecGim aitre, to recognize, to 

[to know again. 

Repar aitre, to appear again. 

Se meconn aitre, to forget one's 

[self. 



Plaire 



to please. 



-a- PI aire. 

-F- Je pi a is, 

nous pi aisons, 

-H- Je pi aisais, 
nous pi aisions, 

-j- Je plzzs, 

nous pi times, 

-L- Je pi airai, 
nous pi airons, 

-N- Je pi airais, 
nous pi airions, 

-p- 

pl aisons, 

-a- Que je pi aise, 

que nous pi aisions, 



-c- PI aisant. 



-E- PI u. 



tu pi a is, 
vous pi aisez, 


il pi az£, 
ils pi aisent. 


tu plaisazs, 
vous pi aisiez, 


il pi aisait, 
ils pi aisaient. 


tu pi izs, 
vous pi utes, 


il pi ttf, 
ils pi wren/. 


tu pi airas, 
vous pi az'res, 


il pi aira, 
ils pi airont. 


tu pi airais* 
vous pi a tries, 


il pi airait, 
ils plairaient. 


pi ais, 
pi aisez, 


•qu'il pi az'se, 
qu'ils pi aisent. 


que tu pi aises, 
que vous pi aisiez, 


qu'il pi azse, 
qu'ils pi aisent. 



Que je pi izsse, 
que nous pi ussions, 



que tu pi wsses, 
que vous pi ussiez, 






qu'il pi m/j 
qu'ils pi ussent. 

The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 
Conjugated after the same manner^- 



154 



IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS 



Compl aire j to humour, to please, 

Depl aire, to displease. 

T aire 9 to conceal, to keep secret, 

The compound tenses of Se Taire, are conjugated with Etre, to be, 



Se T aire, to forbear talking, to 
[be silent, to hold one's tongue. 



Poindre to shoot forth, to dawn. 

-a- Poindre. -f- II point. -l- II poindra. 

Are the only tenses and persons used. 





Prendre to take. 


-A- 


Prendre, 


> Prenant. -e 


- Pris. 


~F- 


Je prends, 
nous prenons, 


tu prends, 
vous prenez, 


il prend, 
ils prennent. 


-H 


- Je prenais, 
nous prenions, 


tu prenais, 
vous preniez, 


il prenait, 
ils prenaient. 


-J- 


Je pris, 
nous primes, 


tu pris, 
vous prites, 


il prit, 
ils prirent. 


-L- 


Je prendrai, 
nous prendrons, 


tu prendras, 
vous prendrez, 


il prendra, 
ils prendront. 


-N- 


Je prendrais, 
nous prendrions, 


tu prendrais, 
vous prendriez, 


il prendrait, 
ils prendraient. 


-P- 


prenons, 


prends, 
prenez, 


qu'il prenne, 
qu'ils prennent. 


-4- 


■ Que je prenne, 
que nous prenions, 


que tu prennes, 
que vous preniez, 


qu'il prenne, 
qu'ils prennent. 


-s- 


Que je prisse, 
que nous prissions, 


que tu prisse, 
que vous prissiez, 


qu'il prit, 
qu'ils prissent. 




The Compound 


Tenses are conjugated 


with Avoir, to have. 




Conjugate after the same manner — 





Ap prendre, to learn. 
Com prendre, to comprehend, 
[to understand. 
De prendre, to loosen, to dis- 
engage. 
Desap prendre, to unlearn. 
Entre prendre, to undertake. 



Rap prendre, to learn again. 
Re prendre, to take again, to 

[resume. 
Sur prendre, to surprise, to 

[deceive. 
Se me prendre, to mistake. 
S'e prendre, to be smitten. 






The compound tenses of Se meprendre, and S'eprendre, are con- 
jugated with Etre, to be; S'eprendre, is used only in -e- the participle 
past, and in all the compound tenses. 



OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 

Reduire to reduce. 



155 



-a- Redui re. 

-F- Je redui s, 

nous redui sons, 

-H- Je redui sais, 
nous redui sions, 

-j- Je redui sis, 

nous redui simes, 

-L- Je r£dui rai, 
nous redui rons, 

-N- Je redui rais, 
nous redui rions, 



redui sons, 

-Q- Que je redui se, 

que nous redui sions, 



-c- Redui san£. 

tu redui s, 
vous redui sez, 

tu redui saw, 
vous redui siez, 

tu redui sis, 
vous redui sites, 

tu redui ras, 
vous redui res, 

tu redui rais, 
vous redui nies, 

redui 5, 
redui sez, 

que tu redui ses, 
que vous redui siez 



-E- Redui f. 

il redui t, 
ils redui sent. 

il redui sa#, 
ils redui saient. 

il redui si7, 
ils redui sirent 

il redui ra, 
ils redui row*. 

il redui rait, 
ils redui raient. 

qu'il redui se, 
qu'ils redui sent. 

qu'il redui se, 
qu'ils redui sent. 



Que je redui sisse, que tu redui sisses, qu'il redui sz£, 

que nous redui sissions, que vous redui sissiez, qu'ils redui sissent. 

The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 
Conjugate after the same manner- 



ed ondui re, to conduct, to lead. 
Construire, to construct. 
Cui re, to bake. 

Dedui re, to deduct Jo take from. 
Detrui re, to destroy. 
Econdui re, to discard in a po- 

[lite manner. 
Endui re, to plaster. 
Entre-lui re, to shine a little, to 

[glow a little. 
Indui re, to induce. 
Instrui re, to instruct. 
Introdui re, to introduce. 



Lui re, to shine, to glow 
Nui re, /0 Awr£. 
Produi re, £0 produce. 
Recondui re, to reconduct, to 
[lead back. 
Reconstrui re, to construct ; 
[again, 
Recui re, £0 &a&e again. 
Reiui re, £0 shine, to glow. 
Rendui re, £0 plaster again. 
Reprodui re, £0 reproduce* 
Sedui re, £0 seduce. 
Tradui re, to translate. 



Resoudre 



to dissolve, to resolve. 



-a- Re soudre. 

-F- Je re sous, 

nous re solvons, 

-H- Je re solvais, 
* nous re solvions, 



-c- Re solvant. 

tu re sous, 
vous re solvez, 

tu re solvais, 
vous re" solviez, 
2 p 2 



-E- Re solu or re" sous. 

il re sout, 
ils re solvent. 

il re solvait, 
ils re solvaient. 



156 IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS 



-J- Je re solus, 

nous re sohlmes, 

-L- Je re soudrai, 
nous re soudrons, 

-N- Je re soudrais, 
nous re soudrions, 

-p- 

re* solvons, 

-Q- Que je re solve, 
que nous re solvions, 



tu re solus, 
vous re solutes, 

tu re soudras, 
vous re soudrez, 

tu re soudrais, 
vous re soudriez, 

re sous, 
re solvez, 

que tu re solve, 
que vous re solviez, 



il re solut, 
ils re solurent. 

il re soudra, 
ils re soudront. 

il re* soudrait, 
ils re soudraient. 

qu'il re solve, 
qu'ils re solvent. 

qu'il re solve, 
qu'ils re solvent. 



-s- Que je re solusse, que tu re solusses, qu'il re solut, 

que nous re solussions, que vous re solussiez, qu'ils re solussent. 

The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 

The above verb has two -e- participles past. Resolu, is used 
when Resoudre, is employed to express, to resolve; and Risous, is used 
when employed to express, to dissolve. 

Conjugate after the same manner — 

Se re soudre, to be dissolved, to melt. 

Compound tenses with Etre, to be. 

Ab soudre, to absolve, Dis soudre, to dissolve. 

These two last verbs, have no -j- preterit definite, nor -s- im- 
perfect of the subjunctive. 

Their compound tenses are conjugated with the simple tenses 
of Avoir, to have; to which is added the -e- participle past, Absous. 



•a- Rire. 



Rire to laugh. 

-c- Riant. -e- Ri. 



•f- Je ris, 
nous rions, 


tu ris, 
vous riez, 


il rit, 
ils rient 


H- Je riais, 
nous riions, 


tu riais, 
vous riiez, 


il riait, 
ils riaient. 


j- Je ris, 
nous rimes, 


tu ris, 
vous rites, 


il rit, 
ils rirent. 


l- Je rirai, 
nous rirons, 


tu riras, 
vous rirez, 


il rira, 
ils riront. 


■n- Je rirais, 
nous ririons, 


tu rirais, 
vous ririez, 


il rirait, 
ils riraient. 


■p- 

rions, 


ris, 
riez, 


qu'il rie, 
qu'ils rient. 


»q- Que je rie, 
que nous riions, 


que tu ries, 
que vous riiez, 


qu'il rie, 
qu'ils rient. 



OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 



157 



qu'il rit, 
qu'ils rissent. 



-s- Que je risse, que tu risses, 

que nous rissions, que vous rissiez, 

Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have* 
Conjugate after the same manner— 

Sou rire, to smile. Se rire de, to laugh at. 

The compound tenses of Se rire de, are conjugated with Etre. 



Rompre 



to break. 



-A- 


■ Rompre. 


Rompant. -e- 


■ Rompu. 


-F- 


Je romps, 
nous rompons, 


tu romps, 
vous rompez, 


il rompt, 
ils rompent. 


-H- 


Je rompais, 
nous rompions, 


tu rompais, 
vous rompiez, 


il rompait, 
ils rompaient. 


-J- 


Je rompis, 
nous rompimes, 


tu rompis, 
vous rompites, 


il rompit, 
ils rompirent. 


-L- 


Je romprai, 
nous romprons, 


tu rompras, 
vous romprez, 


il rompra, 
ils rompront. 


-N- 


Je romprais, 
nous romprions, 


tu romprais, 
vous rompriez, 


il romprait, 
ils rompraient. 


-P- 


rompons, 


romps, 
rompez, 


qu'il rompe, 
qu'ils rompent. 


-Q- 


Que je rompe, 
que nous rompions, 


que tu rompes, 
que vous rompiez, 


qu'il rompe, 
qu'ils rompent. 


-S- 


Que je rompisse, 
que nous rompissions, 


que tu rompisses, 
que vous rompissiez, 


qu'il rompit, 
qu'ils rompissent 



The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 
Conjugate after the same manner — 

Cor rompre, to corrupt. Inter rompre, to interrupt. 



Suivre 



to follow. 



. 



-a- Suivre. 


-c- Suivant. 


-E- Suivi. 


-F- Je suis, 


tu suis, 


il suit, 


nous suivons, 


vous suivez, 


ils suivent. 


-H- Je suivais, 


tu suivais, 


il suivait, 


nous suivions, 


vous suiviez, 


ils suivaient 


-j- Je suivis, 


tu suivis, 


il suivit, 


nous suivimes, 


vous suivites, 


ils suivirent. 


o 







158 IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPEESONAL VERBS 



-L- 


Je suivrai, 


tu suivras, 


il suivra, 




nous suivrons, 


vous suivrez, 


ils suivront. 


-N- 


Je suivrais, 


tu suivrais, 


il suivrait, 




nous suivrions, 


vous suivriez, 


ils suivraient. 


-F- 




suis, 


qu'il suive, 




suivons, 


suivez, 


qu'ils suivent. 


~d- 


Que je suive, 


que tu suives, 


qu'il suive, 




que nous suivions, 


que vous suiviez, 


qu'ils suivent. 


-S- 


Que je suivisse, 


que tu suivisses, 


qu'il suivit, 




que nous suivissions, 


que vous suivissiez, 


qu'ils suivissent. 



The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 
Conjugate after the same manner — - 
Pour suivre, to pursue, to prose- I S'en suivre, to follow, to 

[cute. J [result. 

This last verb is only used in the third person singular of 
every tense. 





Traire to milk. 


-a- Traire. 


-c- Trayant. 


-E- Trait. 


-F- Je trais, 

nous trayons, 


tu trais, 
vous trayez, 


il trait, 
ils traient. 


-H- Je trayais, 
nous trayions, 


tu trayais, 
vous trayiez, 


il tray ait, 
ils trayaient. 


-J- 


(none) 




-L- Je trairai, 
nous trairons, 


tu trairas, 
vous trairez, 


il traira, 
ils trairont. 


-N- Je trairais, 
nous trairions, 


tu trairais, 
vous trairiez, 


il trairait, 
ils trairaient. 


-p- 

trayons, 


trais, 
trayez, 


qu'il traie, 
qu'ils traient. 


-d- Que je traie, que tu traies, 
que nous trayions, que vous trayiez, 


qu'il traie, 
qu'ils traient. 


-s- 


(none) 





The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 
Conjugate after the same manner — 



Abs traire, to abstract. 

At traire, to attract, to entice, 

Dis traire, to distract, to divert. 

Ex traire, to extract. 

Ren traire, to fine draiv. 1 

Re traire, to redeem an estate, 

Se soustraire d, is conjugated with Etre, to be. 



Sous traire, to subtract, to hide, 
[to conceal, to take away. 

Se sous traire a, to avoid, to 
[escape, to withdraw one's 
[self from. 



OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 



159 



Vaincre 



to vanquish, to conquer. 



* 



-a- Vaincre. 

-F- Je vaincs, 

nous vainquons, 

-H- Je vainquais, 
nous vainquions, 

Je vainquis, 
nous vainquimes, 

Je vaincrai, 
nous vaincrons, 

- Je vaincrais, 
nous vaincrions, 



-a. 



vainquons, 

■ que je vainque, 
que nous vainquions, 



-c- Vainquant. 

tu vaincs, 
vous vainquez, 

tu vainquais, 
vous vainquiez, 

tu vainquis, 
vous vainquites, 

tu vaincras, 
vous vaincrez, 

tu vaincrais, 
vous vaincriez, 

vaincs, 
vainquez 

que tu vainques, 
que vous vainquiez, 



-E- Vaincu. 



il vainc, 

ils vainquent. 

il vainquait, 
ils vainquaient. 

il vainquit, 
ils vainquirent. 

il vaincra, 
ils vaincront. 

il vaincrait, 
ils vaincraient. 

qu'il vainque, 
qu'ils vainquent. 

qu'il vainque, 
qu'ils vainquent. 



Que je vainquisse, que tu vainquisses, qu'il vainquit, 

que nous vainquissions, que vous vainquissiez, qu'ils vainquissent. 

The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 
Conjugate after the same manner — 

Con vaincre, to convince. 



Vivre 



to live. 






-a- Vivre. 


-c- Vivant. 


-E- Vecu. 


-F- Je vis, 

nous vivons, 


tu vis, 
vous vivez, 


il vit, 
ils vivent. 


-H- Je vivais, 
nous vivions, 


tu vivais, 
vous viviez, 


il vivait, 
ils vivaient. 


-J- Je vecus, 

nous v£cumes, 


tu vecus, 
vous v£cutes, 


il v£cut, 
ils vScurent. 


-L- Je vivrai, 
nous vivrons, 


tu vivras, 
vous vivrez, 


il vivra, 
ils vivront. 


-N- Je vivrais, 
nous vivrions, 


tu vivrais, 
vous vivriez, 


il vivrait, 
ils vivraient. 


-p- 

vivons, 


vis, 
vivez, 


qu'il vive, 
qu'ils vivent* 



M 



160 



ALPHABETICAL LIST OF VERBS, &C. 



-d- Que je vive, 
que nous vivions, 



que tu vives, 
que vous viviez, 



-s- Que je vecusse, que tu vecusses, 

que nous vecussions, que vous vecussiez, 



qu'il vive, 
qu r ils vivent. 

qu'il vecut, 
qu'ils vecussent. 



The Compound Tenses are conjugated with Avoir, to have. 
Conjugate after the same manner — 

Re vivre, to revive. Sur vivre, to survive. 



Alphabetical List of Verbs, that form the Compound Tenses 
with etre ; or sometimes with avoir, and sometimes with etre. 

1. There are in the French language about six hundred 
neuter verbs, which, like the active verbs, take the auxiliary 
verb avoir to have, to form their compound tenses. The only 
exceptions are the following: of which some take etre, and 
some take either etre or avoir, according to the sense in 
which the verb is to be employed. 

% e put after seme of the following verbs indicates that 
t ley form their compound tenses in French, with itre to be, 
a. though, perhaps, conjugated with avoir to have, in English : 
a, e, put after some of the following verbs, indicate that they 
sometimes form their compound tenses with avoir to have, and 
sometimes with etre to be. 

3. Those verbs marked a, e, take avoir when they are 
meant to express the action, thus : 

Monsieur A... a demeure a Paris. 
Mr. A... has lived in Paris. 

4. They take etre when they are meant to express the 
state, thus : 

Monsieur A... est demeure a Paris pour ses affaires. 
Mr. A... has remained in Paris for his business. 



Aborder, a, e, to land. 

accoucher, a, e, to bring forth. 

accourir, a, e, to run to. 

accroitre, «, e, to increase. 

aller, e, to go. 



apparaitre, a, e, to appear. 
arriver, e, to arrive, to happen 

avenir, e, to happen, to chance 

cesser, a, e, to cease, to leave off. 

changer, a, e, to change. 



ALPHABETICAL LIST OF VERBS, &C. 



161 



convenir, a, e *, 
•iroitre, a t, 
decamper, a, e, 

-leceder, e, 
lechoir, a, e, 
Jecroitre, a, £, 
lemeurer, a, e, 
iescendre, a, e, f 

Jevenir, £, 
disconvenir, e, 
disparaitre, a, e, 
echapper, a, e, 
ichoir, e, 

echouer, a, e, 

eclore, e, 

embellir, a, £, 
empirer, «, e, 

entrer, a, £, t 

expirer, a, £, 
intervenir, e, 
mesavenir, e, 
monter, a, e, f 

mourir, e, 



io /aZZ. 

to agree, to suit, to 
to grow. \become. 
to decamp, to run 

away, 
to die, to decease, 
to decay, 
to decrease, 
to remain, to stay, 
to come down, to go 

down, to descend, 
to become, 
to deny, to disown, 
to disappear. 
to escape. 
to become due, to fall 

to the lot of. 
to run aground, to 

miscarry, 
to be hatched, to blow, 

to blossom. 
to embellish, 
to make worse, to 

grow worse, 
to enter, to go in, to 

come in. 
to expire, 
to intervene, 
to succeed ill. 
to ascend, to go up, 

to come up. 
to die. 



naitre, c, 
partir, e, 
parvenir, i, 
passer, a, e, f 
perir, a, e, 
provenir, e, 

rajeunir, a, e. 
redescendre, a,e, 

redevenir, e, 
remonter, a, e, f 



reritrer, a, e, f 

repartir, e, ** 
repasser, a, e, 

ressortir, a, e, 
rester, a, e, 
re suiter, a, e, 
retomber, e, 
retourner, e, 
revenir, e, 

sortir, a, e, f 
survenir, e, 
tomber, e, 
vieillir, a 6, 
venir, e, 



to be born. 

to depart, to set off 

to attain, to reach. 

to pass. 

to perish. 

to proceed, to come 
from. 

to become young. 

to come down again, 
to go down again. 

to become again. 

to ascend again, to 
go up again, to 
come up again. 

to re-enter, to go in 
again. 

to set off again. 

to pass again, to re- 
pass. 

to go out again. 

to remain, to stay. 

to result, to follow. 

to fall again. 

to return, to go back. 

to come again, to 
come back again. 

to go out. 

to befall, to happen. 

to fall. 

to become old. 

to come. 



* Convenir to agree, takes avoir to have, and convenir to suit, to be- 
come, to Jit, to be expedient, to be proper, takes etre to be. 

t Several grammarians conjugate with avoir to have, the verbs which 
are marked thus f in the above list, only when they have a direct object :\ 
thus, nous avons passe le Jleuve we have crossed the river. They con- 
jugate the same verbs with etre to be, when they have no direct object, 
thus: La procession est passee the procession has past. 

However, most of the grammarians use these verbs as they do any 
other marked a, e, that is, they conjugate them with avoir to have, whether 
they have a direct objectt or not, if they are meant to express an action, 
and they conjugate them with etre to be, when they are meant to express 
the state. 

** Repartir to set off again, is conjugated with etre to be, but repartir 
to reply, is conjugated with avoir to have. 



| By direct object we understand, in French, the noun or pronoun which is governed 
in the objective case by the verb, and not by any preposition. 



162 IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNJPERSONAL VERBS. 

Alphabetical List of all the Irregular, Defective, and Uniper- 
sonal Verbs, of the four conjugations, with reference to the 
pages where they are to be found conjugated. 

However numerous the irregularities of an irregular verb 
may be, they never occur but in the simple tenses ; the com- 
pound tenses of all the verbs regular or irregular, defective or 
unipersonal, are all formed in the same manner ; that is, with 
the addition of avoir to have, or etre to be, to the participle 
past of the verb to be conjugated. 

Some verbs have the compound tenses conjugated with avoir, 
others with etre, others sometimes with avoir, sometimes with 
etre, according to the sense in which the verb is to be em- 
ployed. In the following list the letter & put after a verb in- 
dicates that the compound tenses of that verb are to be conju- 
gated in French with Hre, although perhaps conjugated with 
avoir to have, in English. And the letters a, &, indicate that 
the compound tenses of that verb are to be conjugated some- 
times with etre, sometimes with avoir. Those verbs after 
which neither e nor a, e, are put, have, of course, their com- 
pound tenses conjugated with avoir. 

A list of all the verbs, whose compound tenses are to be 
conjugated with etre, or sometimes with Ure and sometimes 
with avoir, is given, page 160. 

N. B. Any verb not found in this list, is regular, and must 
be conjugated on parler if the present of the infinitive ends 
with er ; on finir if it ends with ir ; on recevoir if it ends with 
evoir ; and on rendre if it ends with re. 

*#* Some verbs, although regular, have been put in this list of irregular 

verbs, in order to call the attention of the learner to some peculiarities con- 
cerning these verbs. 

A 

Abattre . ... to pull down, to throw down, to fell . battre . . 141 

s'abattre, e . . . to fall down battre . . 141 

aborder, a, e . . to land (see page 160) parler . . 38 

absoudre . ... to absolve resoudre . 155 

s'abstenir, e . . to abstain, to refrain tenir . . 132 

abstraire . ... to abstract traire . . 158 

accoucher, a, e .to bring forth (see page 160) . . . parler . . 38 

accourir, a, e . . to run to, to hasten to (see page 160.) courir . . 126 

accroire . ... to make one believe croire . . 145 

accroitre, a, e . . to increase, to accrue, to augment (see 

page 160) croitre . . 145 

s'accroitre, e . . to increase croitre . . 155 

accueillir . . . to welcome, to receive well, to receive 

kindly cueillir . . 127 

aeheter . ... to buy, to purchase (see page 49, arte 

97 & 99) parler . . 38 



IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND TJNIPERSONAL VERBS. 163 



achever 






acquerir .... 


adjoindre 




adinettre . . 




aliener . . 


. 


alleguer . . 




aller, e . . 




s'cn aller, e . 




aniener . . 




amonceler . 




apparaitre, a, e 


appartenir . . . 


appeler . . 




apprendre . 




appuyer . . 




arriver, e 




arriver, e 




assaillir . . 




asseoir . . 


• 


assoir . . . 




s'asseoir, e . 


. 


s'assoir, e . . 


, 


astreindre, . , 


. 


s'astreindre, e 




atteindre . . 




atteler . . 




attraire . . 


. 


avancer . . 




aveindre . . 


, 


avenir, e . . 




avoir . . . 




y avoir . . 




battre 


se battre, e . 




blasphemer . 




boire . . . 




bouillir 






bourreler 






braire 






bruiner 






bruire 






cacheter . . . . 


ceindre .... 


celer 


c£lebrer 







to finish, to accomplish (see page 49, 

art. 97 & 99) parler. 

to acquire acquerir 

to associate, to adjoin, to give an as- 
sistant, to give a colleague . . . joindre 

to admit, to allow of mettre . 

to alienate (see page 49, art. 97 & 99) parler . 

to allege (see page 49, art. 100) . . parler . 

to go aller 

to go away s'en aller 

to bring (see page 49, art. 97 & 99) . parler . 

to heap (see page 43, art. 91) , . . parler . 

to appear, to make one's appearance 

(see page 160) paraitre 

to belong to, to become well .... tenir . 

to call (see page 48, art. 91) ... parler . 

to learn, to hear of prendre 

to support (see page 50, art. 103) . parler . 

to happen, to chance, to fall out, to 

come to pass (see page 160) . . . neiger . 

to arrive (see page 160) parler . 

to assault assaillir 

to set something' or somebody down, to 

lay some thing or some body down s'asseoir 

idem s'assoir 

to sit down (one's self) s'asseoir 

to sit down {one's self) s'assoir 

to subject, to oblige, to compel, to force, 

to constrain joindre 

to confine one's self joindre 

to overtake, to reach, to catch . . . joindre 

to put to (see page 48, art. 91) . . parler . 

to allure, to attract, to entice . . . traire . 

to advance (see page 50, art. 101) . parler . 

to take out, to fetch out joindre 

to happen, to chance, to come to pass, 

to fall out (see page 160) . . . tenir . 

to have avoir . 

there to be y avoir 

B 

to beat, to strike battre . 

to fight, to combat battre . 

to blaspheme (see page 49, art. 100) . parler . 

to drink boire . 

to boil bouillir 

to torment (see page 48, art. 93) . . parler . 

to bray traire . 

to drizzle neiger . 

to roar, to make a great noise, to 

rustle, to rattle reduire 

C 

to seal (see page 49, art. 95) . . . parler . 

to gird, to encompass joindre 

to conceal (see page 49, art. 100) . . parler . 

to celebrate (see page 49, art. 100) . parler . 
2 Q 



155 



38 

149 

38 

38 



164 IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS. 



cesser, a, e . 

chanceler 
changer, a, e 
choir, e . . 
circonscrire . 
circonvenir . 

clore . . . 

colleter . . 
combattre . 
commettre . 
comparaitre 
complaindre 
complaire . 
se complaire, e 
comprendre 

compromettre 
se compromettre, e 
conclure . 
concourir 
eonduire . 

confire . 

congeler . 

conjoindre 

connaitre 

conquerir 

consentir 

construire 

contenir 

se contenir, 

contraindre 

contredire 
contrefaire 

contrevenir 
convaincre 
convenir, a. e 



coqueter . 
corrompre 
coudre , 
courir 
couvrir . 
craindre . 
croire . . 
se croire, c 
croitre, a, e 

cueillir . . 
cuirc . . . 

debattre . . 
se debattre, 6 



to cease, to leave off, to discontinue, 
(see page 160) 

to stagger (see page 48, art. 91) . . 

to change (see p. 160 & 59, art. 102) 

to fall (see page 160) 

to circumscribe 

to circumvent, to deceive, to delude, to 
cozen 

to shut, to close 

to collar (see page 49, art. 97 & 99) . 

to Jight, to combat 

to commit 

to appear, to give evidence .... 

to complain to 

to humour, to please, to comply . . 

to delight, to lake delight in . . . 

to understand, to include, to compre- 
hend, to contain, to inclose . 

to compromise, to expose .... 

to expose one's self 

to conclude (see page 51, art. 104) . 

to concur 

to conduct, to lead, to carry, to take a 
person to a place 

to preserve, to pickle 

to congeal (see page 48, art. 93) . . 

to conjoin . '. , 

to know, to be acquainted with . . 

to conquer, to vanquish 

to consent, to agree 

to construct, to build 

to contain, to hold 

to refrain 

to constrain, to force, to compel, to 



to contradict 

to counterfeit, to imitate, to mimic, 

to forge, 

to infringe, to act contrary to . . . 

to convince, to persuade 

to suit, to fit, to become, to agree, to be 

expedient, to Z>e^roper(seepagel60) 
to coquet (see page 49, art. 97 & 99 . 

to corrupt 

to sew, to stitch 

to run, to hunt 

to cover, to shelter 

to fear, to be apprehensive, to be afraid 

to believe, to think 

to rely upon one's own judgment 
to grow, to increase, to augment (see 

page 160) 

to gather, to pick up, to collect . . 
to cook, to bake, to smart .... 



D 



to debate . 
to struggle 



parler 
parler 
parler 
choir 



tenir 

clore 

parler 

battre 

mettre 

paraitre 

joindre 

plaire . 

plaire . 

prendre 
mettre . 
mettre . 
conclure 



reduire 

confire . 

parler . 

joindre 

paraitre 

acquerir 

sentir . 

reduire 

tenir 

tenir 

joindre 
dire . 

faire 
tenir 
vaincre 

tenir . 
parler . 
rompre . 
coudre . 
courir . 
ouvrir . 
joindre. 
croire . 
croire . 

croitre . 
cueillir . 
reduire 

battre . 
battre , 



IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS. 165 



deeacheter 
decamper. a 
deceder, e, 
deceler . 
dechoir, e, 

declore . 
decolleter 

deconfire 
deconstruire 
decoudre 
decouvrir 
decrire . 
decroire . 
decroitre, a, 
decuire . 
dedire 
se dedire, e, 
deduire . 
defaillir . 
defaire . 
se deiaire, e 

degeler . 
dejoindre 
dementir 
se dementir, e 

demettre 

se demettre, e 

demeurer, a ; e 
demouvoir . 
departir . . 

se departir, e 
depecer . . 
depeindre . 
depiaire . . 
se depiaire, e 
depourvoir 
deprendre . 
deprevenir 
derompre 
desapprendre 
descendre, a, 6 

desservir 

deteindre . 
deteler . . 
detenir . . 
detruire . . 
se detruire, e 

devenir e . 



to unseal (see page 49. art. 95) . . parler . . 38 

to decamp, to run away (see page 160) parler . . 38 

to die (see page 160 & p. 49, art. 100) parler . . 38 

to betray, to detect (see p. 49, art. 100) parler . . 38 
to decay, to hare fallen from, to hare 

abated from dechoir . 136 

to unclose clore . . 143 

to uncover the neck (see page 49, art. 

97 & 99) parler . . 38 

to defeat totally co-nnre . . 143 

to take to pieces ,to disunite, to analyze reduire . 155 

to rip coudre . - 144 

to discover, to uncover ouvrir . . 130 

to describe, to depict ecrire . . 147 

to disbelieve croire . . 145 

to decrease, to become less, (p. 160) croitre . . 145 

to render syrup more liquid . . . reduire . 155 

to disown, to unsay dire . . . 146 

to recant, to retract dire . . . 146 

to deduct, to take from reduire . 155 

to fail, to faint, to swoon, to decay . faillir . . 128 

to undo, to defeat faire . . 148 

to part with, to get rid of to rid one's 

self of .'.... faire . . 148 

to thaw (see page 48, art. 93) . . . neiger . . 123 

to disjoin joindre . 149 

to contradict, to belie, to give the lie . sentir . . 130 
to belie one's self, to contradict one's 

self ; sentir . . 130 

to disjoint, to put out of joint . . . mettre . . 150 
to resign, to have put out of joint one's 

wrist or ankle mettre . . 150 

to dwell, to live, to inhabit (p. 160) . parler . . 38 

to cause one to desist mouvoir . 136 

to distribute, to divide, to share, to 

allot sentir . . 130 

to desist, to give up, to swerve . . . sentir . . 130 

to carve (see page 49, art, 97 & 99) . parler . . 38 

to describe joindre . 149 

to displease plaire . . 153 

to be displeased with plaire . . 153 

to deprive, to leave destitute . . . pourvoir . 137 

to loosen, to disengage prendre . 154 

to unprepossess tenir . . 132 

to break down rompre . 157 

to unlearn .......... prendre . 154 

to descend, to come down, to go down 

(see page 160) vendre . . 78 

to clear a table, to take away, to do an 

ill office to servir . . 131 

to discolour joindre . 149 

to unteam, to unyoke (p. 48, art. 91) parler . . 38 

to detain, to keep tenir . . 132 ; 

to destroy, to annihilate reduire . 155/* 

to kill one's self to decay, to fall to * 

ruin reduire . 155 

to become, to become of (see page 160) tenir . . 132 



166 IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND TJNIPERSONAL VERBS. 



devetir . . 
se devetir, e 

dire . . . 
disconvenir, e 
discourir . . 
disjoindre . 
disparaitre, a, e 
dissoudre . 
se dissoudre, e 
distraire . . 

dormir . . 



s'ebattre, e . . 

6bouillir . . . 
echapper, a, e . 
echoir. e . . . 



eclairer . . 
echouer, a, e 

eclore, e . . 

econduire . 

ecrire . . . 
elire . . . 
embattre 
embellir, a, e 
s'emboire, e 
emettre . . 
emmener 
emoudre . . 
emouvoir 
s'emoirvoir . 
empirer, a, e 
employer . 
empreindre . 
enceindre . 
enclovre . . 
encourir . . 
endormir 
s'endormir, e 
enduire . . 
enfriendre . 
s'enfuir, e . 
enjoindre . 
s ; enquerir, e 
entreluire . 
s'entremettre, e 
entrer, a, e . 
entreprendre 
cntretenir . 



to strip, to undress vetir . 

to divest one's self, to leave off part 

of one's clothes vetir . 

to say, to tell dire 

to deny, to disown (see page 160) . tenir . 

to discourse, to talk about .... courir . 

to disjoin . . joindre 

to disappear (see page 160) . . . paraitre 

to dissolve, to melt, to break up . . resoudre 

to dissolve, to be dissolved .... resoudre 
to distract, to divert, to amuse, to take 

from traire . 

to sleep dormir . 

E 

to take one's pleasure, to make merry, 

to be merry battre . 

to boil away bouillir 

to escape (see page 160) parler . 

to chance, to happen, to fall out, to 
fall to, to expire, to be due, to fall 

due (see page 160) echoir . 

to lighten neiger . 

to run aground, to miscarry, (see 

page 160) parler . 

to come to life, to be hatched, to bios- 

som, to open, to blow (see page 160) eclore . 
to refuse, to discard in a polite man- 
ner, to refuse delicately .... reduire 

to write ecrire . 

to elect, to choose ....... lire . . 

to lay the tire of a wheel . . . . battre . 

to embellish (see page 160) .... finir 

to imbibe, to soak in boire . 

to express, to set forth mettre . 

to take away (see p. 49, art. 97 & 99) parler . 

to whet, to sharpen, to grind knives . moudre 

to move, to stir up, to excite . . . mouvoir 

to be moved, to be concerned . . . mouvoir 

to make worse, to grow worse (p. 160) parler . 

to employ, (see p. 50, art. 103) . . parler . 

to imprint, to stamp joindre 

to enclose, to encompass ..... joindre 

to surround, to enclose clore . 

to incur courir . 

to cause to sleep, to lull asleep . . . dormir . 

to fall asleep dormir . 

to plaster, to do over reduire 

to transgress, to infringe, to violate joindre 

to run away fuir . . 

to enjoin joindre 

to inquire . acquerir 

to shine a little reduire 

to interpose, to meddle mettre . 

to enter, to come in, to go in (p. 160) parler , 

to undertake prendre 

to entertain, to maintain, to keep up tenir . 



133 

133 
146 
132 
126 
149 
152 
155 
155 

158 
127 



141 
125 

38 



136 
123 

38 

147 

155 
147 

149 
141 

54 
142 
150 

38 
151 
136 
136 

38 

38 
149 
149 
143 
126 
127 
127 
155 
149 
128 
149 
124 
155 
150 

38 
154 
132 



IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS. 167 



s'entretenir, e 
entr'ouir . . 
entrevoir 
s'entrevoir, e 
entr'ouvrir 
envoyer . 
Spreindre 
s'eprendre, e 
Squivaloir 
esperer . 
essayer . 
eteindre . 
etinceler 
etiqueter 
£tre . . 
etreindre 
exclure . 
expirer, a, e 
extraire . . 



faillir . . 






faire . . 






falloir . . 






feindre . 






ficeler 






fleurir 






forcloffe . 






forfaire . 






frire . . 






fuir . . 






geindre . 
geler . . 






gesir . . 






grasseyer 
greler . . 
gresiller . 






hair 


harceler . . . . 


hypothequer . . 


importer . 
induire . 






inquieter 






mscrire . 






s'inscrire, e 




, 


instruire . 






interdire . 






interrompre 
intervenir, e 




introduire 







to discourse with 

to hear imperfectly 

to glimpse at, to have a glimpse of . 

to see each other 

to open a little 

to send 

to squeeze out, to wring . . . . , 
to be smitten ....... 

to be equivalent 

to hope (see page 49, art. 100) . . . 
to try (see page 50, art. 103) . . , 
to extinguish, to put out . . . 
to sparkle (see page 48, art. 91) . 
to label (see page 49, art. 97 & 99) 

to be , 

to bend close, to tie close 

to exclude (see page 51, art. 104) . 
to expire (see page 160) .... 
to extract , 



to fail, to have like to 

to do, to make, to cause 

to be necessary (must) 

to feign, to dissemble, to pretend . . 
to tie with pack thread (y>. 48, art. 91) 
to bloom, to blossom to be prosperous, 

to flourish 

to debar 

to fail, to trespass 

to fry 

to run away, to fly, to flee, to avoid, 

to shun 

G 

to whine, to moan 

to freeze (see page 48, art. 93) . . 

to lie 

to lisp (see page 50, art. 103) . . . 
to hail (see page 49, art. 100) . . . 
to rime 

H 
to hate 

to torment (see page 48, art. 93) . . 

to mortgage (see page 49. art. 100) . 

I 

to matter 

to induce, to engage 

to make uneasy (see p. 49, art. 100) . 
to inscribe, to write down .... 
to enter one's name in a register , . 

to instruct, to teach 

to interdict, to forbid 

to interrupt 

to intervene (see page 160) .... 
to introduce 

2a 2 



tenir 


. 132 


ouir 


. 130 


voir 


. 140 


voir 


. 140 


ouvnr 


. 130 


envoyer . 123 


joindre 


. 149 


prendre . 154 


valoir 


. . 139 


parler 


. . 38 


parler 


. . 38 


joindre 


. 149 


parler 


. . 38 


parler 


. . 38 


etre 


. . 24 


joindre 


. 149 


conclure . 143 


parler 


. . 38 


traire 


. . 158 


faillir 


r . 128 


faire 


. . 148 


falloir 


. . 136 


joindre 


. 149 


parler 


. . 38 


fleurir 


. . 128 


clore 


. . 143 


faire 


. . 148 


frire 


. . 148 



fuir . 



128 



joindre 


149 


neiger . 


123 


gesir . 


. 129 


parler . 


38 


neiger . 


123 


neiger . 


123 


hair . 


129 


parler . 


. 38 


parler . 


38 


neiger . 


123 


reduire 


155 


parler . 


38 


ecnre . 


147 


ecrire . 


147 


reduire 


155 


dire 


146 


rompre 


157 


tenir . 


132 


reduire 


155 



168 IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIFERSONAL VERBS. 



jeter . . 
se jeter, e 
joindre . 
se joindre, i 



lecher 
lire . 
luire . 



to throve to cast (see page 49, art. 95) 
to cast one's self (see page 49, art. 95) 

to join, to unite 

to unite 



to lick (see p. 49, art. 100) . 

to read 

to shine, to glitter, to sparkle 



maintenir . . 
se maintenir, e 
malfaire . . . 
maudire . . . 
meconnaitre . 

se meconnaitre, e 
mecroire . . 
medire . . 
mefaire . . 
mener . . 
mentir . . 
se meprendre, 
mesavenir, e 
mesoffrir 
messeoir . . 
mettre . . 
monter, a, e 
moudre . . 
mourir, e 
se mourir, e 
mouvoir . . 
se mouvoir, e 



naitre, e 
negliger 
neiger , 
niveler 
nuire . 



obtenir 
offrir . 



s'offrir, 6 
oindre 
omettre . 
ouir . . 
ouvrir 

naitre 
se paitre . 
parfaire . 



M 

to maintain, to keep up .... . 

to keep up 

to do mischief 

to curse 

to disown, to mistake, to neglect, to 

forget, not to know 

to forget one's self 

to disbelieve 

to slander, to speak ill of . . . . 

to misdo, to do wrong 

to lead, to take fo (p. 49, art. 97 & 99) 

to lie, to tell a lie 

to mistake 

to succeed ill (see page 1 60) . . . 

to underbid 

to be unbecoming 

to put, to place 

to mount, to ascend, to go up (p. 160) 

to grind {grain) 

to die (see page 160) 

to be dying 

to move, to stir 

to move 

N 
to be born (see page 160) . . 
to neglect (see page 50, art. 102) 

to snow 

to level (see page 48, art. 91) . 
to hurt, to do an ill office . . 

O 

to obtain 

to offer, to propose, to present a person 

with 

to offer one's self, or itself .... 

to anoint 

to omit 

to hear 

to open 



parler . 


. 38 


parier . 


. 38 


joindre 


. 149 


joindre 


. 149 


parler . 


. 38 


lire , . 


. 149 


reduire 


. 155 


tenir . 


. 132 


tenir . 


. 132 


faire 


. 148 


dire . . 


. 146 


paraitre 


. 152 


paraitre 


. 152 


croire . 


. 145 


dire . . 


. 146 


faire . 


. 148 


parler . 


. 38 


sentir . 


. 130 


prendre 


. 154 


tenir . 


. 132 


ouvrir . 


. 130 


seoir . 


» 139 


msttre . 


. 150 


parler . 


. 38 


moudre 


. 151 


mourir . 


. 129 


mourir . 


. 129 


mouvoir 


. 136 


mouvoir 


. 136 


naitre . 


. 151 


parler . 


. 38 


neiger . 


. 123 


parler . 


. 38 


reduire 


. 155 



tenir 



132 



to graze, to feed . . 
to feed upon . . . . 
to perfect, to complete 



ouvrir . 


130 


ouvrir . 


130 


joindre 
mettre . 


149 
150 


ouir 


130 


ouvrir . 


130 


paitre . 
paitre . 
faire 


152 
152 

148 



IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS. 



169 



paraitre . 
parcourir 
partir, a, e 

parvenir, e 
passer, a, e 
payer . . 
peindre . 
peler . . 
penetrer . 
perir, a, e 
permettre 
plaindre . 
se plaindre, 
plaire . . 
pleuvoir . 
poindre . 
posseder . 
poursuivre 
pourvoir . 



se pourvoir, e 
pouvoir . . 

predire . . 

prelire . . 

prendre . . 

prescrire . . 
se prescrire, e 

pressentir . 
prevaloir 

se prevaloir, e 

prevenir . . 



prevoir . 
produire . 
se produire, 
projeter . 
promettre 
se promettre. 
promouvoir 
proscrire . 
provenir, e 



querir 



rabattre . . 

se rabattre, e 
racheter . . 
rajeunir, a, e 
rapiecer . . 



to appear, to seem 

to run over, to go through .... 

to set out, to go away, to depart (see 
page 160) . 

to arrive, to attain, to reach (p. 160) 

to pass (see page 160) 

to pay (see page 50, art. 103) . . . 

to paint, to describe 

to peal (see page 48, art. 93) . . . 

to penetrate (see p. 49, art. 100) . . 

to perish (see page 160) 

to permit, to allow 

to pity 

to complain 

to please 

to rain 

to dawn, to shoot forth, to peep . . 

to possess (see page 49, art. 100) . . 

to pursue, to prosecute 

to provide, to furnish with, to supply 
with 

to 'provide one's self 

to be able, to can, to be at liberty to, 
may 

to foretell, to predict ...... 

to read over previously 

to take 

to prescribe, to order, to command . 

to lose by prescription 

to foresee, to have a foresight of . . 

to prevail, to predominate, to be pre- 
valent 

to take advantage, to glory in, to 
p-ride in 

to anticipate, to prevent, to prejudice, 
to prepossess, to forewarn . . . 

to foresee 

to produce, to bring forth .... 

to put one^s self forward .... 

to project (see page 49, art. 95) . . 

to promise 

to hope for 

to promote, to advance 

to proscribe, to banish, to outlaw . . 

to proceed from, to come from (p. 160) 

a 

to go and fetch, to send for, to come 
for 

ft 

to abate, to beat down again, to bring 

down 

to turn about 

to buy again (see p. 49, art. 97 & 99) 
to become young ....... 

to piece (see page 49, art. 100) . . 



paraitre . 


152 


counr . . 


126 


sentir . . 


130 


tenir . . 


132 


parler . . 


38 


parler . . 


38 


joindre 


149 


parler . . 


38 


parler . . 


38 


finir . . 


54 


mettre . . 


150 


joindre 


149 


joindre 


149 


plaire . . 


153 


pleuvoir . 


137 


poindre . 


154 


parler . . 


38 


suivre . 


157 


pourvoir 


137 


pourvoir 


137 


pouvoir 


138 


dire 


146 


lire . . 


149 


prendre 


154 


ecnre . 


147 


ecnre . 


147 


sentir . 


130 


valoir . 


139 


valoir . 


139 


tenir . 


132 


prevdhr 


. 141 


reduire 


. 155 


reduire 


. 155 


parler . 


. 38 


mettre . 


. 150 


mettre . 


. 150 


mouvoir 


. 136 


ecnre . 


. 147 


tenir . 


. 132 



acquenr 



124 



batlre . 


141 


battre . 


141 


parler . 


38 


finir 


54 


parler . 


38 



170 IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNJPERSONAL VERBS. 



rappeler . 
rapprendre 
rasseoir . 

se rasseoir, i 
ratteindre 
ravoir 
rebattre . 
reboire . 
rebouillir 
recacheter 
receler . 

rechoir . 
reclure . 
reconduire 
reconnaitre 



se reconnaitre, e . 
reconquerir . 
reconstruire 

reeoudre . . 

recourir . . 

recouvrir . . 

recrire . . 
recroitre 
recueillir 
se recueillir, e 

recuire . . 

redefaire . . 
redescendre, a, 
redevenir, e 
redire 
redormir . 
reduire . 
se reduire, e 
refaire 
se refaire, e 
reneurir . 
refrire 
regeler . 

regler . . 
regner . 
remtegrer 
rejoindre 
relire . . 
reluire . 
remettre . 



se remettre, e" . 
s'en remettre, e 
remoudre . . 



to recall (see page 48, art. 91) . . 

to learn again 

to set down again some body or some 
thing at his or its place .... 

to sit down again 

to catch again, to overtake again . . 

to have again 

to beat again 

to drink again 

to boil again 

to seal again (see p. 49, art. 95) . . 

to secrete, to receive stolen goods (see 
page 49, art. 100) 

to fall again 

to shut up , 

to conduct back again 

to recognize, to know again, to ac- 
knowledge, to confess, to be thank- 
ful, to reconnoiter 

to recognize one's self 

to reconquer 

to construct again, to rebuild, to build 
again 

to sew again . 

to have recourse, to run again , . 

to cover again . 

to write again, to write anew . . . 

to grow again 

to gather, to reap 

to recollect one's self 

to bake again, to boil again, to roast 
again, to do again 

to undo again 

to come down again (see page 160) . 

to become again (see page 160) . . 

to say again, to repeat, to tell again 

to sleep again 

to reduce 

to amount to, to be reduced to . . . 

to make again, to do over again . . 

to recover 

to blossom again, to flourish again . 

to fry again 

to freeze again (see page 48, art. 
93) 

to regulate (see page 49, art. 100) . 

to reign (see page 49, art. 100) . . 

to reinstate (see page 49, art. 100} . 

to join again, to rejoin 

to read over again 

to glitter, to shine, to sparkle . . . 

to remit, to set again, to replace, to 
deliver up, to put back, to put again, 
to recognise a person 

to recollect, to recover 

to refer a thing to somebody . . . 

to grind over again 



parler . 


38 


prendre 


154 


s'asseoir 


134 


s'asseoir 


134 


joindre 


. 149 


ravoir . 


134 


battre . 


. 141 


boire . 


. 142 


bouillir 


. 125 


parler . 


. 38 


parler . 


. 38 


choir . 


. 135 


conclure 


. 143 


reduire 


. 155 


paraitre 


152 


paraitre 


. 152 


acquerir 


. 124 


reduire 


155 


coudre . 


. 144 


counr . 


126 


ouvnr . 


. 130 


eenre . 


147 


croitre . 


• 145 


cueillir 


127 


cueillir 


127 


reduire 


, 155 


faire 


148 


vendre . 


132 


tenir . 


132 


dire 


146 


dormir . 


. 127 


reduire 


155 


reduire 


155 


faire . 


148 


faire . 


148 


fleurir . 


128 


frire . , 


148 


neiger . . 
parTer . 


123 


38 


parler . . 


38 


parler . 


38 


joindre 


149 


lire . . . 


149 


reduire . 


155 


mettre . . 


150 


mettre . . 


150 


mettre . . 


150 


moudre , 


151 



IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND TJNIPERSONAL VERBS. 171 



renaitre . . 

rendormir . 
se rendormir, 
renduire . . 
renouveler . 
rentraire 
rentrer, a, e . 
renvoyer 
repaitre . . 
se repaitre, e 
reparaitre . 
repartir, e . 
repartir . . 
repasser, a, e 
repeindre . 
se repentir, e 
reprendre . 

se reprendre 

reproduire . 
requerir . . 
resoudre . . 

se resoudre, e 

ressentir . . 

se ressentir, e 

ressortir, a, e 
se ressouvenir, 
rester, a, e . 
restreindre . 
resulter, a, e 
retenir . . 
se retenir, e 
retomber, e . 
retourner, e . 
retraire . . 
revaloir . . 
reveler . . 
revenir, e 

revetir . . 

se revetir, e . 

revivre . . 

revoir . . . 

lire . . . 
se rire, e 

rompre, . . 
se rompre, e 

rouvrir . . 



to ascend again, to mount again (see 

page 160) parler . . 38 

to revive, to be born again, to spring 

up again, to become alive again . naitre . . 151 

to lull to sleep again dormir . . 127 

to fall asleep again dormir . . 127 

to plaster anew reduire . 155 

to renew (see page 48, art. 91) . . parler . . 38 

to darn traire . . 158 

to reenter (see page 160) .... parler . . 38 

to send back, to return envoyer . 123 

to feed paitre . . 152 

to thirst after, to delight in ... paitre . . 152 

to reappear, to appear again . . . paraitre . 152 

to set off again (see page 161) . . sentir . . 130 

to reply, to answer (see page 161) . sentir . . 130 

to pass again, to repass (see p. 160) parler . . 38 

to paint again joindre . 149 

to repent sentir . . 130 

to retake, to take again, to correct, to 

chide, to resume prendre . 154 

to recollect one's self, to correct one's 

self prendre . 154 

to reproduce reduire . 155 

to request, to beg, to require, to exact acquerir . 124 
to resolve, to solve, to decide, to un- 
riddle resoudre . 155 

to resolve, to be resolved, to change, 

to turn into resoudre . 155 

to resent, to be sensible of to feel still, 

to have a deep sense of ... . sentir . . 130 
to feel still, to have remains of, to 

have suffered by sentir . . 130 

to go out again (see page 160) . . sentir . . 130 

to remember, to recollect .... tenir . . 132 

to remain, to stay (see page 160) . . parler . . 38 

to restrain, to confine jjindre . 149 

to follow, to result (see page 160) . . neiger . . 123 

to retain, to detain, to hold back . . tenir . . 132 

to forbear, to stop tenir . . 132 

to fall again (see page 160) . . . parler . . 38 

■to return, to go back (see page 160) . parler . . 38 

to redeem an estate traire . . 158 

to return like for like, to repay . . valoir . . 139 

to reveal, to disclose (p. 49, art. 100) . parler . . 38 
to come back, to return, to come again 

(see page 160) tenir . . 132 

to give other clothes, to clothe, to 

dress, to invest vetir . . 133 

to put on one's clothes vetir . . 133 

to revive vivre . . 159 

to see again ........ , voir . . 140 

to laugh rire . . . 156 

to laugh at rire . . . 15& 

to break ...... ..,. . . . rompre . 157 

to break . -\ . . rompre . 157 

to reopen, to open again .... ouvrir . . 130 



172 IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS. 



saluer . . . . 


satisfaire 


. . 


savoir . . 


. . 


secounr . . 


. 


se secourir, e 




seduire . . 




semer . . 




sentir . . 


. 


seoir . . . 




servir . . . 




se servir, e . 




severer . . . 




sortir, a, e . 




soudre . . 


. 


soufFrir . . 


. 


soumettre . 


, 


se soumettre, e 


. 


sourire . . 




souscnre . . 


. 


se souscrire, e . 


, 


soustraire . . 




se soustraire, e 


soutenir .... 


se soutenir, 6 . . 


se souvenir, e 


. 


subvenir . . 


# 


suffire . • v . 


. 


suivre . J 




s'en suivre, e 


. 


suracheter . 


. 


surcroitre . 


, 


surfaire . . 


, . 


surprendre . 


. . 


surseoir . . 


, 


survenir, e . 




survivre .... 


taire 


se taire, e . 




teindre . . 




tenir . . . 




se tenir, e . 




s'en tenir, e 




tomber, e . 




tonner . . 




traduire . . 




traire . . . 




transcrire . 





s 

to project, to jut out, to gush out, to 

leap assaillir 

to salute, to bow (see p. 51, art. 104) parler . 

to satisfy, to content, to comply with faire 

to know savoir . 

to succour, to assist, to help . . . courir . 

to help one another courir . 

to seduce, to bribe reduire 

to sow (see page 49, art. 97 & 99) . . parler . 

to feel, to smell sentir . 

toft, toft well, to become .... seoir . 

to serve, to wait upon, to be of use . servir . 

to use, to make use, to avail one's self servir . 

to wean (see page 49, art. 97 & 99) . parler . 

to go out (see page 160) sentir . 

to solve, to resolve resoudre 

to suffer, to allow, to undergo . . . ouvrir . 

to submit, to subdue, to conquer . . mettre . 

to submit, to yield, to give up . . . mettre . 

to smile rire . . 

to subscribe ecrire . 

to subscribe one's self ecrire . 

to subtract, to deduct, to hide, to con- 
ceal, to take away, to withdraw . traire . 

to avoid, to escape, to withdraw one's 

self traire . 

to maintain, to sustain, to support) to 

bear tenir . 

to stand up, to hold out tenir . 

to recollect, to remember, to remind . tenir . 

to relieve, to assist tenir 

to suffice, to be sufficient .... confire . 

to follow suivre . 

to follow from, to result suivre . 

to overpay (see p. 49, art. 97 & 99) . parler . 

to grow out croitre . 

to exact, to ask too much .... faire 

to surprize, to astonish, to deceive . prendre 

to supersede, to put off, to suspend . surseoir 

to befall, to happen, to come in unex- 
pectedly, to come upon (see p. 160) tenir . 

to survive , to outlive vivre . 

T 

to conceal, to keep secret plaire . 

to forbear talking, to keep silent, to 

hold one's tongue plaire . 

to die, to colour joindre 

to hold, to keep tenir . 

to stand, to hold one's self .... tenir . 

to abide by tenir . 

to fall (see page 160) parler . 

to thunder neiger . 

to translate, to bring to justice . . reduire 

to milk . . . . . ' traire . 

to transcribe ecrire . 



IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND UNIPERSONAL VERBS. 



173 



transmettre . 
tressaillir . 
trompeter . 



vaincre . 
valoir . t 
valoir mieux 
venir, e . 
vetir . . 
se vetir, e 
vieillir, a, e 
vivre . . 
voir . . 
se voir, e 
vouloir . 



to transmit, to convey mettre . 

to start up, to leap for assaillir 

to summon with the sound of the 

trurupet (see page 49, art. 97 & 99) parler . 

V 

to vanquish, to conquer, to surpass . vaincre 

to be worth valoir . 

to be better . valoir . 

to come (see page 160) tenir . 

to clothe, to dress . . . . . . . . vetir . 

to dress, to clothe one's self .... vetir . 

to become old (see page 160) . . . finir 

to live vivre . 

to see . voir 

to see one's self, to visit one another voir 
to be willing, to will, to wish, io wish 

for vouloir 



150 
125 

38 



159 
139 
139 
132 
133 
133 
54 
159 
140 
140 

141 



- -_/:W&^. 



mmsLu 



'W 



/..^•Mjwwvv,-':''. 



M^Wk/JjuU 



'^^W 



wa 



vw 






^ 



K'^;^V 









^l^^M44^^ 






'MOT' 



Deacidified using the Bookkeeper process. 
Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide 
Treatment Date: Sept. 2006 

PreservationTechnologies 

A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERVATION 

1 1 1 Thomson Park Drive 
Cranberry Township. PA 16066 
(724)779-2111 



<Z*iSiMM 



^WW^U 



'V\*W 






j^y^a 



d^uv^yw^^ 






<m -.c:^ 



sse^^^^m^^ 



,u**VJyU^u . 



LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 




003 11? 9312 ^ 






